Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
26 - Construction Agreements - HDR Engineering, Inc. - Bozeman On-Call 2025 TO3 Solar PWR
City of Bozeman Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Construction Documents Project Manual Issued for Construction September, 2026 HDR Project No. 10438546 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SEALS AND SIGNATURES 00 01 07 - 1 SECTION 00 01 07 SEALS AND SIGNATURES Owner Name: City of Bozeman Facility or Site Name: Bozeman Water Reclamation Facility Project Name: Bozeman On-Call 2025 TO3 Solar PWR Project or Contract Designation: 10438546 Engineer: HDR Engineering, Inc. Melvan E Morris III, PE License No. 72189 The seal and signature to the left applies to the following Specifications divisions and sections of this project manual: • Division 01 – All Sections. • Division 10 – All Sections. • Division 40 – All Sections Wally John Beck, PE License No. 75108 The seal and signature to the left applies to the following Specifications divisions and sections of this project manual: • Division 26 - All Sections • Division 48 – All Sections Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SEALS AND SIGNATURES 00 01 07 - 2 Elijah Molloy, PE License No. 75848 The seal and signature to the left applies to the following Specifications divisions and sections of this project manual: • Division 00 – All Sections • Division 03 – All Sections • Division 31 – All Sections • Division 32 – All Sections Engineer’s seal and signature does not apply to the documents that comprise Division 00, Bidding and Contracting Requirements. It is a violation of applicable laws and regulations governing professional licensing and registration for any person, unless acting under the direction of the licensed and registered design professional(s) indicated above, to alter in any way the Specifications in this project manual. END OF SEALS AND SIGNATURES Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 41 12 - NEGOTIATED COST SHEET 00 41 13 - SCHEDULE OF VALUES 00 45 31 - NONDISCRIMINATION AND EQUAL PAY AFFIRMATION 00 51 10 - NOTICE OF AWARD 00 52 13 - AGREEMENT FORM 00 61 13 - EJCDC C-610 PERFORMANCE BOND 00 61 13 - EJCDC C-615 PAYMENT BOND 00 63 13 - REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 65 00 - EJCDC C-550 NOTICE TO PROCEED 2018 00 72 13 - GENERAL CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-700—2018) 00 73 01 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 03 - FUNDING AGENCY SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR DOMESTIC CONTENT 00 73 46 - WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE 00 83 00 - CHANGE PROPOSAL REQUEST 00 94 00 - EJCDC C-940 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE 2018 00 94 10 - EJCDC C-941 CHANGE ORDER 2018 00 94 20 - EJCDC C-942 FIELD ORDER 2018 DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK 01 14 16 - COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 01 14 19 - USE OF SITE 01 22 00 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 29 73 - SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 76 - PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 31 26 - ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 35 73 - DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 41 24 - PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 01 41 26 - STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT 01 57 05 - TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 64 00 - OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS 01 71 23 - FIELD ENGINEERING 01 74 00 - CLEANING 01 75 00 - CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 36 - WARRANTIES 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 81 33 - CYBER SECURITY REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03 00 05 - CONCRETE 03 15 19 - ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 - IDENTIFICATION DEVICES DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 2 26 05 74 - SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY, AND SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY, AND ARC FLASH REPORT 26 08 13 - ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 09 13 - ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING 26 24 13 - SWITCHBOARDS 26 26 13 - PACKAGE POWER SUPPLY 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES 26 28 01 - LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 16.13 - ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16.16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 43 13 - SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 99 00 - PHOTOVOLTAIC MODULES 26 99 03 - INVERTERS 26 99 04 - METEOROLOGY STATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING 31 22 19 - FINISH GRADING 31 23 05 - EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 16.43 - TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 00 - FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 92 00 - SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING DIVISION 40 — PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS 40 61 13 - PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 21 - PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 43 - SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 63 43 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 44 - PV SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM 40 66 05 - NETWORK EQUIPMENT 40 67 00 - CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 68 63 - CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS DIVISION 48 — ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION 48 14 10 - PV SUPPORT STRUCTURES Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction NEGOTIATED COST SHEET 00 41 12 - 1 SECTION 00 41 12 NEGOTIATED COST SHEET Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Schedule of Values 1. Solar Array Area 2. P1 Connector 3. Point of Interconnection TOTALS Item Description Value Item Description Value **The contract documents depict different conductorconfigurations for the P1 feeder. Based on ourunderstanding of the proposed inverter configuration andsimilar SMA CORE1 installations, OnSite Energy has basedits pricing on the three-conductor configuration shown inthe duct bank schedule. If the final design requires afour-conductor configuration (shown on the Wire & Conduit Schedule), the Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly. 1.1 Project Management & General Requirements Includes geotechnical pull testing, racking structuralengineering, site surveying and the Solar Array Area'sallocated share of project management, engineeringcoordination, permitting, interconnection fees, surveying,utility locating, field supervision, freight, temporaryfacilities, jobsite safety, equipment rental, bonding and GRT.$169,306 1.2 Site Civil Construction SWPPP Implementation, underground trenching, equipmentpad construction, handhole installation, erosion control, hydroseeding, and site restoration.$144,650 1.3 Driven Pile & Racking Materials TerraSmart driven pile/racking materials, grounding/wiremanagement hardware $228,141 1.4 Foundation, Racking & Module Installation Pile install, racking install, solar panel install $143,520 1.5 Solar Panels Qcell 660W solar panels - Domestic Cells, Wafer, JunctionBox, Encapsulant $417,4451.6 Inverters SMA inverters and related inverter equipment $76,010 1.7 Solar Array Electrical BOS DC array wiring, conduit, grounding, disconnects,combiner/BOS materials within array area $58,265 1.8 Solar Array Electrical Installation Electrical labor for array wiring, conduit, terminations,labeling, testing, inverter installation and power outputs toAC combiner $91,752 1.9 Commissioning & Closeout Startup, commissioning, owner training, closeout docs $10,743 2.1 Project Management & General Requirements Includes P1 Connector's allocated share of projectmanagement, engineering coordination, permitting,interconnection fees, surveying, utility locating, fieldsupervision, freight, temporary facilities, jobsite safety,equipment rental, bonding and GRT.$52,340 2.2 Civil Construction Concrete duct bank, trench excavation (incl vac truck),asphalt removal and replacement, handhole installation,trench restoration, and associated civil work for the P1 feeder.$187,000 2.3 P1 Electrical BOS AC Feeder conduit, conductors, pull boxes, grounding,associated materials $159,153 2.4 P1 Electrical Installation Labor for installation of parallel feeder conduits withinconcrete duct bank spacers, conductor pulls, grounding, terminations, testing, coordination with civil contractor, andassociated electrical work.$118,237 Item Description Value 3.1 Project Management & General Requirements Includes POI's allocated share of project management, engineering coordination, permitting, interconnection fees,surveying, utility locating, field supervision, freight,temporary facilities,jobsite safety, equipment rental,bonding, and GRT.$50,159 3.2 POI Electrical Equipment / Switchgear Switchgear, interconnection equipment, protective devices,POI-specific electrical gear $146,685 3.3 Controls System Equipment MET controls equipment, programming, integration,controls testing $164,984 3.4 Non-Export and Control SystemsCommissioning & Labor MET controls labor, Panel design, PLC programming, SCADAprogramming, system testing, documentation, submittals,FAT, SAT, startup, training $134,625 3.5 POI Civil Construction Equipment pad construction $5,500 Area Value 1. Solar Array Area $1,339,8312. P1 Connector $516,7303. Point of Interconnection $501,953 Pile Refusal Remedy Contingency $100,000 Contingency $20,000 Solar Array Area Subtotal $1,339,831 P1 Connector Subtotal $516,730 Point of Interconnection Subtotal $501,953 Total Contract Price $2,478,514 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction NONDISCRIMINATION AND EQUAL PAY AFFIRMATION 00 45 31 - 1 SECTION 00 45 31 NONDISCRIMINATION AND EQUAL PAY AFFIRMATION OnSite Energy_(name of entity submitting) hereby affirms it will not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or because of actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability and acknowledges and understands the eventual contract will contain a provision prohibiting discrimination as described above and this prohibition on discrimination shall apply to the hiring and treatments or proposer’s employees and to all subcontracts. In addition, _OnSite Energy_____(name of entity submitting) hereby affirms it will abide by the Equal Pay Act of 1963 and Section 39-3-104, MCA (the Montana Equal Pay Act), and has visited the State of Montana Equal Pay for Equal Work “best practices” website, https://equalpay.mt.gov/BestPractices/Employers, or equivalent “best practices publication and has read the material. ______________________________________ Name and title of person authorized to sign on behalf of submitter Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generator Project EJCDC C-510 NOTICE OF AWARD 2018 00 51 10 - 1 NOTICE OF AWARD Date of Issuance: August 14, 2026 Owner: City of Bozeman Owner’s Project No.: WW155 Engineer: HDR Engineering Engineer’s Project No.: 10438546 Project: Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Contract Name: N/A Bidder: Onsite Energy Bidder’s Address: 1515 N. Rouse Ave, Bozeman, MT 59715 You are notified that the Owner has accepted your Price Proposal, presented as a Schedule of Values and transmitted to the Owner by email on July 28, 2026 for the above Contract, and that you are awarded a Contract for: The City of Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project, which includes constructing a complete solar power facility including but not limited to: inverters, PV panels, racking (including design), metering, weather station, data manager (master controller), provide electrical equipment, connections, conduit, wire, ductbanks, and appurtenances, provide no-export controls and shunt trip circuit breaker disconnect, provide all control panels, programming, and integration, provide HMI screens in ignition version 8.1.0. The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is $2,478,514.00. Contract Price is subject to adjustment based on the provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to those governing changes, Unit Price Work, and Work performed on a cost-plus-fee basis, as applicable. Five (5) unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement accompany this Notice of Award, and one copy of the Contract Documents accompanies this Notice of Award or has been transmitted or made available to Bidder electronically. ☐ Drawings will be delivered separately from the other Contract Documents. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of receipt of this Notice of Award: 1. Deliver to Owner five (5) counterparts of the Agreement, signed by Contractor. 2. Deliver with the signed Agreement(s) the Contract security (such as required performance and payment bonds) and insurance documentation, as specified in the General Conditions, Articles 2 and 6, as may be modified in the Supplemental Conditions. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified may cause Owner to annul this Notice of Award. Within 10 days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement, together with any additional copies of the Contract Documents as indicated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions. Owner: City of Bozeman By (signature): Name (printed): Chuck Winn Title: City Manager Copy: Engineer Docusign Envelope ID: 556B6884-B2C7-8022-818D-6E1ED827DC7DDocusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project 00 52 13 00 52 13 - 1 SECTION 00 52 13 AGREEMENT FORM THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the 28th day of _August__ in the year 2026, by and between CITY OF BOZEMAN, hereinafter called OWNER, and Onsite Energy hereinafter called CONTRACTOR. OWNER AND CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK. CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The project work is generally described as follows: The proposed work under this contract includes constructing a complete solar power facility including but not limited to: inverters, pv panels, racking (including design), metering, weather station, data manager (master controller), provide electrical equipment, connections, conduit, wire, ductbanks, and appurtenances, provide no-export controls and shunt trip circuit breaker disconnect, provide all control panels, programming, and integration, provide HMI screens in ignition version 8.1.0. The project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is generally described as follows: City of Bozeman WRF, Bozeman On-Call 2025 TO3 Solar PWR Article 2. CONTRACT TIME. 1.01 The Work shall be substantially completed within 365 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the General Conditions and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within 30 calendar days after substantial completion is issued. Final payment will be withheld until final completion and acceptance of the Work, as stipulated in this Agreement. 2.3 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence in this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not substantially complete within the time specified above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or arbitration proceeding, the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not substantially complete on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER five hundred dollars ($500.00) for each day that expires after the time specified herein until the Work is substantially complete. Article 3. CONTRACT PRICE. 3.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents the sum (subject to adjustment as provided in the Contract Documents) of Two Million, Four Hundred Seventy-Eight Thousand, Five Hundred Fourteen Dollars ($2,478,514.00). Article 4. PAYMENT PROCEDURES. CONTRACTOR shall submit applications for payment in accordance with the General Conditions. Applications for payment will be processed as provided in the General Conditions. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project 00 52 13 00 52 13 - 2 4.1 Progress Payments. OWNER will make progress payments monthly on account of the contract price on the basis of CONTRACTOR'S application for payment as recommended by ENGINEER. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values provided for in the General Conditions. 4.1.1 The OWNER may retain five (5) percent of the amount due the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the General Conditions and as outlined herein. 4.2 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the contract price as recommended by ENGINEER. Article 5. INTEREST. All monies not paid when due hereunder shall bear interest at the simple rate established by the Federal Cost of Money Rate commencing at the time of a claim. Article 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS. In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 6.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, locality, and with all local conditions and federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress or performance of the Work. 6.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which were relied upon by ENGINEER in the preparation of the drawings and specifications and which have been identified in the modifications to the General Conditions. 6.3 CONTRACTOR has made or caused to be made examinations, investigations and tests and studies of such reports and related data in addition to those referred to above as he deems necessary for the performance of the Work at the contract price, within the contract time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and no additional examinations, investigations, tests, reports or similar data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 6.4 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 6.5 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. 6.6 CONTRACTOR agrees that all hiring by CONTRACTOR of persons doing work on this project shall be on the basis of merit and qualifications. The CONTRACTOR will have a policy to provide equal employment opportunity in accordance with all applicable state and federal anti- discrimination laws, regulations, and contracts. The CONTRACTOR will not refuse employment to a person, bar a person from employment, or discriminate against a person in compensation or in a term, condition, or privilege of employment because of race, color, religion, creed, political ideas, sex, age, marital status, national origin, actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity, physical or mental disability, except when the reasonable demands of the position require an age, physical or mental disability, marital status or sex distinction. The CONTRACTOR shall be subject to and comply with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964; Section 140, Title 2, United States Code, and all regulations promulgated thereunder. CONTRACTOR represents it is, and for the term of this project will be, in compliance with the requirements of the Equal Pay Act of 1963 and Section 39-3-104, MCA (the Montana Equal Pay Act). Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project 00 52 13 00 52 13 - 3 CONTRACTOR must report to the City any violations of the Montana Equal Pay Act that CONTRACTOR has been found guilty of within 60 days of such finding for violations occurring during the term the construction agreement. CONTRACTOR shall require these nondiscrimination terms of its subcontractors providing services under the construction agreement. Article 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR are attached to this Agreement, made a part hereof and consist of the following: 7.1 This Agreement. 7.2 Exhibits to this Agreement (if any). 7.3 Performance Bond, and Payment Bond. 7.4 Negotiated Cost Sheet 7.5 Certificate(s) of Insurance. 7.6 General Conditions. 7.7 Supplementary Conditions. 7.8 Wage Rates. 7.9 Appendices 7.10 Domestic Content Acknowledgment. 7.11 Notice to Proceed. 7.12 Any modification, including Change Orders, duly delivered after execution of Agreement. 7.13 Any Notice of Partial Utilization. 7.14 Notice of Substantial Completion. 7.15 Notices of Final Completion and Acceptance. 7.16 Non-discrimination and equal pay affirmation form. 7.17 Drawings 7.18 Specifications There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 7. The Contract Documents may only be altered, amended or repealed by a modification (as defined in the General Conditions). Article 8. MISCELLANEOUS. 8.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in the General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 8.2 This Agreement and all of the covenants hereof shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR respectively and his partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives. Neither the OWNER nor the CONTRACTOR shall have the right to assign, transfer or sublet his interest or obligations hereunder without written consent of the other party. The Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project 00 52 13 00 52 13 - 4 OWNER reserves the right to withdraw at any time from any subcontractor where Work has proven unsatisfactory the right to be engaged in or employed upon any part of the Work. 8.3 In the event it becomes necessary for either party to this Agreement to retain an attorney to enforce any of the terms or conditions of this Agreement or to give any notice required herein, then the prevailing party or the party giving notice shall be entitled to reasonable attorney's fees and costs. 8.4 Any amendment or modifications of this Agreement or any provisions herein shall be made in writing and executed in the same manner as this original document and shall after execution become a part of this Agreement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement the day and year first above written. (CONTRACTOR) By ______________________ Title _____________________ (SEAL & ATTEST) _______________________ (JOINT VENTURE) By ______________________ Title _____________________ (SEAL & ATTEST) _______________________ CITY OF BOZEMAN (OWNER) By ______________________ (City Manager) APPROVED AS TO FORM: ______________________ (CITY ATTORNEY) (SEAL & ATTEST) _______________________ END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Owner/Partner XXXXXXXXXXX Acting City Manager LENDER'S LOSS PAYABLE PHONEAGENCY COMPANY(A/C, No, Ext): FAX E-MAIL (A/C, No):ADDRESS: SUB CODE: AGENCY CUSTOMER ID #: INSURED LOAN NUMBER POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE DATE EXPIRATION DATE THIS REPLACES PRIOR EVIDENCE DATED: LOCATION/DESCRIPTION COVERAGE / PERILS / FORMS AMOUNT OF INSURANCE DEDUCTIBLE NAME AND ADDRESS CONTINUED UNTIL TERMINATED IF CHECKED ADDITIONAL INSURED LOSS PAYEE MORTGAGEE LOAN # PERILS INSURED BASIC BROAD SPECIAL THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST NAMED BELOW. THIS EVIDENCE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST. SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. PROPERTY INFORMATION COVERAGE INFORMATION REMARKS (Including Special Conditions) CANCELLATION ADDITIONAL INTEREST ACORD 27 (2016/03)© 1993-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) CODE: AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 9/1/2026 (406) 587-5111 Scottsdale Insurance Company PO Box 4110 Scottsdale, AZ 85261 First West, Inc. P.O. Box 1800 Bozeman, MT 59771 (406) 587-9162 OnSite Energy, Inc. PO Box 727 Bozeman, MT 59771 Special Conditions: Builders Risk Coverage Form: $2,478,514 includes Earthquake $500,000 Sublimit. Deductible $10,000 All other Losses. Deductible $25,000 Earthquake. Equipment Breakdown Policy #FBP2387804 with The Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection and Insurance Company. $2,728,514. Deductible $25,000. City of Bozeman PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771-1230 HDAHL RBS0350209 8/25/2026 8/25/2027 hdahl@1stwestinsurance.com ONSIENE-01 X Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVEOFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? INSR ADDL SUBRLTRINSDWVD PRODUCER CONTACTNAME: FAXPHONE(A/C, No):(A/C, No, Ext): E-MAILADDRESS: INSURER A : INSURED INSURER B : INSURER C : INSURER D : INSURER E : INSURER F : POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXPTYPE OF INSURANCE LIMITS(MM/DD/YYYY)(MM/DD/YYYY) AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE EACH OCCURRENCE $ DAMAGE TO RENTEDCLAIMS-MADE OCCUR $PREMISES (Ea occurrence) MED EXP (Any one person)$ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER:GENERAL AGGREGATE $ PRO-POLICY LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGGJECT OTHER:$ COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $(Ea accident) ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person)$ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY (Per accident)$AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) $ OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ DED RETENTION$ PER OTH-STATUTE ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ If yes, describe under E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMITDESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y / N N / A (Mandatory in NH) SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:REVISION NUMBER: CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved.ACORD 25 (2016/03) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) $ $ $ $ $ The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 9/1/2026 (406) 587-5111 (406) 587-9162 14184 OnSite Energy, Inc. PO Box 727 Bozeman, MT 59771 15819 A 1,000,000 X Z83544 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 300,000 10,000 1,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000 1,000,000A X Z83544 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 3,000,000A Z83544 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 3,000,000 B 034702241 4/1/2026 4/1/2027 1,000,000 Y 1,000,000 1,000,000 A Leased/Rented Equip.Z83544 10/4/2025 10/4/2026 Limit 90,000 Workers Compensation Information: Proprietors/Partners/Executive Officers/Members Excluded: Conor Darby and Orion Thornton, subject to the policy terms and conditions. Re: Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Certificate Holder is included as Additional Insured including Ongoing and Completed Operations on the General Liability Policy, if required by written contract or agreement, subject to the policy terms and conditions per form CB-7245(7-13); CB-7433(7-13); available upon request. Certificate Holder is included as Additional Insured on the Automobile Liability Policy, if required by written contract or agreement, subject to the policy terms SEE ATTACHED ACORD 101 City of Bozeman PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771-1230 ONSIENE-01 HDAHL First West, Inc. P.O. Box 1800 Bozeman, MT 59771 Heather Dahl, CISR hdahl@1stwestinsurance.com ACUITY, A Mutual Insurance Company Montana State Fund X X X X X X X X Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 FORM NUMBER: EFFECTIVE DATE: The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ADDITIONAL REMARKS ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE FORM TITLE: Page of THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, ACORD 101 (2008/01) AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: LOC #: AGENCY NAMED INSURED POLICY NUMBER CARRIER NAIC CODE © 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. First West, Inc. ONSIENE-01 SEE PAGE 1 1 SEE PAGE 1 ACORD 25 Certificate of Liability Insurance 0 SEE P 1 OnSite Energy, Inc. PO Box 727 Bozeman, MT 59771 GallatinSEE PAGE 1 HDAHL 1 Description of Operations/Locations/Vehicles: and conditions per form CA-7214(10-98); available upon request. This insurance is Primary Non-Contributory on the General Liability and Automobile Liability Policy, if required by written contract or agreement, subject to the policy terms and conditions per form CB-1488(7-13); CA7214 10-98; available upon request. Excess Liability Policy is in excess of the General Liability, Automobile Liability and Employers Liability Policy, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy per form CU-7037(5-05); available upon request. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction C-610 PERFORMANCE BOND 00 61 13 - 2 1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Paragraph 3. 3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1 The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor, and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 shall be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; 3.2 The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract. 4. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice. 5. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions: 5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; 5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors; 5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owners concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or 5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: 5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or 5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial. 6. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for: 7.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; 7.2 additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and 7.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. 8. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond. 9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns. 10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations. 11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction C-610 PERFORMANCE BOND 00 61 13 - 3 12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. 13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 14. Definitions 14.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including allowance for the Contractor for any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract. 14.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. 14.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract. 14.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. 14.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. 16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project C-615 PAYMENT BOND 00 61 13 - 2 4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit. 5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following: 5.1 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor, 5.1.1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and 5.1.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13). 5.2 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13). 6. If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Paragraph 5.1.1. 7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions: 7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and 7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 7.3 The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant. 8. The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. 9. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. 10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations. 12. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project C-615 PAYMENT BOND 00 61 13 - 3 13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received. 14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 16. Definitions 16.1 Claim: A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum: 1. The name of the Claimant; 2. The name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished; 3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials, or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; 4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished; 5. The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; 6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim; 7. The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and 8. The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim. 16.2 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished. 16.3 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. 16.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. 16.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. 18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: None. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 63 13 - 1 SECTION 00 63 13 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Requests for Information (RFI). B. RFI is intended for requesting clarifications and interpretations of Contract Documents due to inconsistencies, errors or omissions in Contract Documents, and unanticipated existing conditions. C. RFI is not intended for general communication, requesting substitutions, Contractor’s proposed changes, resolution of nonconforming work, and coordination between contractors or for general questions not related to Contract Documents. D. RFI process is a cooperative enterprise between Engineer and Contractor to expedite RFI response and maintain progress of Work. E. Engineer shall evaluate alternate proposed methods of processing RFI’s to that indicated within this Section for potential impact on Engineer’s services. 1. If Engineer agrees to utilize another proposed method, Engineer will be reimbursed for any special training, usage fees, extra time required to implement, maintain, utilize and administer such a system. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION A. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: 1. Contract Documents are complementary. Before starting each portion of Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare various Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents, coordination drawings, shop drawings, prior correspondence or documentation relative to that portion of Work, as well as information furnished by Owner. 2. Contractor and Subcontractors shall evaluate and take field measurements of conditions related to that portion of Work and shall observe any conditions at site affecting it. 3. These obligations are for purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by Contractor and are not for purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in Contract Documents. 4. Contractor and subcontractors acknowledge that all documents pertaining to Work has been examined, have examined character of site and any existing conditions, and are satisfied with nature of Work, and other matters which can affect Work. 5. In event of inconsistency between portions of Contract Documents or within Contract Documents; provide better quality or greater quantity of Work, and comply with more stringent requirement, either or both in accordance with Engineer’s interpretation. 6. Report errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered in Contract Documents promptly to Engineer as a properly prepared and timely RFI. 7. Contractor and Subcontractors are not required to ascertain Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, and rules and regulations, unless they bear upon construction means, methods, techniques or safety and health precautions, but the Contractor shall promptly report to Engineer any nonconformity discovered by or made known to Contractor as a RFI. 8. On condition that Contractor or Subcontractor fail to give such notice, and knowingly proceeds with Work affected by errors or omissions in Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct any such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions at no additional cost. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 63 13 - 2 9. Prior to bid, Contractor shall review existing facilities related to this contract and shall be familiar with utility requirements and construction. a. Existing facility documents may be available through Owner for review. b. Perform preliminary investigations as required to ascertain extent of Work. c. Conditions which would be apparent by such investigation will not be allowed as cause for claims for extra costs. B. Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s Responsibilities: 1. Process request through Contractor when interpretation, clarification or explanation of portion of Construction Documents is needed by Contractor, Subcontractor, Vendor or Supplier. a. Review request for completeness, quality, proper referencing to drawing or specification section and reason submitted. b. In event request is not acceptable return to submitter with comments regarding reason for being returned. c. Make every attempt to validate, resolve or respond to RFI by thoroughly researching and reviewing Contract Documents and field conditions. d. Respond to RFI accordingly if review of RFI discloses a response or is related to coordination of construction or other issue not related to Contract Documents. e. If request is unclear, rewrite and state in clear, concise, correct, complete and easily understood manner. 1) Include additional information if necessary and submit to Engineer for response. 2. Submit request for interpretation, clarification or explanation of Contract Documents to Engineer through Contractor. a. List specific Contract Documents researched when seeking information being requested. b. Reference applicable Contract Drawings by sheet number, section, detail, room number, door number, etc., Specifications by section and paragraph number, and reference other relevant documents. c. The field titled "Regarding" on attached RFI form must be clear for future reference in reports or correspondence. d. Clearly state request and provide Contract Document references and any additional information needed so request can be fully understood, including sketches, photos or other reference material. e. Fully assess issues, suggest any reasonable solutions and include various factors, including potential costs, schedule impacts, if any, and recommendations which will aid in determining a solution or response. 1) In event a reasonable solution cannot be suggested, a statement to that effect should be so stated. f. Indicate reason request is being submitted. g. Clearly indicate critical RFI’s requiring a rapid response with an explanation as to why RFI is critical. h. Indicate priority for responses when multiple RFI’s are submitted within short period of time. 3. Distribute copies of responses to RFI’s to all parties affected. 4. Response to RFI shall not be considered a notice to proceed with a change that may revise the Contract Sum or Contract Time, unless authorized by Owner in writing. 5. In event response to RFI is determined incomplete, resubmit with explanation for unacceptability of response and necessary additional information within five (5) days of receipt to RFI response. 6. On condition Contractor determines or believes additional cost or time is involved due to clarifications, interpretations or instructions issued by Engineer in response to a RFI, resubmit RFI within five (5) days of receipt of response with reason and alternate solution or suggestion for performing work at no additional cost. a. In event no other solution is possible or desirable, submit Claim in accordance with Contract Documents within twenty-one (21) days of receipt of response to RFI. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 63 13 - 3 C. RFI Submittal Process: 1. Process and submit RFI’s to Engineer by Contractor utilizing email communication. a. In the event a previously submitted RFI request requires revision to provide additional information, initiate a new RFI. 1) New RFI shall be renumbered with previous submitted RFI succeeded by “.1 “ to indicate revision one of RFI (i.e.: RFI No. 34.1 for revision 1 to RFI No. 34). 2. Engineer will respond to RFI’s utilizing email communication. D. RFI Submittal Format: 1. Submit request for information to Engineer on RFI form provided at end of this section, form provided by Engineer in electronic text file format, or in similar format acceptable to Engineer. a. Electronically complete and email RFI form to Engineer’s designated representative in text file format. b. Attachments shall be in electronic text or PDF file format. c. Photo attachments may be in JPG format. 2. Assign RFIs with unique numbers in sequential order (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.). 3. Assign RFIs with assigned unique numbers in sequential order (1001, 1002, 1003, etc.) using the 1000 series numbers. 4. A resubmitted RFI or a previously answered RFI requiring revising or further clarification shall be submitted using original RFI number proceeded by “.1 IN to indicate revision one of RFI (i.e.: RFI No. 34.1 for revision 1 to RFI No. 34). E. Engineer’s Response to Request for Information (RFI): 1. Clarifications, interpretations and decisions of Engineer in response to RFI will be consistent with intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents, in writing, and may be provided in form of drawings and other attachments, or both. 2. When making such interpretations and decisions, Engineer will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. 3. Engineer’s decisions on matters related to aesthetic effects will be final if consistent with intent expressed in Contract Documents. 4. Engineer will not undertake to settle differences between Contractor, Subcontractors, trades suppliers, fabricator or manufacturer, or act as arbiter as to which Subcontractor, trade, supplier or manufacturer is to furnish or install various items indicated or required. 5. Engineer shall provide responses to RFI’s with reasonable promptness, but will endeavor to respond within twenty-one (21) days from date of receipt. a. If multiple RFI’s are submitted on same day or within a five (5) day period, review time may be extended by mutual agreement of parties. b. Engineer will provide a written response to RFI if Engineer believes response only involves an interpretation, clarification, supplemental information or orders a minor change in Work not involving an adjustment in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time, and is not inconsistent with intent of Contract Documents, and shall be binding. c. If Engineer believes response may result in a change to Contract Sum or Contract Time, response will indicate that a change document will be issued for the response, and appropriate change document will be issued indicating changes to Contract Documents. d. Engineer will provide any additional or supplemental drawings, specifications or other information as Engineer may deem necessary to facilitate response. 6. Engineer may return RFI without response for following reasons: a. Is considered a “Contractor Proposed Change”. b. Response is consistent with the intent of the Contract Drawings. c. Request is unclear or incomplete. d. Is due to Contractor’s lack of adequate coordination. e. Is related to construction means, methods or techniques. f. Response is required by another party. g. Is considered a “Substitution Request.” Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 63 13 - 4 F. If requested information is available from careful study and comparison of Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation, Engineer may invoice Owner as a change in services for costs involved in Engineer’s review, analysis, responding and processing of such RFI. 1. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for such costs. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 00 63 13 - 5 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION Project: RFI Number: Project No.: (other?) Action Info Pages Regarding: References: (List specific Contract Documents researched when seeking the information being requested) Spec. No.: Dwg. No.: Request: (Provide complete description of request with document references and sketches or photos if necessary, and present status of work) Requester’s Recommended Solution: (If RFI concerns a site or construction condition, provide a recommended solution, including cost & schedule considerations) Response Priority: Normal Rush (Work in progress) Reason For Request: Existing Condition Non- conformance Clarification / Interpretation Agency Generated Other Subcontractor: Date: CM/Contractor: By: Date: Response: END OF FORM Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EJCDC C-550 NOTICE TO PROCEED 2018 00 65 00 - 1 NOTICE TO PROCEED Owner: City of Bozeman Owner’s Project No.: WW155 Engineer: HDR Engineering Engineer’s Project No.: 10438546 Contractor: Onsite Energy Contractor’s Project No.: Project: City of Bozeman WRF On-Call 2025 TO3 Solar PWR Contract Name: N/A Effective Date of Contract: Owner hereby notifies Contractor that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run on [date Contract Times are to start] pursuant to Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions. On that date, Contractor shall start performing its obligations under the Contract Documents. No Work will be done at the Site prior to such date. In accordance with the Agreement: The number of days to achieve Substantial Completion is 365 days from the date stated above for the commencement of the Contract Times, resulting in a date for Substantial Completion of [date, calculated from commencement date above]; and the number of days to achieve readiness for final payment is 30 days from the date of substantial completion. Before starting any Work at the Site, the Contractor shall comply with applicable requirements set forth in Specification Section 01 14 16, and obtain temporary site/badge access, as required by Bozeman WRF. Owner: City of Bozeman By (signature): Name (printed): Title: Date Issued: Copy: Engineer Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 1 of 5 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology ........................................................................................................ 1 1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 1 1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 6 Article 2—Preliminary Matters ..................................................................................................................... 7 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance ......................................... 7 2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................... 7 2.03 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 7 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives .................................. 8 2.05 Acceptance of Schedules .............................................................................................................. 8 2.06 Electronic Transmittals ................................................................................................................. 8 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................... 9 3.01 Intent ............................................................................................................................................. 9 3.02 Reference Standards ..................................................................................................................... 9 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ...................................................................................... 10 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ................................................................................. 10 3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 11 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work .............................................................................. 11 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................. 11 4.02 Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................ 11 4.03 Reference Points ......................................................................................................................... 11 4.04 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 12 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress .................................................................................................. 12 Article 5—Site; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions .................... 13 5.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................... 13 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 14 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................................................................................ 15 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................... 16 5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 17 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 2 of 5 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ............................................................................. 19 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................. 21 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .................................................................................. 21 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ................................................................................................... 22 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................ 24 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance .............................................................................. 25 6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation ..................................................................................................... 25 6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds .......................................................... 27 Article 7—Contractor’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 27 7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction .................................................................... 27 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................. 27 7.03 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................. 27 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 28 7.05 “Or Equals” .................................................................................................................................. 28 7.06 Substitutes .................................................................................................................................. 29 7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers .................................................................................. 31 7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 32 7.09 Permits ........................................................................................................................................ 33 7.10 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 33 7.11 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................. 33 7.12 Record Documents ...................................................................................................................... 33 7.13 Safety and Protection.................................................................................................................. 34 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................. 35 7.15 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 35 7.16 Submittals ................................................................................................................................... 35 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ......................................................................... 38 7.18 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 39 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ................................................................................ 39 Article 8—Other Work at the Site ............................................................................................................... 40 8.01 Other Work ................................................................................................................................. 40 8.02 Coordination ............................................................................................................................... 41 8.03 Legal Relationships ...................................................................................................................... 41 Article 9—Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................ 42 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 3 of 5 9.01 Communications to Contractor .................................................................................................. 42 9.02 Replacement of Engineer ............................................................................................................ 42 9.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 42 9.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................. 42 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings ................................................................. 43 9.06 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 43 9.07 Change Orders ............................................................................................................................ 43 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ............................................................................................... 43 9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................... 43 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ...................................................................... 43 9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ........................................................................................... 43 9.12 Safety Programs .......................................................................................................................... 43 Article 10—Engineer’s Status During Construction .................................................................................... 44 10.01 Owner’s Representative .......................................................................................................... 44 10.02 Visits to Site ............................................................................................................................. 44 10.03 Resident Project Representative ............................................................................................. 44 10.04 Engineer’s Authority ............................................................................................................... 44 10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work ....................................................................................... 45 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................... 45 10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ...................................................... 45 10.08 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................ 45 Article 11—Changes to the Contract .......................................................................................................... 46 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract .......................................................................... 46 11.02 Change Orders ........................................................................................................................ 46 11.03 Work Change Directives .......................................................................................................... 46 11.04 Field Orders ............................................................................................................................. 47 11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ................................................................................ 47 11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................ 47 11.07 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................ 47 11.08 Change of Contract Times ....................................................................................................... 49 11.09 Change Proposals .................................................................................................................... 49 11.10 Notification to Surety .............................................................................................................. 50 Article 12—Claims ....................................................................................................................................... 50 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 4 of 5 12.01 Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 50 Article 13—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ...................................................................... 51 13.01 Cost of the Work ..................................................................................................................... 51 13.02 Allowances .............................................................................................................................. 55 13.03 Unit Price Work ....................................................................................................................... 55 Article 14—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work .................... 56 14.01 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................ 56 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................... 56 14.03 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 57 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................ 58 14.05 Uncovering Work .................................................................................................................... 58 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................... 58 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work ....................................................................................... 59 Article 15—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................ 59 15.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................. 59 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................ 62 15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................... 62 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ........................................................................................................ 63 15.05 Final Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 64 15.06 Final Payment .......................................................................................................................... 64 15.07 Waiver of Claims ..................................................................................................................... 65 15.08 Correction Period .................................................................................................................... 66 Article 16—Suspension of Work and Termination ..................................................................................... 67 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................... 67 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................ 67 16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience................................................................................. 68 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................... 68 Article 17—Final Resolution of Disputes .................................................................................................... 69 17.01 Methods and Procedures ........................................................................................................ 69 Article 18—Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................................... 69 18.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................... 69 18.02 Computation of Times ............................................................................................................ 69 18.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................. 70 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 5 of 5 18.04 Limitation of Damages ............................................................................................................ 70 18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................... 70 18.06 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................ 70 18.07 Controlling Law ....................................................................................................................... 70 18.08 Assignment of Contract .......................................................................................................... 70 18.09 Successors and Assigns ........................................................................................................... 70 18.10 Headings .................................................................................................................................. 70 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 1 of 70 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents. 3. Application for Payment—The document prepared by Contractor, in a form acceptable to Engineer, to request progress or final payments, and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and all Addenda. 7. Bidding Requirements—The Advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments. 8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract. 9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; challenging a set-off against payments due; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. 10. Claim a. A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 2 of 70 requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. b. A demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal, or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address. c. A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, made pursuant to Paragraph 12.01.A.4, concerning disputes arising after Engineer has issued a recommendation of final payment. d. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), lead-based paint (as defined by the HUD/EPA standard), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to Laws and Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. 13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which together comprise the Contract. 14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a) achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the Work. 16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. 17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition. 18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. 19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the Contract becomes effective. 20. Electronic Document—Any Project-related correspondence, attachments to correspondence, data, documents, drawings, information, or graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other Submittals, that are in an electronic or digital format. 21. Electronic Means—Electronic mail (email), upload/download from a secure Project website, or other communications methods that allow: (a) the transmission or communication of Electronic Documents; (b) the documentation of transmissions, including sending and receipt; (c) printing of the transmitted Electronic Document by the Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 3 of 70 recipient; (d) the storage and archiving of the Electronic Document by sender and recipient; and (e) the use by recipient of the Electronic Document for purposes permitted by this Contract. Electronic Means does not include the use of text messaging, or of Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, or similar social media services for transmission of Electronic Documents. 22. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 23. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 24. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed thereto. a. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated into the Work, and that are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. b. The presence of Constituents of Concern that are to be removed or remediated as part of the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. c. The presence of Constituents of Concern as part of the routine, anticipated, and obvious working conditions at the Site, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. 25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and binding decrees, resolutions, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 26. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real property, or personal property. 27. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date, or by a time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 28. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of the Bid. 29. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work. 30. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant to the terms of the Contract. 31. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 32. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 4 of 70 33. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative (RPR) includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative. 34. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 35. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals. 36. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 37. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 38. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and such other lands or areas furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 39. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 40. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work. 41. Submittal—A written or graphic document, prepared by or for Contractor, which the Contract Documents require Contractor to submit to Engineer, or that is indicated as a Submittal in the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. Submittals may include Shop Drawings and Samples; schedules; product data; Owner-delegated designs; sustainable design information; information on special procedures; testing plans; results of tests and evaluations, source quality-control testing and inspections, and field or Site quality-control testing and inspections; warranties and certifications; Suppliers’ instructions and reports; records of delivery of spare parts and tools; operations and maintenance data; Project photographic documentation; record documents; and other such documents required by the Contract Documents. Submittals, whether or not approved or accepted by Engineer, are not Contract Documents. Change Proposals, Change Orders, Claims, notices, Applications for Payment, and requests for interpretation or clarification are not Submittals. 42. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion of such Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 5 of 70 43. Successful Bidder—The Bidder to which the Owner makes an award of contract. 44. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these General Conditions. 45. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor. 46. Technical Data a. Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (1) existing subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site, or existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site including existing surface or subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities) or (2) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. b. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to conditions at the Site, then Technical Data is defined, with respect to conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06, as the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, assessments of the condition of subsurface facilities, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical, environmental, or other Site or facilities conditions report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. c. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data, and instead Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings. 47. Underground Facilities—All active or not-in-service underground lines, pipelines, conduits, ducts, encasements, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or systems at the Site, including but not limited to those facilities or systems that produce, transmit, distribute, or convey telephone or other communications, cable television, fiber optic transmissions, power, electricity, light, heat, gases, oil, crude oil products, liquid petroleum products, water, steam, waste, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. An abandoned facility or system is not an Underground Facility. 48. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 49. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents. 50. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 6 of 70 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraphs 1.02.B, C, D, and E are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day: The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. Defective: The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: 1. does not conform to the Contract Documents; 2. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or 3. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or Paragraph 15.04). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 7 of 70 F. Contract Price or Contract Times: References to a change in “Contract Price or Contract Times” or “Contract Times or Contract Price” or similar, indicate that such change applies to (1) Contract Price, (2) Contract Times, or (3) both Contract Price and Contract Times, as warranted, even if the term “or both” is not expressed. G. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance A. Performance and Payment Bonds: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner the performance bond and payment bond (if the Contract requires Contractor to furnish such bonds). B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates, endorsements, and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6, except to the extent the Supplementary Conditions expressly establish other dates for delivery of specific insurance policies. C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the signed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this provision to Engineer. 2.03 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 8 of 70 into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work, and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Submittals, processing Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records. B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. 2.05 Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. No progress payment will be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work. 4. If a schedule is not acceptable, Contractor will have an additional 10 days to revise and resubmit the schedule. 2.06 Electronic Transmittals A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor may send, and shall accept, Electronic Documents transmitted by Electronic Means. B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for Electronic Means, then Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols. C. Subject to any governing protocols for Electronic Means, when transmitting Electronic Documents by Electronic Means, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long- term compatibility, usability, or readability of the Electronic Documents resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the Electronic Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 9 of 70 ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one Contract Document is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the electronic versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version will govern. D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether written or oral. E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided herein. F. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation will be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions will continue to be valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, which agree that the Contract Documents will be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. G. Nothing in the Contract Documents creates: 1. any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work, for the benefit of such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; or 2. any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, means the standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, and no instruction of a Supplier, will be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer from those set forth in the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner or Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 10 of 70 inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference as a Contract Document); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall submit to the Engineer in writing all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation— RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 11 of 70 B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner, unless it appeals by filing a Claim. C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly notify Owner and Contractor in writing that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media versions, or reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or 2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents. B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein precludes Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the 60th day after the day of Bid opening or the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Contract, whichever date is earlier. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work may be done at the Site prior to such date. 4.03 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 12 of 70 established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times must be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work will be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor. C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times. Such an adjustment will be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Abnormal weather conditions; 3. Acts or failures to act of third-party utility owners or other third-party entities (other than those third-party utility owners or other third-party entities performing other work at or adjacent to the Site as arranged by or under contract with Owner, as contemplated in Article 8); and 4. Acts of war or terrorism. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 13 of 70 D. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of Contract Times or Contract Price is limited as follows: 1. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on the delay, disruption, or interference adversely affecting an activity on the critical path to completion of the Work, as of the time of the delay, disruption, or interference. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Such a concurrent delay by Contractor shall not preclude an adjustment of Contract Times to which Contractor is otherwise entitled. 3. Adjustments of Contract Times or Contract Price are subject to the provisions of Article 11. E. Each Contractor request or Change Proposal seeking an increase in Contract Times or Contract Price must be supplemented by supporting data that sets forth in detail the following: 1. The circumstances that form the basis for the requested adjustment; 2. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference began to affect the progress of the Work; 3. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference ceased to affect the progress of the Work; 4. The number of days’ increase in Contract Times claimed as a consequence of each such cause of delay, disruption, or interference; and 5. The impact on Contract Price, in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.07. Contractor shall also furnish such additional supporting documentation as Owner or Engineer may require including, where appropriate, a revised progress schedule indicating all the activities affected by the delay, disruption, or interference, and an explanation of the effect of the delay, disruption, or interference on the critical path to completion of the Work. F. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5, together with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. G. Paragraph 8.03 addresses delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. ARTICLE 5—SITE; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor in writing of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 14 of 70 B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas, or to improvements, structures, utilities, or similar facilities located at such adjacent lands or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. 2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.13, or otherwise; (b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, or in a court of competent jurisdiction; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris will conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 15 of 70 and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data; 2. Those drawings of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data; and 3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. B. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings, pursuant to Paragraph 5.05, and not in the drawings referred to in Paragraph 5.03.A. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data. C. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b. D. Limitations of Other Data and Documents: Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; 3. the contents of other Site-related documents made available to Contractor, such as record drawings from other projects at or adjacent to the Site, or Owner’s archival documents concerning the Site; or 4. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 16 of 70 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so. B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph, Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine whether it is necessary for Owner to obtain additional exploration or tests with respect to the condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part. D. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the condition in question has been adequately documented, and analyzed on a preliminary basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such Work. E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 17 of 70 Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. Such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A; b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and, c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise; b. The existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order. 4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. F. Underground Facilities; Hazardous Environmental Conditions: Paragraph 5.05 governs rights and responsibilities regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities. Paragraph 5.06 governs rights and responsibilities regarding Hazardous Environmental Conditions. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03 and 5.04 are not applicable to the presence or location of Underground Facilities, or to Hazardous Environmental Conditions. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the cost of all of the following are included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: 1. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 2. complying with applicable state and local utility damage prevention Laws and Regulations; Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 18 of 70 3. verifying the actual location of those Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being within the area affected by the Work, by exposing such Underground Facilities during the course of construction; 4. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground Facilities, during construction; and 5. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated on the Drawings with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing regarding such Underground Facility. C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will: 1. promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. identify and communicate with the owner of the Underground Facility; prepare recommendations to Owner (and if necessary issue any preliminary instructions to Contractor) regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question; 3. obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part. E. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with the Underground Facility may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the Underground Facility in question and conditions affected by its presence have been adequately documented, and analyzed on a preliminary basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such Work. F. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 19 of 70 or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; b. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E; and c. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B. 2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question. 4. The information and data shown or indicated on the Drawings with respect to existing Underground Facilities at the Site is based on information and data (a) furnished by the owners of such Underground Facilities, or by others, (b) obtained from available records, or (c) gathered in an investigation conducted in accordance with the current edition of ASCE 38, Standard Guideline for the Collection and Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utility Data, by the American Society of Civil Engineers. If such information or data is incorrect or incomplete, Contractor’s remedies are limited to those set forth in this Paragraph 5.05.F. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; 2. drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on the accuracy of the Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 20 of 70 of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such Constituents of Concern. E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set-off against payments to account for the associated costs. F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, as a result of such Work stoppage, such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, or any costs or expenses incurred in response to the Hazardous Environmental Condition, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off. Entitlement to any such adjustment is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D, 4.05.E, 11.07, and 11.08. H. If, after receipt of such written notice, Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 21 of 70 conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court, arbitration, or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.I obligates Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J obligates Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds must remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, the terms of a prescribed bond form, the Supplementary Conditions, or other provisions of the Contract. B. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds (if any) as are required by the Supplementary Conditions or other provisions of the Contract. C. All bonds must be in the form included in the Bidding Documents or otherwise specified by Owner prior to execution of the Contract, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 22 of 70 Regulations, and must be issued and signed by a surety named in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Department Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority must show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond. D. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue bonds in the required amounts. E. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer in writing and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which must comply with the bond and surety requirements above. F. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16. G. Upon request to Owner from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of the Work, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity. H. Upon request to Contractor from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of the Work, Contractor shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity. 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better. C. Alternative forms of insurance coverage, including but not limited to self-insurance and “Occupational Accident and Excess Employer’s Indemnity Policies,” are not sufficient to meet the insurance requirements of this Contract, unless expressly allowed in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required by the Contract. Upon request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, full disclosure of all relevant exclusions, and evidence of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 23 of 70 Subcontractors or Suppliers. In any documentation furnished under this provision, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers may block out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific to a project or jurisdiction other than those applicable to this Contract. E. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, and full disclosure of all relevant exclusions. In any documentation furnished under this provision, Owner may block out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific to a project or jurisdiction other than those relevant to this Contract. F. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, will not be construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance. G. In addition to the liability insurance required to be provided by Contractor, the Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain Owner’s own liability insurance. Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties. H. Contractor shall require: 1. Subcontractors to purchase and maintain worker’s compensation, commercial general liability, and other insurance that is appropriate for their participation in the Project, and to name as additional insureds Owner and Engineer (and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on Contractor’s liability policies) on each Subcontractor’s commercial general liability insurance policy; and 2. Suppliers to purchase and maintain insurance that is appropriate for their participation in the Project. I. If either party does not purchase or maintain the insurance required of such party by the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. J. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Contractor’s entitlement to enter or remain at the Site will end immediately, and Owner may impose an appropriate set-off against payment for any associated costs (including but not limited to the cost of purchasing necessary insurance coverage), and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16. K. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required insurance, the other party may elect (but is in no way obligated) to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 24 of 70 L. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests. Contractor is responsible for determining whether such coverage and limits are adequate to protect its interests, and for obtaining and maintaining any additional insurance that Contractor deems necessary. M. The insurance and insurance limits required herein will not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability, or that of its Subcontractors or Suppliers, under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract or otherwise. N. All the policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained under this Contract will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, or renewal refused, until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured and Engineer. 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance A. Required Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain Worker’s Compensation, Commercial General Liability, and other insurance pursuant to the specific requirements of the Supplementary Conditions. B. General Provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 as supplemented must: 1. include at least the specific coverages required; 2. be written for not less than the limits provided, or those required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. remain in effect at least until the Work is complete (as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D), and longer if expressly required elsewhere in this Contract, and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract; 4. apply with respect to the performance of the Work, whether such performance is by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable; and 5. include all necessary endorsements to support the stated requirements. C. Additional Insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability, employer’s liability, umbrella or excess, pollution liability, and unmanned aerial vehicle liability policies, if required by this Contract, must: 1. include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified as additional insureds in the Supplementary Conditions; 2. include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, and consultants of all such additional insureds; 3. afford primary coverage to these additional insureds for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations); Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 25 of 70 4. not seek contribution from insurance maintained by the additional insured; and 5. as to commercial general liability insurance, apply to additional insureds with respect to liability caused in whole or in part by Contractor’s acts or omissions, or the acts and omissions of those working on Contractor’s behalf, in the performance of Contractor’s operations. 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in the amount of the Work’s full insurable replacement cost (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). The specific requirements applicable to the builder’s risk insurance are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Property Insurance for Facilities of Owner Where Work Will Occur: Owner is responsible for obtaining and maintaining property insurance covering each existing structure, building, or facility in which any part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach or be adjoined. Such property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a replacement cost basis, providing coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk insurance, and will be maintained until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D. C. Property Insurance for Substantially Complete Facilities: Promptly after Substantial Completion, and before actual occupancy or use of the substantially completed Work, Owner will obtain property insurance for such substantially completed Work, and maintain such property insurance at least until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D. Such property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a replacement cost basis, and provide coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk insurance. The builder’s risk insurance may terminate upon written confirmation of Owner’s procurement of such property insurance. D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will provide advance notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer, and obtain an endorsement consenting to the continuation of coverage prior to commencing such partial occupancy or use. E. Insurance of Other Property; Additional Insurance: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, then the entity or individual owning such property item will be responsible for insuring it. If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.04, it may do so at Contractor’s expense. 6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation A. The builder’s risk insurance policy purchased and maintained in accordance with Paragraph 6.04 (or an installation floater policy if authorized by the Supplementary Conditions), will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 26 of 70 Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. 1. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as builder’s risk or installation floater insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. 2. None of the above waivers extends to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Any property insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage, or consequential loss to Owner’s existing structures, buildings, or facilities in which any part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach or adjoin; to adjacent structures, buildings, or facilities of Owner; or to part or all of the completed or substantially completed Work, during partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06, will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of them, and that the insured is allowed to waive the insurer’s rights of subrogation in a written contract executed prior to the loss, damage, or consequential loss. 1. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such policies. C. The waivers in this Paragraph 6.05 include the waiver of rights due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril, risk, or cause of loss. D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that each Subcontract contains provisions whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from fire or other peril, risk, or cause of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance, installation floater, and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 27 of 70 6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of property insurance required by Paragraph 6.04 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such claim. B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.04 shall maintain such proceeds in a segregated account, and distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations. C. If no other special agreement is reached, Contractor shall repair or replace the damaged Work, using allocated insurance proceeds. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. If the Contract Documents note, or Contractor determines, that professional engineering or other design services are needed to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, or for Site safety, then Contractor shall cause such services to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, at Contractor’s expense. Such services are not Owner-delegated professional design services under this Contract, and neither Owner nor Engineer has any responsibility with respect to (1) Contractor’s determination of the need for such services, (2) the qualifications or licensing of the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor, (3) the performance of such services, or (4) any errors, omissions, or defects in such services. 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who will not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. 7.03 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall maintain good discipline and order at the Site. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 28 of 70 B. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of Contractor’s employees; of Suppliers and Subcontractors, and their employees; and of any other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work, just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. C. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site will be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld. 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work must be new and of good quality, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications will expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment must be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 7.05 “Or Equals” A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Whenever an item of equipment or material is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the names of one or more proprietary items or specific Suppliers, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of equipment or material, or items from other proposed Suppliers, under the circumstances described below. 1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of equipment or material proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer will deem it an “or equal” item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of equipment or material will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that the proposed item: 1) is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 29 of 70 2) will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; 3) has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and 4) is not objectionable to Owner. b. Contractor certifies that, if the proposed item is approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and 2) the item will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Contractor’s expense. C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or- equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal,” which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request will result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract. E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of equipment or material proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may request that Engineer consider the item a proposed substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.06. 7.06 Substitutes A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Unless the specification or description of an item of equipment or material required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of equipment or material under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests must be made before commencement of related construction at the Site. 1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of equipment or material from anyone other than Contractor. 2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.06.B, as supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 30 of 70 3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of equipment or material that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: a. will certify that the proposed substitute item will: 1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design; 2) be similar in substance to the item specified; and 3) be suited to the same use as the item specified. b. will state: 1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will necessitate a change in Contract Times; 2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item; and 3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. c. will identify: 1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from the item specified; and 2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services. d. will contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 31 of 70 E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor’s expense. F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract. Contractor may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.06.D, by timely submittal of a Change Proposal. 7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. The Contractor’s retention of a Subcontractor or Supplier for the performance of parts of the Work will not relieve Contractor’s obligation to Owner to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so. C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor or Supplier to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection. D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable during the bidding process or otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 5 days. E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors or Suppliers for acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor or Supplier so identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor or Supplier. F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, with respect to the replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner’s requirement of replacement. G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor or Supplier, whether initially or as a replacement, will constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 32 of 70 H. On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal. I. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors and Suppliers. J. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings do not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or in delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. K. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier must be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. L. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work performed for Contractor by the Subcontractor or Supplier. M. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors and Suppliers from communicating with Engineer or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed in this Contract. 7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If an invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights will be disclosed in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights. C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 33 of 70 7.09 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits, licenses, and certificates of occupancy. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 7.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 7.11 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other action. It is not Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Owner or Contractor may give written notice to the other party of any changes after the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such written notice Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim. 7.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 34 of 70 7.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of Work-related accidents and the maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs. C. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. D. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.13.C.2 or 7.13.C.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). E. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. F. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property; the owners of Underground Facilities and other utilities (if the identity of such owners is known to Contractor); and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, in writing, when Contractor knows that prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. G. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. Any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work are identified or included in the Supplementary Conditions or Specifications. H. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 35 of 70 I. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will continue until all the Work is completed, Engineer has issued a written notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.C that the Work is acceptable, and Contractor has left the Site (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). J. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of safety data sheets (formerly known as material safety data sheets) or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.15 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused by an emergency, or are required as a result of Contractor’s response to an emergency. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of an emergency or Contractor’s response, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 7.16 Submittals A. Shop Drawing and Sample Requirements 1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall: a. review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; b. determine and verify: 1) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to the Submittal; 2) the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 3) all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; c. confirm that the Submittal is complete with respect to all related data included in the Submittal. 2. Each Shop Drawing or Sample must bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review of that Submittal, and that Contractor approves the Submittal. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 36 of 70 3. With each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Submittal may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice must be set forth in a written communication separate from the Submittal; and, in addition, in the case of a Shop Drawing by a specific notation made on the Shop Drawing itself. B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall label and submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. 1. Shop Drawings a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings must be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide, and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.C. 2. Samples a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications. b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the Submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.C. 3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Engineer’s Review of Shop Drawings and Samples 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the Submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 37 of 70 document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order or other appropriate Contract modification. 5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.16.A and B. 6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, will not, under any circumstances, change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order. 7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance, or approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will result in such item becoming a Contract Document. 8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.16.C.4. D. Resubmittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous Submittals. 2. Contractor shall furnish required Shop Drawing and Sample submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than two resubmittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a third or subsequent resubmittal of a Shop Drawing or Sample, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges. 3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. E. Submittals Other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and Owner-Delegated Designs 1. The following provisions apply to all Submittals other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and Owner-delegated designs: a. Contractor shall submit all such Submittals to the Engineer in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Contract Documents. b. Engineer will provide timely review of all such Submittals in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals and return such Submittals with a notation of either Accepted or Not Accepted. Any such Submittal that is not returned within the time established in the Schedule of Submittals will be deemed accepted. c. Engineer’s review will be only to determine if the Submittal is acceptable under the requirements of the Contract Documents as to general form and content of the Submittal. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 38 of 70 d. If any such Submittal is not accepted, Contractor shall confer with Engineer regarding the reason for the non-acceptance, and resubmit an acceptable document. 2. Procedures for the submittal and acceptance of the Progress Schedule, the Schedule of Submittals, and the Schedule of Values are set forth in Paragraphs 2.03. 2.04, and 2.05. F. Owner-delegated Designs: Submittals pursuant to Owner-delegated designs are governed by the provisions of Paragraph 7.19. 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer is entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. B. Owner’s rights under this warranty and guarantee are in addition to, and are not limited by, Owner’s rights under the correction period provisions of Paragraph 15.08. The time in which Owner may enforce its warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17 is limited only by applicable Laws and Regulations restricting actions to enforce such rights; provided, however, that after the end of the correction period under Paragraph 15.08: 1. Owner shall give Contractor written notice of any defective Work within 60 days of the discovery that such Work is defective; and 2. Such notice will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the notice. C. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, or improper modification, maintenance, or operation, by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. D. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or a release of Owner’s warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17: 1. Observations by Engineer; 2. Recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. The issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. Use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. Any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal; 6. The issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; 7. The end of the correction period established in Paragraph 15.08; 8. Any inspection, test, or approval by others; or Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 39 of 70 9. Any correction of defective Work by Owner. E. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in the assigned contract will govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract. 7.18 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from losses, damages, costs, and judgments (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising from third-party claims or actions relating to or resulting from the performance or furnishing of the Work, provided that any such claim, action, loss, cost, judgment or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to damage to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A will not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Owner may require Contractor to provide professional design services for a portion of the Work by express delegation in the Contract Documents. Such delegation will specify the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy, and the Submittals that Contractor must furnish to Engineer with respect to the Owner-delegated design. B. Contractor shall cause such Owner-delegated professional design services to be provided pursuant to the professional standard of care by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal must appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and Submittals prepared by such design professional. Such design professional must issue all certifications of design required by Laws and Regulations. C. If a Shop Drawing or other Submittal related to the Owner-delegated design is prepared by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or others for submittal to Engineer, then such Shop Drawing or other Submittal must bear the written approval of Contractor’s design professional when submitted by Contractor to Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 40 of 70 D. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor under an Owner-delegated design, subject to the professional standard of care and the performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. E. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.19, Engineer’s review, approval, and other determinations regarding design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other Submittals furnished by Contractor pursuant to an Owner-delegated design will be only for the following limited purposes: 1. Checking for conformance with the requirements of this Paragraph 7.19; 2. Confirming that Contractor (through its design professionals) has used the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents; and 3. Establishing that the design furnished by Contractor is consistent with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. F. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of performance or design criteria specified by Owner or Engineer. G. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any third-party utility work that Owner has arranged to take place at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information to Contractor. C. Contractor shall afford proper and safe access to the Site to each contractor that performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work. D. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 41 of 70 E. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. F. The provisions of this article are not applicable to work that is performed by third-party utilities or other third-party entities without a contract with Owner, or that is performed without having been arranged by Owner. If such work occurs, then any related delay, disruption, or interference incurred by Contractor is governed by the provisions of Paragraph 4.05.C.3. 8.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work: 1. The identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors; 2. An itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility; and 3. The extent of such authority and responsibilities. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. If, in the course of performing other work for Owner at or adjacent to the Site, the Owner’s employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner that Owner has arranged to perform work, causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment will take into account information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, and any remedies available to Contractor under Laws or Regulations concerning utility action or inaction. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price will be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times or Contract Price is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 42 of 70 B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 1. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this Paragraph 8.03.B. 2. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor. C. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference. ARTICLE 9—OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 9.02 Replacement of Engineer A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s status under the Contract Documents will be that of the former Engineer. 9.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 43 of 70 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01. B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03. C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 6. 9.07 Change Orders A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 14.02.B. 9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work). 9.12 Safety Programs A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed. B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 44 of 70 ARTICLE 10—ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner’s Representative A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe, as an experienced and qualified design professional, the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.07. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 10.03 Resident Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions and in Paragraph 10.07. B. If Owner designates an individual or entity who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee to represent Owner at the Site, then the responsibilities and authority of such individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 10.04 Engineer’s Authority A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14. B. Engineer’s authority as to Submittals is set forth in Paragraph 7.16. C. Engineer’s authority as to design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications and other Submittals from Contractor in response to Owner’s delegation (if any) to Contractor of professional design services, is set forth in Paragraph 7.19. D. Engineer’s authority as to changes in the Work is set forth in Article 11. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 45 of 70 E. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15. 10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings, interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith. 10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, will create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Contractor under Paragraph 15.06.A, will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.07 also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any. 10.08 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer has been informed. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 46 of 70 ARTICLE 11—CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract A. The Contract may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive, or a Field Order. B. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract includes a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order. C. All changes to the Contract that involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, must be supported by Engineer’s recommendation. Owner and Contractor may amend other terms and conditions of the Contract without the recommendation of the Engineer. 11.02 Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly contested such set-off; 3. Changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.05, (b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or technical matters; and 4. Changes that embody the substance of any final and binding results under: Paragraph 11.03.B, resolving the impact of a Work Change Directive; Paragraph 11.09, concerning Change Proposals; Article 12, Claims; Paragraph 13.02.D, final adjustments resulting from allowances; Paragraph 13.03.D, final adjustments relating to determination of quantities for Unit Price Work; and similar provisions. B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of Paragraph 11.02.A, it will be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if fully executed. 11.03 Work Change Directives A. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.07 regarding change of Contract Price. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 47 of 70 B. If Owner has issued a Work Change Directive and: 1. Contractor believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary, then Contractor shall submit any Change Proposal seeking such an adjustment no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 2. Owner believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary, then Owner shall submit any Claim seeking such an adjustment no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive. 11.04 Field Orders A. Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly. B. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein. 11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Changes involving the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or technical matters will be supported by Engineer’s recommendation. B. Such changes in the Work may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work must be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. C. Nothing in this Paragraph 11.05 obligates Contractor to undertake work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05.C.2. 11.07 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 48 of 70 1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); 2. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2); or 3. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.07.C). C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit will be determined as follows: 1. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. If a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. For costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee will be 15 percent; b. For costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee will be 5 percent; c. Where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a and 11.07.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee will be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of 5 percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted Work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner will be no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work; d. No fee will be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C; e. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in Cost of the Work will be the amount of the actual net decrease in Cost of the Work and a deduction of an additional amount equal to 5 percent of such actual net decrease in Cost of the Work; and f. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change or Change Proposal, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee will be computed by determining the sum of the costs in each of the cost categories in Paragraph 13.01.B (specifically, payroll costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.1; incorporated materials and equipment costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.2; Subcontract costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.3; special consultants costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.4; and other costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.5) and applying to each such cost category sum the appropriate fee from Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a through 11.07.C.2.e, inclusive. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 49 of 70 11.08 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. Delay, disruption, and interference in the Work, and any related changes in Contract Times, are addressed in and governed by Paragraph 4.05. 11.09 Change Proposals A. Purpose and Content: Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; contest an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; challenge a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under the Contract. The Change Proposal will specify any proposed change in Contract Times or Contract Price, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Each Change Proposal will address only one issue, or a set of closely related issues. B. Change Proposal Procedures 1. Submittal: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer within 30 days after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision. 2. Supporting Data: The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. a. Change Proposals based on or related to delay, interruption, or interference must comply with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. b. Change proposals related to a change of Contract Price must include full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated into the Work and labor and equipment used for the subject Work. The supporting data must be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. 3. Engineer’s Initial Review: Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal. If in its discretion Engineer concludes that additional supporting data is needed before conducting a full review and making a decision regarding the Change Proposal, then Engineer may request that Contractor submit such additional supporting data by a date specified by Engineer, prior to Engineer beginning its full review of the Change Proposal. 4. Engineer’s Full Review and Action on the Change Proposal: Upon receipt of Contractor’s supporting data (including any additional data requested by Engineer), Engineer will conduct a full review of each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after such receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either approve the Change Proposal in whole, deny it in whole, or approve it in part and deny it in part. Such actions must be in writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take action on the Change Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 50 of 70 Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12. 5. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision is final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12. C. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties in writing that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of such a Change Proposal, such notice will be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12. D. Post-Completion: Contractor shall not submit any Change Proposals after Engineer issues a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B. 11.10 Notification to Surety A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. ARTICLE 12—CLAIMS 12.01 Claims A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor are subject to the Claims process set forth in this article: 1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals; 2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other relief under the Contract Documents; 3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters; and 4. Subject to the waiver provisions of Paragraph 15.07, any dispute arising after Engineer has issued a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B. B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 51 of 70 and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled. C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim will be stated in writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer. D. Mediation 1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate will stay the Claim submittal and response process. 2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement, either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of the termination. If the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator. 3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs. E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in part, such action will be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes. F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction, the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A denial of the Claim will be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes. G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order or other written document to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price. ARTICLE 13—COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 52 of 70 2. When needed to determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment. B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in the Cost of the Work will be in amounts no higher than those commonly incurred in the locality of the Project, will not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and will include only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor in advance of the subject Work. Such employees include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, safety managers, safety representatives, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work will be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs include, but are not limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, will be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts will accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment will accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, which will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee will be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed or retained for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Other costs consisting of the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, which are Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 53 of 70 consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. 1) In establishing included costs for materials such as scaffolding, plating, or sheeting, consideration will be given to the actual or the estimated life of the material for use on other projects; or rental rates may be established on the basis of purchase or salvage value of such items, whichever is less. Contractor will not be eligible for compensation for such items in an amount that exceeds the purchase cost of such item. c. Construction Equipment Rental 1) Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner as to price (including any surcharge or special rates applicable to overtime use of the construction equipment or machinery), and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs will be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts must cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. 2) Costs for equipment and machinery owned by Contractor or a Contractor-related entity will be paid at a rate shown for such equipment in the equipment rental rate book specified in the Supplementary Conditions. An hourly rate will be computed by dividing the monthly rates by 176. These computed rates will include all operating costs. 3) With respect to Work that is the result of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price (“changed Work”), included costs will be based on the time the equipment or machinery is in use on the changed Work and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal when directly attributable to the changed Work. The cost of any such equipment or machinery, or parts thereof, must cease to accrue when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the changed Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of builder’s risk or other property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 6.04), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses will be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 54 of 70 g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work does not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals, general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. The cost of purchasing, renting, or furnishing small tools and hand tools. 3. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 4. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 5. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 6. Expenses incurred in preparing and advancing Claims. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B. D. Contractor’s Fee 1. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus-a-fee, then: a. Contractor’s fee for the Work set forth in the Contract Documents as of the Effective Date of the Contract will be determined as set forth in the Agreement. b. for any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee will be determined as follows: 1) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a percentage of the Cost of the Work, the fee will automatically adjust as the Cost of the Work changes. 2) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a fixed fee, the fee for any additions or deletions will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2. 2. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of a stipulated sum, or any other basis other than cost-plus-a-fee, then Contractor’s fee for any Work covered by a Change Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 55 of 70 Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2. E. Documentation and Audit: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor and pertinent Subcontractors will establish and maintain records of the costs in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices. Subject to prior written notice, Owner will be afforded reasonable access, during normal business hours, to all Contractor’s accounts, records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and Contractor’s fee. Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of three years after the final payment by Owner. Pertinent Subcontractors will afford such access to Owner, and preserve such documents, to the same extent required of Contractor. 13.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that: 1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and 2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment for any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Owner’s Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that an Owner’s contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor for Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price will be correspondingly adjusted. 13.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 56 of 70 thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, and the final adjustment of Contract Price will be set forth in a Change Order, subject to the provisions of the following paragraph. E. Adjustments in Unit Price 1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect to an item of Unit Price Work if: a. the quantity of the item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed materially and significantly as a result of the quantity change. 2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related changes in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform such other Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item. ARTICLE 14—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 14.01 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply with such procedures and programs as applicable. 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests. B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work will be governed by the provisions of Paragraph 14.05. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 57 of 70 D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and tests required: 1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner; 2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and 5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections and tests will be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner, Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals. F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering will be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 14.03 Defective Work A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective. B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and to reject defective Work. C. Notice of Defects: Prompt written notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs, Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 58 of 70 losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety). Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work will be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner. 14.05 Uncovering Work A. Engineer has the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense. C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment. 1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the Work is not defective. 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 59 of 70 or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work will not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace defective Work as required by Engineer, then Owner may, after 7 days’ written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07. ARTICLE 15—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01 Progress Payments A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 2. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment must also be accompanied by: (a) a bill of sale, invoice, copies of subcontract or purchase order payments, or other documentation Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 60 of 70 establishing full payment by Contractor for the materials and equipment; (b) at Owner’s request, documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens; and (c) evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 3. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application must include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received by Contractor have been applied to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 4. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. C. Review of Applications 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 61 of 70 4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work; b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto; c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work; d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the money paid by Owner; or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. 5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 15.01.C.2. 6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents. D. Payment Becomes Due 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs) will become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. E. Reductions in Payment by Owner 1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following: a. Claims have been made against Owner based on Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or damages resulting from Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, and patent infringement; Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 62 of 70 b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site; c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities; f. The Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; h. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; i. An event has occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a termination for cause; j. Liquidated or other damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work; k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; or l. Other items entitle Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended. 2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed will be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction. 3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld will be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 15.01.D.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement. 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner. 15.03 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 63 of 70 submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected before final payment. B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which will fix the date of Substantial Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have 7 days after receipt of the preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work. E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the progress payment procedures set forth above. F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the punch list. 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 64 of 70 significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions: 1. At any time, Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through 15.03.E for that part of the Work. 2. At any time, Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.04 regarding builder’s risk or other property insurance. 15.05 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 15.06 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment. 2. The final Application for Payment must be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 65 of 70 d. a list of all duly pending Change Proposals and Claims; and e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. Engineer’s Review of Final Application and Recommendation of Payment: If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final payment and present the final Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such recommendation will account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Notice of Acceptability: In support of its recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment, Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to stated limitations in the notice and to the provisions of Paragraph 15.07. D. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment and issuance of notice of the acceptability of the Work. E. Final Payment Becomes Due: Upon receipt from Engineer of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, Owner shall set off against the amount recommended by Engineer for final payment any further sum to which Owner is entitled, including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the provisions of this Contract with respect to progress payments. Owner shall pay the resulting balance due to Contractor within 30 days of Owner’s receipt of the final Application for Payment from Engineer. 15.07 Waiver of Claims A. By making final payment, Owner waives its claim or right to liquidated damages or other damages for late completion by Contractor, except as set forth in an outstanding Claim, Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 66 of 70 appeal under the provisions of Article 17, set-off, or express reservation of rights by Owner. Owner reserves all other claims or rights after final payment. B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted as a Claim, or appealed under the provisions of Article 17. 15.08 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the Supplementary Conditions or the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents), Owner gives Contractor written notice that any Work has been found to be defective, or that Contractor’s repair of any damages to the Site or adjacent areas has been found to be defective, then after receipt of such notice of defect Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions: 1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such adjacent areas; 2. correct such defective Work; 3. remove the defective Work from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting from the corrective measures. B. Owner shall give any such notice of defect within 60 days of the discovery that such Work or repairs is defective. If such notice is given within such 60 days but after the end of the correction period, the notice will be deemed a notice of defective Work under Paragraph 7.17.B. C. If, after receipt of a notice of defect within 60 days and within the correction period, Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. Contractor shall pay all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). Contractor’s failure to pay such costs, losses, and damages within 10 days of invoice from Owner will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the failure to pay. D. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. E. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 67 of 70 F. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this paragraph are not to be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 16—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer. Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments must be submitted no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by Contractor and justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule); 2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract Documents; 3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or 4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving Contractor (and any surety) 10 days’ written notice that Owner is considering a declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the Contract, Owner may proceed to: 1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) written notice that the Contract is terminated; and 2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond. C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if Contractor within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure. E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 68 of 70 attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond will govern over any inconsistent provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D. 16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience A. Upon 7 days’ written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; and 3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. B. Contractor shall not be paid for any loss of anticipated profits or revenue, post-termination overhead costs, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon 7 days’ written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, 7 days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 69 of 70 provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 17—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 17.01 Methods and Procedures A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final resolution under the provisions of this article: 1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full, pursuant to Article 12; and 2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work, or obligations under the Contract Documents, that arise after final payment has been made. B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this article, Owner or Contractor may: 1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; 2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process; or 3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 18—MISCELLANEOUS 18.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract requires the giving of written notice to Owner, Engineer, or Contractor, it will be deemed to have been validly given only if delivered: 1. in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the recipient’s place of business; 2. by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the recipient’s place of business; or 3. by e-mail to the recipient, with the words “Formal Notice” or similar in the e-mail’s subject line. 18.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 00 72 13 - Page 70 of 70 18.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 18.04 Limitation of Damages A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 18.05 No Waiver A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision will not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor will it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract. 18.06 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract or of the services of Contractor. 18.07 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 18.08 Assignment of Contract A. Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party to this Contract of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on the other party without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract. 18.09 Successors and Assigns A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 18.10 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - i SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Article 1— Definitions and Terminology ...................................................................................................................... 1 Article 2— Preliminary Matters .................................................................................................................................... 1 Article 3— Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................................... 2 Article 4— Commencement and Progress of the Work ................................................................................................ 2 Article 5— Site, Subsurface and Physical Conditions, Hazardous Environmental Conditions ..................................... 2 Article 6— Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................................... 3 Article 7— Contractor’s Responsibilities ...................................................................................................................... 7 Article 8— Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................................................ 7 Article 9— Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................................ 7 Article 10— Engineer’s Status During Construction .................................................................................................... 7 Article 11— Changes to the Contract ............................................................................................................................ 9 Article 12— Claims ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 Article 13— Cost of Work; Allowances, Unit Price Work ........................................................................................... 9 Article 14— Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work ................................... 10 Article 15— Payments to Contractor, Set Offs; Completions; Correction Period ....................................................... 10 Article 16— Suspension of Work and Termination .................................................................................................... 10 Article 17— Final Resolutions of Disputes ................................................................................................................. 11 Article 18— Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................... 12 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (2018). The General Conditions remain in full force and effect except as amended. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms, if any, used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. The paragraph address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the paragraph address system used in the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added—for example, “Paragraph SC-4.05.” ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01.A.16 Add the following to Paragraph 1.01.A.16: When the Project is to be constructed under multiple direct Contracts awarded by the Owner, the term “Contractor” shall mean the appropriate prime contractor. Whenever a specific prime Contractor is referred to, terms such as “General Contractor”, “Electrical Contractor”, “Plumbing Contractor”, “HVAC Contractor”, or other appropriate Contract-indicating term will be used. SC-1.01.A.40 Add the following to Paragraph 1.01.A.40: Trucking, shipping, delivery firms, consultants, and entities performing testing or inspection retained by Contractor or any Subcontractor are considered to be Subcontractors. SC-1.01.A.45 Add the following to Paragraph 1.01.A.45: Entities that rent construction equipment or machinery, but are not incorporated into the Work, are considered to be Suppliers. If such rental entity furnishes both equipment and one or more personnel to operate and maintain the equipment, such entity is a Subcontractor. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance SC-2.01 Delete Paragraphs 2.01.B. and C. in their entirety and insert the following in their place: B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner copies of the policies (including all endorsements, and identification of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles) of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in this Contract. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. 2.02 Copies of Documents SC-2.02 Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 2.02.A to read as follows: Owner shall furnish to Contractor one paper copies of the Contract Documents (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). SC-2.02 Delete Paragraph 2.02.A in its entirety and insert the following new paragraph in its place: A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor one paper copies of conformed Contract Documents incorporating and integrating all Addenda and amendments, if any, negotiated prior to the Effective Date of the Contract (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional paper copies of the conformed Contract Documents will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.06 Electronic Transmittals SC-2.06 Delete in its entirety Paragraph 2.06.B and replace with the following new paragraph: B. Electronic Document Protocol: Comply with Specifications Section 01 31 26 – Electronic Communication Protocols. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 2 ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent SC-3.01 Delete Paragraph 3.01.C in its entirety. SC-3.01 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 3.01.E: F. The Specifications and other verbal components of the Contract Documents may vary in form, format, and style. Some Specification sections are written in varying degrees of streamlined or declarative style and some Specifications sections may, in comparison, employ a more-narrative style. Omissions of such words and phrases as "Contractor shall," "in conformity with," "as shown," or "as specified" are intentional in streamlined language in the Contract Documents. Omitted words and phrases are incorporated by inference. Similar types of provisions may appear in various parts of a Specifications section or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not attempt to take advantage of any variation of form, format or style in Change Proposal(s) and Claim(s). G. Cross referencing of Specification sections in a Specifications section’s heading "Related Sections includes, but are not necessarily limited to: “and elsewhere within each Specifications section is provided as an aid and convenience to Contractor. Contractor shall not rely on cross referencing indicated and is responsible for coordinating the entire Work and providing a complete Project whether or not cross referencing is provided in each Specifications section or whether or not cross referencing is complete. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress SC-4.05.C Amend Paragraph 4.05.C by adding the following subparagraphs: 5. Weather-Related Delays a. If “abnormal weather conditions” as set forth in Paragraph 4.05.C.2 of the General Conditions are the basis for a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times, such request must be documented by data substantiating each of the following: (1) that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time in which the delay occurred, (2) that such weather conditions could not have been reasonably anticipated, and (3) that such weather conditions had an adverse effect on the Work on the critical path at the time of the delay. threshold precipitation quantity2) Determination of actual bad weather days during performance of the Work will be based on the weather records measured and recorded by National Weather Service weather monitoring station at Bozeman, Gallatin Field. ARTICLE 5—SITE, SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions SC-5.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.03.D: E. The following table lists the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data, and specifically identifies the Technical Data in the report upon which Contractor may rely: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 3 Report Title Date of Report Technical Data Geotechnical Evaluation Report – Proposed Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion January 28, 2008 Boring Logs from WWTP Area SC-5.04.A Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 5.04.A.4: 5. Contractor encounters human remains, recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites, historical sites, artifacts of potential archaeological or historical interest, or wetlands not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately cease operations that may disturb such area(s) and secure the adjacent Work; and Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations (Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features); 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions Report Title Date of Report Technical Data ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds SC-6.01 Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.01.A: 1. Required Performance Bond Form: The performance bond that Contractor furnishes will be in the form of EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond (2010, 2013, or 2018 edition). 2. Required Payment Bond Form: The payment bond that Contractor furnishes will be in the form of EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond (2010, 2013, or 2018 edition). SC-6.01 Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.01.B: 1. The correction period specified as one year after the date of Substantial Completion in Paragraph 15.08.A of the General Conditions is hereby revised to be two years after Substantial Completion. 2. After Substantial Completion, Contractor shall furnish a warranty bond issued in the form of EJCDC® C-612, Warranty Bond (2018). The warranty bond must be in a bond amount of 10 percent of the final Contract Price. The warranty bond period will extend to a date two years after Substantial Completion of the Work. Contractor shall deliver the fully executed warranty bond to Owner prior to or with the final Application for Payment, and in any event not later than 11 months after Substantial Completion. 3. The warranty bond must be issued by the same surety that issues the performance bond required under Paragraph 6.01.A of the General Conditions. 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions SC-6.02 Add the following paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.02.B: 1. Contractor may obtain worker’s compensation insurance from an insurance company that has not been rated by A.M. Best, provided that such company (a) is domiciled in the state in which the Project is located, (b) is certified or authorized as a worker’s compensation insurance provider by the appropriate state agency, and (c) has been accepted to provide worker’s compensation insurance for similar projects by the state within the last 12 months. 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance E. Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance, including, as applicable, United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act, Jones Act, stop-gap employer’s liability coverage for Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 4 monopolistic states, and foreign voluntary workers’ compensation (from available sources, notwithstanding the jurisdictional requirement of Paragraph 6.02.B of the General Conditions). Workers’ Compensation and Related Policies Policy limits of not less than: Workers’ Compensation State Statutory Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman’s) Statutory Foreign voluntary workers’ compensation (employer’s responsibility coverage), if applicable Statutory Employer’s Liability $500,000.00 F. Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against claims for: 1. damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees, 2. damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage, and 3. damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom. G. Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy must be written on a 1996 (or later) Insurance Services Organization, Inc. (ISO) commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage. a. Such insurance must be maintained for three years after final payment. b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, including but not limited to coverage of Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18. 3. Severability of interests and no insured-versus-insured or cross-liability exclusions. 4. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage. 5. Personal injury coverage. 6. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01 (together). If Contractor demonstrates to Owner that the specified ISO endorsements are not commercially available, then Contractor may satisfy this requirement by providing equivalent endorsements. 7. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04 “Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent. H. Commercial General Liability—Excluded Content: The commercial general liability insurance policy, including its coverages, endorsements, and incorporated provisions, must not include any of the following: 1. Any modification of the standard definition of “insured contract” (except to delete the railroad protective liability exclusion if Contractor is required to indemnify a railroad or others with respect to Work within 50 feet of railroad property). 2. Any exclusion for water intrusion or water damage. 3. Any provisions resulting in the erosion of insurance limits by defense costs other than those already incorporated in ISO form CG 00 01. 4. Any exclusion of coverage relating to earth subsidence or movement. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 5 5. Any exclusion for the insured’s vicarious liability, strict liability, or statutory liability (other than worker’s compensation). 6. Any limitation or exclusion based on the nature of Contractor’s work. 7. Any professional liability exclusion broader in effect than the most recent edition of ISO form CG 22 79. I. Commercial General Liability—Minimum Policy Limits Commercial General Liability Policy limits of not less than: General Aggregate $3,000,000.00 Products—Completed Operations Aggregate $3,000,000.00 Personal and Advertising Injury $2,000,000.00 Bodily Injury and Property Damage—Each Occurrence $1,000,000.00 J. Automobile Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The automobile liability policy must be written on an occurrence basis. Automobile Liability Policy limits of not less than: Bodily Injury Each Person $500,000.00 Each Accident $1,000,000.00 Property Damage Each Accident $1,000,000.00 or Combined Single Limit Combined Single Limit (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $1,000,000.00 K. Umbrella or Excess Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the Paragraphs above. The coverage afforded must be at least as broad as that of each and every one of the underlying policies. Excess or Umbrella Liability Policy limits of not less than: Each Occurrence $1,000,000.00 General Aggregate $3,000,000.00 L. Using Umbrella or Excess Liability Insurance to Meet CGL and Other Policy Limit Requirements: Contractor may meet the policy limits specified for employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability through the primary policies alone, or through combinations of the primary insurance policy’s policy limits and partial attribution of the policy limits of an umbrella or excess liability policy that is at least as broad in coverage as that of the underlying policy, as specified herein. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 6 If such umbrella or excess liability policy was required under this Contract, at a specified minimum policy limit, such umbrella or excess policy must retain a minimum limit of $$1,000,000.00 after accounting for partial attribution of its limits to underlying policies, as allowed above. 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance SC-6.04 Supplement Paragraph 6.04 with the following provisions: F. Builder’s Risk Requirements: The builder’s risk insurance must: 1. be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that at a minimum includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment stored and in transit, and must not exclude the coverage of the following risks: fire; windstorm; hail; flood; earthquake, volcanic activity, and other earth movement; lightning; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; and water damage (other than that caused by flood). a. Such policy will include an exception that results in coverage for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any defective workmanship, methods, design, or materials exclusions. b. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake, volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance will be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 2. cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials, supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication, construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner-furnished or assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract; and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring, falsework, and temporary structures. 3. cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of contractors, engineers, and architects). 4. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the premises of a manufacturer or Supplier). 5. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit. 6. allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth in this Contract. 7. allow for partial occupancy or use by Owner by endorsement, and without cancellation or lapse of coverage. 8. include performance/hot testing and start-up, if applicable. 9. be maintained in effect until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D of the General Conditions, or until written confirmation of Owner’s procurement of property insurance following Substantial Completion, whichever occurs first. 10 include as named insureds the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors (of every tier), and any other individuals or entities required by this Contract to be insured under such builder’s risk policy. For purposes of Paragraphs 6.04, 6.05, and 6.06 of the General Conditions, and this and all other Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 7 corresponding Supplementary Conditions, the parties required to be insured will be referred to collectively as “insureds.” a. a. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence SC-7.02 Add the following to Paragraph 7.02, following Paragraph 7.02.B: C. Unless Owner otherwise agrees in writing, the superintendent will be Contractor’s representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications given to or received from the superintendent shall be binding on Contractor. 7.03 Labor; Working Hours SC-7.03 Add the following new subparagraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.03.C: 1. Regular working hours will be 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM. 2. Owner's legal holidays can be found online here: https://www.bozeman.net/services/advanced-components/basic-pages/city-of-bozeman-events. SC-7.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.03.C: D. Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of overtime (premium) pay and other expense incurred by Owner for Engineer’s services (including those of the Resident Project Representative, if any), Owner's representative, and construction observation services, occasioned by the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, any legal holiday, or as overtime on any regular work day. If Contractor is responsible but does not pay, or if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 7.10 Taxes 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs SC-7.14 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.14.A: B Single Prime Contract: Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating exchange of safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall provide a centralized location for the maintenance of the safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available by any employer on the Site. Location of the material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information shall be readily accessible to the employees of employers on the Site. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. ARTICLE 9—OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. ARTICLE 10—ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.03 Resident Project Representative SC-10.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.03.B: C. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at the Site. RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general will be with Engineer and Contractor. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors will only be through or with the full knowledge or approval of Contractor. The RPR will: 1. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other Project-related meetings (but not Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 8 including Contractor’s safety meetings), and as appropriate prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof. 2. Safety Compliance: Comply with Site safety programs, as they apply to RPR, and if required to do so by such safety programs, receive safety training specifically related to RPR’s own personal safety while at the Site. 3. Liaison a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally through Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in providing information regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents. b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on-Site operations. c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when required for Contractor’s proper execution of the Work. 4. Review of Work; Defective Work a. Conduct on-Site observations of the Work to assist Engineer in determining, to the extent set forth in Paragraph 10.02, if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Observe whether any Work in place appears to be defective. This does not impose on either RPR or Engineer any obligation to find all, or any specific element of, defective Work, for which Contractor remains solely responsible. b. Observe whether any Work in place should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. 5. Inspections and Tests a. Observe Contractor-arranged inspections required by Laws and Regulations, including but not limited to (1) code-required tests and special inspections, and (2) those performed by public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. b. Observe specific tests, inspections, and other field quality control required by the Contract Documents and performed by Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier, or by testing or laboratories retained by any of them, . c. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. 6. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with Contractor and advise Contractor regarding quantities or extent of the Work eligible for payment. 7. Completion a. Participate in Engineer’s visits regarding inspection for Substantial Completion. b. Assist in the augmenting or amending the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final inspection. c. Final Inspection: Participate in Engineer’s visit to the Site, in the company of Owner and Contractor, regarding completion of the Work, and prepare a final punch list (if any) of items to be completed or corrected by Contractor. d. Observe whether items on the final punch list have been completed or corrected. d. Record Documents: Periodically during the Work, review with Contractor the status of Contractor’s record documents required by the Contract Documents and advise Contractor on whether such record documents appear to comply with the Contract’s requirements for record documents. Review final record documents submitted by Contractor. D. The RPR will not: 1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials, equipment (including “or-equal” items), or procedures or sequences indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract Documents. 3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. 4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control or responsibility over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction. 5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security protection, or safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations of Owner or Contractor. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 9 6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off-site by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer. 7. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part. ARTICLE 11—CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. ARTICLE 12—CLAIMS No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. ARTICLE 13—COST OF WORK; ALLOWANCES, UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work SC-13.01.B.5.c.(1) Supplement Paragraph 13.01.B.5.c.(1) by adding the following subparagraphs: a) Prior to commencing Work at the Site, submit to Owner, through Engineer, copies of the equipment rental agreements for Owner’s approval. b) Should Contractor perform Work using rented construction equipment or machinery without Owner’s written approval of the associated rental agreement and the parties subsequently disagree on the applicable rental rates, use of such construction equipment and machinery will be compensated on the basis of the rental rate book indicated in Paragraph SC-13.01.B.5.c.(2). c) When the rental rate book is used basis for determining compensation for construction equipment and machinery leased from a rental firm, the hourly rate for such equipment shall be determined in accordance with Paragraph 13.01.B.5.(2) of the General Conditions. SC-13.01.B.5.c.(2) Supplement Paragraph 13.01.B.5.c.(2) by adding the following sentence: The equipment rental rate book that governs the included costs for the rental of machinery and equipment owned by Contractor (or a related entity) under the Cost of the Work provisions of this Contract is the most current edition of Equipment Watch's Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment. SC-13.01.B.5.c Supplement Paragraph 13.01.B.5.c by adding the following subparagraphs: 4) Inactive Equipment and Machinery: Rental of construction equipment and machinery shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. Periods of inactivity for such construction equipment or machinery will not be compensable unless agreed upon in writing by Owner, unless the costs of disassembly, removal, transportation, reassembly, and remobilization, as submitted to and accepted by Owner (with advice of Engineer) would exceed the cost of continuing to rent the item(s) during the period(s) of inactivity. Contractor is responsible for obtaining Owner’s written approval for compensation for construction equipment and machinery for periods of inactivity. Owner is not responsible for retroactively approving such inactivity. “Period of inactivity” for such items includes periods when the construction equipment or machinery is not used or necessary for the logical and efficient progression of the Work, or when other, available equipment or machinery is suitable for performing the given task. 5) Condition of Equipment and Machinery: Construction equipment and machinery will be compensable only for serviceable construction equipment and machinery capable of efficiently performing its intended function at the Site. Construction equipment and machinery not in compliance with this Paragraph SC-13.01.B.5.c.5) is not eligible for compensation. 6) Capped Compensation: Compensation paid Contractor for a given item of Contractor-owned construction equipment or machinery will be capped at, and shall not exceed, the comparable purchase price of such item of equal or comparable capacity and capability. SC-13.01.C.2 Supplement Paragraph 13.01.C.2 by adding the following definition of small tools and hand tools: a. For purposes of this paragraph, “small tools and hand tools” means items in one or more of the following categories: (1) Items that are ordinarily required for the performing worker’s job function, including but not limited to equipment which ordinarily has no associated licensing, insurance, or substantive storage costs; such as hammers, Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 10 wrenches, socket tools, manual saws, power saws, chainsaws, common power tools, impact drills, threaders, benders, transits and theodolites and related equipment, and other tools transportable by hand, regardless of ownership of such items; (2) Items such as gang-boxes, ladders, hand carts and similar wheeled items manually operated by workers, extension cords, and similar items; (3) common testing equipment such as insulation testers (megger-testing equipment), amp meters, gas detectors, pressure gauges, and similar items; (4) A purchase price (if purchased new, at retail) of $500, although such limit is not absolute, and certain items may be deemed by Owner or Engineer as “small tools or hand tools” (and not eligible for compensation) even though such item may have a purchase price greater than the amount indicated in this Paragraph 13.01.C.2. SC-13.03 Delete Paragraph 13.03.E in its entirety and insert the following in its place: E. Adjustments in Unit Price 1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect to an item of Unit Price Work if: a. the extended price of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to five percent or more of the Contract Price (based on estimated quantities at the time of Contract formation) and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work actually furnished or performed by Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed materially and significantly as a result of the quantity change. 2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related changes in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform such other Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item. ARTICLE 14—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. ARTICLE 15—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR, SET OFFS; COMPLETIONS; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01 Progress Payments SC-15.01 Add the following new subparagraph to Paragraph 15.01.D: 1. Revise ten (10) days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner to thirty (30) days. 15.03 Substantial Completion SC-15.03.B Add the following new subparagraph to Paragraph 15.03.B: 1. If some or all of the Work has been determined by Engineer not to be at a point of Substantial Completion and will require re-inspection or re-testing by Engineer or other entity retained by Owner, the cost of such re-inspection or re-testing, including the cost of time, travel and living expenses, will be paid by Contractor to Owner. If Contractor does not pay, or the parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under this Article 15. 15.08 Correction Period SC-15.08.G Add the following new Paragraph 15.08.G: G. The correction period specified as one year after the date of Substantial Completion in Paragraph 15.08.A of the General Conditions is hereby revised to be the number of years set forth in Paragraph SC-6.01.B.1; or if no such revision has been made in SC-6.01.B, then the correction period is hereby specified to be two years after the date of Substantial Completion established in Engineer’s certificate of Substantial Completion. ARTICLE 16—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 11 ARTICLE 17—FINAL RESOLUTIONS OF DISPUTES 17.02 Arbitration SC-17.02 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.01. SC-17.02 Arbitration A. All matters subject to final resolution under this Article will be settled by arbitration administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules (subject to the conditions and limitations of this Paragraph SC-17.02). Any controversy or claim in the amount of $100,000 or less will be settled in accordance with. This agreement to arbitrate will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. B. The demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the selected arbitration administrator, and a copy will be concurrently sent to Engineer for information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the specific time required in Article 17, or, if no specified time is applicable, within a reasonable time after the matter in question has arisen, and in no event will any such demand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. C. The arbitration will be held in the same locality as the Site. D. The arbitrator(s) must be licensed engineers, contractors, attorneys, or construction managers. Hearings will take place pursuant to the standard procedures of the Construction Arbitration Rules that contemplate in-person hearings. The arbitrator(s) will have no authority to award punitive or other damages not measured by the prevailing party's actual damages, except as may be required by statute or the Contract. Any award in an arbitration initiated under this clause will be limited to monetary damages and include no injunction or direction to any party other than the direction to pay a monetary amount. E. The Arbitrator(s) will have the authority to allocate the costs of the arbitration process among the parties, but will only have the authority to allocate attorneys' fees if a specific Law or Regulation or this Contract permits them to do so. F. The award of the arbitrator(s) must be accompanied by a reasoned written opinion and a concise breakdown of the award. The written opinion will cite the Contract provisions deemed applicable and relied on in making the award. G. The parties agree that failure or refusal of a party to pay its required share of the deposits for arbitrator compensation or administrative charges will constitute a waiver by that party to present evidence or cross-examine witness. In such event, the other party shall be required to present evidence and legal argument as the arbitrator(s) may require for the making of an award. Such waiver will not allow for a default judgment against the non-paying party in the absence of evidence presented as provided for above. H. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract will include by consolidation, joinder, or in any other manner any other individual or entity (including Engineer, and Engineer’s consultants and the officers, directors, partners, agents, employees or consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this Contract unless: 1. the inclusion of such other individual or entity will allow complete relief to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration; 2. such other individual or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration, and which will arise in such proceedings; 3. such other individual or entity is subject to arbitration under a contract with either Owner or Contractor, or consents to being joined in the arbitration; and 4. the consolidation or joinder is in compliance with the arbitration administrator’s procedural rules. I. The award will be final. Judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal, subject to provisions of the Laws and Regulations relating to vacating or modifying an arbitral award. J. Except as may be required by Laws or Regulations, neither party nor an arbitrator may disclose the existence, content, or results of any arbitration hereunder without the prior written consent of both parties, with the exception of any disclosure required by Laws and Regulations or the Contract. To the extent any disclosure is allowed pursuant to the exception, the disclosure must be strictly and narrowly limited to maintain confidentiality to the extent possible. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 12 17.03 Attorneys’ Fees SC-17.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.02. SC-17.03 Attorneys’ Fees A. For any matter subject to final resolution under this Article, the prevailing party shall be entitled to an award of its attorneys’ fees incurred in the final resolution proceedings, in an equitable amount to be determined in the discretion of the court, arbitrator, arbitration panel, or other arbiter of the matter subject to final resolution, taking into account the parties’ initial demand or defense positions in comparison with the final result. ARTICLE 18—MISCELLANEOUS No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (EJCDC C-800-2018) 00 73 01 - 1 EXHIBIT A— Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FUNDING AGENCY SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR DOMESTIC CONTENT 00 73 03 - 1 SECTION 00 73 03 FUNDING AGENCY SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR DOMESTIC CONTENT PART 1 - DOMESTIC CONTENT BONUS CREDIT 1.1 SUMMARY A. This project is seeking to qualify for the Domestic Content Bonus Credit under the Clean Electricity Investment Tax Credit (IRC Section 48E) Direct Payments. Compliance with the Adjusted Percentage Rule (APR) for manufactured products is required for the constructed project. Bidders must demonstrate compliance using IRS Domestic Content Bonus Credit Amounts under the Inflation Reduction Act of 2022; First Updated Elective Safe Harbor, modifying Notice 2024-41 under Notice 2025-08. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Bidders shall submit a detailed breakdown of the project’s domestic content components, matching them to the Notice’s defined list, and showing the calculation of the Domestic Cost Percentage. A signed statement affirming reliance on IRS Notice 2025-8 and detailing the specific table(s) and components used must be submitted. B. Bidder acknowledges and agrees that it will provide documentation of evidence of domestic manufacturing from the manufacturer to the Owner or Engineer when so requested in order for such information to be provided to a third-party auditor. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS A. The Manufactured Product Domestic Content threshold for this project is anticipated to be 45% to 50%. B. Bidders must elect to use the assigned cost percentages provided in IRS Notice 2025-08 for Solar PV Ground-mount (Fixed) Project Components. This election is exclusive for the project; no other cost-based method or substitution of percentages will be considered for components listed in the following tables. C. The Bidder must indicate which manufactured product components (MPCs) from the table will be domestically manufactured as part of the bid and use the corresponding Assigned Cost Percentages (ACPs). D. Components not listed in the provided table must be treated as having a zero ACP for purposes of the domestic content calculation, or a justification for their inclusion (if new guidance is issued) must be provided. From IRS Notice 2025-08, Section 5.05 Updated Table for Solar PV Ground-Mount Applicable Project Component (APC) Manufactured Product Components (MPC) Ground-mount (Fixed) (%) Ground-mount (Fixed) with Domestic c-Si PV Cells & Domestic Wafers (%) PV module Cells 53.2 66.6 Frame/Backrail 8.5 6.1 Front Glass 8.4 6.1 Encapsulant 5.4 3.8 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FUNDING AGENCY SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR DOMESTIC CONTENT 00 73 03 - 2 Backsheet/Backglass 5.4 3.8 Junction Box 1.4 1.0 Edge Seals 0.4 0.3 Pottants 0.4 0.3 Bus Ribbons 2.1 1.5 Bypass Diodes 0.6 0.4 Production1 6.72 4.8 Inverter Printed Circuit Board Assemblies 3.1 2.2 Electrical Parts 1.1 0.8 Thermal Management System 0.7 0.5 Enclosure & Skids 0.9 0.6 Production 1.72 1.22 Steel photovoltaic module racking Steel/Iron Product Steel/Iron Product Steel pile or Steel ground screw Steel/Iron Product Steel/Iron Product Steel or Iron reinforcing products in foundation Steel/Iron Product Steel/Iron Product Total 100 100 1 Crystalline silicon cells. Crystalline silicon cells, also referred to as c-Si cells, means a cell in a PV module, as defined in section 5.05(4) of IRS Notice 2025-8, that is made of silicon atoms connected to form a lattice. 2 Drive system. Drive system means the component that transmits operating instructions to the actuator. 1.4 STRUCTURAL STEEL REQUIREMENTS A. 100% of structural steel elements as included in the above table must be domestically manufactured. B. Mill certifications proving the domestic manufacture of such steel will be required prior to Engineer approval of any material submittals containing structural steel components. The determination of what constitutes a structural steel component shall be the exclusive determination of the Engineer. 1.5 FEDERAL ENTITY OF CONCERN (FEOC) REQUIREMENTS This Section specifies requirements for Contractor compliance with Foreign Entity of Concern (FEOC) restrictions applicable to federally funded infrastructure projects. A. DEFINITIONS 1. Foreign Entity of Concern (FEOC): A foreign entity that meets any of the following criteria: a. Designated as a foreign terrorist organization by the Secretary of State. b. Included on the Department of the Treasury's Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons List (SDN List), or an entity for which persons on the SDN List hold, Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FUNDING AGENCY SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR DOMESTIC CONTENT 00 73 03 - 3 individually or in aggregate, directly or indirectly, at least 50 percent of the outstanding voting interest. c. Owned by, controlled by, or subject to the jurisdiction or direction of a government of a Covered Nation, including entities that are: 1) Incorporated in, headquartered in, or performing relevant activities in a Covered Nation. 2) Organized under the laws of, or having a principal place of business in, a Covered Nation. 3) An entity where 25 percent or more of outstanding voting interest, board seats, or equity interest is held directly or indirectly by a Covered Nation government or its nationals. d. Alleged by the Attorney General to have been involved in activities for which a conviction was obtained under the Espionage Act, the Economic Espionage Act, the Arms Export Control Act, the Atomic Energy Act, the Export Control Reform Act of 2018, or the International Emergency Economic Powers Act. e. Included on the Bureau of Industry and Security's Entity List. f. Determined by the Secretary of Energy, in consultation with the Secretary of Defense and the Director of National Intelligence, to be engaged in unauthorized conduct detrimental to the national security or foreign policy of the United States. 2. Covered Nations: The People's Republic of China, the Russian Federation, the Democratic People's Republic of North Korea, and the Islamic Republic of Iran. 3. Prohibited Foreign Entity (PFE): As defined in the One Big, Beautiful Bill Act, means either a Specified Foreign Entity or a Foreign Influenced Entity. 4. Specified Foreign Entity (SFE): As defined in IRC, includes: a. Chinese military companies operating in the United States. b. Entities subject to Uyghur Forced Labor Prevention Act restrictions. c. Entities ineligible for Department of Defense contracts per the National Defense Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 2021. d. Foreign-controlled entities where more than 50 percent of stock, profit/capital interests, or beneficial interest is held by a government, individual, or business of a Covered Nation. B. SUBMITTALS 1. Supply Chain Documentation: Submit for each major component incorporated into the Work: a. Manufacturer name, country of incorporation, and principal place of business. b. Country of origin for manufactured products and components. c. Certification that the manufacturer does not meet any criteria of a Foreign Entity of Concern. 2. Ongoing Compliance Notification: Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer in writing within five (5) calendar days if, at any time during the Contract, any previously submitted certification becomes inaccurate due to changes in ownership, control, jurisdiction, or other material facts. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Owner reserves the right to audit Contractor's supply chain documentation at any time during the Contract to verify FEOC compliance. 2. Owner reserves the right to reject any material, product, or equipment sourced from or manufactured by a Foreign Entity of Concern or Prohibited Foreign Entity. 3. Contractor shall maintain records of all FEOC compliance documentation for a minimum of three (3) years after Final Completion. 4. Contractor shall include FEOC compliance requirements in all subcontracts and purchase orders. D. PRODUCTS 1. No manufactured product, component, or material incorporated into the Work shall be mined, produced, or manufactured by a Foreign Entity of Concern as defined herein. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FUNDING AGENCY SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR DOMESTIC CONTENT 00 73 03 - 4 2. No manufactured product, component, or material incorporated into the Work shall be sourced from entities included on: 3. Where Build America, Buy America (BABA) requirements also apply, FEOC restrictions are cumulative and shall not be construed as a substitute for BABA domestic content requirements. E. NON-COMPLIANCE 1. If a specified product is found to be manufactured by or sourced from a Foreign Entity of Concern after Contract award, Contractor shall: a. Immediately notify the Owner and Engineer. b. Propose a substitute product from a compliant manufacturer within seven (7) calendar days. c. Bear all costs associated with the substitution, including design revisions, schedule impacts, and resubmittal costs. 2. Installation of any product, component, or material sourced from a Foreign Entity of Concern shall be grounds for: a. Rejection of the installed Work. b. Removal and replacement at Contractor's sole expense. c. Withholding of payment for affected Work until compliant materials are installed. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE 00 73 46 - 1 00 73 46 WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE Prevailing Wages – Project Rates (Comprised of Montana Prevailing Wage Rates for Heavy Construction Services 2026 pages plus this cover page) Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Employment Standards Division Montana Department of Labor and Industry P. O. Box 8011 Helena, MT 59604 Phone 406-444-6543 The department welcomes questions, comments, and suggestions from the public. In addition, we’ll do our best to provide information in an accessible format, upon request, in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act. MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The Commissioner of the Department of Labor and Industry, in accordance with Sections 18-2-401 and 18-2-402 of the Montana Code Annotated (MCA), has determined the standard prevailing rate of wages for the occupations listed in this publication. The wages specified herein control the prevailing rate of wages for the purposes of Section 18-2-401, et seq., MCA. Each employer is required to pay (as a minimum) the rate of wages, including fringe benefits, travel allowance, zone pay and per diem applicable to the classification under which the work is being performed as provided in the attached wage determinations. All Montana Prevailing Wage Rates are available on the department’s website at https://erd.dli.mt.gov/labor-standards/state- prevailing-wage- rates or by contacting the department at (406) 444-6543. In addition, this publication provides general information concerning compliance with Montana’s Prevailing Wage Law and the payment of prevailing wages. For detailed compliance information relating to public works contracts and payment of prevailing wage rates, please consult the regulations on the department's website at https://erd.dli.mt.gov/labor-standards/public-contracts-prevailing-wage-law/ or contact the department at (406) 444-6543. SARAH SWANSON Commissioner Department of Labor and Industry State of Montana MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE RATES FOR HEAVY CONSTRUCTION SERVICES 2026 Effective: April 25, 2026 These revised rates supersede the previously posted 2026 rates. Greg Gianforte, Governor State of Montana Sarah Swanson, Commissioner Department of Labor & Industry To obtain copies of prevailing wage rate schedules, or for information relating to public works projects and payment of prevailing wage rates, visit ESD at erd.dli.mt.gov/labor-standards or contact: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS: WAGE RATES: A.Date of Publication ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……. 3 B.Definition of Heavy Construction …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..…............. 3 C.Definition of Public Works Contract ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….... 3 D.Prevailing Wage Schedule ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………… 3 E.Rates to Use for Projects ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..…………… 3 F.Wage Rate Adjustments for Multiyear Contracts ……………………………………………………………………………………………….………… 3 G.Fringe Benefits ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4 H.Dispatch City ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……. 4 I.Zone Pay …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4 J.Computing Travel Benefits ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………… 4 K.Per Diem …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4 L.Apprentices ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..……………………….. 4 M.Posting Notice of Prevailing Wages ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 N.Employment Preference …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….…………………………....... 5 O.Projects of a Mixed Nature ............................................................................................................................................................ 5 P.Occupations Definitions Website ................................................................................................................................................... 5 Q.Welder Rates ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 R.Foreman Rates …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..……. 5 S Proper Classification for Pipefitter and Laborer/Pipelayer Work on Water and Wastewater Treatment Plants ……………..… 5 BOILERMAKERS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..………………….. 6 BRICK, BLOCK, AND STONE MASONS ……………………………………………………………………………………….......................................... 6 CARPENTERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 CEMENT MASONS AND CONCRETE FINISHERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS OPERATORS GROUP 1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….............................................. 7 OPERATORS GROUP 2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7 OPERATORS GROUP 3 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 OPERATORS GROUP 4 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 OPERATORS GROUP 5 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 OPERATORS GROUP 6 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 OPERATORS GROUP 7 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 CONSTRUCTION LABORERS LABORERS GROUP 1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 LABORERS GROUP 2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 LABORERS GROUP 3 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 10 LABORERS GROUP 4 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 10 DIVERS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 10 DIVER TENDERS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 11 ELECTRICIANS …………………………………………......................................................................................................................................... 11 INSULATION WORKERS - MECHANICAL (HEAT AND FROST) ………………………………………………………………............................ 11 IRONWORKERS - STRUCTURAL STEEL AND REBAR PLACERS …………………………………………………………………………………. 12 LINE CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS …………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………. 12 GROUNDMAN ………………………………………………………………………………………………...........……………………………………………………….. 12 LINEMAN ……………………………………………………………………………………………...........………………………………………………………………….. 12 MILLWRIGHTS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 13 PAINTERS ……………………………………………………………………………..............….......................................................................................... 13 PILE BUCKS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 13 PLUMBERS, PIPEFITTERS, AND STEAMFITTERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 13 SPRINKLERFITTERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………............................................... 14 TRUCK DRIVERS ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 14 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 3 A.Date of Publication April 25, 2026 B.Definition of Heavy Construction The Administrative Rules of Montana (ARM), 24.17.501(4) – (4)(b), states “Heavy construction projects include, but are not limited to, those projects that are not properly classified as either ‘building construction’, or ‘highway construction.’ Heavy construction projects include, but are not limited to, antenna towers, bridges (major bridges designed for commercial navigation), breakwaters, caissons (other than building or highway), canals, channels, channel cut-offs, chemical complexes or facilities (other than buildings), cofferdams, coke ovens, dams, demolition (not incidental to construction), dikes, docks, drainage projects, dredging projects, electrification projects (outdoor), fish hatcheries, flood control projects, industrial incinerators (other than building), irrigation projects, jetties, kilns, land drainage (not incidental to other construction), land leveling (not incidental to other construction), land reclamation, levees, locks and waterways, oil refineries (other than buildings), pipe lines, ponds, pumping stations (prefabricated drop-in units – not buildings), railroad construction, reservoirs, revetments, sewage collection and disposal lines, sewers (sanitary, storm, etc.), shoreline maintenance, ski tows, storage tanks, swimming pools (outdoor), subways (other than buildings), tipples, tunnels, unsheltered piers and wharves, viaducts (other than highway), water mains, waterway construction, water supply lines (not incidental to building), water and sewage treatment plants (other than buildings) and wells.” C.Definition of Public Works Contract Section 18-2-401(11)(a), MCA defines “public works contract” as “…a contract for construction services let by the state, county, municipality, school district, or political subdivision or for nonconstruction services let by the state,county, municipality, or political subdivision in which the total cost of the contract is in excess of $25,000...”. D.Prevailing Wage Schedule This publication covers only Heavy Construction occupations and rates in the specific localities mentioned herein. These rates will remain in effect until superseded by a more current publication. Current prevailing wage rate schedules for Building Construction, Highway Construction and Nonconstruction Services occupations can be found on the department's website at https://erd.dli.mt.gov/labor-standards/state-prevailing-wage-rates/ or by contacting the department at (406) 444-6543. E.Rates to Use for Projects ARM, 24.17.127(1)(c), states “The wage rates applicable to a particular public works project are those in effect at the time the bid specifications are advertised.” F.Wage Rate Adjustments for Multiyear Contracts Section 18-2-417, MCA states:“(1) Any public works contract that by the terms of the original contract calls for more than 30 months to fullyperform must include a provision to adjust, as provided in subsection (2), the standard prevailing rate of wages to be paid to the workers performing the contract. (2) The standard prevailing rate of wages paid to workers under a contract subject to this section must be adjusted 12 months after the date of the award of the public works contract. The amount of the adjustment must be a 3% increase. The adjustment must be made and applied every 12 months for the term of the contract. (3) Any increase in the standard rate of prevailing wages for workers under this section is the sole responsibility of the contractor and any subcontractors and not the contracting agency.” Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 4 G. Fringe Benefits Section 18-2-412, MCA states: “(1) To fulfill the obligation...a contractor or subcontractor may: (a) pay the amount of fringe benefits and the basic hourly rate of pay that is part of the standard prevailing rate of wages directly to the worker or employee in cash; (b) make an irrevocable contribution to a trustee or a third person pursuant to a fringe benefit fund, plan, or program that meets the requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 or that is a bona fide program approved by the U. S. department of labor; or (c) make payments using any combination of methods set forth in subsections (1)(a) and (1)(b) so that the aggregate of payments and contributions is not less than the standard prevailing rate of wages, including fringe benefits and travel allowances, applicable to the district for the particular type of work being performed. (2) The fringe benefit fund, plan, or program described in subsection (1)(b) must provide benefits to workers or employees for health care, pensions on retirement or death, life insurance, disability and sickness insurance, or bona fide programs that meet the requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 or that are approved by the U. S. department of labor.” Fringe benefits are paid for all hours worked (straight time and overtime hours). However, fringe benefits are not to be considered a part of the hourly rate of pay for calculating overtime, unless there is a collectively bargained agreement in effect that specifies otherwise. H.Dispatch City Section 18-2-411(6),MCA, defines dispatch city as “...the courthouse in the city from the following list which is closest to the center of the job: Billings, Bozeman, Butte, Great Falls, Helena, Kalispell, Miles City, Missoula and Sidney.” I.Zone Pay Zone pay is not travel pay. ARM, 24.17.103(25), defines zone pay as “...an amount added to the base pay; the combined sum then becomes the new base wage rate to be paid for all hours worked on the project. Zone pay must be determined by measuring the road miles one way over the shortest practical maintained route from the dispatch city to the center of the job.” See section H above for a list of dispatch cities. J.Computing Travel Benefits ARM, 24.17.103(23), states “‘Travel pay,’ also referred to as ‘travel allowance,’ is and must be paid for travel both to and from the job site, except those with special provisions listed under the classification. The rate is determined by measuring the road miles one direction over the shortest practical maintained route from the dispatch city or the employee's home, whichever is closer, to the center of the job.” See section H above for a list of dispatch cities. K.Per DiemARM, 24.17.103(19), states “‘Per diem’ typically covers costs associated with board and lodging expenses. Per diem is paid when an employee is required to work at a location outside the daily commuting distance and is required to stay at that location overnight or longer.” L.Apprentices Wage rates for apprentices registered in approved federal or state apprenticeship programs are contained in those programs. Additionally, Section 18-2-416(2), MCA states, “…The full amount of any applicable fringe benefits must be paid to the apprentice while the apprentice is working on the public works contract.” Apprentices not registered in approved federal or state apprenticeship programs will be paid the appropriate journey level prevailing wage rate when working on a public works contract. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 5 M. Posting Notice of Prevailing Wages Section 18-2-406, MCA, provides that contractors, subcontractors, and employers who are “…performing work or providing construction services under public works contracts, as provided in this part, shall post in a prominent andaccessible site on the project or staging area, not later than the first day of work and continuing for the entire duration of the project, a legible statement of all wages and fringe benefits to be paid to the employees.” N. Employment Preference Sections 18-2-403 and 18-2-409, MCA require contractors to give preference to the employment of bona fide Montana residents in the performance of work on public works contracts. O. Projects of a Mixed Nature Section 18-2-418, MCA states: “(1) The contracting agency shall determine, based on the preponderance of labor hours to be worked, whether the public works construction services project is classified as a highway construction project, a heavy construction project, or a building construction project. (2)Once the project has been classified, employees in each trade classification who are working on that project must be paid at the rate for that project classification” P.Occupations DefinitionsYou can find definitions for these occupations on the following Bureau of Labor Statistics website: http://www.bls.gov/oes/current/oes_stru.htm Q.Welder Rates Welders receive the rate prescribed for the craft performing an operation to which welding is incidental. R.Foreman Rates Rates are no longer set for foremen. However, if a foreman performs journey level work, the foreman must be paid at least the journey level rate. S.Proper Classification for Pipefitter and Laborer/Pipelayer Work on Water and Wastewater Treatment Plants The proper classification for the following work is Pipefitter, when it is performed inside a building structure or performed at a location which will later be inside of a building: Joining steel pipe larger than 12 inches in diameter with bolted flange connections that has been pre-fabricated off site and does not require any modification such as cutting, grinding, welding, or other fabrication in order to be installed. All other work previously classified as pipefitter remains in that classification. The proper classification for that work when it is at a location that will always be outside a building is Pipelayer, which is under the Laborer Group 3 classification. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 6 WAGE RATES BOILERMAKERS Wage Benefit $41.25 $29.65 Duties Include: Construct, assemble, maintain, and repair stationary steam boilers, boiler house auxiliaries, process vessels, pressure vessels and penstocks. Bulk storage tanks and bolted steel tanks. ↑ Back to Table of Contents BRICK, BLOCK, AND STONE MASONS Wage Benefit $32.32 $16.78 ↑ Back to Table of Contents CARPENTERS Wage Benefit $38.05 $16.33 ↑ Back to Table of Contents CEMENT MASONS AND CONCRETE FINISHERS Wage Benefit $31.13 $6.31 Duties Include: Smooth and finish surfaces of poured concrete, such as floors, walks, sidewalks, or curbs. Align forms for sidewalks, curbs, or gutters. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $4.00/hr. >60mi. + $6.00/hr. Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $2.95/hr. >60mi. + $4.75/hr. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 7 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 1 Wage Benefit $35.97 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Air Compressor; Auto Fine Grader; Belt Finishing; Boring Machine (Small); Cement Silo; Crane, A-Frame Truck Crane; Crusher Conveyor; DW-10, 15, and 20 Tractor Roller; Farm Tractor; Forklift; Form Grader; Front-End Loader, under 1 cu. yd; Oiler, Herman Nelson Heater; Mucking Machine; Oiler, All Except Cranes/Shovels; Pumpman. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 2 Wage Benefit $37.32 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Air Doctor; Backhoe\Excavator\Shovel, up to and incl. 3 cu. yds; Bit Grinder; Bituminous Paving Travel Plant; Boring Machine, Large; Broom, Self-Propelled; Concrete Travel Batcher; Concrete Float & Spreader; Concrete Bucket Dispatcher; Concrete Finish Machine; Concrete Conveyor; Distributor; Dozer, Rubber-Tired, Push, & Side Boom; Elevating Grader\Gradall; Field Equipment Serviceman; Front-End Loader, 1 cu. yd up to and incl. 5 cu. yds; Grade Setter; Heavy Duty Drills, All Types; Hoist\Tugger, All; Hydralift Forklifts & Similar; Industrial Locomotive; Motor Patrol (except finish); Mountain Skidder; Oiler, Cranes\Shovels; Pavement Breaker, EMSCO; Power Saw, Self-Propelled; Pugmill; Pumpcrete\Grout Machine; Punch Truck; Roller, other than Asphalt; Roller, Sheepsfoot (Self- Propelled); Roller, 25 tons and over; Ross Carrier; Rotomill, under 6 ft; Trenching Machine; Washing /Screening Plant ↑ Back to Table of Contents Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 8 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 3 Wage Benefit $37.91 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Asphalt Paving Machine; Asphalt Screed; Backhoe\Excavator\Shovel, over 3 cu. yds; Cableway Highline; Concrete Batch Plant; Concrete Curing Machine; Concrete Pump; Cranes, Creter; Cranes, Electric Overhead; Cranes, 24 tons and under; Curb Machine\Slip Form Paver; Finish Dozer; Front-End Loader, over 5 cu. yds; Mechanic\Welder; Pioneer Dozer; Roller Asphalt (Breakdown & Finish); Rotomill, over 6 ft; Scraper, Single, Twin, or Pulling Belly-Dump; YO-YO Cat Haul Truck, Articulating Trucks, Vac Truck. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 4 Wage Benefit $38.98 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Asphalt\Hot Plant Operator; Cranes, 25 tons up to and incl. 44 tons; Crusher Operator; Finish Motor Patrol; Finish Scraper. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 5 Wage Benefit $40.07 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 45 tons up to and incl. 74 tons. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 6 Wage Benefit $41.15 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 75 tons up to and incl. 149 tons; Cranes, Whirley (All). ↑ Back to Table of Contents Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 9 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 7 Wage Benefit $42.23 $18.10 This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 150 tons up to and incl. 250 tons; Cranes, over 250 tons—add $1.00 for every 100 tons over 250 tons; Crane, Tower (All); Crane Stiff-Leg or Derrick; Helicopter Hoist. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 1/FLAG PERSON FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL No Rate Established ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 2 Wage Benefit $27.96 $10.82 This group includes but is not limited to: General Labor; Asbestos Removal; Burning Bar; Bucket Man; Carpenter Tender; Caisson Worker; Cement Mason Tender; Cement Handler (dry); Chuck Tender; Choker Setter; Concrete Worker; Curb Machine-lay Down; Crusher and Batch Worker; Heater Tender; Fence Erector; Landscape Laborer; Landscaper; Lawn Sprinkler Installer; Pipe Wrapper; Pot Tender; Powderman Tender; Rail and Truck Loaders and Unloaders; Riprapper; Sign Erection; Guardrail and Jersey Rail; Spike Driver; Stake Jumper; Signalman; Tail Hoseman; Tool Checker and Houseman. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Per Diem: >60 mi. $150/day Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $3.05/hr. >60 mi. + $4.85/hr. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 10 CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 3 Wage Benefit $30.62 $11.89 This group includes but is not limited to: Concrete Vibrator; Dumpman (Grademan); Equipment Handler; Geotextile and Liners; High-Pressure Nozzleman; Jackhammer (Pavement Breaker) Non-Riding Rollers; Pipelayer; Posthole Digger (Power); Power Driven Wheelbarrow; Rigger; Sandblaster; Sod Cutter-Power and Tamper. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 4 This group includes but is not limited to: Hod Carrier; Water Well Laborer; Blaster; Wagon Driller; Asphalt Raker; Cutting Torch; Grade Setter; High-Scaler; Power Saws (Faller & Concrete); Powderman; Rock & Core Drill; Track or Truck Mounted Wagon Drill and Welder incl. Air Arc ↑ Back to Table of Contents DIVERS Stand-By Diving Wage Benefit $55.24 $17.28 $110.48 $17.28 Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone 31-60 mi. + $4.00/hr. >61 mi.+ $6.00/hr. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Wage Benefit $25.55 $13.44 Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $3.05/hr. >60 mi. + $4.85/hr. Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $3.05/hr. >60 mi. + $4.85/hr. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 11 DIVER TENDERS ↑ Back to Table of Contents ELECTRICIANS Wage Benefit $41.92 $16.32 ↑ Back to Table of Contents INSULATION WORKERS - MECHANICAL (HEAT AND FROST) Duties Include: Insulate pipes, ductwork or other mechanical systems. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Wage Benefit $54.24 $17.28 Wage Benefit $45.51 $22.94 Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone 31-60 mi. + $4.00/hr. >61 mi. + $6.00/hr. Duties Include: Electrical wiring; equipment and fixtures; streetlights; electrical control systems. Installation and/or adjusting of building automation controls also during testing and balancing, commissioning and retro-commissioning. Travel Pay: 0-30 mi. free 31-40 mi. $30/day >40-50 mi. $40/day >50-60 mi. $55/day >60 mi. $65/day, plus: $0.66 for each mile over 60, up to $400 unless: •Employee traveling in employee’s vehicle on employer’s time, then rate changes to $0.20/mi., only for miles over 60. •Employee traveling in company-provided vehicle with company-paid fuel, no additional travel pay mileage required. Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free 31-40 mi. $3.75/hr. >40-50 mi. $5.00/hr. >50-60 mi. $6.88/hr. >60 mi. $8.13/hr. only if employee is commuting, if employee is staying over, Per Diem applies instead. Per Diem: 60+ mi. $130/day; or, employer pays for lodging + $35/day for meals. Per Diem: 60+ mi. $90/day Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 12 IRONWORKERS – REINFORCING IRON AND REBAR WORKERS Wage Benefit $48.00 $25.78 Duties Include: Position and secure steel bars or mesh in concrete forms in order to reinforce concrete. Use a variety of fasteners, rod-bending machines, blowtorches, and hand tools. Includes rod busters. ↑ Back to Table of Contents IRONWORKERS – STRUCTURAL IRON AND STEEL WORKERS Wage Benefit $43.32 $25.78 Duties Include: Structural steel erection; assemble prefabricated metal buildings; cut, bend, tie, and place rebar; energy producing windmill type towers; metal bleacher seating; handrail fabrication and ornamental steel. LINE CONSTRUCTION – EQUIPMENT OPERATORS No Rate Established Duties Include: All work on substations ↑ Back to Table of Contents LINE CONSTRUCTION – GROUNDMAN Benefit Wage Duties Include All work on substations ↑ Back to Table of Contents LINE CONSTRUCTION – LINEMAN $18.22 Benefit Wage $19.96 ↑ Back to Table of Contents $30.33 $55.94 Duties Include: All work on substations ↑ Back to Table of Contents Per Diem: 0-45 mi. free 45-85 mi. + $100/day >85 mi.+ $150/day Per Diem: 0-45 mi. free 45-85 mi. + $100/day >85 mi.+ $150/day Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 13 MILLWRIGHTS Wage Benefit $45.26 $23.71 ↑ Back to Table of Contents PAINTERS Wage $25.00 Benefit No Rate Established ↑ Back to Table of Contents PILE BUCKS Wage Benefit $38.05 $16.33 Duties Include: Set up crane; set up hammer; weld tips on piles; set leads; ensure piles are driven straight with the use of level or plum bob. Give direction to crane operator as to speed, and direction of swing. Cut piles to grade. ↑ Back to Table of Contents PLUMBERS, PIPEFITTERS, AND STEAMFITTERS $46.95 $19.47 Duties Include: Assemble, install, alter, and repair pipelines or pipe systems that carry water, steam, air, other liquids or gases. Testing of piping systems, commissioning and retro- commissioning. Workers in this occupation may also install heating and cooling equipment and mechanical control systems. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Wage Benefit Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone>30-60 mi. + $4.00/hr. >60 mi. + $6.00/hr. Per Diem: $110/day or employer pays for single occupancy lodging Zone Pay: 0-30 mi free zone >30-60 mi. + $4.00/hr. >60 mi. + $6.00/hr. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 14 SPRINKLER FITTERS No Rate Established Duties Include but not limited to: Any and all fire protection systems: Installation, dismantling, inspection, testing, maintenance, repairs, adjustments, and corrections of all fire protection and fire control systems, including both overhead and underground water mains, all piping, fire hydrants, standpipes, air lines, tanks, and pumps used in connection with sprinkler and alarm systems. ↑ Back to Table of Contents No Rate Established Benefit TRUCK DRIVERS Pilot Car Driver Truck Driver $32.56 $8.50 Truck drivers include but are not limited to: Combination Truck and Concrete Mixer and Transit Mixer; Dry Batch Trucks; Distributor Driver; Dumpman; Dump Trucks and similar equipment; Dumpster; Flat Trucks; Lumber Carriers; Lowboys; Pickup; Powder Truck Driver; Power Boom; Serviceman; Service Truck/Fuel Truck/Tireperson; Truck Mechanic; Trucks with Power Equipment; Warehouseman, Partsman, Cardex and Warehouse Expeditor; Water Trucks. ↑ Back to Table of Contents Wage Zone Pay: 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. + $3.05/hr. >60 mi. + $4.85/hr. Special Provision: Zone pay only applies to the Truck Driver classification. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CHANGE PROPOSAL REQUEST 00 83 00 - 1 SECTION 00 83 00 CHANGE PROPOSAL REQUEST Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Copyright 2015 HDR Engineering, Inc. Change Proposal Request No. ____ Project Name: Owner’s Project No. (if applicable): Project Owner: City of Bozeman Regulatory Agency Project No. (if applicable): HDR Project No. Initiated by: Engineer Contractor Contractor: Date: Attention: The following is a proposed change to the Contract on this project. Below is a description and price for the proposed change. • A breakdown of cost shall be provided upon request by the Owner or Engineer. • Work shall not commence until authorized by the Owner. By All work shall be in accordance with the terms, stipulations, and conditions of the original Contract Documents. If the work herein provided for is Approved by Change Order, the time of completion will be: HDR Recommendation: Recommend Acceptance Do Not Recommend Acceptance Increased Decreased Unchanged By: HDR Engineering, Inc. by calendar days. Date This change will: Add Deduct No Change Owner’s Action: $ Accepted Not Accepted General Contractor By: Owner Date Date City of Bozeman WRF, Bozeman On-Call 2025 TO3 Solar PWR 10438546 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EJCDC C-940 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE 2018 00 94 00 - i WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE NO.: [Number of Work Change Directive] Owner: City of Bozeman Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: HDR Engineering Engineer’s Project No.: 10438546 Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Project: City of Bozeman WRF Bozeman On-Call 2025 TO3 Solar PWR Contract Name: Date Issued: Effective Date of Work Change Directive: Contractor is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): Description: [Description of the change to the Work] Attachments: [List documents related to the change to the Work] Purpose for the Work Change Directive: [Describe the purpose for the change to the Work] Directive to proceed promptly with the Work described herein, prior to agreeing to change in Contract Price and Contract Time, is issued due to: Notes to User—Check one or both of the following ☐ Non-agreement on pricing of proposed change. ☐ Necessity to proceed for schedule or other reasons. Estimated Change in Contract Price and Contract Times (non-binding, preliminary): Contract Price: $ [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated]. Contract Time: days [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated]. Basis of estimated change in Contract Price: ☐ Lump Sum ☐ Unit Price ☐ Cost of the Work ☐ Other Recommended by Engineer Authorized by Owner By: Title: Date: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EJCDC C-941 CHANGE ORDER 2018 00 94 10 - i CHANGE ORDER NO.: [Number of Change Order] Owner: City of Bozeman Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: HDR Engineering Engineer’s Project No.: 10438546 Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Project: City of Bozeman WRF Bozeman On-Call 2025 TO3 Solar PWR Contract Name: Date Issued: Effective Date of Change Order: The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order: Description: Attachments: [List documents related to the change] Change in Contract Price Change in Contract Times [State Contract Times as either a specific date or a number of days] Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No. 1 to No. [Number of previous Change Order]: [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No.1 to No. [Number of previous Change Order]: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: Increase this Change Order: [Increase] [Decrease] this Change Order: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: Recommended by Engineer (if required) Authorized by Owner By: Title: Date: Authorized by Owner Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable) By: Title: Date: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EJCDC C-941 CHANGE ORDER 2018 00 94 10 - ii Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EJCDC C-942 FIELD ORDER 2018 00 94 20 - i FIELD ORDER NO.: [Number of Field Order] Owner: City of Bozeman Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: HDR Engineering Engineer’s Project No.: 10438546 Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Project: City of Bozeman WRF Bozeman On-Call 2025 TO3 Solar PWRImprovements Project Contract Name: Date Issued: Effective Date of Field Order: Contractor is hereby directed to promptly perform the Work described in this Field Order, issued in accordance with Paragraph 11.04 of the General Conditions, for minor changes in the Work without changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Contractor considers that a change in Contract Price or Contract Times is required, submit a Change Proposal before proceeding with this Work. Reference: Specification Section(s): Drawing(s) / Details (s): Description: [Description of the change to the Work] Attachments: [List documents supporting change] Issued by Engineer By: Title: Date: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 1 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Location and description of Work and prior uses of the Site. 2. Construction Contracts for this Project. 3. Others retained by Owner for the Project. 4. Work by others under Owner’s control on other projects. 5. Sequence and progress of Work. 6. Contractor’s use of the Site. 7. Easements and rights-of-way. 8. Partial utilization by Owner. 9. Utility owners. 10. Tree trimming, clearing, and tree removal. B. Related Requirements: 1. Include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site. b. Section 01 64 00 - Owner-Furnished Products. 1.2 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Work is located at the Bozeman Water Reclamation Facility, 2245 Springhill Rd, Bozeman, Montana 59718. B. The Project includes constructing the Work broadly described below, in accordance with the Contract Documents, with all related appurtenances. Work shown on the Drawings, or indicated in the Specifications, or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents is part of the Work, regardless of whether indicated below. The Work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Provide a complete Solar Power Facility including but not limited to. a. Inverters b. PV Panels c. Racking, including design d. Metering e. Weather Station f. Data Manager (Master Controller) 2. Provide electrical equipment, connections, conduit, wire, ductbanks, and appurtenances. 3. Provide No-Export controls and shunt trip circuit breaker disconnect. 4. Provide all control panels, programming, and integration. 5. Provide HMI screens in Ignition Version 8.1.0. C. Contracting Method: The Project will be constructed under a single prime construction Contract. D. Owner-Furnished Materials and Equipment: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Owner-furnished materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work are in Section 01 64 00 - Owner-Furnished Products. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS FOR THIS PROJECT A. Single Prime Construction Contract: The Contract requires all the Work for the Project not expressly allocated to Owner or others in the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 2 1.4 OTHERS RETAINED BY OWNER FOR THE PROJECT A. Engineer: 1. Engineer is identified in the Agreement. 2. Engineer’s responsibilities for the Project, relative to Contractor, are indicated throughout the Contract Documents. 3. Whether the Engineer will furnish the services of a Resident Project Representative (RPR) for the Project is indicated in the Supplementary Conditions. 1.5 SEQUENCE AND PROGRESS OF WORK A. Requirements for sequencing and coordinating with Owner’s operations, including maintenance of facility operations during construction, and requirements for tie-ins and shutdowns, are in Section 01 14 16 - Coordination with Owner’s Operations. B. Contractor must incorporate stored materials into the work within 60 days of materials arriving on site. Storage of materials on-site for longer than 60 days must be approved by the Engineer. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE A. Use of Site - General: 1. Limits on Contractor’s use of the Site are indicated in Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site, and as may be shown on the Drawings. 2. Relocate stored materials and equipment that interfere with operations of Owner, other contractors, and others performing work for Owner. 3. Comply with restrictions set forth in Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site. B. Owner will occupy the Site jointly with Contractor during construction for performance of Owner’s typical operations. Coordinate with Owner in all construction operations to minimize conflicts between Contractor and Owner’s employees and others under Owner’s control. If the Site is a treatment facility or other production facility, Owner will have Owner’s suppliers for deliveries of chemicals and other items accessing the Site from time to time, possibly on a daily basis. 1.7 EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY A. Easements and Rights-of-Way - General: 1. The entire project will be constructed on land owned by the City of Bozeman; however, an easement for Northwestern Energy for substation access to the South of the construction site must be maintained clear during construction. Easement details will be given to the successful bidder. 2. Easements and rights-of-way required for the permanent improvements included in the Work will be provided by Owner in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 3. Confine construction operations within Owner’s property, public rights-of-way, easements obtained by Owner, and limits shown, and property for which Contractor has made arrangements directly with property owner(s). 4. Use care in placing construction tools, machinery and equipment, excavated materials, and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work to avoid damaging property and interfering with traffic. 5. Do not enter private property outside the construction limits without permission from the owner of the property. 1.8 UTILITY OWNERS A. Utilities known to Engineer and that may have Underground Facilities or other facilities in the vicinity of the Work are: 1. Northwestern Energy: a. Padmount Transformer, CT metering Cabinet, and underground ductbank. b. 121 E Griffin Dr, Bozeman, MT 59715. c. Telephone: 888-467-2669. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 3 B. Utilities and their owners indicated in the Contract Documents are for Contractor’s convenience. Neither Owner nor Engineer will be liable to Contractor or any utility owner for failure to indicate utility, its owner, or complete and correct contact information in the Contract Documents where Contractor’s reasonable and ordinarily-exercised diligence would reveal the presence of the utility and its owner. Nothing in the Contract mitigates Contractor’s responsibilities under the General Conditions and Property, and Laws and Regulations, including “call before you dig” regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 01 14 16 - 1 SECTION 01 14 16 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for coordinating with Owner’s operations during the Project. 2. Requirements for tie-ins and shutdowns necessary to complete the Work without impact on Owner’s operations except as allowed in this Specifications section. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to coordinate with Owner’s operations during the Work in accordance with this Specifications section. 2. Except for shutdowns specified in this Specifications section, perform the Work such that Owner’s facilities remain in continuous, satisfactory operation during the Project. Schedule and perform the Work such that the Work does not: impede Owner’s production or processes, create potential hazards to operating equipment and personnel, reduce the quality of the facility’s products or effluent, cause odors or other nuisances, does not affect the public health, safety, welfare, and convenience, and does not adversely affect the environment resulting in violation of Laws or Regulations. 3. Work not specifically addressed in this Specifications section or in referenced sections may, in general, be performed, to be completed within the Contract Times, at any time during regular working hours in accordance with the Contract Documents, subject to the requirements in this section. C. Related Requirements: Include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Startup Procedures. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters, but when used in this Specifications section have the meaning indicated below: a. The term “Owner” is used throughout this section. When the facility is operated or managed by an entity other than Owner, references in this section to “Owner” as the operator or manager of the facility will be interpreted as referring to the facility manager. b. A “shutdown” is when a portion of the normal operation of Owner’s facility, whether equipment, systems, conduit (including piping and ducting), has to be temporarily suspended or taken out of service to perform the Work. c. A “tie-in” is a connection of new Work to existing facilities, including connecting to existing conduits (including piping and ducting), electrical systems, structural elements, process/mechanical elements, and other physical connections. Some tie-ins may require that the tie-in be made without an associated shutdown. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Review construction procedures under other Specifications sections and coordinate Work that will be performed with or before the Work indicated in this Section. B. Pre-installation Meeting: 1. Ductbanks in roadways prior to sawcut and excavation. 2. Electrical equipment, pads, appurtenances in the vicinity of building 1400. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 01 14 16 - 2 3. Electrical conduit penetrations and tie-in to existing point of interconnect with Northwestern Energy. 4. Connection of SCADA network to existing. C. Sequencing and Scheduling: 1. Refer to this Specifications sections articles on sequencing, tie-ins, and shutdowns. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shutdown Planning Submittal: a. For each shutdown, submit an inventory of labor, materials, and equipment required to perform the shutdown and tie-in tasks, an estimate of time required to accomplish the complete shutdown including time for Owner to take down and start up existing equipment, systems, or conduits, and written description of steps required to complete the Work associated with the shutdown. b. Furnish submittal to Engineer not less than 30 days prior to proposed shutdown start date. Do not start shutdown until obtaining Engineer’s acceptance of shutdown planning Submittal. 2. Shutdown Notification: a. After Engineer’s acceptance of shutdown planning Submittal and prior to starting the shutdown, submit written notification to Owner and Engineer of date and time each shutdown is to start. Submit notification not less than 72 hours in advance of each shutdown. 1.5 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS A. Indicated in the Contract Documents are the sequence and shutdown durations, where applicable, for Owner’s equipment, systems, and conduits (including piping and ducting) that are to be taken out of service temporarily for the Work. New materials and equipment may be used by Owner after the specified field quality control activities are successfully completed and the materials or equipment are substantially complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The following constraints apply to coordination with Owner’s operations: 1. Operational Access: Owner’s personnel shall have access to equipment and areas of the facility that remain in operation. 2. Schedule and perform equipment and system start-ups in accordance with Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Startup procedures. Equipment and systems shall not be placed into operation on Friday, Saturday, Sunday, or holidays without prior approval of Owner, unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. 3. Owner will assist Contractor in dewatering conduits, and other work areas to be dewatered for shutdowns. Maintain clean, dry work area by pumping and properly disposing of fluid and other material that accumulates in work areas. 1.6 SEQUENCE OF WORK A. Perform the Work in the indicated sequence. Certain phases or stages of the Work may require working 24 hour days or work during hours outside of regular working hours. Work may be accelerated from a later stage to an earlier stage if Owner’s operations are not adversely affected by proposed substitute sequence, with Engineer’s approval. Stages specified in this article are sequence-dependent. B. Stage I - Clearing and grading. C. Stage II - Excavation and installation of racking, PV panels, inverters, controls, and power distribution at Solar Power site. D. Stage III – Excavation, trenching, sawcutting, and installation of electrical system from Solar Power Area to Utility Point of Connection: 1. Excavate and install electrical equipment at Building 1400 area Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 01 14 16 - 3 2. Sawcut, trench, and install electrical ductbanks from Solar Power Area to Point of Connection. Backfill as soon as possible to avoid operational impacts to Owner. 3. Perform interconnection and all electrical work for point of connection, power monitoring, no-export control, and solar power system control in Area 1400. 1.7 SHUTDOWNS A. Work requiring service interruptions for tie-ins shall be performed during scheduled shutdowns. B. Work that may interrupt normal operations shall be accomplished at times convenient to Owner unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. C. If Contractor’s operations cause an unscheduled interruption of Owner’s operations, immediately re-establish satisfactory operation for Owner. D. Fines and Penalties Imposed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction: 1. Unscheduled shutdowns or interruptions of continued safe and satisfactory operation of Owner’s facilities that result in fines or penalties by authorities having jurisdiction shall be paid solely by Contractor if, in Engineer’s opinion, Contractor did not comply with requirements of the Contract Documents, or was negligent in the Work, or did not exercise proper precautions in performing the Work and complying with applicable permits, Laws, and Regulations. 2. Owner or Engineer may deduct as set-offs such amounts from payments due Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTITUTE PROCEDURES A. Proposal of Substitute Sequencing, Shutdowns, and Tie-Ins: 1. As a substitute to the procedures indicated in this Specifications section, Contractor may propose providing additional temporary facilities that can eliminate or mitigate a constraint without additional cost to Owner, provided such additional temporary facilities: do not present hazards to the public, personnel, structures, and equipment; that such additional temporary facilities do not adversely affect Owner’s ability to comply with Laws and Regulations, permits, and operating requirements; that such temporary facilities do not generate or foster the generation of odors and other nuisances; and that requirements of the Contract Documents are fulfilled. 2. Engineer will consider proposals for substitute procedures after the Effective Date of the Contract. All Bids shall be based on the requirements of the Contract Documents, including this section. 3. Substitution Requests: a. When proposing a substitute procedure for a tie-in or shutdown or other requirements of this section, comply with the requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions (regarding substitutes) and Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. b. When deviation from specified sequence or procedures is proposed, Contractor’s proposal shall explain in detail the proposed sequence and procedures and associated effects, including evidence that Owner’s operations will not be adversely affected, to an extent greater than originally contemplated in the Contract Documents, by proposed substitution. List benefits of proposed substitution, including benefits to Progress Schedule. 3.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR COORDINATING WITH OWNER’S OPERATIONS A. When possible, combine multiple tie-ins into a single shutdown to reduce impacts on Owner’s operations and processes. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 01 14 16 - 4 B. Operation of Existing Systems and Equipment during the Work: 1. Do not shut off or disconnect existing operating systems or equipment, unless accepted by Engineer in writing. 2. Operation of existing systems and equipment will be by Owner unless otherwise specified or indicated. C. Performing the Work of this section constitutes Contractor’s approval of underlying work and field conditions prevailing at the time of the Work. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Coordinate preparations for removals with requirements of Section 32 12 00 Flexible Paving and 01 74 00 Cleaning, as applicable. B. Shutdowns - General Preparation: 1. Coordinate shutdowns with Owner and Engineer. 2. Submit shutdown planning Submittals and shutdown notification Submittals in accordance with this Specifications section’s “Submittals” Article. 3. Furnish at the Site, in close proximity to the shutdown and tie-in work areas, tools, materials, equipment, spare parts, both temporary and permanent, necessary to successfully perform the shutdown. Complete to the extent possible, prefabrication of conduit and other assemblies prior to commencing the associated shutdown. Demonstrate to Engineer’s satisfaction that Contractor has complied with such requirements before commencing the shutdown. 4. Engineer shall have no duty to Contractor to advise Contractor of inadequate preparations by Contractor; Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, procedures, techniques, and sequences of construction. C. Shutdowns of Electrical Systems: 1. Comply with Laws and Regulations, including the National Electric Code. 2. Contractor shall lock out and tag circuit breakers and switches operated by Owner and shall verify that affected cables and wires are de-energized to ground potential before starting other Work associated with the shutdown. 3. Upon completion of shutdown Work, remove the locks and tags and advise Engineer or Resident Project Representative (RPR) that facilities are available for use. 3.4 DETAILED SHUTDOWN REQUIREMENTS A. Shutdown A: Northwestern Energy Utility Outage (Main Plant Service) 1. General: a. Affected Equipment Operating Prior to Shutdown: Entire Plant. b. Equipment Operating During Shutdown: Coordinate with Owner. c. Equipment Out of Service During Shutdown: Coordinate with Owner. d. Impact on Other Equipment and Processes: Owner plans to run their standby generator during the outage to continue operations. e. Procedure: Once power is isolated from NWE, and the plant is stable on generator, Contractor may commence Tie-in to Point of Interconnect. Work shall be performed efficiently, with a backout plan in place to restore power to the plant in less than 2 hours if the generator shuts down for any reason. f. Dates: Shutdown shall be accomplished as coordinated with owner.. g. Time: Shutdown shall be performed in one continuous operation not to exceed 12- hours. Outage may begin as early as 6:00AM and must be complete no later than 6:00PM. h. Multiple outages may be allowed at owner’s discretion if agreed upon work cannot be accomplished in a single 12-hour outage. 1) In the event multiple outages are required, the worksite must be made safe at the end of each workshift, fenced off, and access restricted until the next outage. 2) Notifications to other public agencies shall be made as required (ex: Fire Marshall, etc.) Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS 01 14 16 - 5 2. Prior to Shutdown: a. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of proposed shutdown planning Submittal and shutdown notification Submittal. b. Bring necessary couplings, equipment, and appurtenances to the work areas. c. Assist Owner in preparing to take equipment temporarily out of service. d. Verify weather conditions are predicted to be favorable for the duration of the outage. Note that extreme cold/hot weather conditions, lightning, heavy rain/snowfall, etc, may required a delay. 3. During Shutdown: a. Coordinate closely with Owner for anomalous conditions. 4. Following Shutdown: a. Verify transition of the Plant back to NWE Utility. b. Verify functionality of equipment and systems. c. Verify operation of new equipment and systems, and verify that joints in conduits are watertight or gastight as applicable. d. Repair joints that are not watertight or gastight, as applicable. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction USE OF SITE 01 14 19 - 1 SECTION 01 14 19 USE OF SITE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1. Section Includes: Restrictions on Contractor’s use of the Site and premises. 2. Restrictions on use of existing buildings and structures, including: a. Permanent utilities and sanitary facilities. b. Existing elevators. c. Existing hoisting equipment. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to comply with restrictions on Contractor’s use of the Site and other areas. 2. Comply with requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, regarding the Contractor’s use of the Site and other areas. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Site plan showing proposed location of field offices, storage trailers, staging and laydown areas, temporary sanitary facilities, fuel and oil storage, fueling location, bottle gas storage facilities, and other areas Contractor proposes to occupy. 1.3 USE OF PREMISES A. Limit use of premises at the Site to work areas shown or indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. Do not disturb portions of the Site beyond areas of the Work. 1. Limits: a. Confine construction operations to the following areas: 1) See Drawings. b. Confine storage of materials and equipment, and locations of temporary facilities to the following areas: 1) 2) Contractor’s gang boxes and storage containers for tools in active use in the Work may be kept in reasonable quantity in the work areas as long as such items do not obstruct access to the facilities by Owner or occupants. 3) Do not store items of any sort, whether temporarily or otherwise, in stairways and ramps, whether existing or under construction. c. Do not enter the following areas: 1) Passenger elevators at the Site, unless such use is expressly allowed by other provisions of this Specifications section. 2) Areas outside of the work areas indicated in Paragraph A.1.a of the “Use of Premises” Article in this Specifications section, and outside of work areas indicated on the Drawings, including outside the Project areas indicated on the “key plan” in the Drawings. 2. Prohibitions: a. Do not use the Site for the following: 1) Conducting Contractor’s business not related to the Project or other work for Owner. 2) Overnight lodging or other, non-work use of the Site by workers or others for whom Contractor is responsible, whether housed in recreational vehicles, other Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction USE OF SITE 01 14 19 - 2 vehicles, tents, quarters in field offices or Contractor-furnished temporary structures, or in work areas, is unacceptable. 3. Access to Site, Access Roads, Parking Areas, and Haul Routes: a. The gate to the South of the project area is the primary access. B. Use of Existing Buildings and Structures: Maintain existing buildings and structures in weather- tight condition throughout construction unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. Protect buildings, structures, and occupants during construction. 1. Use of Existing Utilities, Sanitary Facilities, and First-aid Facilities: a. Do not use permanent sanitary facilities, whether provided under the Project or existing prior to the Project, at the Site. b. Do not use permanent telephone, Internet, or other communications utilities and facilities at the Site, regardless of whether such services and facilities were provided under the Project or existed prior to the Project, except in cases of emergency. c. Do not use Owner’s or occupants’ first-aid facilities, except in cases of medical emergency. Promptly replenish used items and supplies with items identical to those used. C. Promptly repair damage to premises, including existing structures, finishes, equipment, and other features, caused by construction operations. Upon completion of the Work, restore premises to specified condition; if condition is not specified, restore to pre-construction condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 - 1 SECTION 01 22 00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements applicable to all bid/pay items. 2. General provisions on unit prices and quantities. 3. General provisions on lump sums. 4. Listing of the various bid/pay items in the Project, together with criteria for measuring Unit Price Work for payment. B. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. 2. Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO ALL BID/PAY ITEMS A. In this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the terms “bid item”, “pay item”, “bid/pay item”, “Item” followed by a number designation, “this item”, and the like all have the same meaning, and refer to one or more specific elements of the Contract, established for pricing and payment, as indicated in the Bid Form and in the Agreement (or exhibit to the Agreement) at the time the Contract was signed by the parties. B. This Article applies to all bid/pay items in the Contract. C. Prices – General: 1. The bid/pay items listed starting with Article 1.5 of this Section refer to and are the same bid items listed in the Bid Form and included in the Contract, and constitute all bid/pay items for the Work at the time the Contract was signed by the parties. 2. No direct or separate payment will be made, outside of the bid/pay items in the Contract, for the following: providing miscellaneous temporary or accessory materials or equipment, temporary works, temporary construction facilities, Contractor’s project management, superintendence, and similar costs for Subcontractors or Suppliers; insurance; schedules and schedule updates; coordination (with: Owner’s operations (including, but not limited to, lockout/tag-out procedures), other contractors, utility owners, owners of transportation facilities, adjacent property owners and occupants, authorities having jurisdiction, Subcontractors and Suppliers, and others with whom Contractor is to coordinate the Work); information technology systems required by the Contract Documents; Submittals; photographic documentation; Project meetings; Contractor’s hazard communication program; Contractor’s compliance with environmental procedures for Constituents of Concern (including spill control and countermeasures plans and implementation); professional services (required for Contractor’s means and methods of construction, and for delegated designs required by the Contract Documents); obtaining and complying with permits and licenses; temporary utilities (including electric power, water supply and disposal, fuel, and communications); temporary lighting; temporary fire protection; temporary enclosures and HVAC; temporary sanitary facilities; temporary first-aid facilities and services; Contractor’s field offices and sheds, Engineer’s field offices (when required elsewhere in the Contract Documents); temporary vehicular access and parking (including access to the Site, temporary access roads and parking, onsite traffic controls for construction traffic, and offsite haul routes); traffic control of non-construction vehicular and pedestrian traffic; temporary controls (including temporary erosion and sediment controls, noise control, control of storm water, surface water, and groundwater, pollution controls (including solid waste control, water pollution control, and control of atmospheric pollution), dust control, pest and rodent controls, odor controls, and other temporary Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 - 2 controls required by the Contract Documents); temporary security for the Work; temporary barriers; Project signage (when required elsewhere in the Contract Documents); delivering, handling, and storing materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work; layouts and surveys for the Work; construction equipment, machinery, tools, and vehicles; safety and protection; Site maintenance during construction; cleaning and removal and disposal of waste and debris; checkout and startup; testing and other quality control activities required by the Contract Documents; record documents, operation and maintenance data; warranties; spare parts and extra materials required by the Contract Documents; instruction of facility personnel as required by the Contract Documents; commissioning (when required elsewhere in the Contract Documents); Contractor’s correction period, Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee; Contractor’s indemnification obligations; other labor, cost, or effort required by the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 Specifications, and other requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Price Escalation: a. Unless expressly indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, Owner is not obligated to change the stipulated prices (including lump sums, unit prices, and allowances) that are all or part of the Contract Price because of escalation of costs when there is no corresponding change in the Contract Times. b. Changes in the Contract Times do not necessarily entitle Contractor to a change in Contract Price due to escalation. 4. Compensation for all services, labor, materials, and equipment shall be included in prices stipulated for the lump sum bid/pay items in the Contract. 5. Each lump sum in the Contract shall include an amount considered by Contractor as sufficient for all overhead and profit for each separately identified bid/pay item. D. Contract Price, Payment Procedures, and Related Matters: 1. Contract Price: The Contract Price, as apportioned among bid/pay items in the Contract, is indicated in the Agreement and may be modified by Change Order. 2. Payments to Contractor: Refer to the General Conditions (as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions), the Agreement (including provisions on retainage, if any), and Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures, among other applicable Contract Documents. 3. Schedule of Values: Refer to the General Conditions (as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions) and Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values. 4. Procedures for Changes in Contract Price: Refer to the General Conditions (as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions) . 5. Defective Work is not eligible for payment. 1.3 GENERAL PROVISIONS ON UNIT PRICES AND QUANTITIES A. Quantities: 1. Quantities of Unit Price Work indicated in the Bid Form and in the Contract (at the time the Agreement was signed by the parties) are estimates for purposes of pricing and comparison of Bids. 2. Owner does not represent, either expressly or by implication, or agree that the nature of materials encountered below ground surface or in concealed areas, or actual quantities of Unit Price Work required, will correspond with the quantities in the Contract at the time the Agreement was signed by the parties. Owner reserves the right to increase or decrease quantities, and to eliminate quantities, as Owner may deem necessary or as may be necessary due to Site conditions encountered. 3. Adjustment of Unit Prices Due to Variation in Quantities: a. Provisions, if any, regarding adjustment of unit prices due to variations in actual quantities (eligible for payment) from the estimated quantities in the Contract (including quantities at the time the Agreement was signed by the parties and as subsequently modified by Change Order) are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 - 3 1) Engineer’s review for possible unit price adjustment, when provision for such adjustment is expressly indicated in the Contract, will be at a time Engineer deems reasonable and proper. 2) When the Supplementary Conditions establish that, to be eligible for an adjustment in the unit price, a pay item of Unit Price Work must have a total computed, extended price (at the time the Agreement was signed by the parties) equal to or greater than a specified percentage (stipulated in the Supplementary Conditions) of the total Contract Price (at the time the Agreement was signed by the parties), and the total extended price of such pay item does not exceed the stipulated percentage of the Contract Price, then the associated pay item will be paid at the unit price in the Contract without adjustment for variations in actual quantity. 4. Quantities eligible for payment will be actual quantities furnished and installed (as applicable) in accordance with the Contract Documents, within the pay limits shown or indicated, as measured by Engineer (or other entity so empowered in the Contract Documents) and recommended for payment by Engineer. 5. At Contractor’s expense, Contractor may independently verify quantities measured by Engineer for payment. Should Contractor disagree with quantities measured and recommended for payment by Engineer, submit appropriate Change Proposal (appealing Engineer’s measurements) indicating the specific reasons for Contractor’s appeal, with detailed reasons therefor and associated calculations and estimates, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6. Except as may be established elsewhere in the Contract Documents, make no claim for anticipated profit, loss of profit, damages, or additional compensation arising from difference between quantities of Unit Price Work eligible for payment and the estimated quantities in the Contract. B. Measuring for Payment: 1. At Engineer’s option, Engineer may delegate to Resident Project Representative (RPR) (if any), some or all of Engineer’s responsibilities for measuring Unit Price Work eligible for payment. 2. Unless expressly indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, measurements will be in United States standard measurements. 3. Unless indicated otherwise elsewhere in the Contract Documents, quantities of Unit Price Work eligible for payment will be rounded to the nearest whole number. 4. In the event of conflict between this Section and the measurement criteria in the Specifications of Divisions 02-49, the measurement criteria in this Section will govern. Typical intent when measurement criteria are in both this Section and the associated Division 02-49 Specifications section, is for the criteria to be interpreted together. 5. Assistance with Measurements: a. Comply with Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering. b. Assist Engineer and Resident Project Representative (RPR) (if any), by providing measuring equipment, labor, and survey personnel necessary to measure quantities eligible for payment. 6. Quantities eligible for payment can be adjusted by Engineer to correct quantities included in Contractor’s prior payment requests, and for incomplete or defective Unit Price Work. Such corrections are at Engineer’s sole discretion. 1.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Progress payments for Work paid on a lump sum basis will be based on Engineer’s estimate of the Work (in accordance with the Contract Documents) performed through the end of the associated pay period, based on the Schedule of Values accepted by Engineer in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. At its sole discretion, Engineer may correct amounts of lump sum Work included in prior payment requests based on improved data or information available to Engineer, or Engineer’s knowledge or reasonable belief that Work is incomplete or defective. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 - 4 1.5 BID/PAY ITEMS - GENERAL CONTRACT A. Item 1 - General Construction: 1. Measurement: As set forth in the Contract’s provisions regarding the Schedule of Values and progress payment procedures. 2. Payment: Lump sum payment for this item will be full compensation for completing the Work, as shown and indicated in the Contract Documents not included under other bid/pay items. B. Item 2 - Mobilization and Demobilization: 1. Measurement: In accordance with the Contract’s provisions on Schedule of Values and progress payments for lump sum Work. 2. Item Includes: a. Work and activities indicated in this provision are intended as illustrative for purposes of scope and payment and do not represent a complete list of all preconstruction activities and Submittals, or all Work or activities required by the contract for mobilization and demobilization. b. Mobilization Work paid under this item will include: 1) Furnishing required performance bond and payment bond. 2) Furnishing required insurance and associated documentation. 3) Obtaining Owner’s acceptance of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers and entering into subcontracts and purchase orders needed to start the Work. 4) Preparing and obtaining Engineer’s approval of Shop Drawings required in Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site. 5) Preparing and obtaining Engineer’s acceptance of schedules, including Progress Schedule, Schedule of Submittals, and Schedule of Values. 6) Preconstruction conference(s) required by the Contract Documents. 7) Preconstruction photographic documentation. 8) Establishing Contractor’s Site-specific health and safety plan, preconstruction activities needed to start implementing Contractor’s safety programs, and verifying status of training of construction workers and personnel and condition of construction equipment, machinery, and tools. 9) Submitting acceptable emergency contact information 10) Obtaining required permits needed to start the Work. 11) Initial establishment of temporary utilities and temporary facilities. 12) Establishing Contractor’s field office and sheds, Contractor’s storage areas, staging and laydown areas, and other areas necessary to perform the Work. 13) Initial establishment of construction vehicular access to the Site, parking needed for construction, and offsite haul routes. 14) Establishing construction equipment, machinery, and tools at the Site. 15) Providing initial temporary controls. 16) Temporary security needed to start Work at the Site. 17) Other mobilization acceptable to Engineer. c. Demobilization Work paid under this item will include: 1) Removal from the Site and adjacent areas of excess materials and equipment. 2) Removal of temporary controls, temporary facilities, temporary barriers, and similar materials and equipment. 3) Removal of temporary access roads and parking areas not part of permanent pavement or otherwise allowed to remain by Owner, including temporary traffic controls established for construction vehicles and equipment. 4) Removal of all field office and sheds, storage areas, staging and laydown areas, and other areas needed to perform the Work and restoration of such areas. 5) Removal from the Site of all construction equipment, machinery, tools, Contractor’s containers, temporary fuel storage tanks, and similar items. 6) Closeout of permits on which Contractor is a permittee or co-permittee. 7) Final cleaning. 8) Furnishing required closeout documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 - 5 9) Other costs and effort by Contractor for demobilization. d. Other cost and Work are under other bid/pay items in the Contract. 3. Payment: Lump sum price for this item will be full compensation for all mobilization and demobilization required and needed for the Contract, not included under other bid/pay items or contracts. C. Item 3 - Landscaping Restoration: 1. Measurement for payment shall be the area, in square yards, of excavated areas, within the pay limits shown or indicated for excavation Work, requiring landscaping. 2. Item Includes (all in accordance with the Contract Documents): a. Providing appropriate topsoil (whether originally removed and stockpiled by contractor or from offsite sources), and final grading (appropriately transitioning to proposed grades at completion of Work), without ponding of water. b. Compaction, aerating soil material, and other required and necessary treatments (including fertilizers) for soil, to properly support growth of grass and plants. c. Soil stabilization. d. Hydroseeding or other seeding method indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Protecting, watering, and maintaining new growth. f. Providing new edging, where shown or to replace existing removed or damaged by Contractor, ornamental stone or other ornamental cover underlain by burlap, or other new, non-plant cover shown or indicated or necessary to replace and restore to preconstruction conditions. g. Providing replacement plants, such as shrubs and trees, required by the Contract Documents and for replacing similar plants damaged or destroyed by Contractor. Repairing or replacing, and testing, of irrigation systems damaged or disrupted by Contractor. h. Reinstalling existing materials and systems removed and properly preserved by Contractor, such as hardscape features (such as, stone patios, walkways, retaining walls and terrace gardens, pools, water features, shoreline and beach protection, and others), benches and outdoor furniture, mailboxes, fencing, signs, ornaments, appurtenances, and the like. i. Repairing or replacing materials and systems damaged or destroyed by Contractor, such as hardscape features, benches and outdoor furniture, mailboxes, fencing, signs, ornaments, appurtenances, and the like. j. Landscaping restoration for areas (unpaved and not subject to vehicular traffic) disturbed by Contractor outside of the pay limits shown or indicated. k. Other Work required and necessary for landscaping restoration not expressly included in other bid/pay items. 3. Not included in this bid/pay item: a. Rough grading, which is included as part of earth Work under other bid/pay item(s). 4. Payment: Unit price per square yard, within the pay limits shown or indicated, for this item will be full compensation for all landscaping restoration, with all related Work performed under this item, complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, and not specifically included under other bid/pay items or contracts. D. Item 4 - Asphalt Concrete Pavement Restoration, Top Course: 1. Measurement: a. Asphalt concrete top course paving will be measured for payment of required asphalt concrete material provided within the pay limits shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. b. Unless otherwise shown or indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, for replacement paving, remove existing pavement 12 inches outside the pay limits for excavation, so that new course of pavement rests on competent, existing underlying material. 2. Item Includes (all in accordance with the Contract Documents): a. Traffic control. b. Preparation for material installation, including: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 - 6 1) Verifying lines and grades for paving. 2) Providing squared-off, clean saw cut edges for connections to existing pavement. 3) Providing asphaltic emulsion tack coat where new asphalt concrete will contact existing pavement and structures (including curbs, concrete or paved gutters, storm water structures, rims of manholes and valve boxes, and the like). c. Providing asphalt concrete top course of the material and mix indicated within the pay limits shown or indicated, including installing for proper storm water drainage, without ponding on the finished pavement surface. Provide smooth transition to existing pavement. d. Compacting installed asphalt concrete. e. Protecting during curing, until new pavement is ready to bear traffic. f. Providing temporary and permanent pavement markings. When not otherwise addressed in the Contract Documents, replacement pavement markings on new (replacement) pavement shall be equal in color, location, type, and size to preconstruction pavement markings. Maintain temporary marking until pavement is complete and ready for permanent marking. g. Milling and replacing asphalt concrete pavement, using materials shown and indicated, for areas of preconstruction asphalt concrete pavement, outside of the Contract’s pay limits, disturbed, damaged, or destroyed by Contractor. 3. Payment: Unit price of specified asphalt concrete material and mix paid under this item will be full compensation for all top course asphalt concrete pavement restoration, with all related Work performed under this item, complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, and not specifically included under other bid/pay items or contracts. 1.6 BID/PAY ITEMS – ELECTRICAL CONTRACT A. Item 1 – Electrical Construction: 1. Measurement: As set forth in the Contract Documents, regarding the Schedule of Values and progress payment procedures. 2. Payment: Lump sum payment for Item 1 will be full compensation for completing the Work, as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Electrical Contract limits indicated in Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work, not included under other items. B. Item 2 – Quantity Allowance for Additional Electrical Conduit, 2 inches Diameter, Rigid, SCH 40 PVC in buried ductbank: 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of additional electrical conduit of the material, size, and type indicated, authorized by Owner will be the length in feet measured along the centerline of the conduit provided, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Item Includes (all in accordance with the Contract Documents): a. Providing new electrical conduit of the material, size, and type indicated at locations stipulated in the allowance authorization signed by Owner or as directed by Engineer, together with fittings, cable pull-strings, trenching, backfill, compaction, fasteners, connections and joints, and appurtenances. b. Connections to existing electrical conduit, junction boxes, equipment, control panels, control stations, and similar materials and equipment. c. Other materials, Work, and services necessary for a complete electrical conduit system. 3. Not included in this item: a. Electrical conduit included under other bid/pay items. b. Providing junction boxes. c. Providing cabling. d. Providing electrical equipment, including switches, convenience receptacles, and other equipment. 4. Payment: Unit price per foot under this item will be full compensation for providing all additional electrical conduit of the material, size, and type indicated, complete as shown, indicated, or directed by Engineer, not included in other bid/pay items or contracts. C. Item 3 - Quantity Allowance for Additional Electrical Cabling, No. 3/0 AWG: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 22 00 - 7 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of additional electrical cabling of the size indicated, authorized by Owner, will be the length, in feet, measured along the full length of cable provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Item Includes (all in with the Contract Documents): a. De-energizing electrical power from existing cabling and equipment as needed and performing and complying with lockout/tag out procedures. b. Disconnecting existing cabling from existing electrical equipment and appurtenances. c. Providing new electrical cabling of the size, indicated at locations stipulated in the allowance authorization signed by Owner or as directed by Engineer, installed in existing or new electrical conduit, together with splices, and appurtenances. d. Cable identification and tagging. e. Field quality control in accordance with the Contract Documents. f. Connections to terminals and equipment, control stations, control panels, switches, convenience receptacles, and similar equipment. g. Other materials, Work, and services necessary for a complete electrical cabling system. 3. Not included in this item: a. Electrical cabling included under other bid/pay items. b. Providing electrical conduit. c. Providing electrical equipment, including switches, convenience receptacles, and other equipment. 4. Payment: Unit price per foot under this item will be full compensation for providing all additional electrical cabling of the size indicated, complete as shown, indicated, or directed by Engineer, not included in other bid/pay items or contracts. D. Item 4 – Installation of owner furnished 4” SCH 40 PVC conduit in ductbank P1: 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of installation shall be after 100% complete. 2. Item Includes (all in with the Contract Documents): a. Providing new electrical conduit of the material, size, and type indicated at locations stipulated in contract, together with fittings, cable pull-strings, trenching, backfill, compaction, fasteners, connections and joints, and appurtenances. b. Connections to electrical conduit, junction boxes, equipment, inverters, power panels, control panels, control stations, and similar materials and equipment. c. Field quality control in accordance with the Contract Documents. d. Other materials, Work, and services necessary for a complete electrical conduit system. 3. Not included in this item: a. Electrical conduit included under other bid/pay items. b. Providing electrical equipment, including switches, convenience receptacles, and other equipment. 4. Payment: Unit price for installation of all owner provided conduit under this item will be full compensation for providing all additional electrical conduit installation not included in other bid/pay items or contracts. 5. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements applicable to all substitution requests. 2. Provisions specific to Contractor’s substitution requests for: a. Materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. b. Methods, procedures, and sequences indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, and incidentals, and pay all costs associated with requests for approval of substitutes. 2. Where the Contract Documents expressly indicate that substitutes are not allowed, are unacceptable, or time-barred, do not submit substitution requests for such items or procedures. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. The following terminology, although not indicated with initial capital letters, has the following meaning in this Section: a. “Or-equal” and “or equal” each means material or equipment items to be incorporated into the completed Work as a functioning whole, or method, procedure, or sequence that, in Engineer’s sole opinion, are equivalent to that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. b. “Substitute” means a proposed materials or equipment to be incorporated into the completed Work as a functioning whole, or a proposed construction method, procedure, or sequence that is not, in Engineer’s sole opinion, equivalent to the associated, similar material or equipment item or method, procedure, or sequence shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, but accomplishes the same or similar purpose. Unless expressly indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, Contractor’s proposals for “value engineering” (and similar terms) are substitutes. c. “Substitution request” means Contractor’s written request for Engineer’s approval of a proposed substitute, in accordance with this Section. Substitution requests are separate from Shop drawings and other Submittals required by the Contract Documents. 1.3 SUBSTITUTES - GENERAL A. This Article applies to all substitutes and substitution requests, whether for substitute materials or equipment, or for substitute methods, procedures, or sequences. B. This Section expands on the provisions on substitutes in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. C. Time Limits for Submitting Substitution Requests: 1. Where the Contract allows Contractor’s substitution requests, such proposals will be considered by Engineer only during a period of 60 days after the date the Contract Times start to run, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Substitution requests will be accepted for consideration by Engineer after the time limit indicated in the paragraph above this, when materials or equipment shown or indicated, and all associated “or-equals”, are either: a. Unavailable; or b. Despite Contractor’s due diligence, are unavailable in time for the Work to be completed within the Contract Times. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 2 3. The foregoing notwithstanding, substitutes will not be approved when received by Engineer after Contractor has commenced the associated Work at the Site, where approval of the substitute would require rework or removing Work already installed. D. Design Professional: 1. Engineer is responsible for design of the completed Project as a functioning whole and has responsible charge of the Project except for Work for which design responsibility is expressly delegated by the Contract Documents. 2. Do not retain services of any third-party design professional to prepare modifications of Engineer’s design of the completed Project as a functioning whole without Engineer’s express, written consent via an appropriate Contract modification setting forth appropriate performance and design criteria for delegating the design of the substitute. E. Contractor’s Representations: 1. In submitting each substitution request, Contractor represents that: a. Contractor has read and understands the Contract’s provisions on substitutes, as indicated in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, this Section, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. b. Substitution request is complete and includes all documents and information required by the Contract Documents. c. Contractor certifications required by the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section are valid and made with Contractor’s full knowledge, information, and belief. d. Contractor will provide the same or better guarantees and warranties for substitute as for the specified materials, equipment, methods, procedures, and sequences (as applicable). e. Contractor waives all rights for increasing the Contract Price or extending the Contract Times, related to the substitute, that subsequently may become apparent to Contractor after issuance of the associated Contract modification instrument approving such substitute, except for those associated with differing subsurface or physical conditions or discovery of a previously unforeseen Hazardous Environmental Condition associated with the Work involving the approved substitute. F. Submittal of Substitution Requests - General: 1. Substitution requests must be submitted by Contractor. Engineer will not accept or review substitution requests from prospective or bona-fide Subcontractors or Suppliers. 2. Submit separate substitution request for each proposed substitute. 3. Submit substitution requests in accordance with requirements for Shop Drawings and other Submittals, as indicated in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 4. Do not submit substitution requests as any of the following (such substitution requests will be returned by Engineer without review): a. Shop Drawing, Sample, or other Submittal. b. Request for approval of an “or-equal”. c. Request for interpretation (RFI) or clarification. d. Change Proposal without all other, required substitution request elements indicated below. e. Other oral or written communication not in accordance with this Section. 5. Each substitution request shall include: a. Transmittal letter (one per substitution request) expressly indicating the communication is a substitution request. b. Completed substitution request form, on the form attached to this Section. c. Change Proposal, submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. Clearly indicate the proposed changes in Contract Price and Contract Times if substitute is approved; if none, clearly so indicate on the Change Proposal. d. Certifications and written representations required by the Contract Documents to accompany substitution requests. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 3 e. Other information: (1) required elsewhere in this Section and in other elements of the Contract Documents, and (2) deemed appropriate by Contractor to support Contractor’s substitution request. 6. When Engineer requires additional information to evaluate a substitution request, furnish such information within five days of receipt of Engineer’s request, unless additional time is granted by Engineer, in writing. 7. Engineer and Owner have the right to rely upon the completeness and accuracy of information, documents, certifications, and representations in Contractor’s substitution request. Contractor accepts full responsibility for completeness and accuracy of substitution requests (except for Engineer’s professional liability). G. Engineer’s Review of Substitution Requests: 1. Engineer has no obligation to approve any substitute. 2. Substitutes will not be approved unless all of the following are satisfied for the associated substitute: a. The Contract supports submittal of such substitution request; and b. Substitute is reasonably consistent with Engineer’s design intent for the Project as a completed, functioning whole; and c. As indicated in Paragraph 1.3.A.3 of this Section. d. Substitute will not have an adverse effect on the work of other contractors, or existing or proposed construction; and e. Substitution request is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents and Engineer’s requests, and f. Owner agrees to the substitute; and g. Associated changes in Contract Price and Contract Times, if any, are acceptable to Owner. 3. Engineer is not obligated to approve any substitute where such approval is conditioned on an increase in the Contract Price, the Contract Times, or both. 4. Timeliness of Engineer’s Review: a. Allow not less than 14 days for Engineer’s review of each substitute. Allow longer for larger, more-complex substitutes. b. Engineer will endeavor to perform timely review of substitution requests. However, Contractor is responsible for complying with the Contract Times, regardless of whether the substitute is approved. c. Where approval of a substitute would necessitate other changes to the Project’s design, additional time, beyond that indicated above, will be necessary for Engineer’s preparation of revisions to the design. 5. When Design Changes are Required with Approval of Substitute: a. Engineer will advise Contractor promptly following Engineer’s review (and Owner’s comment, if any) on substitution request to indicate whether the substitute will be acceptable. Engineer’s advisory to Contractor will indicate whether changes in Engineer’s design are necessary and include a preliminary estimate of Engineer’s fee and time required for modifying the design and preparing an associated Proposal Request to Contractor. b. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for costs incurred by Owner for design modifications necessitated by approval of substitute. Owner may deduct such amounts, as one or more set-offs, from payments due Contractor under the Contract. c. Upon Contractor’s receipt of Engineer’s estimate of fee and time for design modifications, contractor shall advise Engineer, in writing, within three days whether Contractor will continue pursing approval of the substitute. d. Request to Contractor. e. Engineer may reject a substitute that would require substantial changes in the Project’s design. H. Approval of Substitutes: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 4 1. Substitutes are approved only via issuance of an appropriate Field Order or Change Order in accordance with Section the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2. Approval of a substitute does not relieve Contractor from obligation to comply with the Contract Documents, including submitting Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Submittals in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.4 SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. In addition to other requirements of this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, substitution requests for substitute materials or equipment shall include: 1. Manufacturer and Location: a. Name and address of manufacturer of the proposed substitute. Indicate country where manufacturer is incorporated and owned. b. Companies and brands owned by or affiliated with manufacturer. c. Name of manufacturers of principal component items, such as motors, bearings, and similar items. d. Location where the items would be manufactured, including country and address. Indicate the total percentage of the items’ value that will be manufactured outside of the United States and its territories. e. Name, address, and driving distance from the Site of: 1) Manufacturer’s sales representative. 2) Nearest service center offering full array of service capabilities. 3) Warehouse or other location where spare parts for the proposed substitute are available. f. Number of years that manufacturer has actively participated the North American market. 2. Proposed Materials and Equipment: a. Model designation and quantity of each proposed for the Work. b. Manufacturer’s literature for proposed substitute, with description of the materials and equipment. c. Performance information and representative test data. d. Indication of reference standards with which materials and equipment comply. e. Preliminary process and instrumentation diagrams (P&ID), where applicable. f. Identification of hazardous materials, including Constituents of Concern, used in the materials and equipment, and associated permitting or licensing required. g. Manufacturer’s standard warranty and applicable, proposed special or extended warranties, including indication of specific entities that will be beneficiary of such warranties. h. Complete list of proposed deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents. i. Itemized comparison of specified materials and equipment and proposed substitute, indicating: 1) Size (physical dimensions) when: item is in use, when not in use, and space required for routine and major maintenance. 2) Weight and loading at supports, when item is full and empty. Materials of construction. 3. Operation requirements, including: a. Anticipated consumption of each item of: Electricity, other energy sources, water, chemicals (indicate each), and other needs for operation at the Site. b. Typical labor required for operation and associated skill level. c. Description of remote monitoring and control capabilities, as applicable. 4. Maintenance requirements, including: a. Anticipated life in the service and environment required. b. Frequency and general scope of routine and major maintenance typically necessary. c. Typical labor requirements and general qualifications of personnel performing routine maintenance. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 5 d. Major, associated equipment necessary for routing and major maintenance, including hoisting equipment type and capacity (when applicable). e. Availability, scope, cost, and general conditions of service and maintenance contracts, if any. 5. References for similar projects on which the materials and equipment were used. Indicate for each: a. Project owner name, name of facility where installed, and name of project. b. City, state, and country of installation. c. Model number/size and quantity furnished and installed. d. Year of installation. e. Contact information for owner and design professional, including telephone numbers. 6. Other information required by the Contract Documents. 7. Other information reasonably requested by Engineer. 1.5 SUBSTITUTE CONSTRUCTION METHODS, PROCEDURES, OR SEQUENCES A. Provisions of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, regarding substitutes of materials and equipment are hereby extended to apply to substitute methods, procedures, and sequences as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. B. In addition to other requirements of this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, substitution requests for substitute methods, procedures, or sequences shall include: 1. Clear identification of the method, procedure, or sequence shown or indicated in the Contract Documents for which substitute is requested. 2. Detailed description of proposed substitute method, procedure, sequence, or combination thereof. 3. Reasons why substitute is proposed and benefits to the Project should the substitute be approved. 4. Detailed list of how the proposed substitute deviates from associated method, procedure, or sequence shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. 5. Impact of the substitute, if approved, on Owner’s or facility manager’s operations, when the Work is at an existing facility. 6. Effect on other contractors working at the Site, if substitute is approved. 7. Description of temporary equipment and temporary facilities needed, should the substitute be approved, including quantity of items, capacities, performance characteristics, permitting and approvals required by authorities having jurisdiction, and proposed location at the Site. 8. Written evaluation of how substitute method, procedure, or sequence complies with Laws and Regulations. 9. Drawings illustrating method, procedure, or sequence. 10. Materials to be used that contain Constituents of Concern or that have potential to cause or exacerbate a Hazardous Environmental Condition. 11. Other information and data required by the Contract Documents. 12. Other information reasonably required by Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The following, bound after this Section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications Section: 1. Exhibit A - Substitution Request Form (one page). END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1 EXHIBIT A Substitution Request Form (One Item per each Form) Project: Date: Substitution Requestor: Contractor: Specification Section No: Paragraph No. (i.e. 2.1.A.1.c): Specified Item: Proposed Substitution: Provide Product Data Sheets, Manufacturer’s written installation instructions, drawings, diagrams, or any other information as an attached to this Form that will demonstrate the proposed substitution is an Approved Equal. State differences between proposed substitutions and specified item. Differences include but are not limited to interrelationship with other items; materials, equipment, function, utility, life cycle costs, applied finished, appearances, and quality. ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Document how the proposed substitution is compatible with or modifies other systems, parts, equipment or components of the Project and Work under the Contract ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Describe what effect the proposed substitution has on dimensions indicated on the Drawings and previously reviewed Shop Drawings? ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Describe what effect the proposed substitution has on the Construction Schedule and Contract Time. ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Describe what effect the proposed substitution has on the Contract Price. This includes all direct, indirect, impact and delay costs. ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Manufacturer’s guarantees of the proposed and specified items are: ☐ Same ☐ Different (explain on attachment) The undersigned state that the function, utility, life cycle costs, applied finishes, appearance and quality of the proposed substitution are equal or superior to those of the specified item. For use by Engineer: ☐ Accepted – eligible for approval via Change Order ☐ Accepted as Noted – approval via Change Order ☐ Not Accepted __________________ _______________ Date (Telephone): _________________________________ Signature of PE, RA, or PG in Responsible Charge ______________________________________________ (Contractor’s Signature) ______________________________________________ (Contractor’s Firm) ______________________________________________ (Firms Address) ______________________________________________ (Telephone) Comments: Copyright 2020 HDR Engineering, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 1 SECTION 01 29 73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for the Schedule of values, including: a. Applicability. b. General provisions for Schedules of Values. c. Format, organization, and content of Schedule of Values. B. Related Requirements: Include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment. 2. Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Schedule of Values and Payment – General: 1. Contractor shall prepare and submit to Engineer for acceptance Schedule of Values that presents (as applicable): (a) an appropriate, detailed breakdown of the price of lump sum bid/pay items, and (b) an appropriate, detailed breakdown of the price of Work compensated on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, and (c) lists bid/pay items of Unit Price Work. The total of all Work among the various bid/pay items shall equal the Contract Price. 2. For each item of lump sum Work and Work compensated on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Schedule of Values shall, establish in detail the portion of the Contract Price allocated to each component of such Work. 3. Upon request of Engineer, promptly furnish data and information that substantiates and supports the amounts indicated in the Schedule of Values. 4. Submit preliminary Schedule of Values to Engineer for initial review. Contractor shall incorporate Engineer’s comments into the Schedule of Values and resubmit to Engineer. Engineer may require corrections and re-submittals until Schedule of Values is acceptable. 5. Schedule of Values may be used, where appropriate, as a basis for negotiating price of changes, if any, in the Work. B. Applicability: 1. Lump Sum Work: a. For Work paid on a lump sum basis, progress payments will be on the basis of Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, for each line item in the Schedule of Values, as recommended to Owner by Engineer.. 2. Unit Price Work: a. Breakdown of unit prices (whether in a Schedule of Values or elsewhere) into detailed cost or price components is not required. b. Unit Price Work will be measured for payment in accordance with the Contract Documents, including Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES A. General Provisions for Schedules of Values: 1. This Section augments requirements for the Schedule of Values, indicated in the General Conditions, as may be augmented by the Supplementary Conditions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 2 1. Submit to Engineer the Schedule of Values in the form and quantity required in Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, and in accordance with Section 01 31 26 - Electronic Communication Protocols. 2. Content of Schedule of Values Submittals shall be in accordance with this Section. 3. Timing of Submittals: a. Preliminary Schedule of Values: 1) Submit preliminary Schedule of Values within time limit indicated in the General Conditions. b. Initial Acceptable Schedule of Values: 1) Revise the preliminary Schedule of Values in accordance with Engineer’s comments. 2) Contractor will not be eligible for progress payment until acceptable Schedule of Values is submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3) Submit the Schedule of Values acceptable to Engineer in accordance with the General Conditions. c. Updates: Submit updated Schedule of Values when: 1) The Contract Price has changed. 2) Requested by Engineer 1.5 FORMAT, ORGANIZATION, AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Organization and Major Elements of Schedule of Values. 1. Prepare Schedule of Values on the “progress estimate” or “continuation sheets”, as applicable, of the Application for Payment form indicated in Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. 2. Include in Schedule of Values itemized list of Work for each major work area included in the Work, for each lump sum payment item included in the Contract. Group the Work in the Schedule of Values into the following areas: a. Solar Power Area 1500. 1) Contractor will not be eligible for progress payment until acceptable Schedule of Values is submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2) Clearing, grading and Site-preparation 3) Racking System Design, Provide, and Installation 4) Inverter, provide, install, terminate all feeder conductors 5) Solar PV Panels, provide, install, terminate all conductors 6) Controls provide install, terminate all conductors and networks 7) Aggregator panel (480V) provide all appurtenances and mounting, terminate all conductors. b. Utility Point of Connection Area 1400 1) Contractor will not be eligible for progress payment until acceptable Schedule of Values is submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2) Provide disconnection Circuit Breaker, pad extension, and control system panels on rack 3) Provide terminations between disconnection circuit breaker and Point of Connection. c. Feeder P1 and all associated work 1) Contractor will not be eligible for progress payment until acceptable Schedule of Values is submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2) Sawcut, Trenching, Backfill, compaction, road repair from Aggregator to Disconnection Circuit Breaker. 3) Conduit and conductor installation including termination between Aggregator and Disconnection Circuit Breaker. 3. In addition, list either in the Schedule of Values or on a separate worksheet included with Applications for Payment all Unit Price Work bid/pay items in the Contract. The balance of this Article applies to lump sum Work and Work compensated on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Organization in Accordance with Specification Sections: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 3 a. Within each work area, organize the Schedule of Values by the various Specifications section numbers and titles included in the Contract Documents. b. Label each row in the Schedule of Values with the appropriate Specifications section number. Include an amount for each row in the Schedule of Values. c. List sub-items of major materials, equipment, or systems, as appropriate or when requested by Engineer. B. Requirements for both the preliminary Schedule of Values Submittal and the Schedule of Values Submittal for Engineer’s acceptance are: 1. Subcontracted Work: a. Schedule of Values shall indicate division of Work between Contractor and each Subcontractor. b. Line items for Work to be performed by each Subcontractor shall include the word, “(SUBCONTRACTED)” and the name of the Subcontractor once the associated subcontract is signed and effective. 2. Apportionment between Materials and Equipment, and Installation: Schedule of Values shall include separate apportionment of costs for: a. Cost of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the completed construction. b. Cost of delivery, handling, and storage of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the completed construction. c. Cost of temporary materials (such as excavation supports, scaffolding, and other temporary materials), and their associated delivery, handling, and storage costs, if any. d. Cost of rentals of construction equipment and machinery, whether owned by Contractor or Subcontractor or leased from a third-party equipment rental entity. e. Cost of installing materials and equipment. f. Travel and subsistence costs, if any. g. Other costs used in preparing the Bid by Contractor and each Subcontractor. 3. Sum of individual line item amounts indicated on the Schedule of Values shall equal the total of associated bid/pay item. Sum of bid/pay item totals in the Schedule of Values, plus the sum of any separate listing of Unit Price Work items, shall equal the total Contract Price. 4. Overhead and Profit: a. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor’s overhead and profit in the Contract Price. b. Do not include overhead and profit as separate line item(s). 5. Allowances: Include separate line item for each allowance. 6. Unit Price Work: Separately indicate items of Unit Price Work in the overall Schedule of Values. Where the required form (in accordance with Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures) includes a separate worksheet or page for Unit Price Work, indicate all items of Unit Price Work on such worksheet or page of the form. 7. Bonds and Insurance Costs: a. Include line item for bonds and insurance in amount not greater than 1.5 percent of the total Contract Price. b. When greater than the amount stipulated immediately above is proposed by Contractor in the Schedule of Values, submit to Engineer documentation substantiating the proposed amounts. Submit to Engineer such documentation when otherwise requested by Engineer. c. When Contractor has furnished performance and payment bonds and evidence of insurance acceptable to Owner and in accordance with the Contract Documents, entire amount for bonds and insurance may be applied for in the first Application for Payment. 8. Construction Support, Project Management, and Administrative Cost Elements: a. Costs under this category are sometimes informally referred to as “field overhead”, but are Project costs rather than costs related to Contractor’s general business operations. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 4 b. Include in the Schedule of Values relevant line items and amounts for work and services required by the General Conditions and specific Division 01 Specifications sections, such as: 1) Project management costs. 2) Onsite superintendence and supervision costs. 3) Itemized list of Work by work area, as applicable, for costs associated with coordination with the Owner’s operations, including required sequencing, as set forth in the Contract Documents. 4) Updating the construction Progress Schedule, preparing time impact analyses, and preparing recovery schedules. Preparation of preliminary Progress Schedule and the initial (“baseline”) Progress Schedule acceptable to Engineer are part of mobilization. 5) Construction progress photographic documentation. Preconstruction photographic documentation and final photographic documentation are, respectively, part of mobilization and demobilization. 6) Updates of the Schedule of Submittals. 7) Contractor’s safety representative and ongoing implementation of Contractor’s Site-specific health and safety plan (SSHASP). Establishing the SSHASP is part of mobilization. 8) Ongoing compliance with permits (when applicable). Contractor’s securing of required work permits is part of mobilization. 9) Ongoing cost for temporary utilities and temporary facilities. Establishing such services and facilities is part of mobilization. 10) Ongoing costs for temporary security . 11) Field offices (monthly rental and maintenance) and storage facilities (excluding costs of establishment and removal, which are part of mobilization and demobilization). 12) Ongoing site maintenance, such as temporary controls (dust, air pollution, water pollution, solid waste control, pest and rodent control, temporary erosion and sediment controls, and others), snow and ice removal, and similar activities. 13) Field engineering and surveying. 14) Progress cleaning and cleaning for Substantial Completion. 15) Record documents (preparation, maintenance, and submittal). a) If adequate record documents are maintained, up to 50 percent of the value of the record documents line item will be eligible for payment, spread evenly over those progress payments in which construction at the Site is performed. b) Remainder of Project record documents line item will be eligible for payment when complete record documents are submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents. c) If record documents submitted are unsatisfactory to Engineer, amount may be reduced via set-offs in accordance with the Contract Documents. 16) Other items required by Engineer. c. Include such items in Applications for Payment on payment schedule acceptable to Engineer. d. Such line items in the Schedule of Values shall exclude any and all costs associated with Contractor’s permanent place(s) of business, personnel stationed at permanent office(s), salaries and bonuses of executive and administrative personnel not directly performing work on the Project, and general business expenses, all of which are part of Contractor’s overhead costs. 9. Mobilization and Demobilization: Include all associated costs in the separate bid/pay item for mobilization and demobilization. The scope of such bid/pay item is indicated in Section 01 22 00 – Measurement and Payment. 10. Mobilization and Demobilization: a. Include separate line items under each appropriate lump sum bid/pay item for mobilization and demobilization. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 5 b. Document for Engineer the activities included in mobilization and demobilization line items. c. Mobilization includes: 1) Obtaining Owner’s acceptance of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers and entering into subcontracts and purchase orders needed to start the Work. 2) Preparing and obtaining Engineer’s approval of Shop Drawings required in Section 01 14 19 - Use of Site. 3) Preparing and obtaining Engineer’s acceptance of schedules, including Progress Schedule, Schedule of Submittals, and Schedule of Values. 4) Preconstruction conference(s) required by the Contract Documents. 5) Preconstruction photographic documentation. 6) Establishing Contractor’s Site-specific health and safety plan, preconstruction activities needed to start implementing Contractor’s safety programs, and verifying status of training of construction workers and personnel and condition of construction equipment, machinery, and tools. 7) Submitting acceptable emergency contact information 8) Obtaining required permits needed to start the Work. 9) Initial establishment of temporary utilities and temporary facilities. 10) Establishing Contractor’s field office and sheds, Contractor’s storage areas, staging and laydown areas, and other areas necessary to perform the Work. 11) Initial establishment of construction vehicular access to the Site, parking needed for construction, and offsite haul routes. 12) Establishing construction equipment, machinery, and tools at the Site. 13) Providing initial temporary controls. 14) Establishing temporary security needed to start Work at the Site. 15) Other mobilization acceptable to Engineer. d. Mobilization will be limited to 2 percent of the Contract Price, and will be paid in two monthly payments, each of 50% percent of total amount for mobilization. Should Contractor propose mobilization in an amount greater than the limit indicated in this paragraph or on an alternative schedule from that indicated in this paragraph, submit to Engineer for acceptance information and documentation sufficient to support and substantiate the proposed amount and payment schedule for mobilization. a. Demobilization includes: 1) Removal from the Site and adjacent areas of excess materials and equipment. 2) Removal of temporary controls, temporary facilities, temporary barriers, and similar materials and equipment. 3) Removal of temporary access roads and parking areas not part of permanent pavement or otherwise allowed to remain by Owner, including temporary traffic controls established for construction vehicles and equipment. 4) Removal of all field office and sheds, storage areas, staging and laydown areas, and other areas needed to perform the Work and restoration of such areas. 5) Removal from the Site of all construction equipment, machinery, tools, Contractor’s containers, temporary fuel storage tanks, and similar items. 6) Closeout of permits on which Contractor is a permittee or co-permittee. 7) Final cleaning. 8) Furnishing required closeout documents. 9) Other costs and effort by Contractor for demobilization. b. Demobilization shall be not less than 1 percent of the Contract Price and shall be included with the Application for Payment following Substantial Completion, or other schedule acceptable to Engineer. 11. Costs for Submittals, field quality control activities, and training of operations and maintenance personnel shall be as follows, unless otherwise accepted by Engineer: a. Submittals: Up to 8.0 percent of cost (including all associated overhead and profit) of each equipment item, exclusive of transportation and installation costs associated therewith, may be allocated to preparation of Shop Drawings, Samples ,and other Submittals required for release for purchase, fabrication, or delivery (as applicable) and Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 29 73 - 6 may be included in the Application for Payment following Engineer’s approval of Shop Drawings (and acceptance of other Submittals, as applicable) required for fabricating or purchasing for that item for the Work. b. Field Quality Control: Up to 3.0 percent of total cost of each item (including all associated overhead and profit), including materials and equipment, and installation, may be apportioned to specified or required field quality control activities (including required testing and inspections) and included in the Application for Payment following Engineer’s acceptance of the associated written field quality control report Submittal(s). c. O&M Manual Submittals and Training: Up to a total of 4.0 percent of equipment cost (including all associated overhead and profit), exclusive of transportation and installation costs, may be apportioned to operations and maintenance manuals and training of operations and maintenance personnel, which may be included in the Application for Payment following completion of training for the associated item. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 76 - 1 SECTION 01 29 76 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor’s progress payments. B. Scope: 1. Contractor’s requests for payment shall be in accordance with the Agreement, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, and the Specifications. 2. Form: Applications for Payment shall be the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (EJCDC) document EJCDC C-620, “Contractor’s Application for Payment” (2018 edition or later) or other form acceptable to the Owner and Engineer. 1.2 CONTENT AND PROCEDURE FOR REQUESTING PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Procedure: 1. Review with Resident Project Representative (RPR) quantities and the Work proposed for inclusion in each progress payment request. Application for Payment shall cover only the Work and quantities recommended by the RPR. 2. Contractor will review with Engineer or RPR the status of Project record documents, in connection with Engineer’s review of each Application for Payment. Failure to maintain record document current will be cause for Engineer to recommend a reduction in payment for record documents in accordance with Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values, and will entitle Owner to set-offs in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Submit to Engineer electronic originals, each with Contractor’s signature, of each complete Application for Payment and other documents to accompany the Application for Payment. 4. Engineer will act on request for payment in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 5. . B. Content: Each request for payment shall include: 1. Completed Application for Payment form, including summary/signature page, progress estimate sheets, and stored materials summary. Progress estimate sheets shall have the same level of detail as the Schedule of Values. 2. Documentation for Stored Materials and Equipment: a. For materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but suitably stored, submit documentation in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. b. UCC-1 Financial Statement: 1) For each lot or delivery of stored materials and equipment for which payment is requested prior to installation of the item(s) at the Site, complete UCC-1, “Financial Statement” form. On UCC-1 form, indicate Owner as “security party”; indicate Supplier as “debtor” when stored item(s) are in Supplier’s custody, and indicate Contractor as “debtor” when stored item(s) are in Contractor’s custody; and clearly indicate in detail all stored item(s) included in the filing as “collateral” on the form. Include attachments to the form when necessary to clearly and fully indicate in detail the associated “collateral”. 2) File completed UCC-1 form with the secretary of state in the state where the subject item(s) are stored. 3) Include with Application for Payment the completed UCC-1 form together with evidence of filing with the required state(s). Submit UCC-1 form and related documentation once for each lot or delivery of stored items. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 76 - 2 c. Legibly indicate on invoice or bill of sale the specific stored materials or equipment included in the payment request and corresponding bid/payment item number for each and the Supplier price for each item. 3. . 4. Listing of Subcontractors and Suppliers: a. In accordance with the General Conditions, submit not less than monthly updated listing of all Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor, whether or not such entities have a contract directly with Contractor. b. Submit complete information using the form attached to this Specifications section. 5. Allowance Work: a. For payment requests that include payment for Work under an allowance, include with the progress payment request copy of Owner’s authorization of the associated allowance Work. 6. Partial Release or Reduction of Retainage: a. For each Application for Payment where Contractor requests partial release or reduction of retainage in any amount (other than request for final payment), submit with associated progress payment request consent of surety to partial release or reduction of retainage, duly completed by Contractor and surety. b. Acceptable form includes AIA G707A, “Consent of Surety to Reduction in or Partial Release of Retainage” (1994 or later edition), or other form acceptable to Owner. c. For payment requests that include reduction in or payment of retainage in an amount greater than that required by the Contract Documents, obtain Owner’s concurrence for partial release or reduction in retainage prior to submitting such Application for Payment. 1.3 ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES FOR PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Partial Payment: 1. Contractor may request partial payment for stored materials at the milestones listed in the table below: Milestone Eligible Payment (% of Material Cost) Shop Drawing Approvals and Fully Executed Purchase Order 50 Delivery of Materials to Project Site in Accordance with the Contract Documents 50 Total Payment 100% (project retainage will still be withheld) B. Observation of Stored Materials and Equipment as Condition Precedent to Eligibility for Payment: 1. General: a. Prior to materials or equipment suitably stored but not yet incorporated into the Work can be eligible for payment, Engineer or Resident Project Representative (RPR) shall visit the storage location and verify the extent, condition, and storage environment of the stored items. b. When the same material or equipment item is stored for more than two months, such visits to storage location shall be not less than once every two months. 2. Cost Responsibility for Observations: a. When storage location is less than 20 miles from the Site or less than 20 miles from Engineer’s office, Contractor is not responsible for reimbursing Owner for cost of Engineer’s time and expenses for observing stored materials and equipment. b. When storage location is more than 20 miles from the Site and more than 20 miles from Engineer’s office, Contractor shall reimburse Owner, via a set-off under the Contract Documents, for reasonable cost of Engineer’s time and expenses, including travel time, to visit the storage location and observe the stored materials and equipment. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 76 - 3 C. Other Requirements for Stored Items: Regardless of storage location, perform the following for stored materials and equipment for which payment is sought: 1. Clearly mark each stored container, crate, or item as follows: “Property of City of Bozeman Water Reclamation Facility” using permanent marking. Such marking shall not blemish or deface the finish of items that will be exposed to view after installation at the Site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The forms listed below, following this Specifications section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications section: 1. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers form (two pages). END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 76 - 4 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS Owner: _____ Project Name: _____ Contractor: Date: _____ Contract Designation: Indicate below complete information for each Subcontractor and Supplier known to Contractor, regardless of whether the firm has a direct contract with Contractor. Include all lower-tier Subcontractors and associated Suppliers. Copy and paste the paragraphs below as required to indicate all Subcontractors and Suppliers. SUBCONTRACTORS 1. Subcontractor Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Work Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Work: • Current Subcontract Price: • Approximate Subcontract Start Date: • Approximate Subcontract End Date: 2. Subcontractor Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Work Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Work: • Current Subcontract Price: • Approximate Subcontract Start Date: • Approximate Subcontract End Date: 3. Subcontractor Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Work Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Work: • Current Subcontract Price: • Approximate Subcontract Start Date: • Approximate Subcontract End Date: Total of Subcontract Prices for all subcontracts equals approximately _____percent of the Contract Price (Contractor to fill in blank monthly) Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 76 - 5 SUPPLIERS 1. Supplier Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Furnishing Items Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Items: • Current Purchase Order Amount: • Approximate Purchase Order Date: • Approximate Purchase Order End Date: 2. Supplier Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Furnishing Items Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Items: • Current Purchase Order Amount: • Approximate Purchase Order Date: • Approximate Purchase Order End Date: 3. Supplier Name: • Address: • Contact Person: • Telephone No.: • E-mail Address: • Furnishing Items Under Specifications Section Nos.: • Brief Description of Items: • Current Purchase Order Amount: • Approximate Purchase Order Date: • Approximate Purchase Order End Date: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS 01 31 26 - 1 SECTION 01 31 26 ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Procedures with which Users will comply regarding transmission or exchange of Electronic Documents for the Project. B. Related Requirements: 1. Refer to the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, regarding transmitting Electronic Documents by Electronic Means. 2. In addition to the requirements of this Specifications Section, comply with the requirements for Electronic Documents in the following Specifications: a. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. b. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. The following terms are defined for use in this Specifications Section and are indicated herein using initial capital letters. The terms have the associated meaning regardless of whether indicated in singular or plural. 1. Electronic Documents Protocol (abbreviated as “EDP”): Procedures and requirements set forth in this Specifications Section for the exchange of Electronic Documents by Electronic Means. 2. Project Website: An internet-based software platform, such as a website or other project management information system (PMIS) designated by Contract or mutual consent of Users as the means of exchanging Electronic Documents during the Project. 3. System Infrastructure: Hardware, operating system(s) software, internet access, e-mail service and software, security software, and large-file transfer functions. 4. Users: Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others exchanging Electronic Documents on the Project in accordance with the EDP. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS. A. Coordination: 1. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors and Suppliers to comply with the EDP established in the Contract Documents. 1.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT PROTOCOL A. EDP – General: 1. To the fullest extent practical, Users agree to and will transmit and accept Electronic Documents transmitted by Electronic Means in accordance with the requirements of this Specifications Section. Use of the Electronic Documents and any information contained therein is subject to requirements of this Specifications Section and other provisions of the Contract Documents governing transmittal of Electronic Documents. 2. Content of Electronic Documents will be the responsibility of transmitting User. 3. Unless otherwise provided in: (1) the EDP, (2) elsewhere in the Contract Documents, or (3) or other agreement between two or more Users governing use of Electronic Documents, Electronic Documents exchanged in accordance with the Contract Documents may be used in the same manner as paper or other printed versions of the same documents exchanged using other than Electronic Means, subject to the same governing requirements, limitations, and restrictions set forth in the Contract Documents. 4. Except as otherwise explicitly indicated in the EDP, the terms of this EDP will be incorporated into any other agreement or subcontract between a party and a third party for a Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS 01 31 26 - 2 portion of the Work or Project-related services, where such third party is, either directly or indirectly, required to exchange Electronic Documents with Owner, Contractor, or Engineer. Nothing in this EDP modifies the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding communications between and among Owner, Contractor, and Engineer Subcontractors, Suppliers, consultants, and others for which each is responsible. 5. When transmitting Electronic Documents, transmitting User makes no representations regarding long-term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the receiving User’s use of software applications or System Infrastructure differing from those established in this EDP. 6. This EDP does not negate or mitigate any obligation: (1) in the Contract Documents to create, provide, or maintain an original paper record version of Drawings and Specifications, signed and sealed in accordance with Laws or Regulations; (2) to comply with Laws and Regulations governing signing and sealing of design documents or signing and electronic transmission of other documents; or (3) to comply with notice requirements of the General Conditions (as. May be modified by the Supplementary Conditions). 7. Modifications to EDP: a. When modifications to the EDP are necessary to address issues affecting System Infrastructure, Users shall cooperatively resolve the issues. b. If resolution within a reasonable time is not achieved, Owner is empowered to require reasonable and necessary changes to the EDP consistent with the original intent of the EDP. c. If such changes result in additional cost or delay to Contractor, not reasonably anticipated under the original EDP, Contractor may seek an adjustment in the Contract Price, Contract Times, or both in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. System Infrastructure and Systems for Exchanging Electronic Document: 1. Each User will provide System Infrastructure (as defined in this EDP) at its own cost and sufficient for complying with EDP requirements. Except for minimum standards set forth in this EDP, it is the obligation of each User to determine, for itself, such User’s own System Infrastructure. a. Maximum size of e-mail file attachment under this EDP is 10 megabytes (MB). Attachments larger than the maximum size indicated in this paragraph shall be exchanged via secure electronic transfer using method mutually acceptable to Owner, Engineer, and Contractor. b. Each entity transmitting or receiving Electronic Documents has full responsibility for its own costs, delays, deficiencies, and errors associated with converting, translating, updating, verifying, licensing, and otherwise enabling its System Infrastructure for use in accordance with this EDP. c. Each User will provide its own printing facilities and will be responsible for its own costs of printing Electronic Documents. 2. Each User is responsible for its own system operations, security, back-up, archiving, audits, and other technology and resources for operations of its System Infrastructure during the Project, including coordination with the User’s individual(s) or subcontractor(s) responsible for managing its System Infrastructure and capable of addressing communications and other technology issues affecting exchange of Electronic Documents. 3. Security: a. Each User will operate and maintain industry-standard, industry-accepted, ISO standard, commercial-grade security software and systems to protect against threats including software viruses and other malicious software including worms, trojans, adware; data breaches; loss of confidentiality; and other threats in transmission to, or storage of, Electronic Documents from other Users, including transmission of Electronic Documents by physical media including flash drives/thumb drives, hard drives, compact discs (CD), digital video discs (DVD), and other portable devices, whether connected physically or wirelessly. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS 01 31 26 - 3 b. To the extent that a User maintains and operates such security software and appropriate System Infrastructure, such User will not be liable to other Users participating in the Project for breach of system security. 4. Principal means of exchanging Electronic Documents will be e-mail and files attached to e- mail, in accordance with the EDP. 5. Project Website: a. Owner will establish, operate, and maintain a Project Website (as defined in this EDP) for use of Owner, Engineer, Contractor, and other Users as appropriate during the Project, for exchanging and storing Project Electronic Documents. b. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, use of Project Website by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer is mandatory for exchanging Project documents as set forth in the EDP. c. Address of Project Website will be furnished to Contractor, and Project Website will be available to Contractor, within 10 days following the Effective Date of the Contract. C. General Requirements and Limitations for Software for Electronic Document Exchange: 1. Software and file formats for exchange of Electronic Documents shall be as indicated in Article 1.5 of this Specifications Section. 2. Software Versions: a. Each User will acquire the software and associated licenses necessary to create, transmit, receive, read, and us Electronic Documents for the Project, using the software and file formats indicate in Article 1.5 of this Specifications Section. b. Prior to using any updated version of the software required in the EDP for Electronic Document(s) transmitted to other User(s), the originating User will first notify and either (1) receive concurrence from receiving User(s) for use of the updated version, or (2) adjust its transmission to comply with the EDP. 3. Preservation of Intellectual Property and Confidentiality of Electronic Documents: a. Users agree to not intentionally edit, reverse-engineer, decrypt, remove security or encryption features, or convert to another format for modification purposes Electronic Documents, and information and data contained therein, transmitted in a file format, including portable document format (PDF), intended by transmitting User to not be modified, unless the receiving User (1) obtains permission from owner of the Electronic Document and intellectual property contained therein, or (2) is expressly allowed by the EDP to edit or modify the Electronic Document. b. Where modifying, editing, decryption, or reverse-engineering is allowed by the EDP, such use is conferred only for the Project. c. The EDP does not transfer any ownership or rights of any sort regarding use outside of the Project of Electronic Documents. d. Users shall not cite or quote excerpts of Electronic Documents for purposes outside of the Project unless required to do so by Laws and Regulations. D. Contractor’s Requests for Electronic Documents in Other Formats: 1. Release of Electronic Documents in format(s) other than those indicated in in Article 1.5 of this Specifications Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents will be at the discretion of Owner and subject to terms and conditions required by the owner of such files and documents, and the provisions indicated below. 2. To extent determined by Owner, in its sole discretion, to be appropriate, release of Electronic Documents in alternative format(s) requested by Contractor (“Request”) are subject to provisions of Owner’s response to the Request and to the following: a. Contractor’s Request shall be in writing. Owner and others, as appropriate, will consider and respond to Request promptly, but neither Owner nor Engineer will be responsible for any time or cost impacts on Contractor associated with timing of the Request, or with Owner’s decision associated therewith. b. When Engineer is the owner of the Electronic Documents requested by Contractor in native format, prior to Engineer transmitting such Electronic Documents to Contractor, Contractor shall sign and deliver to Engineer, without modifying or amending, Engineer’s “Electronic Media Release” agreement. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS 01 31 26 - 4 c. Content included in Electronic Documents created by Engineer and furnished in response to the Request was prepared by Engineer as an internal working document for Engineer’s purposes solely and, when provided to Contractor, is on an “as-is” basis without warranties of any kind, including, but not limited to any implied warranties of fitness for purpose. Contractor acknowledges that content of Electronic Documents furnished in response to the Request may not be suitable for Contractor’s purpose(s), or may require substantial modification and independent verification by Contractor. Content may include limited resolution of models, not-to-scale schematic representations and symbols, use of notes to convey design concepts in lieu of accurate graphics, approximations, graphical simplifications, undocumented intermediate revisions, and other shown or indicated information that may affect subsequent use by Contractor or others for whom Contractor is responsible. d. Electronic Documents containing text, graphics, metadata, or other types of data furnished by Engineer in response to the Request are only for Contractor’s convenience and any and all conclusions or information obtained or derived from such Electronic Documents will be at Contractor’s sole risk and expense. Contractor waives any and all claims against Engineer, Owner, or both arising from Contractor’s use of Electronic Documents furnished in response to the Request. e. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, and their respective consultants and subconsultants from any and all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorneys’ fees and defense costs, fees and costs of engineers, architects, geologists, accountants, and other professionals, and any and all other costs, direct and indirect, resulting from Contractor’s use, adaptation, or distribution of Electronic Document(s) furnished in response to the Request. f. Contractor shall not sell, copy, transfer, forward, give away or otherwise distribute the Electronic Documents (in source format or modified file format) to any third party without direct written authorization of Engineer or other entity that owns the Electronic document(s), unless such distribution is specifically indicated in the Request and is limited to Subcontractors and Suppliers. Contractor warrants that subsequent use by Subcontractors and Suppliers complies with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, Owner’s response to the Request, and release agreement(s) (if any) by owner of the Electronic Documents (including Engineer, where applicable). 1.5 EXCHANGE OF ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS A. Comply with the Electronic Document formats, transmission methods, and permitted uses set forth in Table 01 31 26-A, Exchange of Electronic Documents, below, when transmitting or using Electronic Documents on the Project. Where a row in the table has no indicated means of transmitting Electronic Documents, use for such documents only paper copies transmitted to the receiving party via appropriate delivery method. TABLE 01 31 26-A – EXCHANGE OF ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS Electronic Document Type Format Transmitting User Transmission Method Receiving User Allowed Uses Notes 1.5.A.1. Project communications General communications & correspondence EM, PDF O, E, C EM, EMA O, E, C R Meeting notices and agendas EM, PDF E EM, EMA O, C R Meeting minutes PDF E EM, EMA O, C R 1.5.A.2. Contractor's Submittals to Engineer Shop Drawings PDF C EMA E M (1) (1) Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS 01 31 26 - 5 Electronic Document Type Format Transmitting User Transmission Method Receiving User Allowed Uses Notes Product data Submittals, delegated design Submittals, and other action Submittals (except Samples) PDF C EMA E M (1) (1) Informational and closeout Submittals: PDF C EMA E M (1) (1) (6) Documentation of delivery of maintenance materials submittals PDF C EMA E M (1) 1.5.A.3. Engineer’s return of reviewed Submittals to Contractor Shop Drawings PDF E EMA O., C R Product data Submittals, delegated design Submittals, and other action Submittals PDF E EMA O., C R Informational and closeout Submittals: PDF E EMA O., C R (6) Documentation of delivery of maintenance materials submittals PDF E EMA O. C R 1.5.A.4. Contract Modifications Documents Requests for interpretation to Engineer PDF C., O EMA E M (1) (1) Engineer’s interpretations (RFI responses) PDF E EMA C, O R Engineer’s clarifications to Contractor EM, PDF E EM, EMA C, O R Engineer's issuance of Field Orders PDF E EMA C, O R Proposal Requests PDF E, O EMA C R Change Proposals – submitted to Engineer PDF C EMA O, E S Change Proposals – Engineer’s response PDF E EMA C. O Work Change Directives (for Contractor signature) PDF E EMA C R (2) Change Orders (for Contractor signature) PDF E EMA C R (2) 1.5.A.5. Applications for Payment (3) 1.5.A.6. Claims and other notices (4) 1.5.A.7. Closeout Documents Record drawings DWG and PDF C EMA E, O M (5) (5) Other record documents PDF C EMA E. O M (5) (5) Contract closeout documents 1. Key to Table 01 31 26-A: a. Data Format: 1) EM: .msg, .htm, .txt, .rtf, e-mail text. 2) W: .docx, Microsoft Word 2013 or later. 3) EX: .xlsx, Microsoft Excel 2013 or later. 4) PDF: .pdf. portable document format. 5) DWG: .dwg. Autodesk AutoCAD 2014 drawing. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS 01 31 26 - 6 b. Transmitting User: 1) O: Owner. 2) C: Contractor. 3) E: Engineer. c. Transmission Method: 1) EM: Via e-mail. 2) EMA: Attachment to e-mail transmission. 3) PORT: Delivered via portable media such as flash drive/thumb drive, CD, or DVD 4) PW: Posted to Project Website. 5) FTP: FTP transfer to receiving FTP server. d. Receiving User: 1) O: Owner. 2) C: Contractor. 3) E: Engineer. e. Permitted Uses: 1) S: Store and view only. 2) R: Reproduce and distribute. 3) I: Integrate (incorporate additional electronic data without modifying data received) 4) M: Modify as required to fulfill obligations for the Project. f. Notes: 1) Modifications by Engineer to Contractor’s Submittals and requests for interpretations are limited to printing, marking-up, and adding comment sheets. 2) May be distributed only to affected Subcontractors and Suppliers. Print, sign document, and return signed paper originals to Engineer. 3) Submit printed Applications for Payment with original (“wet”) signatures. 4) Submit notices, including Claims, in accordance with the notice provisions of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 5) Submit record drawings in native CAD format indicated when Contractor has signed Engineer’s standard agreement for release of electronic media. In addition, always submit record drawings as PDF files. Comply with Contract Documents requirements for Project record documents. 6) For operation and maintenance data, also submit paper copies as required by Section 01 78 23 - Operations and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Definition of various types of Submittals. 2. Coordination requirements for Submittals. 3. General provisions concerning Submittals. 4. Schedule of Submittals. 5. Contractor’s preparation of Submittals, including: a. Numbering. b. Marking. c. Organization and content. d. Proposed “or-equals”, substitutes, and deviations from Contract requirements. e. Electronic Documents Submittals. f. Contractor’s review and approval of each Submittal. g. Resubmittals. 6. Contractor’s transmittal of Submittals, including transmittal letters, transmittal and delivery method, and delivery of Samples, Closeout Submittals, and Maintenance Materials Submittals. 7. Engineer’s review, including: a. Timing. b. Meaning of Engineer’s Submittal action code(disposition) assigned. c. Delivery of Engineer’s responses on Submittals. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, incidentals, and other effort necessary to furnish Shop Drawings, product data Submittals, Samples, and other Submittals in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. This Section’s Article, “General Provisions Concerning Submittals” includes a summary of the Contract Documents’ locations of Submittals requirements. 3. Shop Drawings, product data Submittals, Samples, and other Submittals, whether or not approved or accepted by Engineer, are not Contract Documents. Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, of a Submittal does not alter or modify the Contract Documents. 4. Engineer and Owner have the right to rely on Contractor’s representations and certifications made regarding each Submittal. C. Related Requirements: Include but are not limited to: 1. Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2. Section 01 31 26 - Electronic Communication Protocols. 3. Section 01 35 73 - Delegated Design Procedures. 4. Section 01 78 23 - Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.2 REFERENCES A. References – Introduction: 1. This Article presents definitions and terminology used in this Section and throughout the Contract Documents. 2. Applicability of the Term “Submittals”: Where reference is made to Shop Drawings, product data Submittals, Samples, or other Submittals in this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the term “Submittals”, as defined in the Contract Documents, is intended. The foregoing applies regardless of whether such term is indicated with an initial capital letter, unless context of the subject provision clearly indicates otherwise. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2 3. Types of Submittals: a. Submittal types are classified as follows: (1) Action Submittals, (2) Informational Submittals, (3) Closeout Submittals, and (4) Maintenance Materials Submittals. b. Type of each required Submittal is indicated in the associated Specifications section. When Submittal type is not clearly indicated in the associated Specifications section, Submittal will be classified as indicated in this Article. Submit request for interpretation when Contractor is uncertain of required Submittal type. B. Action Submittals: 1. Action Submittals require an explicit, written approval or other appropriate action by Engineer (or other entity to whom the Submittal is required to be furnished, in accordance with the Contract Documents) before Contractor may release the associated item(s) for raw materials procurement, fabrication, production, and shipping. 2. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, Action Submittals include the following: a. Shop Drawings. b. Product data. c. Samples. d. Testing plans for quality control activities required by the Contract Documents. e. Delegated Designs: Delegated design professional’s “instruments of service” Submittals required by the Contract Documents , as further described in Section 01 35 73 - Delegated Design Procedures. 3. General Conditions’ requirements for Shop Drawings and Samples hereby apply to all Action Submittals. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Informational Submittals are so indicated in the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise indicated, Informational Submittals include certifications, evaluation reports, results of source quality control activities, results of field quality control activities, Supplier instructions, reports of Suppliers’ visits to the Site, sustainable design Submittals (that are not Closeout Submittals), delegated design Submittals that are not “instruments of service” Submittals, qualifications statements, and others. 2. Informational Submittals, when submitted in accordance with the Contract and indicating full compliance with the Contract Documents, do not require explicit response from Engineer (or other entity to whom the Submittal is to be delivered); Engineer’s (or other entity’s) acceptance thereof will be indicated in the Engineer’s Submittals log. Copy of Engineer’s Submittals log is available to Contractor upon Contractor’s written request. 3. When Informational Submittal does not indicate full compliance with the Contract Documents, Engineer (or other entity to which Submittal is to be delivered) will indicate the non-compliance in a written response to Contractor. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Closeout Submittals are so indicated in the Contract Documents and are, in general, required before the associated Work is completed, unless earlier submittal is required by the Contract Documents. 2. Unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, Closeout Submittals include maintenance contracts, operation and maintenance data, warranties, bonds (other than performance and payment bonds required prior to the start of construction), record documents, sustainable design closeout Submittals, software, keys, and others. 3. Closeout Submittals are processed in the same manner as described above for Informational Submittals. E. Maintenance Materials Submittals: 1. Maintenance materials include spare parts, extra materials, tools, and similar items required to be furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Furnish required physical maintenance materials, delivered to Owner or facility manager (if other than Owner), as applicable, at the location(s) indicated in the Contract Documents, for the corresponding required Maintenance Materials Submittals. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3 3. Maintenance Materials Submittals are documentation of delivery to Owner’s or facility manager, and their acceptance of, required physical maintenance materials. 4. Maintenance Materials Submittals are processed in the same manner as described above for Informational Submittals. F. Additional Terms: 1. The following terms have the meanings indicated below, regardless of whether such terms are indicated using initial capital letters, and apply to singular and plural of each: a. “Product data” means illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, Supplier’s published instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate or describe materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. In general, product data are manufacturers’ pre-published information on the items proposed to be incorporated into the Work. Product data includes manufacturer’s catalog pages and similar documents with contractor-made markings and indications of proposed products and proposed options. b. The term “Shop Drawings”, defined in the General Conditions, is supplemented by the following: Shop Drawings include: (1) fabrication and assembly drawings, usually having a title block, or (2) schedules, prepared specifically for the Project. Here, “schedules” means a Project-specific summary of systems and components, such as a schedule of HVAC equipment, schedules of doors and door hardware, or windows, or a schedule of paint systems by room and surface, or other, similar Project information in a tabular format. In contrast, construction Progress Schedules, Schedules of Submittals, and Schedules of Values are not Shop Drawings. Unless expressly required otherwise in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings shall not be prepared from, or on, the Drawings or any other component of the Contract Documents. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Furnish Submittals well in advance of need for the associated material or equipment, or procedure (as applicable), in the Work and with ample time necessary for delivery of materials and equipment and to implement procedures following Engineer’s approval or acceptance of the associated Submittal. 2. Work covered by a Submittal will not be included in payments by Owner until approval or acceptance (as applicable) of related Submittals has been obtained in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS CONCERNING SUBMITTALS A. Locations of Requirements: 1. Requirements concerning Submittals are generally located as follows: a. General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, applicable to the Project. b. This Section, which presents general requirements for Submittals applicable to the Project. c. Other Division 01 Specifications that include general requirements for certain types of Submittals, such as Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data, Section 01 35 73 - Delegated Design Procedures (when the Contract includes delegation of professional design services), and others. d. The “Submittals” Article of the various Specifications sections, which indicates the required Submittals for the associated Work. Furnish all Submittals required by the Contract Documents regardless of whether explicitly indicated in the associated Specifications’ “Submittals” Article. B. This Section augments and supplements the requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, relative to Submittals. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4 1.5 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Schedule of Submittals: a. Timing: 1) Furnish Schedule of Submittals within time frames indicated in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2) Submit updated Schedule of Submittals with each submittal of the updated Progress Schedule. b. Content: In accordance with the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. Requirements for content of preliminary Schedule of Submittals and subsequent Submittals of the Schedule of Submittals are identical. Identify on Schedule of Submittals all Submittals required in the Contract Documents. Updates of Schedule of Submittals shall show scheduled dates and actual dates for completed tasks. Clearly indicate Submittals that are on the Project’s critical path. Indicate the following for each Submittal: 1) Date by which Submittal will be received by Engineer. 2) Whether Submittal will be for a substitution or “or-equal”. 3) Date by which Engineer’s response is required. Allow not less than 14 days for Engineer’s review, starting on Engineer’s actual receipt of each Submittal. Allow increased time for large or complex Submittals. 4) For Submittals for materials or equipment, date by which material or equipment must be at the Site to avoid delaying the Work and to avoid delaying the work of others (if any). c. Prepare Schedule of Submittals. d. Coordinate Schedule of Submittals with the Progress Schedule. e. Schedule of Submittals that is not compatible with the Progress Schedule, or that does not indicate Submittals on the Project’s critical path, or that places extraordinary demands on Engineer for time and resources, is unacceptable. Do not include Submittals not required by the Contract Documents. f. In preparing Schedule of Submittals: 1) Considering the nature and complexity of each Submittal, allow sufficient time for reviews and revisions. 2) Allow reasonable time for: Engineer’s review and processing of Submittals, for Submittals to be revised and resubmitted, and for returning Submittals to Contractor. 3) Identify and accordingly schedule Submittals that are expected to have long anticipated review times. 1.6 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Prior to Submittal Preparation: 1. The General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, address Contractor’s responsibility for submitting for Owner’s acceptance identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers. Obtain Owner’s acceptance before entering into subcontracts and purchase orders for the Work. 2. Comply with the Contract Documents relative to terms and conditions of subcontracts and purchase orders for the Work. 3. Contractor’s responsibilities for the following are set forth in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and as may be augmented elsewhere in the Contract Documents: a. Obtaining field measurements and dimensions. b. Determining and verifying required quantities. c. Verifying compatibility of materials. d. Apportioning the Work among Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Contractor. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5 e. Reconciling required materials, equipment, and other Contract requirements with Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction and with Contractor’s safety and protection programs and precautions incident thereto. f. Reviewing applicable provisions of the Contract Documents and obtaining from Engineer necessary interpretations or clarifications. B. Submittal Identification: 1. Submittal Number: Shall be a unique number assigned to each individual Submittal. Assign Submittal numbers as follows: a. First part of Submittal number shall be the applicable Specifications section number, followed by a hyphen. b. Second part of Submittal number shall be a three-digit number (sequentially numbered from 001 through 999) assigned to each separate Submittal furnished under the associated Specifications section. c. Example: Submittal number for the third Submittal furnished for Section 10 14 00 - Signage, would be “10 14 00-003”. 2. Review Cycle Number: Each resubmittal of a given Submittal shall be indicated with a lower-case letter designation: a. No letter designation for initial (first) submittal of the Submittal number. b. “a” shall indicate first resubmittal of the Submittal number. c. “b” shall indicate second resubmittal of the Submittal number. 3. Examples: Example Description Submittal Identification Submittal No. Review Cycle Initial (first) review cycle of the third Submittal furnished under Section 10 14 00 – Signage 10 14 00-003- Second review cycle (first resubmittal) of third Submittal furnished under Section 10 14 00 - Signage 10 14 00-003- a C. Marking of Submittals: 1. Mark on each page of each Submittal and each individual component submitted with Submittal number and applicable Specifications paragraph. 2. Mark each page of each Submittal with the Submittal page number. 3. Each Shop Drawing sheet shall have title block with complete identifying information satisfactory to Engineer. 4. For product data Submittals, operation and maintenance data Submittals, and other Submittals: a. Mark options to be furnished using broad, dark arrows or “clouds” clearly drawn around the relevant text or diagrams. Do not use highlighter for indicating options and features. b. Indicate options and features not furnished using clear strikeouts through the text or diagrams. D. Submittal Organization and Content – General: 1. Page or Sheet Size; Furnish Submittals with one or more of the following page or sheet sizes: (a) 8.5 inches by 11 inches; (b) 11 inches by 17 inches; (c) 22 inches by 34 inches; unless another sheet size is acceptable to Engineer. 2. Language: All parts of each Submittal shall be in the English language. 3. Units of Measurement: Clearly indicate units of measurement on Shop Drawings, product data Submittals, record documentation, and operation and maintenance data Submittals. 4. Organize each Submittal logically to facilitate ease of understanding and review. 5. To the extent practicable, arrange Submittal information in same order as requirements are written in the associated Specifications section. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6 6. Each Submittal shall cover Work under only one Specifications section. 7. To the extent practicable, package together Submittals for the same Specifications section. Do not furnish required information piecemeal. 8. For large or complex Submittals, include a title page and table of contents. 9. Include appropriately labeled fly sheets to separate distinct parts of each Submittal. 10. Ensure legibility of all pages in each Submittal. 11. Minimize extraneous and unnecessary information in Submittals for materials and equipment. Do not submit information not relevant to the Submittal and associated requirements of the Contract Documents. 12. Contractor’s, Subcontractor’s, and Supplier’s written comments on Shop Drawings and product data diagrams shall be colored green 13. Do not submit under Specifications sections with title that includes either, “Common Work Results for” or, “Basic Requirements”, unless the subject material or equipment is specified, in total, in a Specifications section with the words, “Common Work Results for” or, “Basic Requirements” in its title. E. Electronic Documents Submittals: 1. Format: Electronic Documents Submittals shall be “portable document format” (.PDF) files unless expressly required otherwise by applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. 2. Electronic Documents Submittals must be electronically searchable when delivered to Engineer and other recipients. 3. Organization and Content: a. Each Electronic Documents Submittal shall be one file; do not divide individual Submittals into multiple Electronic Documents files each unless file size will exceed 20 MB. b. When Submittal is large or contains multiple parts, furnish PDF file with suitably titled electronic bookmark for each section of the Submittal. c. Content shall be identical to paper or other original Submittal. First page of each Electronic Documents Submittal shall be transmittal letter required in this’s Paragraph 1.7.A. 4. Quality and Legibility: Electronic Documents Submittal files shall be made from the original and shall be clear and legible. Markings applied by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier shall be clear, distinct, and readily apparent. Electronic Documents file shall be full size of original documents. Properly orient all pages for convenient reading on a computer display; do not furnish pages sideways or upside-down.. 5. Provide sufficient internet service, software, and systems for Contractor with capability appropriate for transmitting the necessary files and receiving responses from Engineer or other entities. 6. Check not less than once per day for distribution of Electronic Documents Submittals responses and related Electronic Documents correspondence. F. Proposed “Or-Equals”, Substitutes, and Deviations from Contract Requirements: 1. “Or-Equals”: a. The meaning of “or-equal” is addressed in Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. b. Contractor’s request for approval of “or-equals” is to be presented via the associated Action Submittal(s). c. Expressly and prominently indicate, “Proposed Or-Equal” on the associated Action Submittals when Submittal is for an “or-equal”. d. Submittals requesting approval of an “or-equal” but not accompanied by the required, supplemental information will be deemed incomplete by Engineer and returned to Contractor without approval. 2. Substitutes: a. The meaning of “substitute” is indicated in Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. b. Requests for approval of substitutes shall comply with Section 01 25 00 - Substitution procedures, and other relevant provisions of the Contract Documents. c. Contractor’s request for approval of substitute is separate from the associated Action Submittal(s). Action Submittals that request approval of a substitute when a separate, Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7 formal substitution request (furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents) was not previously furnished to Engineer, followed by formal approval in via an appropriate contract modification (typically either a Field Order or Change Order), will be deemed by Engineer as non-compliant with the Contract Documents and will be returned to Contractor without approval. d. Contractor is solely responsible for delays incurred due to substitutes proposed via Submittals that have not been previously duly approved via an appropriate Contract modification. e. Action Submittals for items or procedures approved via an appropriate Contract modification shall include a copy of the Contract modification in which the substitute was approved. 3. Submittals with Proposed Deviations from Contract Requirements: a. When Submittal proposes deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, the Submittal shall clearly and expressly indicate each proposed deviation. b. Also comply with this Section’s provision, in the Article below, on Contractor’s transmittal letter expressly alerting Engineer to the proposed deviations. c. Comply with requirements of the Contract regarding substitutes and “or-equals”. d. When deviation is proposed, also appropriately revise text of Contractor’s approval, from that required below in this Article. e. When Submittal includes deviations from Contract requirements and either the Submittal itself, Contractor’s transmittal letter, or both, do not comply fully with Contract requirements for indicating deviations in Submittals and giving separate written notice thereof, Engineer’s approval of such deviations will be deemed null and void unless Engineer’s written response to the Submittal has expressly acknowledged such deviation and indicated Engineer’s approval thereof. f. Contractor is solely responsible for delays and costs incurred due to any and all Submittals with deviations from Contract requirements that were not properly, expressly indicated and approved in accordance with the Contract Documents. Deviations not duly approved in accordance with the Contract Documents may be deemed defective Work. Contractor is solely responsible for remedying defective Work and all associated cost and time impacts. G. Contractor’s Approval of Submittals: 1. Contractor’s Review: Before transmitting Submittals to Engineer, review each Submittal to: a. Ensure proper coordination of the Work. b. Determine that each Submittal is in accordance with Contractor’s desires. c. Verify that Submittal contains sufficient information for Engineer to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Incomplete or inadequate Submittals will be returned without detailed review by Engineer. 3. Contractor’s Approval Stamp and Signature: a. Each Submittal furnished shall bear Contractor’s approval stamp (or facsimile thereof) and signature, as evidence that the Submittal has been reviewed and approved by Contractor and verified as complete and in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Submittals without Contractor’s approval and signature (as required by the contract Documents) will be returned to Contractor without further review by Engineer and deemed incomplete. c. Engineer reserves the right to reject as incomplete Submittals where Contractor’s approval signature appears computer-generated or reproduced without the active involvement or review of Contractor’s signatory. d. Contractor’s approval shall contain the following text: Project Name: Contractor’s Name: Contract Designation: Date: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8 ------------------ Reference --------------------- Submittal Title: Specifications: Section: Page No.: Paragraph No.: Drawing No.: _____of Location of Work: Submittal No. and Review Cycle: Coordinated by Contractor with Submittal Nos.: I hereby certify that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents relative to Contractor’s review and approval of this Submittal, including: (1) reviewed and coordinated the Submittal with other Submittals and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; (2) determined and verified all: field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to the Submittal, (b) the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (c) all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; (3) confirmed the Submittal is complete with respect to all related data included in the Submittal; and (4) clearly and expressly indicated all proposed deviations (if any) from the requirements of the Contract Documents both in the Submittal itself and in the Submittal’s transmittal letter. Accordingly, this Submittal is hereby approved for Contractor by: Approved for Contractor by: H. Resubmittals: 1. Refer to the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, for requirements regarding resubmitting required Submittals. 2. In addition to limits on the quantity of resubmittals, as indicated in the General Conditions, Contractor shall furnish Submittals with such completeness, accuracy, and compliance with the Contract Documents to obtain Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, without the total quantity of Submittals furnished, including all initial Submittals and all resubmittals, exceeding 125 % of the number of Submittals indicated on the Schedule of Submittals initially accepted by Engineer, plus a corresponding percentage of the quantity of Submittals required by Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. 3. Do not increase the scope of prior review cycle of the same Submittal. 4. Indicate on Contractor’s transmittal letter how Submittal was revised from previous review cycle of the Submittal and where the revisions or corrections are located within the resubmittal. 5. Expressly address and provide response for all components previously transmitted by Engineer on prior review cycles of the subject Submittal. Where resubmittal lacks complete response to Engineer’s prior comments, Engineer may deem such resubmittal as incomplete and return it to Contractor without further review. 6. Where part of the Submittal’s prior review cycle was expressly approved or accepted, as applicable, by Engineer, do not include such items in subsequent resubmittals. 7. Indicate, “Not Yet Resolved—To Be Resubmitted at a Later Date” for any items not approved in prior review cycle of the Submittal for items not included in the subject resubmittal. Engineer reserves the right to deem incomplete Submittals “Not Approved” or “Revise and Resubmit”. Furnishing incomplete or partial resubmittals is discouraged. 8. Resubmittal of Previously Approved or Accepted Items: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 9 a. Do not resubmit on a given item previously approved or accepted, as applicable, by Engineer, without Engineer’s advance consent. Consent will be given for bona-fide unavailability of a previously approved or accepted item where Contractor has acted in good faith in a timely manner with due diligence to comply with the Contract Times. b. Destroy or conspicuously mark “SUPERSEDED” on all documents having previously received Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, that are superseded by a resubmittal. 1.7 TRANSMITTAL OF SUBMITTALS BY CONTRACTOR A. Contractor’s Transmittal Letters for Submittals: 1. Furnish separate transmittal letter with each Submittal. Use transmittal form attached to this Section (as Exhibit 01 33 00-A) unless other transmittal form is acceptable to Engineer at the start of the Project’s construction. 2. When transmittal form other than this Section’s Exhibit 01 33 00-A is acceptable to Engineer, at beginning of each transmittal, include a reference heading indicating: Contractor’s name, Owner’s name, Project designation, Contract designation, transmittal number, and Submittal number (with review cycle). 3. “Or-Equals”: When the Submittal is proposing an “or-equal”, expressly so indicate on transmittal form submitted by Contractor. 4. Proposed Deviations from Contract Requirements: When the Submittal proposes deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, transmittal letter shall specifically describe each proposed deviation. B. Submittal Delivery Method: 1. This provision presents general requirements for delivery or all Submittals unless otherwise required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Furnish Submittals as Electronic Documents. 3. Furnish Submittals to Engineer and each other entity indicated in the Contract Documents as receiving a Submittal directly from Contractor. 4. Address Submittals to Engineer as follows: HDR, 700 SW Higgins, Missoula, MT 59803, to attention of Trey Morris, trey.morris@hdrinc.com. C. Closeout Submittals –Transmittal and Delivery: 1. Furnish the following Closeout Submittals in accordance with general requirements for transmitting and delivering Submittals, indicated above in this Article: maintenance contracts; warranty bonds (when required) and other bonds required for specific materials, equipment, or systems; warranty documentation; and sustainable design closeout documentation (when required). On documents such as maintenance contracts and bonds, include on each document furnished original (“wet”) signature of entity issuing said document. When original “wet” signatures are required, furnish such Submittals to Engineer both on original paper and as Electronic Documents, and to other entities furnish as indicated above in this Article for general requirements for Submittals. 2. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 3. Record Documents: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. 4. Software: In addition to software installed on Owner’s computer system, furnish number of copies of software required in the Specifications section where the software is specified. Preferred means of transmittal is via secure file transfer directly to Owner (or facility manager, if other than Owner) via secure file transfer method mutually acceptable to software developer and the receiving entity. When secure file transfer is used, submit to Engineer documentation signed or electronically acknowledged by Owner that the files were received. Where such software is available only on the software developer's portable media, furnish such software on software developer’s original, portable media, sealed in software developer’s original, unopened, clearly labeled packaging. D. Maintenance Materials Submittals – Delivery: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 10 1. Deliver physical maintenance materials required by the Contract Documents in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract. 2. Submit documentation of delivery of (Maintenance Materials Submittals) in accordance with general requirements for Submittals as indicated in this Section. 1.8 ENGINEER’S REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS A. This Article applies to review of all Submittals by Engineer or other entity to whom the Contract Documents require such Submittal be furnished. B. Timing: 1. Timing of Engineer’s review will be in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. 2. When Submittal is delivered to Engineer on a date other than that indicated in the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer, duration of Engineer’s review may differ from that indicated in the Schedule of Submittals, based on Engineer’s availability and resources. Engineer will make good-faith effort to furnish responses to Submittals in a timely manner. 3. Contractor is responsible for communicating to Engineer when a Submittal is on the Project’s critical path. C. Engineer’s Review: 1. Markings: a. Comments or responses marked directly on Submittal by Engineer (or other entity reviewing Submittal) will be colored red. b. Engineer may also present narrative comments on a comment sheet inserted by Engineer into the Submittal or included on Engineer’s transmittal letter for the Submittal. Such comments will be in black text. When a separate comment sheet is included by Engineer, such sheet will be clearly identified as Engineer’s comments. 2. Engineer’s review and disposition assigned to Submittal are subject to the following: a. Submittal disposition is subject to: Engineer’s comments on the Submittal; disclaimer language on Engineer’s Submittal transmittal letter; Engineer’s Submittal review stamp (when used) or equivalent (when used); and this provision. b. Engineer’s review is only for general compatibility with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents, and for general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. c. Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with the Contract Documents, as well as with Supplier instructions consistent with the Contract Documents, Owner’s directions, and Laws and Regulations. Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining, correlating, confirming, and correcting dimensions at the Site; quantities; information and choices pertaining to fabrication processes; means, methods, sequences, procedures, and techniques of construction; safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and for coordinating the work of all trades. d. Engineer is not responsible for resubmittals not yet furnished by Contractor or tracking Contractor’s progress on resubmittals. 3. Documents not required by the Contract Documents but nonetheless furnished by Contractor as submittals will not be reviewed by Engineer. D. Meaning of Submittal disposition Assigned by Engineer: 1. Action Submittals: a. “Approved” (Action Code A): Upon return of Submittal marked “Approved”, order, ship, or fabricate materials and equipment included in the Submittal (pending Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, of production-related qualifications statements and certifications, and required source quality control Submittals) or otherwise proceed with the Work in accordance with the Submittal and the Contract Documents. b. “Approved as Noted” (Action Code B): Upon return of Submittal marked “Approved as Noted”, order, ship, or fabricate materials and equipment included in the Submittal (pending Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable, of production-related Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 11 qualifications statements and certifications, and required source quality control Submittals) or otherwise proceed with the Work in accordance with the Submittal and the Contract Documents, and in accordance with Engineer’s comments and notes indicated in Engineer’s Submittal response c. “Revise and Resubmit” (Action Code C): Upon return of Submittal marked “Revise and Resubmit”, make the revisions necessary and indicated and resubmit to Engineer for approval. d. “Not Approved” (Action Code D): This disposition indicates material or equipment that cannot be approved. “Not Approved” disposition may also be applied to Submittals that are incomplete. Upon return of Submittal marked “Not Approved”, repeat initial submittal procedure utilizing approvable material or equipment, with a complete Submittal clearly indicating all information required. 2. Informational, Closeout, and Maintenance Materials Submittals: a. “Accepted” (Action Code F): Information included in Submittal complies with the applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is acceptable. No further action by Contractor is required relative to such Submittal, and the Work covered by the Submittal may proceed. Materials and equipment with Submittals with this disposition may be shipped or operated, as applicable. Submittals assigned “Accepted” by Engineer (or other reviewing entity) does not indicate Engineer’s acceptance of the associated Work, which is indicated only as set forth in the General Conditions. b. “Not Acceptable” (Action Code G): Submittal, or part thereof, does not indicate full compliance with applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is not acceptable. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services, and incidentals necessary to properly and accurately revise Submittal and resubmit to indicate acceptability and compliance with the Contract Documents 3. Other: a. “Submittal Not Reviewed” (Action Code E): Documents so marked by Engineer are not required by the Contract Documents. Submittals may also be marked with this disposition when information in the document was previously reviewed and approved or accepted by Engineer, as applicable. E. Distribution of Engineer’s Responses: 1. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, Engineer will distribute written responses (as Electronic Documents) to Submittals to the following: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Engineer’s file. 2. Engineer’s acceptance of Informational Submittals, Closeout Submittals, and Maintenance Materials Submittals will be recorded in Engineer’s Submittal log. Copy of Engineer’s Submittals log is available from Engineer upon written request of Owner or Contractor. If no such request is received by Engineer, Engineer will distribute copy of Engineer’s Submittals log once per month (when Submittals have been received or acted on by Engineer). Engineer may distribute copy of Engineer’s Submittals log as an Electronic Document or as handout at construction progress meetings. 3. Paper copies of Engineer’s Submittal responses will not be distributed unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed to by Engineer. 4. Contractor is responsible for forwarding Engineer’s Submittals responses to Subcontractors and Suppliers as appropriate, and for coordinating the Work of all trades. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The documents listed below, following this Section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications Section: 1. “Exhibit 01 33 00-A – Transmittal for Submittal No. ##” (one page). END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 13 Exhibit 01 33 00-A Transmittal for Submittal No. _____-_____ Project Name: Date Received: Project Owner: Checked By: Contractor: HDR Engineering, Inc. Log Page: Address: Address: HDR No.: Spec Section: Drawing/Detail No.: Attn (Contractor): Attn (HDR): Review Cycle Date Transmitted by Contractor: Date of Engineer’s Response Transmittal: Item No. Submittal No. Description (indicate number of copies where paper copies of physical Samples are returned) Manufacturer Supplier Dwg or Data No. Engineer’s Disposition (Action Code) * 1 2 3 4 Contractor’s Remarks (insert text): Engineer’s Remarks (insert text): : * Legend for Action Code indicated above, assigned by Engineer: Action Submittal: A – Approved B – Approved as Noted C – Revise and Resubmit D – Not Approved E – Submittal Not Reviewed Informational, Closeout, or Maintenance Materials Submittal: F – Accepted (this code normally recorded in Engineer’s Submittals log). G – Not Acceptable Engineer’s Disclaimer (for Submittals that do not involve delegated design): a. Submittal action code is subject to: Engineer’s comments on the Submittal, comment sheets (if any), and this transmittal letter; disclaimer language on Engineer’s Submittal review stamp or equivalent; and Specifications Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. b. Engineer’s review is only for general compatibility with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents, and for general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. c. Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with the Contract Documents, as well as with Supplier instructions consistent with the Contract Documents, Owner’s directions, and Laws and Regulations. Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining, correlating, confirming, and correcting dimensions at the Site; quantities; information and choices pertaining to fabrication processes; means, methods, sequences, procedures, and techniques of construction; safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and for coordinating the work of all trades. d. Engineer is not responsible for resubmittals or tracking progress of resubmittals. Reviewed for HDR by: Date of Engineer’s Review: Distribution: Contractor File Field Owner Other Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 35 73 - 1 SECTION 01 35 73 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General provisions for delegated design services. 2. Coordination of delegated designs with other Work. 3. Qualifications requirements for delegated design professionals. 4. Limitations on Engineer’s review of delegated design Submittals. 5. Responsibilities of delegated design professionals. B. Scope: 1. Delegated design is for solar panel and appurtenances racking and support systems. 2. Where delegated design is specifically Contractor’s responsibility in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide labor, services, other effort, and pay all costs necessary and required to perform delegated design services for Work that will be part of the completed Project as a functioning whole. 3. Perform delegated design Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, delegated design Action Submittals approved by Engineer, and Shop Drawings, product data Submittals, and Samples approved by the associated delegated design professional. 4. Contractor’s correction period, general warranty and guarantee, and obligations for safety and protection apply to delegated design Work to the same extent such provisions apply to all other Work under the Contract. 5. Specifications requiring delegated design services include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Solar panel driven pile racking/support system, mounting, securing, seismic, and all other appurtenances associated with the support system for solar panels and inverters. Contract drawings indicate notional concepts for reference only. b. Section 48 14 10 - PV Support Structures. c. Section 03 42 00 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete Building. d. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joists. e. Section 05 41 00 - Structural Metal Stud Framing. f. Section 05 44 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Trusses. g. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. h. Section 05 52 02 - Aluminum Railings. i. Section 05 52 05 - Steel Railings. j. Section 06 82 00 - Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Fabrications. k. Section 13 31 23 - Tensioned Fabric Structures. l. Section 13 34 19 - Metal Building Systems. m. Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. n. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. o. Section 26 05 48 - Electrical Seismic Restraint Systems. p. Section 26 32 13.13 - Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets. q. Section 31 48 23 - Foundation Push Piers. r. Section 31 62 13.23 - Prestressed Concrete Piles. 6. Not Delegated Design: The following are not delegated design and are not covered by this Section: a. Contractor’s use of design professionals for: (1) temporary construction or temporary facilities not part of the completed Project as a functioning whole, or (2) Contractor’s means, methods, procedures, techniques, and sequences of construction and safety and protection measures incident thereto. Requirements applicable to such professional services are in Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 35 73 - 2 b. Certain final designs that, in accordance with commonly accepted practice, are typically prepared by unlicensed, unregistered individuals, including for manufactured or fabricated systems, components or assemblies, not acting under the supervisory control of the design professional in responsible charge, but who commonly possess appropriate certification from a relevant industry organization, together with appropriate training and experience. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering. 2. Sections of Divisions 02-49 where delegated design Work is required. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters but, when used in this Section and Specifications of Division 02-49 where delegated design Work is required, have the meaning indicated below: a. “Delegated design” means preparing the final design of part of the completed, permanent Work by one or more delegated design professionals, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The terms “delegated design”, “delegated design services”, “delegation of design responsibility”, and similar or derivative terms have the same meaning. b. “Delegated design professional” means the licensed and registered engineer, architect, geologist, or other design professional retained by or employed by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier to perform delegated design services for delegated design Work and possessing appropriate experience and qualifications for such delegated design services. c. “Delegated design Work” means delegated design services, associated construction, and related Work. d. “Instruments of service”, relative to delegated designs, means delegated design professional’s: (1) certifications (including delegated design professional’s certification of compliance, as required in this Section, and other certifications required of delegated design professional), (2) reports (where required), (3) design drawings, (4) design specifications, (5) other documents specifically indicated as delegated design professional’s “instruments of service” in the Contract Documents, and (6) documents modifying a delegated design (after Engineer’s approval of the original delegated design Submittals). “Instruments of service” are to be sealed, signed, and dated by delegated design professional and expressly required as Submittals. Shop Drawings sealed and signed by delegated design professional are delegated design professional’s “instruments of service”. 1.3 GENERAL PROVISIONS CONCERNING DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES A. Delegated Designs - General: 1. This Section augments the requirements of the General Conditions, as may be amended by the Supplementary Conditions, and other provisions of the Contract Documents regarding Contractor’s responsibilities for delegated design Work. 2. Delegated design professionals or their employer shall furnish professional liability insurance. Provisions on professional liability insurance are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. Submit through Contractor appropriate documentation of professional liability insurance. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordination - General: a. Contractor shall coordinate the services of delegated design professionals with all other elements of the Work. b. Contractor has full responsibility for scheduling delegated designs and all related Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 35 73 - 3 c. Allow sufficient time in Progress Schedule for performance of delegated design services, including requests for interpretation or clarification between delegated design professional and Contractor and between Contractor and Engineer. 2. Coordination of Delegated Design Work’s Connections to Other Work: a. Where delegated design Work connects to other Work designed by Engineer, existing construction, or both, the delegated design Work shall be consistent with the other Work and existing construction to which delegated design Work connects, and adjacent construction. b. Submit details, loading, anchorage, and other coordinating information necessary for the delegated design Work to properly interface with Work designed by Engineer. c. Changes in the Work, whether designed by Engineer, designed by delegated design professional, or existing construction, necessary as a result of the delegated design are ineligible for increase in Contract Price or Contract Times, unless: (1) otherwise agreed by both Engineer and Owner, or (2) expressly indicated otherwise elsewhere in the Contract Documents for the associated delegated design Work. d. Changes requiring extra compensation, time, or both arising from delegated design aspects needed for convenience of Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier, are not grounds for increase in Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Coordination of Submittals, Fabrication, Production, and Shipment: a. Do not release for raw materials procurement, fabrication, production, and shipment to the Site materials, equipment, or systems designed by delegated design professional until the associated delegated design professional has reviewed and approved all associated Shop Drawings, product data, Samples, and (relative to shipment) source quality control Submittals, and such Submittals have been delivered to and accepted by Engineer. 1) For delegated design systems that required reactions to be submitted to the Engineer. These submittals shall be submitted and approved first before approval is given for the delegated design submittal. b. Allow sufficient time in the Progress Schedule for required Submittals and required actions by delegated design professionals and Engineer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Delegated Design Professionals: a. Each delegated design professional shall possess not less than the minimum qualifications set forth in this provision. Where the Specifications for the associated delegated design Work establish more-stringent qualifications requirements, comply with the more-stringent requirements. b. Each delegated design professional shall comply with all of the following: 1) Legally qualified, as both an individual and as a business entity, to practice the associated design discipline(s) in the jurisdiction where the Site is located, including possessing current, valid license and registration for the design discipline(s) for which the delegated design professional will render its services on the Project. 2) Possess not less than five years of experience in the subject design discipline(s). 3) Served as design professional in responsible charge on not less than five other designs similar in scope and complexity to the Work for which delegated design professional is retained on the Project; construction of such prior projects shall be complete by the start of the Project’s construction. c. Summary of Qualifications: Submit to Engineer summary of delegated design professional’s experience and qualifications, including: 1) Evidence of coverage under appropriate professional liability insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2) Evidence of delegated design professional’s ability to legally conduct business as a design professional in the same jurisdiction as the Site, as a business entity. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 35 73 - 4 3) Copy of delegated design professional’s current, valid personal design professional license and registration for the same jurisdiction as the Site. Such documents shall indicate the individual’s name, license or registration number, and dates for which the license or registration is valid. 4) Other information reasonably requested by Engineer. 1.6 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Where delegated design Work is required, furnish to Engineer Submittals such as: 1. Action Submittals: a. Delegated design professional’s instruments of service Submittals. 2. Informational Submittals: a. When delivered to Engineer, the following must bear delegated design professional’s Submittal approval stamp: 1) Shop Drawings, product data Submittals, Samples, testing plans. 2) Results of source quality control and field quality control activities. b. Delegated design professional’s calculations. c. Reports of delegated design professional’s visits to the Site, bearing delegated design professional’s dated signature. d. Other Informational Submittals required for the subject delegated design Work. B. Limitations of Engineer’s Review of Delegated Design Submittals: 1. Delegated Design Professional’s Instruments of Service Submittals: a. Engineer’s review of delegated design instruments of service Submittals is for the limited purposes indicated in the General Conditions, as maybe modified by the Supplementary Conditions. b. The following disclaimer applies to Engineer’s responses to delegated design professional’s instruments of service Submittals: 1) Engineer’s review and approval of delegated design instruments of service is only for the limited purpose of verifying that performance and design criteria given in the Contract were used in the delegated design, and checking for compliance with the Engineer’s design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. 2) Contractor is solely responsible for complying with: the Contract Documents, Subcontractor and Supplier instructions consistent with the Contract Documents, Owner’s directions, and Laws and Regulations. 3) Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining, correlating, confirming, and correcting dimensions at the Site; quantities; information and choices pertaining to fabrication processes; means, methods, sequences, procedures, and techniques of construction; safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and for coordinating the Work of all trades. 4) Engineer is not responsible for the effects of resubmittals or tracking progress of resubmittals. 2. Delegated Design Informational Submittals: a. Other provisions of the Contract Documents notwithstanding, Engineer’s review of delegated design Informational Submittals is limited to only: 1) Verifying the Submittal was furnished as required; and 2) Submittal generally appears complete (except for calculations); and 3) Submittal bears delegated design professional’s approval stamp; or, for calculations prepared by or for delegated design professional, that such calculations bear delegated design professional’s seal, signature, and date; or, for delegated design professional’s reports of visits to the Site, that such report is legible, and bears delegated design professional’s signature with date. b. Engineer receives such Submittals, including delegated design professional’s calculations, on behalf of Owner, for Owner’s records. c. Engineer, Owner, and others involved in the Project have the right to rely on delegated design professional’s approval stamp as meaning that the delegated design professional has performed and appropriate review of the Submittal and determined it to be Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 35 73 - 5 complete, in accordance with delegated design professional’s instruments of service approved by Engineer, in accordance with delegated design professional’s design intent, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Engineer’s Other Comments on Delegated Design Submittals: a. Despite the limitations of Engineer’s review of Submittals for delegated design Work, should Engineer become aware of, or reasonably suspect existence of, potential of associated delegated design Work to adversely affect health, safety, or welfare of persons, or pose reasonable potential for damage to the Work, work of other contractors, or adjacent property, Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of general nature of Engineer’s concern. b. Such advisory by Engineer, if issued, is rendered in good faith and does not in any way constitute: 1) Engineer’s review of all aspects of the delegated design. 2) Any sharing by Engineer of any of delegated design professional’s responsibilities or professional liability. 3) Any responsibility imposed, in any way, on Engineer for any aspect of the delegated design professional’s services or design, beyond the limited purposes of Engineer’s review as set forth in the Contract Documents. c. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers, including delegated design professionals, shall immediately investigate Engineer’s concern indicated in such advisory and remedy as necessary and required. d. Neither Engineer nor Owner, nor their respective consultants and subcontractors, is obligated to review any Submittal for delegated design Work beyond the limited review required by the Contract Documents. No such advisory, if issued, entitles Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier, including delegated design professionals, to rely on such advisory or to assume that any further such reviews or written or oral advisories are forthcoming. 1.7 RESPONSIBILITIES OF DELEGATED DESIGN PROFESSIONALS A. Standard of Care: 1. Unless a higher standard of care is established by the Division 02-49 Specifications section where the associated delegated design Work is required, the delegated design services shall comply with the following standard of care: a. Except as provided in the paragraph immediately above this, the standard of care for all delegated design professional services and related services performed or furnished by delegated design professionals for the Project will be the care and skill ordinarily used by members of the subject profession practicing under similar circumstances at the same time and in the same locality. B. Responsibilities of delegated design professionals employed on the Work include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following, unless specifically indicated otherwise in the associated elements of the Contract Documents where the delegated design is required: 1. Ethical Conduct and Professionalism: Comply with Laws and Regulations and applicable standards and guidelines relevant design professional organizations for ethical conduct and professional practice. 2. Comply with Laws and Regulations and relevant design standards applicable to the subject delegated design Work. 3. Performance and Design Criteria Indicated in the Contract Documents and Other Information: a. Review performance and design criteria, indicated in the Contract Documents, that the delegated design Work must satisfy. b. Prepare written requests for interpretations or clarifications of performance or design criteria. c. Review existing information about the Site that constitutes Technical Data (if any, applicable to the subject delegated design Work), as indicated in the Supplementary Conditions. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 35 73 - 6 4. Site Information and Investigations: With Contractor, obtaining all other necessary dimensions, field information, and other information necessary for preparing delegated design Submittals. 5. Design and Other Professional Services: Personally perform and prepare, or actively exercise direct, personal, supervisory control over others performing or preparing: a. Necessary design professional evaluations of conditions, materials, and equipment. b. Prepare the instruments of service Submittals and calculations Submittal for the subject delegated design Work associated with the Contract Documents. c. Assist Contractor with applying for and obtaining permits and approvals (not previously obtained by Owner or those for whom Owner is responsible) necessary for the delegated design Work. d. Review and approve or take other appropriate action on Shop Drawings (unless such Shop Drawings are sealed and signed by delegated design professional), product data, Samples, and testing plans, and other Submittals associated with the delegated design Work. e. Prepare modifications of the delegated design instruments of service as necessary. 6. Sealing and Signing: a. Seal, sign, and indicate date of sealing and signing, on all of the following: 1) Instruments of service Submittals, including certification of compliance required. 2) Calculations. 3) Modifications to the delegated design. 4) Other documents required to be sealed and signed by Laws or Regulations or the Contract Documents. b. Sealing and signing documents in accordance with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents, prior to submittal (through Contractor) to Engineer, and for submittal to authorities having jurisdiction to obtain necessary permits and approvals. c. Sealing and signing shall be in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 7. Certification of Compliance by Delegated Design Professional: a. Schedule: 1) Submit certification of compliance after Engineer’s acceptance of delegated design professional’s qualifications statement. 2) Obtain Engineer’s approval of certificate of compliance Submittal prior to furnishing other Submittals for delegated design Work under the same Specifications section, unless otherwise allowed by Engineer. b. Through Contractor, submit to Engineer, delegated design professional’s written certification indicating: 1) General Information: (1) Project name and designation, (2) Contractor name and Contract designation, (3) Subcontractor or Supplier name (when applicable), (4) full name of delegated design professional’s business entity under which the delegated design services were performed, (5) full name and license number of the individual sealing and signing the subject delegated design Work, (6) specific elements of delegated design Work to which the certification applies, and (7) delegated design professional’s seal, signature, and date of signature. c. Explicit certification that the subject delegated design complies with: 1) All applicable performance and design criteria indicated in the Contract Documents. Expressly indicate on certification of compliance the specific performance and design criteria used in the delegated design, and reaction forces of the delegated design imparted to other Work and existing construction. Reaction forces imparted from the delegated design elements to the Engineer’s designed system shall include the following: a) Reaction forces imparted from the delegated design elements to the Engineer's designed system shall be presented as follows: (1) Unfactored loads per category (dead, live, wind, seismic, and similar information). (2) Load combinations presented in Load Factor Resistance Design (LRFD) format from each element transmitting load. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 35 73 - 7 b) All Laws and Regulations. c) Applicable design standards commonly applicable to such types of construction. Expressly indicate such design standards on the certification of compliance. d) The applicable standard of care. Expressly indicate the applicable standard of care. 8. Approvals of Other Delegated Design Submittals: a. Review and taking appropriate action on Submittals for delegated designs: b. Such reviews and approvals or other appropriate action shall be to ascertain compliance with: 1) Delegated design professional’s design intent. 2) Delegated design professional’s instruments of service and calculations. 3) Associated requirements of the Contract Documents. c. Delegated design professional’s review stamp or facsimile thereof, review action or disposition concerning the associated Submittal for the delegated design, date of review, and name of person performing the review shall be clearly legible on the associated Submittals (except for delegated design professional’s own instruments of service Submittals, calculations, and reports of delegated design professional’s visits to the Site). Prominently display delegated design professional’s Submittal review stamp or facsimile thereof on: (1) each sheet of Shop Drawings, (2) each major section of product data Submittals, (3) each Sample, (4) each testing plan, and (5) each other Submittal associated with the delegated design for which such review stamp is required. d. Do not apply delegated design professional’s Submittal review stamp and comments, if any, over other text, tables, or graphics. e. Where review stamp or facsimile thereof is required, submit to Engineer only those Submittals for delegated design Work that bear delegated design professional’s explicit approval of the Submittal. 9. Respond promptly to requests for interpretation or clarification on delegated design professional’s instruments of service and other Submittals for the delegated design Work. 10. Progress and Quality of Construction of Delegated Design Work: a. Where appropriate for the subject delegated design Work, periodically visit the Site at appropriate intervals to observe the progress and quality of the subject delegated design Work. b. Where delegated design professional does not visit the Site during construction, keep informed of the progress and quality of the subject delegated design Work via discussions with Contractor, Subcontractor, and Suppliers, via photographic documentation, and other means acceptable to delegated design professional. c. Advise Contractor in writing when the subject delegated design Work is not in accordance with the delegated design professional’s instruments of service (approved by Engineer) and related Submittals approved by delegated design professional. d. Furnish to entity that retained delegated design professional copy of delegated design professional’s written report of each visit to the Site. 11. Modifications to Design: a. Design appropriate modifications to the delegated design Work, including preparing new or revised certifications, reports, design drawings, sketches, design specifications, and calculations, as appropriate. b. Such instruments of service and calculations shall be submitted to Engineer through Contractor to same extent original instruments of service Submittals and calculations, if any, where required by the Contract Documents for the subject delegated design Work. 12. Other services, as mutually agreed upon by delegated design professional and its client, or as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 35 73 - 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 01 41 24 - 1 SECTION 01 41 24 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements relative to permitting of which Owner and Engineer are aware that apply to the Work. 2. Required municipal permits and licenses of which Owner and Engineer are aware. 3. Erosion and sediment control permits. 4. Electrical Permit. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to obtain required permits and comply with required permits and licenses. 2. Obtain, pay for, and comply with required permits and licenses whether or not indicated in this Specifications section or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. C. Related Requirements: 1. In addition to permits and licenses required under this Specifications section, obtain and comply with permits required under the following Specifications: a. Section 01 41 26 - Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and Permit. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate compliance with permit and license requirements with Work under other Specifications sections and with other contractors, if any, working at the Site. 2. Coordinate with the Progress Schedule the time required to apply for and obtain required permits and licenses and to comply with requirements thereof. Changes in Contract Times or Contract Price will not be authorized because of timing and costs associated with obtaining permits and licenses required for the Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Copy of each of the following permits, as applicable to the Work: a. Electrical Permit. 1.4 MUNICIPAL PERMITS AND LICENSES A. Permits: 1. Electrical Permit is required for this project and shall be obtained and paid for by the contractor. 1.5 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PERMIT A. Erosion and Sediment Control Permit – General: 1. Coordinate compliance with erosion and sediment control permit with requirements of Section 01 41 26 - Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and Permit. 2. . Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 01 41 24 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT 01 41 26 - 1 SECTION 01 41 26 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for compliance with the Project’s Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and its revisions, Laws and Regulations, and permit(s) applicable to the Project, including: a. Contractor’s general responsibilities for storm water discharges associated with construction activity. b. SWPPP Revisions. c. Inspection, during construction, of storm water controls and temporary erosion and sediment controls, and associated repair and maintenance. 2. Administrative forms for documenting compliance with the SWPPP and the Project’s storm water permit are attached to this Section. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, services, and incidentals necessary and required to fulfill Contractor’s responsibilities under this Section, including complying with the applicable MPDES general permit for storm water discharges associated with construction activity (“storm water permit”) administered by Montana Department of Environmental Quality (MDEQ) for the Project. 1) Other prime Contractors shall cooperate and, as applicable to their Work, provide to the contractor responsible for preparing SWPPP Revisions such information necessary to prepare SWPPP Revisions relative to their Work. 2) Other prime Contractors (other than contractor responsible for temporary storm water controls and temporary erosion and sediment controls) engaging in earthwork, including trenching, stockpiling soil or other erodible material, and backfilling, shall be co-permittee with Owner on the Project’s storm water permit, and shall comply with the SWPPP and other applicable permits and with requirements for controlling discharges of storm water and erosion and sediment, control requirements associated with their Work. Such other prime Contractors engaging in earthwork shall coordinate their earthwork with contractor responsible for the temporary storm water controls and temporary erosion and sediment controls on a daily basis, and submit to Engineer complete Notice of Termination documents. 2. Requirements of this Section are in addition to, and do not supersede or conflict with, requirements of other Specifications, including: a. Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls, including requirements for controlling storm water during construction and temporary erosion and sediment controls. C. Related Requirements: 1. Include, but are not necessarily limited to: a. Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Relevant Documents: 1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP): a. Initially prepared for the Project by or for Owner, prior to construction, the SWPPP was submitted to authorities having jurisdiction over storm water discharges associated with construction activity. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT 01 41 26 - 2 b. The SWPPP is part of the Contract Documents and includes: 1) This Section. 2) Section 01 57 05 – Temporary Controls, relative to temporary storm water controls and temporary provision and sediment controls. 3) Required temporary erosion and sediment controls shown on the Drawings. 4) . c. The SWPPP is intended to establish requirements so that the Project’s construction complies with the Project’s storm water permit and other, related permits (if any). 2. Storm Water Permit for the Project: a. Application for the Project’s storm water permit was prepared by or for Owner and, prior to construction, will be submitted to the authority having jurisdiction. b. The Project’s storm water permit is part of the Contract Documents and is an attachment to this Section. c. Prior to starting Work at the Site that disturbs ground cover, Contractor shall sign Co- Permittee Agreement and become a co-permittee with Owner on the Project’s storm water permit. 3. Erosion and Sediment Control Permit: a. Application for the Project’s erosion and sediment control permit was prepared by or for Owner and, prior to construction, will be submitted to MDEQ, which is the authority having jurisdiction over erosion and sediment control during construction. b. Erosion and sediment control permit are part of the Contract Documents and is an attachment to this Section. 4. SWPPP Revisions: a. SWPPP Revisions shall be prepared by Contractor or Subcontractor and submitted to Engineer by Contractor. b. Contractor shall submit SWPPP Revision prior to starting Work at the Site, and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. c. SWPPP Revision shall include Contractor's proposed temporary means for storm water control during all phases of the Work and include plans for storm water conveyance and retention, as applicable. Coordinate with Contractor’s plans for excavation and filling. d. Should Contractor-propose deviations to the SWPPP included in the Contract Documents, or if Project-specific modifications of the SWPPP are required because of field conditions, Contractor shall prepare and submit additional SWPPP Revisions as necessary, in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and applicable permits. e. Comply with this Section’s Article titled, “SWPPP Revisions”.. f. SWPPP Revisions shall use the SWPPP Revision form included in this Section, with supporting documents attached as necessary and required, or forms available from authorities having jurisdiction. g. SWPPP Revisions that do not comply with the Contract Documents and are not required by authorities having jurisdiction will be regarded as substitutions, in accordance with the General Conditions and substitution procedures requested by the Specifications. 5. Storm Water Certification Statement: a. To be prepared by Contractor and submitted to Engineer on the form included with this Section, or on appropriate form obtained from authority having jurisdiction. b. Do not perform Work at the Site until the Storm Water Certification Statement has been submitted to and accepted by Engineer. Notice of Intent (NOI): c. Prepared by Owner or Engineer and submitted to authorities having jurisdiction following Engineer’s receipt and acceptance of Contractor’s SWPPP Revision and preliminary Progress Schedule. d. NOI will be submitted to authorities having jurisdiction by Engineer within 10 days of Engineer’s acceptance of Contractor’s SWPPP Revision and preliminary Progress Schedule. e. Do not perform Work at Site until NOI is submitted to authorities having jurisdiction. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT 01 41 26 - 3 6. Co-Permittee Agreement: a. Prepared by Contractor using forms included with the SWPPP, and submitted to Engineer within five days of the date the Contract Times commence running, for signature by Owner. b. Engineer will submit co-permittee agreement to authorities having jurisdiction. c. Do not perform Work at the Site until co-permittee agreement is submitted to authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Storm Water Inspection Report: Prepared by Contractor using the appropriate form included in this Section, or appropriate form provided by authority having jurisdiction. a. Storm water inspection reports will be filed in a log book kept at the Site by Contractor. Copy of each storm water inspection report will be furnished to Contractor upon Contractor’s request. b. Storm water inspection report will be completed for each of the following: 1) Preconstruction: After installation of temporary storm water management measures, including erosion and sediment controls, and temporary field offices and other temporary facilities, prior to starting Work at the Site (other than mobilization and initial establishment of temporary controls). 2) During the Work: Every seven days until Notice of Termination is completed. When the Site is stabilized relative to storm water, erosion, and discharge of sediment, inspection frequency during temporary shutdowns of construction and seasonal shutdowns of construction shall be once per month until Notice of Termination is completed. 3) Final: Final inspection report will be prepared prior to completion of Notice of Termination. 8. Notice of Termination (NOT): a. Prepared by Contractor on the form included in the Project’s storm water permit and submitted to Engineer for review and signature by Owner. b. Engineer will submit the NOT to authorities having jurisdiction. c. Contractor shall submit the NOT following completion of all Work that may result in pollution in storm water discharges, including landscaping Work. d. Final payment to Contractor will not be made until the NOT is submitted to authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with this provision and the Project’s storm water permit. 1.3 CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES UNDER THIS SECTION A. The Contract Price includes all labor, material, tools, equipment, services, and incidental costs necessary for: 1. Preparing SWPPP Revisions and other documents that are Contractor’s responsibility, in accordance with this Section. 2. Installing and maintaining structural and non-structural items used in complying with the SWPPP and its revisions. 3. Other administrative Work required by this Section. 4. Clean-up, disposal, and repairs following precipitation events or spills caused by Contractor. 5. Implementing and maintaining “best management practices”, as defined in applicable permits and Laws or Regulations, to comply with requirements that govern storm water discharges at the Site. 6. Complying with other requirements of this Section. B. Storm Water Pollution Prevention and Approval of System Owner: 1. Prevent erosion on the Site and discharge of sediment to surface waters, drainage routes, streets and rights-of-way, and private property, including dewatering operations. 2. Prevent onsite trash, debris, and other pollutants from leaving the Site via storm water runoff. 3. Provide berms, swales, and other appropriate methods of directing storm water around work areas to appropriate drainage routes. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT 01 41 26 - 4 4. Prior to starting the Work associated with such discharge of storm water, construction- related discharges to publicly-owned conveyance or treatment systems shall be approved by owner of system to which the discharge will be directed. C. Water Quality: 1. Do not cause or contribute to a violation of water quality standards, Laws or Regulations, or the Project’s storm water permit. 2. Notify Engineer of revisions to the SWPPP, update the SWPPP, and implement SWPPP changes necessary to prevent any violations of the stormwater permit. D. Liability for Costs Incurred due to Violations: 1. Contractor shall pay civil penalties and other costs incurred by Owner, including additional engineering (including RPR) and inspection services, associated with non-compliance with applicable permits related to storm water discharges associated with construction activity and erosion and sediment controls associated with the Project. 2. Owner may deduct such amounts, as one or more set-offs, from payments due Contractor for the Project. E. Inspections and Recordkeeping: 1. Contractor shall perform inspections of storm water, and erosion and sediment controls in accordance with this Section 2. Contractor shall prepare and maintain records of storm water inspections. 3. Contractor shall maintain records of maintenance of storm water controls and temporary erosion and sediment controls, SWPPP Revisions, and other records required by this Section and shall keep these records and copies of all documents that make up the SWPPP at the construction site and available to the inspector and engineer that may need to review them. F. Coordination: 1. Coordinate requirements of this Section with requirements for earthwork, temporary erosion and sediment controls, and landscaping in the Contract, applicable permit requirements, and Laws and Regulations. 2. Implement SWPPP controls and practices prior to starting other Work at the Site. Each prime contractor and Subcontractor identified in the SWPPP and SWPPP Revisions shall sign a copy of the storm water certification statement. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with Laws and Regulations, including federal, state, and local, relative to storm water discharges associated with construction activity, and associated restoration. Comply with applicable permits. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Submit the following, in accordance with Paragraph 1.2.A and Article 1.6 of this Section. When the Project involves Work at multiple sites, submit each of the following for each Site, as applicable: a. SWPPP Revisions. b. Co-permittee Agreement. c. Storm Water Certification Statement. 2. Approval to Discharge to Publicly-Owned Conveyance or Treatment Works: a. For storm water discharges associated with construction activity that are discharged to a publicly owned conveyance or treatment system, prior to commencing discharges, submit system owner’s written approval for such discharges. 3. Storm Water Site Plan Updates: a. Within three days after each storm water inspection, submit updated storm water site plan. B. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT 01 41 26 - 5 1. Notice of Termination: 2. Submit in accordance with Paragraph 1.2.A and Article 1.6, “SWPPP Revisions”, of this Section. 3. When the Project involves Work at multiple sites, submit separate Notice of Termination for each Site, as applicable. 1.6 SWPPP REVISIONS A. Contractor shall prepare a SWPPP Revision in accordance with the Project’s storm water permit when: 1. There is a significant change in design, construction, operation, or maintenance of the Project that significantly affects the potential for discharging pollutants. 2. SWPPP proves ineffective relative to: a. Eliminating or significantly minimizing discharge of pollutants from sources identified in the SWPPP required by the Project’s storm water permit; or b. Achieving general objectives of controlling pollutants in storm water discharged from permitted construction activity. 3. Prepare and submit SWPPP Revisions identifying responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, and other prime contractors (if any) at the Site, relative to implementing part of the SWPPP. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTIONS AND REPAIRS A. Perform site inspections and assessments of the Site as required by the Project’s storm water permit and this Section. Inspections and assessments shall be by Contractor’s site superintendent or project manager, together with RPR. B. Inspections: 1. After the Effective Date of the Contract, relative to the Project’s storm water permit, inspect the Site: a. Preconstruction: After controls required to comply with the SWPPP, including temporary erosion and sediment controls and other temporary controls necessary for mitigating or eliminating pollution in storm water discharged from the Site, are installed and prior to starting other Work at the Site. b. During Construction: At the interval called out within the SWPPP until Notice of Termination is completed and submitted to authority having jurisdiction. When the Site is stabilized relative to storm water and pollution sources that may impair quality of storm water discharged from the Site, temporary shutdowns of construction activity, and during seasonal shutdowns of construction activity, required frequency of inspections shall be at the interval called out within the SWPPP until Notice of Termination is completed. c. Prior to Contractor submitting the Notice of Termination. 2. During each inspection: a. Inspect and verify erosion and sediment control physical controls and practices, and other controls of pollution of storm water discharges associated with construction activity. b. For temporary erosion and sediment controls, record the approximate degree of sediment accumulation as percentage of acceptable sediment storage volume. Where appropriate, obtain measurements of sediment accumulation to support reasonably accurate estimation of sediment accumulation. c. Inspect and record maintenance performed on physical controls for erosion and sedimentation, and for other sources of storm water pollution. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT 01 41 26 - 6 d. Inspect (where possible) and verify pollution control management practices performed and practices for managing and maintaining such physical controls. e. Record maintenance performed on physical controls for storm water pollution. f. Observe and record deficiencies relative to implementation of the SWPPP. 3. Contractor will complete Storm Water Inspection Report (on the form attached to this Section). 4. Contractor shall record and submit the following: a. Storm Water Site Plan: On a copy of the Site plan included in the Drawings or other map of the Site acceptable to Engineer, indicate extent of all areas of disturbed ground cover and drainage pathways. Indicate areas expected to undergo initial disturbance of ground cover or significant site work within the next 14 days. b. Indicate on storm water Site plan areas of Site that have undergone temporary or permanent stabilization of ground cover and other erodible materials. c. Indicate on storm water site plan all disturbed areas that have not undergone active site work during the previous 14 days. C. Maintain at the Site a copy of storm water Site plans from each storm water inspection and submit each storm water Site plan to Engineer and RPR. Contractor will maintain at the Site a log book with a copy of each Storm Water Inspection Report. D. Cooperate with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction during their periodic visits to the Site, and promptly furnish information requested by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Repair physical controls of storm water pollution, including (but not limited to temporary erosion and sediment controls), in accordance with applicable requirements and to satisfaction of Engineer, within two days of each inspection (unless shorter period is required elsewhere in the Contract Documents). 3.2 ATTACHMENTS A. The following, bound after this Section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specifications Section: 1. Forms: a. Storm Water Inspection Report form (two pages). b. Storm Water Permit Certification form (one page). c. SWPPP Revision Form (one page). 2. Permits: a. The Project’s storm water permit for storm water discharges associated with construction activity. b. The Project’s erosion and sediment control permit. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT 01 41 26 - 1 STORM WATER INSPECTION REPORT Owner: Date of Inspection: Site: Day of Week: S M T W T F S Project: Sheet No. of sheets Contractor: If pertinent to the Operation Weather: Temperature: This inspection and maintenance form is to be used when the Work is subject to a Storm Water General Permit for Construction Activity. Inspections shall be performed not less than once every seven calendar days; for sites that are stabilized and temporarily shut down inspections may be reduced to once per month. Each erosion and sediment control measure installed on the Site is to be inspected and the Contractor must complete all required maintenance within two calendar days from the date of inspection. Reason for this inspection: ☐ Pre-construction Site assessment ☐ Seven calendar day inspection ☐ Monthly inspection (when Site is stabilized and shut down) ☐ Post-construction inspection prior to Notice of Termination Key for erosion and sediment control measures to be inspected: Use the following designations in the table below (1) mulch, (2) seed and mulch, (3) check dams, (4) hay bale/straw bales, (5) silt fence, (6) sediment trap, (7) turbidity curtains, (8) pipe slope drains, (9) drainage structure inlet protection, (10) rolled erosion control products, (11) soil stabilizers, (12) construction entrances, (13) pipe inlet/outlet protection, (14) water diversion structures, (15) sedimentation basins, (16) cofferdams, (17) Other . ID Location Disturbance Measure Remarks (Evaluate integrity of measure, describe evidence of erosion) Approximate Sediment Accumulation (% of Depth) Maintenance Required? (Y or N) (If Yes, Describe Below) Existing? (Y or N) Next 14 Days? (Y or N) Code # Temp or Perm? (T, P or NA) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT 01 41 26 - 2 ID Location Disturbance Measure Remarks (Evaluate integrity of measure, describe evidence of erosion) Approximate Sediment Accumulation (% of Depth) Maintenance Required? (Y or N) (If Yes, Describe Below) Existing? (Y or N) Next 14 Days? (Y or N) Code # Temp or Perm? (T, P or NA) 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIRED MAINTENANCE AND ANY EXISTING DEFICIENCIES IN THE SWPPP: Specify for each location using row ID number from the table above. I certify under penalty of Law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system to ensure that qualified personnel property gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that false statements made herein may be punishable by Law. Signature Prepared Copy to Contractor Resident Project Representative (Date) (Date) Qualified Professional Name (w/Firm Name, if Consultant) Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT 01 41 26 - 3 STORM WATER PERMIT CERTIFICATION STATEMENT Contract Number: Project: Owner Each Contractor and Subcontractor identified in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) must certify that they understand the permit conditions and their responsibilities. Every Contractor and Subcontractor performing an activity that involves soil disturbance shall sign this certification and submit it to the Engineer prior to performing the Work. This certification shall be signed by an owner, principal, president, secretary, or treasurer of the firm. I certify under penalty of law that I understand and agree to comply with the terms and conditions of the SWPPP for the construction Site identified in such SWPPP as a condition of authorization to discharge storm water. I also understand that my firm and its employees and Subcontractors shall comply with the terms and conditions of Owner’s general permit for storm water discharges from construction activities and that it is unlawful for any person to cause or contribute to a violation of water quality standards, Laws, or Regulations. Firm: Address: City: State: Zip: Name (Print): Signature: Date: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AND PERMIT 01 41 26 - 4 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP) REVISION Owner: Date of Inspection: Site: Sheet No. of sheets Project: Contractor: This form shall be used when revisions to the current Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) are required by the Storm Water General Permit for Construction Activity or the Contract Documents. Reason for the Revision(s): Revisions were requested by State: ☐ Yes ☐ No Describe the Revision(s) to the SWPPP: I certify under penalty of Law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that false statements made herein may be punishable by Law. Signature: Prepared: Submitted: (Date) (Date) Copy to: ☐ Engineer ☐ Contractor: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 1 SECTION 01 57 05 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for temporary controls during construction, including: a. Temporary erosion and sediment controls. b. Noise control. c. Dust control. d. Water control, including storm water, surface water, and groundwater. e. Pollution control, including solid waste, water pollution, atmospheric pollution, and other types of pollution. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide and maintain materials, equipment, labor, services, and temporary construction as necessary and required to control environmental conditions at the Site and adjacent areas during construction. 2. Contractor shall pay all costs, including fines and civil penalties, if any, for failure to implement and maintain temporary controls in accordance with the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Contractor is not eligible for increase in Contract Price or Contract Times due to failure to comply with requirements for temporary controls. 3. Maintain temporary controls until no longer necessary or required. Provide temporary controls at all times when Contractor is working at the Site. C. Related Requirements: 1. Include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 2. Section 01 41 26 - Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and Permit. 3. Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 4. Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: a. Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. b. Montana Department of Environmental Quality. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Submit the following: a. Shop Drawings: 1) Plan for construction staging and maintenance of the Site relative to erosion and sediment controls. Indicate on a site plan approximate areas of planned disturbance of soils and soil cover over time during the Project. For areas not indicated in the Contract Documents as being disturbed and that Contractor proposes to disturb, Shop Drawing shall include proposed erosion and sediment control measures for the additional areas. b. Product Data: 1) Silt fencing materials. 2) Other materials proposed for temporary erosion and sediment controls, when requested by Engineer. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Submit the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 2 a. Procedural Submittals: 1) Proposed dust control measure, when Submittal is requested by Engineer. b. Field Quality Control: 1) When requested by Engineer, promptly obtain and submit results of field measurements and field test data substantiating compliance of Contractor’s temporary controls with the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FOR TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS A. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Materials – General: 1. Materials utilized for temporary erosion and sediment controls shall be in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements indicated in this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article, unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Silt Fencing Materials: 1. Filter Cloth: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Atlantic Construction Fabrics (ACF) Environmental “Silt Fence”. 2) Cherokee Manufacturing “Silt Fence”. 3) Hanes Geo Components “Silt Fence”. 4) Or equal. b. Height: Not less than two feet. c. Securely fasten filter cloth to wire mesh using ties spaced at maximum intervals of 2 feet on centers, at top and mid-height of wire mesh. 2. Wire Mesh: Support filter cloth with wire mesh complying with the following: a. Woven wire mesh, 14-gage steel wire, maximum mesh 6 inches x 6 inches. b. Height: Same as filter cloth height. c. Fasten wire mesh to fence supports with wire ties or staples. d. In lieu of wire mesh, Contractor may propose using purpose-manufactured silt fence system with appropriate reinforcing other than wire mesh. 3. Fence Support Posts: a. Length: Not less than 3 feet each. b. Material: Metal or other acceptable, reasonably durable material with "U", “T”, or "I" cross section, or hardwood measuring not less than 1.25 inches by 1.25 inches in cross- section. C. Straw Bale Dike Materials: 1. Bales shall be firmly-packed, non-rotted straw bound firmly with baling wire. Cross- sectional area on the small end of each bale shall be approximately 12 inches by 12 inches or larger. 2. Posts shall comply with requirements for silt fencing support posts, or may be suitable reinforcing steel rods. D. Mulch Materials and Soil Stabilization Materials: 1. Mulch shall be non-rotted straw or salt hay. 2. Soil stabilization emulsions, when used, shall be an inert, eco-friendly chemical manufactured for the specific purpose of erosion control and soil stabilization, applied with mulch or stabilization fibers. 3. Wood-fiber or paper-fiber, when used, shall be 100% natural and biodegradable. 4. Erosion control mat or netting shall be biodegradable. Acceptable materials include jute, excelsior, straw, or coconut fiber, and cotton. E. Materials for Protection of Storm Water Drainage Inlets and Catch Basins: 1. Inlet Filter Bag: a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following for each drainage inlet and catch basin to be protected: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 3 1) Atlantic Construction Fabrics (ACF) Environmental, “Silt Sack”. 2) Mutual Industries, Inc. “Silt Sack”. 3) Or equal. b. Inlet filter bag permeability shall be not less than 40 GAL/SQFT of bag area exposed to the flow. Fabric shall be woven polypropylene with double stitching to prevent bursting. c. Inlet filter bags shall: 1) Fit inside the drainage inlet or catch basin and shall be secured by the structure’s grate or by other acceptable means. 2) Have means of removing inlet filter bag and the silt and sediment collected therein without dumping filter bag’s contents into the drainage inlet or catch basin. d. Provide sufficient spare inlet filter bags for replacement as indicated in this Section’s “Part 3 – Execution”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NOISE CONTROL A. Noise Control – General: 1. Noise threshold levels shall comply with Laws and Regulations, including (a) OSHA requirements and recommendations, and (b) local ordinances or other Laws or Regulations. 2. Noise emissions shall not interfere with the work of Owner, facility manager (if other than Owner), or others. The use of noise-producing signals, including horns, whistles, alarms, and bells shall be for safety warning and emergency purposes only. 3. Music or entertainment systems, including personal and vehicle radios, media players, and the like, when used, shall not be audible at the property line and shall not disturb others at the Site. 4. Field Quality Control of Noise: a. If Owner or Engineer believes potential exists that allowable noise levels are being exceeded, Contractor will be required to, and shall promptly perform, appropriate noise monitoring in presence of Owner or Engineer and shall submit written results to Engineer. b. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to perform independent noise monitoring at any time during the Work. 5. If noise level exceeds allowable maximum, Contractor shall immediately cease the activity emitting the excessive noise and promptly implement noise-mitigating measures to comply with noise limitations. 3.2 DUST CONTROL A. Dust Control – General: 1. Control objectionable dust caused by Contractor's operation of vehicles and construction equipment and machinery, site clearing, demolition, cleaning, and other actions. To minimize airborne dust, apply water or use other methods subject to acceptance of Engineer and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Contractor shall prevent blowing and movement of dust from exposed soil surfaces and access roads to reduce onsite and off-Site damage, inconvenience, nuisances, and health hazards associated with dust emissions from Contractor’s activities. B. Dust Control Methods: 1. Dust control may be accomplished by irrigation in which the dust-prone work activity or area of the Site is sprinkled with water until the surface is moist. 2. Apply dust controls as frequently as necessary or required without creating inconveniences, nuisances, or hazards, such as excessive mud and ponding of water at or adjacent to the Site. Do not use water for dust control when water will cause hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, mud, ponds, and pollution. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 4 3. Provide dust control that is non-polluting and does not contribute to tracking-out of dirt, mud, and dust onto pavement. 4. Do not allow water used for dust control to discharge to storm water drainage system or surface waters. 5. Where appropriate, reduce travel speed of construction vehicles and construction equipment to reduce the potential for dust emissions arising from vehicle and equipment passage. 6. Where appropriate, apply gravel or other appropriate binder to access roads and parking areas. C. Removal of Dust and Dirt from Pavement and Other Travelled Ways: 1. Remove dust, mud, and dirt from roads, parking areas, and other travelled ways not less than the frequency indicated in Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 2. Perform dust and dirt removal from travelled ways by mechanical wet vacuum sweeping or other method acceptable to Engineer. 3. Remove mud from roads, parking areas, and other travelled ways by appropriate means, including scraping. Avoid damaging surface of travelled way. Remedy damage to roads, parking areas, and travelled ways resulting from mud removal activities. D. Removal of Dust and Dirt from Buildings and Structures: 1. When dust and dirt from Contractor’s activities has accumulated to a noticeable or objectionable extent (compared with preconstruction conditions) on buildings or structures, remove the dust and dirt caused by Contractor’s operations by appropriate methods, including power-washing using mild detergent. Remedy damage caused by dust, dirt, and power-washing. 2. Dust in sensitive equipment, such as electrical and control panels, instruments, HVAC systems and other equipment shall be cleaned by a Subcontractor specializing in cleaning such items. 3. During the Project, remove objectionable and noticeable dust, dirt, and mud in areas occupied by Owner or facility manager, and Contractor’s work areas, resulting from Contractor’s activities. Owner and facility manager will take reasonable measures to avoid tracking dust, dirt, and mud into their occupied areas. 4. Comply with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 3.3 WATER CONTROL A. Water Control – General: 1. During the Project. provide methods to appropriately control storm water, surface water, water from excavations and structures, groundwater flows altered by Contractor’s activities, and groundwater discharges from the Site, to prevent damage to the Work, the Site, adjacent properties, and downstream properties. 2. Control trenching, filling, and grading to direct water away from excavations, pits, tunnels and other construction areas, and prevent water from entering existing buildings and structures. 3. Properly manage and control storm water, surface water, and groundwater entering the Site from upstream, where such flows or discharges have potential to affect the Work or to be exacerbated by Contractor’s activities. 4. Avoid ponding of water onsite, except in specially-designated, temporary settlement basins. Where water ponding occurs during construction, perform rough grading to eliminate ponding. 5. Prevent water from discharging onto roads, parking areas, paved or finished areas, and other travelled ways. Prevent storm water runoff from discharging across access roads and parking areas. B. Materials, Equipment, and Facilities for Water Control: 1. Provide, operate, and maintain materials, equipment, and facilities of adequate size, materials, and capacity to control storm water, surface water, groundwater, and discharges from tanks. C. Discharge and Disposal of Water during Construction: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 5 1. Discharge storm water, surface water, and groundwater from the Site, and discharges of clean water from tanks, to proper discharge locations, in accordance with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents. 2. Prevent damage and nuisances arising from water discharges on the Site and discharges from the Site. 3. Dispose of water in manner that avoids flooding, erosion, sediment transport, and other damage, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 4. Avoid overland discharges from the Site and construction activities to adjacent properties, 5. Water discharges from the Site and construction activities shall be via a storm water drainage route or conduit with sufficient capacity for the flow under associated weather and flow conditions and in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 6. Do not discharge storm water, surface water, groundwater, or clean water from tanks, into sanitary sewers. Obtain consent of sewerage system owner before discharging such flows into existing combined sewers. 7. Obtain sewerage system owner’s consent and approval before discharging polluted water to sewerage system. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Pollution Control – General: 1. Provide means, methods, and facilities necessary and required to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere caused by accumulation or discharge of substances and materials that are either noxious, polluting, or both, from or caused by construction and related activities. 2. Construction equipment and machinery shall comply with Laws and Regulations. B. Spills and Contamination: 1. Perform emergency containment, cleanup, and remedy of spills and contamination resulting from construction and related activities. Promptly remove and properly dispose of contaminated soils and liquids. 2. Excavate contaminated material and properly dispose of off-Site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and appropriate cover. 3. Comply with Owner’s and facility manager’s (if other than Owner) hazard control procedures as indicated in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Protection of Surface Water and Groundwater: 1. Provide and maintain appropriate, temporary measures to prevent harmful substances from entering surface water, groundwater, and drinking water. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, and the like into or adjacent to groundwater, surface water, drainage routes (including swales, ditches, and storm sewers) and drinking water. 2. Obtain sewerage system owner’s consent and approval prior to discharging into sanitary sewers or combined sewers. Do not discharge pollutants not in accordance with Laws and Regulations into combined sewers, or sewers tributary to combined sewers, when wet weather overflows to receiving waters may occur. D. Atmospheric Pollutants: 1. Provide and maintain temporary controls for atmospheric pollutants resulting from construction and related activities, whether to outdoor or indoor atmospheres. 2. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into atmosphere. 3. Do not discharge exhaust from internal combustion engines or combustion operations into buildings, structures, or near ventilation intakes for buildings or structures. 4. Prevent toxic and noxious concentrations of chemicals, fumes, and vapors. E. Solid Waste: 1. Provide and maintain temporary controls for managing solid waste related to the Work. 2. Prevent solid waste from: a. Becoming airborne or blowing in the wind. b. Being inadvertently transmitted to adjacent, offsite properties, and areas of the Site not part of the Project. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 6 c. Being deposited in or discharging to surface waters, open process tanks, and drainage routes.. 3. Properly handle and dispose of solid waste. Burning or burying solid waste, including unused materials, at the Site or adjacent areas is prohibited. 4. Cleaning and Disposal of Debris: Comply with applicable requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. 5. Do not mix or store in the same container solid waste containing Constituents of Concern (and constitutes, or may constitute, a Hazardous Environmental Condition) with solid waste that does not contain Constituents of Concern. 6. Store solid waste in appropriate, covered, containers. 7. Promptly, and at regular intervals, remove solid waste from the Site for transport and disposal in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 3.5 ODOR CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Odors – General: 1. Avoid discharges of unpleasant or noxious odors from construction and related activities. Whether nature of the Work is such that odor generation is unavoidable, provide appropriate temporary controls for odors. 2. Give priority to avoiding odor generation, followed by: a. Counteracting (treating the cause of) odors. b. Containing odors. c. Odor masking as the last resort for odor control. 3.6 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS A. Installation and Maintenance of Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controls – General: 1. General Provisions: a. Provide temporary erosion and sediment controls as shown and indicated on the Drawings and as indicated in this Section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, and as necessary for compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Provide erosion and sediment controls as the Work progresses into areas where ground cover was previously undisturbed. c. Use necessary and required methods to appropriately control erosion and sediment transport in storm water runoff, including using soil conservation-oriented construction practices (including scheduling and sequencing), vegetative measures, and temporary physical controls. d. Use best management practices (BMP) in accordance with Laws and Regulations, and regulatory requirements indicated in this Section‘s “Quality Assurance” Article (unless more-stringent requirement are shown or indicated in the Contract Documents), to control erosion and sediment transport in storm water runoff during the Project. e. Plan and execute disturbances of soils and soil cover, and earthwork by methods to control storm water runoff from exposed soil (including stockpiles, borrow areas, and spoil disposal areas), banks of surface waters affected by the Work, and discharges of groundwater, to prevent erosion and sediment transport. f. Where areas must be cleared for storage of materials or equipment, or for temporary facilities, provide measures for regulating storm water discharges and controlling erosion and sediment transport. Where Owner is a co-permittee with Contractor for applicable permits, or when plans for temporary erosion and sediment controls were sealed and signed by Engineer, such methods are subject to Engineer’s approval or acceptance, as applicable. g. Provide erosion and sediment controls, including stabilization of soils, at the end of each workday. 2. Coordination: a. Coordinate temporary erosion and sediment controls with this Section's requirements on water control and Section 01 41 26 - Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and Permit. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 7 b. Coordinate temporary erosion and sediment controls with construction of permanent drainage facilities, permanent erosion controls and soil stabilization (if any), and other Work, to the extent necessary for effective and continuous erosion and sediment controls. 3. Before commencing activities that will disturb soil or soil cover at the Site or other areas to be occupied by Contractor during the Project, provide all appropriate temporary erosion and sediment controls required by the Contract Documents for the areas where soil or soil cover will be disturbed. 4. Vegetation Removal and Disturbance: a. Remove only those shrubs, grasses, trees, and other vegetation that must be removed for construction. b. Protect undisturbed vegetation. Do not wantonly or unnecessarily drive construction vehicles and equipment over undisturbed vegetation and soil cover. c. Promptly stabilize exposed soil where vegetation or soil cover was unnecessarily disturbed. Fill and restore ruts and damage to vegetation and soil cover caused by wanton or unnecessary passage of construction vehicles and equipment. 5. Access Roads and Parking Areas: a. When possible, locate and construct temporary access roads and parking areas to avoid adverse effects on the environment. b. Provide measures to regulate drainage, avoid erosion and sediment transport in storm water runoff, and minimize damage to vegetation and soil cover. 6. Earthwork and Temporary Controls: a. Perform excavation, fill, and related activities in accordance with Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill. b. Temporary erosion and sediment control measures may include, but are not limited to, using berms, swales and ditches, silt fencing, straw bale sediment barriers, gravel or crushed stone, mulching and soil stabilization, slope drains, and other methods. Apply such temporary measures to erodible soils and other erodible materials exposed by construction activities. c. Minimize areas of bare soil exposed at one time. Provide fills and spoil areas by selectively placing fill and spoil materials to reduce or eliminate exposed erodible soils. d. Exercise special care on and above steep slopes, where disturbance of vegetation and soil cover shall be minimized to greatest extent reasonably practicable. e. Protect stockpile storage not in active use by providing suitable, durable covering prevent sediment transport in storm water runoff and windblown transport. Covering shall be suitable for outdoor exposure. 7. Inspection and Maintenance: a. Periodically inspect areas of non-stabilized, erodible soils, including all areas of soil cover disturbance and stockpiles, for evidence of start of erosion and sediment transport. Promptly implement corrective action as necessary and appropriate to control erosion and sediment transport. Continue inspections and corrective action until soils are permanently stabilized and permanent vegetation has been appropriately established. b. Inspect not less often than the frequency indicated in Section 01 41 26 - Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and Permit. c. Repair or replace damaged erosion and sediment controls within 24 hours of Contractor becoming aware of such damage. d. Periodically remove sediment that has accumulated in or behind sediment and erosion controls. Remove sediment not less often than when sediment is at approximately one- half of storage capacity of associated control element, unless more-frequent interval is indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents Properly dispose of sediment. 8. Duration of Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controls: a. Maintain temporary erosion and sediment controls in effective, working condition until soil cover of the associated storm water drainage area has been permanently stabilized. 9. Work Stoppage: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 8 a. If the Work is temporarily stopped or suspended for any reason, Contractor shall provide additional temporary controls necessary to prevent environmental damage to the Site and adjacent areas while the Work is stopped or suspended. b. When temporary erosion and sediment controls remain in place during periods of stopped or suspended Work, continue to perform Contractor’s obligations relative to periodic inspection and maintenance of temporary erosion and sediment controls, including removal of accumulated sediment. 10. Failure to Provide Adequate Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controls: a. If Contractor repeatedly fails to satisfactorily control erosion and sediment transport in storm water runoff, Owner reserves the right to use Owner's own forces or employ a third-party contractors for temporary erosion and sediment control. Owner’s costs for such work, including engineering and inspection costs, will be deducted from amounts due Contractor, as set-offs in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Erosion and Sediment Control Permit: 1. Comply with permit requirements indicated in Section 01 41 24 - Permit Requirements. C. Silt Fencing: 1. Provide and maintain silt fencing in a vertical plane, at the locations shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and where necessary or required. 2. Locations of Temporary Silt Fencing: a. Where possible, provide silt fencing along contour lines, so each run of silt fencing is at the same elevation. b. On slopes, provide temporary silt fencing at intervals that do not exceed the maximum indicated in the following table: Silt Fence Spacing on Slopes Slope (percent) Maxim Allowable Length of Slope Above Each Silt Fence (feet) 2 and less 150 2.1 to 5 100 5.1 to 10 50 10.1 to 20 25 20.1 to 25 20 25.1 to 40 15 40.1 to 50 10 c. Provide temporary silt fencing around perimeter of each stockpile of topsoil, general fill material, and excavated spoil material. Install silt fencing before expected soil is subject to precipitation. Maintain until stockpile is removed. d. Do not install temporary silt fencing at the following types of locations: 1) Area of concentrated storm water flows such as ditches, swales, or channels. 2) Where rock or rocky soils prevent full and uniform anchoring of silt fencing. 3) Across upstream or discharge ends of storm water conduits. 3. Installation: a. Securely fasten wire mesh to posts, and securely fasten filter cloth to wire mesh. b. When two sections of filter cloth are adjacent to each other, fold over edges and overlap by not less than 6 inches and securely fasten to wire mesh. c. Embed posts in the ground to the depth necessary for proper controls; embed posts to not less than 16 inches below ground. d. Filter cloth and wire mesh shall extend not less than 8 inches below ground and not less than 16 inches above ground. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 9 e. Remove accumulated sediment from behind silt fencing as necessary or required. Repair and reinstall silt fencing as necessary or required. 4. Maintenance: a. Do not allow formation of concentrated storm water flows on slopes above temporary silt fencing unless so shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. If unauthorized concentrated storm water flows occur, stabilize the slope via other appropriate stabilization methods as necessary and required to prevent flow of concentrated storm water flows toward temporary silt fencing. D. Straw Bale Dike. 1. Provide temporary straw bale dikes where shown or indicated and where necessary or required, including in swales, along contours, and along toe of slopes. 2. Provide temporary straw bales in shallow excavation as wide as the bale and approximately 4 to 6 inches below surrounding grade. 3. Ends of straw bales shall tightly abut ends of adjacent straw bales. 4. Securely install each straw bale using two support posts, driven into the ground not less than 1.5 to 2 feet below bottom of straw bale. Top of post shall be flush with top of straw bale. Angle first post for each straw bale toward the previously-installed straw bale. 5. Frequently inspect straw bales and repair or replace as required. Remove accumulated sediment and debris from behind straw bales. E. Mulching and Soil Stabilization: 1. Use mulching to temporarily stabilize exposed soil, including spoil and fill materials. a. Immediately following final grading, provide mulch and stabilize with mats or netting, or sprayed soil stabilization emulsion with fiber additive. b. Application of mulching for soil stabilization shall be as follows. 1) Non-Rotted Straw or Salt Hay: Provide 1.5 to two tons per acre. 2) Soil stabilization emulsions, when used, shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and shall be applied with mulch or stabilization fibers. 3) Wood-Fiber or Paper-Fiber Application: Provide 1,500 pounds per acre, installed by hydroseeding. c. Where mats or netting are used: 1) Cover entire area to be stabilized with mats or netting. 2) Provide anchoring trenches at the top and bottom of slopes to receive mats or netting. Bury at least the top and bottom ends of mat or netting, 4 inches or more wide, at top and bottom of slope. Ensure that mesh or netting is secure and will not wash out over time. Tamp trench full of soil. 4 inches from trench, secure mat or netting with appropriate staples at intervals of 10 inches. 3) Overlap adjacent strips of mat or netting by not less than 4 inches. F. Protection of Storm Water Drainage Inlets and Catch Basins: 1. Protect each drainage inlet and catch basin that has potential to receive storm water runoff from exposed soils and does not discharge into a storm water settlement basin. 2. Provide temporary inlet filter bags inside of drainage inlet or catch basin in accordance with inlet filter bag manufacturer's instructions. Secure inlet filter bag with the structure's grate or by other acceptable means. 3. Inlet filter bags shall not pose any obstruction, above the preconstruction elevation of the drainage inlet or catch basin grate that would necessitate or require temporary barricades or warning lights. 4. When removing sediment from inlet filter bags, do not dump filter bag's contents into the drainage inlet or catch basin. Promptly remove from drainage inlets and catch basins sediment accidentally dumped into the structure. 5. Remove sediment from inlet filter bags, or replace inlet filter bags, when inlet filter bag is not more than half-full. 3.7 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Removals – General: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 05 - 10 1. Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in this Section in requirements for respective temporary controls, upon completion of the associated Work and when temporary controls are no longer necessary, remove temporary controls and restore the Site to condition in accordance with the Contract Documents; if condition is not shown or indicated, restore the Site to pre-construction condition. 2. After soils are permanently stabilized, remove from the Site temporary erosion and sediment controls. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS 01 64 00 - 1 SECTION 01 64 00 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements and procedures for Owner-furnished materials and equipment to be installed by Contractor, including: a. Handling and storage of Owner-furnished items. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, services, and incidentals shown, specified, and necessary for accepting, handling, insuring, storing, and maintaining as required, installing, checking out, starting-up, and completing Owner-furnished materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Items of equipment and materials to be furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor are indicated below. 1. Materials and equipment currently in Owner’s stock or possession to be installed or relocated by Contractor: a. Installed by Contractor: 6,000’ of 500 kcmil XHHW-2 black stranded copper conductor on 500’ reels, currently located at the Plant. Install at the location shown on the Drawings. B. Availability of Owner-Furnished Materials and Equipment: 1. Owner-furnished materials and equipment will be available to Contractor starting on: a. Items Obtained via Procurement Contracts: On the date(s) or time(s) indicated for delivery as set forth in the associated procurement contract. b. Existing Items Already in Owner’s Possession: Available on the date the Contract Times start to run, and as necessary thereafter to maintain the Progress Schedule accepted by Engineer. C. Availability of Procurement Contract Documents: 1. Procurement Contract is not Assigned: An electronic copy of the procurement contract documents was distributed with the construction Bidding Documents. Should such copy not be available to Contractor, an electronic copy, in portable document format (PDF), of the procurement contract documents is available from Engineer upon request. Contractor is responsible for printing and binding paper copies of the procurement contract documents needed by Contractor. D. For Owner-furnished materials and equipment obtained via one or more procurement contracts that are not assigned to Contractor, Engineer will keep Contractor informed of probable delivery dates of the materials and equipment included in the procurement contract. E. Owner’s Responsibilities: 1. Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract, Owner will arrange for and deliver to Contractor an electronic copy (in portable document format; PDF) of each of seller’s shop drawings, samples (except for physical samples, of which one each will be delivered to Contractor), and other submittals as reviewed by Engineer or Owner. Such submittals, whether approved or otherwise, are not part of the Contract Documents. 2. When Procurement Contract is Not Assigned to Contractor: Owner (or Engineer, on behalf of Owner) will advise Contractor of the anticipated delivery date 10 days prior to scheduled delivery. Upon telephone advisory from seller’s shipping entity/carrier, Owner (or Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS 01 64 00 - 2 Engineer, on behalf of Owner) will give Contractor approximately 24 hours’ advance notification, by telephone, of scheduled delivery. 3. Owner shall arrange and pay for delivery to the Site of Owner-furnished materials and equipment obtained via procurement contracts. 4. When procurement contract is not assigned to Contractor, upon delivery, Owner (who may be accompanied by Engineer, at Owner’s option) shall inspect, jointly with Contractor, the materials and equipment delivered by seller. Where appropriate, Owner will arrange with seller to have seller’s representative present at the delivery point to assist in visually inspecting the delivered materials and equipment. 5. When procurement contract is not assigned to Contractor, the Owner will submit to seller claims for damage incurred in transit to the delivery location and shall replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming items of Owner-furnished materials and equipment obtained via procurement contract. 6. When procurement contract is not assigned to Contractor, the Owner shall pay for services of seller’s factory-trained representative to furnish consultation and advice during installation of associated Owner-furnished materials and equipment, to inspect, check, and approve installation before operation, and to furnish technical advice and direction during start-up and field quality control activities for Owner-furnished materials and equipment. Extent to which services of seller’s representative will be provided during installation will be in accordance with the procurement contract documents. 7. If services of seller’s representative beyond the scope of such services set forth in the procurement contract document is desired by Contractor, or if such services are necessary as a result of defective Work by Contractor, Contractor shall arrange and pay for such services of seller’s representative. 8. After Substantial Completion, Owner (or facility manager, if other than Owner) will operate and maintain the items obtained via procurement contract and coordinate directly with seller regarding matters of routine maintenance. When associated procurement contract is not assigned to Contractor, the Owner (or facility manager, if other than Owner) will communicate directly with seller regarding warranty-related matters. When procurement contract is assigned to Contractor, the Owner (or facility manager, if other than Owner) will communicate warranty-related issues to Contractor. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures for Owner-furnished materials and equipment and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before Owner-furnished materials and equipment. B. Scheduling: 1. Schedule and perform the Work to coordinate with anticipated delivery dates for Owner- furnished materials and equipment, as indicated in Owner’s procurement contract(s) therefor. 2. Where Owner will furnish services of a manufacturer’s representative for Owner-furnished materials and equipment, schedule and perform the Work in accordance with scheduling constraints of manufacturer’s representative. 3. Comply with the Contract Time indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.4 HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Handling: 1. Handle Owner-furnished materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents and the item manufacturer’s written instructions. Handle so that warranties in effect are not voided. B. Storage: 1. Store Owner-furnished materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents and the item manufacturer’s instructions. Store so that warranties in effect are not voided. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS 01 64 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23 - 1 SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for Contractor’s onsite recordkeeping. 2. Contractor’s field engineering. 3. Contractor’s surveying and layouts, and associated requirements. 4. This section supplements the General Conditions’ provisions on reference points and other matters. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide onsite recordkeeping, field engineering (not related to design of the completed Work), surveying and layout services, and professional services of the types indicated for the Project, including: a. Furnishing civil, structural, geotechnical, electrical, and other professional engineering and geology services, whether required by the Contract Documents or necessary in Contractor’s judgment, to perform Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Such services do not include professional services associated with delegation of professional design responsibility, which (when required as part of the Work) is addressed elsewhere in the Contract Documents. b. Developing and making all detail surveys and measurements required for construction; including slope stakes, batter boards, and all other working lines, elevations, and cut sheets. c. Providing materials required for Contractor’s benchmarks, control points, batter boards, grade stakes, structure and pipeline elevation stakes, and other items. d. Keeping a transit, theodolite, or total station (i.e., theodolite with electronic distance measurement device); leveling instrument; and related implements such as survey rods and other measurement devices, at the Site at all times, and having a skilled instrument person available when necessary for laying out the Work and verifying lines, grades, and elevations. e. Being solely responsible for all locations, dimensions, and levels of the Work. No data other than Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order shall justify departure from dimensions and levels required by the Contract Documents. f. Rectifying all Work improperly installed because of not maintaining, not protecting, or removing without authorization established reference points, stakes, marks, and monuments. g. Providing such facilities and assistance necessary for Engineer and Resident Project Representative (if any) or Owner’s Site Representative (if any) to check lines and grade points placed by Contractor. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Unit Price Work: 1. Do not perform excavation or embankment work until all cross-sectioning necessary for determining payment quantities for Unit Price Work have been completed and accepted by Engineer. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Review requirements of this and other Specifications sections and coordinate other elements of the Work with field engineering, surveying, and layout Work and recordkeeping obligations set forth in this Specifications Section. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. When requested by Engineer following completion of the Work or a part thereof, submit certificate signed by professional engineer or professional surveyor, as applicable, indicating that elevations and locations of the Work comply with the Contract Documents. Explain each discrepancy, if any, from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Contractor’s Daily Reports and Field Engineering Records: a. Submit daily reports as indicated in this Specification Section. b. When requested by Engineer, submit documentation verifying accuracy of field engineering. 3. Contractor’s Surveying Plan and Records: a. Complete plan for performing surveying Work, submitted not less than 10 days prior to beginning surveying Work. b. Example of proposed surveying field books to be maintained by Contractor’s surveyor. Example surveying field book shall have sufficient information and detail, including example calculations and notes, to demonstrate that surveying field books will be organized and maintained in a professional manner in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Submit original surveying field books within two days after completing surveying Work. d. Submit certified survey in accordance with this Specifications’ section. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Field Engineer: Name, employer, and professional address. When requested by Engineer, submit qualifications, including detailed resume’. b. Surveyor: Name, employer, professional address of firm, and detailed resumes of each professional land surveyor and crew chief that will be engaged in surveying Work. Submit not less than 10 days prior to beginning surveying Work. During the Project, submit detailed resume’ for each new registered, licensed land surveyor and crew chief employed by or retained by Contractor not less than 10 days prior to starting on the surveying Work. 1.5 CONTRACTOR’S ENGINEERS A. Qualifications of Contractor’s Field Engineer: 1. Employ and retain at the Site a field engineer with experience and capability of performing all field engineering tasks required of Contractor, as indicated in this Article and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Contractor’s field engineer shall possess not less than five years of experience performing duties similar in scope and complexity to those required of Contractor’s field engineer on this Project. 3. Contractor’s field engineer may serve as Contractor’s Site superintendent, or as the recorder of as-constructed conditions in accordance with Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents, or as any combination of these roles as deemed appropriate by Contractor. 4. Maintain at the Site full-time superintendent or field engineer fluent in written and spoken English language. B. Responsibilities of Contractor’s Field Engineer: 1. Daily Reports: a. Prepare and maintaining daily reports of activity on the Contract. Submit reports to Engineer. Contractor’s daily reports shall indicate the following information: 1) Contractor’s Employees: Number of Contractor’s employees at the Site, apportioned by trade(s). 2) Subcontractors: Separately indicate and identify each Subcontractor and the number of workers onsite for each. Apportion number of workers by trade(s). 3) Equipment and materials installed as part of the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23 - 3 4) Equipment and materials, to be installed in the Work, delivered to the Site or offsite storage location that day. When delivered to offsite storage, indicate the storage location. 5) Major construction equipment utilized by major activity. Indicate for each manufacturer, model number, and year of manufacture. 6) Location of areas in which construction was performed. 7) Work performed, including field quality control activities such as inspections and testing. Indicate field quality control activities witnessed by Engineer, Resident Project Representative (if any), or Owner’s Site Representative (if any). 8) Weather conditions, including minimum and maximum ambient air temperatures, relative humidity, conditions of high winds or other extreme weather, and precipitation. 9) Safety concerns, events, and precautions taken. 10) Defective Work observed or believed to exist. 11) Delays encountered, extent of delay incurred, reasons for the delay, and measures that will be taken to rectify delays encountered. 12) Acknowledgement of specific instructions received from Engineer, Resident Project Representative (if any), Owner, or Owner’s Site Representative (if any). 13) Visitors to the Site. 14) Other notable events occurring on the Project. b. Daily reports shall be signed and dated by responsible member of Contractor’s staff, such as Contractor's field engineer, superintendent, project manager, or foreman designated by Contractor as having authority to sign daily reports. c. Submit Contractor’s daily reports by 9:00 a.m. (local time at the Site) the next working day after the day covered in the associated report. 2. Check all formwork, reinforcing materials, inserts, structural steel, masonry, insulation, waterproofing and element protection, doors and windows, finishes, bolts, sleeves, piping, other materials and equipment for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3. Continually inspect the Work to ensure that the quality and quantities required by the Contract Documents are provided. 4. Promptly report defective Work to Contractor, Engineer, Resident Project Representative (if any), and Owner’s Site Representative (if any). 5. Cooperate as required with Engineer, Resident Project Representative (if any), and Owner’s Site Representative (if any) in observing the Work and performing field inspections and other field quality control activities. 6. Check and coordinate the Work for conflicts and interferences, and immediately advise Engineer and Resident Project Representative (if any) of all discrepancies of which Contractor is aware. 7. Maintain field office files and drawings, record documents, and coordinate field engineering services with Subcontractors and Suppliers as appropriate, and other prime contractors (if any). 8. Supervise or personally prepare and maintain Project record documents in accordance with Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. 9. Prepare layout and coordination drawings for construction operations. 10. Review and coordinate the Work with Shop Drawings approved by Engineer, other Submittals accepted by Engineer, and Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction and safety programs incident thereto. 11. Coordinate onsite work of Subcontractors and Suppliers, or assist Contractor’s Site superintendent in doing so. C. Design Professionals Services Retained by Contractor (whether or not stationed at the Site): 1. Delegated Professional Design Services: a. Where the Contract Documents require Contractor to furnish professional engineering, geology, or architecture services as delegated professional design, the provisions of the General Conditions, Specifications, and other Contract Documents regarding delegated design responsibility apply. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23 - 4 2. Design Professional Services that are Not Delegated Professional Design of the Completed Work: a. Where the Contract Documents require that Contractor retain a design professional such as a professional engineer, geologist, or architect, or when in Contractor’s judgment retaining such entity is necessary for implementing Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or safety and protection programs incident thereto, retain a design professional with necessary skills, experience, and qualifications to perform the required services. Where required by the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations, such entity shall be duly licensed and registered to perform the associated design professional services in the same jurisdiction as the Site, unless otherwise allowed by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. b. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, and approvals performed by such design professional(s). 1.6 CONTRACTOR’S SURVEYOR A. Qualifications: 1. Employ or retain the services, as needed, at the Site a surveyor with experience and capability of performing surveying and layout tasks required in the Contract Documents and as required for the Work. Comply with Laws and Regulations governing land surveying. 2. Contractor’s surveyor shall possess not less than five years of experience performing duties similar in scope and complexity to those required of Contractor’s surveyor on this Project. B. Responsibilities of Contractor’s Surveyor: 1. Providing required surveying equipment, including transit, theodolite, or total station; level; stakes; and surveying accessories. 2. Establishing required lines and grades for constructing all facilities, structures, pipelines, and site improvements, including outdoor electrical equipment and feeders. 3. Preparing and maintaining professional-quality, accurate, well-organized, legible notes of all measurements and calculations made while surveying and laying out the Work. 4. Prior to backfilling operations, survey, locate, and record on a copy of the Drawings accurate representation of buried Work and Underground Facilities provided and encountered. 5. Locating on a site plan of the Site the actual location of above-ground work to be indicated on record documents. 6. Complying with requirements of the Contract Documents relative to surveying and related Work, including requirements of this Specification section’s Articles 1.6 and 3.1. 1.7 RECORDS A. Records – General: 1. Maintain at the Site: a. Contractor’s field engineer’s daily reports, with information and submitted in accordance with Article 1.5 of this Specification Section. b. Information and documents required by Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. c. Complete and accurate log of control and survey Work as such Work progresses. d. Other records deemed by Contractor to be necessary or appropriate. B. Field Books and Records: 1. Survey data and records shall be in accordance with recognized professional surveying standards, Laws and Regulations, and prevailing standard of care in the locality where the Site is located. 2. Original field notes, calculations, and other surveying data shall be recorded by Contractor’s surveyor in Contractor-furnished hard-bound field books. 3. Completeness and accuracy of surveying Work, and completeness and accuracy of surveying records, including field books, shall be responsibility of Contractor. 4. Unacceptable Records of Contractor’s Surveyor: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23 - 5 a. Failure to organize and maintain survey records in an appropriate manner that allows reasonable and independent verification of calculations, and to allow identification of elevations, lines, locations, dimensions, and grades of the Work, shall be cause for rejecting the surveying records, including field books. b. Illegible notes or data, and erasures on any page of field books, are unacceptable. Do not submit copied notes or data. Corrections by ruling or lining out errors will be unacceptable unless initialed by the surveyor. Violation of these requirements may require re-surveying the data questioned by Engineer. c. Other provisions of the Contract notwithstanding, Contractor shall have sole responsibility for uncovering, re-surveying, and restoring uncovered Work should survey data be unacceptable to Engineer. C. Survey of Surface Structures: 1. Upon completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a survey showing or indicating dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of construction and locations and elevations of Underground Facilities installed and encountered during the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURVEYING A. Reference Points: 1. Refer to the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, for requirements regarding reference points. 2. Owner’s established reference points that are damaged or destroyed by Contractor will be re-established by Owner at Contractor’s expense. Owner may deduct from payments due Contractor such amounts as set-offs in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. From Owner-established reference points, establish lines, grades, and elevations necessary to control the Work. Obtain measurements required for performing the Work to tolerances indicated in the Contract Documents. 4. Establish, place, and replace as necessary and required, such additional stakes, markers, and other reference points necessary for controlling the Work and verifying accuracy and compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Surveys to Determine Quantities for Payment: 1. For each application for progress payment, perform such surveying and calculations necessary to determine quantities of Work performed or placed, including Unit Price Work. Perform surveying necessary for Engineer to determine final quantities of Work in place. 2. Comply with additional requirements, elsewhere in the Contract Documents for measurement for payment for specific types of Work. 3. Advise Engineer, Resident Project Representative (if any), and Owner’s Site Representative (if any) not less than 24 hours before performing surveying services for determining quantities to be included in Application for Payment. Unless waived in writing by Engineer, perform quantity surveys in presence of Engineer or Resident Project Representative (if any). C. Construction Surveying: Comply with the following: 1. Structure: Stake-out structures, including elevations, and check prior to and during construction. D. Accuracy: 1. Establish Contractor's temporary survey reference points for Contractor’s use to order of accuracy appropriate for Contractor’s purposes while complying with the contract Documents. Construction staking used as a guide for the Work shall be 1:5,000 for all the Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23 - 6 Work. Not withstanding the foregoing, provide the Work within the tolerances indicated below. 2. Tolerances: a. Horizontal tolerances for easement staking shall be plus or minus 0.1 feet. b. Accuracy of other staking shall be plus or minus 0.04 feet horizontally and plus or minus 0.01 feet vertically, except that a tolerance of 0.1 feet vertically applies to earthwork and grading, riprap, and installation of buried piping for-inch diameter and less. c. Tolerances for measurement for payment for selected types of the Work shall be as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, including Specifications for the associated Work. d. Provide the permanent Work within the tolerances indicated for staking in this Article. 3. Survey calculations shall include an error analysis sufficient to demonstrate required accuracy. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CLEANING 01 74 00 - 1 SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for keeping the Site free of accumulations of waste materials during construction (“progress cleaning”). 2. Cleaning for Substantial Completion and prior to final inspection (collectively, “closeout cleaning”). B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall perform cleaning during the Project, including progress cleaning, as condition precedent to Substantial Completion, upon completion of the Work, and as required by the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, this Specifications section, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Maintain in a clean manner the Site, the Work, and areas adjacent to or affected by the Work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 241, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations. 2. Montana Public Works Standard Specifications PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Progress Cleaning – General: 1. Clean the Site, work areas, and other areas occupied by Contractor not less than weekly. Dispose of waste materials in accordance with the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and the following: a. Comply with NFPA 241 for removing combustible waste materials and debris. b. Do not hold non-combustible materials at the Site more than three days if the ambient air temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F. When ambient air temperature is less than 80 degrees F, dispose of non-combustible materials within seven days of their generation. c. Provide suitable containers for storage of waste materials and debris. Avoid generation of odors and creation of nuisances. d. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately. B. Progress Cleaning – Site: 1. Keep outdoor, dust-generating areas wetted down or otherwise control dust emissions. 2. Not less than weekly, brush-sweep roadways and paved areas at the Site and adjacent areas used by construction vehicles or otherwise affected by construction activities. 3. Comply with dust control requirements of Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. C. Progress Cleaning – Work Areas: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CLEANING 01 74 00 - 2 1. Clean areas where the Work is in progress to maintain an extent of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work and safety of personnel. 2. Remove liquid spills promptly. Where spills may have harmful effects on health, safety, protection of facilities, or the environment, immediately report spills to Owner, Engineer, and authorities having jurisdiction, in accordance with the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. 3. Concealed Spaces: Remove waste material and debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. D. Progress Cleaning – Installed Work: 1. Keep installed Work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of installed materials and equipment, using only cleaning agents and methods specifically recommended by material or equipment Supplier. 2. If Supplier does not recommend specific cleaning agents or methods, use cleaning agents and methods that are not hazardous to health and property and that will not damage or mar exposed surfaces. E. Progress Cleaning – Exposed Surfaces: 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration until Substantial Completion. F. Progress Cleaning – Cutting and Patching: 1. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, trailings and cuttings, and similar materials. 2. Thoroughly clean piping, ductwork, conduits, and similar features before applying patching material, paint, or other finishing materials. 3. Restore damaged insulation and coverings on piping, cutwork, and similar items to its pre- construction condition. G. Waste Disposal: 1. Properly dispose of waste materials (including surplus materials, debris, rubbish, and other waste) off the Site. 2. Do not burn or bury waste materials at the Site. 3. Remove waste material and rubbish from excavations before backfilling. 4. Do not discharge volatile or hazardous substances, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, into storm sewers, gutters, sanitary sewers, or other location in the environment. Dispose of such materials in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 5. Do not discharge wastes to surface waters, drainage routes, or groundwater. 6. Contractor is solely responsible for complying with Laws and Regulations regarding storing, transporting, and disposing of waste generated by Contractor’s operations or brought to the Site by Contractor. H. During handling and installation of materials and equipment, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials and equipment already in place. Apply protective covering where necessary or required for protection from damage or deterioration, until Substantial Completion. I. Clean completed construction as frequently as necessary throughout the construction period. 3.2 CLOSEOUT CLEANING A. Complete the following prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion: 1. Clean and remove from the Site waste material (including rubbish and debris) and other foreign and undesirable items and substances. 2. Sweep broom-clean paved areas suitable for access by vehicles. 3. Remove spills and stains or petroleum, oils, solvents, other chemicals, and other foreign and undesirable deposits. 4. Hose-clean sidewalks and loading areas. 5. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CLEANING 01 74 00 - 3 6. Surface waterways and drainage routes (including storm sewers, gutters, and ditches) shall be open and clean. 7. Repair pavement, roads, sod, and other areas affected by construction operations and restore to specified condition; if condition is not specified, restore to preconstruction condition. 8. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to dirt-free condition, free of spatter, grease, stains, fingerprints, films, and similar foreign and undesirable substances. 9. Remove waste material and surface dust from limited-access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenchway, equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces. 10. In unoccupied spaces, sweep concrete floors broom-clean. 11. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glazing in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 12. Remove non-permanent tags and labels. 13. Surface Finishes: a. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore chipped, scratched, dented or otherwise marred surfaces to specified finish and match adjacent surfaces. b. Do not paint over “UL” or similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 14. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint, and mortar droppings, and other foreign or undesirable substances. 15. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 16. Clean lighting fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace temporary lamps provided in permanent fixtures. Replace existing lighting fixture components that are burned out or noticeably dimmed from use during construction. Replace defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. 17. Leave the Site clean, and in neat, orderly condition, satisfactory to Owner and Engineer. B. Complete the following prior to requesting final inspection: 1. After Substantial Completion of all the Work, following completion of items of incomplete or damaged Work (“punch list Work”), clean “punch list Work areas in accordance with Paragraph 3.2.A of this Specifications Section. 2. Remove field offices, Contractor’s storage sheds, and remaining stockpiles and clean all such areas in accordance with Paragraph 3.2.B of this Specifications Section, and in accordance with Contract Documents for landscaping and restoration. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 1 SECTION 01 75 00 CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for checkout and startup of equipment, systems, and facilities. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall initially check out, start up, and place equipment and systems installed under the Contract into successful operation, in accordance with the material and equipment manufacturers’ written instructions, Suppliers’ recommendations at the Site, and the Contract Documents. 2. Provide the following: a. All labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete equipment and system checkout and startup. b. Chemicals, lubricants, and other required operating fluids necessary for checkout, startup, and initial operation of the Work. c. Filters and other temporary or consumable items necessary for checkout, startup, and initial operation of the Work. d. Fuel, electricity, water, and other temporary utilities and temporary facilities necessary for checkout and startup of equipment and systems, unless otherwise specified. 3. The General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, address requirements for documenting Substantial Completion. C. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data 2. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems - General Requirements. 3. Section 40 61 21 – Process Control System Testing 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate checkout and startup with other contractors, as necessary. 2. Do not start up equipment or system(s) for continuous operation until all components of that equipment item or system, including instrumentation and controls, have been tested to the extent practicable and proven to be operable as intended by the Contract Documents. 3. Subject to the constraints of this Specifications section, facility manager will furnish sufficient personnel to assist Contractor in starting up equipment and system(s), but responsibility for proper operation of the Work is Contractor’s. 4. Supplier shall be present during checkout, startup, and initial operation, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 5. For startup of heating equipment, air conditioning equipment, and other equipment and systems that provide temperature control, that are dependent upon the time of year, return to the Site at beginning of next heating or cooling season (as applicable) to recheck and start the appropriate equipment and system(s). 6. Do not start up equipment and system(s), without submitting acceptable preliminary operations and maintenance manuals by Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Checkout and Startup Planning Meeting: 1. Contractor, with appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers, shall attend and participate in a meeting with Owner, facility manager, and Engineer to discuss planning, scheduling, and coordination of checkout and startup activities. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 2 2. Upon mutual concurrence of Owner, facility manager, Engineer, and Contractor, meeting may be concurrent with the training scheduling planning meeting. 3. Meeting shall be held by the earlier of: (1) not less than 30 days prior to first scheduled training session for the equipment and system(s) to be checked out and started-up, and (2) not less than 30 days prior to the checkout and startup of the associated equipment and system(s). 4. Attend meeting prepared to knowledgably and effectively discuss: a. Status of the Work and schedule-to-complete for requirements prerequisite to checkout and startup. b. Schedule for and status of training required for each equipment item and system. c. Schedule for checkout, startup, and field quality control activities for the subject Work. d. Status and quantities of required consumables, lubricants, and utility services necessary for checkout and startup. 5. Meeting will be chaired by Engineer. Engineer will prepare and distribute a record of topics discussed and decisions made during the meeting. 6. Comply with decisions made at the meeting and the Contract Documents. C. Sequencing: 1. Comply with Section 01 14 16 - Coordination with Owner’s Operations, regarding staging (phasing) of the Work and allowable shutdowns. D. Scheduling: 1. Progress Schedule: a. Clearly indicate in the Progress Schedule planned and actual dates for checkout, startup, and field quality control activities, including all demonstration testing activities addressed in this Specifications section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Separately indicate checkout, startup, and field quality control activities for each equipment item and system. b. Perform startup and field quality control activities on the associated, scheduled dates, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner, facility manager, and Engineer. 2. Restrictions for Scheduling: a. Checkout of materials, equipment, and systems by Contractor that do not involve or require Owner’s or facility manager’s personnel may be performed at any time during normal working hours. Where required by the Contract Documents or requested by Engineer, perform checkout in the presence of Engineer or Resident Project Representative (RPR). b. Startup, including initial operation of materials, equipment, and systems, shall not be initiated on: Monday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday, holidays, the day immediately prior to a holiday, or the day immediately following a holiday, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner, facility manager, and Engineer. c. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents or acceptable to Owner, facility manager, and Engineer, perform all startup during normal working hours of the day shift. d. To the extent practicable, where extended-duration startup or field quality control activities are required by the Contract, avoid having such activities extend into evening, night, weekend, or holiday hours. e. Owner reserves the right to require a minimum seven days' notice of rescheduled startup when Contractor cannot perform the associated activities as scheduled. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Comply with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. b. A preliminary copy of all operation and maintenance manuals shall be received by Engineer prior to the start of the demonstration period. 4. Spare Parts, Tools, and Extra Materials. a. Deliver to Owner or facility manager (as applicable) all required spare parts, tools, and extra materials prior to commencing the demonstration period, unless earlier delivery is required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 3 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Do not start up equipment or systems or place into initial operation until required operating permits are obtained from authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where Owner (with or without assistance of Engineer) has applied for and obtained initial approvals or permits necessary for operation, Contractor shall furnish information and assistance to Owner or Engineer for Owner to secure final approvals from authorities having jurisdiction for required operating permits. B. Qualifications: 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. The following defined terms are used in this Specifications Section: 1. Instrumentation Supplier: Entity retained by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier to furnish instrumentation or controls that will be part of the completed Work, including manufacturers, manufacturer representatives, wholesalers, retailers, and others, including entities retained to perform systems integration Work. 2. Pre-Demonstration Period: The period of time, of unspecified duration after initial construction and installation activities during which Contractor, with assistance from manufacturer's representatives, performs in the following sequence: a. Finishing type construction work to ensure the Project has reached a state of Substantial Completion. b. Equipment start-up. c. Personnel training. 3. Demonstration Period: A period of time, of specified duration, following the Pre- Demonstration Period, during which the Contractor initiates energy through the facility and starts up and operates the facility, without exceeding specified downtime limitations, to prove the functional integrity of the mechanical and electrical equipment and components and the control interfaces of the respective equipment and components comprising the facility as evidence of Substantial Completion. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Data collection and reporting log for each required Demonstration Period. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Progress Schedules indicating dates for checkout, startup, and field quality control activates. 2. Completed checkout and startup log required in Paragraph 3.2.C of this Specifications section. 3. Manufacturer's installation check letters (also known as Manufacturer’s Field Services Report) required in Paragraph 3.2.C of this Specifications section. 4. Instrumentation Supplier’s Instrumentation Installation Certificate, required in Paragraph 3.2.C of this Specifications section. 5. Letter verifying completion of all pre-demonstration startup activities, required in Paragraph 3.2.C of this Specifications section. 6. Report of data collected during each required Demonstration Period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP – GENERAL A. Facility Startup Divided into Two Periods: 1. Pre-Demonstration Period including: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 4 a. Obtain Engineer’s approval or acceptance (as applicable) of Submittals required prior to checkout and startup, including all Shop Drawings, Samples, source quality control (shop testing) Submittals, preliminary operation and maintenance manuals, and other Submittals required by the Contract Documents, other than Submittals that cannot be furnished until after startup. b. Complete the Work to a point ready for checkout and startup, including operation available in all manual, automatic, and other modes. c. Checkout and initial field quality control activities that can be performed prior to startup of the equipment or system. d. Startup of the associated Work. e. Field quality control activities for the subject Work as indicated elsewhere in the Specifications and other Contract Documents, other than this section. f. Training of operations and maintenance personnel. 2. Demonstration Period, including: a. Demonstration of functional integrity of equipment, system, or PCS. 3.2 PRE-DEMONSTRATION PERIOD A. Prior to the Pre-Demonstration Period, complete the Work to the point where it is ready for checkout and startup. B. Startup: 1. Comply with requirements for startup of materials, equipment, and systems indicated in the associated Specification sections and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Prepare the Work so it will operate properly and safely and be ready to demonstrate functional integrity during the Demonstration Period. 3. Perform startup to extent possible without introducing power to the Plant. 4. Introduce power to the Plant to complete startup for the following: a. Solar Power System. 5. Procedures include but are not necessarily limited to the following: a. Test or check and correct deficiencies of: 1) Power, control, and monitoring circuits for continuity prior to connection to power source. 2) Voltage of all circuits. 3) Phase sequence. 4) Cleanliness of connecting piping systems. 5) Alignment of connected machinery. 6) Lubrication. 7) Instrumentation and control signal generation, transmission, reception, and response. a) Comply with Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements. b) Comply with Section 40 61 21 – Process Control System Testing. 8) Tagging and identification systems. 9) Proper connections, alignment, calibration and adjustment. b. Calibrate safety equipment. c. Manually rotate or move moving parts to assure freedom of movement. d. Perform other tests, checks, and activities required to make the Work ready for Demonstration Period. e. Checkout and Startup Log: 1) Prepare a log showing each equipment item and system requiring checkout and startup. Indicate in the log activities to be accomplished during checkout and startup. 2) Provide a place for Contractor to record date and person performing required checkout and startup. Indicate associated date(s), personnel, and employer of each. 3) Submit completed checkout and startup log to Engineer and obtain Engineer’s acceptance. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 5 6. Obtain Suppliers’ certifications of the installed and operational Work, without restrictions, and submit to Engineer: a. Manufacturer's installation check letters (sometimes referred to as Manufacturer’s Field Services Report). b. Instrumentation Supplier's Instrumentation Installation Certificate. 7. Letter verifying completion of all pre-demonstration startup activities including receipt of all specified items from Suppliers as final item prior to initiation of Demonstration Period. 8. Personnel Training: 3.3 DEMONSTRATION PERIOD A. Demonstration Period – General: 1. Demonstrate the operation and performance of mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, and control interfaces of the Work undergoing the Demonstration Period, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Duration of Demonstration Period: 168 consecutive hours. 3. If, during the Demonstration Period, the aggregate time used for repair, alteration, or unscheduled adjustments to any part of the Work that renders the affected Work inoperative or operation outside of recommended ranges exceeds 10% of the Demonstration Period, the demonstration of operation and performance will be deemed unacceptable and Contractor shall provide appropriate adjustments and remedies and re-perform the Demonstration Test, at no additional cost to Owner or facility manager, until acceptable results are obtained. Re- performance of the Demonstration Period shall comply with the same requirements as the original Demonstration Period. 4. Perform the demonstration of operation and performance of the Work under full operational conditions. 5. Owner’s or Facility Manager’s Personnel: a. Owner or facility manager (as applicable) will make available operations personnel to make process decisions affecting facility performance and compliance with applicable operating permits. b. Owner's or facility manager’s assistance will be available only for process decisions. c. Contractor will perform all other functions associated with the Demonstration Period including but not limited to equipment operation and maintenance until successful completion of the Demonstration Period in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6. Owner or facility manager reserves the right to simulate operational variables, equipment failures, routine maintenance scenarios, and similar actions and events during the Demonstration Period to verify the operation and performance of the Work in automatic, manual, and other types of operating modes, backup systems, and alternate operating modes. 7. Prior to Starting Demonstration Period: a. Prepare data collection and reporting log for sampling, analytical data, and data to be obtained by manually recording data from field or panel indicators. Not less than 30 days prior to the start of the Demonstration Period, submit the data collection and reporting log to Engineer for acceptance. 8. Timing of Start and End of Demonstration Period: a. Schedule the end of the Demonstration Period at a convenient time such as midnight, so the Owner or facility manager can assume operational responsibility on a new day beginning immediately after completion of the Demonstration Period. b. Time of beginning and ending Demonstration Period shall be agreed upon by Contractor, Owner (and facility manager, if other than Owner), and Engineer in advance of initiating Demonstration Period. B. Demonstration Period, Evaluation, and Acceptance: 1. Throughout the Demonstration Period, provide knowledgeable personnel to answer Owner's or facility manager’s questions, provide final field instruction on select systems (where appropriate) and to respond to problems or failures of the Work. 2. Responsibilities for Sampling and Data Collection: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CHECKOUT AND START-UP PROCEDURES 01 75 00 - 6 a. Use the data collection and reporting log format accepted by Engineer. Indicate data clearly and legibly. b. Power Generation. c. Utility Power Consumption. 3. Responsibilities for Data Reporting: a. . b. Submit data collected to Engineer for evaluation of acceptability of results. 4. Data Evaluation: a. Engineer, in consultation with Owner and facility manager (as applicable) as necessary, will evaluate the data collected during the Demonstration Period and other information obtained during the Demonstration Period for compliance with the Contract Documents. b. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of whether the data and information obtained indicate that the Demonstration Period was successfully completed. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for Contractor-furnished, manufacturers’ operation and maintenance (O&M) data, including: a. Required operation and maintenance data groupings into operation and data manuals and timing of such Submittals. b. Requirements for paper copies of operation and maintenance data and related Electronic Documents. c. Content of operation and maintenance data Submittals. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance data, and related information, in accordance with this Section and requirements elsewhere in the Contract Documents, as instructional and reference information for use by: (a) facility manager’s operation and maintenance personnel, and (b) others retained by or working for Owner or facility manager. 2. In addition to operation and maintenance data expressly required elsewhere in the Contract Documents, also submit operation and maintenance data for: a. All equipment and systems, including electrical equipment, solar power equipment, and control systems. . b. Instrumentation and control devices and systems. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Startup Procedures. 3. Section 01 78 36 - Warranties. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit operation and maintenance data, required by the Contract Documents, grouped into operation and maintenance manual Submittals indicated in Table 01 78 23-A. b. Where operation and maintenance data required by the Contract Documents, is not expressly indicated in table 01 78 23-A, obtain written clarification or interpretation from Engineer prior to preparing and transmitting such Submittal. c. For each required operation and maintenance manual Submittal, furnish preliminary Submittal and final Submittal. Timing of preliminary and final operation and maintenance manual Submittals, and differences between preliminary and final Submittals, are indicated in this Section. Table 01 78 23-A Required Groupings of Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals Name of O&M Manual/Data For Materials or Equipment Specified in Section(s) Solar Power System – Inverters, Panels, and Controls 26 99 00, 26 99 03, 26, 99 04, 40 63 44 No Export Controls Arc Flash and Coordination Study 26 05 74 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 2 Name of O&M Manual/Data For Materials or Equipment Specified in Section(s) Switchboards 26 24 13 Low Voltage Circuit Breakers 26 28 01 SCADA Systems Division 40 inclusive B. Timing of Submittals and Quantity Required: 1. Preliminary Operation and Maintenance Manual Submittals: a. Paper Copies: None, exclusive of copies required for Contractor’s use. b. Submit to entity indicated in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, by the earlier of: 90 days following approval of Shop Drawings and product data Submittals, or 14 days prior to starting training of operation and maintenance personnel, or 14 days prior to field quality control testing at the Site. c. Do not perform checkout, startup, and training without Engineer’s acceptance of preliminary operation and maintenance data Submittals for the associated Work. 2. Final Operation and Maintenance Manual Submittals: Furnish final Submittal prior to Substantial Completion of the associated Work, unless submittal is required prior to an interim Milestone. a. Paper Copies: Three copies, exclusive of copies required for Contractor’s use. b. Work will not be eligible for Substantial Completion until associated, required final operation and maintenance data Submittals are accepted by Engineer. c. If Contractor (whether or not via Subcontractor or Supplier), revises program code or configuration files between acceptance of Submittal by Engineer and end of the Contract’s correction period and Contractor’s general warranty obligation, furnish updated program code and configuration files to facility manager. Before modifying program code and configuration files after Substantial Completion, verify with facility manager that Owner- or facility manager modifications of program code or configuration files were incorporated into the modified files, subject to the provisions of this Section. 1.3 PAPER COPIES OF O&M MANUALS A. Binding and Cover: 1. Bind each operation and maintenance manual in durable, permanent, stiff-cover binder(s), comprising one or more volumes per copy, as necessary. 2. Binders shall be not less than one inch wide and maximum of three inches wide. Binders for each copy of each volume shall be same size and color. 3. Binders shall be locking three-ring (”D”-ring) type, or three-post type. Three-ring binders shall be riveted to back cover and include plastic sheet lifter (page guard) at front and back of each volume. 4. Do not overfill binders. 5. Covers shall be oil-, moisture-, and wear-resistant, including identifying information on cover and spine of each volume. 6. Indicate the following information on cover of each volume: a. Title: “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”. For submittal of preliminary operation and maintenance data, include the word, “PRELIMINARY” in the title. b. Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. c. Volume number, if more than one volume is submitted, listed as “Volume _____of _____”, with appropriate volume-designating numbers filled in. d. Name of Project and, when applicable, Contract name and number. e. Name of building or structure, as applicable. 7. Provide the following information on spine of each volume: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 3 a. Title: “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”. For submittal of preliminary operation and maintenance data, include the word, “PRELIMINARY” in the title. b. Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. c. Volume number, when more than one volume is submitted, listed as “Volume _____of _____”, with appropriate volume-designating numbers filled in. d. Project name and building or structure name. B. Pages: 1. Print pages in paper copies of operation and maintenance manuals on 30-pound (minimum) paper, 8.5-inch by 11-inch size. 2. Reinforce binding holes in each individual paper sheet with plastic, cloth, or metal. When published, separately-bound booklets or pamphlets are part of manuals, reinforcing of pages within booklet or pamphlet is not required. 3. Furnish each page with binding margin not less than 3/4-inch wide. 4. Properly punch each paper page with holes suitable for associated binding. Provide not less than 3/8-inch of paper between outer edge of punched holes and edge of paper. Manuals with improperly punched holes will be returned to Contractor as unacceptable. 5. In paper copies of manuals, each page in each copy shall be properly bound-through by the binder’s rings or posts. Paper manuals where some pages are not so bound will be returned to Contractor as unacceptable. C. Drawings: 1. Bind into operation and maintenance manuals drawings, diagrams, and illustrations up to and including 11-inch by 17-inch size, with reinforcing and punched holes specified for paper pages. 2. Drawings or sheets larger than 11-inch by 17-inch shall be: a. Paper Copies: Neatly folded and inserted into clear plastic pockets bound into the manual. Neatly and permanently label each pocket with printed text indicating content and drawing numbers. Include not more than two drawings or sheets per pocket. b. Electronic Documents Copies: Included in electronic file at appropriate location. D. Copy Quality and Document Clarity: 1. Provide original-quality copies. Documents in operation and maintenance manuals shall be either original manufacturer-printed documents or first-generation photocopies indistinguishable from originals. If original is in color, copies shall be in color. Manuals with copies that are unclear, not completely legible, off-center, skewed, or where text or drawings are cut by binding holes, are unacceptable. Pages that contain approval or date stamps, comments, or other markings that cover text or drawing are unacceptable. 2. Clearly mark, using ink, to indicate all components of materials and equipment on catalog pages for ease of identification. In standard or pre-printed documents, indicate options furnished and cross out inapplicable content. Using highlighters to so indicate options furnished is unacceptable. E. Organization: 1. Indexed tabs between major categories of information, such as operating instructions, preventive maintenance instructions, and other major subdivisions of data in each manual. 1.4 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS O&M MANUALS A. Electronic Documents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Each Electronic Document copy of operation and maintenance data shall include all information included in the corresponding paper copy. 2. File Format: a. Unless otherwise required by Submittal Procedures, operation and maintenance data Electronic Documents shall be “portable document format” (PDF) files. b. Electronic Documents shall be electronically searchable upon delivery. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 4 c. Electronic Documents shall not be password-protected and shall not be protected against Owner’s or facility manager’s copying and printing such files for Owner’s or facility manager’s use in operating and maintaining the facility. d. Electronic Documents shall open to its first page. e. Submit each operation and maintenance manual as a single Electronic Document file, unless file size is over-large, in which case divide into as few separate files, each with similar filename, as possible. f. Within each Electronic Document, provide bookmarks for the following: 1) Each chapter and subsection indicated in the corresponding printed copy document’s table of contents. 2) Each figure. 3) Each table. 4) Each appendix and attachment. 1.5 CONTENT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and Maintenance Manual Content – General: 1. Prepare each operation and maintenance manual specifically for the Project. Include in each manual all pertinent instructions, as-constructed drawings as applicable, bills of materials, technical information, installation and handling requirements, maintenance and repair instructions, and other information required for complete, accurate, and comprehensive data for safe and proper operation, maintenance, and repair of materials and equipment furnished for the Project. Include in manuals specific information required in the Specification Section for the material or equipment, data required by Laws and Regulations, and data required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provisions of this Article were written for equipment. Where operation and maintenance data are required for building products, such as finishes, openings, thermal and moisture protection, and similar items, comply with this Article to the extent practical and reasonable for the associated item. 3. Completeness and Accuracy: a. Operation and maintenance manuals that include language stating or implying that the manual’s content may be insufficient or stating that the manual’s content is not guaranteed to be complete and accurate are unacceptable. b. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be complete and accurate. c. Operation and maintenance manuals shall indicate the specific alternatives and features furnished, and the specific operation and maintenance provisions for the material or equipment furnished. 4. Provide dividers and Include manufacturer’s information, diagrams, schematics, and equipment cutaways. Avoid submitting catalog excerpts unless they are the only document available showing identification or description of particular component of the equipment. Where published documents, included in operation and maintenance data, pertain to multiple models or types, mark the literature to indicate specific material or equipment supplied. Marking may be in the form of checking, arrows, or underlining to indicate pertinent information, or by crossing out or other means of obliterating information that does not apply to the materials and equipment furnished. 5. Identify each equipment item consistent with names and identification numbers shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, rather than manufacturer’s model numbers. 6. Neatly type data not furnished in computer-printed text. Handwriting, except for strikeouts, arrows, and the like, is unacceptable. 7. Include copy of warranty in accordance with the Contract Documents, including Section 01 78 36 - Warranties. 8. Include copy of proposed service contract, when applicable. 9. When copyrighted material is used in operation and maintenance manuals, obtain¬ copyright holder’s written permission to use such material in the operation and maintenance manual. B. Differences Between Preliminary and Final Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 5 1. In preliminary operation and maintenance manuals, include flysheet or placeholder for information to be included in final operation and maintenance manual Submittal. 2. In final operation and maintenance manuals, include information such as the following, as applicable for the associated materials and equipment: a. Equipment data that requires collection after startup, for example: (1) system and equipment balancing reports, including those for HVAC systems; and (2) final settings for electrical switchgear, automatic transfer switches, and circuit breakers: and (3) materials and equipment field testing results. b. Equipment startup reports and Suppliers’ field service reports (the latter on form in Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Startup Procedures). C. Initial Documents in Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Table of Contents: a. Provide table of contents in each volume of each operation and maintenance manual. b. In table of contents and not less than once in each chapter or section, identify materials and equipment by their functional names. Thereafter, abbreviations and acronyms may be used if their meaning is clearly indicated in a table bound at or near beginning of each volume. Using material or equipment model or catalog designations for identifying items is unacceptable. 2. Equipment Record: a. Provide “Equipment Record” section of operation and maintenance manual immediately following the table of contents. “Equipment Record” section is not required for operation and maintenance data for other than equipment (such as building materials and finishes). b. Provide “Equipment Record” on forms included as this Section’s Attachments 1, 2, and 3. c. For instrumentation and control equipment, International Society of Automation (ISA) data sheets are acceptable in lieu of the forms included as this Section’s Attachments 1, 2, and 3. d. This Section’s Attachments 1, 2, and 3 are available from Engineer as “fillable PDF forms”. e. Complete in detail each section of “Equipment Record”. Merely referencing the associated equipment’s operation and maintenance data for nameplate, maintenance, spare parts, lubricants, or other required information, is unacceptable. f. For equipment or systems with multiple, separate components (for example, motor and gearbox), fully completed “Equipment Record” is required for each component. g. Operation and maintenance data Submittals without complete and accurate “Equipment Record” sheets are unacceptable. 3. Supplier’s Field Service Reports: a. Include in final operation and maintenance manuals copies of associated Supplier’s field services reports in accordance with Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Startup Procedures. b. Include Supplier’s completed field service reports in operation and maintenance manual in section immediately following “Equipment Record” section. D. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: 1. Safety Considerations: a. Submit written descriptions of safety considerations relating to operation and maintenance procedures for materials and equipment. b. Describe safety devices and alarms provided with materials and equipment and proper operation and use. c. Indicate procedures for proper, safe operating and maintenance of materials and equipment furnished, including manufacturer’s recommended personal protection equipment, apparatus, and devices not furnished under the Contract. d. Describe recommended safety-related training for personnel operating and maintaining the subject materials or equipment. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 6 e. Include in appendix to operation and maintenance manual manufacturers’ relevant “safety data sheets” (SDS), formerly “material safety data sheets” (MSDS). f. Engineer’s review of operation and maintenance data expressly does not extend to adequacy, completeness, and accuracy of SDS or other safety and protection practices and procedures indicated in the operation and maintenance data. 2. Operation: a. Include in operation and maintenance data Submittals complete, detailed written operating instructions for each material or equipment item including: function; operating characteristics; limiting conditions; and regulation and control. Also include, as applicable, written descriptions of alarms generated by equipment and proper responses to such alarm conditions. b. Include pre-startup instructions and checklists and complete startup instructions for each material and equipment item. c. Indicate recommended operating instructions for all operating modes and conditions, with associated recommendations for safe operation. d. Explain available controls and instrumentation and associated function(s). e. Indicate required shutdown checklists and procedures for: normal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and long-term shutdowns. f. Troubleshooting instructions. 3. Maintenance – General: a. Include in operation and maintenance data complete, written instructions for necessary and recommended maintenance, including mechanical maintenance and electrical/instrumentation and controls maintenance, as applicable. b. Include in operation and maintenance data complete instructions for necessary assembly, disassembly, installation, re-installation, storage, and shipping for materials and equipment. c. Tools: Include list of required maintenance tools and equipment. d. Spare Parts and Extra Materials: 1) Submit complete instructions for ordering replaceable parts, including reference numbers (such as shop order number or serial number) that will expedite the ordering process. 2) Submit manufacturer’s recommended inventory levels for spare parts, extra stock materials, and consumable supplies for the initial two years of operation. Consumable supplies are items consumed or worn by operation of materials or equipment, and items used in maintaining the operation of material or equipment, including items such as lubricants, seals, reagents, and testing chemicals used for calibrating or operating the equipment. Include estimated delivery times, shelf life limitations, and special storage requirements. 3) Also refer to this Article’s provision, “Bills of Materials”, below, for additional requirements regarding ordering replacement parts. 4. Routine and Preventative Maintenance: a. Submit complete, detailed, written instructions for routine and preventive maintenance including all information and instructions to keep materials, equipment, and systems properly lubricated, adjusted, and maintained so that materials, equipment, and systems function economically throughout their expected service life. Instructions shall include: 1) Written explanations with illustrations for each routine and preventive maintenance task such as inspection, adjustment, anchor bolt torque checks, lubrication, calibration, cleaning, replacement of filters, and the like. 2) Recommended schedule for each routine and preventive maintenance task. 3) Lubricants: a) Provide lubrication charts indicating recommended types of lubricants, frequency of application or change, and where each lubricant is to be used or applied. b) Table of alternative lubricants. 5. Major Maintenance: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 7 a. Include detailed, written instructions and illustrations for required periodic (non- routine, non-preventative) maintenance. b. Indicate relative level of training and expertise required to perform such maintenance and recommended tools and equipment. 6. Special Maintenance: a. Include maintenance instructions for long-term shutdowns and storage. E. Bills of Materials: 1. Include in operation and maintenance manuals complete bills of material or parts lists for materials and equipment furnished. Lists or bills of material may be furnished on a per- drawing or per-equipment assembly basis. Bills of material shall indicate: 2. Manufacturer’s name, physical address, telephone number, internet website address. 3. Manufacturer’s local service representative’s or local parts supplier’s name, physical address, telephone number, internet website address, and e-mail addresses. 4. Manufacturer’s shop order and serial number(s) for materials, equipment or assembly furnished. 5. For each part or piece include the following information: a. Parts cross-reference number. Cross-reference number shall be used to identify the part on assembly drawings, Shop Drawings, or other type of graphic illustration where the part is clearly shown or indicated. b. Part name or description. c. Manufacturer’s part number. d. Quantity of each part used in each assembly. e. Current unit price of the part at the time the operation and maintenance manual is submitted. Price list shall be dated. F. Record Copy of Shop Drawings, Product data, and Other Previously Approved and Accepted Submittals: 1. Submit original-quality copies of each approved and accepted (as applicable) Shop Drawing, product data Submittal, written results of source quality control activities, and other Submittals, updated to indicate as-installed condition. Do not include prior Submittals that were not approved or were not accepted. Reduced drawings are acceptable only when reduction is to not less than one-half original size and all lines, dimensions, lettering, and text are completely legible on the reduction. G. Electrical Schematics, Diagrams, and Information: 1. Submit complete electrical schematics and wiring diagrams, including complete point-to- point wiring and wiring numbers or colors between all terminal points. 2. Include as-constructed drawings of layouts of electrical panels (such as switchgear and motor control centers) and control panels. H. NFPA 70 (National Electric Code) Documentation: 1. Include in operation and maintenance manuals for electrically-powered equipment documented calculations of: (1) arc-fault current, equipment available fault current and (2) short-circuit current rating (SCCR), provided as part of equipment Submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The following, bound after this Section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Section: 1. Attachment 1 - Equipment Data and Spare Parts Summary form (one page) 2. Attachment 2 - Recommended Maintenance Summary form (one page) 3. Attachment 3 - Lubrication Summary form (one page) Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 8 END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 9 ATTACHMENT 1 Equipment Record Equipment Data and Spare Parts Summary Project Name Specification Section: Equipment Name Year Installed: Project Equipment Tag No(s). Equipment Manufacturer Project/ Order No. Address Phone Website Web Site E-mail Local Representative/Service Center Address Phone Website E-mail MECHANICAL NAMEPLATE DATA Equip. Serial No. Make Model No. ID No. Frame No. HP RPM Cap. Size TDH Imp. Size CFM PSI Other: ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATE DATA Equip. Serial No. Make Model No. ID No. Frame No. HP V. Amp. Hertz PH RPM SF Duty Code Ins. Cl. Type NEMA C Amb. Temp. Rise Rating Other: SPARE PARTS PROVIDED PER CONTRACT Part No. Part Name Quantity RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS Part No. Part Name Quantity (Jun 1990; Revised Oct 2001, Revised Nov 2007, Revised 2013) Copyright 1991-2014 HDR Engineering, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 10 ATTACHMENT 2 Equipment Record Recommended Maintenance Summary Equipment Description Project Equip. Tag No(s). RECOMMENDED BREAK-IN MAINTENANCE (FIRST OIL CHANGES, ETC.) INITIAL COMPLETION * FOLLOWING START-UP D W M Q S A RT Hours RECOMMENDED PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM TASK INTERVAL * D W M Q S A RT Hours * D = Daily W = Weekly M = Monthly Q = Quarterly S = Semiannual A = Annual Hours = Run Time Interval (Jun 1990; Revised Oct 2001, Revised Nov 2007, Revised 2013) Copyright 1991-2014 HDR Engineering, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 11 ATTACHMENT 3 Equipment Record Lubrication Summary Equipment Description Project Equip. Tag No(s). Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 Lubricant Point Lubricant Type Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO 1 2 3 4 5 (Jun 1990; Revised Oct 2001, Revised Nov 2007, Revised 2013) Copyright 1991-2014 HDR Engineering, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction WARRANTIES 01 78 36 - 1 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements for warranties required in the various Specifications. 2. Provisions addressing: a. Suppliers’ standard warranties. b. Suppliers’ special or extended warranties. c. Implied warranties. d. Commencement and duration of warranties. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. For each item of equipment furnished under the Contract, submit Supplier’s standard warranty, regardless of whether such warranty or Submittal thereof is required by the associated Specifications for that item. Submit such warranties for materials where such Submittal is required in the Specifications for the material. 2. For each item of material or equipment where Supplier’s special (or extended) warranty is required by the Contract Documents, submit appropriate special warranty that complies with the Contract Documents. 3. Supplier’s warranties shall be specifically endorsed to Owner, Contractor, and the entity purchasing the item (if other than Contractor) by the entity issuing such warranty. 4. Submit Suppliers’ standard warranties and special warranties as Submittals in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. 1.3 CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL WARRANTY AND CORRECTION PERIOD OBLIGATIONS A. Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee: Comply with requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. B. Contractor’s Warranty of Title: Comply with requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. C. Correction Period: Comply with requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 1.4 SUPPLIERS’ WARRANTIES FOR MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Warranty Types: 1. Required by the General Conditions: a. Warranties specified for materials and equipment shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee and requirements for the Contract’s correction period. b. Disclaimers and limitations in specific materials and equipment warranties do not limit Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee, nor does such affect or limit Contractor’s performance obligations under the correction period. 2. Material or equipment manufacturer’s standard warranty is pre-printed, written warranty published by item’s manufacturer and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to the entities indicated in this Specifications Section’s Article 1.2. 3. Special warranty is written warranty that either extends the duration of material or equipment manufacturer’s standard warranty or provides other, increased rights to Owner and other beneficiaries (if any) of such warranty. Where the Contract Documents indicate Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction WARRANTIES 01 78 36 - 2 specific requirements for warranties that differ from the manufacturer’s standard warranty for that item, special warranty is implied. B. Requirements for Special Warranties: 1. Submit written special warranty document that contains appropriate provisions and identification, ready for signature by material or equipment manufacturer, Owner, and other beneficiaries indicated in Article 1.2 of this Specifications Section. Submit draft warranty with Submittals required prior to fabrication and shipment of the item from the Supplier’s facility. 2. Manufacturer’s Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly signed by product manufacturer and other entities as appropriate. 3. Specified Form: When specified forms for special warranties are included in the Contract Documents, prepare written document, properly signed by item manufacturer, Owner, and other beneficiaries indicated in Article 1.2 of this Specifications Section, using the required form. 4. Refer to the Specifications for content and requirements for submitting special warranties. 1.5 IMPLIED WARRANTIES A. Warranty of Title and Intellectual Property Rights: 1. Except as may be otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, implied warranty of title required by Laws and Regulations is applicable to the Work and to materials and equipment incorporated therein. 2. Provisions on intellectual property rights, including patent fees and royalties, are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. B. Warranty of Merchantability: 1. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract to the contrary, implied warranties of merchantability required by Laws and Regulations apply to the materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. C. Warranty of Fitness-for-Purpose: 1. Implied warranty of fitness-for-purpose for materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, for which specific material or features are indicated in the Contract Documents, is hereby disclaimed by Owner and Contractor. 2. 1.6 COMMENCEMENT AND DURATION OF WARRANTIES A. Commencement of Warranties: 1. Contract correction period and Contractor’s general warranty commence as indicated in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2. Suppliers’ standard warranties and special warranties commence running on the date that the associated item is certified by Engineer as substantially complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. In no event shall special warranties commence running prior to Engineer’s review and acceptance of special warranty Submittal for the item. 3. Implied warranties commence in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Duration of Warranties: 1. Duration of correction period is set forth in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 2. Duration of Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 3. Duration of Suppliers’ standard warranties is in accordance with the applicable standard warranty document accepted for the Project by Engineer. 4. Duration of required Suppliers’ special warranties shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents for the subject item. 5. Duration of implied warranties shall be in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction WARRANTIES 01 78 36 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1 SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for Project record documents, to supplement record documents requirements of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. B. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services to establish, maintain, continuously update, and submit to Engineer Project record documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values. 2. Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. 3. Section 01 31 26 - Electronic Communication Protocols. 4. Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Obtain necessary field measurements and record all data required for Project record documents before covering up the Work or building on subsequent phases of the Work. 2. Promptly after obtaining measurements and information, record the data and information on Project record documents. 3. Where a licensed, registered professional land surveyor is retained on the Project, whether by Contractor or others, to perform field measurements and record other data for as- constructed Project or Site conditions, coordinate with such entity and schedule and perform the Work accordingly. Allow surveyor sufficient time and proper conditions for performing surveyor’s work. Assist the surveyor as necessary in performance of surveyor’s responsibilities. B. Monthly Status Evaluation: 1. Not less than once per month, as a condition precedent to submitting Application for Payment, Contractor’s site superintendent will meet with either Engineer or Resident Project Representative (RPR) at the Site to review status of Contractor’s Project record documents. 2. When Engineer or RPR directs corrections to Project record documents, promptly make such corrections on the Project record documents. Engineer’s or RPR’s directions or lack thereof do not in any way relieve or mitigate Contractor’s sole responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, and clarity of Project record documents. 3. Requirements for review of record documents status as a condition precedent to progress payments is in Section 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values, and Section 01 29 76 - Progress Payment Procedures. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Comply with Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering, regarding personnel and equipment necessary to measure and record field conditions. 2. Recorder of Changes and Field Conditions on Project Record Documents: a. Contractor’s staff at the Site shall include not less than one person with suitable training and drafting (drawing) experience to record on the Project record documents changes made and field conditions encountered. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 2 b. Recorder of changes and field conditions on the Project record documents shall possess not less than two semesters of drafting (drawing) training in a classroom, either in high school, college, or bona-fide vocational school. c. Upon Engineer’s request, submit name of proposed recorder at the Site, resume', or list of relevant experience, and copy of credentials of completion of such drafting (drawing) course(s). d. If original recorder of changes and field conditions is replaced, promptly advise Engineer and RPR in writing and submit to Engineer qualifications of proposed replacement. B. Samples of Similar Prior Work: 1. Submit Samples of the personal work of Contractor’s designated recorder of changes and field conditions on the Project record documents from not less than two prior projects of similar type(s) of work at the Work. Submit copies of not less than two marked-up drawings from each prior project and copies of two pages of marked-up specifications from each prior project. 2. Samples shall be in the same form as proposed for the Project record documents. For example, where Contractor intends to submit hand-drawn mark-ups of the Drawings and Specifications, Samples shall be copies of hand-drawn markups. Where Contractor intends to submit Project record documents in native (executable) file format (such as CAD files), Samples shall be developed using the same software to be used in preparing the Project record documents. 3. If original recorder of changes and field conditions is replaced by Contractor, replacement recorder shall provide the same standard of work on Project record documents as indicated in the approved Samples. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Samples: a. Sample of field-recorded project record documents from prior projects, in accordance with this Specifications section’s “Quality Assurance” Article, to establish quality and style for markups of Project record documents. Submit within 15 days of the date the Contract Times commence running. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Qualifications Statements: a. When requested by Engineer, submit qualifications of proposed recorder of changes and field conditions for Project record documents at Contractor’s field office at the Site. Qualifications shall comply with the “Quality Assurance” Article of this Specifications section. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Record Documentation: a. Prior to readiness for final payment, submit to Engineer one copy of Project’s final record documents and obtain Engineer’s acceptance of same. Submit complete record documents; do not make partial Submittals without Engineer’s concurrence. b. Submit the following Project record documents: 1) Record Drawings, including those issued via Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and allowance authorizations. 2) Record project manual, including Specifications, indicating changes made via Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and allowance authorizations. c. Submit record documents with transmittal letter on Contractor’s letterhead in accordance with requirements in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Certifications: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 3 a. Record documents Submittal shall include certification, with original signature of official authorized to sign legally-binding contracts on behalf of Contractor, reading as follows: 1) (Contractor’s legal/contractual entity name) has maintained, continuously updated, and submitted Project record documentation in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents, and other elements of Contract Documents, for the Owner’s organization’s name, , Site name and Project name. We certify that each record document submitted is complete, accurate, and legible relative to the Work performed under our Contract, and that the record documents comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. By: _____(signature) Print Name: _____ Title: _____ 1.5 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain in Contractor’s field office, in clean, dry, legible condition, complete sets of the following record documents: 1. Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda; 2. Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Submittals, including records of test results, approved or accepted as applicable, by Engineer; 3. Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, allowance authorizations; 4. copies of all interpretations and clarifications issued; 5. photographic documentation; 6. survey data; and 7. all other documents pertinent to the Work. B. Provide files and racks for proper storage and easy access to Project record documents. File record documents in accordance with the edition of the Construction Specification Institute’s MasterFormat used for organizing the project manual, unless otherwise accepted by Engineer or RPR. C. Promptly make Project record documents available for observation and review upon request of Engineer, RPR, or Owner. D. Do not use Project record documents for any purpose other than serving as Project record. Do not remove Project record documents from Contractor’s field office without Engineer’s approval. 1.6 RECORDING INFORMATION ON PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Recording Changes, Field Conditions, and Other Information – General: 1. At the start of the Project, label each record document to be submitted as, “PROJECT RECORD” using legible, printed letters. Letters on record copy of the Drawings shall be two inches high. 2. Keep record documents current consistent with the progress of the Work. Make entries on record documents within two working days of receipt of information required to record the change, field condition, or other pertinent information. 3. Do not permanently conceal the Work until required information has been recorded for Project record documents. 4. Accuracy of record documents shall be such that future searches for items shown on the record documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from Engineer-accepted Project record documents. 5. Marking of Entries: a. Use erasable, colored pencils (not ink or indelible pencil) for marking changes, revisions, additions, and deletions to Project record documents. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 4 b. Clearly describe the change by graphic line and make notations as required. Use straight-edge to mark straight lines. Writing shall be legible and sufficiently dark to allow scanning of record documents into legible electronic files in “portable document format” (.PDF) files. c. Date each entry on record documents. d. Indicate changes by drawing a “cloud” around the change(s) indicated. e. Mark initial revisions in red. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for subsequent changes. B. Drawings: 1. Record changes on copy of the Drawings. Submittal of Contractor-originated or -produced drawings as a substitute for recording changes on a copy of the Drawings is unacceptable. 2. Record changes on plans, sections, elevations, schematics, schedules, and details as required for clarity, accuracy, and completeness, making reference dimensions and elevations (to Project datum) for complete record documentation. 3. Record actual construction including: a. Depths of various elements of foundation relative to Project datum. b. Horizontal and vertical location of Underground Facilities referenced to permanent surface improvements and Project elevation datum. For each Underground Facility, including pipe fittings, show and indicate dimensions to not less than two permanent, visible surface improvements. c. Location of exposed utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure and, where applicable, to Project elevation datum. d. Changes in structural and architectural elements of the Work, including changes in reinforcing. e. Field changes of dimensions, arrangements, and details. f. Changes made in accordance with Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and allowance authorizations. g. Changes in details on the Drawings. Submit additional details prepared by Contractor when required to document such changes. 4. Recording Changes for Schematic Layouts: a. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray physical layout. For such cases, the final physical arrangement shall be determined by Contractor subject to acceptance by Engineer. b. Record on the Project record documents all revisions to schematics on the Drawings, including: piping schematics, ducting schematics, process and instrumentation diagrams, control and circuitry diagrams, electrical one-line diagrams, motor control center layouts, and other schematics when included in the Drawings. Show and indicate actual locations of equipment, lighting fixtures, in-place grounding system, and other pertinent data. c. When dimensioned plans and dimensioned sections or elevations on the Drawings show the Work schematically, indicate on the Project record documents, by dimensions accurate to within one inch in the field, centerline location of items of Work such as conduit, piping, ducts, and similar items 1) Clearly identify each item of the Work by accurate notations such as “cast iron drain”, “rigid electrical conduit”, “copper waterline”, and similar descriptions. 2) Show by symbol or by note the vertical location of each item of the Work; for example, “embedded in slab”, “under slab”, “in ceiling plenum”, “exposed”, and similar designations. For piping not embedded, also indicate elevation dimension relative to Project elevation datum. 3) Descriptions shall be sufficiently detailed to be related to the Specifications. d. Engineer may furnish written waiver of requirements relative to schematic layouts shown on plans, sections, and elevations when, in Engineer’s judgment, dimensioned Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 5 layouts of Work shown schematically will serve no useful purpose. Do not rely on such waiver(s) being issued. 5. Supplemental Drawings: a. In some cases, drawings produced during construction by Engineer or Contractor supplement the Drawings and shall be included with Project record documents submitted by Contractor. Supplemental record drawings shall include drawings or sketches that are part of Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and allowance authorizations and that cannot be incorporated into the Drawings because of space limitations. b. Supplemental drawings submitted with record drawings shall be integrated with the Drawings and include necessary cross-references between drawings. Supplemental record drawings shall be on sheets the same size as the Drawings. c. When supplemental drawings developed by Contractor using computer-aided drafting/design (CAD), building information models (BIM), or civil information models (CIM) software are to be included in record drawings, submit electronic files for such drawings in accordance with Section 01 31 26 – Electronic Communication Protocols, as part of record drawing Submittal. Label such files, “Supplemental Record Drawings”, including with Contractor’s name, Project name, and Contract designation. C. Specifications and Addenda: 1. Mark each Specifications section to record: a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each material and equipment item actually furnished. b. Changes made by Addendum, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and allowance authorizations. 1.7 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS FURNISHED BY ENGINEER A. CAD, BIM, or CIM files of the Drawings will be furnished by Engineer upon the following conditions: 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer a letter on Contractor letterhead requesting CAD, BIM, or CIM files of the Drawings and indicating specific definition(s) or description(s) of how such Electronic Documents will be used by Contractor, and specific description of benefits to Owner (including credit proposal, if applicable) if the request is granted. 2. Engineer does not guarantee that Electronic Documents are available in the format(s) requested by Contractor. Some projects may have Drawings developed using only CAD software instead of BIM or CIM software. Engineer will not create BIM or CIM files for Contractor if such files do not already exist. 3. Contractor shall sign Engineer’s standard agreement with Contractor for for release of Electronic Documents and shall abide by the provisions of such agreement for release of Electronic Documents. 4. Layering system incorporated in CAD, BIM, and CIM files shall be maintained as transmitted by Engineer. CADD, BIM, and CIM files transmitted by Engineer containing cross-referenced files shall not be bound by Contractor. Drawing cross-references and paths shall be maintained. If Contractor alters layers or cross-reference files, Contractor shall restore all layers and cross-references prior to submitting Project record documents to Engineer. 5. Contractor shall submit Project record drawings to Engineer in same CAD, BIM, or CIM format that files were furnished to Contractor.. B. Microsoft Word files of Specifications: 1. Requirements for Engineer’s potential release of word processing files of the Specifications or other written documents in native format are the same as those for Drawings. 2. When Specifications are released in native format, Contractor shall submit record specifications in the same format, with all changes tracked using Microsoft Word’s “track changes” feature. 3. Do not modify the formatting of the native files furnished by Engineer. If formatting changes are made without Engineer’s authorization, remedy the formatting to the same Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 6 condition and status as when the files were first delivered to Contractor. Such remedy shall be at Contractor’s expense. 4. Comply with all requirements of this Specifications section regarding record specifications. 5. After delivery of record specifications Submittal to Engineer, delete from Contractor’s files the native word processing files. Contractor may retain a PDF version of such files for Contractor’s records. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CYBER SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 01 81 33 - 1 SECTION 01 81 33 CYBER SECURITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. General requirements for cyber security measures applicable to all the Work. 2. Requirements to furnish to Owner’s facility manager copy of code and configuration files, passwords, physical keys for monitoring and control systems in accordance with the Contract Times and other requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. General requirements for microprocessor-based equipment. B. Scope: 1. This Section indicates cyber security requirements applicable to all equipment, controls, devices, and other items furnished to Owner and Owner-furnished items modified as part of the Work, containing microprocessor-based systems and that will be (as part of the Work) or can be (in the future, not as part of the Project) connected to Owner’s network or the Internet. Such items include but are not limited to the following: programmable logic controllers (PLC), programmable automation controllers (PAC), remote terminal units (RTU), distributed control units (DCU), direct digital controls (DDC), operator interface terminals (OIT), network equipment, configurable microprocessors, and human-machine interfaces (HMI). 2. This Section applies regardless of whether the subject items were furnished or modified by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier of any tier. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters, but when used in this section have the meaning indicated below: a. “Code and configuration files” mean any and all code or equipment configuration backup files, whether created by or for Contractor, Supplier, or Subcontractor, needed for Owner or facility manager to restore equipment and systems to final condition of equipment and systems prevailing at the time of Substantial Completion. Code and configuration files do not include original equipment manufacturer (OEM) software’s underlying proprietary code such as firmware or operating system code. For example, for variable frequency drives (VFD), the configuration file of parameters of each individual VFD furnished or modified under the Project is required. However, the OEM’s source code that runs the VFD firmware need not be furnished to Owner or facility manager. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit the following after obtaining Engineer’s approval of Shop Drawings and product data Submittals for such devices under other Divisions of the Specifications. a. Preliminary Internet Protocol (IP) Network-Capable Device Asset Inventory: 1) Submit in native (executable) Microsoft Excel spreadsheet format. 2) Include networked components furnished as part of the Work or modified as part of the Work. 3) Coordinate with the Owner or Engineer to determine the preferred method of delivery to assure security of information contained in internet protocol (IP) network-capable device asset inventory]. 4) Submittal shall include the following for each device: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CYBER SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 01 81 33 - 2 a) Device identification designation. b) Manufacturer. c) Model number. d) Device use description. b. Network Diagrams: 1) Submit in native (executable) , Autodesk AutoCAD, file format. 2) Coordinate with Owner, facility manager (if other than Owner), or Engineer to determine the preferred method of delivery to assure security of information contained in network diagrams. 3) Logical Network Diagram(s): Show information flow through network(s), and include: a) Major network devices, subnets, and virtual local area networks (VLAN). b) Include all wireless communication devices. c) Indicate the following information for each networked device: (1) Device identification designation. (2) Device description. (3) Manufacturer and model number. (4) MAC address. (5) IP address. (6) Ports and Protocols 4) Physical Network Diagram(s): Show all physical network components, ports, protocols, connections, and cables. Show or indicate wireless communication devices including physical location. 5) Draft code and configuration files for programmable or configurable devices, in accordance with this Section’s “Code and Configuration Requirements” Article. B. Close-out Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Password Turnover: Furnish Submittal and obtain Owner’s acceptance of the following not later than requesting inspection for Substantial Completion: a. Coordinate with Owner’s facility manager to securely transmit directly to Owner’s facility manager list of usernames and passwords applied to replace factory and Supplier’s defaults. 2. Final Internet Protocol (IP) Network-Capable Device Asset Inventory: Furnish, as unlocked, editable Microsoft Excel file listing all network-capable devices furnished or modified under this Section. List shall include: Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of required Submittal not later than requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. a. Device identification designation. b. Device location (in network and physical location). c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name and model designation. e. Manufacturer’s serial number on device. f. MAC address (when device is IP-addressable). g. IP address (when device is IP-addressable). h. Edition or revision number of installed firmware or operating system. 3. Final code and configuration files for programmable or configurable devices, in accordance with this Section’s “Code and Configuration Requirements” Article. 4. Record Documentation: a. As-Manufactured Network Diagrams: Provide promptly after factory acceptance testing and prior to delivery of factory-tested items to the Site. Include copies of record documentation Submittals accepted by Engineer in preliminary operation and maintenance manuals required. b. As-Installed Network Diagrams: Provide promptly upon Substantial Completion. Include copies of record documentation Submittals accepted by Engineer in final operation and maintenance manuals required. 5. The Work will not be eligible for until all Closeout Submittals required under this Section, are acceptable to Owner’s facility manager or Engineer, as applicable. If code and Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CYBER SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 01 81 33 - 3 configuration files are modified for any reason following Substantial Completion, furnish revised code and configuration files prior to requesting inspection for final completion. 1.4 CODE AND CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS A. Copies of Code and Configuration Files – General: 1. Submit as Electronic Documents only. Paper Submittals are not required for program code and configuration files. 2. Furnish directly to Owner’s facility manager via secure transmission method acceptable to Owner’s facility manager. Provide proof of file transfer for Submittal record purposes. 3. In accordance with the Contract Documents, promptly following Substantial Completion, Owner and facility manager, if any, shall have right to: (a) modify program code and configuration files, (b) update software and firmware, (c) revise system security settings, such as passwords, IP addresses, and other security settings, and (d) implement related modifications, without restriction or interference from Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier, and others. 4. Owner and facility manager, if any, agree to use program code and configuration files only with Owner’s facilities, as may be transferred to Owner’s successors and assigns. 5. Owner and facility manager, if any, will not be subject to any Supplier-requested non- disclosure agreement that is not part of the Contract Documents. 6. Engineer will not distribute program code and configuration files obtained under the Project, except in exchanging such files with Owner, facility manager, or their successors and assigns. Engineer will not be party to any Supplier-requested non-disclosure agreement. 7. Submit only code prepared specifically for the Project, including facility-specific program code. Program code normally furnished by equipment manufacturers for operation of their own equipment and systems is exempt from this provision and need not be submitted. 8. Third-party, licensed, commercially available software (such as, but not limited to, Microsoft operating system software sold at retail, commercial SCADA system software platforms, and PLC programming software) is excluded from requirements of this Article. Furnish copies of commercially available, licensed, third-party software, where required, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9. Contractor (including Subcontractors and Suppliers) is not responsible for configurations and control setpoints subsequently changed by Owner, facility manager, or others for whom either is responsible, when such changes were not in accordance with Supplier’s written recommendations and operation and maintenance instructions. 10. Code, configurations and systems shall not be hidden or protected by encryption, passwords, or other means without furnishing such passwords or access to Owner’s or facility manager’s (if other than Owner), designated personnel. B. Code and Configuration File Submittal Requirements: 1. For each software application configured for the Project, submit backup of files necessary for application restoration including but not limited to application files, configuration files, and settings and setpoints. 2. For each network component submit backup of files necessary for restoration of device including but not limited to device configuration files and software application backups for host-based devices. 3. For each microprocessor-based system, submit configuration and application backup files necessary for device restoration. 4. For each Operating System based computing asset, provide backup or image of the configured environment as required for system restoration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Controls: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CYBER SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 01 81 33 - 4 1. Micro-processor based, computing and network equipment furnished shall be current and not be obsolete or subject to a manufacturer’s end-of-life notice of less than two years after Substantial Completion. 2. Submit Suppliers’ end-of-life notices, if any, for equipment as part of Shop Drawing or product data Submittal for the subject item. 3. Demands for non-disclosure agreements (NDAs) or other measures that would restrict or prevent Owner and facility manager (if other than Owner) from obtaining or using information, licenses, operational and performance data, and software are unacceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Installing the Work constitutes Contractor’s approval of conditions existing at the time the Work is performed, including, where applicable, existing code and configuration files that affect the Work associated with cyber-security procedures. 3.2 REMOTE ACCESS TO INSTALLED EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Requesting Remote Access - General: 1. Unless expressly indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, remote access devices for interaction with programmable devices are unacceptable during construction or operation. 2. Where remote access is requested, furnish appropriate written request, to Owner, through Engineer, requesting access, indicating desired methods of access, reason for remote access (i.e., programming, view only data, emergency support, or other, specifically indicated reason). 3. Coordinate with Owner and facility manager, through Engineer, to identify acceptable access method, if any, consistent with Owner’s and facility manager’s, cyber-security risk tolerance. 3.3 CONTRACTOR’S ONSITE ACCESS TO FACILITY NETWORKS A. Contractor’s Onsite Access to Facility Networks – General: 1. Devices, whether laptop computers, tablets, or others, owned or operated by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier, used for programming and startup of programmable devices that are part of the Work,] will not be allowed to connect to Owner’s programmable device network. 2. Owner or facility manager will furnish to Contractor, on a temporary, short-term basis, laptop or tablet suitable for Contractor’s purposes for programming, startup, troubleshooting, adjusting, and optimizing programmable devices provided or modified as part of the Work. Contractor shall provide cabling and adapters necessary to use such devices as indicated. Arrange use of such devices with Owner’s facility manager not less than seven days in advance of date and time such devices are needed for the Work. 3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Promptly Upon Substantial Completion: 1. Update firmware of programmable devices to Supplier’s current version. 2. Owner and facility manager (if other than Owner) shall receive full access and use of equipment and system monitoring and control capabilities, including: Code and configuration files. 3. In addition, upon Owner’s issuance of payment to Contractor and Contractor’s acceptance thereof for the equipment and systems, including code and configuration files: a. Ownership transfers to Owner upon Owner’s payment (and Contractor’s acceptance thereof) of 100 percent of the value assigned the associated item in the Schedule of Values accepted by Engineer, minus retainage Owner is entitled to withhold under the Contract and minus other set-offs (expressly applicable to the subject equipment) under the Contract. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CYBER SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 01 81 33 - 5 b. Internal function blocks and code prepared specifically for the Project shall become Owner’s property for exclusive use by Owner and facility manager (if other than Owner) at the Site. Such rights shall transfer to Owner’s successors and assigns, if any, and if such equipment is relocated by Owner to a different site or facility, whether or not at the same address as the Site. c. Owner has the right to modify, either via Owner’s or facility manager’s employees or by a third-party systems integrator retained by either Owner or facility manager, code and configuration files developed specifically for the Project, as well as hardware furnished as part of the Work. d. Originator or developer of code and configuration files shall fully release claims to ownership of the intellectual property, trade secrets, or sensitive information for the furnished equipment and systems, as may be claimed by such entity. 4. Owner and facility manager (if other than Owner) shall have the right to modify, enhance or make changes to equipment as deemed necessary or desired by Owner, including hardware, software, networking settings, passwords or other information or settings that Owner or facility manager changes for maintenance, upgrade, or cybersecurity reasons. Owners or facility managers exercising such rights: (a) shall be in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written operation and maintenance data and shall not serve to void applicable warranties in effect; and (b) do not apply to modifications made by Owner or facility manager to Supplier’s standard software code not prepared specifically for the Project. B. Usernames and Passwords: 1. Change Supplier’s default usernames and passwords in coordination with requirements of Owner’s or facility manager’s (as applicable) personnel. 2. Remove each username and password established or used by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier prior to Substantial Completion of equipment or system. C. Programmable Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) and Other Graphical Interface Terminals: 1. For equipment that supports multiple levels of security, configure the following security levels: a. View. b. Operate. c. Supervisor. d. Administrator. 2. For equipment that supports only view/operate levels of security, provide password protection and furnish directly to Owner or facility manager (as applicable) passwords necessary to operate functions. 3. Coordinate directly with Owner and facility manager passwords and furnish password turn- over Submittal required in this Section’s “Submittals” Article. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 1 SECTION 03 00 05 CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast-in-place concrete and grout, including: a. Concrete materials and mixes. b. Reinforcing. c. Forming. d. Jointing. e. Concrete placing and curing. f. Concrete finishing. g. Field quality control. 2. Schedules of concrete Work for Project-specific concrete areas. B. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1.2 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Terminology: 1. Abbreviations indicated below are used elsewhere in this Section: a. “AAR” means “alkali-aggregate reaction”, which is deleterious to concrete, and results from either alkali-silica reactive (ASR) or alkali-carbonate reactive (ACR) aggregates. 2. “Place” and “placing”, when used in conjunction with the word, “concrete”, mean installing concrete. 3. Terminology used in this Section is consistent with ACI CT-13, unless otherwise indicated in this Section. 4. Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters, but when used in this section have the meaning indicated below: a. “Concrete fill” means non-structural concrete. b. “Exposed concrete” means concrete exposed to view after construction is complete. c. “Lean concrete” means concrete with low cement content. d. “Nonexposed concrete” means concrete not exposed to view after Substantial Completion. e. “Specified strength” means required compressive strength 28 days after concrete placing. B. Reference Standards: Standards referenced in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. b. 211.1, Selecting Proportions for Normal-Density and High-Density Concrete—Guide. c. 212.3R, Report on Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. d. 301, Specifications for Concrete Construction. e. 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. f. 304.2R, Guide to Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. g. 305.1, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. h. 306.1, Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. i. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. j. 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete. k. CT-13, Concrete Terminology. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A82, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 2 b. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. c. A1064, Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Replacement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. d. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. e. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. f. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. g. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. h. C138, Standard Method of Test for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. i. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. j. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. k. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. l. C173, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. m. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. n. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. o. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. p. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. q. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. r. C1293, Standard Test Method for Determination of Length Change of Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction. s. C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. t. C1602, Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. u. C1778, Standard Guide for Reducing Risk of Deleterious Alkali-Aggregate Reaction in Concrete. v. D882, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. w. D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). x. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber. y. D1709, Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free- Falling Dart Method. z. D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Asphalt Types). aa. E96, Standard Test Methods for Gravimetric Determination of Water Vapor Transmission Rate of Materials. bb. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. 3. United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE): a. s. b. CRD-C621, Specifications for Non-Shrink Grout). 4. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA). a. Checklist for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. 5. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): a. 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Concrete Supplier: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 3 a. Ready-mix concrete batch plant shall be certified by NRMCA. b. Ready mix plant shall comply with NRMCA Checklist for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. 2. Concrete Testing Laboratory: a. Contractor shall retain the services of and pay concrete testing laboratory. b. Concrete testing laboratory shall comply with ASTM E329. Upon Engineer’s request, furnish testing laboratory qualifications as Submittal. c. Concrete testing laboratory responsibilities include the following: 1) Testing proposed materials and mixes for compliance with the Contract Documents, including testing revised materials and mixes in the event of changes. 2) Additional testing and inspection required because of changes in materials or proportions requested by Contractor. 3. Formwork, shoring and reshoring for slabs and beams except where cast on ground to be designed by a professional engineer currently registered in the state where the Project is located. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule (table) of concrete materials proposed, listed by each specified grouping of concrete Work, including, but not limited to, aggregates, sand, cement (by type), pozzolan, admixtures, synthetic fibers, grouts, and other materials. For each separate material and product, indicate manufacturer and type of material. b. Mix Designs: 1) Proposed mix design for each concrete grouping required. For each, indicate concrete designation (type) indicated in the Contract Documents, proposed materials and proportioning, and intended special uses, such as concrete intended for placement in cold weather or warm weather, concrete to be placed by pumping, concrete intended for specific locations in the Work, and others. 2) Engineer’s approval of mix design Shop Drawing is only for limited purposes indicated in the Contract Documents, including the General Conditions, and in no way reduces or mitigates Contractor’s responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, and sequences. c. Scaled (minimum 1/8 inch per foot) drawings showing proposed locations of construction joints, control joints, expansion joints (as applicable) and joint profile dimensions for each joint type. d. Reinforcing Steel Shop Drawings: 1) Show or indicate material grades, sizes (including bar size and length), reinforcing configuration, bar spacing, location, and fabrication and placement details. 2) Reinforcing steel Shop Drawings shall have sufficient detail for installing reinforcing steel without installers needing to reference the Drawings. 3) Obtain Engineer’s approval of reinforcing steel Shop Drawings prior to commencing fabrication of reinforcing. 2. Product Data: a. Written affidavit stating materials proposed comply with requirements of reference standards indicated in this Section and, where applicable, compliance with standard specifications for highway and bridge construction in the jurisdiction of the Site. Clearly indicate specific reference standards applicable to each specific material. b. Mill certificates for reinforcing steel. c. For aggregate and sand, indicate source (quarry) and gradation of materials proposed for use. Indicate the specific concrete mix design(s) proposed for each. d. For cement and pozzolan, indicate material source and submit manufacturer’s technical data (except safety data sheets). e. For each proposed admixture and type of grout material (including non-shrink grouts, and grout cure/seal compound), submit manufacturer’s published technical data (except safety data sheets). Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 4 f. Manufacturers, product name, and types of materials for the following: 1) Joint fillers. 2) Curing agents. 3) Chemical sealers. 4) Bonding and patching mortar. 5) Construction joint bonding adhesive. 6) Prefabricated waterstops. 7) Macro synthetic fibers. 8) Coloring Agents. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certifications: Submit concurrent with, but separate from, associated Shop Drawings and product data Submittals: a. Pozzolan: Certification that pozzolan complies with quality requirements of this Section, and pozzolan Supplier’s certified test reports of pozzolan delivered to concrete Supplier. b. ASTM C33: Certification that class of coarse aggregate complies with ASTM C33 for type and location of concrete Work. c. Aggregate: 1) Certification of aggregate gradation. 2) Certification of coarse aggregate impurities relative to alkali-aggregate reactivity in accordance with ASTM C1778. 2. Test Reports: a. Cement and pozzolan mill certificates for all materials to be supplied. b. Test results for AAR impurities of coarse aggregates within proposed mixes, in accordance with ASTM standards cited in this Section. 3. Supplier’s Instructions: Submit concurrent with, but separate from, associated product data Submittals: a. Manufacturer’s written instructions on proper storage, handling, mixing, and use of materials furnished. 4. Delivery Tickets: a. Copies of concrete delivery tickets. 5. Qualifications Statements: a. Ready-mix plant certification, in accordance with this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Concrete Delivery: 1. Concrete Delivery Tickets: a. Prepare delivery ticket for each load of ready mixed concrete. b. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Contractor at time of delivery. c. Ticket shall indicate: 1) Mix identification. 2) Quantity delivered. 3) Quantity of material in each batch. 4) Outdoor temperature in the shade at location of concrete placement. 5) Time at which cement was added. 6) Time of delivery. 7) Time of discharge. 8) Quantity of water that may be added at the Site without exceeding the required water-cement ratio. 9) Quantity of water, if any, added at the Site. 2. Reinforcing Steel: a. Delivery reinforcing materials to Site with attached plastic or metal tags indicating permanent mark numbers. b. Mark numbers shall match mark number on Shop Drawings approved by Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 5 B. Storage and Handling: 1. Admixtures: a. Store admixtures in manner that avoids contamination, evaporation, and damage. b. For admixtures used in form of suspensions or non-stable solutions, perform agitating as recommended by manufacturer to ensure uniform distribution of ingredients. c. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and temperature changes that adversely affect admixture characteristics and performance. 2. Cement and Pozzolan: a. Store in moisture proof, weathertight enclosures. b. Do not use if caked or lumpy. 3. Aggregates: a. Store and access aggregates in manner avoiding excessive segregation and preventing contamination with other materials and other sizes of like aggregate. b. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregate. 4. Sand: Allow natural sand to drain until sand has relatively uniform moisture content, prior to use. 5. If stockpiled materials contact the ground, unless such materials are stored on a clean, firm, reasonably impervious surface such as concrete or asphalt paving, do not use in the concrete Work bottom six inches of stockpiled materials. 6. Reinforcing steel: Support and store all rebars above ground. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Comply with ASTM C150 Type II. 2. Cement type used shall correspond to that upon which selection of concrete proportions was based in the mix design. B. Fly Ash: 1. Provide in accordance with ASTM C618, Class F or Class C. 2. Nonstaining. 3. Hardened concrete containing fly ash shall be uniform, light gray color. 4. Compatible with other concrete ingredients. Fly ash shall have no deleterious effect on hardened concrete Work. 5. Obtain proposed fly ash from a source approved by the State Highway Department in the state where the Project is located for use in concrete for bridges. 6. Evaluate and use in accordance with ACI 232.2R. C. Admixtures: 1. Air entraining admixtures: Comply with ASTM C260. 2. Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures: a. Comply with ASTM C494 Type A through E. b. Comply with ACI 212.3R. c. Do not use retarding or accelerating admixtures unless specifically approved in writing by Engineer. d. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. e. Provide only chloride free admixtures only. 3. Maximum total water-soluble chloride ion content contributed from all ingredients of concrete including water, aggregates, cementitious materials, and admixtures by weight percent of cement: a. 0.10 all for concrete. 4. Calcium chloride is unacceptable. 5. Pozzolanic admixtures: Comply with ASTM C618. 6. Provide admixtures of same type, manufacturer, and quantity as used in establishing required concrete proportions in mix design. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 6 D. Water: 1. Potable in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 2. Clean and free from deleterious substances. 3. Free of oils, acids, and organic matter. Comply with ASTM C1602. E. Aggregates: 1. Normal weight concrete: Comply with ASTM C33/ASTM C33M, except as modified in this provision. 2. Fine aggregate: a. Clean, natural sand. b. Manufactured or artificial sand is unacceptable. 3. Coarse aggregate: a. Crushed stone, natural gravel, or other inert granular material. b. Content of clay or shale particles shall not exceed: one percent. 4. Gradation of coarse aggregate: a. Lean concrete and concrete topping: Size #7. b. Other concrete: Size #57 or #67. 5. Alkali-Reactive Aggregates: a. Aggregates that may be deleteriously reactive, when combined with alkalis in cement, are unacceptable. b. Evaluate proposed aggregates for potential deleterious alkali-aggregate reaction in concrete in accordance with ASTM C1778 1) Submit to Engineer results of aggregate testing for alkali-aggregate reactivity presenting the following: a) Analysis and classification of aggregates in accordance with ASTM C1778 b) Results of source quality control analysis of aggregates. c) Include the flow chart from Figure 1 of ASTM C1778, indicating test results sequence. d) Field performance history alone shall not be submitted to document acceptable aggregate performance. e) dryStructure class for each use in accordance with Table 3 of ASTM C1778: Class SC2. F. Concrete Grout: 1. Non-shrink, non-metallic grout: a. Products and Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, provide required quantity of one of the following: 1) Sika, SikaGrout 212. 2) Euclid Chemical, NS Grout. 3) Five Star, Grout 4) Or equal. b. Non-metallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining, premixed, requiring only water as an additive. c. Grout shall produce positive, controlled expansion. d. Gas liberation shall not result in mass expansion. e. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days: 6,500 psi. f. Comply with USACE CRD-C621. G. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Reinforcing bars: Comply with ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2. Welded wire reinforcing: a. Comply with ASTM A1064. b. Minimum yield strength: 60,000 psi. 3. Column spirals: comply with ASTM A82 or ASTM A1064. H. Chairs, Runners, Bolsters, Spacers, and Hangers: 1. Material: Stainless steel, epoxy coated, or plastic-coated metal. a. Plastic coated tips when in contact with forms only. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 7 I. Forms: 1. Prefabricated or fabricated for the Work. 2. Wood forms: a. 5/8-inch or 3/4-inch, five-ply, structural plywood, concrete form grade. b. Built-in-place or prefabricated type panel. 3. Metal forms: a. Metal forms may be used, except that aluminum in contact with concrete is unacceptable. b. Forms shall be tight to prevent concrete leakage, free of rust, straight, without dents, with members of uniform thickness. 4. Chamfer strips: Clear, white pine surface used against planed concrete surfaces. 5. Form Ties: a. Commercially fabricated for use in form construction. 1) Field fabricated ties are unacceptable. b. Provide for removal of end fasteners without spalling of concrete surfaces. c. Cones not less than 3/4-inch and not greater than one-inch diameter on each end. d. Embedded portion of ties shall be not less than 1.5 inches from concrete surface after removal of ends. e. Cone size: 1) Not less than 0.75-inch and not more than 2.5 inches diameter cones on each end. 2) Depth of cone shall not exceed concrete reinforcing cover. 6. Form release: a. Products and Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, provide required quantity of one of the following: 1) Richmond "Rich Cote." 2) Industrial Lubricants "Nox-Crete Form Coating." 3) Or equal. b. Nonstaining and shall not prevent bonding of future finishes to concrete surface. J. Chemical Floor Sealer: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, provide required quantity of one of the following: a. L&M Construction Chemicals. b. Euclid Chemical Company. c. Dayton Superior. d. Or equal. 2. Colorless, low-VOC, water-based solution containing acrylic copolymers. a. Comply with ASTM C1315, Class B, minimum 30 percent solids. 3. L&M Construction Chemicals, Dress & Seal WB 30. 4. Or equal. K. Membrane Curing Compound: 1. Comply with ASTM C309, Type 1D, Class A or B. 2. Fugitive dye shall dissipate over time and exposure. 3. Curing compound shall not prevent bonding of subsequently applied coverings, coatings, or finishes. L. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, provide required quantities of one of the following: a. Permaglaze Co. b. Rubatex Corp. c. Williams Products. d. Or equal. 2. In contact with water or sewage: a. Closed cell neoprene. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 8 b. Comply with ASTM D1056, Class SC (oil resistant and medium swell) of 2 to 5 psi compression deflection (Grade SCE41). 3. Exterior concrete paving, curbs, gutters, and sidewalks: a. Asphaltic expansion joint filler, in accordance with ASTM D994. 4. Other uses: a. Fiber expansion joint filler, in accordance with ASTM D1751. 2.2 CONCRETE MIXES A. Concrete Mixes - General: 1. Provide only ready-mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. 2. Provide concrete of required quality, capable of being placed without segregation and, when cured, possesses required properties. 3. Unless otherwise required, provide normal weight concrete except where lightweight concrete is indicated on the Drawings. 4. Do not begin concrete production until proposed concrete mix design Submittal is approved by Engineer. Approval of concrete mix design by Engineer does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide concrete in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5. Adjust concrete mix designs when material characteristics, conditions at the Site during placing (including weather and other environmental conditions), strength test results, or other circumstances warrant. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and approved by Engineer. B. Strength: 1. Provide concrete of required type, performance, and properties as indicated in the following table: TYPE WEIGHT REQUIRED STRENGTH* All other general use concrete Normal weight 4,000 psi * Minimum 28-day compressive strength. C. Air Entrainment: 1. Provide air entrainment in concrete to provide the following total air content percent by volume: MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE TOTAL AIR CONTENT PERCENT 1 inch or 3/4 inch 6 ± 1.5 Less than 3/4 inch 6.5 ± 1.5 2. Measure air content in accordance with ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or ASTM C138. D. Slump: 1. Slump shall be not greater than four inches and not less than one inch. 2. Measure slump at point of discharge of concrete into the Work. 3. After addition of superplasticizer (if used), slump shall be not greater than eight inches. 4. Concrete with slump less than minimum required slump may be acceptable when such concrete can be properly placed and consolidated. 5. Pumped concrete: a. Provide additional water at ready-mix plant for slump loss resulting from pumping. b. Provide additional water to concrete sufficient only so that slump at hose discharge does not exceed maximum slump allowable, and maximum allowable water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 9 6. Adjust slump at the Site using water reducers. Coordinate dosage and mixing requirements with ready-mix concrete Supplier. 7. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C143. E. Proportioning: 1. Proportion constituents of concrete mixes to achieve the following: a. Produce proper concrete workability, durability, strength, and other required properties. b. Prevent segregation and collection of excessive free water on concrete surface. 2. Minimum cement contents and maximum water cement ratios for concrete shall be as follows: REQUIRED STRENGTH MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT (POUNDS) BY MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE MAXIMUM WATER CEMENT RATIO BY WEIGHT 0.5 inch 0.75 inch 1.0 inch 4,000 564 564 564 0.45 4,500 611 611 -- 0.42 3. Fly Ash: a. For cast-in-place concrete only, maximum of 25 percent by weight of Portland cement content, per cubic yard, may be fly ash, at rate of one pound fly ash for one pound cement. b. When fly ash is used, water to cementitious materials ratio shall not exceed that required in this Section. 4. Concrete mix proportioning methods for normal weight concrete: a. Use one of the following methods to provide required properties and characteristics: 1) Method 1 (Trial Mix): a) Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 4, except as modified in this Section. b) Air content within range required in this Section. c) Record and report temperature of trial mixes. d) Proportion trial mixes in accordance with ACI 211.1. 2) Method 2 (Field Experience): a) Comply with ACI 301, except as modified in this Section: b) To use this method, field test records must be submitted to and accepted by Engineer. c) Test records shall indicate materials, proportions, and conditions similar to proposed mix design. F. Controlled Low-Strength Material (CLSM) (also known as “Flowable Fill”): 1. Provide mixture of cement, pozzolan, fine sand, water, and air, with consistency allowing flow under very low pressure (low head). 2. Required quantities of each component per cubic yard of mixed material: a. Cement (Type I or Type II): 50 pounds. b. Pozzolan: 200 pounds. c. Fine Sand: 2,700 pounds. d. Water (approximately): 420 pounds. e. Air Content (approximately): 10 percent. 3. Adjust actual quantities to provide yield of one cubic yard with materials used. 4. Approximate compressive strength shall be 85 to 175 psi. 5. Sand Gradation: Fine sand shall be evenly graded material with not less than 95 percent passing No. 4 sieve and not more than five percent passing No. 200 sieve. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Installing the Work constitutes Contractor’s approval of underlying work, subgrades, substrates, and field conditions prevailing at the time of the Work. 3.2 FORMING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Formwork: 1. Design, provide, use, and remove formwork. 2. Prepare structural calculations as necessary to demonstrate that building, structure, or other facility, in combination with forming and shoring, has sufficient strength to safely support its own weight plus loads placed thereon. 3. Provide formwork so that concrete Work complies with the Contract Documents. Allowable tolerances shall be as set forth in ACI 347. 4. Slabs and Beams: a. Provide slabs and beams of not less than required depth when sloping foundation base slabs or elevated floor slabs to drains. b. For slabs on grade, slope top of subgrade to provide floor slabs of not less than required uniform depth. c. Do not place floor drains through beams. 5. Openings: a. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other trades. b. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 6. Chamfer Strips: Provide 0.75-inch chamfer strips in forms to provide 0.75-inch wide beveled edges on permanently exposed corners of concrete. 7. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement. 8. Tighten forms to prevent mortar leakage. 9. Coat form surfaces with form release agents prior to placing reinforcing in forms. B. Reinforcing: 1. Position, support, and secure reinforcing against displacement prior to and during concrete placing. 2. Locate and support reinforcing by providing chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. 3. Provide wire ties so ends do not touch forms and are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 4. Lap splice lengths: in accordance with ACI 318 Class B top bar tension splices unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 5. Extend reinforcing to within two inches of concrete perimeter edges. If perimeter edge is earth formed, extend reinforcing to within three inches of edge. 6. Minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcing: as shown on the Drawings. 7. Welding reinforcing bars is unacceptable. 8. Welded wire reinforcing: a. Provide welded wire reinforcing in maximum practical sizes. b. Splice sides and ends with splice lap length measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet not less than: 1) One spacing of cross wires plus two inches. 2) 1.5 times development length. 3) 6 inches. c. Development length: in accordance with ACI 318, basic development length for required reinforcing yield strength. C. Construction, Expansion, and Contraction Joints: 1. Unplanned construction joints are unacceptable, including construction joints not required by the Contract Documents. 2. Required Locations of Construction Joints: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 11 a. Construction Joint Locations – General: 1) Provide joints in concrete at locations shown or indicated on the Drawings, or as shown on Shop Drawings approved by Engineer. 2) Where construction joint spacing shown on the Drawings exceeds joint spacing required below in this “Required Locations of Construction Joints” provision, submit proposed construction joint locations in accordance with the requirements, below, of this “Required Locations of Construction Joints” provision. b. 30 Provide construction joints in floor slabs and foundation base slabs so that concrete placements are approximately square and do not exceed 2,500 square feet. c. Provide construction joints in columns and walls: 1) At underside of beams, girders, haunches, drop panels, column capitals, and at floor panels. 2) Haunches, drop panels, and column capitals are considered part of supported floor or roof and shall be placed monolithically therewith. 3) Column bases need not be placed monolithically with associated, supporting slab. d. Provide construction joints perpendicular to reinforcing. Reinforcing shall be continuous across construction joints. 3. Not less than 72 hours shall elapse between placing adjoining concrete construction. 4. Thoroughly clean and remove laitance and loose and foreign particles from construction joints. 5. Before placing new concrete, dampen concrete surfaces that will abut freshly-placed concrete. D. Embedments: 1. Set and build in anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other Work and work by other contractors that is attached to, or supported by, concrete. 2. Comply with Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 3. Use setting diagrams, templates, and instructions of manufacturer of item being embedded in concrete, for locating and setting embedments in concrete. E. Placing Concrete: 1. Prior to placing concrete, coordinate the Work with the Work of other trades and other contractors. Do not place concrete until such other construction is properly completed. 2. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R and ACI 304.2R. 3. Place concrete in continuous operation within planned joints or sections. 4. Place concrete by methods preventing aggregate segregation. 5. During placing, do not allow concrete to free fall more than four feet. 6. Where free fall of concrete would otherwise exceed four feet, place concrete by means of tremie pipe or chute. F. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete using mechanical vibrators supplemented with hand- rodding and tamping, so that concrete is worked around reinforcing and embedded items, and concrete is placed into all parts of forms. G. Protection: 1. Protect concrete from physical damage and from reduced strength due to environmental extremes, including weather and other ambient conditions. 2. In cold weather, comply with ACI 306.1, except as modified in this provision. a. Do not place concrete on frozen ground or in contact with forms or reinforcing coated with frost, ice, snow, or other frozen matter. b. Do not place heated concrete warmer than 80 degrees F. c. If freezing temperatures are expected during curing, maintain concrete temperature at or above 50 degrees F, for seven days or 70 degrees F for three days. d. Do not allow concrete to cool suddenly. 3. In hot weather, comply with ACI 305.1, except as modified in this provision. a. At air temperature of 90 degrees F and above, maintain concrete as cool as possible during placing and curing. b. Do not allow concrete temperature to exceed 90 degrees F during placing. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 12 c. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking due to rapid evaporation of moisture. d. Do not place concrete when actual or anticipated evaporation rate equals or exceeds 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour, determined in accordance with ACI 305.1, Figure 2.1.5. H. Curing: 1. Begin curing concrete as soon as free water has disappeared from exposed surfaces of concrete. 2. Cure concrete by providing and using moisture-retaining cover, burlap kept continuously wet, or membrane curing compound. 3. Protect installed concrete, as necessary, required, or both. Prevent moisture loss from concrete during curing. 4. Cure for not less than seven days following placing. 5. Forms and related materials, temporarily remaining in place, may be used as curing materials for surfaces contacting forms and related materials, except during hot weather. 6. During hot weather comply with curing procedures in ACI 305.1. 7. During cold weather comply with curing procedures in ACI 306.1. 8. Curing vertical surfaces with a curing compound: a. Cover vertical surfaces with not less than two coats of curing compound. b. Allow preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying next coat of curing compound. c. Apply first coat of curing compound immediately after form removal. d. At time of application of first coat of curing compound, vertical surfaces shall be damp, with no free water on surface. e. Vertical surfaces are defined as surfaces with slope steeper than one vertical to four horizontal. I. Form Removal: 1. Remove forms after concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations or lack of support. 2. Where reshoring is not provided, forms and shoring used for supporting concrete shall remain in place until concrete has achieved required 28-day compressive strength. J. Concrete Installation Tolerances: 1. Tolerances for slab flatness/two-dimensionality are indicated near the end of the “Concrete Finishes” Article, below. 2. Other tolerances for concrete Work shall be in accordance with ACI 117. 3.3 CONCRETE FINISHES A. Surfaces Exposed to View: 1. Provide smooth finish for exposed concrete surfaces and surfaces that will be: a. covered with coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. b. Provided with grout cleaned finish. 2. Remove concrete fins and projections, and patch voids, air pockets, and honeycomb areas with cement grout. 3. Form facing material shall provide smooth, hard, uniform texture. Provide and use required forms for surfaces exposed to view. 4. Cementitious concrete coating: a. Locations: Provide cementitious coating at the following locations: 1) Walls and columns exposed to view. b. Prepare surfaces where cementitious coating will be provided in accordance with coating material manufacturer’s written instructions. c. Application of Cementitious Coatings: 1) Brush-apply coating to entire surface. 2) Mixing liquid for coating shall be mixture of bonding agent and water as recommended by the manufacturer. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 13 3) Apply two coats, at two pounds of cementitious coating material per square yard of surface covered, per coat. d. When second coat has set, float to uniform texture with sponge coat. B. Surfaces Not Exposed to View: 1. Patch voids, air pockets in concrete, and honeycomb areas with cement grout. 2. Fill tie holes with non-shrink, non-metallic grout. C. Slab Float Finish: 1. Provide slab float finish on surfaces that will receive roofing, concrete topping, lean concrete, concrete fill, and waterproofing. 2. After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, perform no further Work until concrete surface is ready for floating. 3. Using water to aid in finishing is unacceptable. 4. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared from concrete surface, and surface has stiffened sufficiently to allow floating. 5. During or after first floating, check flatness/two-dimensionality of entire surface using 10 foot straightedge placed at not less than two different angles. 6. Remove high spots and fill low spots during initial first floating, producing surface within Class B tolerance throughout, as indicated in the “Concrete Installation Tolerances” provision at the end of this Article. 7. Refloat slab immediately to uniform, sandy texture. D. Troweled Finish: 1. Provide troweled finish at interior slabs, exposed roof slabs, base slabs of structures, equipment bases, and column bases. 2. General Procedure: Perform each of the following, in order: a. Float-finish the concrete surface. b. Perform power troweling. c. Perform hand troweling. As indicated below in this provision, multiple hand troweling passes are required. 3. Using water to aid finishing is unacceptable. 4. Provide smooth surface, relatively free of defects, during initial hand troweling. 5. Perform additional hand troweling after surface is sufficiently hard. 6. Perform final hand troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over concrete surface. 7. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling. 8. Provide finished concrete surface free of obvious, visible, trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and in accordance with Class A tolerance, as indicated in the “Concrete Installation Tolerances” provision at the end of this Article. 9. On surfaces that will support floor coverings, remove by grinding, defects that would show through associated floor covering. E. Broom Finish: 1. Provide broom finish for the following concrete surfaces: a. Concrete surfaces subject to precipitation, including concrete paving that will be transited by vehicles, stoops, stairs, landings, horizontal concrete surfaces intended for pedestrian traffic (including surfaces that will feature handrails, railings, or guardrails), sidewalks, and horizontal surfaces of cast-in-place concrete retaining walls. b. Equipment pads and all other horizontal surfaces exposed to the elements. 2. Immediately after required float finish is provided, provide scored texture of concrete surface by drawing coarse, stiff-bristled broom across surface. 3. Provide broomed finish in transverse direction to intended traffic, unless expressly required otherwise elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 4. Amplitude: 1/16-inch to 1/8-inch. 5. Uniform spacing. Noticeable spacing between broom strokes is unacceptable. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 14 F. Concrete Installation Tolerances: 1. Class A: 1/8-inch vertical in 10 feet horizontal. 2. Class B: 1/4-inch vertical in 10 feet horizontal. 3.4 GROUTING A. Preparation: 1. Non-shrink, non-metallic grout: a. Clean concrete surfaces receiving grout. b. Saturate concrete with water for not less than 24 hours prior to grouting. B. Application: 1. Non-shrink, non-metallic grout: a. Mix using mechanical mixer. b. Provide quantity of water on as necessary to provide flowable grout. c. Place in accordance with grout manufacturer's written instructions. d. Completely fill spaces and cavities below baseplates. e. Provide forms for grouting, where baseplates and bedplates do not confine grout. f. Where exposed to view, finish grout edges smooth. g. Except where slope is shown or indicated on the Drawings, finish edges flush at baseplate, bedplate, structural element, or equipment item. h. Protect installed grout against rapid moisture loss by covering with wet rags or polyethylene sheets. i. Wet-cure grout for not less than seven days. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Testing Laboratory Retained by Owner: a. Owner will employ and pay for services of concrete testing laboratory to perform testing of concrete Work at the Site. b. Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with concrete testing laboratory relative to obtaining and testing samples. c. Strength Testing: 1) For each strength test, mold and cure cylinders from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. a) Cylinder size: in accordance with ASTM C31. (1) Four-inch diameter cylinders are unacceptable for concrete mixes with aggregate larger than 1.5-inch. b) Quantity: (1) Six-inch diameter by 12 inches high specimens: Four cylinders. (2) Four-inch diameter by eight inches high specimens: Six cylinders. 2) Field cure one cylinder for seven-day test. a) Laboratory cure remaining specimens. 3) Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39. a) Six-inch diameter specimens: (1) Test two cylinders at 28 days for strength test result and one field cured sample at seven days for informational purposes. (2) Hold remaining specimen in reserve until concrete has achieved required 28-day strength. b) Four-inch diameter specimens: (1) Test three cylinders at 28 days for strength test result and one field cured cylinder at seven days for informational purposes. (2) Hold remaining specimen in reserve until concrete has achieved required 28-day strength. 4) Strength test results: a) Average of strengths of two 6 inch diameter specimens or three 4 inch diameter specimens from same concrete sample tested at 28 days. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 15 b) When one specimen in a test evidences improper sampling, molding, handling, consolidation, curing, or testing, discard and test reserve specimen; average strength of remaining specimens will be reported strength test result. c) When all specimens in any test evidence defects indicated in the paragraph immediately above, discard all specimens. 5) Frequency of testing: a) All other concrete: (1) One strength test specimen will be obtained not less than once per day during which concrete is placed, and not less than once for each 60 cubic yards of concrete or fraction thereof placed in any one day during which concrete is placed. (2) Once for each 5,000 square feet of concrete slab or concrete wall surface area placed each day. (3) If total volume of concrete Work is such that required frequency of sampling and testing established in the two paragraphs, immediately above this paragraph, will result in less than five strength tests for each concrete mix, test not less than five randomly selected concrete batches, or test each batch when fewer than five batches are provided. d. Slump test: 1) In accordance with ASTM C143. 2) Slump test will be performed for each strength test specimen. 3) Additional slump tests may be performed. e. Air content: 1) In accordance with ASTM C231, ASTM C173, and ASTM C138. 2) Air content test will be performed for each strength test specimen. f. Temperature: Concrete temperature will be obtained for each strength test specimen. 2. Evaluation of Tests: a. Strength Test Results: 1) Average of 28-day strength of two cylinders from each sample. a) If one cylinder evidences improper sampling, molding, handling, consolidation, curing, or testing, results reported shall be for other, properly made test specimens obtained at the same time and location as the improper specimen. b) If both cylinders evidence defects, test will be discarded. 3. Acceptance of Concrete: a. Reported strength of each type of concrete will be acceptable when the following are satisfied: 1) Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equals or exceeds required 28-day compressive strength. 2) No individual strength test falls below required 28-day compressive strength by more than 500 psi. b. If tests do not indicate acceptable strength, perform additional tests, and implement remedial measures, as required by Engineer. 1) Perform additional testing and implement remedial measures, at no additional cost to Owner. Contractor is solely responsible for costs and time impacts arising from unacceptable concrete test results and defective Work. 3.6 SCHEDULES A. Grout: 1. Non-shrink, non-metallic grout: General use. B. Concrete: 1. Concrete fill: Where shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Lightweight concrete: Where shown or indicated on the Drawings. 3. Normal weight concrete: All other locations. 4. General use concrete: All other locations. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONCRETE 03 00 05 - 16 END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 1 SECTION 03 15 19 ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for anchorages in concrete, including: cast-in-place anchor bolts, anchor rods, reinforcing anchorage adhesive, and post-installed concrete anchors required for the Project but not specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Delegated design requirements for concrete anchors not expressly shown or indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, anchorages in concrete for the following structural and nonstructural components: a. Mechanical and electrical Work, including process-mechanical Work, site and infrastructure Work, electrical Work, communications Work, electronic safety and security systems Work, and others. b. Other components requiring anchorages to concrete. B. Related Requirements: Include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 35 73 - Delegated Design Procedures. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions and Terminology: 1. This provision presents definitions and terminology, which have the meanings indicated in this provision, applied to the singular or plural thereof, and without regard to use of initial capital letters. a. Adhesive Anchors: 1) Post-installed anchors developing their strength primarily from chemical bond between the concrete and the anchor. 2) Includes anchors using acrylics, epoxy and other similar adhesives. b. Anchor Bolt: Any cast-in-place anchorage that is made of a headed (i.e. bolt) material. c. Anchor Rod: Any cast-in-place or post-installed anchorage made from unheaded, threaded, rod or deformed bar material. d. Concrete Anchor: Generic term for either an anchor bolt or an anchor rod. e. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A123, ASTM A153 or ASTM F2329 with minimum coating of 2.0 ounces of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless noted otherwise or dictated by reference standard. f. Hardware: As defined in ASTM A153 or ASTM F2329. g. MPII: Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. h. Mechanical Anchors: 1) Post-installed anchors developing their strength from attachment other than thru adhesives or chemical bond to concrete. 2) Includes expansion anchors, expansion sleeve, screw anchors, undercut anchors, specialty inserts and other similar types of anchorages. 3) Drop-in anchors and other similar non-ICC ES approved anchors are unacceptable. i. Post-Installed Anchor: Adhesive or mechanical anchor installed into previously placed and adequately cured concrete. B. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 2. American Concrete Institute/Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (ACI-CRSI): a. Adhesive Anchor Installation Certification Program: Adhesive Anchor Installer. 3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 2 a. 355.2, Seismic Testing of Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors in Cracked Concrete. b. 355.4, Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. c. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. d. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. e. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. f. A496, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. g. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. h. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. i. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. j. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. k. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. l. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. m. F2329, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners 5. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES): a. AC193, Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. b. AC308, Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Comply with coordination requirements in Section 01 35 73 - Delegated Design Procedures. B. Pre-Design Conference: 1. Pre-design conference for anchorages to concrete (where such anchorages are delegated design Work) is not required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Code-required Special Instructions: a. Special Inspection is required in accordance with the building code for all concrete anchorages. b. Notify the Special Inspector that an inspection is required prior to concrete placement (or during post-installed anchorage installation). c. See the “Field Quality Control” Article in “Part 3 – Execution” of this Section for additional requirements. B. Qualifications: 1. Delegated Design Professional: a. Delegated design professional’s qualifications and responsibilities shall be in accordance with Section 01 35 73 - Delegated Design Procedures. 2. Installer: a. Installer for post-installed anchors shall be trained by the manufacturer or certified by a training program approved by the Engineer. b. Installer for adhesive anchors installed in horizontal, upward incline, or overhead applications shall be certified by ACI-CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installation Certification Program. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 3 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit schedule (table or listing) of types, sizes (diameter, length, embedment length), material, finish, and proposed manufacturers of anchorages to concrete to be provided. Apportion by Project-specific application (for example, “Anchorages for cooling water pumps in basement”) and indicate where anchorages are fully-designed by Engineer and those for which final design was prepared by delegated design professional. b. Engineer’s approval of such Shop Drawing will be only for anchorages fully designed by Engineer. For anchorages for which final design is by delegated design professional, include on such Shop Drawing delegated design professional’s approval stamp. 2. Product Data: Submit as Action Submittals product data for anchorages to concrete fully designed by Engineer. For anchorages to concrete for which final design is by delegated design professional, submit as Informational Submittals bearing approval stamp of delegated design professional. a. Manufacturer’s express, written acknowledgement that proposed items comply with referenced standards indicated in this Section and, as applicable, by delegated design professional. b. Manufacturer published data and information for each anchor. 1) Clearly indicate items that are proposed for the Work. Neatly strike out or obscure materials and products not proposed. c. Manufacturer's published installation instructions and instructions for code-required special inspections and tests. d. Post-Installed Anchors: In addition, submit for each post-installed anchor system current ICC-ES report , indicating the following: 1) Manufacturer’s certification that anchors comply with requirements indicated in the Contract Documents. 2) Performance data indicating that anchor is approved by its manufacturer for use in cracked concrete. 3) Seismic design categories for which anchor system is approved by ICC-ES report. e. Anchorage layout drawings and details: 1) Drawings showing location, configuration, spacing and edge distance. 3. Delegated Design Professional’s Instruments of Service Submittals: Submit, in accordance with this Section and Section 01 35 73 – Delegated Design Procedures, for each anchorage to concrete for which final design is by delegated design professional: a. Certification of compliance, in accordance with Section 01 35 73 – Delegated Design Procedures. Indicate design tension and shear loads used for anchor design. b. Delegated design professional’s drawings. c. Delegated design professional’s specifications, if any, when prepared by delegated design professional. d. Post-Installed Anchors (for which final design is by delegated design professional): Submittal shall also include the following for post-installed anchors for which final design was by delegated design professional: 1) Show diameter, embedment depth and edge distance of each anchor. 2) Indicate compliance with ACI 318 Chapter 17, ACI 350-06 Appendix D, ACI 350- 20 Appendix E, ACI 318, Appendix D. 3) Type of post-installed anchor system used. a) Provide manufacturer's ICC-ES report for the following: (1) Mechanical anchorage per ICC-ES AC193. (2) Adhesive anchorage per ICC-ES AC308. 4. Samples: a. Submit representative Samples of anchorages to concrete, when requested by Engineer. Engineer’s approval of Samples will be for type and finish only. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 4 1. Shop Drawings and Product Data Approved by Delegated Design Professional: a. Submit with delegated design professional’s approval stamp those Shop Drawings and product data Submittals indicated in this Article but for which final design was performed by delegated design professional. 2. Calculations by Delegated Design Professional: a. Submit sealed and signed calculations for sizing and determining embedment length of anchorages to concrete not fully designed by Engineer. b. Post-Installed Anchors Designed by Delegated Design Professional: In addition, also submit design calculations: 1) Indicate design load to each anchor. 2) When design load is not indicated on the Drawings, include calculations to develop anchor forces based on performance and design criteria indicated in this Section. 3. Supplier’s Instructions: a. Submit manufacturer’s published instructions for installation. 4. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit written results of required field quality control activities indicated in this Section. 5. Reports of Supplier’s Visits to Site: a. Submit each written report of visit to the Site by Supplier’s factory trained representative and delegated design professional. For each, indicate date and time of visit, purpose of visit, observations made, decisions made, problems encountered, and other pertinent information. 6. Qualifications Statements: a. Delegated design professional. b. Each installer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS – ALL ANCHORAGES A. Materials – General: 1. This Article applies to all anchorages to concrete, regardless of whether fully designed by Engineer or delegated design professional. Requirements for delegated designs are in the following Article. 2. Additional requirements for anchorages fully designed by Engineer are indicated in the Article following requirements for delegated design anchorages. 3. For structural applications, do not use powder actuated fasteners and other types of bolts or fasteners not specified in this Section unless approved by Engineer or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. B. Description: 1. Provide anchorages to concrete, of the types shown or indicated, to secure to concrete materials, equipment, and appurtenances installed as part of the Work. 2. Locations where anchorages are required are generally shown or indicated on the Drawings. Where not shown or indicated on the Drawings provide anchorages or the types required for materials, equipment, and systems where such materials, equipment, and systems are shown on the Drawings. 3. Anchorages required include those for materials, equipment, and systems shown on the structural Drawings and Drawing other than the structural Drawings. 4. Design loads for concrete anchorages are shown or indicated on the Drawings for anchorages where design responsibility is delegated to Contractor’s delegated design professional. For such anchorages, embedment depths are not shown or indicated. C. Cast-in-place Concrete Anchors: 1. Buildings, non-building structures, and equipment, unless otherwise specified: a. ASTM F1554, Grade 36 or Grade 55 with weldability supplement S1 for galvanized threaded rods. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 5 b. ASTM A307, Grade A for galvanized headed bolts. 2. All other cast-in-place concrete anchors: a. Stainless steel with matching nut and washer. b. Submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 316, minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi. c. Non-submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 304 or Type 316, minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi. D. Post-Installed Mechanical and Adhesive Concrete Anchors: 1. Submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 316, minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi with matching nut and washer. 2. Non-submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 304 or Type 316, minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi with matching nut and washer. 3. Post-installed anchors and related materials shall be listed by ICC-ES or Engineer-approved equivalent. E. Headed Studs: ASTM A108 with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi. F. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A496 with minimum yield strength of 70,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 80,000 psi. G. Washers: 1. ASTM F436 unless indicated otherwise, finish to match bolt. 2. When stainless steel anchorage is provided for cast-in-place anchorages, provide washers of the same material and alloy as in the associated anchorage. 3. Plate washers: Minimum 3/4 inch thick fabricated ASTM A36 square plates as required. 4. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for all post-installed anchorages. H. Nuts: 1. ASTM A563 for cast-in-place anchorages. 2. When stainless steel anchorages are provided for cast-in-place anchorages, nuts shall comply with ASTM F594 and shall match material and alloy of the associated anchorage. 3. Follow manufacturer’s requirements if using post-installed anchorage. I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: 1. High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds and abrasions. 2. ASTM A780. 3. Zinc content: Minimum 92 percent in dry film. 4. Products and Manufacturers: "ZRC Cold Galvanizing", by ZRC; or "High Performance Zinc Spray", by Clearco; or equal. 2.2 DELEGATED DESIGN ANCHORAGES TO CONCRETE A. Manufacturers: 1. Post-installed anchor systems for indicated manufacturers are acceptable only when a current ICC-ES evaluation report is furnished as a Submittal and the subject anchorage system is approved by delegated design professional. a. Hilti. b. Dewalt. c. Simpson Strong-Tie. d. Or equal. B. Description: Perform delegated design for anchorages when one or more of the following applies: 1. Design load for concrete anchorage is shown or indicated on the Drawings and anchorage embedment depth is not shown or indicated. 2. When specifically required by the Contract Documents. 3. When an anchorage is necessary but is not shown or indicated on the Drawings. 4. Anchorages shown on the Drawings other than the structural Drawings. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 6 C. Performance and Design Criteria for Delegated Design Anchorages: 1. Determine design loads, including wind and seismic loads, in accordance with applicable building code and other Laws and Regulations. 2. For anchorage of equipment and non-structural components, use actual dead load and operating loads obtained by Contractor or delegated design professional from manufacturer. Design loads shall include operating conditions when equipment or element of the Work is in operation, dynamic loads, and other loads as appropriate or required by the building code or other Laws or Regulations. 3. Design assuming cracked concrete. 2.3 ANCHORAGES FULLY DESIGNED BY ENGINEER A. When size, length, and details of anchorage are shown or indicated on the structural Drawings, such anchorages are considered as fully designed by Engineer and delegated design of such anchorage is not required. B. Manufacturers: 1. For post-installed anchor systems regardless of whether proposed manufacturer is indicated below, furnish as Submittal current evaluation agency report and anchor system is certified by ICC-ES for cracked concrete conditions. 2. Mechanical Anchors: a. Hilti: 1) Kwik Bolt TZ (ICC-ES ESR-1917). b. Dewalt: 1) Power-Stud+ SD1 (ICC-ES ESR-2818). c. Simpson Strong-Tie: 1) Strong-Bolt 2 (ICC-ES ESR-3037). d. Or equal. 3. Adhesive Anchors for Concrete: a. Hilti: 1) HIT RE 500 V3 (ICC ESR-3814). b. Dewalt: 1) PURE110+ (ICC-ES ESR-3298). c. Simpson Strong-Tie: 1) SET-3G (ICC ES 4057) d. Or equal. 4. Screw Anchors for Concrete: a. Hilti: 1) Kwik HUS-EZ Screw (ICC-ES ESR-3027). b. Dewalt: 1) Screw-Bolt+ (ICC-ES ESR-3889). c. Simpson Strong-Tie: 1) Titen HD (ICC-ES ESR-2713). d. Or equal. 5. Requests, if any, for Engineer’s approval of “or-equals” or substitutes shall indicate proposed anchor has at least the same tension and shear strength as the associated anchorage products indicated by name in this Article. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. For cast-in-place concrete anchorages, allow adequate time for proper installation, inspection, and observation prior to placing concrete. B. Prior to installation, inspect and verify areas and conditions under which concrete anchorages will be installed. 1. Notify Engineer of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 7 2. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are properly remedied. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation Requirements - General: 1. Install items in accordance with the Contract Documents, manufacturer’s written instructions, and Laws and Regulations. Where such requirements conflict, obtain interpretation or clarification from Engineer prior to commencing the associated Work. 2. Perform the following unless shown or indicated otherwise: a. Provide stainless steel anchorages for connecting aluminum and steel members to concrete and masonry. Provide dissimilar materials protection.. b. Provide washers for all anchorages. c. Where exposed, extend threaded anchorage a minimum of 0.5 inch above top of fully- engaged nut. If anchorage is cut off to required maximum height, dress the threads to allow nuts to be removed without damage to nuts. 3. Tightening of nuts: Do the following after nuts are snug-tightened down: a. Provide double nut or lock nut in lieu of upset threads for items that may require future removal. b. For cast-in-place anchorages (excluding post-installed anchorages), tighten nuts an additional 1/8 turn beyond snug tight to prevent nuts from backing off. c. When two nuts are used per concrete anchor above the base plate, tighten top nut an additional 1/8 turn to "lock" the two nuts together. d. For post-installed anchorages, comply with MPII. 4. Secure architectural components to avoid aesthetic distortion and to avoid overstressing fasteners from expansion, contraction, or installation. B. Cast-in-Place Anchorages: 1. Provide where anchor rods or anchor bolts are indicated on the Drawings, unless another anchor type is approved by Engineer. 2. Provide concrete anchorages as shown on the Drawings or as required to secure the Work to concrete. 3. Tie cast-in-place anchorage in position to embedded reinforcing steel using wire. 4. Tack welding of anchorage is prohibited. 5. Chase threads as required and coat projected portion of carbon steel anchors and nut threads with a heavy coat of clean grease after concrete has cured. 6. Anchorage location Tolerance: in accordance with AISC 303. 7. Provide steel or durable wood templates for all column and equipment anchorages. Place templates above top of concrete; do not impede proper concrete placement and consolidation. C. Mechanical Anchorages: 1. Use only where specifically indicated on the Drawings or when approved for use by the Engineer. 2. Do not use where subjected to vibration. 3. May be used in overhead applications. 4. Contact Engineer for clarification when anchors will not be installed in compliance with manufacturer's printed installation requirements. D. Post-installed Anchorages: 1. For post-installed anchors, comply with MPII regarding hole diameter and depth required to fully develop the tensile strength of anchor or reinforcing bar. 2. Use hammer drills to create holes. 3. Properly clean out holes in accordance with the associated ICC-ES report using non- metallic, fiber bristle brush and compressed air, or as otherwise necessary to remove all loose material from each hole prior to installing anchor in the presence of Special Inspector. 4. Adhesive Anchorages: a. Provide only where specifically indicated on the Drawings or when approved for use by Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 8 b. May be provided where subjected to vibration or at buried or submerged locations. c. Do not install for overhead applications or sustained tension loading conditions such as utility hangers. d. Install adhesive anchors in concrete aged not less than 21 days. E. Finishes: 1. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. 2. Repair of damaged galvanized surfaces: a. Prepare damaged surfaces by abrasive blasting or power sanding. b. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780. c. Apply galvanizing repair paint to not less than 6 mils dry film thickness in accordance with galvanizing repair material manufacturer's instructions and ASTM A780. F. Ensure that embedded items are protected from damage and are not filled in with concrete or related materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Tests and inspections of anchorages shall comply with ACI 355.2 and/or ACI 355.4 as applicable. 2. Owner reserves the right to inspect and test completed anchorages at a minimum of 10 to 100percent of provided anchorages. B. Supplier’s services: 1. Post-installed anchor manufacturer’s representative shall demonstrate and observe the proper installation procedures for the post-installed anchors. C. Defective Work: 1. Anchorages that do not successfully pass required field tests and inspections or that are otherwise deemed defective by Engineer shall be remedied, in accordance with the Contract Documents, at no cost to Owner. 3.4 CLEANING A. After concrete has been placed, remove protection and clean all anchorage of all concrete, dirt, and other foreign matter. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 1 SECTION 10 14 00 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Tag, tape and stenciling systems for equipment, piping, valves, pumps, ductwork and similar items. 2. Hazard and safety signs. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. The International Society of Automation (ISA). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMA/ANSI): a. Z535.1, Safety Color Code. b. Z535.2, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs. c. Z535.3, Criteria for Safety Symbols. d. Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 704, Standard System for the Identification of Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910.145, Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Catalog information for all identification systems. b. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2. Identification register, listing all items in PART 3 of this Specification Section to be identified, type of identification system to be used, lettering, location and color. 3. Schedule of Hazard and Safety Signage indicating text and graphics. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. W.H. Brady Co. 2. Panduit. 3. Seton. 4. National Band and Tag Co. 5. Carlton Industries, Inc. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Type A1 - Round Metal Tags: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 2 1. Materials: a. Aluminum or stainless steel. b. Stainless steel shall be used in corrosive environments. 2. Size: a. Diameter: 1-1/2 inches minimum. b. Thickness: 0.035 inches (20 GA) minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 inches minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Stamped and filled with black coloring. 4. Color: Natural. B. Type A2 - Rectangle Metal Tags: 1. Materials: Stainless steel. 2. Size: a. 3-1/2 inches x 1-1/2 inches minimum. b. Thickness: 0.036 inches (20 GA) minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 inches minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Stamped and filled with black coloring. 4. Color: Natural. C. Type A3 - Metal Tape Tags: 1. Materials: Aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Size: a. Width 1/2 inches minimum. b. Length as required by text. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 inches minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Embossed. 4. Color: Natural. D. Type B1- Square Nonmetallic Tags: 1. Materials: Fiberglass reinforced plastic. 2. Size: a. Surface: 2 x 2 inches minimum. b. Thickness: 100 mils. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 inches mounting hole with metal eyelet. b. Legend: Preprinted and permanently embedded and fade resistant. 4. Color: a. Background: Manufacturer standard or as specified. b. Lettering: Black. E. Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs: 1. Materials: Fiberglass reinforced or durable plastic. 2. Size: a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 60 mils minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. Rounded corners. b. Drilled holes in corners with grommets. c. Legend: Preprinted, permanently embedded and fade resistant for a 10 year minimum outdoor durability. 4. Color: a. Background: Manufacturer standard or as specified. b. Lettering: Black. 5. Standards for OSHA signs: NEMA/ANSI Z535.1, NEMA/ANSI Z535.2, NEMA/ANSI Z535.3, NEMA/ANSI Z535.4, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 3 F. Type C - Laminated Name Plates: 1. Materials: Phenolic or DR (high impact) acrylic. 2. Size: a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 1/16 inches. 3. Fabrication: a. Outdoor rated and UV resistant when installed outdoors. b. Two layers laminated. c. Legend: Engraved through top lamination into bottom lamination. d. Two drilled side holes, for screw mounting. 4. Color: Black top surface, white core, unless otherwise indicated. G. Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs: 1. Materials: Vinyl tape or vinyl cloth. 2. Size: a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 5 mils minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. Indoor/Outdoor grade. b. Weather and UV resistant inks. c. Permanent adhesive. d. Legend: Preprinted. e. Wire markers to be self-laminating. 4. Color: White with black lettering or as specified. 5. Standards for OSHA signs: NEMA/ANSI Z535.1, NEMA/ANSI Z535.2, NEMA/ANSI Z535.3, NEMA/ANSI Z535.4, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145. H. Type E - Heat Shrinkable Tape Tags: 1. Materials: Polyolefin. 2. Size: As required by text. 3. Fabrication: a. Legend: Preprinted. 4. Color: White background, black printing. I. Type F - Underground Warning Tape: 1. Materials: Polyethylene. 2. Size: a. 6 inches wide (minimum). b. Thickness: 3.5 mils. 3. Fabrication: a. Legend: Preprinted and permanently imbedded. b. Message continuous printed. c. Tensile strength: 1750 psi. 4. Color: As specified. J. Type G - Stenciling System: 1. Materials: a. Exterior type stenciling enamel. b. Either brushing grade or pressurized spray can form and grade. 2. Size: As required. 3. Fabrication: a. Legend: As required. 4. Color: Black or white for best contrast. K. Underground Tracer Wire: 1. Materials: a. Wire: 1) 12 GA AWG. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 4 2) Solid. b. Wire nuts: Waterproof type. c. Split bolts: Brass. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Bead chain: #6 brass, aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Plastic strap: Nylon, urethane or polypropylene. 3. Screws: Self-tapping, stainless steel. 4. Adhesive, solvent activated. 2.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion and include in extra stock, along with required stock of paints and applicators. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Install identification devices at specified locations. B. All identification devices to be printed by mechanical process, hand printing is not acceptable. C. Attach tags to equipment with sufficient surface or body area with solvent activated adhesive applied to back of each tag. D. Attach tags with 1/8 inches round or flat head screws to equipment without sufficient surface or body area, or porous surfaces. 1. Where attachment with screws should not or cannot penetrate substrate, attach with plastic strap. E. Single items of equipment enclosed in a housing or compartment to be tagged on outside of housing. 1. Several items of equipment mounted in housing to be individually tagged inside the compartment. F. Tracer Wire: 1. Attach to pipe at a maximum of 10 feet intervals with tape or tie-wraps. 2. Continuous pass from each valve box and above grade at each structure. 3. Coil enough wire at each valve box to extend wire a foot above the ground surface. 4. 1,000 feet maximum spacing between valve boxes. 5. If split bolts are used for splicing, wrap with electrical tape. 6. If wire nuts are used for splicing, knot wire at each splice point leaving 6 inches of wire for splicing. 7. Use continuous strand of wire between valve box where possible. a. Continuous length shall be no shorter than 100 feet. 3.2 SCHEDULES A. Hazard and Safety Signage: 1. Permit Required Confined Space signage: a. Tag Type: Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. b. Fastener: Screw or adhesive. c. Size: 10 inches x 14 inches. d. Location: As indicated on Drawings. e. Location: Field located as directed by Owner. 1) Allowance: Provide 10 signs. f. Legend: 1) OSHA Danger sign. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 5 2) Description of hazard: “PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE DO NOT ENTER”. 2. Miscellaneous OSHA hazard signage: a. Tag Type: Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. b. Fastener: Screw or adhesive. c. Size: 10 inches x 14 inches. d. Location: As indicated on Drawings. e. Location: Field located as directed by Owner. 1) Allowance: Provide 10 OSHA Danger, Caution, Safety Instruction or Biohazard signs as directed by Owner. f. Legend: 1) Description of hazard shall be determined by Owner. 2) Provide international graphic symbology where indicated. 3. No Smoking Signage: a. Tag Type: Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. b. Fastener: Screw or adhesive. c. Size: 10 inches x 14 inches. d. Location: On the doors entering into the rooms with flammable gas or other material requiring No Smoking signage, as indicated on the Drawings. e. Location: Field located as directed by Owner. 1) Allowance: Provide 5 “NO SMOKING” signs. f. Legend: “NO SMOKING” with international graphic symbology, adhering to the International Fire Code. 4. Hazardous Material Identification Signage: a. Tag Type: Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. b. Fastener: Screw or adhesive. c. Size (NFPA Diamond): Per NFPA 704, 10” minimum. d. Size (Hazardous Material name, with concentration % where applicable): 2 inches minimum letters, directly below corresponding NFPA Diamond. e. Location: On the doors entering into the rooms with Hazardous Material and on the tanks or storage containers of Hazardous Materials, as indicated on the Drawings. f. Location: Field located as directed by Owner. 1) Allowance: Provide 4 NFPA 704 Diamond signs. 2) Allowance: Provide 4 for Hazardous Material Name. g. Legend: 1) NFPA 704 Diamond hazard numbers: As directed by Owner appropriate for the Hazardous Material. 2) Hazardous Material name: As directed by Owner. B. Instrumentation Systems: 1. Instrumentation Equipment (e.g., flow control valves, primary elements, etc.): a. Tag type: 1) Outdoor locations: Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. 2) Indoor noncorrosive: a) Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. 3) Indoor corrosive: a) Stainless steel Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. b. Fastener: 1) Type A1: Chain of the same material. 2) Type B1: Stainless steel chain. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 inches minimum. 2) Equipment ISA designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “FIT-xxx”). 2. Enclosure for instrumentation and control equipment, (e.g., PLC control panels, etc.): Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 6 a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/2 inches minimum. 2) Equipment name (e.g., "PLC CONTROL PANEL PCP-xxx"). 3. Components inside equipment enclosure, (e.g., PLC’s, control relays, contactors, and timers): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 3/16 inches minimum. 2) Description or function of component (e.g., "PLC-xxx” or “CR-xxx"). 4. Through enclosure door mounted components (e.g., selector switches, controller digital displays, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 inches minimum. 2) Component ISA tag number as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “HS-xxx”). C. Electrical Systems: 1. Trenches with ductbanks, direct-buried conduit, or direct-buried wire and cable. a. Tag type: Type F - Underground Warning Tape. b. Letter height: 1-1/4 inches minimum. c. Location: 1) Where trench is 12 inches or more below finished grade: In trench 6 inches below finished grade. 2) Where trench is less than 12 inches below finished grade: In trench 3 inches below finished grade. d. Electrical power (e.g., low and medium voltage): 1) Color: Red with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION”. b) Second line: “BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”. e. Communications (e.g., telephone, instrumentation, LAN, SCADA): 1) Color: Orange with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION”. b) Second line: “BURIED COMMUNICATION LINE BELOW”. 2. Exterior pad mounted equipment (e.g., transformers, switchgear): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. General legend: 1) Letter height: a) First line: 1-1/2 inches minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 1/2 inches minimum. 2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "TRANSFORMER Txxx"). 3) Second line: System voltage (e.g., "13,800 V: 480/277 V"). 4) Third line: Date installed (e.g., “INSTALLED JULY 20xx”). d. Each section/cubical legend: 1) Letter height: 1-1/2 inches minimum. 2) Description of source or load (e.g., "MAIN DISCONNECT" or "TO SWITCHGEAR SGxxx" or "TO TRANSFORMER Txxx"). 3. Switchgear, switchboards and motor control centers: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 7 c. Main equipment legend: 1) Letter height: a) First line: 1 inch minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 3/8 inches minimum. 2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "MAIN SWITCHBOARD MSBxxx"). 3) Second line: a) Source of power (e.g., "FED FROM MCCxxx LOCATED IN ROOM xxx"). b) Include the building name or number if the source is in another building. 4) Third line: System voltage and phase (e.g., “480/277 V, 3PH”). 5) Fourth line: Date installed (e.g., “INSTALLED JULY 20xx”). d. Main and feeder device legend: 1) Letter height: 3/8 inches minimum. 2) Description of load (e.g., “MAIN DISCONNECT”, "PUMP Pxxx" or "PANELBOARD HPxxx"). 4. Panelboards and transformers: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: a) First line: 3/8 inches minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 3/16 inches minimum. 2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "PANELBOARD LPxxx" or "TRANSFORMER Txxx"). 3) Second line (panelboards only): System voltage and phase (e.g., “208/120V, 3PH”). 4) Third line: a) Source of power (e.g., "FED FROM MCCxxx LOCATED IN ROOM xxx"). b) Include the building name or number if the source is in another building. 5) Fourth line: Date installed (e.g., “INSTALLED JULY 20xx”). 5. Safety switches, separately mounted circuit breakers and motor starters, VFD’s, etc.: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 inches minimum. 2) First line: Description of load equipment is connected to (e.g., "PUMP Pxxx"). 3) Second line: a) Source of power (e.g., "FED FROM MCCxxx LOCATED IN ROOM xxx"). b) The source of power room number is only required when there are multiple electrical rooms, if the source is in another building, the building name or number shall be used. 6. Enclosure for instrumentation and control equipment, (e.g., lighting control panels, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/2 inches minimum. 2) Equipment name (e.g., "LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL LCPxxx"). 7. Components inside equipment enclosures (e.g., circuit breakers, fuses, control power transformers, control relays, contactors, timers, etc.): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 3/16 inches minimum. 2) Description or function of component (e.g., "M-xxx”, “CR-xxx” or “TR-xxx"). 8. Through enclosure door mounted equipment (e.g., selector switches, controller digital displays, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 8 b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 inches minimum. 2) Component tag number as indicated on the Drawings or as defined by contractor (e.g., “HS-xxx”). 9. Conductors in control panels and in pull or junction boxes where multiple circuits exist. a. Tag type: Type E - Heat Shrinkable Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. Tag conductor at both ends. d. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/8 inches minimum. 2) Circuit number or wire number as scheduled on the Drawings or as furnished with the equipment. 10. Conductors in handholes and manholes. a. Tag type: Type A3 - Metal Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Nylon strap. c. Tag conductor at both ends. d. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/8 inches minimum. 2) Circuit number or wire number as scheduled on the Drawings. 11. Grounding conductors associated with grounding electrode system in accordance with the following: a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/8 inches minimum. 2) Function of conductor (e.g., "MAIN BONDING JUMPER", "TO GROUND RING", "TO MAIN WATER PIPE"). 12. Flash protection for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels and motor control centers: a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: Per NFPA 70. 13. Entrances to electrical rooms: a. Tag type: Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. b. Fastener: Screw or adhesive. c. Size: 5 inches x 7 inches. d. Location: Each door to room. e. Legend: 1) OSHA Danger Sign. 2) Description of Danger: “HIGH VOLTAGE, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY”. 14. Equipment where more than one voltage source is present: a. Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. 2) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Signs. b. Fastener: 1) Screw or adhesive. 2) Self. c. Size: 1-3/4 inches x 2-1/2 inches. d. Location: Exterior face of enclosure or cubical. e. Legend: 1) OSHA Danger Sign. 2) Description of Danger: “MULTIPLE VOLTAGE SOURCES”. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1 SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Basic requirements for electrical systems. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. For the purposes of providing materials and installing electrical work the following definitions shall be used. a. Outdoor area: Exterior locations where the equipment is normally exposed to the weather and including below grade structures, such as vaults, manholes, handholes and in-ground pump stations. b. Architecturally finished interior area: Offices, laboratories, conference rooms, restrooms, corridors and other similar occupied spaces. c. Non-architecturally finished interior area: Pump, chemical, mechanical, electrical rooms and other similar process type rooms. d. Highly corrosive and corrosive area: Areas identified on the Drawings where there is a varying degree of spillage or splashing of corrosive materials such as water, wastewater or chemical solutions; or chronic exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic agents, chemicals, chemical fumes or chemical mixtures. e. Hazardous areas: Class I, II or III areas as defined in NFPA 70. f. Shop fabricated: Manufactured or assembled equipment for which a UL test procedure has not been established. B. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. ADM, Aluminum Design Manual. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. Steel Construction Manual. 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. c. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C2, National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). C. Products to be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in accordance with applicable product standards. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 2 1. Applicable product standards including, but not limited to, ANSI, FM, IEEE, NEMA and UL. 2. NRTL includes, but is not limited to, CSA Group Testing and Certification (CS), FM Approvals LLC (FM), Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc. (ETL), and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 and individual specification sections for submittal requirements for products defined as equipment. 2. General requirements: a. Provide manufacturer's technical information on products to be used, including product descriptive bulletin. b. Include data sheets that include manufacturer's name and product model number. 1) Clearly identify all optional accessories. c. Acknowledgement that products are NRTL listed or are constructed utilizing NRTL recognized components. d. Manufacturer's delivery, storage, handling and installation instructions. e. Product installation details. f. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) nameplate marking per NFPA 70, include any required calculations. g. See individual specification sections for any additional requirements. 3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Concrete and reinforcing steel, per Division 03 requirements. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for: a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process. b. The content process of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. When a Specification Section includes products specified in another Specification Section, each Specification Section shall have the required Shop Drawing transmittal form per Specification Section 01 33 00 and all Specification Sections shall be submitted simultaneously. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect nameplates on electrical equipment to prevent defacing. 1.5 AREA DESIGNATIONS A. Designation of an area will determine the NEMA rating of the electrical equipment enclosures, types of conduits and installation methods to be used in that area. 1. Outdoor areas: a. Wet. b. Also, corrosive and/or hazardous when specifically designated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. 2. Indoor areas: a. Dry. b. Also, wet, corrosive and/or hazardous when specifically designated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, refer to specific Electrical Specification Sections and specific material paragraphs below for acceptable manufacturers. B. Provide all components of a similar type by one (1) manufacturer. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 3 2.2 MATERIALS A. Electrical Equipment Support Pedestals and/or Racks: 1. Manufacturers: a. Modular strut: 1) Unistrut Building Systems. 2) B-Line by Eaton. 3) Globe Strut. 4) Superstrut by Thomas & Betts. 2. Material requirements: a. Modular strut: 1) Galvanized steel: ASTM A123/123M or ASTM A153/A153M. 2) Stainless steel: AISI Type 316. 3) PVC coated galvanized steel: ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M and 20 mil PVC coating. 4) Aluminum: AA Type 6063-T6. b. Structural members (e.g., I beams, L and C channels): 1) Galvanized steel: ASTM A36/A36M steel with galvanizing per ASTM A123/A123M. 2) Aluminum: AA Type 6061-T6 or 6063-T6. c. Mounting plates: 1) Galvanized steel: ASTM A36/A36M steel with galvanizing per ASTM A123/A123M. 2) Aluminum: AA Type 6063-T6. d. Mounting hardware: 1) Galvanized steel. 2) Stainless steel. e. Anchorage per Specification Section 03 15 19. f. Concrete and reinforcing steel: See Division 03 specifications. B. Equipment pads (interior and exterior): 1. Concrete and reinforcing steel: See Division 03 specifications. C. Field touch-up of galvanized surfaces. 1. Zinc-rich primer. a. One coat, 3.0 mils, ZRC by ZRC Products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install and wire all equipment, including pre-purchased equipment, and perform all tests necessary to assure conformance to the Drawings and Specification Sections and ensure that equipment is ready and safe for energization. B. Install equipment in accordance with the requirements of: 1. NFPA 70. 2. IEEE C2. 3. The manufacturer's instructions. C. In general, conduit routing is not shown on the Drawings. 1. The Contractor is responsible for routing all conduits including those shown on one-line and control block diagrams and home runs shown on floor plans. 2. Conduit routings and stub-up locations that are shown are approximate; exact routing to be as required for equipment furnished and field conditions. D. When complete branch circuiting is not shown on the Drawings: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 4 1. A homerun indicating panelboard name and circuit number will be shown and the circuit number will be shown adjacent to the additional devices (e.g., light fixture and receptacles) on the same circuit. 2. The Contractor is to furnish and install all conduit and conductors required for proper operation of the circuit. 3. The indicated home run conduit and conductor size shall be used for the entire branch circuit. 4. See Section 26 05 19 for combining multiple branch circuits in a common conduit. E. Do not use equipment that exceed dimensions or reduce clearances indicated on the Drawings or as required by the NFPA 70. F. Install equipment plumb, square and true with construction features and securely fastened. G. Install electrical equipment, including pull and junction boxes, minimum of 6 inches from process, gas, air and water piping and equipment. H. Install equipment so it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance, is not blocked or concealed and does not interfere with normal operation and maintenance requirements of other equipment. I. Device Mounting Schedule: 1. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, mounting heights are as indicated below: a. Light switch (to center): 46 inches. b. Receptacle in architecturally finished areas (to center): 18 inches. c. Receptacle on exterior wall of building (to center): 18 inches. d. Receptacle in non-architecturally finished areas (to center): 46 inches. e. Telephone outlet in architecturally finished areas (to center): 18 inches. f. Telephone outlet for wall-mounted phone (to center): 46 inches. g. Safety switch (to center of operating handle): 54 inches. h. Separately mounted motor starter (to center of operating handle): 54 inches. i. Pushbutton or selector switch control station (to center): 46 inches. j. Panelboard (to top): 72 inches. J. Avoid interference of electrical equipment operation and maintenance with structural members, building features and equipment of other trades. 1. When it is necessary to adjust the intended location of electrical equipment, unless specifically dimensioned or detailed, the Contractor may make adjustments of up to 6 inches in equipment location with the Engineer's approval. K. Provide electrical equipment support system per the following area designations: 1. Dry areas: a. Galvanized system consisting of galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware. b. Field touch-up cut ends and scratches of galvanized components with the specified primer during the installation, before rust appears. 2. Wet areas: a. Galvanized system consisting of galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware. b. Field touch-up cut ends and scratches of galvanized components with the specified primer during the installation, before rust appears. 3. Corrosive areas: a. Aluminum system consisting of aluminum channels and fittings with stainless steel nuts and hardware. 4. Highly corrosive areas: a. PVC coated steel system consisting of PVC coated steel channels and fittings with stainless steel nuts and hardware. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 5 L. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports rated for the equipment load based on dimensions and weights verified from approved submittals, or as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members. 2. Do not mount safety switches or other equipment to equipment enclosures, unless enclosure mounting surface is properly braced to accept mounting of external equipment. M. Provide non-metallic corrosion resistant spacers to maintain 1/4 inches separation between metallic equipment and/or metallic equipment supports and mounting surface in wet areas, on below grade walls and on walls of liquid containment or processing areas such as Basins, Clarifiers, Digesters, Reservoirs, etc. N. Do not place equipment fabricated from aluminum in direct contact with earth or concrete. O. Screen or seal all openings into equipment mounted outdoors to prevent the entrance of rodents and insects. P. Do not use materials that may cause the walls or roof of a building to discolor or rust. Q. Identify electrical equipment and components in accordance with Bozeman WRF standards. R. Provide field markings and/or documentation of available short-circuit current (available fault current) and related information for equipment as required by the NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. S. Provide equipment or control panels with Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) labeling as required by NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. 1. Determine the SCCR rating by one of the following methods: a. Method 1: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the available fault current of the source equipment when indicated on the Drawings. b. Method 2: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the source equipment’s Amp Interrupting Current (AIC) rating as indicated on the Drawings. c. Method 3: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the calculated available short circuit current at the control panel. 2. The source equipment is the switchboard, panelboard, motor control center or similar equipment where the equipment or control panel circuit originates. 3. For Method 3, provide calculations justifying the SCCR rating. Utilize source equipment available fault current or AIC rating as indicated on the Drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify exact rough-in location and dimensions for connection to electrified equipment, provided by others. 1. See Specifications for openings and penetrations in structures. B. Replace equipment and systems found inoperative or defective and re-test. C. Cleaning: 1. Keep the worksite clean and free from debris. D. The protective coating integrity of support structures and equipment enclosures shall be maintained. 1. Repair galvanized components utilizing a zinc rich paint. 2. Repair painted components utilizing touch up paint provided by or approved by the manufacturer. 3. Repair PVC coated components utilizing a patching compound, of the same material as the coating, provided by the manufacturer of the component. 4. Repair surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation. 5. See Specification Section 26 05 33 for requirements for conduits and associated accessories. E. Replace nameplates damaged during installation. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 6 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Specification Section 01 75 00. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Building wire. b. Power cable. c. Control cable. d. Instrumentation cable. e. Fiber optic cable. f. Wire connectors. g. Insulating tape. h. Pulling lubricant. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. C. Owner Provided Material: 1. Bozeman WRF has pre-purchased 6000 FT of XHHW-2, 500 MCM, Copper, on 500 FT spools (Total of 12 spools) to support feeder P1. Contractor shall perform insulation testing and acceptance testing on the pre-purchased cable. Contractor assumes liability for the pre- purchased material as if the material was purchased by the Contractor. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner to obtain a copy of the invoice and shall order like cable to complete the project needs. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): a. S-58-679, Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 4, Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/Insulated Cable Engineers Association (NEMA/ICEA): a. WC 57/S-73-532, Standard for Control Cables. b. WC 70/S-95-658, Non-Shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. 5. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance (TIA/EIA): a. 598-C, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding. 6. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance/American National Standards Institute (TIA/EIA/ANSI): a. 568, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 44, Standard for Safety Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables. b. 83, Standard for Safety Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. c. 467, Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2 d. 486A, Standard for Safety Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for use with Copper Conductors. e. 486C, Standard for Safety Splicing Wire Connections. f. 510, Standard for Safety Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape. g. 1277, Standard for Safety Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members. h. 1581, Standard for Safety Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. i. 2250, Standard for Safety Instrumentation Tray Cable. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing either building wire or instrumentation wire. B. Instrumentation Cable: 1. Multiple conductor, insulated, twisted or untwisted, with outer sheath. 2. The following are specific types of instrumentation cables: a. Analog signal cable: 1) Used for the transmission of low current (e.g., 4-20mA DC) or low voltage (e.g., 0- 10 VDC) signals, using No. 16 AWG and smaller conductors. 2) Commonly used types are defined in the following: a) TSP: Twisted shielded pair. b) TST: Twisted shielded triad. b. Digital signal cable: Used for the transmission of digital signals between computers, PLC's, RTU's, etc. C. Power Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing building wire, No. 8 AWG and larger. D. Control Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing building wires, No. 14, No. 12 or No. 10 AWG. E. Building Wire: Single conductor, insulated, with or without outer jacket depending upon type. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section except: 1) Wire connectors. 2) Insulating tape. 3) Cable lubricant. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. See Section 26 05 00. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Building wire, power and control cable and multiplex cable: a. Aetna Insulated Wire. b. Alphawire. c. Cerrowire. d. Encore Wire Corporation. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3 e. General Cable. f. Okonite Company. g. Southwire Company. 2. Instrumentation cable: a. Analog cable: 1) Alphawire. 2) Belden Inc. 3) General Cable. 3. Wire connectors: a. Burndy Corporation. b. Buchanan. c. Ideal. d. Ilsco. e. 3M Co. f. Teledyne Penn Union. g. Thomas and Betts. h. Phoenix Contact. 4. Insulating and color coding tape: a. 3M Co. b. Plymouth Bishop Tapes. c. Red Seal Electric Co. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Building Wire: 1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation. 2. Conductors shall be stranded, except for conductors used in lighting and receptacle circuits which may be stranded or solid. 3. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label. 4. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 83 for type THHN/THWN and THHN/THWN-2 insulation. 5. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 44 for type XHHW-2 insulation. B. Power Cable: 1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation. 2. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label. 3. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 83 and UL 1277 for type THHN/THWN insulation with an overall PVC jacket. 4. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 44 and UL 1277 for type XHHW-2 insulation with an overall PVC jacket. 5. Number of conductors as required, including a bare ground conductor. 6. Individual conductor color coding: a. ICEA S-58-679, Method 4. b. See PART 3 of this Specification Section for additional requirements. C. Control Cable: 1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation. 2. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label. 3. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 57/S-73-532 and UL 83 and UL 1277 for type THHN/THWN insulation with an overall PVC jacket. 4. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 57/S-73-532 and UL 44 and UL 1277 for type XHHW-2 insulation with an overall PVC jacket. 5. Number of conductors as required, provided with or without bare ground conductor of the same AWG size. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4 a. When a bare ground conductor is not provided, an additional insulated conductor shall be provided and used as the ground conductor (e.g., 6/c No. 14 w/g and 7/c No. 14 are equal). 6. Individual conductor color coding: a. ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table E-2. b. See PART 3 of this Specification Section for additional requirements. 7. Conform to NFPA 70 Type TC and IEEE 1202, CSA FT-4 or NFPA 262. D. Electrical Equipment Control Wire: 1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation. 2. Conductors shall be stranded. 3. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label. 4. Conform to UL 44 for Type SIS insulation. 5. Conform to UL 83 for Type MTW insulation. E. Instrumentation Cable: 1. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label. 2. Analog cable: a. Tinned copper conductors. b. 300 V or 600 V PVC insulation with PVC jacket. c. Twisted with 100% foil shield coverage with drain wire. d. Six (6) twists per foot minimum. e. Individual conductor color coding: ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table E-2. f. Conform to IEEE 1202 or CSA FT-4 or NFPA 262, UL 2250, UL 1581 and NFPA 70 Type ITC. 3. Digital cable: a. As recommended by equipment (e.g., PLC, RTU) manufacturer. b. Horizontal voice and data cable: 1) Category 6 per TIA/EIA/ANSI 568. 2) Cable shall be label-verified. 3) Cable jacket shall be factory marked at regular intervals indicating verifying organization and performance level. 4) Conductors: No. 24 AWG solid untinned copper. 5) Rated CMP per NFPA 70. c. Conform to IEEE 1202 or CSA FT-4 or NFPA 262 and NFPA 70 Type ITC. d. Foundation Fieldbus and DeviceNet cables shall each have a color coded jacket (e.g., yellow and orange) that is different from all other cables. e. Structured wiring system for Foundation Fieldbus, Profibus or DeviceNet: 1) Cables meeting the above requirements with factory installed connectors. f. Supplied by Owner. F. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Design and fabrication - Multi-mode: a. Type: 1) Indoor: Tight buffered or loose tube with a dry gel water blocking system. 2) Outdoor: Loose tube with a wet or dry gel water blocking system. b. Number of fibers: As indicated on the Drawings. c. Fiber size: 62.5/125 micrometer (core diameter/cladding diameter). d. Glass fiber core. e. Step index. f. Maximum attenuation: 1) At 850 nm: 3.75 dB/km. 2) At 1300 nm: 1.5dB/km. g. Minimum bandwidth: 1) At 850 nm: 160 MHz/km. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 5 2) At 1300 nm: 500 MHz/km. h. Maximum tensile load: 1) Installation: 225 pounds. 2) Long term: 67 pounds. i. Cable jacket material: 1) In conduit: PVC, or polyethylene. j. Cables shall be listed and marked in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70. k. Optical fiber cable type utilized shall be in accordance with NFPA 70. l. Utilize LC type connectors: 1) Tip material: Ceramic or ceramic/glass composite. 2) Utilize connectors which do not require adhesive, epoxy, or polish. G. Wire Connectors: 1. Twist/screw on type: a. Insulated pressure or spring type solderless connector. b. 600 V rated. c. Ground conductors: Conform to UL 486C and/or UL 467 when required by local codes. d. Phase and neutral conductors: Conform to UL 486C. 2. Compression and mechanical screw type: a. 600 V rated. b. Ground conductors: Conform to UL 467. c. Phase and neutral conductors: Conform to UL 486A. 3. Terminal block type: a. High density, screw-post barrier-type with white center marker strip. b. 600 V and ampere rating as required, for power circuits. c. 600 V, 20 ampere rated for control circuits. d. 300 V, 15 ampere rated for instrumentation circuits. e. Conform to NEMA ICS 4 and UL 486A. H. Insulating and Color Coding Tape: 1. Pressure sensitive vinyl. 2. Premium grade. 3. Heat, cold, moisture, and sunlight resistant. 4. Thickness, depending on use conditions: 7, 8.5, or 10 mil. 5. For cold weather or outdoor location, tape must also be all-weather. 6. Color: a. Insulating tape: Black. b. Color coding tape: Fade-resistant color as specified herein. 7. Comply with UL 510. I. Pulling Lubricant: Cable manufacturer's standard containing no petroleum or other products which will deteriorate insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Permitted Usage of Insulation Types: 1. Type XHHW-2: a. Building wire and power and control cable in architectural and non-architectural finished areas. b. Building wire and power and control cable in conduit in outdoor areas and below grade. c. Building wire and power and control cable in cable tray in outdoor areas. 2. Type THHN/THWN and THHN/THWN-2: a. Building wire and power and control cable No. 8 AWG and smaller in architectural and non-architectural finished areas. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 6 3. Type SIS and MTW: a. For the wiring of control equipment within control panels and field wiring of control equipment within switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers. B. Conductor Size Limitations: 1. Feeder and branch power conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Control conductors shall not be smaller than No. 14 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Instrumentation conductors shall not be smaller than No. 18 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Color Code All Wiring as Follows: 1. Building wire: 240 V, 208 V, 240/120 V, 208/120 V 480 V, 480/277 V Phase 1 Black Brown Phase 2 Red * Orange Phase 3 Blue Yellow Neutral White White or Gray Ground Green Green * Orange when it is a high leg of a 120/240 V Delta system. a. Conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller: Insulated phase, neutral and ground conductors shall be identified by a continuous colored outer finish along its entire length. b. Conductors larger than No. 6 AWG: 1) Insulated phase and neutral conductors shall be identified by one of the following methods: a) Continuous colored outer finish along its entire length. b) 3 inches of colored tape applied at the termination. 2) Insulated grounding conductor shall be identified by one of the following methods: a) Continuous green outer finish along its entire length. b) Stripping the insulation from the entire exposed length. c) Using green tape to cover the entire exposed length. 3) The color coding shall be applied at all accessible locations, including but not limited to: Junction and pull boxes, wireways, manholes and handholes. 2. Power cables ICEA S-58-679, Method 4 with: a. Phase and neutral conductors identified with 3 inches of colored tape, per the Table herein, applied at the terminations. b. Ground conductor: Bare. 3. Control cables ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table E-2: a. When a bare ground is not provided, one of the colored insulated conductors shall be re-identified by stripping the insulation from the entire exposed length or using green tape to cover the entire exposed length. b. When used in power applications the colored insulated conductors used as phase and neutral conductors may have to be re-identified with 3 inches of colored tape, per the Table herein, applied at the terminations. D. Install all wiring in raceway unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. E. Feeder, branch, control and instrumentation circuits shall not be combined in a raceway, cable tray, junction or pull box, except as permitted in the following: 1. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings. 2. Where field conditions dictate and written permission is obtained from the Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 7 3. Control circuits shall be isolated from feeder and branch power and instrumentation circuits but combining of control circuits is permitted. a. The combinations shall comply with the following: 1) 12 VDC, 24 VDC and 48 VDC may be combined. 2) 125 VDC shall be isolated from all other AC and DC circuits. 3) AC control circuits shall be isolated from all DC circuits. 4. Instrumentation circuits shall be isolated from feeder and branch power and control circuits but combining of instrumentation circuits is permitted. a. The combinations shall comply with the following: 1) Analog signal circuits may be combined. 2) Digital signal circuits may be combined but isolated from analog signal circuits. 5. Multiple branch circuits for similar loads may be combined in a common raceway, such as multiple lighting circuits or multiple receptacle circuits or other 120Vac circuits. Do not combine lighting and receptacle circuits. a. Do not combine control device circuits with lighting or receptacle circuits. b. Contractor is responsible for making the required adjustments in conductor and raceway size, in accordance with all requirements of the NFPA 70, including but not limited to: 1) Up sizing conductor size for required ampacity de-ratings for the number of current carrying conductors in the raceway. 2) The neutral conductors may not be shared. 3) Up sizing raceway size for the size and quantity of conductors. F. Ground the drain wire of shielded instrumentation cables at one end only. 1. The preferred grounding location is at the load (e.g., control panel), not at the source (e.g., field mounted instrument). G. Splices and terminations for the following circuit types shall be made in the indicated enclosure type using the indicated method. 1. Feeder and branch power circuits: a. Device outlet boxes: 1) Twist/screw on type connectors. b. Junction and pull boxes and wireways: 1) Twist/screw on type connectors for use on No. 8 and smaller wire. 2) Compression, mechanical screw or terminal block or terminal strip type connectors for use on No. 6 AWG and larger wire. c. Motor terminal boxes: 1) Twist/screw on type connectors for use on No. 10 AWG and smaller wire. 2) Insulated mechanical screw type connectors for use on No. 8 AWG and larger wire. d. Manholes or handholes: 1) Twist/screw on type connectors pre-filled with epoxy for use on No. 8 AWG and smaller wire. 2) Watertight compression or mechanical screw type connectors for use on No. 6 AWG and larger wire. 2. Control circuits: a. Junction and pull boxes: Terminal block type connector. b. Manholes or handholes: Twist/screw on type connectors pre-filled with epoxy. c. Control panels and motor control centers: Terminal block or strips provided within the equipment or field installed within the equipment by the Contractor. 3. Instrumentation circuits can be spliced where field conditions dictate and written permission is obtained from the Engineer. a. Maintain electrical continuity of the shield when splicing twisted shielded conductors. b. Junction and pull boxes: Terminal block type connector. c. Control panels and motor control centers: Terminal block or strip provided within the equipment or field installed within the equipment by the Contractor. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 8 4. Non-insulated compression and mechanical screw type connectors shall be insulated with tape or hot or cold shrink type insulation to the insulation level of the conductors. H. Insulating Tape Usage: 1. For insulating connections of No. 8 AWG wire and smaller: 7 mil vinyl tape. 2. For insulating splices and taps of No. 6 AWG wire or larger: 10 mil vinyl tape. 3. For insulating connections made in cold weather or in outdoor locations: 8.5 mil, all weather vinyl tape. I. Color Coding Tape Usage: For color coding of conductors. J. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, install all fiber optic cable in conduit. a. The cable(s) shall be installed in an innerduct that is placed in the tray for protection of the cable. 2. Splicing: a. Optical fibers shall not be spliced. 3. Utilize dust tight wall-mounted interconnect center to provide the following: a. Interconnect fiber optic cable to jumper cable assemblies for connection to the opto- electronic interface. 4. Where exposed to contact with electric light or power conductors, the noncurrent carrying metallic members (if applicable) of optical fiber cables entering buildings shall be grounded as close to the point of entrance as practicable in accordance with NFPA 70. 5. Install cables in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: 1. See Specification Section 26 08 13. B. Test installed fiber optic cable system to verify the following: 1. Continuity of all installed fibers and associated connectors. 2. Maximum attenuation requirements of specification are not exceeded. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 1 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for grounding and bonding system(s). B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. 837, Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. B. Assure ground continuity is continuous throughout the entire Project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data. a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section except: 1) Grounding clamps, terminals and connectors. 2) Exothermic welding system. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Ground rods and bars and grounding clamps, connectors and terminals: a. ERICO by Pentair. b. Harger Lightning & Grounding. c. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc.. d. Burndy by Hubbell. e. Robbins Lightning, Inc. f. Blackburn by Thomas & Betts. g. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 2. Exothermic weld connections: a. ERICO by Pentair - Cadweld. b. Harger Lightning & Grounding - Ultraweld. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 2 c. Burndy by Hubbell - Thermoweld. d. FurseWELD by Thomas & Betts. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Wire and Cable: 1. Bare conductors: Soft drawn stranded copper meeting ASTM B8. 2. Insulated conductors: Color coded green, per Section 26 05 19. B. Conduit: As specified in Section 26 05 33. C. Ground Bars: 1. Solid copper: a. 1/4 inches thick. b. 2 or 4 inches wide. c. 24 inches long minimum in main service entrance electrical rooms, 12 inches long elsewhere. 2. Predrilled grounding lug mounting holes. 3. Stainless steel or galvanized steel mounting brackets. 4. Insulated standoffs. D. Ground Rods: 1. 3/4 inches x 10 feet, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Copper-clad: a. 10 mil minimum uniform coating of electrolytic copper molecularly bonded to a rigid steel core. b. Corrosion resistant bond between the copper and steel. c. Hard drawn for a scar-resistant surface. E. Grounding Clamps, Connectors and Terminals: 1. Mechanical type: a. Standards: UL 467. b. High copper alloy content. 2. Compression type for interior locations: a. Standards: UL 467. b. High copper alloy content. c. Non-reversible. d. Terminals for connection to bus bars shall have two bolt holes. 3. Compression type suitable for direct burial in earth or concrete: a. Standards: UL 467, IEEE 837. b. High copper alloy content. c. Non-reversible. d. Factory filled with oxide inhibiting compound. F. Exothermic Weld Connections: 1. Copper oxide reduction by aluminum process. 2. Molds properly sized for each application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Size grounding conductors and bonding jumpers in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 250, except where larger sizes are indicated on the Drawings. 3. Remove paint, rust, or other non-conducting material from contact surfaces before making ground connections. After connection, apply manufacturers approved touch-up paint to protect metallic surface from corrosion. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 3 4. Where ground conductors pass through floor slabs or building walls provide nonmetallic sleeves. a. Seal the sleeve interior to stop water penetration. 5. Do not splice grounding electrode conductors except at ground rods. 6. Install ground rods and grounding electrode conductors in undisturbed, firm soil. a. Provide excavation required for installation of ground rods and conductors. b. Use driving studs or other suitable means to prevent damage to threaded ends of sectional rods. c. Unless otherwise specified, connect conductors to ground rods with compression type connectors or exothermic weld. d. Provide sufficient slack in conductor to prevent conductor breakage during backfill or due to ground movement. e. Backfill excavation completely, thoroughly tamping to provide good contact between backfill materials and ground rods and conductors. 7. Do not use exothermic welding if it will damage the structure the grounding conductor is being welded to. B. Grounding Electrode System: 1. Provide a grounding electrode system in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 250 and as indicated on the Drawings. a. All grounding electrode conductors terminate on a main ground bar located adjacent to the service entrance equipment. 2. Grounding electrode conductor terminations: a. Ground bars mounted on wall: Use a two-hole compression type conductor terminal and bolt it to the ground bar with two bolts. b. Ground bars in electrical equipment: Use compression type conductor terminal and bolt it to the ground bar or manufacture's provided mechanical type termination device. c. Piping systems: Use mechanical type connections. d. Building steel, below grade and encased in concrete: Use compression type connector or exothermic weld. e. Building steel, above grade: Use a two-hole compression type conductor terminal and bolt to the steel with two bolts or exothermic weld. f. Ground rod: Compression type or exothermic weld, unless otherwise specified. g. At all above grade terminations, the conductors shall be labeled. 3. Ground ring grounding system: a. Ground ring consists of ground rods and a conductor looped around the structure. b. Placed at a minimum of 10 feet from the structure foundation and 2 feet-6 inches below grade. c. Provide a minimum of four ground rods placed at the corners of the structure and additional rods so that the maximum distance between ground rods does not exceed 50 FT. d. Building/Structure grounding: 1) Bond building/structure metal support columns to the ground ring at all corners of the structure. e. Grounding conductor: Bare conductor, size as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Triad grounding system: a. Triad consists of three ground rods arranged in a triangle separated by 20 feet and a conductor interconnecting each ground rod. b. Place first ground rod a minimum of 10 feet from the structure foundation and 2 FT-6 IN below grade. c. Grounding conductor: Bare conductor, size as indicated on the Drawings. C. Supplemental Grounding Electrode: 1. Provide the following grounding in addition to the equipment ground conductor supplied with the feeder conductors whether or not shown on the Drawings. a. See Grounding Electrode System paragraph for conductor termination requirements. 2. Metal light poles: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 - 4 a. Connect metal pole and pole base reinforcing steel to a ground rod. b. Grounding conductor: Bare #6 AWG minimum. 3. Equipment support rack and pedestals mounted outdoors: a. Connect metallic structure to a ground rod. b. Grounding conductor: #4/0 AWG minimum. D. Transformer Separately Derived Grounding System: 1. Install the System Bonding Jumper at the transformer. At the first disconnect, ensure the neutral is isolated from ground. 2. Structures with a single electrical room/area: a. Connect grounding electrode conductor to the Grounding Electrode System main ground bar. 3. Structures with multiple electrical rooms/areas: a. Provide a ground bar mounted in each electrical room/area. b. Interconnect all ground bars in a daisy chain or radial fashion to the main ground bar as indicated on the Drawings. c. Connect grounding electrode conductor to the electrical room/area ground bar. 4. See Grounding Electrode System paragraph for conductor termination requirements. E. Raceway Bonding/Grounding: 1. Install all metallic raceway so that it is electrically continuous. 2. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all raceways with insulation identical to the phase conductors, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. NFPA 70 required grounding bushings shall be of the insulating type. 4. Provide double locknuts at all panels. 5. Bond all conduits, at entrance and exit of equipment, to the equipment ground bus or lug. 6. Provide bonding jumpers if conduits are installed in concentric knockouts. 7. Make all metallic raceway fittings and grounding clamps tight to ensure equipment grounding system will operate continuously at ground potential to provide low impedance current path for proper operation of overcurrent devices during possible ground fault conditions. F. Equipment Grounding: 1. Ground all utilization equipment with an equipment grounding conductor. G. Manhole and Handhole Grounding: 1. Provide a ground rod and ground bar, when indicated or as needed, in each manhole and handhole with exposed metal parts. a. Expose a minimum of 4 inches of the rod above the floor for field connections to the rod. 2. Connect all exposed metal parts (e.g., conduits and cable racks) to the ground rod. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Leave grounding system uncovered until observed by Owner. B. Acceptance testing: 1. See Specification Section 26 08 13. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Conduits. b. Conduit fittings. c. Conduit supports. d. Wireways. e. Outlet boxes. f. Pull and junction boxes. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 43 - Underground Work for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA). 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. c. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. d. TC 3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. e. TC 14.AG, Aboveground Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings. f. TC 14.BG, Belowground Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMA/ANSI): a. C80.1, Electric Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). b. C80.3, Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). c. C80.5, Electrical Aluminum Rigid Conduit (ERAC). d. OS 1, Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1, Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit. b. 6, Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel. c. 50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations. d. 360, Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. e. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. f. 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 2 g. 514B, Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. h. 651, Standard for Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. i. 797, Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel. j. 870, Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. k. 1203, Standard for Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. l. 2420, Belowground Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. m. 2515, Aboveground Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section except: 1) Conduit fittings. 2) Support systems. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Identify dimensional size of pull and junction boxes to be used. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. See Section 26 05 00. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Rigid metal conduits and electrical metallic tubing: a. Allied Tube and Conduit. b. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. c. Wheatland Tube. d. Patriot Aluminum Products, LLC. 2. PVC coated rigid metal conduits: a. Robroy Industries. b. Atkore - Calbond 3. Rigid nonmetallic conduit: a. Prime Conduit. b. Cantex, Inc. c. Osburn Associates, Inc. d. Champion Fiberglass, Inc. e. United Fiberglass of America, Inc. 4. Flexible conduit: a. AFC Cable Systems. b. Anamet, Inc. c. Electri-Flex Company. d. International Metal Hose Company. e. Southwire Company, LLC. 5. Conduit fittings and accessories: a. Appleton by Emerson Electric Co. b. Carlon by Thomas & Betts. c. Cantex, Inc. d. Crouse-Hinds by Eaton. e. Killark by Hubbell. f. Osburn Associates, Inc. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 3 g. O-Z/Gedney by Emerson Electric Co. h. Raco by Hubbell. i. Steel City by Thomas & Betts. j. Thomas & Betts. 6. Support systems: a. Unistrut by Atkore International, Inc. b. B-Line by Eaton. c. Kindorf by Thomas & Betts. d. Minerallac Company. e. CADDY by Pentair. f. Superstrut by Thomas & Betts. 7. Outlet, pull and junction boxes: a. Appleton by Emerson Electric Co. b. Crouse-Hinds by Eaton c. Killark by Hubbell. d. O-Z/Gedney by Emerson Electric Co. e. Steel City by Thomas & Betts. f. Raco by Hubbell g. Bell by Hubbell. h. Hoffman Engineering. i. Wiegmann by Hubbell. j. B-Line by Eaton. k. Adalet. l. RITTAL North America LLC. m. Stahlin by Robroy Enclosures. 2.2 RIGID METAL CONDUITS A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1. Mild steel with continuous welded seam. 2. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing. 3. Threads galvanized after cutting. 4. Internal coating: Baked lacquer, varnish or enamel for a smooth surface. 5. Standards: NFPA 70 Type RMC, NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6. B. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS): 1. Nominal 40 mil Polyvinyl Chloride Exterior Coating: a. Coating: Bonded to hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to NEMA/ANSI C80.1. b. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface: Greater than the tensile strength of the coating. 2. Nominal 2 mil, minimum, urethane interior coating. 3. Urethane coating on threads. 4. Conduit: Epoxy prime coated prior to application of PVC and urethane coatings. 5. Female Ends: a. Have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of one pipe diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less beyond the opening. b. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used with it. 6. Pass high temperature water PVC coating adhesion test and be ETL Verified PVC-001. 7. Standards: NFPA 70 Type RMC, NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN 1. C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC): 1. AA Type 6063 aluminum alloy, T-1 temper. 2. Maximum copper content of 0.10%. 3. Extruded, seamless. 4. Standards: NFPA 70 Type RMC, NEMA/ANSI C80.5, UL 6. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4 2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Mild steel with continuous welded seam. B. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing. C. Internal coating: Baked lacquer, varnish, or enamel for a smooth surface. D. Standards: NFPA 70 Type EMT, NEMA/ANSI C80.3, UL 797. 2.4 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Schedules 40 (PVC-40) and 80 (PVC-80): 1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) plastic compound which includes inert modifiers to improve weatherability and heat distribution. 2. Rated for direct sunlight exposure. 3. Fire retardant and low smoke emission. 4. Shall be suitable for use with 90 degrees C wire and shall be marked "maximum 90 degrees C". 5. Standards: NFPA 70 Type PVC, NEMA TC 2, UL 651. B. Fiberglass: 1. Epoxy based resin system using an anhydride curing agent. 2. Continuous E-glass roving. 3. Winding angle approximately 54.75 degrees. 4. Smooth internal walls with all fibers imbedded in the epoxy. 5. Above grade rated: Halogen free additive for flame spread and smoke control. 6. Ultraviolet inhibitor: Carbon black. 7. Two-step curing process. 8. Tensile strength: 11,000 psi per ASTM D2105. 9. Dimensions: Iron Pipe Size (IPS). 10. Wall thickness: a. Standard: 3/4 inches to 4 inches nominal size. b. Medium: 5 inches to 6 inches nominal size. c. Extra Heavy for “bullet proof” and Class 1, Division 2 areas: 3/4 inches to 6 inches nominal size. 11. Integral bell and spigot. 12. Conduits and fittings to be joined with an interference joint and epoxy adhesive creating a concrete and water tight connection. 13. Standard: NFPA 70 Type RTRC, NEMA TC14.AG, NEMA TC14.BG, NEMA TC.XW, UL 2420, UL 2515 , UL 2515A. 2.5 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT A. Flexible Galvanized Steel Conduit (FLEX): 1. Formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked. 2. Standard: NFPA 70 Type FMC, UL 1. B. PVC-Coated Flexible Galvanized Steel (liquid-tight) Conduit (FLEX-LT): 1. Core formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked. 2. Extruded PVC outer jacket positively locked to the steel core. 3. Liquid and vaportight. 4. Standard: NFPA 70 Type LFMC, UL 360. 2.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Fittings for Use with RGS and RAC: 1. General: a. In hazardous locations listed for use in Class I, Groups C and D locations. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 5 2. Locknuts: a. Threaded steel or malleable iron. b. Gasketed or non-gasketed. c. Grounding or non-grounding type. 3. Bushings: a. Threaded, insulated metallic. b. Grounding or non-grounding type. 4. Hubs: Threaded, insulated and gasketed metallic for raintight connection. 5. Couplings: a. Threaded straight type: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they are used on. b. Threadless type: Gland compression or self-threading type, concrete tight. 6. Unions: Threaded galvanized steel or zinc plated malleable iron. 7. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. Cover: 1) Clip-on type with stainless steel screws. 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum. 8. Conduit bodies (round): a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Cover: Threaded screw on type, gasketed, galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum. 9. Sealing fittings: a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. With or without drain and breather. d. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting. 10. Hazardous location flexible coupling (HAZ-FLEX): a. Liquid tight and arc resistant. b. Electrically conductive so no bonding jumper is required. c. Dry and wet areas: 1) Bronze braided covering over flexible brass core. 2) Bronze end fittings. 3) Zinc-plated steel or malleable iron unions and nipples. d. Corrosive areas: 1) Stainless steel braided covering over flexible stainless steel core. 2) Stainless steel end fittings. 3) Aluminum unions and nipples. 11. Service entrance head: a. Malleable iron, galvanized steel or copper free aluminum. b. Insulated knockout cover for use with a variety of sizes and number of conductors. 12. Expansion couplings: a. 2 inches nominal straight-line conduit movement in either direction. b. Galvanized steel with insulated bushing. c. Gasketed for wet locations. d. Internally or externally grounded. 13. Expansion/deflection couplings: a. 3/4 inches nominal straight-line conduit movement in either direction. b. 30 degrees nominal deflection from the normal in all directions. c. Metallic hubs, neoprene outer jacket and stainless steel jacket clamps. d. Internally or externally grounded. e. Watertight, raintight and concrete tight. 14. Standards: UL 467, UL 514B, UL 1203. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 6 B. Fittings for Use with PVC-RGS: 1. The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph "Fittings for Use with RGS and RAC" and coated as defined under paragraph "PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS)." C. Fittings for Use with EMT: 1. Connectors: a. Straight, angle and offset types furnished with locknuts. b. Zinc plated steel. c. Insulated gland compression type. d. Concrete and raintight. 2. Couplings: a. Zinc plated steel. b. Gland compression type. c. Concrete and raintight. 3. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Copper free aluminum with threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. Cover: 1) Screw down type with steel screws. 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel or copper free aluminum. 4. Standard: UL 514B. D. Fittings for Use with FLEX: 1. Connector: a. Zinc plated malleable iron. b. Squeeze or clamp-type. 2. Standard: UL 514B. E. Fittings for Use with FLEX-LT and FLEX-NM: 1. Connector: a. Straight or angle type. b. Metal construction, insulated and gasketed. c. Composed of locknut, grounding ferrule and gland compression nut. d. Liquid tight. 2. Standards: UL 467, UL 514B. F. Fittings for Use with Rigid Nonmetallic PVC Conduit: 1. Coupling, adapters and conduit bodies: a. Same material, thickness, and construction as the conduits with which they are used. b. Homogeneous plastic free from visible cracks, holes or foreign inclusions. c. Bore smooth and free of blisters, nicks or other imperfections which could damage the conductor. 2. Solvent cement for welding fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit and fittings. 3. Standards: ASTM D2564, NEMA TC 3, UL 651, UL 514B. G. Fittings for Use with Rigid Nonmetallic Fiberglass Conduit: 1. Coupling and adapters shall be of the same material, thickness, and construction as the conduit. 2. Epoxy adhesive for joining conduits and fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit and fittings and shall provide a concrete and water tight connection. 3. Standard: NFPA 70 Type RTRC, NEMA TC14.AG, NEMA TC14.BG, NEMA TC.XW UL 2420, UL 2415 , UL 2515A. H. Weather and Corrosion Protection Tape: 1. PVC based tape, 10 mils thick. 2. Protection against moisture, acids, alkalis, salts and sewage and suitable for direct bury. 3. Used with appropriate pipe primer. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 7 2.7 ALL RACEWAY AND FITTINGS A. Mark Products: 1. Identify the nominal trade size on the product. 2. Stamp with the name or trademark of the manufacturer. 2.8 OUTLET BOXES A. Metallic Outlet Boxes: 1. Hot-dip galvanized steel. 2. Conduit knockouts and grounding pigtail. 3. Styles: a. 2 inches x 3 inches rectangle. b. 4 inches square. c. 4 inches octagon. d. Masonry/tile. 4. Accessories: a. Flat blank cover plates. b. Barriers. c. Extension, plaster or tile rings. d. Box supporting brackets in stud walls. e. Adjustable bar hangers. 5. Standards: NEMA/ANSI OS 1, UL 514A. B. Cast Outlet Boxes: 1. Zinc plated cast iron or die-cast copper free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Threaded hubs and grounding screw. 3. Styles: a. "FS" or "FD". b. "Bell". c. Single or multiple gang and tandem. d. "EDS" or "EFS" for hazardous locations. 4. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating. 5. Standards: UL 514A, UL 1203. C. See Specification Section 26 27 26 for wiring devices, wallplates and coverplates. 2.9 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. NEMA 1 Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 GA minimum, galvanized steel or 14 GA minimum, steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 2. With or without concentric knockouts on four sides. 3. Flat cover fastened with screws. B. NEMA 4 Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 GA steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Hinged or non-hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps. 6. Cover with oil resistant gasket. C. NEMA 4X Rated (metallic): 1. Body and cover: 14 GA Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Hinged door and stainless steel screws and clamps. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 8 6. Door with oil-resistant gasket. D. NEMA 4X Rated (Nonmetallic): 1. Body and cover: Ultraviolet light protected fiberglass-reinforced polyester boxes. 2. No knockouts. 3. External mounting flanges. 4. Hinged door with quick release latches and padlocking hasp. 5. Door with oil resistant gasket. E. NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 Rated: 1. Cast gray iron alloy or copper-free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub. 3. Cover bolted-down with stainless steel bolts or threaded cover with neoprene gasket. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Grounding lug. 6. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating. F. NEMA 12 Rated: 1. Body and cover: a. 14 GA steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. b. Type 5052 H-32 aluminum, unpainted. 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Non-hinged cover held closed with captivated cover screws threaded into sealed wells or hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps. 6. Flat door with oil resistant gasket. G. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Rigid handles for covers larger than 9 square feet or heavier than 25 pounds. 2. Split covers when heavier than 25 pounds. 3. Weldnuts for mounting optional panels and terminal kits. 4. Terminal blocks: Screw-post barrier-type, rated 600 volt and 20 ampere minimum. H. Standards: NEMA 250, UL 50. 2.10 SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Multi-conduit Surface or Trapeze Type Support and Pull or Junction Box Supports: 1. Material requirements. a. Galvanized steel: ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. b. Stainless steel: AISI Type 316. c. PVC coat galvanized steel: ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M and 20 mil PVC coating. B. Single Conduit and Outlet Box Support Fasteners: 1. Material requirements: a. Zinc plated steel. b. Stainless steel. c. Malleable iron. d. PVC coat malleable iron or steel: 20 mil PVC coating. e. Steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish. 2.11 OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN WALLS AND FLOORS A. Sleeves, smoke and fire stop fitting through walls and floors: 1. Seal all penetrations and use fire stop when required by NEC. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Shall be in accordance with the requirements of: 1. NFPA 70. 2. Manufacturer instructions. B. Size of Raceways: 1. Raceway sizes are shown on the Drawings, if not shown on the Drawings, then size in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the minimum raceway size shall be: a. Conduit: 3/4 inches. b. Wireway: 2-1/2 inches x 2-1/2 inches. C. Field Bending and Cutting of Conduits: 1. Utilize tools and equipment recommended by the manufacturer of the conduit, designed for the purpose and the conduit material to make all field bends and cuts. 2. Do not reduce the internal diameter of the conduit when making conduit bends. 3. Prepare tools and equipment to prevent damage to the PVC coating. 4. Degrease threads after threading and apply a zinc rich paint. 5. Debur interior and exterior after cutting. D. Male threads of conduit systems shall be coated with an electrically conductive anti-seize compound. E. The protective coating integrity of conduits, fittings, outlet, pull and junction boxes and accessories shall be maintained. 1. Repair galvanized components utilizing a zinc rich paint. 2. Repair painted components utilizing touch up paint provided by or approved by the manufacturer. 3. Repair PVC coated components utilizing a patching compound, of the same material as the coating, provided by the manufacturer of the conduit; or a self-adhesive, highly conformable, cross-linked silicone composition strip, followed by a protective coating of vinyl tape. a. Total nominal thickness: 40 mil. 4. Repair surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation. F. Remove moisture and debris from conduit before wire is pulled into place. 1. Pull mandrel with diameter nominally 1/4 inches smaller than the interior of the conduit, to remove obstructions. 2. Swab conduit by pulling a clean, tight-fitting rag through the conduit. 3. Tightly plug ends of conduit with tapered wood plugs or plastic inserts until wire is pulled. G. Only nylon or polyethylene rope shall be used to pull wire and cable in conduit systems. H. Where portions of a raceway are subject to different temperatures and where condensation is known to be a problem, as in cold storage areas of buildings or where passing from the interior to the exterior of a building, the raceway shall be sealed to prevent circulation of warm air to colder section of the raceway. I. Fill openings in walls, floors, and ceilings and finish flush with surface. 1. Seal all penetrations and use fire stop when required by NEC. 3.2 RACEWAY ROUTING A. Raceways shall be routed in the field unless otherwise indicated. 1. Conduit and fittings shall be installed, as required, for a complete system that has a neat appearance and is in compliance with all applicable codes. 2. Run in straight lines parallel to or at right angles to building lines. 3. Do not route conduits: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 10 a. Through areas of high ambient temperature or radiant heat. b. In suspended concrete slabs. c. In concrete members including slabs, slabs on grade, beams, walls, and columns unless specifically located and detailed on structural Drawings.. 4. Locate sleeves or conduits penetrating floors, walls, and beams so as not to significantly impair the strength of the construction. Do not place conduit penetrations in columns. 5. Conduit shall not interfere with, or prevent access to, piping, valves, ductwork, or other equipment for operation, maintenance and repair. 6. Provide pull boxes or conduit bodies as needed so that there is a maximum of 360 degrees of bends in the conduit run or in long straight runs to limit pulling tensions. B. All conduits within a structure shall be installed exposed except as follows: 1. As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concealed above gypsum wall board or acoustical tile suspended ceilings. 3. Conduits in architecturally finished areas shall be concealed. C. Maintain minimum spacing between parallel conduit and piping runs in accordance with the following when the runs are greater than 30 feet: 1. Between instrumentation and telecommunication: 1 inch. 2. Between instrumentation and 125 V, 48 V and 24 VDC, 2 inches. 3. Between instrumentation and 600 V and less AC power or control: 6 inches. 4. Between instrumentation and greater than 600 VAC power: 12 inches. 5. Between telecommunication and 125 V, 48 V and 24 VDC, 2 inches. 6. Between telecommunication and 600 V and less AC power or control: 6 inches. 7. Between telecommunication and greater than 600 VAC power: 12 inches. 8. Between 125 V, 48 V and 24 VDC and 600 V and less AC power or control: 2 inches. 9. Between 125 V, 48 V and 24 VDC and greater than 600 VAC power: 2 inches. 10. Between 600 V and less AC and greater than 600 VAC: 2 inches. 11. Between process, gas, air and water pipes: 6 inches. D. Conduits shall be installed to eliminate moisture pockets. 1. Where water cannot drain to openings, provide drain fittings in the low spots of the conduit run. E. Conduit shall not be routed on the exterior of structures except as specifically indicated on the Drawings. F. Where sufficient room exists within the housing of roof-mounted equipment, the conduit shall be stubbed up inside the housing. G. Provide all required openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for conduit penetration. 1. Seal all penetrations and use fire stop when required by NEC. 3.3 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS A. Permitted Raceway Types Per Wire or Cable Types: 1. Power wire or cables: All raceway types. 2. Control wire or cables: All raceway types. 3. Instrumentation cables: Metallic raceway except nonmetallic may be used underground. 4. Motor leads from a VFD: RGS, RAC or shielded VFD cables in all other raceways. 5. Telecommunication cables: All raceway types. B. Permitted Raceway Types Per Area Designations: 1. Dry areas: a. RGS. b. RAC. 2. Wet areas: a. RGS. b. RAC. c. Fiberglass (above grade rated). Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 11 3. Corrosive areas: a. PVC-RGS. b. RAC. c. Fiberglass (above grade rated). 4. Highly corrosive areas: a. PVC-RGS. b. PVC-80. c. Fiberglass (above grade rated). 5. NFPA 70 hazardous areas: a. RGS. b. RAC when required by other area designations. C. Permitted Raceway Types Per Routing Locations: 1. In stud framed walls: a. EMT. 2. In concrete block or brick walls: a. PVC-40. 3. Above acoustical tile ceilings: a. EMT. b. NEMA 1 rated wireway. 4. Embedded in poured concrete walls and floors: a. PVC-40. b. Fiberglass (above or below grade rated). c. Fiberglass (above grade rated) when emerging from concrete into areas designated as wet, corrosive or highly corrosive. d. PVC-RGS when emerging from concrete into areas designated as wet, corrosive or highly corrosive. 5. Beneath floor slab-on-grade: a. PVC-40. b. Fiberglass (above or below grade rated). 6. Through floor penetrations: a. Fiberglass (above grade rated) in areas designated as wet, corrosive or highly corrosive. b. PVC-RGS in areas designated as wet, corrosive or highly corrosive. 7. Direct buried conduits and ductbanks: a. PVC-80. b. Fiberglass (above or below grade rated). c. 90 degrees elbows for transitions to above grade: 1) PVC-RGS. 2) Fiberglass (above grade rated). d. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees: 1) PVC-RGS. 2) Fiberglass (above or below grade rated). 8. Concrete encased ductbanks: a. PVC-40. b. PVC-EB. c. Fiberglass (above or below grade rated). d. 90 degree elbows for transitions to above grade: 1) PVC-RGS. 2) Fiberglass (above grade rated). e. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees: 1) RGS for sizes 2 inches and larger. 2) Fiberglass (above or below grade rated). D. FLEX conduits shall be installed for connections to light fixtures, HVAC equipment and other similar devices above the ceilings. 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 6 feet to light fixtures. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 12 b. 3 feet to all other equipment. E. FLEX-LT and FLEX-NM conduits shall be installed as the final conduit connection to light fixtures, dry type transformers, motors, electrically operated valves, instrumentation primary elements, and other electrical equipment that is liable to vibrate. 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 6 feet to light fixtures. b. 3 feet to motors. c. 2 feet to all other equipment. F. HAZ-FLEX coupling shall be installed as the final conduit to motors, electrically operated valves, instrumentation primary elements and electrical equipment that is liable to vibrate. 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 3 feet to motors. b. 2 feet to all other equipment. G. NEMA 1 Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in electrical rooms. 2. Surface mounted above removable ceilings tiles of an architecturally finished area. H. NEMA 3R Wiring Trough: 1. Surface mounted in exterior locations. I. NEMA 4X Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and or corrosive. J. NEMA 12 Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in architecturally and non-architecturally finished areas. K. Underground Conduit: See Specification Section 26 05 43. 3.4 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Conduit Seals: 1. Installed in conduit systems located in hazardous areas as required by the NFPA 70. 2. Fill plug and drain shall be accessible. 3. Pour the conduit seals in a two-step process. a. Pour the seal and leave cover off. b. After seal is dry, inspect for proper sealing, install cover and mark (for example, paint or permanent marker) as complete. B. Rigid nonmetallic conduit and fittings shall be joined utilizing solvent cement. 1. Immediately after installation of conduit and fitting, the fitting or conduit shall be rotated 1/4 turn to provide uniform contact. C. Install Expansion Fittings: 1. Where conduits are exposed to the sun and conduit run is greater than 200 feet. 2. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings. D. Install Expansion/Deflection Fittings: 1. Where conduits enter a structure. a. Except electrical manholes and handholes. b. Except where the ductbank is tied to the structure with rebar. 2. Where conduits span structural expansions joints. 3. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings. E. Threaded connections shall be made wrench-tight. F. Conduit joints shall be watertight: 1. Where subjected to possible submersion. 2. In areas classified as wet. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 13 3. Underground. G. Terminate Conduits: 1. In metallic outlet boxes: a. RGS and RAC: 1) Conduit hub and locknut. 2) Insulated bushing and two locknuts. 3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NFPA 70. b. EMT: Compression type connector and locknut. 2. In NEMA 1 rated enclosures: a. RGS and RAC: 1) Conduit hub and locknut. 2) Insulated bushing and two locknuts. 3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NFPA 70. b. EMT: Compression type connector and locknut. 3. In NEMA 12 rated enclosures: a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut. b. Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NFPA 70. 4. In NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X rated enclosures: a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut. 5. In NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 rated enclosures: a. Into an integral threaded hub. 6. When stubbed up through the floor into floor mount equipment: a. With an insulated grounding bushing on metallic conduits. b. With end bells on nonmetallic conduits. H. Threadless couplings shall only be used to join new conduit to existing conduit when the existing conduit end is not threaded and it is not practical or possible to cut threads on the existing conduit with a pipe threader. 3.5 CONDUIT SUPPORT A. Permitted multi-conduit surface or trapeze type support system per area designations and conduit types: 1. Dry or wet and/or hazardous areas: a. Galvanized system consisting of: Galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit clamps. b. Aluminum system consisting of: Aluminum channels, fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. 2. Corrosive areas: a. Aluminum system consisting of: Aluminum channels, fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. b. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated galvanized steel channels and fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. 3. Highly corrosive areas: a. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated galvanized steel channels and fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. b. Fiberglass system consisting of: Fiberglass channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit clamps. 4. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support system material. a. Galvanized steel system may be used with RGS and EMT. b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS and PVC-RGS and RAC. c. PVC coated galvanized steel system may be used with PVC-RGS and RAC and PVC- 40and PVC-80and Fiberglass. d. Aluminum system may be used with RAC and PVC-RGS. e. Fiberglass system may be used with PVC-40 and PVC-80 and PVC-RGS and Fiberglass. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 14 B. Permitted single conduit support fasteners per area designations and conduit types: 1. Architecturally finished areas: a. Material: Zinc plated steel, or steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish. b. Types of fasteners: Spring type hangers and clips, straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps. c. Provide anti-rattle conduit supports when conduits are routed through metal studs. 2. Dry or wet and/or hazardous areas: a. Material: Zinc plated steel, stainless steel and malleable iron. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps. 3. Corrosive areas: a. Material: Stainless steel and PVC coat malleable iron or steel. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps. 4. Highly corrosive areas: a. Material: PVC coat malleable iron or steel. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps. 5. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support fastener material. a. Zinc plated steel, steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish and malleable iron fasteners may be used with RGS and EMT. b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS and PVC-RGS and RAC. c. PVC coated fasteners may be used with PVC-RGS and RAC and PVC-40 and PVC-80. d. Nonmetallic fasteners may be used with PVC-40, PVC-80 and fiberglass. C. Conduit Support General Requirements: 1. Maximum spacing between conduit supports per NFPA 70. 2. Support conduit from the building structure. 3. Do not support conduit from process, gas, air or water piping; or from other conduits. 4. Provide hangers and brackets to limit the maximum uniform load on a single support to 25 LBS or to the maximum uniform load recommended by the manufacturer if the support is rated less than 25 pounds. a. Do not exceed maximum concentrated load recommended by the manufacturer on any support. b. Conduit hangers: 1) Continuous threaded rods combined with struts or conduit clamps: Do not use perforated strap hangers and iron bailing wire. c. Do not use suspended ceiling support systems to support raceways. d. Hangers in metal roof decks: 1) Utilize fender washers. 2) Not extend above top of ribs. 3) Not interfere with vapor barrier, insulation, or roofing. 5. Conduit support system fasteners: a. Use sleeve-type expansion anchors as fasteners in masonry wall construction. b. Do not use concrete nails and powder-driven fasteners. 3.6 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. See Section 26 05 00 and the Drawings for area classifications. 3. Fill unused punched-out, tapped, or threaded hub openings with insert plugs. 4. Size boxes to accommodate quantity of conductors enclosed and quantity of conduits connected to the box. B. Outlet Boxes: 1. Permitted uses of metallic outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 15 1) Recessed in all stud framed walls and ceilings. 2) Recessed in poured concrete, concrete block and brick walls of architecturally finished areas and exterior building walls. b. Pull or junction box: 1) Above gypsum wall board or acoustical tile ceilings. 2) Above 10 feet in an architecturally finished area where there is no ceiling. 2. Permitted uses of cast outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, corrosive, highly corrosive and hazardous areas. b. Pull and junction box surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, corrosive and highly corrosive areas. 3. Mount device outlet boxes where indicated on the Drawings and at heights as scheduled in Section 26 05 00. 4. Set device outlet boxes plumb and vertical to the floor. 5. Outlet boxes recessed in walls: a. Install with appropriate stud wall support brackets or adjustable bar hangers so that they are flush with the face of the wall. b. Locate in ungrouted cell of concrete block with bottom edge of box flush with bottom edge of block and flush with the face of the block. 6. Place barriers between switches in boxes with 277 V switches on opposite phases. 7. Back-to-back are not permitted. 8. When an outlet box is connected to a PVC coated conduit, the box shall also be PVC coated. C. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Install pull or junction boxes in conduit runs where indicated or required to facilitate pulling of wires or making connections. a. Make covers of boxes accessible. 2. Permitted uses of NEMA 1 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted above removable ceiling tiles of an architecturally finished area. 3. Permitted uses of NEMA 4 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as wet. 4. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X metallic enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive. 5. Permitted uses of NEMA 7 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as Class I hazardous. 1) Provide PVC coating in corrosive and highly corrosive areas when PVC coated conduit is used. 6. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as dry. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - 1 SECTION 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Handhole. b. Underground conduits and ductbanks. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 03 - Concrete. 2. Section 03 00 05 - Concrete. 3. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding. 4. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill. 6. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. HB-17, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE): a. 77, Specifications for Underground Enclosure Integrity. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Direct-Buried Conduit(s): 1. Individual (single) underground conduit. 2. Multiple underground conduits, arranged in one or more planes, in a common trench. B. Concrete Encased Ductbank: An individual (single) or multiple conduit(s), arranged in one or more planes, encased in a common concrete envelope. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. Provide signed and sealed design computations for handholes indicating compliance with design load rating. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Provide dimensional drawings of each handhole indicating all specified accessories and conduit entry locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - 2 1. Prefabricated composite handholes: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Quazite by Hubbell. c. Synertech by Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. 2. Precast handholes: a. Lister Industries Ltd. b. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. c. Jensen Precast and Utility Concrete Products. 3. Handhole and ductbank accessories: a. Cantex, Inc. b. Condux International, Inc. c. Neenah Enterprises, Inc. d. Prime Conduit. e. Thomas and Betts. f. Underground Devices, Inc. g. Unistrut by Atkore International, Inc. 2.2 HANDHOLES A. Prefabricated Composite Material Handholes: 1. Handhole body and cover: Fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete conforming to all test provisions of SCTE 77. 2. Minimum load ratings: SCTE 77 Tier 5, 8, or 15 depending on lacvation and traffic exposure. 3. Solid bottom. 4. Stackable design as required for specified depth. 5. Cover: a. Engraved legend of "ELECTRIC" or "COMMUNICATIONS". b. Non-gasketed bolt down with stainless steel penta head bolts. c. Lay-in non-bolt down, when cover is over 100 pounds. d. One or multiple sections so the maximum weight of a section is 125 pounds. 6. Cover lifting hook: 24 inches minimum in length. B. Precast Handholes: 1. Fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete or steel reinforced cement concrete structures: 2. AASHTO live load rating: H-20 for full deliberate vehicle traffic. 3. Mating edges: Tongue and groove type. 4. Solid bottom with a 12 inches x 12 inches or 12 inches diameter french drain in the bottom of each handhole. 5. Cable pulling eyes opposite all conduit entrances. a. Coordinate exact location with installation contractor. 2.3 CONCRETE HANDHOLE ACCESSORIES A. Cover and Frame: 1. Cast ductile iron: ASTM A536. 2. AASHTO live load rating: H-20. 3. Diameter: 30 inches. 4. Cast the legend "ELECTRICAL" or "COMMUNICATIONS" into handhole covers. B. Cable Racks and Hooks: 1. Material: Heavy-duty nonmetallic (glass reinforced nylon). 2. Hook loading capacity: 400 pounds minimum. 3. Rack loading capacity: Four hooks maximum. 4. Hook deflection: 0.25 inches maximum. 5. Hooks: Length, as required, with positive locking device to prevent upward movement. 6. Mounding hardware: Stainless steel. C. Cable Pulling Irons: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - 3 1. 7/8 inches diameter hot-dipped galvanized steel. 2. 6000 pound minimum pulling load. D. Ground Rods and Grounding Equipment: See Specification Section 26 05 26. 2.4 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES A. Concrete and reinforcing steel: See Division 03 Specifications. B. Conduit: See Specification Section 26 05 33. C. Duct Spacers/Supports: 1. High density polyethylene or high impact polystyrene. 2. Interlocking web or mesh design. 3. Provide 3 inches minimum spacing between conduits. 4. Accessories, as required: a. Hold down bars. b. Ductbank strapping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - GENERAL A. Drawings indicate the intended location of handholes and routing of ductbanks and direct buried conduit. 1. Field conditions may affect actual routing. B. Handhole Locations: 1. Approximately where shown on the Drawings. 2. As required for pulling distances. 3. As required to keep pulling tensions under allowable cable tensions. 4. As required for number of bends in ductbank routing. 5. Shall not be installed in a swale or ditch. 6. Determine the exact locations after careful consideration has been given to the location of other utilities, grading, and paving. 7. Locations are to be approved by the Engineer prior to excavation and placement or construction of handholes. C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install handholes in conduit runs where indicated or as required to facilitate pulling of wires or making connections. E. Comply with Specification Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill, and . 3.2 HANDHOLES A. Prefabricated Composite Material Handholes: 1. For use in areas subjected to occasional non-deliberate vehicular traffic. 2. Provide handhole on six-inch compacted layer of fill material in accordance with Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill and six inches larger than handholes footprint on all sides. 3. Provide concrete encasement ring around handhole per manufacturers installation instructions (minimum of 10 inches wide x 12 inches deep). 4. Install so that the surrounding grade is 1 inch lower than the top of the handhole. 5. Size: As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the number and size of conduits. 6. Provide cable rails and pulling eyes as needed. B. Precast Handholes: 1. For use in vehicular and non-vehicular traffic areas. 2. Construction: a. Grout or seal all joints, per manufacturer's instructions. b. Support cables on walls by cable racks: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - 4 1) Provide a minimum of two racks, install symmetrically on each wall of handholes. a) Provide additional cable racks, as required, so that both ends of cable splices will be supported horizontally. 2) Equip cable racks with adjustable hooks: Quantity of cable hooks as required by the number of conductors to be supported. c. In each handhole, drive 3/4 inches x 10 feet long copper clad ground rod into the earth with approximately 6 inches exposed above finished floor. 1) Drill opening in floor for ground rod. 2) Connect all metallic components to ground rod by means of #8 AWG minimum copper wire and approved grounding clamps. 3) Utilize a ground bar in the handhole if the quantity of ground wires exceeds three. a) Connect ground bar to ground rod with a #2/0 AWG minimum copper wire. 3. Provide handholes on six-inch compacted layer of fill material in accordance with Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill and six inches larger than handholes footprint on all sides. 4. Install so that the top of cover is 1 inch above finished grade. a. Where existing grades are higher than finished grades, install sufficient number of courses of curved segmented concrete block between top of handhole frame to temporarily elevate handhole cover to existing grade level. 5. After installation is complete, provide and compact required fill materials around handholes. 6. Handhole size: a. As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the number and size of conduits entering or as indicated on the Drawings. b. Minimum floor dimensions of 4 feet x 4 feet and minimum depth of 4 feet. 3.3 UNDERGROUND CONDUITS A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Ductbank types per location: a. Reinforced concrete ductbank: 1) As indicated on the Electrical Site Plan. 2) As indicated in the Ductbank Schedule. b. Concrete encased ductbank: 1) As indicated on the Electrical Site Plan. 2) As indicated in the Ductbank Schedule. c. Direct-buried conduit(s): 1) As indicated on the Electrical Site Plan. 2) As indicated in the Ductbank Schedule. 2. Do not place concrete or other required fill materials until conduits have been observed by Engineer. 3. Do not place concrete or other required fill materials until conduits have been documented through photography. 4. Ductbanks shall be sloped a minimum of 4 inches per 100 feet or as detailed on the Drawings. a. Low points shall be at handholes. 5. During construction and after conduit installation is complete, plug the ends of all conduits. 6. Provide red-dyed concrete for all duct banks. 7. Provide conduit supports and spacers. a. Place supports and spacers for rigid nonmetallic conduit on maximum centers as indicated for the following trade sizes: 1) 1 inches and less: 3 feet. 2) 1-1/4 to 3 inches: 5 feet. 3) 3-1/2 to 6 inches: 7 feet. b. Place supports and spacers for rigid steel conduit on maximum centers as indicated for the following trade sizes: 1) 1 inches and less: 10 feet. 2) 1-1/4 to 2-1/2 inches: 14 feet. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - 5 3) 3 inches and larger: 20 feet. c. Securely anchor conduits to supports and spacers to prevent movement during placement of concrete or other required fill materials. 8. Stagger conduit joints at intervals of 6 inches vertically. 9. Make conduit joints watertight and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 10. Accomplish underground changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 15 degrees by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 10 feet. a. Sweep bends may be made up of one or more curved or straight sections or combinations thereof. 11. Furnish manufactured elbows at end of runs as the conduit transitions to above grade. a. Minimum radius of 18 inches for conduits less than 3 inches trade size and 36 inches for conduits 3 inches trade size and larger. 12. Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made with the proper tools and shall match factory tapers. 13. After the conduit run has been completed: a. Prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct by pulling a test mandrel through each conduit. 1) Test mandrel: a) Length: Not less than 12 inches. b) Diameter: Approximately 1/4 inches less than the inside diameter of the conduit. b. Clean the conduit by pulling a heavy duty wire brush mandrel followed by a rubber duct swab through each conduit. 14. Pneumatic rodding may be used to draw in lead wire. a. Install a heavy nylon cord free of kinks and splices in all unused new ducts. b. Extend cord 3 feet beyond ends of conduit. 15. Transition from rigid nonmetallic conduit to rigid metallic conduit, per Specification Section 26 05 33, prior to entering a structure or going above ground. a. Except rigid nonmetallic conduit may be extended directly to handholes, pad mounted transformer boxes, and other exterior pad mounted electrical equipment where the conduit is concealed within the enclosure. b. Terminate rigid PVC conduits with end bells. c. Terminate steel conduits with insulated bushings. 16. Place warning tape in trench directly over ductbanks, direct-buried conduit, and direct- buried wire and cable. 17. Placement of conduits stubbing into handholes shall be located to allow for proper bending radiuses of the cables. B. Concrete Encased Ductbank: 1. Ductbank system consists of conduits completely encased in minimum 3 inches of red-dyed concrete and with separations between different cabling types as required in Specification Section 26 05 33 or as detailed on the Drawings. 2. Install so that top of concrete encased duct, at any point: a. Is not less than 24 inches below grade. b. Is below pavement sub-grading. 3. Where identified and for a distance 10 feet either side of the area, the concrete shall be reinforced. a. The reinforcement shall consist of #4 bars and #4 ties placed 12 inches on center, in accordance with Division 03 Specification Sections or as detailed on the Drawings. b. Conduit supports to be staggered to minimize weak vertical shear point. 4. Conduit supports shall provide a uniform minimum clearance of 3 inches between the bottom of the trench and the bottom row of conduit. 5. Conduit separators shall provide a uniform minimum clearance of 3 inches between conduits or as required in Specification Section 26 05 33 for different cabling types. C. Direct-Buried Conduit(s): 1. Install so that the top of the uppermost conduit, at any point: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction UNDERGROUND WORK FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 - 6 a. Is not less than 30 inches below grade. b. Is below pavement sub-grading. 2. Provide a uniform minimum clearance of 3 inches between conduits or as required in Specification Section 26 05 33 for different cabling types. a. Maintain the separation of multiple planes of conduits by one of the following methods: 1) Provide multilevel conduits with conduit supports and separators to maintain required separations, and backfill with flowable fill in accordance with Section 31 23 05 – Excavation and Fill or concrete in accordance with the Specifications of Division 03 - Concrete. 2) Install multilevel conduits one level at a time. a) Each level shall be backfilled with required materials and compacted in accordance with Section 31 23 05 – Excavation and Fill, while maintaining required separations. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY, AND SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY, AND ARC FLASH REPORT 26 05 74 - 1 SECTION 26 05 74 SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY, AND ARC FLASH REPORT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the short circuit and protective-device coordination study, and arc flash study and report, for the electrical power system for the City of Bozeman, Montana Water Recovery Facility. 1. The "electrical power system" starts at the utility transformer and includes the new solar power system as shown in the project drawings. The existing Electrical Infrastructure is excluded from this study. 2. Arc flash study shall include the method and recommendation in determining proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and proper labeling of equipment as specified in this Section. 3. Provide equipment labeling. B. Reports shall include the electrical power system as defined above. 1. Field data as needed shall be determined and gathered by the Contractor after Notice to Proceed to accomplish the Arc Flash Report and Coordination Study. 2. The report shall include existing electrical equipment and electrical equipment being installed in this Construction Contract. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. 2. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. 3. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. REFERENCE TITLE IEEE 1584 IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations NFPA 70 National Electrical Code NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces OSHA 29-CFR Occupational Safety and Health Standards: Electrical Part 1910 Subpart S B. Qualifications: 1. Prepared by the manufacturer of the electrical equipment or by an electrical testing service or an Engineering Company which is regularly engaged in power system studies. 2. All calculations shall be prepared by or prepared under direct supervision of a registered Professional Electrical Engineer licensed in the State of Montana. C. Certification: 1. Short circuit and coordination study and arc flash report to be stamped and signed by a registered Professional Electrical Engineer licensed in the State of Montana. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Short circuit and coordination study report. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY, AND SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY, AND ARC FLASH REPORT 26 05 74 - 2 B. Arc flash report. C. Arc flash warning labels for the electrical equipment being installed in this construction contract. D. Provide complete set of model files used to perform study to Owner’s Representative as part of O&M documentation. Provide in SKM and ETAP formats. E. Checklist, dated and signed, confirming that adjustable devices have been set according to the recommended settings. 1.5 SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY A. Coordinated Power System Protection: 1. A study shall be prepared to demonstrate that the equipment and system constructed within the scope of these Contract Documents meet the specified requirements for equipment ratings, coordination and protection. a. The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE 242 and IEEE 399. b. Computer generated studies shall include the information about the software: name of the developer and software package and version number. 2. System short circuit study report: a. The study shall include the electrical power system as defined above. b. A balanced three-phase fault, bolted line-to-line fault and line-to-ground fault study shall be performed. c. A one-line diagram shall be prepared to show the electrical system buses, inverters, transformers, and all sources of fault current including solar panels. d. Manufacturer's data for the actual proposed equipment shall be utilized (e.g., transformer impedance). e. The available utility fault current shall be coordinated with the power utility company. f. Input data shall be shown in tabular form in the report and/or on the one-line diagram. 1) Input data shall include but is not limited to: a) Utility fault current or MVA and X/R ratio. b) Bus voltages. c) Conductor sizes and type of conduit. d) Equipment sizes and contributions. e) Solar size and contributions. f) Transformer sizes and impedances. g. Available fault current at each bus shall be shown in tabular form in the report and/or on the one-line diagram. h. Perform studies for both normal power and standby power scenarios. 3. System protective coordination study report: a. The study shall begin at each main service electrical switchgear and extend down the system through all buses as required to ensure a coordinated power system. b. The study shall demonstrate that the maximum possible degree of selectivity has been obtained between devices specified for the protection of equipment and conductors from damage from overloads and fault conditions. 1) Where necessary an appropriate compromise shall be made between system protection and service continuity. 2) System protection and service continuity shall be considered to be of equal importance. c. A one-line diagram shall be prepared to show the electrical system buses, inverters, transformers and protective devices. d. Manufacturer's data for the actual proposed protective devices shall be utilized. e. Summarize the coordination study, conclusions and recommendations. 1) As a minimum, include the following: a) The manufacturer's information used to prepare the study. b) Assumptions made during the study. c) Recommended taps and settings of all adjustable devices in tabulated form. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY, AND SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY, AND ARC FLASH REPORT 26 05 74 - 3 d) Composite coordination time-current curves on log-log paper showing: (1) That the settings for each protective device will provide protection and selectivity. (2) Identify each curve. (3) Cable and equipment damage points. (4) Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times. (5) One-line diagram (partial) of the part of the system being investigated. (6) Include as many curves as possible on a graph while maintaining readability. e) One-line sketch of the part of the system being investigated. f) Include as many curves as possible on a graph while maintaining readability. f. Position time-current curves for each device to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. g. Advise the Engineer of potential coordination problems discovered during the study and include recommendations to resolve the problem. B. Submit the reports for approval 90 days prior to equipment energization. 1.6 ARC FLASH STUDY A. Perform arc flash hazard studies after the short circuit and protective device coordination studies have been completed. B. For each major part of the electrical power system, determine the following: 1. Flash hazard protection boundary. 2. Limited approach boundary. 3. Restricted approach boundary. 4. Prohibited approach boundary. 5. Incident energy level. 6. PPE hazard/risk category. 7. Type of PPE required. C. Produce arc flash warning labels listing items B 1-7 from above. 1. Also include the bus name and voltage. D. Produce bus detail sheets that list the items B 1-7 from above and the following additional items: 1. Bus name. 2. Upstream protective device name, and type. 3. Bus line to line voltage. E. Produce an arc flash evaluation summary sheet listing the following additional items: 1. Bus name matching existing and contract document identification numbers. 2. Upstream protective device name, and type. a. Numbering shall match existing and contract document identification numbers. 3. Bus line to line voltage. 4. Bus bolted fault. 5. Protective device bolted fault current. 6. Arcing fault current. 7. Protective device trip/delay time. 8. Breaker opening time. 9. Solidly grounded column. 10. Equipment type. 11. Gap. 12. Arc flash boundary. 13. Working distance. 14. Incident energy. 15. Required protective fire rated clothing type and class. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY, AND SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY, AND ARC FLASH REPORT 26 05 74 - 4 F. Analyze the short circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash calculations and highlight any equipment that is determined to be underrated or causes an abnormally high incident energy calculation. 1. Propose approaches to reduce the energy levels. Where possible the hazard/risk category shall be reduced to Category 2 and still maintain proper coordination through the means of resetting of breakers and relays. 1.7 ARC FLASH REPORT A. Prepare a report summarizing the arc flash study and conclusions or recommendations which may affect the integrity of the electric power distribution system. B. A qualified engineer must perform arc flash calculations to determine the incident energy, arc flash boundary, and minimum PPE requirements for locations throughout the power system. 1. Arc flash warning labels shall be produced and attached to the electrical equipment by the Contractor. 2. These labels must indicate approach boundaries, incident energy level, and the minimum PPE that is required when servicing the equipment within the arc flash boundary. C. As a minimum, include the following in the report: 1. Equipment manufacturer's information for the equipment installed. 2. Assumptions made during the study. 3. Reduced copy of the one line drawing. 4. Arc flash evaluations summary spreadsheet. 5. Bus detail sheets. 6. Arc flash warning labels printed in color on adhesive backed labels. D. Submit report 60 days before energizing electrical equipment. 1. Labels shall be affixed on all new equipment prior to the new equipment being energized. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LABELS A. Provide labels for equipment. 1. Weatherproof labels are required for equipment mounted outdoors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Perform each arc flash study in accordance with NFPA 70E, OSHA 29-CFR, Part 1910 Subpart S, and IEEE 1584 Standards. B. Perform the studies using actual equipment data for the equipment provided. 1. Provide data from the manufacturer of the protective relays, circuit breakers, fuses, devices, etc. provided by the contractor’s subcontractors and vendors. C. Provide arc flash warning labels on equipment as specified in this Section. 1. Labels shall be printed in color on adhesive backed labels. D. Set all low voltage circuit breakers settings/ratings as determined by the coordination study. Fuse ratings on equipment shall be based on the coordination study. E. Provide a list of lockout and tagout devices that are compatible with the equipment. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 08 13 - 1 SECTION 26 08 13 ACCEPTANCE TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Basic requirements for acceptance testing. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA): a. ATS, Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Equipment and Systems. 2. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 3. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance/American National Standards Institute (TIA/EIA/ANSI): a. 455-78-B, Optical Fibres - PART 1-40: Measurement Methods and Test Procedures - Attenuation. B. Qualifications: 1. Testing firm: a. An independent firm performing, as the sole or principal part of its business for a minimum of 10 years, the inspection, testing, calibration , and adjusting of systems. b. Must have an established monitoring and testing equipment calibration program with accuracy traceable in an unbroken chain, according to NIST. 2. Field personnel: a. Minimum of one year field experience covering all phases of electrical equipment inspection, testing, and calibration. b. Relay test technician having previous experience with testing and calibration of relays of the same manufacturer and type used on project and proficient in setting and testing the types of protection elements used. c. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET. 1) As an alternative, supervising technician may be certified by the equipment manufacturer 3. Analysis personnel: a. Minimum three years combined field testing and data analysis experience. b. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET. 1) As an alternative, supervising technician may be certified by the equipment manufacturer. C. Phasing Diagram: 1. Coordinate with Utility Company for phase rotations and Phase A, B and C markings. a. Create a phasing diagram showing the coordinated phase rotations with generators and motors through the transformers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Equipment Monitoring and Testing Plan. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Prior to energizing equipment: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 08 13 - 2 a. Coordinated phasing diagram. b. Photocopies of all continuity tests. 2. Within two weeks after successful completion of Demonstration Period (Commissioning Period): a. Single report containing information including: 1) Summary of Project. 2) Information from pre-energization testing. 3) Testing and monitoring reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FACTORY QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Electrical equipment with all factory tests required by the applicable industry standards or NRTL. B. Factory testing will not be accepted in lieu of specified field acceptance testing requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Complete electrical testing in three phases: a. Pre-energization testing phase. b. Equipment energized with no load. c. Equipment energized under load. 2. Perform testing in accordance with this Specification Section and NETA ATS. 3. Provide field setting and programming of all adjustable protective devices and meters to settings as determined by the approved coordination study. 4. Equip testing and analysis personnel with all appropriate project related reference material required to perform tests, analyze results, and provide documentation including, but not limited to: a. Contract Drawings and Specifications. b. Related construction change documentation. c. Approved Shop Drawings. d. Approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals. e. Other pertinent information as required. B. Equipment Monitoring and Testing Plan: 1. Approved in accordance with Shop Drawing submittal schedule. 2. Included as a minimum: a. Qualifications of firm, field personnel, and analysis personnel doing the Work. b. List and description of testing and analysis equipment to be utilized. c. List of all equipment to be testing, including: 1) Name and tag numbers identified in the Contract Documents. 2) Manufacturer’s serial numbers. 3) Other pertinent manufacturer identification, C. Instruments Used in Equipment and Connections Quality Control Testing: 1. Minimum calibration frequency: a. Field analog instruments: Not more than 6 months. b. Field digital instruments: Not more than 12 months. c. Laboratory instruments: Not more than 12 months. d. If instrument manufacturer’s calibration requirements are more stringent, those requirements shall govern. 2. Carry current calibration status and labels on all testing instruments. 3. See individual testing programs for additional instrumentation compliance requirements. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 08 13 - 3 D. Testing and Monitoring Program Documentation: 1. Provide reports with tabbed sections for each piece of equipment tested. 2. Include all testing results associated with each piece of equipment under that equipment’s tabbed section. a. Include legible copies of all forms used to record field test information. 3. Prior to start of testing, submit one copy of preliminary report format for Engineer review and comment a. Include data gathering and sample test report forms that will be utilized. 4. In the final report, include as a minimum, the following information for all equipment tested: a. Equipment identification, including: 1) Name and tag numbers identified in the Contract Documents. 2) Manufacturer’s serial numbers. 3) Other pertinent manufacturer identification, b. Date and time of each test. c. Ambient conditions including temperature, humidity, and precipitation. d. Visual inspection report. e. Description of test and referenced standards, if any, followed while conducting tests. f. Results of initial and all retesting. g. Acceptance criteria. h. "As found" and "as left" conditions. i. Corrective action, if required, taken to meet acceptance. j. Verification of corrective action signed by the Contractor, equipment supplier, and Owner’s representative. k. Instrument calibration dates of all instruments used in testing. 5. Provide three (3) bound final reports prior to Project final completion. E. Electrical Equipment and Connections Testing Program: 1. See individual Division 26 Specification Sections for equipment specific testing requirements. 2. Test all electrical equipment. a. Perform all required NETA testing. b. Perform all required NETA testing plus the optional testing identified with each specific type of equipment in Article 3.2 of this Specification Section. 3.2 SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Panelboards and Switchboards: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.1. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. B. Transformers - Small Dry Type: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.2.1.1. 2. Perform the following additional tests: a. Record phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and neutral-to-ground voltages at no load after energizing, and at operating load after startup. 3. Adjust tap connections as required to provide secondary voltage within 2-1/2% of nominal under normal load after approval of Engineer. 4. Record as-left tap connections. C. Cable - Low Voltage: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.3.2. a. Insulation resistance testing is limited to conductors #4 AWG and larger. D. Cable - Optical Fiber: 1. Perform inspections on tests per TIA/EIA/ANSI 455-78-B, including: a. Optical time domain reflectometer test. b. Power attenuation test. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 08 13 - 4 c. Gain margin test. E. Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.6.1.2. a. Tests shall include primary current injection testing of all breakers at final settings. b. Where short-time or instantaneous settings on large frame breakers are beyond the current capability of field testing, primary injection tests at reduced currents shall be permitted if combined with secondary injection calibration test of trip unit at final settings. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. 3. Perform the following additional tests: a. Shunt trip devices minimum tripping voltage. 4. Record as-left settings. F. Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.6.1.1. 2. Components: a. Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. b. Thermal magnetic breakers: Visual and mechanical inspection per NETA ATS only. c. Solid state trip type: Visual and mechanical inspection and electrical tests per NETA ATS. 3. Record as-left settings. G. Network Protectors: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.8. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. 3. Perform all tests identified as optional per NETA ATS: 4. Perform the following additional tests: a. Verify reverse current sensitivity by opening transformer primary switch with feeder energized and no load on transformer and observing that network protector opens on magnetizing current alone. H. Protective Relays: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.9. a. Tests to be performed using secondary injection of 3 PH current and potential at final settings. b. Test at manufacturer’s recommended test points and critical timing points identified on relay setting sheet. 2. Perform all tests identified as optional per NETA ATS. 3. Perform the following additional tests: a. Verification of direct trip of associated lockout relay or circuit breaker(s) by using relay test function or shorting trip contact at relay case. b. Microprocessor-based relays: 1) Complete commissioning procedure per manufacturer’s instructions, followed by tests of each relay element at final settings. 2) Verification of all internally-programmed logic. c. Verification of all auxiliary input and output signals. d. Verification of power supply/self-diagnostic alarm contact and remote annunciation. 4. Record as-left settings. I. Instrument Transformers: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.10. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. 3. Perform the following optional tests per NETA ATS: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 08 13 - 5 a. Dielectric withstand test on potential transformers. J. Metering: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.11. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. K. Grounding: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.13. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. L. Ground Fault Protection: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.14. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. 3. Perform the following optional tests per NETA ATS: a. Control wiring insulation resistance. 4. Perform the following additional tests for four-wire systems: a. Primary current injection into switchgear bus with test set configured to simulate transformer source and high current jumper used to simulate unbalanced load and ground fault conditions. b. Verify no tripping for unbalanced load on each feeder and each main breaker. c. Verify no tripping for unbalanced load across tie breaker for dual-source schemes. d. Verify tripping for ground fault on load side of feeder each feeder and on each main bus. e. Verify tripping for ground fault on a single feeder and on each main bus through tie breaker(s) for multiple-source schemes. M. DC Power Systems: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.18. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. N. Control System Functional Test: 1. Perform test upon completion of equipment acceptance tests. 2. The test is to prove the correct interaction of all sensing, processing and action devices. 3. Develop a test plan and parameters for the purpose of evaluating the performance of the system. 4. Perform the following tests: a. Verify the correct operation of all interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition to design function. b. Verify the correct operation of all sensing devices, alarms and indicating devices. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING 26 09 13 - 1 SECTION 26 09 13 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Digital metering equipment. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMA/ANSI): a. C12.20, For Electricity Meter - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes. 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 508, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification: b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings. a. Electrical wiring/connection diagrams. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. b. Content of Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1) Data sheet of the meters electrical parameters, configuration and characteristics including a complete model number and associated equipment connected too. 2) Operating instructions of the meter(s) supplied. 3) Operating instructions of the Power Management software. 4) Maintenance instructions. 5) As-constructed electrical wiring/connection diagrams. 6) Acceptance testing data. C. Refer to Section 01 81 33 – Cyber Security Requirements for required cyber security related submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Allen-Bradley. 2. Eaton. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING 26 09 13 - 2 3. Electro Industries. 4. GE by ABB. 5. Power Measurement. 6. Square D Company. Square D Company is the preferred manufacturer for the facility. 7. Siemens. 2.2 DIGITAL METERING DEVICES A. Refer to Section 01 81 33 - Cyber Security Requirements for cyber security related product requirements. B. General: 1. Direct reading metered or calculated values. 2. Microprocessor based. 3. Integral LED or LCD display. 4. Current and potential transformers as required. 5. Integral fusing. 6. Operating temperature: 0 degrees F to 150 degrees F. 7. Standards: a. NEMA/ANSI C12.20. b. UL 508. C. Type 'B' Midrange Meter: 1. Display the following minimum electrical parameters (accuracy): a. RMS current per phase (+0.3% full scale). b. RMS voltage line-to-line and line-to-neutral (+0.3% full scale). c. Real power (W): 3 PH total (+0.6% full scale). d. Apparent power (VA): 3 PH total (+0.6% full scale). e. Reactive power (VAR): 3 PH total (+0.6% full scale). f. Power factor (+1.0%). g. Frequency (+0.17%). h. Percent current total harmonic distortion (31st). i. Percent voltage total harmonic distortion (31st). 2. Data logging: a. 128 KB. b. Selectable for parameters listed above for display. c. Software for configuration, retrieval, and trending. 3. Communication ports and protocols: Ethernet TCP/IP and MODBUS. 4. Supply voltage: 120 VAC. 2.3 TRANSFORMERS A. Current Transformer (CT): 1. Standard: IEEE C57.13. 2. Current ratios: As indicated on the Drawings. 3. Split Core provided with shorting terminal blocks. 4. Manufacturer as shown on drawings. 5. Window type current transformers shall be accessible from front of cubicle to permit changing or adding, without disconnecting bus joints. 6. Minimum ANSI metering accuracy class of 0.3 thru B-0.5. 7. Mount and brace to withstand mechanical stresses resulting from short circuit currents. B. Potential Transformers (PT): 1. Standard: IEEE C57.13. 2. Voltage ratio: As required. 3. Manufacturer as shown on drawings. 4. Primary current-limiting fuses. 5. Secondary fuses or circuit breaker. 6. Accuracy class: 0.3 at burden W thru Z and 0.6 at burden ZZ. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING 26 09 13 - 3 7. Thermal burden rating: Exceed maximum connected burden. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Power Management and Control Software: 1. Manufacturer’s standard, see Part 3 for minimum functionality. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 1. Provide all equipment as necessary to provide a complete and functioning system. 2. Coordinate with the Owner on final computer screen layouts, trending requirements and printouts. B. Meter Type Application: 1. Type B meters: Integral to equipment as indicated on the Drawings, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.] C. Communication Configuration: 1. As indicated on the Drawings. D. Computer Screen Configuration: 1. Each Type A, B and C meter shall have a data screen with the following minimum data as applicable for the capabilities of that type of meter: a. Voltage line-to-line for each phase and an average. b. Voltage line-to-neutral for each phase and an average. c. Current for each phase, neutral and average and peak demands. d. Kilowatts (kW) for each phase, total, demand and peak demand. e. Kilovolt-amperes (kVA) for each phase, total, demand and peak demand. f. Kilovolt-amperes reactive (kVAR) for each phase, total, demand and peak demand. g. Power factor for each phase and total. h. Frequency. i. Voltage total harmonic distortion for each phase. j. Current total harmonic distortion for each phase. k. Energy (kWhr) for each phase and total. l. A seven day kW, kVA and kVAR trend average. m. Peak demands shall be resettable by the operator. 2. Meter Type B shall have the following 15 minute trending graphs. a. Duration: Adjustable, with a seven day default. b. Phase A current: Minimum, maximum, and average. c. Phase B current: Minimum, maximum, and average. d. Phase C current: Minimum, maximum, and average. e. Neutral current: Minimum, maximum, and average. f. Phase A Watts: Minimum, maximum, and average. g. Phase B Watts: Minimum, maximum, and average. h. Phase C Watts: Minimum, maximum, and average. i. Watts total. j. Phase A Voltamps: Minimum, maximum, and average. k. Phase B Voltamps: Minimum, maximum, and average. l. Phase C Voltamps: Minimum, maximum, and average. m. Voltamps total. n. Phase A power factor: Minimum, maximum, and average. o. Phase B power factor: Minimum, maximum, and average. p. Phase C power factor: Minimum, maximum, and average. q. Power factor total. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING 26 09 13 - 4 E. Current transformers shall be connected to shorting type terminal blocks. F. Potential transformers shall have primary and secondary fuses with a disconnecting means. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: See Section 26 08 13. 3.3 TRAINING A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall provide the Owner with 8 hours of on-site training in the operation and maintenance of the metering system and its components. 3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Refer to Section 01 81 33 – Cyber-Security Requirements for cyber security related closeout requirements. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 13 - 1 SECTION 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Low voltage switchboards. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 09 13 - Electrical Power Monitoring. 3. Section 26 28 01 - Low-Voltage Circuit Protective Devices. 4. Section 26 43 13 - Surge Protection Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 891, Switchboards. B. Verify the space required for the switchboard is equal to or less than the space allocated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data. a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. 2. See Specification Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Switchboard layout with alphanumeric designation, protective devices size and type, as indicated in the one-line diagram or switchboard schedule. b. Front elevation and plan drawing of the assembly. c. Three-line or single line and schematic diagrams. d. Conduit space locations within the assembly. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings updated with as-build conditions C. Informational Submittals: 1. Equipment marking and documentation. 2. Ground fault protection system test report signed by the projects supervising electrical foreman. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Eaton. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 13 - 2 2. GE by ABB. 3. Square D by Schneider Electric. Square D Company is the preferred manufacturer for the facility. 4. Siemens Corporation. 2.2 SWITCHBOARDS A. Ratings: 1. Voltage, number of phases, number of wires, and main bus current rating as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Assembly short circuit current and interrupting device rating as indicated on the Drawings. 3. When low voltage power circuit breakers are utilized, the switchboard shall have a 30 cycle withstand rating corresponding to the breaker rating. 4. Service Entrance Equipment rated when indicated on the Drawings. B. Construction: 1. Standards: NEMA PB 2, UL 891. 2. Completely enclosed, dead-front, self-supporting metal structure. 3. Vertical panel sections bolted together. 4. Frames bolted together to support and house bus, cables and other equipment. 5. Frames and insulating blocks to support and brace main buses for short circuit stresses up to ratings indicated on the Drawings. 6. All sections front and rear aligned. 7. Devices front removable and load connections front and rear accessible. 8. NEMA 1 rated enclosure. 9. Interior and exterior steel surfaces cleaned and painted with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint. C. Buses: 1. Material: Tin-plated or] silver-plated copper. 2. Main horizontal bus: a. Fully rated and continuous over length of switchboard with all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. b. Sufficient size to limit temperature rise to 65 degrees C over average air temperature outside the enclosure of 40 degrees C. 3. Neutral bus: Fully rated and continuous over length of switchboard. 4. Ground bus: 1/4 x 2 inches copper, continuous over length of switchboard and solidly grounded to each vertical section structure. 5. Bus joints connected using through bolts and conical spring-type washers for maximum conductivity. D. Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices: 1. Main overcurrent protective device: a. Individually mounted molded case circuit breaker. 2. Feeder overcurrent protective devices: a. Group mounted molded case circuit breaker. 3. See Specification Section 26 28 01 for overcurrent and short circuit protective device requirements. 4. Factory installed. 5. Means to padlock all main and feeder devices in the open position. E. Surge Protective Device: Integrally mounted, see Specification Section 26 43 13. F. Metering: 1. Power monitor: a. Through cabinet mounting. b. See Specification Section 26 09 13 for meter requirements. G. Accessories: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 13 - 3 1. Thermograph viewing windows for infrared surveys without opening doors: a. Provide windows at manufacturer's recommended locations to view cable connections and bus connections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Arrange switchboard as shown on the Drawings. C. Indoor Locations: 1. NEMA 1 enclosure. 2. Install on concrete housekeeping pad, align front of switchboard with top edge of pad chamfer and securely fasten to pad. D. Equipment Marking and Documentation: 1. Provide labeling per NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. 2. Service equipment: a. Arc-flash hazard warning label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.16(A) and (B)) b. Available fault current label and documentation of the calculations made for compliance with marking requirements. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.24) 3. Other than service equipment: a. Arc-flash hazard warning label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.16(A)) b. Available fault current label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 408.6) 4. Identify (tag) all equipment and equipment components. 5. Provide labels and tags. 6. Available fault current and other required label data from Coordinated Power System Study as required by the contract documents. E. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide circuit protective devices and other associated equipment as indicated on the Drawings. 2. All control wiring shall be neatly laced and have flexibility at hinge locations. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test the ground fault protection system as indicated in Specification Section 26 28 01. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PACKAGE POWER SUPPLY 26 26 13 - 1 SECTION 26 26 13 PACKAGE POWER SUPPLY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Package power supply consisting of a transformer and panelboard. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding. 3. Section 26 28 01 - Low-Voltage Circuit Protective Devices. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C57.96, Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. PB 1, Panelboards. c. ST 20, Dry Type Transformers for General Applications. 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 67, Standard for Panelboards. b. 1561, Standard for Safety Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Nameplate drawing. b. Panelboard layout with alphanumeric designation, branch circuit breakers size and type, as indicated in the panelboard schedules. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. GE by ABB. 2. Hammond Power Solutions. 3. Square D by Schneider Electric. Square D Company is the preferred manufacturer for the facility. 4. Eaton. 5. Siemens Corporation. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PACKAGE POWER SUPPLY 26 26 13 - 2 2.2 PACKAGED POWER SUPPLY A. General: 1. Standards: IEEE C57.96, NEMA PB 1, NEMA ST 20, UL 67 and UL 1561. 2. Package power supply includes a main primary circuit breaker, an encapsulated dry-type transformer and a secondary panelboard with main circuit breaker. B. Ratings: 1. Single or three-phase as indicated on the Drawings. 2. KVA and voltage ratings as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Suitable for use as service entrance equipment. C. Transformer: 1. Non-ventilated, air cooled, two winding type. 2. Core and coil assembly encapsulated in a proportioned mixture of resin and aggregate to provide a moisture-proof, shock resistant seal. 3. Cores: a. High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. b. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point. 4. Coils: Continuous wound with electrical grade aluminum and grounded to the enclosure. 5. Insulation system: 185 degrees C with a 115 degrees C rise. 6. Taps: Two, 5% FCBN. 7. Sound levels: a. Manufacturer shall guarantee not to exceed the following: 1) 9 kVA and less: 40 dB. 2) 10 to 30 kVA: 45 dB. D. Panelboard and Protective Devices: 1. Bus: Aluminum. 2. Factory installed wiring between primary breaker and transformer, secondary breaker and transformer and distribution section. 3. 480 VAC primary circuit breaker: 22,000 amp minimum interrupting rating. 4. 240 VAC or less secondary circuit breaker: 22,000 amp minimum interrupting rating. 5. Feeder breakers: a. Plug-in type with 22,000 amp minimum interrupting rating. b. See Section 26 28 01 for additional requirements. E. Enclosure: 1. Main, secondary and feeder circuit breakers enclosed with a padlockable hinged door. 2. Wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large enough to allow convenient wiring. 3. Totally enclosed, non-ventilated, NEMA 3R, steel finished with a rust inhibitor primer and manufacturer’s standard paint. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ground in accordance with Section 26 05 26 or as indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Receptacles. b. Device wallplates and coverplates. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. c. WD 6, Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 20, General-Use Snap Switches. b. 498, Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. c. 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes. d. 894, Standard for Switches for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. e. 943, Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. f. 1010, Standard for Receptacle-Plug Combinations for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. g. 1310, Standard for Class 2 Power Units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Receptacles: a. Bryant Electric. b. Cooper Wiring Devices by Eaton. c. Hubbell Incorporated Wiring Device-Kellems. d. Leviton Manufacturing Company. e. Legrand/Pass & Seymour. f. Eaton Crouse-Hinds. g. Appleton Electric Co. h. Hubbell Killark. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Basic requirements unless modified in specific requirements paragraph of receptacles and per designated areas: 1. Industrial Specification Grade. 2. Straight blade. 3. Brass triple wipe line contacts. 4. One-piece grounding system with double wipe brass grounding contacts and self-grounding strap with grounding terminal. 5. Back and side wired. 6. Rating: 20 A, 125 VAC. 7. High impact nylon body. 8. Receptacle body color: a. Normal power: Gray. b. Generator or UPS power: Red. 9. Duplex or simplex as indicated on the Drawings. 10. Configuration: NEMA 5-20R. 11. Standards: UL 498, UL 514A, NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6. B. Receptacle Type Specific Requirements: 1. Basic receptacles: a. Weather-resistant when located in exterior locations or interior damp or wet areas as indicated on the Drawings. 1) Identification: Letters “WR” on face of receptacle. 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): a. Specification Grade. b. Class A protection. c. Feed through type. d. Test and reset buttons. e. Self-testing. f. Visual indicator light. g. Weather-resistant when located in exterior locations or interior damp or wet areas as indicated on the Drawings. 1) Identification: Letters “WR” on face of receptacle. h. Tamper resistant (TR) when indicated on the Drawings. i. Additional standards: UL 943. C. Exterior Locations Specific Requirements: 1. Coverplate: a. Extra-duty rated, weatherproof (NEMA 3R) while in use, gasketed, stainless steel hardware, copper-free aluminum, 3.2 inches minimum cover depth for #12 AWG cord. D. Corrosive and Wet or Damp Area Specific Requirements: 1. Corrosion resistant nickel plated metal parts. 2. Receptacle body color: Gray. 3. Weather-resistant. a. Identification: Letters “WR” on face of receptacle. 4. Coverplate for use on metallic outlet boxes: a. Extra-duty rated, weatherproof (NEMA 3R) while in use, gasketed, stainless steel hardware, copper-free aluminum, 3.2 inches minimum cover depth for #12 AWG cord. 5. Coverplate for use on non-metallic outlet boxes: a. Extra-duty rated, weatherproof (NEMA 3R) while in use, gasketed, stainless steel hardware, flame retardant, UV stabilized polycarbonate, 3.2 inches minimum cover depth for #12 AWG cords. E. Hazardous and Corrosive or Highly Corrosive and Dry, Wet or Damp Area Specific Requirements: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3 1. Rated for Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C and D; and Class II, Division 1 and 2 areas, Groups E, F, and G. 2. Assembly consists of outlet box and a combination receptacle/switch and housing. a. NEMA 3, 7 and 9 rated. 3. Outlet box (EDS Type): a. PVC coated galvanized cast iron alloy. 4. Receptacle and housing: a. Receptacle and switch enclosed in a factory sealed chamber and approved for installation without additional external sealing fittings. b. Insertion of “interchanger” plug and plug rotation will close the switch to energize receptacle and lock plug into the receptacle. c. “Interchanger” plug to be compatible with other manufacturers hazardous receptacle and work in ordinary convenience receptacles. d. Ordinary equipment plugs will not active the hazardous receptacle. e. Housing: 1) Cast iron alloy, stainless steel hardware, galvanized and factory painted finish. 2) Cast aluminum, stainless steel hardware, natural, lacquer, or factory painted finish. 3) Spring-loaded door seats against neoprene gasket. Stainless steel spring. 5. “Interchanger” plug: a. Aluminum housing. b. Provide five plugs for Owners use. 6. Standards: UL 894 and 1010. F. Hazardous and Corrosive or Highly Corrosive and Dry, Wet or Damp Area Specific Requirements: 1. Rated for Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C and D. 2. Assembly consists of outlet box and a combination receptacle/switch and housing. a. NEMA 3, 7 and 12 rated. 3. Outlet box (EDS Type): a. High strength glass reinforced non-metallic compound. b. Aluminum grounding grid imbedded into enclosure. 4. Receptacle and housing: a. Receptacle and switch not enclosed in separate sealing chamber. External sealing fittings required. b. Insertion of “interchanger” plug and plug rotation will close the switch to energize receptacle and lock plug into the receptacle. c. “Interchanger” plug to be compatible with other manufacturers hazardous receptacle and work in ordinary convenience receptacles. d. Ordinary equipment plugs will not active the hazardous receptacle. e. Housing: 1) Cast aluminum, stainless steel hardware, factory epoxy painted finish. 2) Spring-loaded door seats against neoprene gasket. Stainless steel spring. 5. “Interchanger” plug: a. 30% Glass-reinforced thermoplastic polyester housing. b. Provide five plugs for Owners use. 6. Standards: UL 894 and 1010. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mount devices where indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled in Section 26 05 00. C. See Specification Section 26 05 33 for device outlet box requirements. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 4 END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 01 - 1 SECTION 26 28 01 LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Low voltage circuit breakers. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 08 13 - Acceptance Testing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C37.13, Standard for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures. b. C37.16, Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit Protectors - Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and Application Recommendations. c. C37.17, Trip Devices for AC and General Purpose DC Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 489, Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures. b. 943, Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. c. 1066, Standard for Low-Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Reports: a. As-left condition of all circuit breakers that have adjustable settings. D. Refer to Section 01 81 33 – Cyber Security Requirements for required cyber security related submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Circuit breakers: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 01 - 2 a. Eaton. b. GE by ABB. c. Square D Company. Square D Company is the preferred manufacturer for the facility. d. Siemens. 2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Molded Case Type: 1. General: a. Standards: UL 489. b. Unit construction. c. Over-center, toggle handle operated. d. Quick-make, quick-break, independent of toggle handle operation. e. Manual and automatic operation. f. All poles open and close simultaneously. g. Three position handle: On, off and tripped. h. Molded-in ON and OFF markings on breaker cover. i. One-, two- or three-pole as indicated on the Drawings. j. Current and interrupting ratings as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Thermal magnetic type: a. Inverse time overload and instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a thermal magnetic element. b. Frame size 150 amp and below: 1) Non-interchangeable, non-adjustable thermal magnetic trip units. c. Frame sizes 225 to 400 amp (trip settings less than 400A): 1) Interchangeable and adjustable instantaneous thermal magnetic trip units. d. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Listed: 1) Standard: UL 943. 2) One- or two-pole as indicated on the Drawings. 3) Class A ground fault circuit. 4) Trip on 5 mA ground fault (4-6 mA range). 3. Solid state trip type: a. Inverse time overload, instantaneous short circuit and ground fault protection by means of a solid state trip element, associated current monitors and flux shunt trip mechanism. b. Frame size 400 amp to 1200 amp (trip settings between 400 and 1200A): 1) Standard rating. 2) Interchangeable current sensor or rating plug. 3) Adjustable long time pick-up setting. a) Adjustable from 50 to 100% of the current sensor or rating plug. 4) Adjustable short time pick-up setting. 5) Adjustable instantaneous pick-up. 6) Fixed ground fault pick-up, when indicated on the Drawings. c. Adjustable arc energy-reducing maintenance system. 1) Frame size 1200A or when indicated on the Drawings for less than 1200A frame size. 2) Activate and deactivate without opening door and exposing operators to energized parts. 3) System status indicator adjacent to activation switch. d. Frame size 1600 amp and above: 1) 100% rated. 2) Interchangeable current sensor or rating plug. 3) Adjustable long time pick-up setting. a) Adjustable from 50 to 100% of the current sensor or rating plug. 4) Adjustable long time delay setting. 5) Adjustable short time pick-up setting. 6) Adjustable instantaneous pick-up setting. 7) Adjustable ground fault pick-up setting, when indicated on the Drawings. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 01 - 3 8) Adjustable ground fault delay setting, when indicated on the Drawings. e. Adjustable arc energy-reducing maintenance system. 1) Activate and deactivate without opening door and exposing operators to energized parts. 2) System status indicator adjacent to activation switch. 4. Motor circuit protector: a. Adjustable instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a magnetic or solid state trip element. b. Sized for the connected motor. B. Low Voltage Power Type: 1. Inverse time overload, instantaneous short circuit and ground fault protection by means of a solid state trip element, associated current monitors and two-step stored energy trip mechanism. 2. Standards: IEEE C37.13, IEEE C37.16, IEEE C37.17, UL 1066. 3. 100% rated. 4. Electrically operated (EO) or manually operated (MO) as indicated on the Drawings. 5. Manually operated breakers: a. Trip unit power: Integral battery, Internal CPT of the electrical gear, or External 120 VAC source. 6. Electrically operated breakers: a. Relay Control switch. b. Trip unit power: Integral battery, Internal CPT of the electrical gear, or External 120 VAC source. c. Trip/close signal: External 120 VAC source. 7. Contact position indicator: Reversible 52a/52b contacts, quantity as indicated on the Drawings. 8. Current and interrupting ratings as indicated on the Drawings and a 30-cycle short-time withstand ratings equal to their symmetrical interrupting ratings, regardless of whether equipped with instantaneous trip protection or not. 9. Frame size 800 amp and above: a. Interchangeable current sensor or rating plug: b. Adjustable long time pick-up setting. 1) Adjustable from 50 to 100% of the current sensor or rating plug. c. Adjustable long time delay setting. d. Adjustable short time pick-up setting. e. Adjustable instantaneous pick-up setting. f. Adjustable ground fault pick-up setting, when indicated on the Drawings. g. Adjustable ground fault delay setting, when indicated on the Drawings. h. Adjustable arc energy-reducing maintenance system. 1) Frame size 1200A or larger or when indicated on the Drawings for 800A frame size. 2) Activate and deactivate without opening door and exposing operators to energized parts. 3) System status indicator adjacent to activation switch. i. Unit status indicator. j. Cause of trip indicator. k. Current display. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Current and interrupting ratings as indicated on the Drawings. B. Series rated systems not acceptable. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 01 - 4 C. Devices shall be ambient temperature compensated. D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Molded case circuit breakers shall incorporate the following, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings: a. Frame sizes 400 amp and less with trip setting less than 400A shall be thermal magnetic type. b. Frame sizes 500 amp and larger shall be solid state trip type. 2. Insulated case circuit breakers shall incorporate the following, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings: a. Set current sensor or rating plugs long time pick-up setting so that the indicated trip level is near the 75% trip point. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Adjustable Circuit Breakers: 1. Set all circuit breaker adjustable taps as defined on the Drawings and NFPA 70 requirements. B. Ground Fault Protection System: 1. Single source system: a. Main breaker using the residual sensing method system coordinated with individual feeder breakers using the residual sensing method. b. Main and feeder breakers: Utilize four individual current sensors; the phase sensors are integral to the circuit breaker and the neutral sensor is external to the circuit breaker. C. Testing: 1. Acceptance testing: See Specification Section 26 08 13. 3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Refer to Section 01 81 33 – Cyber-Security Requirements for cyber security related closeout requirements. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16.13 - 1 SECTION 26 28 16.13 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Separately mounted circuit breakers. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 28 01 - Low-Voltage Circuit Protective Devices. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. b. 1203, Standard for Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. Provide a table that associates equipment model number with equipment tag number. c. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Eaton. 2. GE by ABB. 3. Square D by Schneider Electric. Square D Company is the preferred manufacturer for the facility. 4. Siemens Corporation. 5. Appleton by Emerson Electric Co. 6. Crouse-Hinds by Eaton. 7. Killark by Hubbell. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Ratings: 1. Voltage, number of phases, number of wires, and current rating as indicated on the Drawings. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16.13 - 2 2. Assembly short circuit current and interrupting device rating as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Service Entrance Equipment rated when indicated on the Drawings. 4. 100% rated when 100% rated breakers are installed. B. Standards: UL 489 and UL 1203 for hazardous locations. C. Overcurrent and short circuit protective devices: 1. Molded case circuit breaker. 2. See Section 26 28 01 for overcurrent and short circuit protective device requirements. 3. Factory installed. D. NEMA 1 rated: 1. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 2. With or without knockouts, hinged or unhinged cover. 3. Breaker is front operable and padlockable in the OFF position. 4. Suitable for service entrance. E. NEMA 3R or NEMA 4 rated: 1. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 2. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door. 3. Front operating handle padlockable in the OFF position and interlocked to prevent door from opening when the breaker is ON. 4. Suitable for service entrance. F. NEMA 4X rated: 1. Body and cover: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. 2. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door. 3. Front operating handle padlockable in the OFF position and interlocked to prevent door from opening when the breaker is ON. 4. Suitable for service entrance. G. NEMA 7 and 9 rated: 1. Cast gray iron alloy or copper-free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub. 3. Gasketed cover bolted-down with stainless steel bolts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Front operating handle padlockable in the OFF position. 6. Suitable for service entrance. H. NEMA 12 rated: 1. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 2. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door. 3. Front operating handle padlockable in the OFF position and interlocked to prevent door from opening when the breaker is ON. 4. Suitable for service entrance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Permitted uses of NEMA 1 enclosure: 1. Surface or flush mounted in areas designated dry in architecturally finished areas. C. Permitted uses of NEMA 3R or NEMA 4 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16.13 - 3 D. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive. E. Permitted uses of NEMA 7 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as Class I hazardous. F. Permitted uses of NEMA 9 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as Class II hazardous. G. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in non-architecturally finished areas. H. Equipment Marking and Documentation: 1. Provide labeling per NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. 2. Service equipment: a. Arc-flash hazard warning label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.16(A) and (B)) b. Available fault current label and documentation of the calculations made for compliance with marking requirements. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.24) 3. Other than service equipment: a. Arc-flash hazard warning label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 110.16(A)) b. Available fault current label. (Ref. NFPA 70 Article 408.6) 4. Identify (tag) all equipment and equipment components. 5. Provide labels and tags in accordance with Section 10 14 00. 6. Available fault current and other required label data from Coordinated Power System Study as required by the contract documents. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 16.16 - 1 SECTION 26 28 16.16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Safety switches. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 28 01 - Low-Voltage Circuit Protective Devices. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. KS 1, Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 98, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. Provide a Summary Table or use Exhibit A that associates the safety switch features with connected equipment tag number. Exhibit A indicates minimum data required. c. See Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following safety switch manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Eaton. 2. GE by ABB. 3. Square D by Schneider Electric. Square D Company is the preferred manufacturer for the facility. 4. Siemens Corporation. 5. Appleton by Emerson Electric Co. 6. Crouse-Hinds by Eaton. 7. Killark by Hubbell. 2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES A. General: 1. Non-fusible or fusible as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Suitable for service entrance when required. 3. NEMA Type HD heavy-duty construction. 4. Switch blades will be fully visible in the OFF position with the enclosure door open. 5. Quick-make/quick-break operating mechanism. 6. Deionizating arc chutes. 7. Manufacture double-break rotary action shaft and switchblade as one common component. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 16.16 - 2 8. Clear line shields to prevent accidental contact with line terminals. 9. Operating handle (except NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 rated enclosures): a. Red and easily recognizable. b. Padlockable in the OFF position. c. Interlocked to prevent door from opening when the switch is in the ON position with a defeater mechanism. B. Ratings: 1. Horsepower rated of connected motor. 2. Voltage and amperage: As indicated on the Drawings. 3. Short circuit withstand: a. Non-fused: 10,000A. b. Fused: 200,000A. C. Accessories, when indicated in PART 3 of this Specification Section or on the Drawings: 1. Neutral kits. 2. Ground lug kits. 3. Auxiliary contact kits: a. Opens before main switch. b. Rated 10A at 125/250 VAC. c. One N.O. and one N.C. contact. D. Enclosures: 1. NEMA 1 rated: a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. b. With or without knockouts, hinged and lockable door. 2. NEMA 3R rated: a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. b. With or without knockouts, hinged and lockable door. 3. NEMA 4 rated: a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged, gasketed and lockable door. 4. NEMA 4X rated (metallic): a. Body and cover: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door. 5. NEMA 4X rated (nonmetallic): a. Body and cover: Ultraviolet light protected fiberglass-reinforced polyester boxes. b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged, gasketed and lockable door. 6. NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 rated: a. Cast gray iron alloy or copper-free aluminum with manufacturer's standard finish. b. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub. c. Gasketed cover bolted-down with stainless steel bolts. d. External mounting flanges. e. Operating handle padlockable in the OFF position. 7. NEMA 12 rated: a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door. E. Overcurrent and short circuit protective devices: 1. Fuses or Circuit Breakers. 2. See Specification Section 26 28 01 for overcurrent and short circuit protective device requirements. F. Standards: NEMA KS 1, UL 98. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 16.16 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Install switches adjacent to the equipment they are intended to serve unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Permitted uses of NEMA 1 enclosure: 1. Surface or flush mounted in areas designated dry in architecturally finished areas. D. Permitted uses of NEMA 3R enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in exterior location for HVAC equipment only. E. Permitted uses of NEMA 4 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet. F. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X metallic enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive. G. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X nonmetallic enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as corrosive. 2. Surface mounted in areas designated as highly corrosive. H. Permitted uses of NEMA 7 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as Class I hazardous. I. Permitted uses of NEMA 9 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as Class II hazardous. J. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in non-architecturally finished areas. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 16.16 - 4 EXHIBIT A Safety Switch Summary Table Equipment Tag Switch Model Number Rated Amps Fused / Non-fused Enclosure Type Accessories Example Per MFR 60A NF NEMA 4X non- metallic Ground lug, Aux Contact Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 1 SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Type PC1 SPD - High exposure locations (switchgear, switchboard, panelboard or motor control center), integrally mounted. 2. Type PC3 SPD - Medium exposure locations (switchboard, panelboard and motor control center), integrally mounted. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. b. C62.41.1, Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits. c. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits. d. C62.45, Recommended Practice on Surge Testing For Equipment Connected to Low- Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits. 2. Military Standard: a. MIL-STD-220B, Method of Insertion Loss Measurement. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1283, Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. b. 1449, Standard for Surge Protective Devices. B. Qualifications: 1. Provide devices from a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the development, design, testing, listing and manufacturing of SPDs of the types and ratings required for a period of 10 years or more and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service. a. Upon request, suppliers or manufacturers shall provide a list of not less than three customer references showing satisfactory operation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Clamping Voltage: 1. The applied surge shall be induced at the 90 degrees phase angle of the applied system frequency voltage. 2. The voltage measured at the end of the 6 inches output leads of the SPD and from the zero voltage reference to the peak of the surge. B. Let-Through Voltage: 1. The applied surge shall be induced at the 90 degrees phase angle of the applied system frequency voltage. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 2 2. The voltage measured at the end of the 6 inches output leads of the SPD and from the system peak voltage to the peak of the surge. C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The maximum steady state voltage at which the SPD device can operate and meet its specification within its rated temperature. D. Maximum Surge Current: 1. The maximum 8 x 20 microsecond surge current pulse the SPD device is capable of surviving on a single-impulse basis without suffering either performance degradation or more than 10% deviation of clamping voltage at a specified surge current. 2. Listed by mode, since number and type of components in any SPD may very by mode. E. MCC: Motor Control Center. F. Protection Modes: This parameter identifies the modes for which the SPD has directly connected protection elements, i.e., line-to-neutral (L-N), line-to-line (L-L), line-to-ground (L- G), neutral-to-ground (N-G). G. Surge Current per Phase: 1. The per phase rating is the total surge current capacity connected to a given phase conductor. a. For example, a wye system surge current per phase would equal L-N plus L-G; a delta system surge current per phase would equal L-L plus L-G. b. The N-G mode is not included in the per phase calculation. H. System Peak Voltage: The electrical equipment supply voltage sine wave peak (i.e., for a 480/277 V system the L-L peak voltage is 679V and the L-N peak voltage is 392 V). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Manufacturer's qualifications. b. Standard catalog cut sheet. c. Electrical and mechanical drawing showing unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection details and layout diagram of the unit. d. Testing procedures and testing equipment data. e. Create a Product Data Sheet for each different model number of SPD provided (i.e., Model XYZ with disconnect and Model XYZ without disconnect, each require a Product Data Sheet). 1) Data in the Product Data Sheet heading: a) SPD Type Number per PART 2 of the Specification. b) Manufacturer’s Name. c) Product model number. 2) Data in the Product Data Sheet body: a) Column one: Specified value/feature of every paragraph of PART 2 of the Specification. b) Column two: Manufacturer’s certified value confirming the product meets the specified value/feature. c) Name of the nationally recognized testing laboratory that preformed the tests. d) Warranty information. 3) Data in the Product Data Sheet closing: a) Signature of the manufacturer’s official (printed and signed). b) Title of the official. 4) Date of signature. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for: a. The mechanics and administration of submittal process. b. The content of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 3 2. Warranty. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Minimum of a five year Warranty from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Standards: IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE C62.45, MIL-STD 220B, UL 1283, UL 1449. 2.2 TYPE PC1 SPD A. Product: 1. SPD tag number or electrical equipment tag number SPD is connected to. 2. Integrally mounted in switchgear, switchboards or MCCs. 3. Hybrid solid-state high performance suppression system. a. Do not use a suppression system with gas tubes, spark gaps or other components which might short or crowbar the line resulting in interruption of normal power flow to connected loads. 4. Do not connect multiple SPD modules in series to achieve the specified performance. 5. Designed for parallel connection. 6. Field connection: Use mechanical or compression lugs for each phase, neutral and ground that will accept bus bar or #10 through #1/0 conductors. 7. Device monitor: a. Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators and Form C dry contact(s) that monitors the on-line status of each mode of the units suppression filter system and power loss in any of the phases. b. A fuse status only monitor system is not acceptable. B. Operating Voltage: The nominal unit operating voltage and configuration as indicated on Drawings. C. Modes of Protection: All modes. 1. Three phase (delta): L-L, L-G. 2. Three phase (wye): L-N, L-L, L-G and N-G. 3. Single phase (2-pole): L-L, L-N, L-G and N-G. 4. Single phase: L-N, L-G and N-G. D. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. E. Operating Frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. F. Short Circuit Rating: Equal to or greater than rating of equipment SPD is connected to. G. Maximum Surge Current: 240,000 A per phase, 120,000 A per mode minimum. H. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: 4000 IEEE C High waveform impulses with no degradation greater than 10% deviation of the clamping voltage. I. SPD Protection: 1. Integral unit level and/or component level overcurrent fuses and sustained overvoltage thermal cutout device. 2. An IEEE C High waveforms shall not cause the fuse to open and render the SPD inoperable. J. Maximum Clamping Voltages: Dynamic test at the 90 degree phase angle including 6 inches lead length and measured from the zero voltage reference: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 4 System Voltage Test Mode IEEE C62.41 UL 1449 C High V & I Wave B Combination Wave L-L < 250 V L-N < 150 V L-L 1470 V 1000 V 800 V L-N 850 V 600 V 500 V L-G 1150 V 800 V 600 V N-G 1150 V 800 V 600 V L-L > 250 V L-N > 150 V L-L 2700 V 2000 V 1800 V L-N 1500 V 1150 V 1000 V L-G 2000 V 1550 V 1200 V N-G 2000 V 1550 V 1200 V K. EMI-RFI Noise Rejection: Attenuation greater than 30 dB for frequencies between 100 kHz and 100 MHz. 2.3 TYPE PC3 SPD A. Product: 1. SPD tag number or electrical equipment tag number SPD is connected to. 2. Integrally mounted in a switchboard, panelboards or motor control centers. 3. Hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. a. Do not use gas tubes, spark gaps or other components in suppression system which might short or crowbar the line resulting in interruption of normal power flow to connected loads. 4. Do not connect multiple SPD modules in series to achieve the specified performance. 5. Designed for parallel connection. 6. Field connection: Use mechanical or compression lugs for each phase, neutral and ground that will accept bus bar or #10 through #1/0 conductors. 7. Device monitor: a. Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators and Form C contact(s) that monitor the on-line status of each mode of the units suppression filter system or power loss in any of the phases. b. A fuse status only monitor system is not acceptable. B. Operating Voltage: The nominal unit operating voltage and configuration as indicated on the Drawings. C. Modes of Protection: All modes. 1. Three phase (delta): L-L, L-G. 2. Three phase (wye): L-N, L-L, L-G and N-G. 3. Single phase (2 pole): L-L, L-N, L-G and N-G. 4. Single phase: L-N, L-G and N-G. D. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. E. Operating Frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. F. Short Circuit Rating: Equal to or greater than rating of equipment SPD is connected to. G. Maximum Surge Current: 160,000 A per phase, 80,000 A per mode minimum. H. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: 4000 IEEE C High or B combination waveform impulses with no degradation of more than 10% deviation of the clamping voltage. I. SPD Protection: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 5 1. Integral unit level and/or component level overcurrent fuses and sustained overvoltage thermal cutout device. 2. An IEEE B combination wave shall not cause the fuse to open and render the SPD inoperable. J. Maximum Clamping Voltages: Dynamic test at the 90 degrees phase angle including 6 inches lead length and measured from the zero voltage reference: System Voltage Test Mode IEEE C62.41 UL 1449 B Comb. Wave B3 Ring Wave L-L < 250 V L-N < 150 V L-L 1000 V 700 V 800 V L-N 600 V 400 V 500 V L-G 800 V 550 V 600 V N-G 800 V 550 V 600 V L-L > 250 V L-N > 150 V L-L 2000 V 1400 V 1800 V L-N 1150 V 800 V 1000 V L-G 1550 V 1000 V 1200 V N-G 1550 V 1000 V 1200 V K. EMI-RFI Noise Rejection: Attenuation greater than 30 dB for frequencies between 100 kHz and 100 MHz. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. SPD approvals and ratings shall be obtained by manufacturers from nationally recognized testing laboratories. B. The SPD are to be tested as a complete SPD system including: 1. Integral unit level and/or component level fusing. 2. Neutral and ground shall not be bonded during testing. 3. 6 inches lead lengths. 4. Integral disconnect switch when provided. C. The “as installed” SPD system including the manufacturers recommended circuit breaker, the SPD is connected to, will not open when tested with a IEEE C3 combination waveform. D. Tests to be performed in accordance with IEEE C62.45: 1. Clamping voltage performance testing using IEEE C62.41 Category waveforms. 2. Single pulse surge current capacity test. 3. Repetitive surge current capacity testing. 4. Spectrum analysis for EMI-RFI noise rejection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Type PC1 and PC3 SPD: 1. Connected in parallel to the equipment. 2. Install in dedicated electrical equipment compartment, bucket or panelboard box at the factory before shipment. 3. Provide leads that are as short and straight as possible. 4. Maximum lead length: 12 inches. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 43 13 - 6 5. Minimum lead size: #2 stranded AWG or bus bar. 6. Connect leads to the equipment to be protected by one of the following means: a. Through a circuit breaker or molded case switch mounted in the equipment. b. Use manufacturer recommended circuit breaker size. c. Circuit breaker or switch to be operable from the equipment exterior or from behind a hinged door. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PHOTOVOLTAIC MODULES 26 99 00 - 1 SECTION 26 99 00 PHOTOVOLTAIC MODULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for equipment, materials and installation of photovoltaic modules. 2. Contractor shall provide PV modules to attain the nominal maximum power rating (Pmax) DC capacity specified as determined by Contractor’s module selection and the requirements in the Project Drawings. 3. The PV system design is based on the Qcells Duo ML-G12S 660Wp module. Alternate, equivalent panels are acceptable per the submittal process and the Owner’s approval. Alternate modules may require system re-design, and require Engineer’s approval. 4. All proposed equipment shall work together to form a fully functioning system without adjustments, derates, or field modification. 5. Contractor shall propose a recommended quantity of spare modules in excess of proposed project installed DC capacity. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ACC Global Compliance: a. CE Mark of Conformity. 2. ETL Testing Laboratories (ETL). 3. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC): a. 61215, Crystalline Silicon Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules. b. 61646, Thin-Film Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules. c. 61730, Photovoltaic (PV) Module Safety Qualification. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories of Canadian (C-UL). 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 790, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. b. 1703, Standard for Safety of Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels. B. Miscellaneous: 1. Install per manufacturer guidelines and applicable NEC requirements for compliant installation, for the listed purpose. 2. Component is installed as part of the project completion and workmanship review. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See other Specification Sections for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's specifications, certifications, and installation instructions. c. Module flash data and other pertinent electrical data for design confirmation. d. All modules shall come with appropriate label listing information and attach to each module. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PHOTOVOLTAIC MODULES 26 99 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Ratings: 1. All PV Products for delivery to the United States shall meet the following specifications: a. Certified to UL 1703 and listed by an OSHA recognized NRTL, including the Class C Fire Rating pursuant to UL 790 and UL 1703. b. IEC 61215 (for crystalline modules) or IEC 61646 (for thin film modules). c. IEC 61730. d. UL 790, Class C. e. All applicable NEC requirements, including, without limitation, series fuse rating requirements. f. CEC approved and listed. 2. CE Mark of Conformity. 3. PV modules shall be supplied with a copy of UL and IEC certification reports indicating compliance for the model numbers used and indicating the certification is in force as of the dates of module manufacture. C. PV modules shall be new and certified to IEC 61730 - Photovoltaic (PV) module safety qualification and IEC 61215, shall be UL listed and shall meet any certifications / listings as required by the authority/(ies) having jurisdiction. D. PV modules shall be supplied with documentation confirming that the PV modules have been manufactured in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. PV modules must be of the same manufacturer and model number and consistent sub-components. E. PV module supplier shall be certified to ISO9001:2000 and ISO140001:2004. F. PV modules and ancillary materials shall be rated to withstand and be capable of continuous operation for the full range of “Ambient Temperature Rating Range” design conditions as listed in the Drawings and Specifications. G. The module /module framing shall have load ratings that are compatible with the site design conditions including wind and snow loads. H. Wire leads and connectors shall be factory-installed with lengths appropriate for the module connection scheme. Connectors shall be locking, Amphenol or equivalent, and consistent throughout the design. Provide USE-2 or RHH or RHW-2 wire, and sunlight-resistant wire when exposed to sunlight. I. PV modules shall be bifacial, crystalline silicon. Modules shall incorporate anti-reflective coated (ARC) glass with an aluminum frame, bypass diodes and connectors. J. Loading: 1. Frames capable of withstanding loads of not less than 50 PSI (2400Pa) in a variety of mounting methods. 2. Frames capable of meeting IEC extended snow load requirements of not less than 112 PSF (5400 Pa) when using traditional mounting at the bolt holes. K. PV modules shall have a power tolerance of +5W/-5W. L. PV module binning and ratings shall be clearly marked on packaging to facilitate Owner’s efforts of matching PV module bin class rating within strings to minimize mismatch losses for the project. M. PV manufacturer shall provide factory flash test results in accordance with IEC 61853-1, and temperature coefficients at: STC, nominal operating cell temperature (NOTC), low irradiance conditions (LIC), high temperature conditions (HTC), and low temperature conditions (LTC). Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PHOTOVOLTAIC MODULES 26 99 00 - 3 N. PV modules shall be have a minimum rating of 1,000V DC. O. PV modules shall be rated as a Top Performer according to the latest PVEL Reliability Scorecard, or shall be tested in accordance with the full PVEL PQP testing program and receive Top Performer ratings, or other Owner approved equivalent testing and certification program. Supplied PV modules shall be manufactured to the PVEL tested Bill of Materials (BOM) specification to ensure performance, durability, and reliability match that of the tested modules. P. Contractor shall be responsible for the performance of all inspection and testing activities as set forth in, and as required to demonstrate compliance with, the drawings, specifications, referenced standards, applicable codes and industry practices. Q. PV modules shall not utilize top or back sheet coatings made from fluoropolymers such as per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances (PFAS) or GenX. PV module manufacturer to provide evidence that PFAS, GenX, or similar chemicals are not used in the module manufacturing process. Letter confirmation from the module manufacturer is sufficient. R. PV modules shall have a minimum 10-year manufacturer’s warranty covering defect and workmanship. S. PV modules shall have a minimum 25-year manufacturer’s warranty covering product performance that incorporates a degradation guarantee with peak power rating at year 25 not less than 84.3% of the original peak power rating identified on the product nameplate. T. The contractor shall provide information from the PV module manufacturer identifying the loading basis in accordance with IEC 61215. U. PV modules will be installed on a fixed-tilt, ground-mount system. V. Grounding of PV modules will be performed by use of WEEB system or a self-grounding racking system that meets the applicable requirements of UL 3703 and UL 2703 and their referenced requirements for grounding. PV module design offered shall be compatible with this grounding method. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Module installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Contractor shall be responsible for the performance of all inspection and testing activities to demonstrate compliance with the drawings, specifications, referenced standards, applicable codes, and industry practices. C. Ensure wire bending radius for all conductors meets NEC requirements from the modules. D. Electrical installation is secured and properly grounded. E. Bolted connections are torqued per manufacturer and NEC requirements. F. Source circuit wires should be organized and bent in a uniform manner. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction INVERTERS 26 99 03 - 1 SECTION 26 99 03 INVERTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for equipment, materials and installation of PV inverters. 2. Contractor shall provide PV inverters to attain the nominal AC capacity specified as determined by Contractor’s inverter selection and the requirements in the Project Drawings. 3. The PV system design is based on the SMA TriPowerX 50kW inverters. Alternate, equivalent inverters are acceptable per the submittal process and the Owner’s approval. Alternate inverters may require system re-design and require Engineer’s approval. 4. All proposed equipment shall work together to form a fully functioning system without adjustments, derates, or field modification. 5. The PV system is intended to operate in parallel with the utility service provider. Contractor shall coordinate with the Power Company to ensure system compliance. 6. This system is intended to connect to the existing Plant electrical system at one point, the point of common coupling (POCC) or point of intersection (POI). This connection shall be in compliance with the Power Company standards. 1.2 QUALTIY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Electrical Safety Authority (ESA). 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 1547, Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems. b. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): a. 9000, Quality Management Systems -- Fundamentals and Vocabulary. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) 110.26, Installation Requirements: Basics of Load Center. 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1741, Inverters, Converts, Controllers and Interconnection System Requirements for Use with Distributed Energy Resources. B. Miscellaneous: 1. On-site installation guidelines to meet applicable NEC, NESC, Utility, or other local Authority Having Jurisdiction code. 2. Product shall be listed for its intended use. Listing must be to a UL standard, tested and certified by an OSHA recognized NRTL. 3. Design manuals for system engineering and planning purposes. 4. Appropriate packing for delivery and procedures for equipment un-packaging and event reporting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See other Specification Sections for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 3. Supplier to provide the following information: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction INVERTERS 26 99 03 - 2 a. Manufacturer's specifications sheets. b. Design or planning documentation. c. Installation and un-packing/handling instructions. d. Typical Shop Drawings for inverter units. e. Typical Shop Drawings for pre-packaged solutions. f. Manufacturing quality control documentation. g. Explanation of advanced grid support features. h. SCADA systems offered/explanation of compatibility with Owner SCADA system. i. Applicable value engineering documentation. j. Detailed diagram of mounting structure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Inverters shall be compliant with IEEE 929-2000 and IEEE-1547-2003 and IEEE 519. C. All same-sized inverters supplied must be of the same manufacturer and model number. D. Provide inverter utilizing a wall-mount or support structure mounting system. E. Provide inverter with anti-islanding protection to prevent back-feeding inverter generated power to the grid in the event of a utility outage. Anti-islanding protection must be listed to UL 1741. F. Overcurrent protection and ground-fault protection must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70. G. Provide inverter with self-diagnostics routines, and remote and local display of operating status and remote monitoring capabilities. H. Inverters shall have network capability. I. Provide inverter with integrated monitoring system and metering system. J. Ratings: 1. Capacity: As required to meet the project capacity requirements. 2. Phase: 3 K. Voltage: Inverter output 480 Vac. L. Match inverter DC input to the design of the PV module array outputs and account for the following: 1. The inverter low voltage is 50% of the maximum system voltage, to account for 25 year degradation. 2. Voltage decrease due to high temperatures at project site. M. Array-to-inverter kW ratio must not exceed manufacturer limitations. N. Frequency: 60 Hz. O. Power factor: Capable of 0.90 leading or lagging. P. Efficiency: CEC efficiency as verified by CEC SAND2007-5036 to have a weighted average inverter power conversion efficiency of 98% or greater. Q. Full power operating temperature range: -40 DegC to 50 DegC. 1. If other, specify operating range. R. Integrated DC and AC voltage surge protection. S. AC interface: specify maximum number of conductors and size per phase. 1. All terminations to be crimp on conductors and bolt on to inverter bus. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction INVERTERS 26 99 03 - 3 2. All terminations rated 90 DegC for copper or aluminum. 3. Specify neutral/grounding requirements if any. T. Enclosure (inverter specific): 1. NEMA 4X rated for outdoor equipment. 2. If other, specify rating. U. Specify maximum operating elevation at full power. 1. Specify derate curve for higher elevations. V. Assembly and all components listed for use with max 1000 Vdc and continuous duty. W. Specify MPPT operating range. X. Integrated fused DC input combiner. 1. Specify maximum number of inputs. 2. Specify maximum fuse size. 3. Specify maximum conductor size. 4. All terminations preferred to be crimp on conductors and bolt on inverter bus. 5. All terminations rated for 90 DegC for copper or aluminum. Y. Array ground configuration: ungrounded. Z. DC input monitoring for voltage and current at each fused DC input. AA. DC conduit entry: Bottom entry only. BB. Communications protocol: Ethernet/IP to coordinate with Plant SCADA system. CC. Certifications: 1. Listed to UL 1741 standards. 2. Inverters operating at 1000VDC and with advanced grid support features such as voltage and frequency ride-through and VAR support. 3. IEEE 1547 compliant. 4. Comply with the latest applicable ANSI and FCC standards and addenda, and inspected before commissioning, testing, and operation of the system. Submit documentation validating system performance requirements. 5. Inverter must be approved by FCC Part 15, Class A as an unintentional radiator. DD. Where a circuit grounding connection is not designed to be automatically interrupted as part of the ground-fault protection system required by Article 690.5, a switch or circuit breaker used as a disconnecting means shall not have a pole in the grounded conductor. EE. Means shall be provided to disconnect equipment such as inverters, batteries, charge controllers, and the like from all ungrounded conductors of all sources. If the equipment is energized from more than one source, the disconnecting means shall be grouped and identified. FF. The Inverters shall have a minimum 5-year manufacturer’s warranty covering defects and workmanship that provides for all parts and labor required to replace or repair warranty-eligible failures. GG. Materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new and unused, of current manufacture, of highest grade, and assembled in a workmanlike manner. HH. The inverter for the proposed solar electric system shall be identified for use in solar photovoltaic systems. All equipment shall be UL approved or equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, State and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction INVERTERS 26 99 03 - 4 B. Contractor shall inspect all packages for damage upon delivery. Any damaged packages shall be opened so the inverter and equipment can be inspected. Any damage to the packaging or equipment shall be documented and reported to the owner immediately. Inverters to be stored shall be properly replaced in the packaging for storage. C. Inverters shall be stored in a secure and clean location per the manufacturer’s recommendations and documentation. Inverters shall be protected from the harsh environment such as excessive heat, cold, moisture, dust, snow, etc. D. Inverters shall be handled and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and documentation. All instructions and reference documents shall be reviewed and understood by the contractor prior to handling and unpacking the equipment. 1. Reference the manufacturer’s instructions for unpacking the equipment. Inverters shall be transported by means outlined in the manufacturer’s documentation only. E. Contractor is to obtain all electrical approvals by the authorities having jurisdiction, approval from the utility company, and approval from the Owner prior to energizing any inverters. F. Commissioning, inspection, and testing of the inverter shall be properly documented and submitted to the Owner prior to energizing the inverter. G. PV array DC grounding configurations may vary by manufacturer and technology. H. The grounding configuration shall be noted by the Contractor for safety and proper installation. I. Warning and safety labels properly placed. J. Inverter is labeled and identified to match the naming convention shown on the plans. K. Provide sufficient service access and equipment setbacks per NEC 110.26. Ensure enclosure doors are able to swing a full 180 degrees at installed location. L. The contractor is to ensure that working clearances meet the requirements of all applicable codes and the manufacturer's requirements. Any discrepancies shall be reported to the owner immediately. M. Inverters shall be installed on a level surface. The inverter shall be secured to the foundation utilizing all of the provided mounting points. Reference the manufacturer's documentation for location and size of mounting points. N. All disconnect switches shall be in the open position during installation and shall remain in the open position until proper testing, inspection, and commissioning has been completed. O. Do not open the inverters electrical cabinets when it is raining or when humidity exceeds 95%. P. All fasteners shall be torqued per the manufacturer’s documentation. Q. It is prohibited to modify the inverter or install equipment not explicitly recommended by the manufacturer. Do not store documents, instructions, plans, or any other foreign material not intended to be part of the system inside the inverters cabinets. R. Components of the inverters may be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). When handling the electrical components observe all ESD safety regulations. S. All conductors shall be connected to the inverter per the manufacturer’s recommendations and documentation making note of recommended terminations, torque values, and bolt stack up details if provided. All buss bars, conductors, and terminations shall be clean prior to making the connection. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction METEOROLOGY STATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 26 99 04 - 1 SECTION 26 99 04 METEOROLOGY STATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pre-package meteorological station for the ground-mount photovoltaic system. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Refer to all Division 26 for requirements. 2. 1.2 QUALTIY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Electrical Safety Authority (ESA). 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 1547, Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems. b. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): a. 9000, Quality Management Systems -- Fundamentals and Vocabulary. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) 110.26, Installation Requirements: Basics of Load Center. 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1741, Inverters, Converts, Controllers and Interconnection System Requirements for Use with Distributed Energy Resources. B. Qualifications: 1. Provide devices from a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the development, design, testing, listing and manufacturing of meteorology stations for the PV system for a period of 3 years or more and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service. a. Upon request, suppliers or manufacturers shall provide a list of not less than three customer references showing satisfactory operation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2. Supplier to provide the following information: a. Manufacturer's specifications sheets. b. Design or planning documentation. c. Installation and un-packing/handling instructions. d. Typical Shop Drawings for pre-packaged solutions. e. Manufacturing quality control documentation. f. SCADA interface with Owner SCADA system. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction METEOROLOGY STATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 26 99 04 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. NorCal 2. Campbell Scientific 3. Kippzonen 4. Or approved equal. 2.2 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. MET Components: 1. Self-supporting weather station tower, rack-mounted. 2. Wind speed and direction sensors. 3. Temperature and relative humidity probe. 4. Barometric pressure. 5. Precipitation for rain gauge. 6. Global Horizontal Irradiance (GHI) pyranometer. 7. Plane-Of-Array Irradiance (POA) pyranometer. 8. Soiling station. 9. Data logger with 24VDC power supply. 10. SCADA interface for connection to the SCADA system. 11. PV module temperature sensors. 12. All sensor and power cables as required for connection to the sensors. a. Sensor and communication cable splices are not allowed. 13. All associated hardware, crossarm and brackets for installation of all devices. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, State and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations. C. All sensors are installed on the weather tower structure except the following sensors which are installed at the nearest PV array: 1. POA pyranometers. 2. PV module temperature sensors. 3. Soiling station. 4. All associated cables to the data logger. D. Contractor to provide hardware for mounting the POA, soiling station and wire supports as required at the nearest PV array rack per design drawings. E. Contractor shall be responsible for designing the tower support connection to the equipment rack. F. Contractor to design and provide (1) 20A, 1P, 120VAC power supply to the MET tower. G. Commissioning, inspection, and testing shall be properly documented and submitted to the Owner. H. Contractor shall inspect all packages for damage upon delivery. Any damage to the packaging or equipment shall be documented and reported to the owner immediately. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction METEOROLOGY STATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 26 99 04 - 3 I. All conductors shall be connected to the inverter per the manufacturer’s recommendations and documentation making note of recommended terminations, torque values, and bolt stack up details if provided. All buss bars, conductors, and terminations shall be clean prior to making, the connection. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Site clearing Work, including: a. General provisions for site clearing Work. b. Preparation for site clearing Work. c. Clearing and grubbing. d. Tree protection, selective removals, and selective trimming. e. Disposal and cleaning. f. Stripping and stockpiling of topsoil. B. Related Requirements: Include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terms indicated below are not defined terms indicated with initial capital letters but, when used in this Section, have the meanings indicated below: a. “Arborist” means Subcontractor retained to perform Work requiring a specialist in trees, shrubs, brush, other vegetation of the types existing at the Site, and possessing not less than the required qualifications indicated in this Section. b. “Clearing and grubbing” means removing and disposing of all: (1) trees, brush, and other vegetation, logs, and similar items (“clearing”); and (2) stumps, roots, logs, rubbish, and debris on or in the soil (“grubbing”) after Clearing. Clearing and grubbing includes grinding and removing of stumps. When clearing and grubbing, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, is complete, the Site will be ready for grading and other new construction. c. “Demolition” means removal, whether in whole or in part, of existing human-made construction, such as removal of buildings, structures, and building systems; site work (such as pavement, curbs, sidewalks, gutters) and the like; Underground Facilities; and other existing construction. d. “Selective removal” means removal of specific trees, shrubs, brush, and other vegetation, whether as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or as directed at the Site by Engineer. e. “Selective trimming” means removal of selected parts of trees, shrubs, brush, and other vegetation, performed by arborist, for the purpose of either: (1) allowing installation of new construction adjacent to or through the tree, shrub, brush, or vegetation, or )2) removing damaged or unhealthy growth, to allow balance of the subject tree, shrub, brush, or vegetation to continue normal, healthy growth. f. “Site clearing” means all the Work required by this Section and related Drawings. g. “Topsoil” means existing material at the Site, visible after clearing and grubbing, to be stripped, when such material is friable, clay loam, surface soil present in depth of not less than four inches. Topsoil shall be free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over two-inch diameter and other objectionable material. Topsoil required for planting and landscaping Work in the Specifications of Division 32 may differ from the meaning indicated in this Section. B. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 2 a. C700, Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated. b. D448, Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS – NOT USED 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Permits and Approvals: a. Submit copy of each permit required and obtained for site clearing Work, issued by authority having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Filter Fabric: 1. In accordance with requirements for temporary erosion and sediment controls indicated in Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. B. Drainage Fill: 1. Selected crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, washed. 2. Size 24 (in accordance with ASTM D448), with 90 to 100 percent passing 2.5-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing 3/4-inch sieve. C. For other materials needed for site clearing Work, such as stone, topsoil, or other, comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE CLEARING – GENERAL A. Limits of Site Clearing Work: 1. Limits of site clearing Work are shown and indicated on the Drawings. B. General Provisions for Site Clearing: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, and incidentals necessary and required to perform site clearing Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Perform site clearing Work to avoid creating nuisances, pollution, and preventable adverse effects on the environment. 3. Excavation required for site clearing shall comply with Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill. 4. Requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction: a. Perform site clearing Work in accordance with Laws and Regulations. b. Obtain, pay for, and comply with permits required for site clearing Work. Obtain from authorities having jurisdiction and furnish copy of each permit as a Submittal. 5. Site clearing Work shall comply with ANSI A300 and applicable ISA standards indicated in this Section’s “References” Article, unless the Contract Documents indicate more-stringent requirements. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Permits and Approvals: 1. Do not commence site clearing Work until necessary permits and approvals are obtained and copies furnished to Engineer as Submittals. B. Delineation of Limits of Site Clearing Work Areas: 1. Locate and clearly flag at the Site: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 3 a. Limits of site clearing Work. b. Trees, shrubs, vegetation, and other materials to remain within limits of site clearing Work. c. Trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to be selectively trimmed. d. Trees, shrubs, and vegetation to be selectively removed. e. Salvageable trees, shrubs, and vegetation (to be relocated) within limits of site clearing Work. 2. Flagging: a. Flagging shall be high-visibility type. Where necessary, provide lath or stakes driven into the ground, with flagging, to clearly delineate limits. b. Provide different-colored flagging for each type of delineation required by this Article. c. Promptly replace lost, moved, or destroyed flagging until Engineer concurs that flagging is no longer needed. 3. Review with Engineer: a. Before starting site clearing Work, other than flagging, review at the Site with Engineer. b. Make corrections as necessary. c. Review all trees, 6-inch diameter (measured one foot above ground) and larger, to be removed or selectively trimmed. d. Review with Engineer at the Site trees and shrubs to be selectively trimmed, to reach mutual agreement on extent of selective trimming required. C. Protection: Establish protection of trees, shrubs, and vegetation to remain, in accordance with this Section’s Article, “Tree Protection, Selective Removals, and Selective Trimming”, and other applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. D. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controls: 1. Provide applicable temporary erosion and sediment controls before commencing clearing and grubbing and topsoil stripping Work. 2. Comply with temporary erosion and sediment control requirements of Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls. 3. Continue providing temporary erosion and sediment controls as clearing and grubbing and topsoil stripping and stockpiling Work progresses into previously uncleared, ungrubbed areas of the Site... 3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clearing and Grubbing – General: 1. Remove and dispose of all materials constituting clearing and grubbing Work within limits shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. After grubbing Work is complete, properly fill holes resulting from grubbing before commencing site grading Work. B. Trees and Shrubs Improperly Destroyed or Damaged: 1. Refer to this Section’s Article, “Tree Protection, Selective Removals, and Selective Trimming”. C. Trees and Shrubs to Remain: 1. Trees and shrubs to remain shall be protected, and trimmed where necessary or required, in accordance with this Section’s Article, “Tree Protection, Selective Removals, and Selective Trimming”. 3.4 TREE PROTECTION, SELECTIVE REMOVALS, AND SELECTIVE TRIMMING A. General Provisions for Tree Protection, Selective Removals, and Selective Trimming: 1. Provide temporary fencing, barricades, or guarding measures, as recommended by arborist, outside drip line of trees and shrubs to remain. 2. Protect root systems from damage caused by noxious materials, storm water runoff, site clearing, planting and landscaping, other Work, and storage of materials and equipment. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 4 Protect root systems from flooding, erosion, and excessive wetting resulting from dewatering of excavations, drainage of tanks, and other construction activities. 3. Fires are not allowed under or adjacent to trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. 4. Do not store matter resulting from site clearing or demolition, topsoil, or other excavated material within drip line of trees and shrubs to remain. Vehicles are not allowed within drip line. Restrict foot, vehicle and equipment traffic to prevent compaction of soil over root systems. Where such activities are unavoidable, and only as acceptable to Engineer, provide temporary, continuous, heavy-duty wood planking effectively fastened together and capable of distributing loads from such activities. Temporary planking shall be underlaid by layer of filter fabric covered with two-inch layer of gravel. 5. Cut branches and roots, when necessary, with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. Fully paint cuts 1/2-inch and larger in size with tree wound dressing. B. Excavation and Protection of Trees and Shrubs: 1. Excavate within drip line of trees only where shown. 2. Where trenching for utilities is required within drip line, tunnel under or around main lateral feeder roots by drilling, auger boring, pipe jacking, or digging by hand under supervision of arborist. Do not cut main lateral roots or tap roots; cut smaller roots, which interfere with installation of the Work. 3. Where excavation for the Work is required within drip line of trees or shrubs, hand excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Perform excavation under supervision of arborist. Provide temporary shoring or other protective support systems at excavations, to minimize sloping and benching of excavations. Use narrow tine spading forks and comb excavated material to expose roots. 4. Relocate roots in backfill areas wherever possible. If large, main lateral roots are encountered, expose beyond excavation limits as required to bend and relocate without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of construction and relocation is not practical, cut roots approximately three inches back from construction. 5. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before permanent backfill is provided; provide temporary earth cover. Water and maintain in moist condition and temporarily support and protect from damage until permanently relocated and covered with earth. C. Grade Adjustments and Tree Protection: 1. Maintain existing grade within drip line of trees, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 2. Lowering of Preconstruction Grade: a. Where required finish grade is below preconstruction grade around trees and shrubs, grade beyond drip line. Maintain preconstruction grade within drip line of trees and shrubs. b. Prune tree and shrub roots exposed during grade lowering, or provide permanent protections as recommended by arborist. Do not cut main or lateral roots or tap-roots; cut only smaller roots. c. Compensate for loss of roots and prune branches to stimulate root growth. d. Provide extended service through completion of the Contract correction period as recommended by arborist. 3. Minor Fills: a. Where preconstruction grade is six inches or less below elevation of finish grade shown, fill with topsoil complying with quality requirements of Specifications for finish grading and landscaping. b. Place in single layer and do not compact. c. Hand-grade to required finish elevations. 4. Moderate Fills: a. Where preconstruction grade is more than six inches, but less than 16 inches, below finish grade elevation, provide layer of drainage fill and filter fabric on preconstruction grade prior to placing topsoil that complies with quality requirements of Specifications on finish grading and landscaping. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 5 b. Carefully place drainage fill against trunk of tree or shrub approximately two inches above elevation of finish grade and extend not less than 1.5 feet from tree or shrub trunk on all sides. c. Provide filter fabric with edges overlapping by 6 inches, minimum. d. Place fill layer of topsoil to finish grade elevation. e. Do not compact stone, gravel or topsoil layers. Hand-grade to required finish elevations. 5. Deep Fills: a. Provide an open dry circular well of durable, unmortared stone, located not less than two feet s from trunk of associated tree or shrub. b. To facilitate proper drainage, provide eight to 10 continuous runs of four-inch drain tiles horizontally on the preconstruction ground surface under the complete spread of branches in radial pattern around the tree or shrub. c. Slope drain tiles away from tree or shrub. d. Provide drainage fill on preconstruction ground surface in depth of two inches under and six inches over drain tiles. e. Provide filter fabric over entire top surface of drainage fill. f. Provide eight to 10 drainage tiles, each four-inch diameter, vertically in radial pattern around tree or shrub, located five feet from trunk of tree or shrub. Extend vertical drainage tiles from the filter fabric layer above the horizontal drainage tiles to postconstruction finished grade g. Hold drainage tiles in place with drainage fill. h. Hand-grade to required finish grade elevation. D. Selective Removals: 1. Perform selective removals under direction of arborist. 2. Comply with ANSI A300 and applicable ISA standards indicated in this Section’s “References” Article. 3. Fully remove trees and shrubs shown or indicated for selective removal. 4. Remove stumps to not less than one feet below preconstruction ground surface. 5. During selective removals, avoid damaging adjacent trees and shrubs to remain, and other property. 6. Remove larger branches before cutting the trunk of tree or shrub being selectively removed. 7. Dispose of trees and shrubs selectively removed as indicated in this Section’s “Disposal and Cleaning” Article. E. Repair and Replacement of Trees and Shrubs: 1. Perform tree and shrub repair under direction of arborist. 2. Cavity Repair: a. Remove decayed areas to depth that exposes healthy tissue. b. Shape cavities to provide drainage. c. Paint inside of cavity with antiseptic tree wound dressing material. d. Do not fill cavities. e. When cavity’s cross-section exceeds 60 percent of cross-section of tree or shrub branch, selectively trim subject branch. When cavity’s cross-section exceeds 60 percent of cross-section of trunk of tree or shrub, remove tree or shrub upon Engineer’s authorization. Engineer will consider arborist’s recommendation. Comply with this Section’s requirements for selective trimming and selective removals. 3. Repair trees and shrubs damaged by construction operations, or selectively trimmed, within 24 hours of occurrence of such damage or selective trimming. Treat damaged trunks, branches, and roots according to written instructions of arborist, in accordance with ANSI A300 and applicable ISA standards indicated in this Section’s “References” Article. 4. Remove and replace trees and shrubs that are (1) dead or destroyed due to construction operations, or (2) damaged beyond reasonable hope of recovery (as determined by arborist) following repairs, or (3) damaged and determined by arborist to be incapable of resuming normal growth pattern after repairs., Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 6 5. Obtain opinion from arborist regarding whether damaged trees, shrubs, and other vegetation is repairable with reasonable chance of success. Submit arborist’s certification required in this Section’s “Submittals” Article. 6. For each tree or shrub to remain but is destroyed or damaged (beyond repair) by Contractor: a. For trees 8 inches or more in diameter (measured one foot above preconstruction ground surface), provide two replacements of the same species. Each replacement shall be four inches diameter (measured one foot above top of root ball). b. For trees smaller than eight inches diameter, and for shrubs, provide one replacement for each, of same species. Replacements shall be equal in size to original, up to maximum oof four inches (measured one foot above root ball). c. Provide replacement at locations at the Site as directed by Engineer. d. Provide replacements in accordance with the Contract Documents, including Specifications on planting and landscaping. 3.5 DISPOSAL AND CLEANING A. Disposal – General: 1. Dispose of matter resulting from clearing and grubbing, selective removals, and selective trimming, at appropriate offsite location, unless otherwise expressly allowed by the Contract Documents or mutual agreement of Owner and Contractor. 2. Do not use cleared, grubbed, or trimmed material as fill, backfill, or in embankments. 3. Dispose of cleared, grubbed, and trimmed material, and other materials, rubbish, and debris, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 4. Pay all costs associated with transporting and disposing of materials and debris resulting from site clearing Work. 5. Cleared lumber and trimmings from trees are Contractor’s property and, at Contractor’s option, may be sold or salvaged offsite. B. Cleaning: 1. Perform progress cleaning and other cleaning Work, and disposal of resulting materials and debris, in accordance with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. C. Burning: 1. Burning of trees, shrubs, brush, other vegetation, and other materials at, or adjacent to, the Site, whether in-place or cut, is prohibited. 3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING A. Stripping: 1. Before commencing topsoil stripping: a. Perform clearing and grubbing and selective removals. b. Remove grass and other vegetation that may remain following clearing and grubbing. c. Provide necessary and required temporary erosion and sediment controls. 2. Strip topsoil to depths encountered, in manner that prevents intermingling of topsoil with underlying subsoil and other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass and vegetation and material below topsoil. 3. Before stockpiling, separate objectionable material from topsoil. 4. Do not strip topsoil from within drip line of trees and shrubs to remain as part of the completed Project. B. Stockpiling: 1. Construct and maintain topsoil stockpiles on-site in a location approved by the Owner. C. Reuse of Stripped Topsoil: 1. Reuse in the finish grading and landscaping Work topsoil that complies with the Contract Documents for such Work. 2. Where topsoil stripped from the Site does not comply with the Contract Documents relative to quality required for use in finish grading and landscaping Work, provide appropriate soil amendment material, properly and fully mixed into topsoil stripped from the Site, so that Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 7 amended material complies with quality requirements for topsoil required for finish grading and landscaping Work. D. Disposal of Excess Topsoil: 1. Topsoil in excess of quantity required for finished Project becomes Contractor’s property when Engineer indicates finish grading and landscaping Work is complete. Properly dispose of excess topsoil offsite. Contractor may sell excess topsoil at offsite location. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FINISH GRADING 31 22 19 - 1 SECTION 31 22 19 FINISH GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Topsoil quality and placing. 2. Finish grading. B. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing. 2. Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill. 3. Section 32 92 00 - Seeding, Sodding and Landscaping. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. Perform the Work of this Section for all areas within limits of grading and all areas outside limits of grading disturbed during construction. 2. Perform the Work of this Section as part of the Lump Sum bid/pay item(s) indicated in the Contract. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. T194, Standard Method of Test for Determination of Organic Content of Soils by Loss on Ignition. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D2974, Standard Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils. b. D4221, Standard Test Method for Dispersive Characteristics of Clay Soil by Double Hydrometer. c. D4972, Standard Test Methods for pH of Soils. d. D5268, Standard Specification for Topsoil Used for Landscaping and Construction Purposes. e. D6913, Standard Test Methods for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Soils Using Sieve Analysis. f. D7928, Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Fine- Grained Soils Using the Sedimentation (Hydrometer) Analysis. g. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory: a. Retain the services of independent testing laboratory to perform testing and determine compliance with the Contract Documents of materials specified in this Section. b. When Contractor is expressly required, by this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article, “Source Quality Control” Article or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, to retain testing laboratory for tests required under this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article or “Source Quality Control” Article, retain one testing laboratory for quality assurance testing and field quality control testing. c. Testing laboratory shall comply with ASTM E329. d. Testing laboratory shall be experienced in the types of testing required. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FINISH GRADING 31 22 19 - 2 e. Selection of testing laboratory is subject to Engineer’s acceptance. Upon Engineer’s request, submit qualifications statement for testing laboratory, including name of entity, location, copies of applicable certifications, summary of entity’s experience, and names and qualifications of personnel who will perform the subject sampling and testing. B. Quality Assurance Testing: 1. Quality assurance testing, which may also be regarded as source quality control testing when topsoil to be installed will be topsoil originally stripped from the Site, is in addition to field quality control activities required by this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article. 2. Allow free access to material stockpiles and borrow areas at all times. Tests shall be at Contractor’s cost. 3. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory Scope: a. Obtain samples and perform testing of proposed topsoil materials, whether obtained from offsite borrow sources or stockpiled topsoil originally stripped from the Site, to provide assurance that the Work will comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Required Quality Assurance Material Testing by Contractor’s Testing Laboratory: a. Perform the following quality assurance tests for every 1,000 cubic yards of topsoil, or part thereof, to be incorporated into the Work. Submit results of such tests to Engineer and obtain Engineer’s acceptance thereof prior to incorporating the subject topsoil into the Work. 1) Gradation in accordance with ASTM D6913 and D7928. 2) Clay content in accordance with ASTM D4221. 3) pH in accordance with ASTM D4972. 4) Organic content in accordance with ASTM D2974 or AASHTO T194. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Borrow Soil Materials: Name and address of Supplier of borrow soil materials, gradation, and Supplier’s certification that materials are sufficiently free of Constituents of Concern so that a Hazardous Environmental Condition will not be created or exacerbated. b. If no soil materials will be obtained from any borrow location, expressly so indicate to Engineer in writing. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Quality Assurance Test Results Submittals: a. Submit results of quality assurance testing performed in accordance with this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article, unless included as part of another submittal under this Section. 1) Tests on materials from onsite and borrow sources. 2. Qualifications Statements: a. Quality assurance testing laboratory, when requested by Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. All soil accepted as topsoil, whether obtained from onsite or offsite sources, shall comply with requirements of this Section. 2. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on Site, where possible. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil, as specified. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a. Supplement acceptable onsite soil with manufactured topsoil from offsite sources, when quantities available on-Site are insufficient to complete the Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FINISH GRADING 31 22 19 - 3 b. When existing soil material stripped from the Site and stockpiled does not comply with requirements of this Section, such soil may be provided as topsoil when addition of amendments and fertilizers will bring such soil material into compliance with this Section’s topsoil requirements. Furnish to Engineer written advisory of Contractor’s intent to amend existing soil materials to be compliant with topsoil requirements. 3. Provide fertile, friable, natural loam, surface soil, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth; free of any admixture of subsoil, clods of hard earth, plants or roots, sticks, stones larger than one inch diameter, or other extraneous material harmful to plant growth, in compliance with ASTM D 5268. 4. Provide topsoil of the following characteristics: a. Required gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/4 inch mesh 100 No. 4-sieve 90 to 100 No. 200-sieve 0 to 10 b. Clay content of material passing No. 200-sieve shall be not greater than 60 percent, as determined by hydrometer tests. c. pH-adjusted with ferrous sulphate or ground limestone to provide pH 5.5 to 7.0 at time of installation of lawns and meadow areas, unless particular species of planting requires a different pH for optimal growth. d. Electrical conductivity of a 1:2 soil-water suspension shall not exceed 1.0 milliohm per centimeter and with less than 200 parts per million of extractable aluminum. e. Cation Exchange Capacity: 5, minimum. f. Organic content not less than five percent, as determined by ignition loss of oven-dried samples passing No. 10-sieve (Muffle Furnace Temperature: 110 plus or minus five degrees C for eight hours). g. Free of pests and pest larvae. h. Relative to Constituents of Concern, topsoil shall be in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Constituents of Concern, if any, in topsoil furnished shall not constitute or result in a Hazardous Environmental Condition. B. Topsoil Amendments and Fertilizer 1. Requirements for topsoil amendments and fertilizer, together with other planting materials, are in Section 32 92 00 - Seeding, Sodding, and Landscaping. 2. Provide planting soil by adding amendments, fertilizer, and other materials to topsoil and other suitable soil materials in accordance with Section 32 92 00 - Seeding, Sodding, and Landscaping, as necessary to support vigorous growth of required plantings. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections at Source of Supply: 1. Perform quality assurance testing, and submit results to Engineer, in accordance with the “Quality Assurance” Article in Part 1 of this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection of In-place Conditions: 1. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing plants from damage caused by finish grading. B. Preparation – General: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FINISH GRADING 31 22 19 - 4 1. In accordance with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls, provide temporary measures for controlling erosion and sedimentation, airborne dust, and fugitive dust emissions from the Site. 2. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling requirements are indicated in Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing. 3. Adjust rough grading to within 0.1 foot of required elevations. Properly compact sub- grades. Rough grading shall provide for appropriate drainage in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Before applying topsoil: a. Remove from exposed subgrade all stones and debris over two inches in any dimension and properly dispose of such items at an appropriate, offsite location. b. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. c. Loosen sub-grade surface to depth of not less than two inches. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation Requirements: 1. Required Depth of Topsoil: a. For all areas requiring topsoil, including lawns and meadows, provide finished, lightly compacted, topsoil depth of not less than 4 inches. 2. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is muddy, wet or frozen enough to cause clodding. 3. Provide finished surface smooth and true to required grades, in accordance with this Article’s “Installation Tolerances” provision. Provide finished surface of topsoil equal to required finished elevations after light rolling and natural settlement. 4. Grade topsoil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to provide required finish grades. 5. Restore topsoil if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting. 6. Topsoil Quantity Differentials: a. If quantity of required topsoil exceeds the quantity, if any, of topsoil stockpiled at the Site and available for use by Contractor, provide the additional required quantity from appropriate offsite borrow sources at no additional cost to Owner. b. When quantity of topsoil obtained from offsite borrow sources exceeds the required quantity of topsoil, remove excess from the Site, unless Owner allows such excess to be stockpiled at an appropriate location at the Site. c. When quantity of required topsoil is less than quantity of onsite stockpiles, following installation of topsoil, properly grade remaining stockpile for appropriate drainage without undue erosion and seed stockpile as required for other areas of lawn restoration in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Installation Tolerances: 1. Finish Grading Tolerance: ±0.1 foot from finish elevation required by the Contract Documents. Ensure adequate drainage. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Upon completion of topsoil installation, obtain Engineer's concurrence regarding grades and drainage. 2. Where directed by Engineer, provide test holes to demonstrate that required depth of topsoil was provided. After observation and measurement by Engineer, properly refill test holes. 3. Where insufficient depth of topsoil is revealed, remedy by providing required depth and quantity in accordance with the Contract Documents. When additional topsoil is added after initial establishment of plant growth, re-establish required plantings to provide compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Commencing immediately after topsoil installation, protect installed topsoil from erosion and damage from other causes, including personnel, vehicles, and equipment. Promptly perform Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FINISH GRADING 31 22 19 - 5 seeding, sodding (as applicable), mulching, and other measures to permanently stabilize soils and prevent erosion, in accordance with Section 32 92 00 - Seeding, Sodding, and Landscaping. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 1 SECTION 31 23 05 EXCAVATION AND FILL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for excavating, filling, and other earth Work, including: a. Field conditions. b. Soil and aggregate materials. c. Test pits. d. Excavation. e. Preparation of subgrades. f. Filling and compacting. g. Rough grading. h. Disposal of excavated spoil materials. B. Related Requirements Include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing. 2. Section 31 22 19 - Finish Grading. 3. Section 31 23 16.43 - Temporary Support of Excavations. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, construction equipment and machinery, tools, and incidentals required or necessary for performing all excavation and fill Work for the Contract, including all Work related to excavating, preparing subgrades, providing and stockpiling materials, filling with required materials, compacting, grading, proper disposal of excess spoil materials, and all other Work required by this Section. This Section includes excavation and fill Work required for constructing: structures; site improvements (including pavement, sidewalks, curbs, and the like); Underground Facilities; subgrade preparation for other Work; and all other excavation and fill Work required by the Contract Documents and not addressed under other Specifications sections. 2. Unless expressly indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, such as Section 01 22 00 - Measurement and Payment, the Work of this Section is included in the various lump sum and unit price bid/pay items for the Contract. 3. All Work under this Section is unclassified and covered by this Section and the associated bid/payment item(s). No separate payment will be made for removing, handling, or disposing of rock (unless the Contract includes a separate bid/pay item specifically for rock excavation or rock removal), stones, concrete (whether or not reinforced), debris, stumps, and other material, regardless of moisture content, unless such material constitutes an unforeseen Hazardous Environmental Condition and Work associated with such Hazardous Environmental Condition is not included in the Contract. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. The following terms are not defined and are not indicated with initial capital letters but, when used in this Section, have the following meaning: a. “Borrow” means material required for earth work construction in excess of quantity of suitable material available from required grading, cuts, and excavations at the Site. Borrow may be necessary even though not otherwise expressly required by the Contract Documents. b. “Cohesive soil” means clay (fine grained soil), or soil with a high clay content, which has cohesive strength. Cohesive soil does not crumble, can be excavated with vertical Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 2 or near-vertical sideslopes, and is plastic when moist. Cohesive soil is difficult to break up when dry, and exhibits significant cohesion when submerged. Cohesive soils include clayey silt, sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay. c. “Cohesionless soil” means fill material that does not clump together; its grains remain separate and apart from each other. Cohesionless soils typically have a low proportion of fine (no. 200 mesh size and less) particles and may be soil material or granular material. The terms “cohesionless soils”, “cohesionless materials”, “non-cohesive soils”, and the like have the same meaning. d. “Fill” means soil material, granular material, or other material indicated in this Section required for backfilling excavations or as material for achieving required rough grading. Unless indicated otherwise in the context of a specific provision, the terms “fill” and “backfill” have the same meaning, as do derivative terms such as, “filling” and “backfilling”. When used by itself, the term “backfill” means material required for refilling an excavation. e. “Foundations” means footings, base slabs (slabs-on-grade), foundation walls, concrete mats, grade beams, piers, piles, and other supporting element (of buildings or structures) bearing directly on soil or rock. f. “Granular material” means gravel, sand, or silt, (coarse grained soil) with little or no clay content. Granular soil has no cohesive strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be molded when moist and crumbles easily when dry. The terms “granular material”, “aggregate material, and “granular soil” have the same meaning. Detailed requirements for specific types of granular material are indicated in Article 2.1 of this Section. g. “Rock” means: Igneous, metamorphic, or sedimentary rock or stone; boulders over two. cubic yards in volume in open areas and boulders over one cubic yard in volume in trenches; and mass concrete; that cannot be removed using rippers and therefore requires drilling and blasting or use of large excavator-mounted pneumatic breakers. If rock is encountered during the Work, promptly furnish notice of differing subsurface condition in accordance with the General Conditions (as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions); when necessary, Engineer will furnish requirements for rock removal via appropriate Contract modification. The following do not qualify as rock: 1) Soft, weathered or disintegrated rock that can be removed by normal excavating equipment, including bulldozers with rippers and large trackhoes with rock teeth or rock buckets. 2) Loose or previously blasted rock. 3) Broken stone in rock fills. 4) Rock or stone that falls into the excavation from outside limits of excavation shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. 5) Boulders that can be removed without drilling, blasting, or pneumatic breakers. 6) Pavements, sidewalks, and gutters of concrete, asphalt, or masonry. h. “Subgrade” means the uppermost surface of native soil material unmoved from cuts; the bottom of excavation. i. “Unauthorized excavation” means removing materials beyond limits shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or otherwise directed by Engineer. j. “Unclassified”, when used in referring to excavating or excavations, means excavation and disposal of all materials, of any description whatsoever, encountered in performing the Work, unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. k. “Unsuitable soil materials” means soil or other materials encountered at or below subgrade elevation of insufficient strength, stiffness, or characteristics to support the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or as determined by Engineer. The terms “unsuitable soil material”, “unsuitable soil”, and “unsuitable material” have the same meaning. B. Reference Standards: Standards referenced in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 3 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. AMRL R18 - AASHTO Accreditation Procedure Manual. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). c. D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand- Cone Method. d. D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). e. D2166 - Standard Test Method for Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil. f. D2216 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass. g. D2434 - Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity of Coarse- Grained Soils. h. D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). i. D2850 - Standard Test Method for Unconsolidated-Undrained Triaxial Compression Test on Cohesive Soils. j. D3740 - Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. k. D4253 - Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. l. D4254 - Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. m. D4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. n. D6913 - Standard Test Methods for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Soils Using Sieve Analysis. o. D6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). p. D7928 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Fine- Grained Soils Using the Sedimentation (Hydrometer) Analysis. q. E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory: a. Retain the services of independent testing laboratory to perform testing and determine compliance with the Contract Documents of materials specified in this Section. b. When Contractor is expressly required, by this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, to retain testing laboratory for tests required under this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article, retain one testing laboratory for quality assurance testing and field quality control testing. c. Retain testing laboratory different from testing laboratory and special inspectors retained by Owner or Owner’s consultant for code-required tests and special inspections for the Project, if any. d. Testing laboratory shall possess current, valid accreditation from the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL), in accordance with AASHTO AMRL R18, for ASTM D3740, for tests required for quality assurance testing indicated in this Article and field quality control testing indicated to be Contractor’s responsibility. e. Testing laboratory shall comply with ASTM E329. f. Testing laboratory shall be experienced in the types of testing required. g. Selection of testing laboratory is subject to Engineer’s acceptance. Upon Engineer’s request, submit qualifications statement for testing laboratory, including name of entity, Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 4 location, copies of applicable certifications, summary of entity’s experience, and names and qualifications of personnel who will perform the subject sampling and testing. B. Quality Assurance Testing: 1. Quality assurance testing, which may also be regarded as source quality control testing, is in addition to field quality control testing required by this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article. 2. Materials used in the Work may require testing and retesting, as directed by Engineer, during the Project. Allow free access to onsite material stockpiles, borrow sources, and other sources of aggregate and soil materials at all times. Tests not specifically indicated to be performed at Owner's expense, including retesting of defective materials and defective Work, shall be at Contractor’s cost. 3. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory Scope: a. Obtain samples and perform testing of proposed fill materials in the laboratory, at the Site, and at borrow locations (if any) to provide assurance that the Work will comply with the Contract Documents. b. Testing laboratory shall perform testing required to obtain data for selecting moisture content for placing and compacting fill materials. c. Submit to Engineer, via Contractor, written results of each test. 4. Required Quality Assurance Material Testing by Contractor’s Testing Laboratory: a. Perform the following quality assurance tests on materials to be incorporated into the Work. Submit results of such tests to Engineer and obtain Engineer’s acceptance thereof prior to incorporating the subject materials into the Work. b. Gradation in accordance with ASTM D6913 and ASTM D7928. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of each material to be incorporated into the Work. c. Atterberg limits in accordance with ASTM D4318. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of the following types of materials to be incorporated into the Work: suitable soil material, and soil structural fill. d. Moisture/density relations for fill in accordance with ASTM D698, ASTM D1557, ASTM D4253, or ASTM D4254, as applicable. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of each material to be incorporated into the Work. e. Moisture content of stockpiled or borrow material in accordance with ASTM D2216. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of each material to be incorporated into the Work. f. Strength in accordance with ASTM D2166. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of the following types of materials to be incorporated into the Work: suitable soil material, and soil structural fill. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule (table or written narrative) indicating, for each specific area of the Work, type of fill materials proposed, together with indication of whether source of materials is onsite or borrow source. Identification of each type of material shall employ material names/designations identical to those in the Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Borrow Soil Materials: Name and address of Supplier of borrow soil materials, gradation, and Supplier’s certification that materials are sufficiently free of Constituents of Concern so that a Hazardous Environmental Condition will not be created or exacerbated.. If no soil materials will be obtained from any borrow location, expressly so indicate to Engineer in writing. b. Aggregate: Supplier’s published description of aggregate materials, including name and address of Supplier, certification of material’s compliance with AASHTO and state department of transportation standards, and gradation. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Procedure Submittals: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 5 a. Excavation plan indicating: 1) Excavation Method(s): Indicate high-level methods to be used for excavating, such as use of backhoe or other earth moving construction equipment, use of explosives in excavating (when allowed), trenchless excavating methods, micro-trenching, hydro-excavating (when allowed), air vacuum excavating (when allowed), or other. Where different methods will be used, indicate locations of each in the Work. Purpose of indicating high-level excavating methods is for Owner’s information regarding effect of excavating method on Owner’s or facility manager’s (if other than Owner) property and operations. 2) Copies of permits and approvals required for excavation and fill Work, obtained from authorities having jurisdiction, including owners of affected utilities and transportation facilities, for excavation methods proposed. b. Compaction procedure and compaction equipment proposed for use. Where different procedures or equipment will be used for compacting different types of material or at different locations at the Site, indicate where each procedure and equipment item will be used. c. Engineer’s acceptance of excavation plan does not, in any way, modify Contractor’s sole responsibility for complying with the Contract Documents, construction means, methods, procedures, techniques, or sequences, and safety and protection measures incident thereto. 2. Quality Assurance Test Results Submittals: a. Submit results of quality assurance testing performed in accordance with this Section’s “Quality Assurance” Article, unless included as part of another submittal under this Section. Submit results for the following quality assurance testing: 1) Tests on materials from onsite and borrow sources. 2) Optimum moisture – maximum dry density curve for each type of fill material. 3. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit results of testing and inspection performed in accordance with the field quality control Article in Part 3 of this Section, including: 1) Indication of soil classification in accordance with ASTM D2487. 2) Field density testing. 3) Proctor Compaction Test to determine optimum moisture for soil and maximum dry density. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Quality assurance testing laboratory, when requested by Engineer. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Subsurface Conditions: a. Subsurface Information: The Supplementary Conditions indicate information (if any) that is Technical Data on subsurface conditions at the Site. Such information and data are not intended as a representation or warranty of continuity of conditions between soil borings or test pits, nor of groundwater levels at dates and times other than date and time when measured, nor that purpose of obtaining the information and data were appropriate for use by Contractor. Owner and Engineer are not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. b. Contractor’s Explorations: Soil borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor, at no additional cost to Owner. Coordinate Contractor-performed test borings and other exploratory operations with Owner, utility owners, and owners of transportation facilities as appropriate. Perform such explorations without disrupting or otherwise adversely affecting operations of Owner and others. 2. Where subsurface conditions or locations of Underground Facilities and structures are unforeseen or differ substantively from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, comply with Contract requirements for giving notice and other actions. 3. Existing Structures and Underground Facilities: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 6 a. The Contract Documents show or indicate certain structures and Underground Facilities adjacent to the Work. Such information was obtained from existing records and is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. Contractor shall explore ahead of the excavation to determine the exact location of all existing structures and Underground Facilities. Existing structures and Underground Facilities shall be supported and protected from damage by Contractor. Immediately repair and restore existing structures and Underground Facilities damaged by Contractor without additional cost to Owner. b. Movement or operation of construction equipment and machinery over Underground Facilities shall be at Contractor’s sole risk. When required by owner of the Underground Facility, prepare and submit to owner of such Underground Facility, and obtain their acceptance, of Contractor’s plan presenting Contractor’s analysis of the loads to be imparted during construction (including transient loading by construction equipment, machinery, and vehicles) and Contractor’s proposed measures to protect structures and Underground Facilities during the Work. c. Acceptance of or approval by utility owner or Engineer of Contractor’s proposed evaluation and method(s) for protecting Underground Facilities in no way modifies or reduces Contractor’s sole responsibility for complying with the Contract Documents, means, methods, procedures, techniques, and sequences of construction, and the safety and protection measures incident thereto. d. Coordinate with utility owners for shut off of services in active piping and conduits. When required by utility owner, Owner will assist Contractor with utility owner notifications. Completely remove buried piping and conduits indicated for removal and not otherwise indicated as being abandoned or to remain in place. e. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when such interruption is indicated in the Contract Documents or when allowed in writing by Engineer after acceptable temporary utility services are provided by Contractor for the affected structure or property. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Granular Under-Slab Fill: 1. Provide granular under-slab fill under foundations (without pressure relief valves), manholes, handholes, and similar Work unless other under-slab material is required by the Contract Documents. 2. ASTM C33/C33M gradation size no. 67, or other material acceptable to Engineer. B. Granular Structural Fill: 1. Granular structural fill, sometimes called “select granular fill”, is required for improving subgrade (after removal of unsuitable material), as backfill for excavations in areas that, after restoration, will be subject to vehicular traffic, and at other locations shown or indicated for such material in the Contract Documents. 2. Material shall be well-graded, crushed aggregate, free of organic and deleterious material, complying with the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications . C. Soil Structural Fill: 1. Free of organic and deleterious matter, frozen material and debris. 2. Low-volume change cohesive soil material: a. ASTM D2487 classification: CL-ML or CL. b. Liquid limit: Less than 45. c. Maximum plasticity index: 20. 3. Granular soil material: a. ASTM D2487 classification: GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM or SC. 4. Previously-excavated materials complying with the Contract Documents requirements for soil structural fill may be used for soil structural fill. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 7 5. When onsite materials are unsuitable for use as soil structural fill, provide granular structural fill or approved borrow material as soil structural fill. Prior to using borrow material as soil structural fill, furnish product data Submittal and quality assurance Submittal for proposed material and obtain Engineer’s approval and acceptance (as applicable) of the proposed material. D. Suitable Soil Material as Non-Structural Fill: 1. Provide suitable soil material as fill for the Work, unless other material is required. 2. Material shall be: a. Free of rock larger than three inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, organic material, and other deleterious material. b. ASTM D2487 classification: GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, SW, SP, SM, CL-ML or CL. c. Liquid limit: Not greater than 45. d. Plasticity index: Not greater than 20. 3. Previously-excavated materials complying with the Contract Documents requirements for suitable soil material may be used for suitable soil material. 4. When onsite materials are unsuitable for use as suitable soil material, provide granular structural fill or approved borrow material as suitable soil material. Prior to using borrow material as suitable soil material, furnish product data Submittal and quality assurance Submittal for proposed material and obtain Engineer’s approval and acceptance (as applicable) of the proposed material. E. Subbase Material: 1. Subbase material is granular material underlying pavement, sidewalks, and other surfaces expressly indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Material shall be naturally- or artificially-graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, or natural or crushed sand. Slag is unacceptable. 3. Material shall be in accordance with the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications . F. Pipe Bedding Material: 1. Materials: Unless otherwise expressly required in the Contract Documents, pipe bedding material shall be crushed stone and gravel, free of: rock or gravel larger than one-inch in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, organic material and other deleterious matter. a. Materials shall be in accordance with the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications . 2. Sand: a. Where expressly required or allowed by the Contract Documents, provide sand as pipe bedding material. a. Materials shall be in accordance with the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. G. Flowable Fill, also known as Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM): 1. Coordinate the provision below with requirements for installing flowable fill in this Section’s “Filling and Compacting” Article in “Part 3 – Execution”. Unless expressly required otherwise by the Contract Documents, flowable fill may be used, at Contractor’s option (following Engineer’s approval), for backfilling in lieu of the following materials: granular structural fill, pipe bedding material, soil structural fill, suitable soil material used as non-structural fill, and subbase material. 2. Material provided shall be excavatable by ordinary mechanical excavation equipment, such as backhoes. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections at Source of Supply: 1. Perform quality assurance testing, and submit results to Engineer, in accordance with the “Quality Assurance” Article in Part 1 of this Section. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Provide Engineer with sufficient notice and with means to examine areas and conditions under which excavating, filling, and grading will be performed. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing when Engineer is aware of conditions that may be detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 2. This Article, however, in no way modifies or reduces Contractor’s sole responsibility for complying with the Contract Documents, for construction means, methods, procedures, techniques, and sequences, and for the safety and protection measures incident thereto. 3. Nothing in this Article, including action by Engineer or Resident Project Representative (if any), is for benefit of Contractor. B. Installing the Work constitutes Contractor’s approval of underlying work, subgrades, and field conditions prevailing at the time of the Work. 3.2 TEST PITS A. Test Pits - General: 1. Test Pit Locations Not Shown or Indicated in the Contract Documents and Test Pits Not Part of a Dedicated Bid/Pay Item: a. In advance of other construction, excavate test pits, make observations and measurements, and promptly fill test pits. b. Purpose of test pits is to determine existing subsurface conditions and locations of Underground Facilities and structures. c. Perform all work required in connection with excavating, stockpiling, maintaining, temporarily supporting excavations, filling, and replacing pavement for test pits. Contractor is responsible for the definite location of each existing Underground Facilities involved within the area of excavation for the Work. Exercise care during such location work to avoid damaging and disrupting affected Underground Facility or structure. Contractor is responsible for repairing, at Contractor’s cost, damage to Underground Facility or structure caused during the Work. B. Payment for Test Pits: 1. All payment for test pits shown or indicated in the Contract Documents will be part of the lump sum Contract Price. C. Results of Test Pits: 1. Document results of all test pits excavated by Contractor. 2. Submit to Engineer written results of test pits expressly required by the Contract Documents or directed by Engineer. Furnish such Submittal within three days of excavation of associated test pit unless Engineer allows more time. When Engineer requests written results of test pits performed for Contractor’s own use, promptly furnish such information as Informational Submittal. 3. Required documentation of test pits shall include: a. Identification of Project, Site, and Contractor. b. Date and time of test pit excavation, indication of weather conditions, and names of personnel present and employer of each. c. Detailed description of location of test pit, including, where necessary, measurements to landmarks shown on the Drawings. Where appropriate, include sketch of location from the Drawings. d. Indication of approximate dimensions of test pit, including length, width, and depth. e. Verbal (written) description of observed subsurface conditions, including apparent strata, rock (if any), groundwater conditions, and approximate depth at which each was observed. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 9 f. Verbal (written) description of unusual conditions observed, including potential existence of Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any. Include pertinent data, such as readings from instrumentation used. g. Description and sketch, with appropriate dimensions, of Underground Facilities and structures in the test pit. Sketches shall be clearly legible with clear, well-written annotations and dimensions. h. Other pertinent information and data from observations made while test pit was open. i. Brief written description of backfilling and restoration of test pit, including time operations were completed. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Preparation: 1. Comply with Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing. 2. Comply with this Section’s “Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction” Article. B. Dust Control: 1. Relative to controlling dust during construction, comply with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls and Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning. C. Maintenance and Protection of Traffic: 1. Keep all streets and traffic ways open for passage of traffic and pedestrians during the Project, unless otherwise approved by owner of the street, traffic way, or right-of-way, as applicable. Construction traffic shall access the Site only via the west entrance on Moss Bridge Road. 2. Give required advance notice to fire department, police department, and other emergency services as applicable of proposed construction operations. 3. Give reasonable notice to owners or tenants of private property who may be affected by construction operations. Give such notice not less than two days prior to construction that will affect the property. 4. All hydrants, valves, fire alarm boxes, mailboxes, express courier drop boxes, and other facilities that may require access during construction shall be kept accessible for use. 5. Provide temporary signage, signals, barricades, warning lights, lighting and other equipment, service, and personnel necessary and required to regulate and protect traffic and warn of hazards. Such Work shall comply with requirements of owner of right-of-way and authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. Remove temporary equipment and facilities when no longer required, and restore grounds to original or to specified conditions, as applicable. 3.4 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controls - General: 1. Provide temporary erosion and sediment controls in accordance with Section 01 57 05 - Temporary Controls, and other requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. When applicable, also comply with requirements of the erosion and sediment control plan approved by authorities having jurisdiction and the Project’s storm water pollution prevention plan and permit, if any. 3.5 EXCAVATION A. Excavation - General: 1. Perform all excavation required to complete the Work as shown, specified, and required. Excavating Work includes removing, handling, and proper disposal of earth, sand, clay, expansive-type soils, other unsuitable soil materials, gravel, hardpan, soft, weathered or decomposed rock, concrete and masonry (reinforced or unreinforced), pavements, rubbish, debris, stumps, and other materials, regardless of moisture content, within the excavation limits. 2. Excavation and filling Work shall comply with the Contract Documents, including required contours, elevations, general dimensions, and alignment shown or indicated on the Drawings including cuts, fills, and embankments, as applicable. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 10 3. Protect existing buildings and structures against undermining and destabilization. If excavations affect adjacent foundations, advise Engineer in writing. 4. If unsuitable material and obstructions are encountered during excavation, remove material and replace as directed by Engineer. B. Excavation Methods: 1. Traditional Excavation Methods: Excavation via traditional methods, such as backhoe, bulldozer, other earth moving construction equipment or machinery, or excavation using hand tools, is unacceptable for the following portions of the excavation Work: Areas shown on the plans where hydro-excavating is required. 2. Use of Explosives: a. Use of explosives is not allowed. 3. Trenchless: Where Contractor proposes trenchless construction techniques, such as directional drilling, micro-tunneling, or others, comply with the Contract Documents regarding such construction methods. When the Contract Documents do not include requirements for the proposed trenchless construction method, submit to Engineer request for interpretation or clarification to obtain appropriate requirements, which will be issued via appropriate Contract modification. 4. Hydro-excavating (also known as Hydro-Vacuum Excavating): a. Hydro-excavating is acceptable for the following portions of the excavation Work: : Areas shown on the plans where hydro-excavating is required. b. Avoid creating nuisances, unsafe conditions, and inconvenience to Owner, facility manager, owners and occupants of adjacent property, and the public when hydro- excavating is allowed and used. C. Excavation Protection: 1. Provide excavation protection system(s) in accordance with Laws and Regulations to prevent injury to persons and property, including Underground Facilities. 2. Provide safe access to excavations, including emergency exit, and safe access for construction equipment and machinery, where applicable, in accordance with laws and Regulations. 3. Comply with Section 31 23 16.43 - Temporary Support of Excavations, regarding temporary support of excavations during construction. D. Excavations for Buildings, Structures, and Footings: 1. Elevation of bottom of footings shown is approximate. Engineer may direct, via appropriate Contract modifications, such minor changes in dimensions and elevations as may be required to ensure a stable bearing surface. 2. Extend excavations sufficiently on each side of structures, footings, and similar construction for installing forms, temporary supports of excavations, observation and inspection of the Work, and safe sloping of sides of excavations, as necessary. E. Subgrades - General: 1. Provide firm, dense, thoroughly compacted, consolidated subgrades, free of mud, muck, and other soft and unsuitable materials. Subgrades shall remain firm and intact under all construction operations. Reinforce subgrade by providing granular structural fill on subgrades that are otherwise solid but become soft or muddy on top due to construction operations. Finished elevation of stabilized subgrades shall not be above subgrade elevations shown on the Drawings, unless bottom of trench is rock below required bottom elevation of pipe, manhole, chamber, or vault, and above required bottom of excavation elevation. 2. If, in Engineer’s opinion, subgrade becomes soft, muddy, or both, because of construction delays, failure to dewater properly, or other cause within Contractor’s control, excavate subgrade to firm material, trim the subgrade, and backfill with granular structural fill material at Contractor’s cost. 3. Remove unsuitable subgrade materials below foundations. Limits of required removal of unsuitable material, when not otherwise expressly shown or indicated in the Contract Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 11 Documents, shall be outside exterior limits of foundations around perimeter of building or structure by not less than the greater of the following horizontal distances: a. Distance equal to depth of required removal of unsuitable material, below bottom of foundations. b. Three feet. c. As directed by Engineer, in consultation with geotechnical engineering special inspector or consultant (if any). 4. Preparation of Subgrades for Subsequent Work: a. Level off subgrades to receive foundations or compacted fill. b. Where subgrades are to receive subsequent fill or construction of buildings or structures, remove loose materials and bring subgrades into compliance with the Contract Documents. c. Where compacted fill material is required to bring subgrade up to underside of construction, scarify existing subgrade upon which fill material will be placed to depth of six inches and then compact to density required in this Section before fill material is placed thereon. d. Do not excavate lower than required for foundations, unless directed otherwise by Engineer. e. Where excavation extends below required elevation without authorization, promptly advise Engineer and remedy unauthorized excavation in accordance with the Contract Documents. Corrections may include: 1) Under soil-supported foundations or soil-supported retaining walls: a) Fill unauthorized excavation by extending shown or indicated bottom elevation of foundation to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. b) Concrete fill is acceptable for bringing elevations to proper position. 2) For locations other than those indicated above including slabs-on-grade and pile- supported foundations: a) Backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as indicated for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Engineer. 3) Contractor is not eligible for change in Contract Price or Contract Times for remedying unauthorized excavations. 5. Evaluation and Protection of Subgrade: a. Advise Engineer as soon as excavation is completed for Engineer’s observation of subgrades and, where necessary or required, inspection and testing of subgrades by special inspectors. b. If Engineer determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, provide subgrade stabilization as indicated in this Article. c. Do not commence further construction until subgrade under compacted fill material, under foundations and retaining walls is acceptable (in accordance with the Contract Documents) to Engineer, who may consider results of required testing and special inspections (if any), and who may elect to consult with geotechnical special inspector or other consultant (if any). d. Engineer shall have sufficient opportunity to observe subgrade, after successful completion of special inspections (if any), and other tests and inspections required by the Contract Documents. e. Place fill material and perform subsequent construction after subgrade is acceptable in accordance with the Contract Documents. f. Protect subgrade from becoming loose, wet, frozen, or soft due to weather, construction operations, or other reasons. 6. Subgrade stabilization: a. If subgrade under foundations or fill material, is frozen, loose, wet, or soft before construction is placed thereon, remove frozen, loose, wet, or soft material and replace with approved compacted material as directed by Engineer, who may consult with geotechnical special inspector or other consultant. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 12 b. Loose, wet, or soft materials, when approved by Engineer, may be stabilized by a compacted working mat of well graded crushed stone. c. Stabilization shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. Where the Contract Documents do not address subgrade stabilization, promptly submit to Engineer written request for clarification or interpretation, or other written instrument in accordance with the Contract Documents. In such event, do not proceed until response is obtained from engineer. F. Pipe Trench Preparation: 1. Not more than 150 feet of trench may be opened in advance of installing pipe in trench. 2. Trench width shall be minimized to greatest extent practical, and shall comply with the following: a. Trench width shall be sufficient to provide space for installing, jointing and inspecting piping. The Drawings show additional requirements for trenches. In no case shall trench be wider at top of pipe than pipe barrel’s outside diameter (OD) plus two feet, unless otherwise shown or indicated. b. Enlargement of trench width at pipe joints may be made when required and approved by Engineer. c. For excavating and backfilling for manholes, chambers, and vaults associated with buried piping, excavation at widest point of manhole, chamber, or vault shall be not wider than two feet greater than widest outside dimension (including bottom footings or flanges, if any, of concrete structures) of the associated manhole, chamber, or vault. For cast-in-place concrete manholes, chambers, and vaults, excavation at widest point of such structure shall be not greater than four feet wider than widest point of the associated structure. d. Trench width shall be sufficient for Contractor’s means of temporarily supporting the excavation and dewatering. e. Trench width shall be sufficient to allow thorough compaction of fill adjacent to bottom half of pipe. f. Do not use construction equipment or machinery that necessitates trench to be excavated to excessive width. 3. Depth of trench shall be as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. If required and approved by Engineer in writing (such as a duly issued Contract modification), depths may be revised. 4. Where Engineer considers existing subgrade (beneath intended bedding material) unsuitable, remove and replace such unsuitable material with granular structural fill material for full width of trench, down to suitable material. G. Preparation for Slabs-on-Grade and Equipment Support Pads: 1. Do not place floor slabs-on-grade including equipment support pads until all the following conditions are met: a. Subgrade is acceptable in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Required fill material (where applicable) has been provided on subgrade in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Underground Facilities are installed and have successfully completed required field testing and inspections. d. Contractor obtains Engineer’s acceptance of required field quality control Submittals for subgrade and under-slab materials required by the Contract. H. Freeze Protection: 1. Do not place foundations or fill material on frozen subgrade. 2. When freezing temperatures are expected, based on widely-recognized, reputable source for weather forecasts at or near the Site, do not excavate to full depth indicated, unless foundations or fill material can be placed immediately after excavation has been completed and is acceptable in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Protect from freezing excavation, subgrade, and fill materials when subsequent Work thereon is delayed. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 13 4. Where concrete slab is a base slab-on-grade under and within building or structure that will not be heated, protect subgrade under slab from freezing until Substantial Completion. 5. Protect subgrade under foundations (supporting building or structure that will include environmental controls such as heating or air conditioning) from freezing until associated building structure is completed and heated to not less than 50 degrees F. 3.6 FILLING AND COMPACTING A. Filling and Compacting - General: 1. Provide and compact all fill required for the finished grades as shown and as indicated in this Section. B. Place fill as promptly as progress of the Work allows, but not until completing the following: 1. Obtaining Engineer’s concurrence, after observation by Engineer or Resident Project Representative (if any) of construction below finish grade, including removal of formwork, removal of trash and debris from excavations, dampproofing, waterproofing, perimeter insulation, concrete finishing and related Work. 2. Successful completion of required field quality control activities for Work that will be covered or concealed by filling, including field quality control testing of buried piping, conduits that will convey fluid or gas, structures that will contain fluid or gas, and exfiltration testing (where performed or required) of manholes, chambers, vaults, and similar items. For manholes, chambers, and vaults, where infiltration testing or vacuum testing is performed or required, such testing may be performed following backfilling. Completion of proper documentation of as-constructed conditions and existing conditions (such as locations of Underground Facilities) in accordance with Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. 3. Removal of temporary supports of excavations and, where applicable, filling voids in concrete where such voids resulted from temporary support of excavations. 4. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally-supported walls. 5. Remove fill that includes organic materials or other unacceptable material and replace with fill material complying with the Contract Documents. C. Placement - General: 1. Place fill to the grades shown or indicated. Bring up evenly on all sides fill around buildings, structures, individual walls, piers, or columns, and Underground Facilities. 2. Management of Moisture Content: a. Place fill materials at moisture content and density as indicated in this Article’s requirements on compaction density. Prior to placing fill material, optimum moisture and maximum density properties for proposed material shall be obtained from Engineer, who may consult with geotechnical special inspector, if any, or geotechnical consultant, if any. Furnish and use construction equipment and machinery capable of adding measured amounts of water to fill materials to bring fill materials to a condition within required moisture content range. Control moisture for each lift necessary for required compaction. b. Furnish and use construction equipment and machinery capable of discing, aerating, and mixing fill materials to ensure reasonable uniformity of moisture content throughout fill materials, and to reduce moisture content of borrow materials by air drying, when necessary. c. When subgrade or fill materials requires moisture-conditioning before compaction, fill material shall be sufficiently mixed or worked on the subgrade to ensure uniform moisture content throughout the lift of material to be compacted. d. Materials at moisture content in excess of specified limit shall be dried by appropriate means, such as aeration or stockpiling for gravity drainage and air drying. 3. Compaction: a. Compaction Equipment: 1) Perform compaction with construction equipment and machinery suitable for the type of fill material placed. Unless otherwise required, compact cohesive soils using sheepsfoot compactor, and compact granular materials using pneumatic Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 14 rollers, vibrators, or other construction equipment or machinery to obtain required density. 2) Select and use equipment capable of providing the minimum density required in the Contract Documents. 3) Use light compaction equipment and machinery, with equipment or machinery gross weight not exceeding 7,000 pounds within horizontal distance of 10 feet from the wall of completed, below-grade structures. 4) Furnish and use construction equipment and machinery capable of compacting in restricted areas next to structures and around piping and Underground Facilities. b. Compaction Test Area: 1) Effectiveness of construction equipment and machinery selected by Contractor for compacting, shall be tested at start of compacted fill Work by constructing a small section of fill within the area where fill will be placed. 2) If tests on the test section of fill indicate that required compaction is not obtained, do one or more of the following: increase the quantity of coverages, decrease the lift thicknesses, or use different compactor equipment or machinery. 4. Placement of Lifts and Compaction: a. Place fill materials in horizontal, loose lifts, not exceeding specified thickness prior to compacting. b. Place fill in manner ensuring uniform lift thickness after placing. c. Preparation of surfaces for placement of fill: 1) Before commencing placing of fill, scarify underlying material to depth of six inches. 2) Where ground surface is steeper than one vertical to four horizontal (“1V:4H”), plow surface to bench and break up surface so that fill material will bind with existing surface. For slopes steeper than 1V:4H and less than 1V:1.5H, bench shall be six feet wide. For slopes steeper than or equal to 1V:1.5H and less than 1V:0.5H, bench shall be four feet wide. d. Mechanically compact each lift, by not less than two complete coverages of compactor. One coverage is defined as the conditions reached when all portions of the fill lift have been subjected to the direct contact of compactor’s compacting surface. e. Compaction of fill materials by inundation with water is unacceptable. 5. Restrictions: a. Do not place fill materials when standing water is present on surface of area where fill will be placed. b. Do not compact fill when standing water is present on the fill to be compacted. c. Do not place or compact fill in frozen condition or on top of frozen material. d. Fill containing organic or deleterious materials or other unacceptable material previously described shall be removed and replaced prior to compaction. 6. If required densities are not obtained because of improper control of placement or compaction procedures, or because of inadequate or improperly-functioning compaction equipment or machinery, perform all work necessary to provide required densities. Such work shall include, at no additional cost to Owner, complete removal of unacceptable fill areas and replacement and re-compaction until acceptable fill is provided. 7. Repair, at Contractor’s cost, observed or measured settlement. Make repairs and replacements as necessary and required within 30 days after being so advised by Engineer, unless more-timely action is necessary to avoid or reduce the potential for safety hazards or damage to property. D. Fill Against Concrete: 1. Structures shall be complete prior to backfilling, including foundations, walls, and slabs, including top slabs, unless shown or indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. 2. Placing fill against concrete below finished grade is not allowed until concrete has attained its specified full design compressive strength in accordance with Section 03 00 05 - Concrete, as determined by duration of concrete curing and testing of field-cured concrete Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 15 cylinders. Requirements for strength and curing time are in the Specifications in Division 03 - Concrete. 3. Elevation of fill placed against concrete walls shall not differ by more than two feet on each side of walls, unless walls are adequately braced or all floor framing is in place up to and including grade level slabs. 4. Backfill structural foundation elements as soon as practicable, in accordance with this Section, after concrete has gained sufficient strength to avoid damage, to avoid ponding of surface water and accumulation of debris. 5. Where fill is placed against waterproofed surface, exercise care that waterproofing material is not damaged. E. Fill Placed in Electrical Ductbank Trenches: 1. Provide suitable soil material for full depth of electrical ductbank trench, below and above electrical ductbank. Where one ductbank passes beneath another Underground Facility, provide granular structural fill to the elevation of the bottom of upper ductbank or Underground Facility, as applicable. 2. Placing and compacting fill placed in electrical ductbank trenches shall comply with requirements of this Article’s provision titled, “Fill Placed in Pipe Trenches”. F. Fill Placed in Pipe Trenches: 1. Piping Installed in Fills Above Pre-construction Grade: a. Prior to installing piping, place the fill in accordance with the Contract Documents until the fill reaches a minimum elevation two feet higher than the top of piping to be installed. Excavate the trench; install the piping, and backfill. Subsequently provide the remainder of the fill required for the Work. 2. Piping trenches may be backfilled prior to testing of piping, unless nature of test requires observation of pipe or manholes, chambers, vaults, or similar items during testing. Do not construct building or structure over piping until piping has been successfully tested and passed. 3. Pipe Bedding: Pipe bedding material shall be as follows: a. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, install buried piping per the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. b. Pipe bedding material shall be spread and the surface graded to provide a uniform and continuous support beneath piping at all points between bell holes or pipe joints. c. Install initial layer of pipe bedding material on prepared subgrade and compact as required. Provide appropriate divot in the bedding material to accommodate each pipe bell or joint. Install piping so that pipe barrel carries the weight of each pipe segment, rather than pipe bells or joints bearing the pipe’s weight. d. Slight disturbance of installed pipe bedding material surface during withdrawal of pipe slings or other lifting tackle is acceptable. e. After each pipe’s bedding material has been graded, and the piping has been aligned, joined in accordance with the Contract Documents, and placed in final position on bedding material, provide and compact sufficient pipe trench fill material under and around each side of pipe and back of bell or end thereof to hold piping in proper position and maintain alignment during subsequent pipe jointing and embedment operations. f. Subsequent to forming pipe joint, place additional pipe bedding material, in required lifts, to required top elevation of pipe bedding material. Ensure bedding material is properly and fully placed under pipe “haunches” for proper support of piping. Compact lifts of pipe bedding material in accordance with this Article prior to placing subsequent backfill material. 4. Placing and Compacting Pipe Trench Fill: Unless otherwise shown, placing and compacting of pipe trench fill materials shall comply with the following: a. Deposit and compact pipe trench fill material uniformly and simultaneously on each side of piping to prevent lateral displacement of piping. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 16 b. Each layer of pipe trench fill material shall be compacted by not less than two complete coverages of all portions of surface of each lift using appropriate compaction equipment or machinery. c. Method of compaction and compaction equipment and machinery used shall be appropriate for material to be compacted and shall not transmit damaging shocks to piping. G. Installation of Flowable Fill, also known as Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM): 1. Discharge flowable fill from ready-mix delivery vehicle into excavation, or other space to be backfilled with such material, via chutes, pumping, or hand-carried in buckets, in accordance with the Contract Documents (including the Specifications of Division 03 - Concrete) and requirements of flowable fill ready-mix Supplier. 2. Subgrade on which flowable fill is placed shall be free of disturbed or softened material and water. 3. Place flowable fill in lifts not greater than four feet depth. 4. Placing of each lift of flowable fill shall be a continuous operation, to the extent practicable. 5. Place flowable fill in manner that prevents flotation of piping or other damage to the Work, other Underground Facilities, and adjacent property. 6. Cold Weather Placing: a. Do not place flowable fill on frozen subgrade. b. Flowable fill batching, mixing, and placing may be performed when weather conditions are favorable, and ambient air temperature is 34 degrees F and rising. c. At the time of placing, flowable fill must have a temperature of not less than 40 degrees F. d. Discontinue placing flowable fill when ambient air temperature is 38 degrees F or less and falling. 7. After placing flowable fill, allow not less than 12 hours before placing subsequent lift or approved otherwise by Engineer. 8. Prevent contact with flowable fill by construction vehicles and equipment, or other traffic, for not less than 24 hours after placing, or until flowable fill is sufficiently hard to prevent rutting or other damage by vehicles and construction equipment. H. Fill Required Under Subbase for Pavement and Other Traveled Ways: 1. Where bottom of pavement or surfacing of other traveled way will be at elevation equal to or less than preconstruction ground surface, after required excavation and preparation of subgrade, provide required subbase material to required depth. At underside of pavement or other surfacing of traveled way, subbase material shall extend horizontally twelve inches beyond edges of pavement or other surfacing. Exterior edges of subbase material shall be placed and compacted at uniform slope of one foot vertical-to-one foot horizontal away from top edge of subbase down to subgrade. 2. Where bottom of pavement or surfacing of other traveled way will be at elevation greater than preconstruction ground surface, after required preparation of subgrade, provide required fill material and subbase material to required depth. At underside of pavement or other surfacing of traveled way, subbase material shall extend horizontally twelve inches beyond edges of pavement or other surfacing. Exterior edges of subbase material and fill material shall be placed and compacted at uniform slope of one foot vertical-to-one foot horizontal away from top edge of subbase down to subgrade. I. Temporary Pavement: 1. Provide not less than 1.5 inches of temporary bituminous pavement immediately after filling excavations in paved roads and other pavement subject to vehicular traffic, where such pavement will remain permanently. 2. Maintain surface of paved area over the fill in good and safe condition during progress of the Work, and promptly fill depressions over and adjacent to the fill area caused by settlement of fill. 3. Permanent replacement pavement shall be equal to that of the existing roadways, unless otherwise shown or specified. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 17 J. Compaction Density Requirements: 1. Compaction Requirements for Sitework (including civil, grading, and Underground Facilities): Per the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. 2. Fill Lift Thickness: a. Unless expressly shown or indicated otherwise, place fill in trenches, below piping, below foundations, or under paved areas in horizontal uncompacted layers not exceeding 12 inches deep, and thoroughly compact each before next layer is placed. b. In pipe trenches, above elevation of bottom of pipe, horizontal uncompacted layers shall be six inches deep. 3. Fill Moisture Content: Fill shall be wetted and thoroughly mixed to achieve moisture content to within the required range indicated in the applicable table, above, with the following exception(s): a. On-site clayey soils: Optimum to plus three percent (moisture less than optimum is unacceptable). 4. Replace natural, undisturbed soils or compacted soil subsequently disturbed or removed by construction operations with materials compacted as indicated. 5. Field quality control testing for density; to verify that specified density was obtained, will be performed during each day of compaction Work. Responsibility for field quality control testing is indicated in this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article. 6. When field quality control testing indicates unsatisfactory compaction, provide additional compaction necessary to obtain the required compaction. Perform additional compaction Work at no additional cost to Owner until required compaction is achieved. Such work includes complete removal of unacceptable (as determined by Engineer) fill areas and replacement and re-compaction until acceptable fill is provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. K. Replacement of Unacceptable Excavated Materials: In cases where over-excavation to replace unacceptable soil materials is required, backfill the excavation to required subgrade with granular structural fill material and thoroughly compact in accordance with applicable table in this provision. Slope the sides of excavation in accordance with the maximum allowable inclinations specified for each structure location. 3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Unauthorized Excavation – General: 1. Excavations outside lines and grades shown or indicated and that are not approved by Engineer (including excavations below required subgrade elevation, unless Engineer directs removal of unsuitable subgrade material), together with removing and disposing of the associated material, shall be at Contractor's cost and risk. 2. Fill unauthorized excavations with properly-compacted granular structural fill material at Contractor’s cost. 3.8 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE A. Pavement Subbase - General: 1. Place subbase material, in layers of specified thickness, over subgrade to support pavement base course. 2. Prepare subgrade underlying subbase course in accordance with this Section’s general requirements for subgrades. B. Grade Control: 1. During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope of subbase course. 2. Comply with Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering, regarding staking and elevation controls. C. Placing of Pavement Subbase Course: 1. Provide subbase material where required to the limits shown or indicated. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 18 2. Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, in accordance with indicated cross-section and thickness. If the Contract Documents do not show or indicate required section of replacement paving (if any), replacement subbase course shall be of thickness equal to existing subbase course. 3. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase material during placing operations. 4. After completing compaction, other than that necessary for bringing material for the next course, do not haul or drive over compacted subbase. 5. To prevent softening of subgrade, do not install pavement subbase in excess of 500 feet in length without compacting. 6. If subgrade material becomes churned up into or mixed with subbase material, remove the mixed material and replace with clean, compacted subbase material. 3.9 GRADING A. Grading - General: 1. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this Section, including adjacent transition areas. 2. Smooth subgrade surfaces within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: 1. Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from buildings and structures. 2. Grade to prevent ponding of water. Provide grades and slopes as shown on the Drawings and to allow effective drainage to proper drainage routes, such as catch basins, ditches or swales intended to convey storm water, and other storm water drainage routes. Where intended grade for effective drainage is unclear, promptly submit to Engineer request for interpretation and obtain Engineer’s interpretation or clarification before proceeding, 3. Provide final surfaces free of irregular surface changes, in accordance with the following: a. Grassed Areas and Areas Covered with Gravel, Stone, Wood Chips, or Other Special Cover: Finish areas to receive topsoil or special cover to within not more than one inch above or below required subgrade elevations. Requirements for topsoil and finish grading are in Section 31 22 19 - Finish Grading. b. Pavement (including hard-surfaced pavement and areas with stone surfacing): Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade, and cross section, with finish surface not more than 0.5-inch above or below required subgrade elevation. C. Grading Surface of Fill Under Concrete Slabs-on-Grade and Concrete Mats: 1. Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. 2. Provide final grades within tolerance of 0.5-inch when tested with a ten foot straight edge. 3.10 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED SPOIL MATERIALS A. Spoil Disposal - General: 1. Contractor shall haul away excavated material that does not comply with requirements for fill, or is in excess of quantity required for fill. 2. Disposal of materials shall comply with Laws and Regulations, at no additional cost to Owner. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests and Inspections: 1. Testing Laboratory: a. Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing. b. Testing Laboratory Scope: 1) Perform field moisture content tests (in accordance with ASTM D2216 or ASTM D6938) and density tests (in accordance with ASTM D1556 or ASTM D6938) to verify that required compaction of fill materials was provided. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 19 2) Tests of actual unconfined compressive strength or bearing tests (in accordance with ASTM D2850 or ASTM D2166) on each stratum. 3) Furnish to Engineer and Contractor written results of each test. c. Authority and Duties of Testing Laboratory: 1) Testing laboratory representatives (“technician”) shall inspect the materials in the field, perform testing, and report findings to Engineer and Contractor. When the Work is defective, technician will direct attention of Engineer and Contractor to such defective Work. 2) Technician will not supervise performance of any of Contractor’s Work. Technician shall not perform other duties for Contractor. 3) Work will be tested and inspected by testing laboratory as the Work progresses, but failure to detect defective Work (including defective materials) shall not, in any way, prevent later rejection when defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate Engineer for Substantial Completion or final acceptance. Technicians are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release requirements of the Contract Documents, or to approve or accept any portion of the Work. 2. Responsibilities and Duties of Contractor: a. Use of testing laboratory or geotechnical special inspector or consultant in no way relieves Contractor of responsibility to provide Work in compliance with the Contract Documents. b. When Owner furnishes services of testing laboratory, special inspector, consultant, or any combination thereof, for excavation and fill Work, Owner and Engineer do not represent that the sampling and testing performed by Owner-hired testing laboratory or inspections by Owner-hired special inspectors or consultants, is sufficient for Contractor’s purposes, or to monitor all aspects of the excavation and fill Work. If additional quality control is needed to verify that the Work performed and materials delivered to the Site are in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor may retain its own, independent testing laboratory to perform additional sampling and testing for Contractor’s purposes. c. To facilitate testing laboratory, special inspectors, and consultants, Contractor shall advise testing laboratory, special inspectors, and consultants not less than two days in advance of filling operations to allow for completion of field quality control testing and for assignment of personnel. d. Contractor shall be responsible for providing required compaction for fill and other earthwork. Contractor shall control construction operations by performing confirming tests to verify that Contractor has complied with the Contract Documents relative to compaction and moisture content. e. Contractor shall demonstrate adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding one or more of the following quantities of earthwork. Each test location shall include tests for each layer, type, or class of fill to finish grade. 1) 200 linear feet of trench fill. 2) 10 cubic yards of granular structural fill. 3) 100 cubic yards of suitable soil material. 4) 50 cubic yards of subbase material. 3. Testing laboratory will inspect and indicate acceptable subgrades and fill layers before construction work is performed thereon. Testing of subgrades and fill layers shall be as follows: a. Trenches for Structures, and Underground Facilities (including buried ductbanks): 1) In Open Fields: Two locations every 1,000 linear feet. 2) Under Pavement Cuts or Within Two Feet of Pavement Edges: One location every 400 linear feet. b. Footing Subgrade: For each stratum of soil on which footings will be placed, perform not less than one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata, when acceptable to Engineer. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 05 - 20 c. For granular structural fill: Once per lift for each 1,000 square feet placed and compacted. d. For soil structural fill: 1) On 30-foot intervals on all sides of the building or structure for every compacted lift, but not less than one per lift on each side of the building or structure for buildings or structures less than 60 feet long on a side. 2) For material not used as fill against buildings or structures, once per lift for each 1,000 square feet placed and compacted. e. For Suitable Soil Material: One per 1,000 square feet on every compacted lift. f. Subbase Material: One per 1,000 square feet on every compacted lift. 4. Periodic compliance tests will be made by Engineer to verify that compaction is in accordance with the Contract Documents, at no cost to Contractor. Contractor shall remove overburden above the level at which Engineer wishes to test and shall fill and re-compact the material after testing is complete. B. Defective Work: 1. If testing laboratory reports or inspections indicate subgrade, fill, or bedding compaction less than specified density, Contractor shall remove unacceptable materials as necessary and replace with specified materials and provide additional compaction at Contractor’s cost until subgrades, bedding, and fill are acceptable. 2. Costs for retesting of subgrade, fill, or bedding materials that did not originally comply with the Contract Documents, including required density, shall be paid by Contractor. 3.12 RESTORATION A. Restoration - General: 1. Perform finish grading, including providing topsoil, in accordance with Section 31 22 19 - Finish Grading. 2. Provide replacement paving, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, and similar items in accordance with the Contract Documents including the Specifications of Division 32 - Exterior Improvements. 3. Restore landscaping including lawn and meadow areas, in accordance with the Contract Documents including the Specifications of Division 32 - Exterior Improvements. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 1 SECTION 31 23 16.43 TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for temporary (during construction) support of excavations including: a. Qualifications of Contractor’s professional engineer (if any) retained for designing temporary support of excavations. b. Contractor’s additional investigations and evaluations necessary for designing temporary support of excavations. c. Performance criteria and general provisions for temporary support of excavations. d. General provisions for temporary support of excavations, including supports Contractor proposes remain in place following construction. e. Trench boxes. f. Maintenance and removal of temporary support of excavations. B. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. Temporary support of excavations is part of the Work associated with excavating and filling. Include costs for temporary support of excavations under bid/pay items for excavating and related Work. No separate payment will be made for temporary support of excavations. 2. In the event Engineer directs that temporary sheeting, shoring, or other excavation supports originally intended as temporary are to remain in place, and the Contract includes an appropriate item of Unit Price Work for permanent sheeting (or other appropriate material) to remain in place, then payment for such temporary sheeting ordered to remain by Engineer will be at the unit price indicated in the Contract. Where Engineer directs temporary sheeting, shoring, or other temporary support of excavations is to remain and the Contract does not include an appropriate item of Unit Price Work, then an appropriate price for such support of excavations will be mutually agreed upon by the parties and either an appropriate Contract modification or allowance authorization, if any, will be issued in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters, but when used in this section have the meaning indicated below: a. “Sheeting” means: Long, structural sections of steel with a vertical interlocking system that create a continuous wall, often used for retaining soil or water. The terms “sheet piling”, “sheeting”, and “piling” (and derivative terms, such as “piles”) have the same meaning. Certain types of soldier piles may qualify as sheeting. b. “Shoring” means: Temporary means of supporting the walls of an excavation or existing structure, that does not qualify as sheeting. Two basic types of shoring for excavations are timber shoring and aluminum hydraulic shoring; the latter is a lightweight system and equipment used for supporting trench excavations. c. “Subgrade” means: The uppermost surface of native soil material unmoved from cuts; the bottom of excavation. d. “Tie-backs” means: A method of laterally supporting sheeting or shoring when congestion within the limits of the excavation need to be minimized. Tiebacks generally Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 2 consist of a central steel bar (or strand tendon), embedded in the soil, surrounded by an annulus of grout. e. “Trench box” means: A one- or two-sided shield, placed temporarily in an excavation, typically a trench, which protects workers inside the trench box in the event of collapse of the excavation wall. Trench boxes may be relocated within the excavation as the Work progresses. Trench boxes also shield workers from falling or dislodged materials. Trench boxes are not intended to shore up excavation walls or prevent collapse. The terms “trench box”, “trench shield”, and “shore shield” have the same meaning. f. “Wales” means: Beams that span across the face of sheeting or shoring distributing the earth and water pressures to either a raker or cross-strut. Struts, as used in this Section, are structural elements that transfer the load from a temporary excavation support wall to an adjacent, parallel structure. Rakers are struts that are positioned at an angle extending from a temporary excavation support wall to a foundation block or supporting substructure. In this Section, the words “wales” and “walers” have the same meaning. B. Reference Standards: Standards referenced in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. ANSI/AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 2. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code – Steel. 3. United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE) a. Engineer Manual 1110-2-2504 - Design of Sheet Pile Walls. 4. United States Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) a. FHWA-IF-99-015 Geotechnical Engineering Circular No . 4 - Ground Anchors and Anchored Systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Contractor’s Professional Engineer: a. Where necessary for performing the Work in accordance with this Section and when required by Laws or Regulations governing the practice of the associated design discipline or Laws or Regulations governing excavation safety and trench safety in construction, retain the services of a professional engineer, licensed and registered in the same jurisdiction as the Site, to evaluate subsurface conditions and design systems for temporary support of excavations. b. Professional engineer shall be appropriately licensed and registered for the professional services required by this Section, and shall be appropriately experienced in evaluating subsurface conditions and excavation conditions affecting health and safety of personnel and protection of property similar to those at the Site, and in designing and evaluating systems for temporary support of excavations. c. Responsibilities shall include: 1) Evaluating existing subsurface data and information for the Site and adjacent areas, available to Contractor. 2) Advising Contractor regarding additional subsurface investigations necessary to provide temporary support of excavations as required by this Section. 3) Evaluating the potential effect on existing facilities, at and adjacent to the Site, of installing and removing temporary systems for supporting excavations. 4) Personally designing or supervising the design of temporary supports for excavations, including preparing drawings, performance requirements, and specifications for temporary support of excavations, such as temporary sheeting, shoring, bracing, wales, tie-backs, and similar systems. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 3 5) Sealing and signing instruments of service developed for the Work, including calculations, evaluation reports, recommendations of a technical nature, drawings, specifications, and similar documents. 6) Assisting Contractor with obtaining permits and approvals necessary for temporary support of excavations. 7) Consulting with Contractor, including visiting the Site during construction as required by Contractor, during installation, use, and removal of temporary supports of excavations. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Advisory on Approach for Temporary Support of Excavations: a. Furnish document regarding Contractor’s proposed approach for temporary support of excavations, indicating the following: 1) General indication of Contractor’s overall, intended approach for temporary support of excavations; for example, indicate whether excavations will be supported by a trench box, temporary sheeting, shoring, wales, tie-backs, or other method. Indicate where different approach will be used for different excavations or portions of excavations. 2) Indication of whether Contractor or Subcontractor intends to retain services of a professional engineer relative to temporary support of excavations. When such individual or entity will be so retained, indicate name of entity and specific, individual design professional-in-responsible-charge, together with indication of type of license and registration and associated license and registration number and jurisdiction. If not previously furnished with Contractor’s insurance documentation, furnish evidence that such professional engineer possesses professional liability insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents, including indication of whether required coverage limits have been eroded during the current policy by prior claims. 3) Contractor-proposed modifications to the permanent Work requested to accommodate temporary support of excavations. In the event such changes are proposed, approval, if any, of such changes will be only via an appropriate Contract modification. If no such request is submitted prior to start of the Work of this Section, Engineer will proceed on the premise that Contractor-proposed modifications are not intended. 4) Where temporary steel sheeting will be used for temporary support of excavations, indicate anticipated dates for installing such items and anticipated dates for removing such items. 5) Description of how temporary support of excavations and operations will, or may, affect Owner, facility manager (if other than Owner), and other property owners and occupants. 6) Indication of locations, if any, where temporary support of excavations are proposed to remain in place following construction and backfilling, and extent of Contractor’s proposed modifications or partial removals of such systems. 7) Indicate Project-specific sequence of installation and removal of temporary supports of excavations, including: installation and removal of wales, struts, and other supports; and locations and approximate elevations of interim (partial) backfilling against foundations, when interim (partial) backfilling is proposed. 8) Where applicable, indicate intended monitoring including monitoring of deflection of permanent construction and settlement outside of excavations. b. Engineer’s (or Owner’s) review, comments upon, acceptance, or other appropriate action on such Submittal does not, in any way, reduce or mitigate Contractor’s sole responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, sequences, and associated safety and protection measures. c. Do not include in such Submittal: calculations, evaluation reports, recommendations, drawings, or specifications developed, sealed, and signed by Contractor or Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 4 Subcontractor or by professional engineer retained by Contractor or Subcontractor. However, in the event of alleged or potential effect of temporary support of excavations on facilities or property, or in the event of disagreement between the parties concerning allegedly differing subsurface or physical conditions, promptly furnish such documents to Engineer and Owner upon request. Should such request be received by Contractor, furnishing such documents to Engineer and Owner will not, in any way, reduce or mitigate Contractor’s sole responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, sequences, or associated safety and protection measures. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Refer to Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Description: 1. Provide temporary support of excavations comprised of materials and systems suitable for the intended purpose, excavation depth, subsurface conditions, other environmental factors, installation and removal methods, and duration of use. 2. Contractor shall determine necessary elements for temporary support of excavations for compliance with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents, while considering subsurface conditions, construction means, methods, techniques, procedures, and sequences, and associated safety and protection measures. 3. Previously-used materials, where used for temporary support of excavations, shall be in good condition and be neither damaged nor excessively pitted. 4. Steel materials and fabrications for temporary support of excavations shall be in accordance with ANSI/AISC 360 and welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 5. Steel sheeting that Contractor proposes remain in place following construction shall consist of rolled sections of continuous interlocking type. Type and design of the sheeting and bracing shall comply with this Article’s requirements, above, for steel work for all temporary support of excavations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification, Evaluation, and Assessment of Existing Conditions: 1. Evaluate information and data available to Contractor regarding subsurface and physical conditions at the Site and adjacent areas relative to temporary support of excavations. Perform additional investigations as necessary to enable Contractor to provide appropriate temporary support of excavations required to comply with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents. 2. Such investigations and evaluations by Contractor may include excavating (and subsequently backfilling), test pits to visually observe subsurface conditions and groundwater, test borings, sampling, and laboratory analyses. Obtain and record data and perform evaluations necessary for Contractor to provide temporary support of excavations as required. 3. As the Work progresses, evaluate performance of temporary support of excavations as necessary and modify temporary support of excavations as appropriate to comply with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents. B. Installing the Work constitutes Contractor’s approval of field conditions prevailing at the time of the Work and materials and design of temporary support of excavations used by Contractor. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 5 3.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS A. Excavations in stable rock may be made with vertical sides without temporary support of the excavation. Under all other conditions, excavations shall be sloped and benched as appropriate for the subsurface conditions, or provided with temporary support of excavations. B. Temporary Support of Excavations - General: 1. Provide temporary sheeting, shoring, wales, tie-backs, trench boxes, cofferdams, and other excavation supports as necessary and required for the Work, in accordance with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents. 2. Clearances and types of temporary sheeting, shoring, wales, tie-backs, and other excavation supports, insofar as they may affect the finished character of the Work and the design of sheeting to be left in place, will be subject to Engineer’s approval; but Contractor is solely responsible for adequacy of all temporary sheeting, shoring, wales, tie-backs, cofferdams, and other excavation supports, Contractor proposes remain in place following construction. 3. Performance and Design: Design and provide temporary supports of excavations and excavation supports Contractor proposes to remain in place in conformance with USACOE Engineer Manual 1110-2-2504 and FHWA-IF-99-015 Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 4, unless more-stringent requirements are expressly indicated in the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations. 4. Installation: a. Steel work for temporary support of excavations shall be in accordance with ANSI/AISC 360 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 5. As excavation progresses, carry down temporary supports of excavation to required elevation at or below subgrade. 3.3 TRENCH BOXES A. Installing and Using Trench Boxes: 1. Excavation of unclassified and other materials below bottom of trench box shall not exceed limits established in Laws and Regulations. 2. When using trench box for installing piping: a. Portions of trench box extending below the mid-diameter of an installed, rigid pipe, such as prestressed concrete pipe and other types of rigid pipe, shall be raised above the pipe’s mid-diameter elevation prior to relocating the trench box within the excavation for further construction. b. Bottom of trench box shall not at any time extend below mid-diameter of installed pipe that is flexible or has flexing capability, such as steel, ductile iron, PVC, CPVC, polyethylene, and other pipe that has flexing capability. 3. When using trench box for installing structures, bottom of trench box shall not extend below elevation of top of granular base material of structure. B. Removal or Relocation of Trench Boxes: 1. When removing trench box or relocating trench box within the excavation, exercise extreme care to prevent moving piping, structures, and other Underground Facilities, and prevent disturbance of bedding material for piping, structures, and other Underground Facilities. 2. When piping, structures, or other Underground Facilities are disturbed, remove and reinstall the disturbed items in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.4 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS A. Maintenance of Temporary Support for Excavations: 1. During construction, maintain temporary support of excavations as long as necessary until removal or Engineer’s concurrence that such temporary support of excavations may remain in place following construction. 2. As necessary, promptly remedy deficiencies in temporary support of excavations. B. Removal of Temporary Support of Excavations: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF EXCAVATIONS 31 23 16.43 - 6 1. When temporary support of excavations are no longer necessary, remove from the Site all elements of temporary systems supporting excavations unless Owner (through Engineer) approves temporary support of excavations, or part thereof, continuing existence at the Site after final payment. 2. Perform such removal in manner not injurious to buildings, structures, Underground Facilities, and other facilities, their appearance, and adjacent construction. 3. Removal of Temporary Sheeting and Bracing: a. Remove from excavations sheeting, shoring, wales, and other elements of temporary supports, unless otherwise directed by Engineer in writing. Perform removal to avoid damaging the Work and adjacent construction. Removal shall be equal on both sides of excavation to ensure no unequal loads on buildings, structures, Underground Facilities, and other facilities. b. Defer removal of sheeting, shoring, wales, and other elements, where removal may cause soil to come into contact with concrete, until the following conditions are satisfied: 1) Concrete has cured for not less than seven days, and reached full design strength as indicated in the Contract Documents. 2) Wall and floor framing, up to and including grade level floors, is in place. c. When temporary support of excavations is allowed to remain in-place following construction, accurately record locations on the record drawings, in accordance with Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. 4. Requirements for removing and relocating trench boxes are indicated in the “Trench Boxes” Article of this Section. 5. Restore disturbed areas in accordance with the Contract Documents. W END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 1 SECTION 32 12 00 FLEXIBLE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hot-mix, hot-laid, flexible paving, also known as asphalt concrete paving, used for roadways, driveways, parking areas, asphalt concrete sidewalks, and other areas where flexible paving is required by the Contract Documents, including: a. Preparation, such as sawcutting, milling where shown or indicated, cleaning, and other preparation for installing flexible paving. b. Asphalt concrete paving materials. c. Prime coating. d. Tack coats. e. Joint adhesives. 2. Pavement markings where shown or indicated. a. Quality control and testing. B. Related Requirements: Include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill. 2. Current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. Flexible paving Work is part of the lump sum bid/pay item indicated on the Bid Form, and part of the Contract. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Terminology: 1. Terminology indicated below are not defined terms and are not indicated with initial capital letters, but when used in this section have the meaning indicated below: a. “Flexible paving” means a composite material commonly used in construction projects such as road surfaces, driveways, parking areas, and similar paved surfaces. Flexible paving consists of asphalt (used as a binder) and a mineral aggregate (which may be augmented by recycled materials, such as recycled asphalt pavement or “RAP”) mixed together, installed in layers (courses), and compacted. Flexible paving may be divided into different types of materials, such as base course, binder course, and top course. Appurtenant materials, such as prime coats, tack coats, joint adhesives, and similar Work, are part of flexible paving Work. The terms “flexible paving”, “asphalt paving”, “asphalt concrete paving”, “bituminous paving”, and derivative terms, such as when the word “pavement” is used in lieu of the word, “paving”, have the same meaning. In this Section, the term “top course” is used, which has the same meaning as the terms ”wearing course”, and the final “surface course”. b. “Milling” means shaping and removing portions of existing surfaces by the cold milling process and subsequent cleaning. c. “Subbase” means the layer of compacted aggregate material installed on either the subgrade or, when required, geotextile separation fabric. Courses of flexible paving material are subsequently installed on top of the subbase. d. “Subgrade” means the uppermost surface of native soil material unmoved from cuts; the bottom of excavation on which either geotextile or subbase is installed. B. Reference Standards: Standards referenced in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 2 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. AMRL - AASHTO Accreditation Procedures Manual for the Accreditation of Construction Materials Testing Laboratories. b. M320 - Specification for Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder. c. MP1 - Standard Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder. 2. Asphalt Institute (AI): a. MS-2 - Mix Design Methods. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D242/D242M - Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Asphalt Mixtures. b. D692/D692M - Standard Specification for Coarse Aggregate for Asphalt Paving Mixtures. c. D946/D946M - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Binder for Use in Pavement Construction. d. D977 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt. e. D1073 - Standard Specification for Fine Aggregate for Asphalt Paving Mixtures. f. D1188/D1188M - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Asphalt Mixtures Using Coated Samples. g. D2726/D2726M - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non- Absorptive Compacted Asphalt Mixtures. h. D2950/D2950M - Standard Test Method for Density of Asphalt Mixtures in Place by Nuclear Methods. i. D3549/D3549M - Standard Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted Asphalt Mixture Specimens. j. D3666 - Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials k. D6690 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. l. E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. 4. State Specifications: Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Specifications and coordinate installation of items that must be installed with, or before, flexible paving Work. B. Notify other contractors, utility owners, and owner’s of transportation facilities (as applicable) in advance of installing flexible paving to provide such other entities with sufficient time for installing items included in their contracts or projects, as applicable, that must be installed with, or before, flexible paving Work. Sequencing and Scheduling: 1. Schedule and perform flexible paving Work when local hot-mix asphalt concrete plants are open. Contractor’s Progress Schedule shall include appropriate float, relative to flexible paving Work, to accommodate potential early and late seasonal closures and openings of hot-mix asphalt concrete plants and potential effect of weather on the Work. 2. Perform flexible paving Work after other necessary and required Work has been performed, such as providing required traffic controls, adjusting rim elevations of buried items such as manhole covers, valve box covers, and stormwater inlets, and coordination with authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Areas requiring flexible paving Work are owned and under the jurisdiction of Owner, unless indicated otherwise elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Qualifications: 1. Asphalt Concrete Production Facility: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 3 a. Production facility for hot-mix asphalt concrete, prime coat material, tack coat material, crack sealant material, and other bitumastic materials shall be certified by the Montana Department of Transportationfor furnishing such materials for highway construction within jurisdiction of such entity. b. Submit to Engineer documentation of compliance with requirements of this provision, either prior to, or together with, product data Submittals for materials required under this Section. 2. Contractor’s Testing Laboratory: a. Retain the services of independent testing laboratory to perform testing and determine compliance with the Contract Documents of materials specified in this Section. b. When Contractor is expressly required, by this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, to retain testing laboratory for tests required under this Section’s “Field Quality Control” Article, retain one testing laboratory for quality assurance testing and field quality control testing. c. Testing laboratory shall possess current, valid accreditation from the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL), in accordance with AASHTO AMRL Procedures Manual for the Accreditation of Construction Materials Testing Laboratories, or ASTM D3666, for tests required for quality assurance testing indicated in this Article and field quality control testing indicated to be Contractor’s responsibility. d. Testing laboratory shall comply with ASTM E329. e. Testing laboratory shall be experienced in the types of testing required. f. Selection of testing laboratory is subject to Engineer’s acceptance. Upon Engineer’s request, submit qualifications statement for testing laboratory, including name of entity, location, copies of applicable certifications, summary of entity’s experience, and names and qualifications of personnel who will perform the subject sampling and testing. 3. Installer of Flexible Paving: a. Installer shall be experienced in providing flexible paving of the types required for the Project, and experienced in providing flexible paving in quantities similar to, or greater than, those required for the Project. b. Upon Engineer’s request, submit documentation of the proposed installer’s compliance with qualifications requirements of this Article. C. Quality Assurance Testing: 1. Quality assurance testing is in addition to source quality control testing, when required, and field quality control testing required in the “Field Quality Control” Article of this Section. 2. Materials used in the Work may require testing and retesting, as directed by Engineer, during the Project. Allow free access to stockpiles of materials used in producing flexible paving and material production facilities during the Work. Tests not specifically indicated to be performed at Owner’s expense, including retesting of defective materials and installed Work, shall be performed at Contractor’s expense. 3. Contractor’s Quality Assurance Testing Laboratory Scope: a. Use of testing laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and the Work in compliance with the Contract Documents. b. Quality assurance testing laboratory shall perform the following, unless evidence of material compliance with reference specifications indicated in the various provisions of material requirements in “Part 2 – Products” of this Section, is submitted to Engineer by Contractor and asphalt concrete production facility: 1) Test in accordance with reference specifications indicated in requirements for materials in “Part 2 – Products” of this Section. In lieu of quality assurance testing, submit evidence and certification of material compliance with reference specifications. When evidence of such compliance submitted is not acceptable to Engineer, perform quality assurance testing. c. To facilitate testing services, Contractor shall: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 4 1) Secure and deliver to testing laboratory (when requested by Engineer) representative Samples of materials that Contractor proposes to furnish and that are required to be tested. 2) Furnish such labor as is necessary to obtain and handle Samples at the Site or at asphalt concrete production facility and other material sources. 3) Advise testing laboratory and Engineer sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for completion of quality assurance tests and for assignment of personnel. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit proposed asphalt concrete mix design for each asphalt concrete material, and other bituminous materials, required under this Section, providing complete data on materials, including location in the Work, source, material content and percentages, temperatures, and other pertinent data. Indicate proportion of bituminous material from recycled asphalt pavement. b. Proposed gradation for each aggregate required in flexible paving. Submit gradation test results for identical material furnished on a previous project. Indicate proportion of recycled asphalt pavement. c. In lieu of information required in the two paragraphs immediately above this paragraph, submit certificates of compliance with reference specifications indicated in the requirements for asphalt concrete materials in “Part 2 – Products” of this Section, for each of the following: 1) Each mix design required. 2) Bituminous materials required. 3) Aggregates required in flexible paving, from each material source and each required gradation. 4) Density of uncompacted asphalt concrete material. 5) Density of previously-compacted, previously-tested asphalt concrete material. 6) Density and voids analysis for each asphalt concrete material test specimen. 7) Evidence of asphalt concrete plant inspection and compliance with reference specifications indicated in “Part 2 – Products” of this Section. 8) Proportion of recycled asphalt pavement in bituminous materials and aggregate. 2. Product Data: a. Product manufacturer’s published data sheet, written instructions for handling and installation, and similar published information for joint adhesive material. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Quality Assurance Test Data Submittals and Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit for quality assurance tests and source quality control tests required. 2. Delivery Tickets: a. Submit copy of delivery ticket for each load of asphalt concrete, prime coat materials, tack coat materials, and other materials obtained from asphalt concrete production facility, signed by Contractor upon delivery to the Site. 3. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit results of required field quality control tests and inspections that are Contractor’s responsibility. 4. Qualifications: a. Asphalt concrete production facility. b. Contractor’s testing laboratory, when required by Engineer. c. Flexible paving installer, when required by Engineer. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Restrictions on temperature and weather conditions for installing flexible paving are indicated in the “Installation” Article in “Part 3 – Execution” of this Section. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASPHALT CONCRETE MATERIALS: A. ...Description: 1. Provide all labor, materials, construction equipment and machinery, tools, services, and incidentals necessary and required to furnish and install flexible paving. 2. Provide flexible paving at locations shown on the Drawings. When locations of flexible paving are not shown, provide flexible paving to restore areas where flexible paving existed on the Effective Date of the Contract where such areas were disturbed, damaged, or removed by Contractor. B. Bituminous Materials: 1. Bituminous Materials for Asphalt Concrete: a. Bituminous materials for asphalt concrete shall comply with the reference specifications indicated in the “Mixes” provision of this Article, for the associated flexible paving mix. b. Bituminous Materials from Recycled Asphalt Pavement (RAP): When use of RAP in asphalt concrete materials is acceptable, comply with requirements for RAP in the “Mixes” provision of this Article. 2. Prime Coat: a. Prime coat shall be low-viscosity, emulsified asphalt. b. Provide prime coat in accordance with the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. 3. Tack Coat: a. Tack coat shall be emulsified asphalt. b. Provide tack coat in accordance with the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. ] 4. Joint Adhesive: a. Joint adhesive shall be a hot-applied asphalt product furnished as a solid and subsequently heated and applied to joints in asphalt concrete. b. Provide joint adhesive in accordance with the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. 5. Crack Sealant: a. Provide crack sealant material in accordance with the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. C. Aggregate Materials: 1. Aggregates for Asphalt Concrete – General: a. Aggregate materials for asphalt concrete used in flexible paving shall be in accordance with the reference specifications indicated in the “Mixes” provision of this Article, for the associated asphalt concrete mix. 2. Recycled Asphalt Pavement (RAP): a. Processed material obtained by milling or full depth removal of existing flexible pavement may be used as aggregate in asphalt concrete base course, and binder course , and top course. b. Maximum proportion of RAP in asphalt concrete provided shall be in accordance with reference specifications indicated in the “Mixes” provision of this Article, for the associated asphalt concrete mix. c. When RAP is used, comply with the Contract Documents relative to applicable asphalt concrete mix, bituminous materials, and aggregates. D. Mixes: 1. Asphalt Concrete Mixtures: Provide the following materials designed and manufactured in accordance with the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. : 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 6 1. Obtain and test Samples in accordance with AI MS-2. Testing is responsibility of Contractor or asphalt concrete production facility. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine subbase and base on which flexible paving will be installed. 2. Advise Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. 3. Do not proceed with flexible paving Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Installing the Work constitutes Contractor’s approval of underlying work, surfaces upon which flexible paving will be installed and field conditions prevailing at the time of the Work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General Preparation: Before starting installation of flexible paving, perform the following: 1. Grade Control: Establish and maintain throughout flexible paving Work required lines and grades, including crown and cross-slope for each asphalt concrete course during construction. Comply with Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering. 2. Coordinate placement of flexible paving with new and existing curbs, gutters, sidewalks, drainage structures (such as catch basins, drop inlets, and similar items), manholes and associated frames and covers, valve boxes and associated covers, sensors and similar devices associated with traffic controls, signage, pavement markings and markers, and similar items. Where necessary, adjust rim elevations of manhole frames and covers, valve boxes and covers, and stormwater drainage inlets within areas of flexible paving Work to required final elevations. 3. Provide appropriate maintenance and protection of traffic measures during pavement installation and related Work. B. Subgrade and Subbase: 1. Prepare subgrade and provide subbase for flexible paving in accordance with Section 31 23 05 - Excavation and Fill. Before installing flexible paving Work, obtain Engineer’s concurrence that subgrade and subbase are suitable for installing flexible paving. 2. Prime Coat: a. Provide and use application equipment in accordance with the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. b. Uniformly distribute prime coat at junction of adjacent applications. c. Following application, do not disturb prime coat. Allow prime coat material to penetrate treated surface of subbase and treated surface to absorb prime coat material until the prime coat material is completely cured. d. Apply additional prime coat materials to uncoated or lightly coated areas. e. Twenty-four hours after applying prime coat, cover areas evidencing excessive prime coat material with sufficient dry fine aggregate to blot up or remove excess prime coat material. f. Protection of Treated Surface: Maintain and protect treated surface against damage. Remedy damaged areas to Engineer’s satisfaction before installing subsequent Work. C. Surface Preparation: 1. Repair surface defects in existing pavement to provide uniform surface to receive new pavement. 2. Clean existing surfaces over which asphalt concrete pavement will be installed, by removing from surface foreign material, excess asphalt concrete, excess joint sealant, crack filler, and other undesirable matter. 3. Where new flexible paving will abut existing paving, sawcut edges of existing paving in accordance with the “Installation” Article of this Section. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 7 4. Provide tack coat as indicated in the “Installation” provision of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation Requirements for Asphalt Concrete: 1. Flexible Paving Installation - General: a. Provide final surfaces of flexible paving with uniform texture, at required locations and grades, with required cross-sections, as shown and indicated. b. Where new flexible paving top course (wearing course or surface course) is provided and connects to existing pavement, provide new top course that smoothly and evenly transitions to existing paved surfaces and grades. 2. Joining of Pavements: a. When new flexible paving will connect to or abut existing or previously-installed pavement, existing or previously-installed pavement shall be neatly and carefully edged to allow overlapping and feathering of subsequent course of asphalt concrete material. b. Sawcutting of Edges: 1) Where new flexible paving will meet existing pavement, existing pavement shall be sawcut and notched. 2) Sawcut existing pavement with equipment and machinery specifically intended and assembled for sawcutting pavements of the type required. 3) Edges of existing pavement shall be cleanly cut. Edges shall be linear and have vertical cut face. 4) Where cut edges are not smooth, even, and straight, repair cut edge to remain to provide a smooth, even appearance. c. Where flexible paving will meet existing asphalt pavement, remove existing pavement 12 inches onto undisturbed existing pavement course at edges where new flexible paving will meet existing pavement. d. Provide tack coat in accordance with requirements of this Article. 3. Tack Coat: a. Provide tack coat material at surface of existing or previously-installed pavement course over which new flexible paving will be installed, prior to installing subsequent pavement course.. b. Tack Coat Installation: Install tack coat immediately prior to installing asphalt concrete. Install asphalt concrete while tack coat is wet. Apply tack coat in accordance with the current edition of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. 4. Weather Limitations for Installing Asphalt Concrete: a. Temperature: 1) For base course and binder course paving lifts equal to or greater than two inches thick, ambient temperature shall be 40 degrees F and rising. 2) For top course paving or other pavement courses in lifts less than two inches thick, temperature of surface on which pavement will be placed shall be 50 degrees F or greater. b. Prohibitions: 1) Do not install flexible paving materials during foggy conditions or during precipitation. 2) Do not install flexible paving materials when base on which material will be installed contains moisture in excess of optimum. 3) Install flexible paving materials only when Engineer concurs weather conditions are suitable. 5. Installation of Asphalt Concrete: a. Asphalt concrete mixture shall be transported to the Site and installed as soon as possible after mixing. b. Do not pave over existing manhole frames and covers, valve box covers, stormwater inlets, or similar items in areas of flexible paving Work.. c. Placement of each asphalt concrete course shall be completed over full width of section under construction during each day's flexible paving Work. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 8 d. Spread and finish asphalt concrete courses using self-propelled, mechanical spreading and finishing equipment. Initially placed thickness of courses shall not exceed 150 percent of required, compacted thickness unless approved in writing by Engineer. e. Compaction: 1) Provide and use compacting rollers to properly compact and finish asphalt concrete. Provide not less than two rollers at the Site at all times during installation of asphalt concrete. One roller may be a pneumatic-tire roller. 2) During compaction, roller speed shall not exceed three miles per hour. When sufficient quantity of rollers is unavailable, reduce quantity of asphalt concrete installed to accommodate quantity of available rollers. 3) Required rollers shall be at the Site, in proper, operating condition, prior to placing asphalt concrete. 4) Using vibratory rollers in lieu of steel-wheeled rollers is acceptable, however, when thickness of asphalt concrete is one-inch or less, rolling shall be via static mode. 5) Rolling of initially placed asphalt concrete material, or breakdown rolling, shall begin as soon as asphalt concrete will bear roller without undue displacement. 6) Rolling shall be longitudinal, overlapping on successive trips by not less than one- half roller rear wheel width, and not more than three-quarters of roller rear wheel width. Alternate trips of roller shall be of slightly different lengths. 7) Roller motion shall be slow enough to avoid displacing asphalt concrete. 8) Operate rollers continuously from breakdown of laid asphalt concrete through finish rolling. 9) Perform finish rolling using a steel-wheeled roller or a vibratory steel-wheel roller operating in static mode. 10) Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even, smooth finish without roller marks. 11) At each location not accessible to roller, thoroughly compact asphalt concrete using tampers and finish, where necessary, with hot smoothing iron to provide uniform, smooth layer over entire area so compacted. 12) Criteria for acceptance of installed density of asphalt concrete is indicated in the “Field Quality Control” Article of this Section. f. Placement of Adjacent Strips of New Asphalt Concrete: 1) When more than one width of asphalt concrete material will be placed, six-inch wide strip of asphalt concrete adjacent to area on which future material will subsequently be placed, shall not be rolled until such subsequently-placed material is installed. 2) Do not leave unrolled strip unrolled for more than two hours after placing, unless six-inch unrolled strip is first heated with a joint heater. 3) After first strip or width of asphalt concrete is compacted, place, finish, and compact second width or strip as required for first width, except that rolling shall be extended to include six-inch strip of first width not previously compacted. 6. Joint Adhesive: a. Provide joint adhesive at the following locations: 1) At edges where new flexible paving will connect to existing or previously-installed pavement, including transverse and longitudinal joints. 2) Where new pavement will abut curbing, concrete gutters, drainage structures and frames, manhole cover frames, valve boxes, and similar items. b. Preparation: Prior to applying joint adhesive, properly clean surfaces to receive joint adhesive. Clean using pneumatic air discharge. Provide suitable traps or devices on compressed air equipment to prevent moisture and oil from contaminating surfaces to receive joint adhesive. c. Equipment: Heat and melt joint adhesive in melter constructed either as double boiler filled with heat-transfer medium between inner and outer shells, or with internal tubes or coils carrying joint adhesive through heated oil bath and into heated double wall hopper. Insulate or provide heat tracing on hose used for conveying joint adhesive Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 9 between melter or hopper and surfaces to receive joint adhesive. Equipment shall include appropriate temperature sensor and indicator to facilitate monitoring of material temperature during application. d. Application: 1) Apply joint adhesive at temperatures and using procedures in accordance with material manufacturer’s written instructions. 2) Apply joint adhesive to entire face of transverse and longitudinal joints in flexible paving. 3) Apply joint adhesive to full depth of top course where top course abuts curbing, concrete gutters, drainage structures and frames, manhole cover frames, valve boxes, and similar items. 7. Construction Joints: a. Provide construction joints in flexible paving to provide neat junction, thorough compaction, and bond throughout. b. Longitudinal joints in asphalt concrete top course shall correspond with edges of proposed traffic lanes. Other joint arrangements require Engineer’s approval. c. Provide transverse joint, perpendicular to centerline of asphalt concrete installed, extending across full width of strip being laid, at end of each workday, and at other times when placement of hot-mix asphalt concrete will be suspended for a period of time allowing asphalt concrete mixture to chill. Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be staggered at not less than 10 feet. d. Thoroughly compact, by rolling forward, end of freshly laid asphalt concrete before asphalt concrete becomes chilled. When work is resumed, vertically cut for full depth of course. 8. Curing: a. Do not allow traffic onto newly installed pavement until obtaining Engineer’s concurrence. Do not allow traffic on flexible paving until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F. b. Hold construction traffic on new pavement to a minimum. 9. Paver and Equipment Cleaning: a. Tools and equipment used for asphalt installation shall not be cleaned on pavement surface, or near streams, ponds, drainage structures, or other areas that are tributary to drainage routes or surface waters. Designated area, at location acceptable to Engineer, shall be used for cleaning paving equipment and tools. b. When petroleum products are used for cleaning, use tarpaulins, sand pails, other types of pails, or other methods to collect liquids produced by cleaning, to prevent contamination spills and release to the environment. c. Hand sprayers or other similar devices may be used to minimize the quantity of petroleum product applied. Sand, soil, and collected petroleum products resulting from cleaning shall be properly disposed of as petroleum contaminated soil in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Installation Tolerances: 1. Thickness: a. Asphalt concrete provided as a truing and leveling course, if any, and conditioning of existing surface will not be considered in pavement thickness determinations. b. Allowable tolerance for asphalt concrete required for each separate type of asphalt concrete mixture required is as follows: 1) Nominal pavement lift thicknesses of four inches or less, 1/4-inch. 2) Nominal pavement lift thicknesses greater than four inches, 1/2-inch. c. Tolerance for total thickness of all asphalt concrete pavement courses shall be 1/4-inch. When asphalt concrete is installed on newly constructed subbase, additional tolerance of 1/4-inch is acceptable, both in nominal thickness of course installed directly on subbase, and total pavement thickness. No payment will be made for material provided in excess of indicated tolerance. 2. Surface Trueness: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 10 a. “Surface trueness”, as used in this Section refers to new pavement constructed to required surface cross-section, with even surface, without abrupt changes or transitions in elevation or grade, and without ruts or raveling. Appropriately installed pavement results in no ponding of water and properly conveys stormwater runoff to appropriate drainage routes and stormwater inlets. b. Contractor shall construct each pavement course to 1/4-inch surface tolerance. c. Engineer will evaluate surface trueness and compliance with surface tolerance by directing Contractor to provide 16-foot straight edge or string line placed parallel to centerline of pavement and with 10-foot straight edge or string line placed transversely to centerline of pavement. Variations exceeding indicated tolerance shall be corrected or pavement remedied and replaced at no additional cost to Owner. d. Crowned Surfaces: 1) Test crowned surfaces with a crown template, centered and at right angles to the crown. 2) Surfaces will be acceptable when variance is equal to or less than 1/4-inch from the template. 3. Elevation: Finished surface of pavement shall be within plus or minus 1/2-inch of elevations shown or indicated. New pavement shall be equal in elevation to frames and covers of manholes, valve boxes and similar items, and allow appropriate stormwater drainage into stormwater inlets. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Engineer’s Field Quality Control Activities: a. Engineer may determine compliance with installation tolerances for surface trueness, and depth and trueness of milling (where required), as indicated elsewhere in this Section. Contractor shall furnish implements required for evaluating and determining trueness of asphalt concrete courses and milling. b. Engineer may identify, by visual observation, areas of apparent defective flexible paving Work and appropriately advise or notify Contractor of such defects. 2. Responsibilities of Testing Laboratory: a. Owner’s Field quality control testing laboratory will: 1) Test proposed materials for compliance with the Contract Documents, as directed by Engineer. 2) Perform field density tests, as indicated below in this provision, to verify required compaction of asphalt materials was provided obtained. 3) When directed by Engineer, perform coring of installed and compacted flexible paving to determine compliance with required course thickness and tolerances. Submit written results of tests to Engineer and Contractor. b. Density: 1) Test Method: ASTM D2950; test one sample every 1,000 square yards of pavement. Test for each asphalt concrete course installed. 2) In addition, when directed by Engineer, compare density of in place flexible paving materials against laboratory specimen (as determined during required quality assurance testing) or certificates on same asphalt pavement mixture, using nuclear density device. 3) Criteria for Acceptance: Density of in-place, compacted asphalt pavement shall be not less than 90 percent of recorded laboratory specimen (as determined during required quality assurance testing) or certificate density. Compacted density shall be not be greater than 98 percent. c. Thickness of Asphalt Concrete Pavement: 1) Contractor shall provide work zone traffic control and facilitate obtaining pavement cores by testing laboratory. 2) Measure in accordance with ASTM D3549; obtain and test one core sample from every 1,000 square yards of compacted pavement. Comply with thickness tolerance specified in Article 3.3 of this Section. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 11 3) Engineer may use another acceptance method such as yield calculations to determine final thickness for acceptability and payment. 4) Contractor shall repair holes from test specimens in accordance with this Section’s requirements for repairing defective Work. d. Authority of Field Quality Control Testing Laboratory: 1) Technicians representing testing laboratory will inspect materials at the Site and perform required testing. When materials furnished or Work performed do not comply with the Contract Documents, field quality control testing laboratory technician shall promptly direct attention of Engineer and Contractor to such non- compliance. 2) Testing laboratory personnel shall not act as foreman or perform other duties for, or on behalf of, Contractor. The Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect defective Work shall not in any way prevent later rejection of such defective Work when defect is discovered. Failure to detect defective Work as it occurs does not obligate Engineer to final acceptance. Testing laboratory personnel are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release requirements of the Contract Documents, nor to approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Asphalt Concrete Mix Temperature: Measure temperature at time of placement, record, and submit to Engineer. 4. Drainage: a. Upon completion and curing of top course provided under the Contract. Engineer will direct Contractor to spray clean water (whether potable or non-potable, and without observable solid material, biological matter, and Constituents of Concern) thoroughly over top course of flexible paving Work, in presence of Engineer, or Resident Project Representative , or Owner’s Site Representative. b. Spray sufficient quantity of water over all top course areas to result in visually obvious runoff to drainage routes. c. In lieu of water spray, Naturally occurring precipitation sufficient for visually observable runoff is acceptable. d. Immediately following conclusion of spraying or precipitation event, as applicable, Engineer, or Resident Project Representative , or Owner’s Site Representative will mark areas of ponding, if any, with appropriate lumber crayon of high visibility color contrasting with pavement. Contractor shall furnish necessary quantity of lumber crayons. Immediately following marking, obtain digital photographic documentation of each marked area, and promptly submit to Engineer. e. Engineer or Owner may redesignate, re-mark, or both, areas of ponding as such areas become apparent to Engineer or Owner. 5. Surface Trueness: a. Contractor’s obligations regarding assisting Engineer in determining compliance with milling tolerances are indicated in the “Milling” provision of Article 3.2 of this Section. b. Contractor’s obligations regarding assisting Engineer in determining compliance with tolerance for trueness of installed asphalt concrete courses are indicated in the “Installation Tolerances” provision of Article 3.3 of this Section. B. Defective Paving Work: 1. The following constitutes defective flexible paving Work: ruts, ridges, roller marks, cracking, tearing, segregation, bleeding, ponding of stormwater, or other irregularities. Flexible paving Work that does not comply with required tolerances or other requirements of the Contract Documents, or that is damaged while protection is Contractor’s responsibility will be considered as defective Work. 2. When directed by Engineer, remove and replace defective flexible paving Work. Cut out such areas of defective pavement and fill with fresh asphalt concrete materials, compacted to required density. When performing such repairs, provide tack coats and joint adhesive as required elsewhere in this Section, and compact as required elsewhere in this Section. When pavement is cut out or removed for such remedies, the area removed shall be of Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction FLEXIBLE PAVING 32 12 00 - 12 regular shape with right angles. To extent practicable, cut-out areas shall be square or rectangular. Surface of repaired areas shall be flush with adjacent pavement. 3. Completely fill holes in flexible paving, resulting from test specimens, using required asphalt concrete top course material, together with required tack coats and joint adhesive, compacted to required density. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleaning: After completing flexible paving installation, completely clean surfaces of excess and spilled bituminous materials, excess asphalt concrete, and foreign matter. Appropriately dispose of such material. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finished pavement until pavement is properly cured, hard, and cool. B. Cover openings of drainage structures, manholes, valve boxes, and similar items in paved areas until permanent coverings are provided. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING 32 92 00 - 1 SECTION 32 92 00 SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Seeding, sodding and landscape planting: a. Soil preparation. b. Native grass seeding. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 31 22 19 - Finish Grading. 2. Section 31 23 05 Excavation and Fill 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Nursery and Landscape Association/American National Standards Institute (ANLA/ANSI): a. Z60.1, American Standard for Nursery Stock. 2. AOAC International (AOAC). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D5268, Standard Specification for Topsoil Used for Landscaping and Construction Purposes b. D4972, Standard Test Methods for pH of Soils c. F1647, Standard Test Methods for Organic Matter Content of Athletic Field Rootzone Mixes B. Quality Control: 1. Fertilizer: a. If Engineer determines fertilizer requires sampling and testing to verify quality, testing will be done at Contractor's expense, in accordance with current methods of the AOAC. b. Upon completion of Project, a final check of total quantities of fertilizer used will be made against total area seeded. c. If minimum rates of application have not been met, Contractor will be required to distribute additional quantities to make up minimum application specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Signed copies of vendor's statement for seed mixture required, stating botanical and common name, place of origin, strain, percentage of purity, percentage of germination, and amount of Pure Live Seed (PLS) per bag. d. Listing of type of cover crop to be used and rates and procedures for planting if fall planting of Native Grass is anticipated. e. Type of herbicide to be used during first growing season to contain annual weeds and application rate. 2. Certification that each container of seed delivered will be labeled in accordance with Federal and State Seed Laws and equals or exceeds Specification requirements. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Copies of invoices for fertilizer used on Project showing grade furnished, along with certification of quality and warranty. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING 32 92 00 - 2 C. Furnish seed in sealed standard containers labeled with producer's name and seed analysis. 1. Remove from the site seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit. D. Furnish fertilizer uniform in composition, free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment, delivered to site in bags or other containers, each fully labeled and bearing the name, and warranty of the producer. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Installation Schedule: 1. Provide schedule showing when trees, shrubs, groundcovers and other plant materials are anticipated to be planted. 2. Show schedule of when lawn type and other grass areas are anticipated to be planted. 3. Indicate planting schedules in relation to schedule for irrigation system installation, finish grading and topsoiling. 4. Indicate anticipated dates Engineer will be required to review installation for initial acceptance and final acceptance. B. Pre-installation Meeting: 1. Meet with Engineer and other parties as necessary to discuss schedule and methods, unless otherwise indicated by Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers and suppliers listed in the applicable Articles below are acceptable. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Native Grass Seeding: Certified seed of locally adapted strains. 1. Seed mixture: GRASSES LBS PLS PER ACRE APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF SEEDS PER LB (PLS) Big bluestem(Andropogon gerardi) 2.4 165,000 Blue grama(Bouteloua gracilis) 0.1 825,000 Green needlegrass(Stipa viridula) 0.6 181,000 Sideoats grama(Bouteloua curtipendula) 0.8 191,000 Switchgrass(Panicum virgatum) 1.0 389,000 Western wheatgrass(Agropyron smithhii) 1.5 110,000 B. Mulch: 1. For seeded areas: a. Clean, seed-free, threshed straw of oats, wheat, barley, rye, beans, peanuts, or other locally available mulch material which does not contain an excessive quantity of matured seeds of noxious weeds or other species that will grow or be detrimental to seeding, or provide a menace to surrounding land. b. Do not use material which is fresh or excessively brittle, or which is decomposed and will smother or retard growth of grass. 2. Native grass seeded areas: Weed-free hay, excluding brome or bluegrass hay, used on slopes 4:1 or greater. C. Soil Amendments: 1. Peat: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING 32 92 00 - 3 a. Sphagnum moss, reed, or sledge peat free from lumps, roots and stones or other foreign matter, and of such physical condition that it will pass through a 1/2 inches mesh. b. Provide peat containing no less than 90% organic matter by weight on a dry weight basis. 2. Vermiculite: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL PREPARATION A. General: 1. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted soon after. 2. Provide facilities to protect and safeguard all persons on or about premises. 3. Protect existing trees designated to remain. 4. Verify location and existence of all underground utilities. a. Take necessary precaution to protect existing utilities from damage due to construction activity. b. Repair all damages to utility items at sole expense. 5. Provide facilities such as protective fences and/or watchmen to protect work from vandalism. a. Contractor to be responsible for vandalism until acceptance of work in whole or in part. B. Native Grass Seeding: 1. Seeding without cover crop: a. Plow areas to be seeded to shallow depth as soon as ground can be worked without clodding. b. Leave ground fallow until weeds germinate, approximately 3 to 4 weeks later. c. Disc entire area again to turn over weeds. d. Disc at least twice prior to planting. e. Cultipack entire area immediately following final disking. 2. Leave surface (seedbed) hard to discourage weed growth and erosion. a. Ground should be undisturbed and uncultivated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Native Grass Seeding: 1. Planting seasons: a. Warm-season grasses: Late spring or early summer; avoid late summer or fall planting. b. Cool-season grasses: Early spring or early fall, before or after hot weather. 2. Seed with a grass drill. a. Operate drill as near to contour as practical (a Nisbet grass drill has been proven to be successful in this operation). 3. Areas of 1 acre or less may be sown by hand-broadcasting, mixing seed with generous amount of damp sand to ensure even distribution. a. Harrow or rake seed into ground following seeding to minimum 1/4 inches and maximum 1 inch depth 4. Seed grasses and forbs at rates prescribed in previous table. a. Minimum seeding rate is 20 PLS/SQFT. 5. If area is seeded without cover crop, protect newly seeded areas from erosion by mulching with weed-free straw in a continuous blanket using 2 tons per acre and anchor to ground with rolling coulter or a wheatland land packer. 6. Provide initial watering after installation as appropriate for planting conditions. 3.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT A. General: 1. Begin maintenance of planted areas immediately after each portion is planted and continue until final acceptance or for a specific time period as stated below, whichever is the longer. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING 32 92 00 - 4 2. Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and watering equipment as required to convey water from water sources and to keep planted areas uniformly moist as required for proper growth. 3. Protection of new materials: a. Provide barricades, coverings or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain. b. Repair and pay for all damaged items. 4. Replace unacceptable materials with materials and methods identical to the original specifications unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. B. Native Grass Seeding: 1. Maintain all seeded areas for one year after planting is complete. 2. Do not mow bed native grass. 3. When weeds are shading out 70% of (minimum 6 inches) native grass seed, shred weeds back to height of seedlings with a rotary shredder. 4. Do not allow weeds to exceed a height of 8 inches. 5. Herbicide (1/2 to 1 pound active ingredient per acre) may be used to control weed growth after the first year. a. Do not apply until weeds are 40% broadleaf, seedlings at least 1 inch high and 2-4 leaf stage. b. If herbicide is used, apply twice. 6. Water according to need to maintain survival of planting. 7. Regrade and replant eroded or bare areas evident at end of one year period. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 1 SECTION 40 61 13 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Basic requirements for complete instrumentation system for process control. 2. Requirement for Contractor to subcontract the Process Control System portion of the Work to a “Systems Integrator”. 3. Process control and solar power control are deemed synonymous for purposes of this project. Any references to Process Control, (PCS), or other control aspects are directed to also apply to the Solar Power Control System and all appurtenances. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 2. Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing 3. Section 40 61 43 - Surge Protection Devices for Instrumentation and Control Equipment 4. Section 40 63 43 - Programmable Logic Controllers 5. Section 40 63 44 - PV SCADA Control System 6. Section 40 66 05 - Network Equipment 7. Section 40 67 00 - Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 8. Section 40 68 63 - Configuration of HMI Software and Reports 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Calibrate: To adjust a device so that it provides a specified response to known inputs. 2. Hazardous Areas: Class I, II or III areas as defined in NFPA 70. 3. Highly Corrosive and Corrosive Areas: Rooms or areas identified on the Drawings where there is a varying degree of spillage or splashing of corrosive materials such as water, wastewater or chemical solutions; or chronic exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic agents, chemicals, chemical fumes or chemical mixtures. 4. Intrinsically Safe Circuit: A circuit in which any spark or thermal effect is incapable of causing ignition of a mixture of flammable or combustible material in air under test conditions as prescribed in UL 913. 5. System Integrator: A Contractor/Subcontractor who combines instrumentation, control devices, hardware, software, and networking products from multiple vendors to provide a fully functioning control system. B. Referenced Standards: 1. The International Society of Automation (ISA): a. S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. b. 62443-3-3 Security for Industrial Automation and Control Systems, Part 3-3: System Security Requirements and Security Levels 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) a. SP 800-82, Guide to Industrial Control Systems (ICS) Security C. Miscellaneous: 1. Comply with electrical classifications and NEMA enclosure types shown on Drawings. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 2 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Control System Requirements: 1. This Specification Section provides the general requirements for the control system. 2. The control system consists of all inverters, data managers, power monitors/meters, primary elements, transmitters, switches, controllers, computers, communication devices, recorders, indicators, panels, signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies, special or shielded cable, special grounding or isolation, auxiliaries, software, wiring, and other devices required to provide complete control of the plant as specified in the Contract Documents. B. Utilization of System Integrator: 1. Retain a System Integrator subcontractor to provide a fully functioning control system. a. The System Integrator shall be responsible for the provision of an integrated control system fully functioning in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. b. As a minimum, the responsibilities of the System Integrator shall include: 1) Control system performance. 2) Supervision of installation and final connections. 3) Controller programming. 4) HMI configuration. 5) Calibrations. 6) Network equipment configuration 7) Preparation of Drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 8) System start-up. 9) Training. 10) Demonstration of substantial completion and all other aspects of the control system. c. Contractor is responsible for integration of the Solar Power System and all components to generate and regulate solar power, including the no export control. Owner's Engineer will be responsible for programming and integration of the SPS screens and alarms into the Existing Plant SCADA system. Note that the SPS and NO Export system must operate independently of the Plant SCADA such that disconnection from Plant SCADA does not interrupt or interfere with operation of either system. 2. Provide all required coordination of instrumentation with other work to ensure that necessary wiring, conduits, contacts, relays, converters, and incidentals are provided in order to transmit, receive, and control necessary signals to other control elements, to control panels, and to receiving stations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Limit the scope of each submittal to one Specification Section. 1) Each submittal must be submitted under the Specification Section containing requirements of submittal contents. 2) Except for Qualifications Submittal, do not provide any submittals for Specification Section 40 61 13. 2. Product Data: a. For each product specified in related sections, product technical data including: 1) Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2) Equipment catalog cut sheets. 3) Instrument data sheets: a) ISA S20 or approved equal. b) Separate data sheet for each instrument type. 4) Materials of construction. 5) Physical limits of components including temperature and pressure limits. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 3 6) Size and weight. 7) Electrical power requirements and wiring diagrams. 8) NEMA rating of housings. b. Refer to Section 01 81 33 – Cyber Security Requirements for other required cyber security related submittals. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Provide a parameter setting summary sheet for each field configurable device. 2. Certifications: a. Documentation verifying that calibration equipment is certified with NIST traceability. b. Approvals from independent testing laboratories or approval agencies, such as UL, FM or CSA. 1) Certification documentation is required for all equipment for which the specifications require independent agency approval. 3. Testing reports: Source and Field quality control reports. 4. Qualifications Submittal: a. Documentation verifying System Integrator adherence to specified certifications and qualifications C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. All Shop Drawings shall be modified with as-built information/corrections. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. b. Instrumentation and Control Equipment Operation and Maintenance Manual Content: 1) Provide a printed copy of the following sheets following the Equipment Record sheets or ISA Data Sheets. a) Loop Check-out Sheet. b) Instrument Certification Sheet. 2) Provide the following detailed information: a) Use equipment tag numbers from the Contract Documents to identify equipment and system components. b) As-constructed fabrication or layout drawings and wiring diagrams. c) As-constructed network asset inventory, and physical and logical network diagrams. (1) Coordinate with the Owner or Engineer to determine the preferred method of delivery to assure security of this information. d) Software Licenses: (1) Provide a single Software Licenses submittal with documentation of the software licenses for all software provided. (2) Spreadsheet including license numbers, registration records, expirations for service contracts,, and name of owner representative to whom each software has been registered with the OEM as the licensee. e) Software Recovery and Reconstitution Images: (1) For each control system component on which software is installed or configured under this project, provide a recovery image of the software or configuration. This image must allow for bare-metal restore such that restoration of the image is sufficient to restore system operation to the imaged state without the need for re-installation of software. 3) Password Summary Report: a) Provide a Password Summary Report documenting the administrative password for each device and describing the procedure to change the password for each device. Do not provide the Password Summary Report in electronic format. Provide two hardcopies of the Password Summary Report, each copy in its own sealed envelope. b) Provide listing of all temporary Systems Integrator usernames setup for each device. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 4 4) Additional information as required in the associated equipment or system Specification Section. 3. Warranty Documentation: a. Provide copies of warranties and list of factory authorized service agents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. System Integrator: a. Experience: 1) Have satisfactorily provided control system integration for a minimum of five projects of similar magnitude and function. Projects may include work related to both solar and/or wastewater treatment plant operations. 2) Bidders may submit experience for pre-approval during the biding phase. b. Qualification: 1) Regularly engaged in the design and the installation of process solar control and instrumentation systems and their associated subsystems as they are applied to no- export systems. 2) Maintains a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility within 200 miles of the project site with full time employees capable of designing, documenting, fabricating, installing, calibrating, programming, configuring, providing training services, and testing the systems specified herein. 3) Capable of responding to on-site problems within24 hours of notice. Provide an on- site response within 24 hours of notification starting at two months before scheduled startup to two months after startup completion. 2. Panel Fabricator: a. Experience: 1) Have satisfactorily fabricated control panels for a minimum of five projects of similar magnitude and function. b. Certification: 1) UL508A Certification 3. Programmer: a. Experience: 1) Have satisfactorily provided programming of control systems utilizing the same manufacturers’ equipment for a minimum of five projects of similar magnitude and function. 4. Installation Supervisor: a. Experience: 1) Installation supervisor shall have had experience in overseeing installation and startup of at least three similar installations within the last 5 years. b. Qualifications: 1) Successfully completed ISA or manufacturer’s training courses on general process instrumentation and configuration and implementation of the specific programmable controllers, computers, and software proposed for this project. 5. HMI Programmer: a. Experience: 1) Have satisfactorily provided HMI programming for the type of system specified herein for a minimum of five projects of similar magnitude and function. b. Certification: 1) Current CORE certification by Inductive Automation, HMI software manufacturer and development software used on the project. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not remove shipping blocks, plugs, caps, and desiccant dryers installed to protect the instrumentation during shipment until the instruments are installed and permanent connections are made. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NEMA TYPE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide enclosures/housing for control system components in accordance with the designations provided on the Drawings. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 01 81 33 - Cyber Security Requirements for cyber security related product requirements. B. Unless stated otherwise, system operating criteria are as follows: 1. Stability: After controls have taken corrective action, as result of a change in the controlled variable or a change in setpoint, oscillation of final control element shall not exceed two cycles per minute or a magnitude of movement of 0.5% full travel. 2. Response: Any change in setpoint or change in controlled variable shall produce a corresponding corrective change in position of final control element and become stabilized within 30 seconds. 3. Agreement: Setpoint indication of controlled variable and measured indication of controlled variable shall agree within 3% of full scale over a 6:1 operating range. 4. Repeatability: For any repeated magnitude of control signal, from either an increasing or decreasing direction, the final control element shall take a repeated position within 0.5% of full travel regardless of force required to position final element. 5. Sensitivity: Controls shall respond to setpoint deviations and measured variable deviations within 1.0% of full scale. 6. Performance: All instruments and control devices shall perform in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide identification devices for instrumentation system components in accordance with Specification Section 10 14 00. B. Provide corrosion resistant spacers to maintain 1/4 inches separation between equipment and mounting surface in wet areas. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wherever feasible, use bottom entry for all conduit entry to instruments and junction boxes. B. Install electrical components per the requirements of the Electrical design. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-Up Procedures and Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. 3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Refer to Section 01 81 33 - Cyber-Security Requirements for cyber security related closeout requirements. 3.4 ATTACHMENTS A. The forms listed below and bound following this Specifications section’s “End of Section” designation, are part of this Specification Section: 1. Loop Check-out Sheet (one page). Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 6 2. Instrument Certification Sheet (one page). 3. Final Control Element Certification Sheet (one page). END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 40 61 13 - 7 Loop Check-out Sheet Project Name: Owner’s Project No. (if applicable): Page of Project Owner: Regulatory Agency Project No. (if applicable): HDR Project No.: Date: LEAK AND TERMINATION/CONTINUITY CHECKS FIELD CONTROL CAB DESCRIPTION LEAK CHECK(1) TERM/CONT CHECK(2) TERM/CONT CHECK(2) Device Tag No. Process Conn. Signal Tube Device Tag No. Termination Ident. Device Tag No. Termination Ident. 1. Leak check for pneumatic signal tubing to be per ISA-PR7.1. 2. Termination/continuity check includes check at terminated equipment for: (a) correct polarity, (b) appropriate signal generation, transmission and reception, and (c) correct shield & ground terminations. OPERATOR INTERFACE CHECK-OUT MONITORING POINTS OBSERVED PARAMETER TYPE TAG NO. TAG NO. TAG NO. TAG NO. TAG NO. TAG NO. PROCESS VAR EQUIP STATUS ALARM POINT OPERATOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS CHECKED FUNCTION TYPE TAG NO. LOCATION TAG NO. LOCATION TAG NO. LOCATION FINAL CONFIGURED SETTINGS TAG NO. SWITCH & ALARM SP CONTROLLERS Gain Reset, rpm Deriv. (rate), min PV Set Point Describe all interlocks checked, equipment started/stopped, valves/operators stroked. Describe modes of operation checked, and location of operator interface (local/remote). I certify that the control loop referenced on this page has been completely checked and functions in accordance with applicable drawings and specifications. Certified by: Date: (Work Performed By) Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 1 SECTION 40 61 21 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for testing of the Process Control System (PCS) hardware and software prior to shipment to the site for installation. a. Inspection. 1) System hardware operational testing. 2) System software demonstration. b. Test records. 2. Requirements for field testing of the PCS hardware and software. a. Process Control System checkout. b. Instrument calibration. c. Loop testing/checkout. d. Integrated Site Acceptance Test (SAT). B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements 2. Section 40 63 43 - Programmable Logic Controllers. 3. Section 40 67 00 - Control System Equipment Panels and Racks. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements. B. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Submit factory acceptance test (FAT) procedures not less than 15 calendar days prior to the scheduled start of the FAT. Include the following: a. Modular test plans and procedures to allow individual test segments to be repeated if necessary. b. Description of individual test segments and steps comprising each segment, particularly the methods and processes to be followed. c. Procedures for monitoring, correcting, and retesting variances. d. Procedures for controlling and documenting all changes made to the hardware/software after the start of testing. e. Descriptions of test equipment. f. Expected results for each segment, including pass/fail criteria. g. Documentation record forms to be used to certify results of factory testing. h. Block diagrams of the hardware test configuration, such as PLC or Data Manager external communication links, and any test or simulation hardware and software. 2. Submit Field Testing procedures not less than 15 calendar days prior to the scheduled start of field testing. Include the following: a. Site Acceptance Test (SAT) Plan. 1) Divide into separate sections based on process systems. 2) Each section shall include a sequential step-by-step checkout plan. b. Typical Loop Check-out Sheets, if other than the form attached to Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements. C. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Post factory acceptance test: a. Final documentation certifying that all Factory tests have passed with satisfactory results. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 2 D. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Site Acceptance Test (SAT) Report. 2. Completed Loop Check-out Sheets. 3. All system startup and checkout records, test records, recommendations and information furnished by Manufacturer’s representatives during testing and startup, and amended documentation specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING (FAT) GENERAL: A. Utilize software-based process control simulation and hardware-based I/O simulation panel when conducting the full system test. Software based process simulation shall provide a real time, virtual environment that interfaces with the PLC or Data Manager system applications software and programming to mimic the behavior of the real process equipment and systems that are monitored and controlled by the system, including the capability to force individual or groups of PLC or system I/O. B. Demonstration of communication between Data Manager and Inverters shall be included in the Test Procedure. Test shall include demonstration that communication performance (speed, error rates, failure and recovery) conforms to specified requirements. C. Demonstration of communication between Data Manager and HMI shall be included in the Test Procedure. Test shall include demonstration that communication performance (speed, error rates, failure and recovery) conforms to specified requirements and that all data points populate correctly. D. Notify the Engineer in writing a minimum of 15 calendar days prior to the Factory Tests. 1. Engineer and the Owner has the option to witness all required tests. E. Testing Documentation 1. Make following documentation available at test site during the tests: a. Contract Documents. b. Factory Demonstration Testing procedures. c. List of equipment to be testing including make, model, and serial number. d. Shop Drawing submittal data for equipment being tested. 2. Engineer reserves the right to review all documentation at any time during testing. 2.2 FAT INSPECTION A. Inspect all panels, operator interface terminals and cabinets prior to conducting the FAT to verify quality of workmanship and conformance to the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings. Completed inspection forms shall be available for review at time of FAT. Inspection shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Nameplates, warning labels, and tags including correct spelling, color and size of labeling and characters and methods of attachment. 2. Enclosure surfaces flatness, finish, and color. 3. Proper operation of doors, catches, and locks. 4. Wire and cable type, sizes, tagging, color coding and tag placement in readily viewable position/orientation. 5. Wiring runs across hinges properly installed. 6. Proper wiring routing, layout, practices, and grounding. 7. All electrical circuits checked for continuity. 8. Terminal block contact ratings and numbers. a. Shorting Terminal Block orientations and alignment, verify proper operation. 9. Fuses and circuit breakers are correct size and type. 10. Terminal block, fuse, breaker, and other required installed spares. 11. General arrangement and space allocation, including spare usable space in panel and on panel door. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 3 12. PLC and Data Manager equipment (chassis, power supply, power conditioners, processor, adapters, I/O and specialty modules, installed spares, spare usable space) is appropriate. 13. Equipment and devices are properly installed and secured to subpanels and doors using appropriate methods and in appropriate orientation. 14. Fans, blowers, heaters, air-conditioning units, and other environmental controls are operational, unobstructed, and installed with sufficient clearances recommended by component manufacturers. 2.3 FAT - SYSTEM HARDWARE OPERATIONAL TESTING A. Assemble and interconnect the relevant portions of the system as a network that mimics the network that is designed to be installed at the Plant site. 1. As a minimum, the test shall include the following major components: a. All control, metering and relay panels that interface with the control network and are provided by the System Integrator, including local control panels, remote control panels, hardwired/relay logic and PLC based panels. b. Human Machine Interface (HMI) system. c. Ethernet Networks. d. Uninterruptible Power Supplies. e. Network switches, Routers, Firewalls. f. Other network equipment and appurtenances including patch panels. B. All system hardware components and equipment shall be tested to verify proper operation as standalone units. Tests shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. AC/DC power checks. 2. Power fail/restart tests. 3. Verification of UPS power to required components. 4. Diagnostics checks. 5. Verification that all equipment is functioning properly. 6. All electrical circuits energized simultaneously and continuously for 48 hours without failures. 7. All alarm circuits connected to simulated alarm contacts to verify operation. 8. All interlock and shutdown circuits checked for operability and proper function by means of simulated contact. 9. All hardwired input/output devices and components, and all network connected I/O shall be tested to verify operability and basic calibration. 10. Simulate operation of electronic control and receiving instruments and circuits. 11. Any other test required to place the PCS equipment in an operating state. 12. Verify all redundant components fail-over hands-free without interruption of control process. 13. Verify all networking equipment are in an operating state with no unresolved errors in error logs. 14. Verify that all components are integrated and communicating for full simulation test including any simulation software if applicable. 15. Compliance with Contract Documents. C. Develop and execute device failure conditions including PLC failure, HMI Workstation failure, peripheral failures, etc. Special attention shall be given to creating failures in the middle of operator sequences and control actions such as: 1. Failure of a major communications component. 2. Incorrect operator entry in the middle of a multi-step action. 3. HMI Workstation failure in the middle of a control action. 4. Demonstration of all required alarm processing functionality, including audible annunciation. D. OWNER furnished HMI equipment shall be tested as part of the hardware operational testing. E. No-Export Controls shall be demonstrated for proper operation. 1. Engineer will furnish SEL-751 program for installation and testing by System Integrator. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 4 2. Simulate shunt trip action and demonstrate output closure in response to reverse power received. 3. Simulate or provide a 3-phase circuit that can act like the incoming service at the Plant and shows the simulated power flow into the Plant. 4. Simulate reverse power flow at an amplitude required to trip the breaker. 2.4 FAT - SYSTEM SOFTWARE DEMONSTRATION A. Operator Interfaces: 1. Prior to the staging and testing of the system, the display environments (Operator Interface Terminals and Human Machine Interfaces) shall have been configured and loaded into the machines, and database parameters linked to the specified fields. Demonstrate displays, faceplates, password/security capabilities, navigation methods, diagnostic/troubleshooting displays, etc. B. Demonstrate all system software during the FAT (e.g. process monitoring and control, HMI, historian, alarming, simulation, modeling, utility and security programs) incorporated into the system to implement the various functions and capabilities specified. Demonstrations shall include: 1. All required historical data capture, storage, retrieval and reporting functions. 2. All required data management, logging, and trending functions. 3. All required network, communication and interface functions. 4. All required device control functions. 5. All required database management functionality. 6. All required software support utilities. 7. All Control System diagnostics, both on-line and off-line. 8. Correct operation of computations and calculated quantities including totalized values. 9. Proper operation of all changes to the originally specified Control System that have been negotiated and approved during the implementation period. C. Demonstrate the proper operation, configuration and programming of all software based on simulation of all the analog inputs/outputs and all of the discrete inputs and outputs, as indicated on the I/O list. In addition to testing allocated I/O, all spare I/O points shall also be simulated and tested to the degree possible. Demonstration shall show that the monitoring and control software and configuration and programming associated with the input/output points (hardwired and network connected) performs as intended. 1. PLC and Data Manager I/O testing shall include, as a minimum, the following: a. Simulate a field digital input for each PLC or Data Manager input point at the terminal strip of the control panel and verify PLC or Data Manager response. b. Simulate a field analog input for each PLC or Data Manager analog input point at the terminal strip of the control panel and verify PLC or Data Manager response. c. Force an output for each PLC or Data Manager digital output point and verify the signal presence at the terminal strip in the control panel. d. Simulate an analog output for each PLC or Data Manager analog output point and verify signal presence at the terminal strip in the control panel. 2.5 FAT TEST RECORDS: A. Maintain records of all factory test results. As a minimum, include the following items: 1. Name of test procedure. 2. Date of the test. 3. Test results for each test segment including a passed/failed indication. 4. Signatures of individual(s) performing the test and witnesses thereof. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Maintain accurate daily log of all testing activities, calibration functions, and final set point adjustments. B. All testing may be witnessed by the Owner or Engineer. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT A. Provide the following (after successful completion of the Factory Acceptance Test): 1. Check and approve the installation of all Process Control System (PCS) components (including but not limited to control panels, field instruments, networking equipment and racks, patch panels and all cable and wiring interconnects between various equipment, panels and devices) prior to placing the various processes and equipment into operation. As a minimum, include: a. Verification and documentation that all field instruments function properly and are properly calibrated. b. Testing of all final control actions. B. Provide services of authorized manufacturer’s representatives to check and verify the correctness of the installation and operation of equipment. 3.3 PRE-DEMONSTRATION PERIOD TESTING A. Instrumentation Calibration: 1. Verify and document that all instruments and control devices are calibrated to provide the performance required by the Contract Documents. 2. On-site calibration verification is required for all instruments, including “smart” transmitters that have been factory calibrated. a. In addition to factory calibration certification, temperature sensors and gages shall be checked at a single point for conformance to required accuracy. b. Analytical sensors shall be calibrated in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. c. Check operation of all switches to verify actuation occurs in accordance with manufacturer’s specified accuracy. d. Replace any instrument which cannot be properly adjusted. 3. Mark range, date, set point and calibrator's initials on each instrument by means of blue or black ink on a waterproof tag affixed to the instrument. 4. Calibration equipment shall be certified by an independent agency with traceability to NIST. a. Certification shall be up-to-date. b. Use of equipment with expired certifications shall not be permitted. 5. Calibration equipment shall be at least three times more accurate as the device being calibrated. B. Loop Testing: 1. Utilize the approved Loop Check-Out Sheet to document on-site calibration checks. a. Utilize separate loop check-out form for each loop. 2. Minimum loop check-out requirements: a. Use actual signals where available. b. Check control signal generation, transmission, reception and response for all inputs and outputs for all control loops under simulated operating conditions by imposing a signal on the loop at the instrument connections. c. Closely observe controllers, indicators, transmitters, HMI displays, recorders, alarm and trip units, remote set points, ratio systems, and other components. 1) Verify that readings at all loop components are in agreement. 2) Make corrections as required. 3) Following any corrections, retest the loop. d. Check all interlocks for proper functionality. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21 - 6 e. Record all set point and calibration changes on all affected Contract Documents and turn over to Owner. C. Integrated Site Acceptance Test (SAT): 1. Following the testing of each individual loop, perform an integrated Site Acceptance Test (SAT) to verify that all equipment and programmed software are operating as described in the Contract Documents and equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. Checks to include: a. The intended monitoring and control functions of the PCS including all vendor- furnished equipment packaged systems, communications, operator interfaces, statuses, alarms, trends and recording of historical tags. b. Integrated testing on a system by system basis as described in the submitted Site Acceptance Test (SAT) plan sequential step-by-step checkout plan. 1) Documentation with initials of the individuals who perform each test. 2. Provide minimum fifteen (15) day notice to the Owner prior to commencing the SAT. 3. Promptly address and re-test any malfunctions, issues and incompletions arising during the SAT. D. At the successful conclusion of all testing specified in this article, submit the “Instrumentation Supplier's Instrumentation Installation Certificate” required in Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-up Procedures. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION PERIOD A. Demonstrate the functional integrity of the Process Control System for the entire facility in accordance with the demonstration period requirements in Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-up Procedures as evidence of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 1 SECTION 40 61 43 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Category IC1 SPD - Dedicated 120 VAC circuit, series connection, control panel mounted. 2. Category IC3 SPD - Discrete 120 VAC control signal, control panel mounted. 3. Category IC6 SPD - Combination 120 VAC circuit and analog signal, field mounted. 4. Category IC7 SPD - Discrete low voltage control signal, control panel mounted. 5. Category IC8 SPD - Data line, control panel mounted. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems General Requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. eferenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 497B, Standard for Safety Protectors for Data Communications and Fire-Alarm Circuits. b. 1283, Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. c. 1363, Standard for Relocatable Power Taps. d. 1449, Standard for Surge Protective Devices. B. Qualifications: 1. Provide devices for a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the development, design, testing, listing and manufacturing of SPDs of the types and ratings required for a period of 10 years or more and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service. 2. Upon request, suppliers or manufacturers shall provide a list of not less than three customer references showing satisfactory operation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Clamping Voltage: The voltage measured at the end of the 6 inches output leads of the SPD and from the zero voltage reference to the peak of the surge when the applied surge is induced at the 90 degree phase angle of the applied system frequency voltage. B. Let-Through Voltage: The voltage measured at the end of the 6 inches output leads of the SPD and from the system peak voltage to the peak of the surge when the applied surge is induced at the 90 degree phase angle of the applied system frequency voltage. C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The maximum steady state voltage at which the SPD device can operate and meet it specification within its rated temperature. D. Maximum Surge Current: 1. The maximum 8 x 20 microsecond surge current pulse the SPD device is capable of surviving on a single-impulse basis without suffering either performance degradation or more than 10% deviation of clamping voltage at a specified surge current. 2. Listed by mode, since number and type of components in any SPD may vary by mode. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 2 E. Protection Modes: This parameter identifies the modes for which the SPD has directly connected protection elements, i.e., line-to-neutral (L-N), line-to-line (L-L), line-to-ground (L- G), neutral-to-ground (N-G). F. Surge Current per Phase: 1. The per phase rating is the total surge current capacity connected to a given phase conductor. 2. For example, a wye system surge current per phase would equal L-N plus L-G; a delta system surge current per phase would equal L-L plus L-G. a. The N-G mode is not included in the per phase calculation. G. System Peak Voltage: The electrical equipment supply voltage sine wave peak (i.e., for a 120 V system the L-N peak voltage is 170 V). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13 for general process control system submittal requirements. B. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product data: a. For named products, submit only a catalog cut sheet. b. For all other products, submit the data required below. 1) Manufacturer’s experience. 2) Standard catalog cut sheet. 3) Electrical and mechanical drawing showing unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection details and layout diagram of the unit. 4) Create a Product Data Sheet for each different model number of SPD provided. a) Data in the Product Data Sheet heading: (1) SPD Type per PART 2 of the Specification. (2) Manufacturer’s Name. (3) Product model number. b) Data in the Product Data Sheet body: (1) Column one: Specified value/feature of every paragraph of PART 2 of the Specification. (2) Column two: Manufacturer’s certified value confirming the product meets the specified value/feature. c) Data in the Product Data Sheet closing: (1) Signature of the manufacturer’s official (printed and signed). (2) Title of the official. (3) Date of signature. 1.5 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum of a five-year Limited Warranty from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer’s installation, operation and maintenance instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers model numbers listed in the individual product paragraphs below are acceptable. 2.2 CATEGORY IC1 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton AGPH 12015. 2. Schneider Electric ASCO 252120NF015AN3N0. 3. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL MA15/D/1/SI. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 3 4. Phoenix Contact SFP 1-20/120AC (2856702). B. Standards: UL 1449. C. Design: 1. General: a. Mounted internally to control panels for point-of-use loads. b. MOV based or multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. c. Designed for series connection. d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: Provide unit with external terminal screws for each phase, neutral and ground that will accept #14 through #12 conductors. f. Device monitoring: Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators that monitors the on-line status of the units suppression filter system or power loss in any of the phases. 2. Operating voltage: 120 VAC. 3. Operating current: 15 A minimum. 4. Operating frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. 5. Modes of protection: All modes, L-N, L-G and N-G. 6. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. 7. Maximum surge current: 20,000 A per phase, 10,000 A per mode minimum. 8. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: 1000 impulses with no degradation of more than 10% deviation of the clamping voltage. 9. Fusing: Optional integral unit level and/or component level short circuit and/or thermal overload protection. a. External protection as recommended by manufacturer. 10. Maximum clamping voltages, dynamic test with voltages measured from the zero voltage reference and 90 degrees phase angle: System Voltage Test Mode IEEE C62.41.2 UL 1449 (3rd Edition VPRs) B Comb. Wave A Ring Wave L-N = 120 V L-N 400 V 300 V 400 V L-G 500 V 400 V 400 V N-G 500 V 400 V 500 V 2.3 CATEGORY IC3 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL MA-15/D/1/SI. 2. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL SD-150X. 3. Phoenix Contact TTC Series. 4. Phoenix Contact PLT-SEC-T3-120-FM. B. Standards: UL 497B or UL 1449. C. Design: 1. General: a. Mounted internally to control panels for point-of-use loads. b. Multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. c. Designed for series connection. d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: Provide unit with external terminal screws for each phase, neutral and ground that will accept #14 through #12 conductors. f. Device monitoring: Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators that monitors the on-line status of the units suppression filter system or power loss in any of the phases. 2. Operating voltage: 120 VAC. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 4 3. Operating current: 3 A minimum. 4. Operating frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. 5. Modes of protection: L-N; when ground conductor is present L-G and N-G. 6. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. 7. Maximum surge current: 6000 A per phase, 3000 A per mode minimum. 8. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 1000 occurrences of a 200 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 2) 400 occurrences of a 500 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 3) 100 occurrences of a 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform. 4) 100 occurrences of a 2000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 9. Maximum clamping voltages, measured from the zero voltage reference: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400A, 10x700 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 2) IEEE B3 combination wave: 250% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 ring wave: 200% of system peak voltage. 4) IEEE A3 ring wave: 200% of system peak voltage. 5) Mode N-G clamping voltage may be 175% higher than the L-G levels. 2.4 CATEGORY IC6 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Phoenix Contact BXT-N4X 4-Wire. B. Product: 1. Field mounted for protection of field mounted equipment connected to 120 V power and 4 - 20 mA analog signal loops. 2. Category IC1 and Category IC5 SPDs mounted in a common enclosure. 3. Enclosure: Metallic or nonmetallic NEMA 4X. 2.5 CATEGORY IC7 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL SD Series. 2. Phoenix Contact: TTC Series. B. Standards: UL 497B. C. Design: 1. General: a. Mounted internally to control panels for protection of equipment connected to a discrete signal. b. Multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. c. Designed for series connection. d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: Provide unit with external terminal screws for line and ground conductors. 2. Operating voltage: 24 VDC or 24 VAC or 120 VAC or as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Modes of protection: All modes: a. AC applications: L-N, L-G, N-G b. DC applications: Pos-Neg, Pos-Gnd, Neg-Gnd. 4. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. 5. Maximum surge current: 10,000 A. 6. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 1000 occurrences of a 200 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 2) 400 occurrences of a 500 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 3) 100 occurrences of a 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform. 4) 100 occurrences of a 2000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 5 5) 10 occurrences of a 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 7. Maximum clamping voltages, L-L (Pos-Neg): a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 250% of system voltage. 8. Maximum clamping voltages, L-G: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 300% of system voltage. 2.6 CATEGORY IC8 SPD A. Manufacturers: 1. Schneider Electric ASCO 175 Series. 2. Eaton Crouse-Hinds MTL SD Series. 3. Phoenix Contact: TTC Series. B. Standards: UL 497B. C. Design: 1. General: a. Mounted internally to control panels for protection of equipment connected to data lines (RS485, RS232, telephone line, etc.). b. Multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. c. Designed for series connection. d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: Provide unit with external terminal screws for line and ground conductors. 2. Operating voltage: Nominal unit operating voltage and configuration as specified or as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Modes of protection: All modes. 4. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130% of system peak voltage. 5. Maximum surge current: 10,000 A. 6. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 1000 occurrences of a 200 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 2) 400 occurrences of a 500 A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 3) 100 occurrences of a 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform. 4) 100 occurrences of a 2000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 5) 10 occurrences of a 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 7. Maximum clamping voltages, L-L (Pos-Neg): a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 400% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 250% of system voltage. 8. Maximum clamping voltages, L-G: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 400 A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 2) 10,000 A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform: 200% of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 300% of system voltage. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Performance tests to be performed or independently verified by a certified testing laboratory. B. The SPD are to be tested as a complete SPD system including: Integral unit level and/or component level fusing. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 40 61 43 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Category IC1 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. Incoming 120 V power to all control panels. b. Line side of 120 V power terminals to equipment (e.g., PLCs, transmitters). 2. Connected in series with the panel's or equipment’s branch circuit. 3. Provide fuse protection as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 5. Connect all SPDs in the panel to the same grounding point. C. Category IC3 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. 120 V discrete signals into a control panel where both the device and control panel are mounted outdoors and the control conductors are routed above grade or underground. 2. Connected in series with the equipment. 3. Provide fuse protection as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 5. Connect all SPDs in the panel to the same grounding point. D. Category IC6 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. Outdoor field mounted transmitter (flow, level, etc.) that requires 120 V power and provides a 4-20 mA signal to a control panel where the conductors are routed above grade or underground. 2. Connect in series with the equipment. 3. Mounted adjacent to equipment. 4. Bond transmitter to a grounded structure or provide a ground rod. 5. Ground shield at control panel end. 6. Verify SPDs series resistance and capacitance does not interfere with the transmitters signal. E. Category IC7 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. Low voltage (e.g., 24 VAC, 24 VDC) discrete signals into a control panel where both the device and control panel are mounted outdoors and the control conductors are routed above grade or underground. 2. Connect in series with the equipment. 3. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 4. Connect all SPDs in the control panel to the same grounding point. F. Category IC8 SPD: 1. Provide on the following applications: a. On both ends of data lines that interconnect devices that are locked outdoors or in remote buildings or structures where the conductors are routed above grade or underground. 1) PLC or Data Manager network (e.g., Ethernet, RS-485). 2. Connect in series with the equipment. 3. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 4. Connect all SPDs in the control panel to the same grounding point. 5. Verify SPDs series resistance and capacitance does not interfere with the data line signal. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 1 SECTION 40 63 43 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Programmable logic controller (PLC) control system(s), including hardware, software, programming, documentation, and training. B. Section Includes: 1. Design and fabrication of programmable logic controller and Solar Power Control system , including software, programming, and training. 2. Deliver, FOB destination. 3. Unloading. 4. Checkout and field testing. 5. Onsite services of factory-trained service representative. C. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-Up Procedures 2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems General Requirements. 4. Section 40 67 00 - Control System Equipment Panels and Racks. 1.2 REFERENCES A. eferenced Standards: 1. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C37.90.2, Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers. b. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits. 2. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) a. IEC 61131-3 Programmable logic controllers 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements. 4. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance/American National Standards Institute (TIA/EIA/ANSI): a. 422, Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13 for general process control system submittal requirements. B. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. PLC and SPCS equipment drawings. 2. Product data: a. Submit annotated copies of complete software programs: 1) In native-format file including all applicable formats (ladder logic, function block diagram, sequential function chart, instruction list, structured text). 2) In PDF-format file with fully annotated code that can be read without the native configuration and programming environment on electronic media (DVD or USB drive). 3) Provide text description completely defining each unique function block used in the program if FBDs are used. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 2 4) Provide list of all addresses referenced in logic diagram with description of data associated with each address (Tag database). 5) Review will be for general program organization, level of documentation, and overall programming standards. The review will not attempt to confirm the logic works correctly for every loop. b. Results of factory testing or simulation procedures. c. Bill of material d. Drawings containing the following information shall be submitted as part of Specification Section 40 67 00 (control panels) submittals: 1) Arrangement drawings for PLC system components. 2) Panel and enclosure plans, sections and details. 3) Access opening locations and required clearances for each panel and enclosure. 4) Enclosure internal wiring and terminal blocks. e. DIP Switch and Jumper Settings, if applicable. f. I/O Rack and I/O Module Layout. g. Wiring and Interconnection diagrams. 1) Power Supplies. 2) I/O Points. 3) Communications. h. Catalog cut/data sheets containing information on PLC components to be submitted as part of these Specification Section submittals. 3. Certifications: a. Qualifications of installation supervisor. b. Qualifications of programmer(s). 4. Software Licenses: a. Documentation of all software package licenses being assigned to Owner. 5. Manufacturer support proposal agreement. C. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Index of all training offered by PLC and SPCS system equipment manufacturers including operations and maintenance. 2. List of all provided spares for maintenance purposes with each item separately priced. D. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. b. Program Documentation. 1) Program Overview. 2) Program Listing. 3) I/O Listing. 4) Memory Map. 5) I/O Cross Reference. c. Maintenance procedures. 1) Include the location and phone numbers of service centers (including 24 hour "hot lines"). 2) Provide specific information including operation and maintenance requirements, programming assistance, troubleshooting guide, parts ordering, field service personnel requests, and service contracts. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installation supervisor shall have experience in overseeing installation and startup of at least three similar installations within the last five years. 2. Programmer(s) shall have experience in programming PLCs and Data Managers for at least three projects of similar size and complexity. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Rockwell Automation: Allen-Bradley. 2. No Substitutions. 3. . 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13. B. PLC programming shall be documented and factory tested. C. The PLC system be capable of operating in ambient conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F temperatures and 5 to 95% relative humidity without the need for purging or air conditioning. D. Environmental Controls: 1. Per 40 67 00 – Control System Equipment Panels and Racks. 2. Furnish circulation fans in solid state control system enclosures. 3. Over-temperature switches shall be utilized to provide special cooling if required to maintain operating temperatures within the manufacturer's specified range. 4. Air conditioning applications shall include means of preventing moisture condensation. 2.3 HARDWARE A. Processor shall be CompactLogix 5069-L30ER include diagnostic indicators for power, mode, low battery, communications ports, and memory and I/O errors. B. All I/O modules shall be compatible with 5069 Series processor and include all hardware required for terminations. Have terminal block failure or removal monitoring. C. Analog output modules shall have a resolution of at least 12 bits. D. Electrical isolation shall be provided between logical and field device. E. I/O Module field wiring shall remain undisturbed when removing or replacing an I/O module. F. Fail-safe state for each I/O channel shall be capable of being defined as on, off or fail-in-place. G. Power Supply Units: a. Electrical service to PLC system shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. H. All PLC control system components shall be capable of meeting or exceeding electromagnetic interference tests per IEEE C37.90.2. I. Incorporate the following minimum safety measures: 1. Watchdog function to monitor: a. Internal processor clock failure. b. Processor memory failure. c. Loss of communication between processor and I/O modules. d. Processor ceases to execute logic program. 2. Safety function wiring: Emergency safety switches shall not be wired into the controller. 3. Safe wiring: a. Unless otherwise specified, activation of alarms and stopping of equipment shall be based on de-energization of rather than the energization of control circuits. 4. Initial safety conditions: a. Utilize program module to dictate output states in a known and safe manner prior to running of control program. b. Utilize program each time PLC is initialized/re-initiated and the control program activated. 5. Monitoring of internal faults and display: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 4 a. Internal PLC system status and faults shall be monitored and displayed. 1) Monitored items shall include: a) Memory ok/loss of memory. b) Processor ok/fault. c) Scan time overrun. 6. Control of programs: Protect access to PLC program loading with password protection or with locked, key operated selector switches. a. Provide login, passwords, and/or keys to Owner at Substantial Completion. b. 7. Design PLC system with high noise immunity to prevent occurrence of false logic signals resulting from switching transients, relay and circuit breaker noise or conducted and radiated radio frequency interference. 8. Operator intervention: a. Logic system failure shall not preclude proper operator intervention. b. Safety shutdown of equipment or a system shall require manual operator intervention before the equipment or system operation may be reestablished. 2.4 SOFTWARE A. All software will be furnished and licensed to Owner. 1. At Substantial Completion, transfer all licenses and media to Owner. 2. At Substantial Completion, all software must be latest edition and licensed to the Owner. 3. Software shall be lifetime licensed and be OEM supported for at least 10 years from date of license transfer. B. Programming. 1. Languages supported: All application programming in IEC 61131-3 compliant language. 2. Program PLC utilizing ladder diagram, function block, or structured text format. 3. Protect program via removable key switch or password to prevent unauthorized changes. Provide password and/or programming keys to Owner. 4. Capable of on-line and off-line programming. C. PLC program Structure. 1. Clear, concise, well-annotated logic. 2. Implement a modular design to allow specific functions to be replicated to ensure consistency. 3. Program shall align with the control strategies. Include comments reflecting alignment with control strategies. 4. Include named variables that reflect the actual use of the variable. 5. Annotate program listing to include the following (using the features of the appropriate PLC programming software): a. Clearly identified variables, I/O points, contacts, and analog values. b. Written description of each functional area. c. Written description of each rung's function. d. Reference to control loop number for each rung where applicable. e. Reference to instrumentation tag number of I/O devices for each rung where applicable. D. Manufacturer support 1. Submit a written proposal for a manufacturer support agreement for all products specified herein for a minimum of 12 months starting at final completion of the project. The cost of this manufacturer support agreement shall not be included in the Contract Price. The support agreement shall be executed in the name of, and for the benefit of, the Owner. At a minimum, this agreement shall provide the Owner with: a. 8 AM to 5 PM, 5 day per week manufacturer telephone support. b. Access to the manufacturer's technical support website. c. Software updates and patches. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 5 2.5 COMPONENTS A. PLC System Central Processor Unit (CPU): 1. The PLC shall have the capability of communicating with other commonly specified PLC and control system protocols such as Modbus/RTU, Modbus/TCP, Profibus, Ethernet/TCP and OPC. 2. CPU shall include capability to modify logic via an Ethernet port without taking processor off line. 3. Memory: a. Battery-backed RAM. b. Non-volatile program storage via flash EEPROM: 1) Automatically download to RAM in the event RAM is corrupted. 4. Memory battery backup shall be capable of 180 days memory retention with fresh battery. a. Provide visual indication of battery status and alarm low battery voltage. b. Memory battery backup shall be capable of 28 days memory retention after the "Battery Low" indicating LED is on. 5. Plug-in card designed to allow quick field replacement of faulty devices. a. Provide unit designed for field replacement and expansion of memory without requiring rewiring or use of special tools. 6. 20% minimum spare useable memory capacity after all required programming is in place and operating. 7. Capable of executing all control functions required by the Specifications and Drawings. 8. Built-in three-mode (proportional-integral-derivative) control capabilities. a. As directly selectable algorithms requiring no user knowledge of programming languages. 9. Lighted status indicators for "RUN" and "FAILURE". 10. Capable of manual or automatic control mode transfer from the operating console stations or from within the control strategy. a. Transfer shall be bumpless and balanceless. B. Input/output (I/O) Modules: 1. Provide plug-in modular-type I/O racks with cables to connect to all other required PLC system components. 2. Provide I/O system with: a. I/O solid state boards with status lights indicating I/O status. b. Electric isolation between logic and field device. c. Capability of withstanding low energy common mode transient to 1000 V without failure. d. Incorporate noise suppression design. e. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS 1-109.60-109.66. f. Capable of being removed and inserted into the I/O rack under power, without affecting any other I/O modules in the rack. g. Install 20% spare I/O points for each type. 3. Input/output connection requirements: a. Make connections to I/O subsystem by terminating all field wiring on terminal blocks within the I/O enclosure. b. Prewire I/O modules to terminal blocks. c. Provide terminal blocks with continuous marking strip. d. Size terminals to accommodate all active data base points and spares. e. Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. f. Field wiring shall not be disturbed when removing or replacing an I/O module. 4. Discrete I/O modules: a. Interface to ON/OFF devices. b. I/O status indicator on module front. c. Voltage rating to match circuit voltage. d. Output module current rating: 1) Match maximum circuit current draw. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 6 2) Minimum 1.0 continuous A/point for 120 VAC applications. e. Isolated modules for applications where one module interfaces with devices utilizing different sources of power. 5. Discrete outputs shall be fused: a. Provide one fuse per common or per isolated output. b. Provide blown fuse indication. c. External fusing shall be provided if output module does not possess internal fusing. d. Fuses provided external to output model shall: 1) Be in accordance with module manufacturer's specifications. 2) Be installed at terminal block. 6. Analog I/O modules: a. Input modules to accept signals indicated on Drawings or Specifications. b. Minimum 12 bit resolution. c. I/O chassis supplied power for powering connected field devices. d. Differential inputs and outputs. e. User configurable for desired fault-response state. f. Provide output signals as indicated on Drawings and Specifications. g. Individual D/A converter for each output module. h. Individual A/D converter for each input module. 7. Communications Modules: a. Provide communications modules as-shown on Drawings. b. Provide communications modules for each protocol required for a complete communications system as shown on drawings. c. Multi-port Ethernet modules may not be utilized as a network switch or to bridge networks. d. Separate communications modules and networks are required for I/O devices and PLC to HMI communications. C. Power Supply Units: 1. Provide regulated power units: a. Designed to operate with PLC system and shall provide power to: 1) All components of PLC system. 2) All two-wire field instruments. 3) Other devices as indicated on Drawings or Specifications. b. Capable of supplying PLC system when all of the specified spare capacity is utilized. c. Each power supply shall be sized such that it will carry no more than 75% of capacity under normal loads. 2. Electrical service to PLC system is 120 VAC, 60 Hz. 3. Separate AC circuit breakers shall be provided for each power supply. 4. If the PLC system is field expandable beyond the specified spare capacity, and if such expansion requires power supply modification, note such requirements in the submittals and allow room for power supply modification in the PLC system enclosure. 5. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS 1-109.60-109.66. 6. Power distribution: a. Immune to transients and surges resultant from noisy environment. b. Shall provide constant voltage level DC distribution to all devices. 7. Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to sustain full power to UPS powered loads listed below for a minimum of 10minutes following loss of primary power and to ensure that the transient power surges and dips do not affect the operation of the PLC system. a. UPS powered loads: 1) All rack mounted PLC components. 2) Local operator consoles. 3) All power supplies furnished with the PLC and associated loads. b. Input: 1) 108 to 132 VAC. 2) 57 to 63 Hz. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 7 3) Line fuse protection. c. Output: 1) 120 VAC nominal. 2) 60 Hz. 3) Short circuit protected. 4) Instantaneous transfer time. d. IEEE C62.41 Class A voltage surges of 6000 V attenuated to less than 50 V on the output. e. Battery: Maintenance free lead acid. D. PLC System Enclosure: 1. In accordance with Specification Section 40 67 00 - Control Panels. 2. Component placement: a. Mount all controller components vertically within the enclosure to allow maximum convection cooling. b. Either install power supplies above all other equipment with at least 10 inches of clearance between the power supply and the enclosure top, or adjacent to other components, but with sufficient spacing for circulation of cooling air. c. Do not place I/O racks directly above the CPU or power supply. d. Locate incoming line devices (isolation or constant voltage transformers, local power disconnects, surge suppressors, etc.) so as to keep power wire runs within an enclosure as short as possible. e. If items such as magnetic starters, contactors, relays, and other electromagnetic devices must be located within the same enclosure as the PLC system components, place a barrier with at least 6 inches of separation between the magnetic area and the control area. f. Place circulating fans close to major heat generating devices. g. Segregate input/output modules into groups of identical type. 3. Wiring and grounding to be in accordance with Specification Section 40 67 00. 4. Termination requirements: a. In accordance with Specification Section 40 67 00. b. Make connections to I/O subsystem by terminating all field wiring on terminal blocks within the enclosure. c. Prewire I/O modules to terminal blocks. d. Size terminals to accommodate all active database points and spares. e. Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. f. Field wiring shall not be disturbed when removing or replacing an I/O module. E. PLC System Software and Programming: 1. Provide all hardware and programming required to provide communication between the PLC and the human-machine interface. 2. Coordinate with HMI programmer to allow modification of all setpoint through the HMI utilizing appropriate security considerations. Configure scaling and setpoint validation within PLC logic. 3. All communications logic shall include a watch-dog timer and alarm for loss of communications. Coordinate communications failure response with Owner. 4. Provide programming to accomplish all control and monitoring requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. 5. Full documentation capability. 6. Online and offline programming. 7. Offline simulation prior to download. 8. Program over network capability. 9. Two-step commands requiring PLC programmer verification prior to modification of any programming. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 8 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all accessories required to install and test a complete PLC control system to accomplish the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. B. Provide all programming cables required to configure the PLC logic. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform Factory Acceptance Testing in accordance with Specification Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. 2.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish Owner with the following extra spares: 1. One spare I/O card of each card type for every 10 cards or fraction thereof installed. 2. One spare power supply for every 10 power supplies or fraction thereof installed. 3. A set of spare fuses for all installed types. B. Include a complete bill of materials itemizing each line item with make and model (part) number. C. Include a complete set of all special tools required to install, maintain and test the PLCs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FUNCTIONALITY A. Complete System. 1. Provide all graphics and logic programming, configuration, coordination, integration, and testing required for furnishing a fully functioning system. 2. Provide interface support with all foreign device interfaces (FDI) communicating with the PLC system. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install PLC control system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test system in accordance with Specification Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. B. Demonstrate system in accordance with Specification Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-Up Procedures. 3.4 TRAINING A. Employee of the manufacturer or certified representative to provide 4 hours of operation and maintenance training at the Project site after the system has successfully undergone all field testing and acceptance procedures. B. As a minimum, training shall cover: 1. Hardware overview. 2. Software overview. 3. Documentation. 4. Maintenance. 5. Trouble shooting. 6. Operation, e.g., changing set points, passwords, etc. 3.5 DOCUMENTATION A. Update O&M manuals to reflect as-built conditions. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 40 63 43 - 9 3.6 SUPPORT A. Provide on-call technical support for a period of two years after substantial completion. Include a minimum of two site visits to work with Owner on any final modifications to the logic. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PV SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM 40 63 44 - 1 SECTION 40 63 444 PV SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. PV SCADA equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements defined herein. a. Packaged PV SCADA control system(s), including hardware, software, programming, documentation, and training. b. The PV SCADA system shall contain all necessary network devices for connection to the Plant SCADA system c. The PV system shall be designed to provide for automatic, unattended operation of the PV solar system. The control system design shall also provide for local manual operation, remote operation, or dispatch of the PV solar from the Plant SCADA system or remote access point. d. The control system shall provide all modes of operation suited to the applicable use cases described herein, and its operational set-point functionality shall have the ability to be prioritized and remotely configured through the Plant SCADA system. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-Up Procedures 2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems General Requirements. 4. Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing 5. Section 40 66 05 - Network Equipment 6. Section 40 67 00 - Control System Equipment Panels and Racks. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements. 2. NERC-CIP-002 to 009 – BES Cyber System Identification 3. IEC 62443 Industrial network and system security 4. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C37.90.2, Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers. b. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits. B. Qualifications: 1. Installation supervisor shall have had experience in overseeing installation and startup of at least three similar installations within the last five years. 2. Programmer(s) shall have had experience in SCADA system for at least three projects of similar size and complexity. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including: a. Communication Schematics and Topology. b. Wiring Diagrams. c. Electrical requirements. d. Installation instructions and Operation & Maintenance manual. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PV SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM 40 63 44 - 2 e. Results of all simulation procedures. f. List of manufacturer’s recommended spare parts. g. All login and Passwords for device accessibility. (To be submitted via secure methods to OWNER) h. A well-documented SCADA Points List i. Assigned IP addresses (to be confirmed with OWNER). j. Results of commissioning and acceptance testing. k. Wiring and Interconnection diagrams. 1) Power Supplies. 2) I/O Points. 3) Communications. 2. Certifications: a. Qualifications of installation supervisor. b. Qualifications of programmer(s). 3. Software Licenses: a. Documentation proving all software package licenses are assigned to owner. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit maintenance procedures available to Owner. a. Include the location and phone numbers of service centers. b. Provide specific information including operation and maintenance requirements, programming assistance, troubleshooting guide, parts ordering, field service personnel requests, and service contracts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PV SCADA SYSTEM A. The system shall be capable of providing real-time information on the solar PV system to the Plant SCADA system. B. Monitoring points shall have the ability to be recorded at a minimum frequency of 1 minute, with the capability for instantaneous collection of data when data is outside of set parameters. C. System should have the ability to remotely access and monitor the data as well as have a thirty (60) calendar day on-site memory storage capacity. D. The system shall provide remote and local means for resetting alarms. E. The system shall have the necessary hardware and software (i.e. firewalls and malware detection) such that it is compliant with the latest standards at the time of commissioning for control system security requirements. F. The SCADA system shall be designed for isolation, testing, diagnostic monitoring, and removal without interruption of the PV system availability. G. Provide a minimum 5-year manufacturer’s warranty of service, support, and replacement, if required. H. A PV controller shall be supplied that is able to dispatch commands to all inverters and control the PV system as an aggregate generator – include, but are not limited to: 1. Controls: a. Real Power Dispatch. b. Active Power Dispatch. c. Shutdown/Turn-On commands. 2. Statuses: a. Inverter status. b. Inverter alarms/fault states. c. Inverter temperatures. 3. Metering: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PV SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM 40 63 44 - 3 a. Inverter DC voltage, current, and power. b. Inverter AC voltage, current, and power. c. Power factor. d. Frequency. 1. The control system and all control modes should operate via a logical closed-loop PID controller with set-points dynamically adjustable by the Owner. Defaulted to 25kW of import from the Utility. 2. Limits to each operational mode shall be configurable, including ramp rate limits 3. The PID control loop shall be tuned after initial energization to provide the quickest response with no overshoot. 4. Plant control shall be made available in the following modes: a. Power Factor Control Mode. b. Fixed Reactive Power Control Mode. c. Voltage Regulation Mode with associated droop and deadband settings. d. Voltage and Current data shall be obtained from dedicated solar vendor supplied compatible meter SPS-PM. I. Power requirements. 1. As shown on drawings. 2. Site power will be provided to the SCADA rack at 120Vac via a 20A Outlet. SCADA/DAS provider power supplies shall be included if required input power to device(s) is not 120V AC. 3. Backup power shall be provided by a UPS. J. Meteorology Station Interface (Weather Station): 1. Any equipment required to collect data from the weather station instruments shall be installed. 2. Weather Stations point list shall include but not limited to- a. Ambient temperature b. Panel temperature c. Global horizontal irradiance d. Plane of array irradiance e. Wind Speed f. Work with Owner for approval on the SCADA points list. K. Network Communication: 1. Refer to network drawing. 2. An Ethernet switch shall be included to facilitate communication back to the Plant SCADA system. 3. A failure or power down of a single inverter/device shall not interrupt communications to the remaining inverters/devices. 4. The system shall be capable of two-way communication with the Plant SCADA system via a compatible network medium/protocol such as MODBUS TCP or Ethernet/IP. L. Enclosure: 1. All above mentioned equipment, with the exception of instrumentation devices that need to be exposed, shall be housed in a non-corrosive, NEMA 4X rated enclosure or higher. 2. Enclosure shall be UL 746C rated. All AC powered monitoring and control panels shall be UL508A listed. 3. All equipment should be securely mounted to a DIN rail. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. The system shall accomplish the control requirements of the Descriptions, Drawings, and Specifications. B. SCADA programming shall be documented and factory tested. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PV SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM 40 63 44 - 4 C. The system shall operate in ambient conditions of 32 to 140 DEGF temperatures and 5 to 95 PCT relative humidity without the need for purging or air conditioning. D. Environmental Controls: 1. Furnish circulation fans in solid state control system enclosures. 2. Over-temperature switches shall be utilized to provide special cooling if required to maintain operating temperatures within the manufacturer's specified range. 3. Air conditioning applications shall include means of preventing moisture condensation. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide well documented source code for power plant controller in pdf format. 1. Source Quality Control Article addresses tests, inspections, and certifications required to be performed at the shop prior to shipment to site. B. Provide a performance test after factory completion and prior to shipment. 1. Conduct a test where the system is operated continuously and checked for correct operation including loop controls, displays, and alarm responses. 2. Provide all accessories required to install and test. 3. Conduct testing with simulated I/O to verify each control loop operation. 4. If deem required, allow for Owner and Engineer representatives to witness program testing. a. Provide minimum of 15 days’ notice prior to testing. 2.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish Owner with the following extra materials: 1. For larger sites, one spare UPS for the entire system. B. Include a complete bill of materials indicating detailed part model number. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FUNCTIONALITY A. Complete System. 1. Provide all programming, configuration, coordination, integration, and testing required for furnishing a fully functioning system. 2. Programming and commissioning of the PV SCADA system shall be performed by the manufacturer’s qualified field service representative. 3. The Seller shall develop and submit for approval a functional test procedure to demonstrate the performance of the PV SCADA system. 4. The functional tests shall be performed in accordance with industry standards and in reference to IEEE and NREL guidance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks. 3. Maintain and submit an accurate daily or weekly log of all commissioning functions. a. All commissioning functions may be witnessed by the Engineer. b. All reports shall be cosigned by the Contractor and the Engineer if witnessed. 4. Conduct startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 5. Submit a site test report indicating how the system was tested and which items were tested. 6. Prior to energization provide Owner with a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed properly, started up, and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PV SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM 40 63 44 - 5 3.4 COMMISSIONING AND ACCEPTANCE A. Demonstrate system in accordance with Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing and Section 01 75 00 – Checkout and Startup Procedures. 3.5 TRAINING A. Employee of the manufacturer or certified representative to provide one week of operation and maintenance training at the Project site after the system has successfully undergone all field testing and acceptance procedures. B. As a minimum, training shall cover: 1. Hardware overview. 2. Software overview. 3. Documentation. 4. Maintenance. 5. Trouble shooting. 6. Operation, e.g., changing set points, passwords, etc. 3.6 DOCUMENTATION A. Update O&M manuals to reflect as-built conditions. 3.7 SUPPORT A. Provide on-call technical support for a period of one year after substantial completion. Include a minimum of two site visits to work with owner on any final modifications to the logic. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction NETWORK EQUIPMENT 40 66 05 - 1 SECTION 40 66 05 NETWORK EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Computer network requirements, which include, but are not necessarily limited to: a. Ethernet Switches. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems General Requirements. 2. Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. 802.3, Information Technology - Local and Metropolitan Area Networks - Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications. 1) 802.3u: IEEE Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Supplement to Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications Media Access Control (MAC) Parameters, Physical Layer, Medium Attachment Units, and Repeater for 100 Mb/s Operation, Type 100BASE-T. 2) 802.3x: IEEE Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Specification for 802.3 Full Duplex Operation. 2. National Institute of Standards and Technologies (NIST): a. 800-82, Guide to Industrial Control Systems (ICS) Security. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements. B. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Network Diagrams: 1) Provide in both AUTO CAD and PDF formats. 2) Coordinate with the Owner or Engineer to determine the preferred method of delivery to assure security of information contained in Network Diagrams. 3) Logical Network Diagram(s) - Depict information flow through network(s), and include: a) Major network devices, subnets, and VLANs. b) Include all wireless communication devices. c) Include the following information for each networked device: (1) Device ID. (2) Device description. (3) Manufacturer/model number. (4) IP address. (5) Ports and Protocols 4) Physical Network Diagram(s): a) Show all network components, ports, protocols, connections and cables. (1) Include all wireless communication devices. 2. Product Data: a. Network requirements verification plan. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction NETWORK EQUIPMENT 40 66 05 - 2 b. Comprehensive asset inventory of all networked components: 1) Provide in Excel spreadsheet format. 2) Coordinate with the Owner or Engineer to determine the preferred method of delivery to assure security of information contained in asset inventory. 3) Include: a) Device ID. b) Manufacturer. c) Model Number. d) Serial Number. e) IP Address. f) Device Use description. g) Firmware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed within the following Articles are acceptable. 2.2 ETHERNET SWITCHES A. Accessories: “Stack Module” as required to create logical switches and reduce network latency. B. Provide Ethernet switches as shown on the Drawings and the Schedule herein. C. Layer 2 –Panel Mounted Ethernet Switches: 1. Manufacturers: a. Lantronix SISGM1040-284-LRT. b. No Substitutions. 2. Design and fabrication: a. Support Ethernet 100/1000 Mbps. b. [Four] backbone SFP ports for connection to multimode fiber via type LC connectors (ST not allowed). SFP1G-SX-31 TN. c. 16100/1000 Mbps twisted pair ports (RJ45) as required for communication with devices as depicted in the Contract Documents. 8 port minimum. d. Support SNMP v3 and Web based management. e. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. f. IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) support for IP multicast filtering to enable switches to automatically route messages only to appropriate ports. g. Check all received data for validity. 1) Discard invalid and defective frames or fragments. h. Monitor connected TP/TX line segments for short-circuit or interrupt using regular link test pulses in accordance with IEEE 802.3. i. Monitor attached fiber optic lines for open circuit conditions in accordance with IEEE 802.3. j. As applicable, meet requirements of IEEE 802.3. k. One rack unit (RU) form factor. l. Power switch with 120 VAC power input. m. Provide dual redundant power supplies. n. Provide LED status lights to indicate: 1) Power: Supply voltage present. 2) Fault. 3) Port status. o. Environmental rating: 1) Operating temperature: 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F. 2) Humidity: 95% relative humidity, non-condensing. 3. DIN Rail mounted. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction NETWORK EQUIPMENT 40 66 05 - 3 D. Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) Modules: 1. Provide SFPs as required to support the communication capability shown on the Drawings. Use SFPs instead of media converters. Media converter use is prohibited unless approved in writing or shown on drawings. 2. Hardware Features: a. At least four SFP ports per switch supplied with 1 Gbps fiber transceivers for connection to multimode fiber via type LC connectors. Quantity and type as required for communication with devices as depicted in the Contract Documents. b. Diagnostic data for the associated media type available through the command line interface of the switch. c. 10/100/1000 Mbps twisted pair ports (RJ45) as required for communication with devices as depicted in the Contract Documents. d. Check all received data for validity. 1) Discard invalid and defective frames or fragments. e. Monitor connected TP/TX line segments for short-circuit or interrupt using regular link test pulses in accordance with IEEE 802.3. f. Monitor attached fiber optic lines for open circuit conditions in accordance with IEEE 802.3. g. As applicable, meet requirements of IEEE 802.3. h. Power switch with 24 VDC power input. i. Provide LED status lights to indicate: 1) Power: Supply voltage present. 2) Fault. 3) Port status. j. Environmental rating: 1) Operating temperature: 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F. 2) Humidity: 95% relative humidity, non-condensing. k. Accessories: Provide port locks for all unused ports. E. Configuration: 1. All managed switch unused ports shall be administratively disabled. Sticky MAC or similar port configuration shall be utilized to bind ports to MAC address of connected device per NIST 800-82. 2. Layer 3 switches shall be configured using static routes per NIST 800-82 best practices. Routes between VLANS shall be restricted except where required to achieve contract required functionality. 3. Change default usernames and passwords. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Factory testing if required in section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. 2.4 ACCESSORIES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide all accessories required to furnish a complete computer-based network for the control system to accomplish the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate system in accordance with Section 01 75 00 - Checkout and Start-Up Procedures. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify network is configured per requirements herein. B. Submit verification plan. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction NETWORK EQUIPMENT 40 66 05 - 4 3.3 INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT A. Provide installation and checkout in accordance with Section 40 61 13 - Process Control System General Requirements and Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 1 SECTION 40 67 00 CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for control panels and enclosures utilized as follows: a. Unless noted otherwise, all control panels and enclosures housing control components that are specified in Section 40 61 43. b. This Section is only applicable to panels furnished with equipment specified in other specification divisions when so stated in the applicable equipment specification section. c. This Section is applicable to all control panels in the project. This includes: SPCS Metering Panel (SPCS1400), No-Export Relay Panel (RLY1400), FOP1400, SPCS1500, LCP1500, and FOP1500., B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3. Section 40 61 13 - Process Controls Systems General Requirements. 4. Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. 5. Section 40 61 43 - Surge Protection Devices for Instrumentation and Control Equipment. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Panel: Control panels or enclosures listed in the schedule included in this Specification Section. 2. Foreign Voltages: Voltages that may be present in circuits when the panel main power is disconnected. 3. Intrinsically Safe: a. A device, instrument or component that will not produce sparks or thermal effects under normal or abnormal conditions that will ignite a specified gas mixture. b. Designed such that electrical and thermal energy limits inherently are at levels incapable of causing ignition. 4. Intrinsically Safe Circuit: A circuit in which any spark or thermal effect is incapable of causing ignition of a mixture of flammable or combustible material in air under test conditions as prescribed in UL 913. 5. Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing either building wire or instrumentation wire. 6. Instrumentation Cable: a. Multiple conductor, insulated, twisted or untwisted, with outer sheath. b. Instrumentation cable is typically either TSP (twisted-shielded pair) or TST (twisted- shielded triad) and is used for the transmission of low current or low voltage signals. 7. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): A type of device (e.g., circuit breaker or receptacle) which detects an abnormal current flow to ground and opens the circuit preventing a hazardous situation. 8. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC): A specialized industrial computer using programmed, custom instructions to provide automated monitoring and control functions by interfacing software control strategies to input/output devices. 9. Input/Output (I/O): Hardware for the moving of control signals into and/or out of a PLC or RTU. 10. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA): Used in process control applications, where programmable logic controllers (PLCs) perform control functions but are monitored and supervised by computer workstations. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 2 11. Digital Signal Cable: Used for the transmission of digital communication signals between computers, PLCs, RTUs, etc. 12. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): A backup power unit that provides continuous power when the normal power supply is interrupted. B. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 4, Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) Article 409, Industrial Control Panels. 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 508A, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 40 61 13. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Table of contents sheet(s). 2. Legend and abbreviation sheets. 3. Panel exterior layout drawings. 4. Panel interior layout drawings. 5. Bill of Material for each panel. 6. Panel door weight calculation. 7. Electrical load calculations for each panel. 8. Climate control calculations for each panel. 9. Communication network drawing(s). 10. Wiring diagrams. a. Drawings containing the following information to be submitted as part of Specification Section 40 67 00 (control panels) submittals: 1) Arrangement drawings for PLC system components. 2) Panel and enclosure plans, sections and details. 3) Access opening locations and required clearances for each panel and enclosure. 4) Enclosure internal wiring and terminal blocks. C. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer catalog cut sheets for enclosure, finish, panel devices, control auxiliaries, and accessories. D. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. E. Informational Submittals: 1. Unwitnessed Factory Testing confirmation of completion. 2. Record Drawings: a. Updated panel drawings delivered with the panel(s) from the Contractor’s factory. b. Drawings shall be enclosed in transparent plastic and firmly secured within each panel. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Approved supplier of Industrial Control Panels under provisions of UL 508A. a. Entire assembly shall be affixed with a UL 508A label "Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel" prior to shipment to the jobsite. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 3 b. Control panel(s) without an affixed UL 508A label shall be rejected and sent back to the Contractor’s factory. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings: 1. All panel and wiring drawings shall be provided in both hardcopy and softcopy. a. Drawings in AUTO CAD format. b. Printed on 11 by 17 inches sheets. 2. Drawings shall include a title block containing the following: a. Plant or facility name where panel(s) are to be installed. b. Drawing title. c. Drawing number. d. Revision list with revision number and date e. Drawing date. f. Drawing scale. g. Manufacturer name, address, and telephone number. 3. Cover sheet for each drawing set shall indicate the following: a. Plant or facility name. b. Project name. c. Submittal description. d. Revision number. e. Issue date. 4. Table of contents sheet(s) shall indicate the following for each drawing in the set: a. Drawing number. b. Drawing title. c. Sheet number. 5. Legend and abbreviation sheets shall indicate the following: a. Description of symbols and abbreviations used. b. Panel construction notes including enclosure NEMA rating, finish type and color, wire type, wire color strategy, conductor sizes, and wire labeling strategy. c. Confirmation that the panel(s) are to be affixed with a UL 508Alabel prior to shipment from the factory. 6. Bill of Material for each panel shall include the following component information: a. Instrument tag number. b. Quantity. c. Functional name or description. d. Manufacturer. e. Complete model number. f. Size or rating. 7. Panel exterior layout drawings to scale and shall indicate the following: a. Panel materials of construction, dimensions, and total assembled weight. 1) All dimensions shall be in inches. b. Panel access openings. c. Conduit access locations. 1) Ensure conduit entry locations allow for sufficient bend radius of field cables entering enclosure. 2) Control panel exterior layout shall identify conduit and cable entry locations. d. Front view, side views and top view of enclosure. e. Front panel device layout. f. Nameplate layout drawings g. Nameplate schedule: 1) Nameplate location. 2) Nameplate dimensions. 3) Legend which indicates text, letter height and color, background color and nameplate material. 4) Include exterior legends as per UL requirements. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 4 5) Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) marking per NFPA 70 or statement of exception. Include any required calculations. h. Include a statement on the drawings that indicates that the panel has been built as per UL508A standards. 8. Panel interior layout drawings shall be drawn to scale and shall indicate the following: a. Sub-panel or mounting pan dimensions. 1) All dimensions shall be in inches. b. Interior device layouts indicating dimensioned location of devices. c. PLCDataManager general arrangement layouts. d. Wire-way locations, purpose, and dimensions. Include center line dimensions for all DIN rail and wire-way. e. Terminal strip designations. f. Location of external wiring and/or piping connections. g. Location of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles. h. Include interior legends as per UL requirements. 9. Wiring diagrams shall consist of the following: a. Panel power distribution diagrams. b. Control and instrumentation wiring diagrams. c. PLC/Data Manager I/O information: 1) Model number of I/O module. 2) Description of I/O module type and function. 3) Rack and slot number. 4) Terminal number on module. 5) Point or channel number. 6) Programmed point addresses. 7) Signal function and type. d. Internal network connections diagram e. Wiring diagrams shall identify each wire as it is to be labeled. f. Wiring diagrams shall include line/ rung references. g. Relay coils and their associated contacts shall be cross referenced to each other and clearly identified on the drawings. h. Wires leaving the sheet shall clearly indicate the continuation sheet and line/ rung references. 10. Communication network drawing(s) shall include: a. Network equipment b. Interconnections between all network equipment within the panel. c. Connection to the plant network. B. Verify that panel door mounted equipment will not exceed the maximum allowed weight as per manufacturer’s specification. 1. Submit panel door weight calculation. Include weight of computer if using a laptop shelf. C. Electrical load calculations for each panel: 1. Panel current draw based on connected load. 2. SSCR Calculations. 3. UPS Run time calculations. 4. DC power supply load calculations. 5. Climate control calculations for each panel. 6. Verify that sufficient dissipation and/or generation of heat is provided to maintain interior panel temperatures within the rated operating temperatures of panel components. 7. Submit control panel heat release calculations (Watts or BTU/HR). Verify results with cooling/heating software. Submit heating and/or cooling equipment as required. Refer to Section 2.1. 8. Provide temperature monitoring switch when an air conditioner is required by heat release calculations. High Temperature switch shall be wired to a PLC discrete input for temperature monitoring. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 5 9. Provide temperature monitoring switch when heater is required by heat release calculations. Low temperature switch shall be wired to a PLC discrete input for temperature monitoring. 10. Air conditioners shall have built-in temperature display. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Enclosures: a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Hammond Manufacturing. c. Saginaw Control and Engineering. d. Rittal 2. Panel heaters: a. Hoffman Enclosures, Inc. b. Hammond Manufacturing. c. Rittal 3. Heat exchangers and air conditioners: a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Hammond Manufacturing. c. Saginaw Control and Engineering. d. Rittal e. Pfannenberg. f. Kooltronic 4. Cooling fans and exhaust packages: a. Hoffman Enclosures, Inc. b. Hammond Manufacturing. c. Saginaw Control and Engineering. d. Rittal 5. Internal corrosion inhibitors: a. Hoffman Enclosures, Inc.; Model A-HCI10E b. Northern Technologies International Corporation (NTIC); Model Zerust VC. c. Cortec Corporation; Model VpCl Emitting Systems. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Panel Nameplates and Identification: 1. See Section 10 14 00. B. Free standing enclosures containing a PLC shall be provided with an interior swing out shelf for laptop computers. C. Enclosures shall be provided with print pocket mounted on the interior of the door. Free standing enclosures shall have a minimum size print pocket of 12 inches. D. Enclosures containing a PLC or Data Manager shall include door contacts to monitor enclosure door status. Door contacts shall be wired to a PLC input for monitoring status. E. All field instrument enclosure penetrations shall be plugged using threaded conduit plugs to prevent water or contaminant entry into the enclosure during installation. 1. Instruments shall maintain manufacturer’s rating for the appropriate area designation. 2. Tape and/or plastic plugs shall not be an acceptable means of preventing water/contaminate intrusion. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 6 1. Fabricate panels with instrument arrangements and dimensions identified in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide panel(s) with the required enclosure rating per NEMA 250 to meet classifications identified in the Contract Documents. 3. Devices installed in panel openings shall have a NEMA enclosure rating at least equal to the panel enclosure rating. a. Devices that cannot be obtained with an adequate NEMA rating shall be installed behind a transparent viewing window. b. The window shall maintain the required NEMA rating of the enclosure. 4. Externally mounted components including but not limited to air conditioners, enclosed transformers, external disconnect switches and external surge protector boxes shall match the NEMA rating and be constructed of the same material as the control panel. As an illustrative example, a NEMA 3/3R external enclosed transformer shall not be mounted on a NEMA 4X stainless steel panel. 5. Panel(s) shall be completely assembled at the Contractor’s factory. a. No fabrication other than correction of minor defects or minor transit damage shall be performed on panels at the jobsite. 6. Painting: a. Panels fabricated from steel shall have their internal and external surfaces prepared, cleaned, primed, and painted. 1) Mechanically abrade all surfaces to remove rust, scale, and surface imperfections. 2) Provide final surface treatment with 120 grit abrasives or finer, followed by spot putty to fill all voids. 3) Utilize solvent or chemical methods to clean panel surfaces. 4) Apply surface conversion of zinc phosphate prior to painting to improve paint adhesion and to increase corrosion resistance. 5) Electrostatically apply polyester urethane powder coating to all inside and outside surfaces. 6) Bake powder coating at high temperatures to bond coating to enclosure surface. a) Panel interior shall be white with semi-gloss finish. b) Panel exterior shall be ANSI #61 gray with flat finish. b. Panels fabricated from stainless steel, aluminum, or fiberglass shall not be painted. 7. Finish opening edges of panel cutouts to smooth and true surface conditions. a. Panels fabricated from steel shall have the opening edges finished with the panel exterior paint. 8. Panels shall meet all requirements of UL 508A. a. Panel components in accordance with UL 508A, Section 4. b. Corrosion protected per UL 508A, Section 8. c. Spacings per UL 508A, Section 10. d. Grounding per UL 508A, Sections 14 through 17. e. Enclosure and openings per UL 508A, Sections 18 and 19. f. Accessibility of live parts per UL 508A, Section 20. g. Ventilation openings, if utilized, per UL 508A, Sections 21 and 22. h. Observation windows, if utilized, per UL 508A, Section 23. i. Enclosures made of insulation materials shall have bonding means to provide continuity of grounding between all conduit openings per UL 508A, Section 24. j. Wire bending space per UL 508A, Section 25. k. Enclosure environmental control devices per UL 508A, Section 26. l. Enclosure maintenance lighting per UL 508A, Section 27. m. Termination of field wiring per UL 508A, Sections 28 and 37. n. Internal wiring per UL 508A, Sections 29 and 38. o. Disconnect switches and circuit breakers per UL 508A, Sections 30 and 39. p. Branch circuit protection per UL 508A, Section 31. q. Overcurrent protection of feeder per UL 508A, Section 32. r. Load controllers and motor load overprotection, if applicable, per UL 508A, Sections 33 and 34. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 7 s. Power transformers per UL 508A, Section 35. t. Power circuit components (capacitors, resistors, and surge control devices) per UL 508A, Section 36. u. Control circuit overcurrent protection per UL 508A, Sections 40 through 42. v. Low-voltage limited energy circuits per UL 508A, Section 43. w. Class 2 circuits per UL 508A, Section 44. x. Switch devices per UL 508A, Section 45. y. Control circuit loads per UL 508A, Section 46. z. Miscellaneous control circuit devices per UL 508A, Section 47. aa. Pneumatic switching devices, if utilized, per UL 508A, Section 48. bb. Ratings of power supply, individual loads, and control circuit outputs per UL 508A, Sections 49 through 51. cc. Markings per UL 508A, Sections 52 through 61. dd. If more than one disconnect switch is required to disconnect all power within a panel or enclosure, provide a cautionary marking with the word "CAUTION" and the following or equivalent, "Risk of Electric Shock-More than one disconnect switch required to de- energize the equipment before servicing." 9. Provide control panel in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 409. a. In the event of any conflict between NFPA 70, Article 409 and UL 508A or UL 698A, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 10. Provide equipment or control panels with Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) labeling as required by NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. a. Determine the SCCR rating by one of the following methods: 1) Method 1: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the available fault current of the source equipment when indicated on the Drawings. 2) Method 2: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the source equipment’s Amp Interrupting Current (AIC) rating as indicated on the Drawings. 3) Method 3: SCCR rating meets or exceeds the calculated available short circuit current at the control panel. b. The source equipment is the switchboard, panelboard, motor control center or similar equipment where the control panel circuit originates. c. For Method 3, provide calculations justifying the SCCR rating. Utilize source equipment available fault current or AIC rating as indicated on the Drawings. B. Wall Mounted Panels: 1. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 2. Rolled lip around all sides of enclosure door opening. 3. Gasketed dust tight. 4. Door clamps and hasp/staple for padlocking. 5. Key doors alike. 6. Continuous heavy GA hinge pin on doors. a. Hinges rated for 1.5 times door plus instrument weight. 7. Front full opening door. 8. Brackets for wall mounting. C. Internal Panel Wiring: 1. Panel wire duct shall be installed between each row of components, and adjacent to each terminal strip. a. Route wiring within the panel in wire-duct neatly tied and bundled with tie wraps. b. Size wire ducts to include a minimum of 30% spare fill capacity. c. Wire-duct shall have removable snap-on covers and perforated walls for easy wire entrance. d. Wire-duct shall be constructed of nonmetallic materials with rating in excess of the maximum voltage carried therein. 2. Layout panel wire-duct on both sides of each terminal strip. Leave one wire-duct empty, so the field wiring has sufficient room for entry into the panel through this wire-way. Designate the other wire-duct for panel wiring. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 8 3. Utilize fiber optic and Ethernet cable management accessories within the panel. a. Terminate Ethernet cables from the field to RJ45 punch down blocks. Connect Ethernet patch cords from the RJ45 punch down block to the Ethernet switch. b. Terminate Fiber optic cable from field in fiber optic patch panel. Terminate all fibers within the cable. Connect Fiber optic patch cords from the fiber optic patch panel to the fiber optic Ethernet switch. Fiber optic patch cords between FOP and panels within 10’ are allowed. 4. Wiring shall be installed such that if wires are removed from one device, source of power will not be disrupted to other devices. 5. “Daisy-chaining” of ground cables or power neutrals between equipment is not permitted. 6. Terminate all internal wiring with no more than two (2) conductors per terminal block point. For terminal strips designated for field wiring, only one side of the terminal strip shall be used for panel wiring. 7. Splicing and tapping of wires permitted only at terminal blocks. 8. Wire bundles to doors shall be secured at each end so that bending or twisting will be around longitudinal axis of wire. a. Protect bend area with sleeve. 9. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, with surplus wire removed. a. Arrange wiring with sufficient clearance. b. Provide abrasion protection for wire bundles that pass through openings or across edges of sheet metal. 10. To eliminate noise coupling or interference, AC power and control circuits shall be routed separate from analog signal cables, low voltage control circuits, and communications cables and digital signal cables. a. Separate by at least 6 inches, except at unavoidable crossover points and at device terminations. b. All wiring shall be bundled and supported by straps. 11. Wiring to pilot devices or rotary switches shall be individually bundled and installed with a "flexible loop" of sufficient length to permit the component to be removed from panel for maintenance without removing terminations. 12. Conductors for AC and DC circuits shall be type MTW stranded copper listed for operation with 600 V at 90 degrees C. a. Conductor size shall be as required for load and 16 AWG minimum. b. Internal panel wiring color code: 1) AC circuits: a) Power wiring: Black. b) Control interconnections: Red. c) Neutral: White. d) Ground: Green. 2) Low voltage DC circuits: a) Power wiring: Dark Blue(+) and White with Blue stripe. b) Control interconnections: Dark Blue. 3) Foreign voltage circuits: Yellow. 13. Analog signal cables shall be of 600 V insulation, stranded copper, twisted-shielded pairs. a. Conductor size: 18 AWG minimum. b. Terminate shield drain conductors to ground only at one end of the cable. 14. High precision 250 ohm resistors with 0.25 % accuracy shall be used where 4 - 20 mA DC analog signals are converted to 1 - 5 VDC signals. a. Resistors located at terminal strips. b. Resistors terminated using individual terminal blocks and with no other conductors. c. Resistor leads shall be un-insulated and of sufficient length to allow test or calibration equipment (e.g., HART communicator, loop calibrator) to be properly attached to the circuit with clamped test leads. 15. Analog signals for devices in separate enclosures shall not be wired in series. a. Loop isolators shall be used where analog signals are transmitted between control enclosures. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 9 16. Wire and cable identification: a. Wire and cables numbered and tagged at each termination. b. Wire tags: 1) See Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. D. Grounding Requirements: 1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be separated from incoming power conductors at the point of entry. 2. Minimize grounding conductor length within the enclosure by locating the ground reference point as close as practical to the incoming power point of entry. 3. Bond electrical racks, chassis and machine elements to a central ground bus. a. Nonconductive materials, such as paint, shall be removed from the area where the equipment contacts the enclosure. 4. Bond the enclosure to the ground bus. Bonded connections shall be free of paint and debris. 5. It is imperative that good electrical connections are made at the point between the ground bus and enclosure. 6. Panel-mounted devices shall be bonded to the panel enclosure or the panel grounding system by means of locknuts or pressure mounting methods. 7. Sub-panels and doors shall be bonded to ground. 8. Associated apparatus (connected to intrinsically safe circuits) and associated cable shields: a. Ground in accordance with the associated control drawing (drawing provided for the intrinsically safe circuit and which contains manufacturer’s entity parameters). E. Termination Requirements: 1. Wiring to circuits external to the panel connected to interposing terminal blocks. 2. Terminal blocks rigidly mounted on DIN rail mounting channels. 3. Electrical connections to terminal blocks shall be terminated with a proper torque tool as per manufacturer terminal block instructions. Terminating conductors without a torque tool can result in improper and unsafe installation. 4. Terminal strips located to provide adequate space for entrance and termination of the field conductors. 5. One side of each strip of terminal blocks reserved exclusively for the termination of field conductors. 6. Terminal block markings: a. Marking shall be the same as associated wire marking. b. Legible, machine-printed markings. c. Markings as identified in the shop drawings. d. Terminal block markings shall follow a consecutive numbering sequence. Terminal block numbers with a random numbering sequence are not acceptable. 7. Terminal block mechanical characteristics, and electrical characteristics shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 4. 8. Terminal blocks with continuous marking strips. a. Each terminal block shall be identified with machine printed labels. 9. Terminals shall facilitate wire sizes as follows: a. 120 VAC applications: Conductor size 12 AWG minimum. b. Other: Conductor size 14 AWG minimum. 10. Analog signal cable shield drain conductors shall be individually terminated. 11. Install minimum of 20 % spare terminals. 12. Fused terminal blocks shall be provided with blown fuse indicators. 13. When control circuits require more than one field conductor connected to a single wiring point, a sufficient number of terminal points shall be connected internally to allow termination of only one field conductor per terminal block. 14. DIN rail mounting channels shall be installed along full length of the terminal strip areas to facilitate future expansion. 15. Connections to devices with screw type terminals shall be made using spade-tongue, insulated, compression terminators. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 10 F. Component Mounting and Placement: 1. Components shall be installed per manufacturer instructions. 2. Mount and wire so removal or replacement may be accomplished without interruption of service to adjacent devices. 3. Locate all devices mounted inside enclosures so terminals and adjustment devices are readily accessible without use of special tools and with terminal markings clearly visible. 4. Control relays and other control auxiliaries shall be mounted on DIN rail mounting channels where practical. 5. Front panel devices shall be mounted within a range of 40 to 70 inches above the finished floor, unless otherwise shown in the Contract Documents. 6. PLC/Data Manager and I/O rack installation: a. Located such that the LED indicators and switches are readily visible with the panel door open. b. Located such that repair and/or replacement of component can be accomplished without the need to remove wire terminations or other installed components. 7. Locate power supplies with sufficient spacing for circulation of air. 8. Where components such as magnetic starters, contactors, relays, and other electromagnetic devices are installed within the same enclosure as the PLC/Data Manager system components, provide a barrier of at least 6 inches of separation between the “power area containing the electromagnetic devices” and the “control area”. 9. Components mounted in the panel interior shall be fastened to an interior sub-panel using machine screws. a. Fastening devices shall not project through the outer surface of the panel enclosure. 10. Excess mounting space of at least 30 % for component types listed below to facilitate future expansion: a. Fuse holders. b. Circuit breakers. c. Control relays. d. Time delay relays. e. Future equipment as shown on drawings. 11. Components installed on sub-panels shall be provides with a minimum spacing between component and wire duct of 1 inch. a. Minimum of 2 inches separation between terminal strips and wire ducts. G. Power Distribution: 1. Main incoming power circuits shall be protected with a thermal magnetic circuit breaker. a. Limit load to maximum of 80 % of circuit breaker rating. 2. Component types listed below shall be individually fused so that they may be individually de-energized for maintenance: a. PLC/Data Manager power supply modules. b. Operator interface terminals. c. DC power supplies. 3. Each control panel with PLC/Data Manager components shall be furnished with power protection in the form of a UPS. 4. Equip each panel with necessary power supplies with ratings required for installed equipment and with minimum 25 % spare capacity. 5. Circuit breakers and fuses shall be used to protect equipment powered inside and outside enclosure a. Circuit breakers shall be UL489. b. UL489 circuit breaker shall be finger safe. c. Fuses shall be 1/4 x 1-1/4 inches size. H. Internal Panel Lighting and Service Receptacles: 1. Panels less than or equal to 4 feet wide: a. One electrical GFCI duplex receptacle. b. One LED light fixture with manual switch(es). 2. Panels or panel faces greater than 4 feet wide: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 11 a. One duplex electrical GFCI receptacle per 6 feet of length. b. Continuous LED lighting strip with manual switches. I. Security Controls: 1. Provide all control panels and enclosures with door switch monitored by discrete input utilizing normally closed contacts. 2. Configure door switch as an alarm at the HMI. J. Environmental Controls: 1. Indoor panels located in a designated electrical room or control room: a. Thermostat controlled cooling fans with exhaust louvers if required to maintain temperature inside panel(s) below the maximum operating temperature rating of the internal components. b. Internal corrosion inhibitors. 2. Indoor panels not located within a designated electrical room or control room: a. Thermostat controlled heaters to maintain temperature approximately 10 degrees F above ambient for condensation prevention inside the panels. b. Automatically controlled, closed-loop heat exchangers or closed-loop air conditioners where required to maintain temperature inside each enclosure below the maximum operating temperature rating of the components inside the panel(s). c. Internal corrosion inhibitors. 3. Outdoor panels: a. Outdoor temperature range of 0 degrees F through 120 degrees F. b. Thermostat controlled heaters to maintain temperature approximately 10 degrees F above ambient dew point for condensation prevention inside the panels. c. Thermostat controlled closed-loop heat exchangers or closed-loop air conditioners if required to maintain temperature inside each enclosure below the maximum operating temperature rating of the components inside the panel. d. Internal corrosion inhibitors. 4. Environmental control components: a. Panel heaters: 1) Thermostat controlled. 2) Fan driven. 3) Components mounted in an anodized aluminum housing. 4) Designed for sub-panel mounting. 5) Powered from 120 VAC and protected with a dedicated circuit breaker. b. Cooling fans and exhaust packages: 1) Cooling fan with louver or grill and replaceable filter. 2) Designed to be mounted within a panel cutout to provide positive airflow through the panel. 3) Cooling fan and exhaust louvers shall be designed and listed to maintain a NEMA 12 enclosure rating. 4) Fitted with replaceable, high-density foam or synthetic fiber. 5) Cooling fan controlled with a separately mounted thermostat with bi-metal sensor and adjustable dial for temperature setting. 6) Powered from 120 VAC and protected with a dedicated circuit breaker. c. Heat exchangers and air conditioners: 1) Dual-loop design to isolate panel interior air from exterior air. 2) Thermostat controlled. 3) Operate from 120 VAC and protected with a dedicated circuit breaker. d. Internal corrosion inhibitors: 1) Contains chemical which vaporizes and condenses on surfaces in the enclosure. 2) Inhibitor shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer instructions for the enclosure volume. 3) Inhibitor shall be applied in the panel(s) prior to shipment from the Contractor’s factory. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 12 2.4 UNWITNESSED FACTORY TESTING A. Inspect and test entire panel assembly to verify readiness for shipment or readiness for the Engineer and/or Owner to attend factory testing if specified in Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. B. Location: Panel fabricator’s factory. C. Tests shall be fully documented and signed by the panel fabricator’s factory supervisor. D. The panel shop shall fully test the control panel for correct wiring. 1. Each I/O point shall be checked by measuring or connecting circuits at the field terminal blocks. E. Burn-in test: Panel(s) shall be fully energized for a minimum period of 48 hours. F. A PLC Central Processing Unit (CPU) shall be obtained and connected to the panel(s) if necessary for testing purposes. G. Testing equipment (such as digital multi-meters, analog loop calibrators, and laptop computers with PLC programming software) shall be used as required for testing. H. The following functions shall be tested as a minimum: 1. Verify functions of the panel(s) required by the Contract Documents. 2. Correctness of wiring from all panel field terminals to all I/O points and to all panel components. 3. Simulate and test each discrete signal at the field terminal strips. 4. Simulate and test each analog signal using loop calibrators. 5. Correct operation of communications between PLC system Central Processing Units (CPUs) and Remote I/O bases. 6. Correct operation of single-loop controllers (including digital communication to microprocessor based devices). 7. Correct operation of all digital communication devices. 8. Verify online and offline diagnostic tests and procedures. I. Deficiencies shall be corrected prior to requesting the Engineer and/or Owner to attend factory testing if specified, or prior to shipment from the Contractor’s factory. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform Factory Acceptance Testing as specified in Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Testing. 2.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: 1. Quantity of 25 % replacement lamps for each type installed (minimum of 12 of each type). 2. Minimum 12 replacement filters for each type installed. 3. 1 QT of exterior finish touch-up paint. 4. One complete set of replacement corrosion inhibitors in sealed packages for each panel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install freestanding panels on 4 inches high concrete housekeeping pads. B. Anchor panels in a manner to prevent the enclosure from racking, which may cause the access doors to become misaligned. C. Obtain approved panel layouts prior to installation of conduits. D. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANELS AND RACKS 40 67 00 - 13 END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS 40 68 63 - 1 SECTION 40 68 63 CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Configuration requirements for Human Machine Interface (HMI) and reports, which includes but is not necessarily limited to: a. Specific software functional descriptions. b. Graphics requirements. c. HMI functionality requirements. d. Solar Power System overview screens. e. Detail displays. f. Trend displays. g. PLC hardware/HMI status screen. h. Alarm monitoring. i. Report generation. j. Configuration standards and conventions. k. Screen configuration review meetings. l. Report configuration review meetings. m. Coordination. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 40 61 13 - Process Control Systems General Requirements. 2. Section 40 61 21 - Process Control System Factory Acceptance Testing (FAT). 3. Section 40 63 44 – PV SCADA Control System 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. HMI: Human Machine Interface. 2. I/O: Input/Output. 3. OLE: Object Linking and Embedding, a document standard developed by Microsoft that enables the creation of an object with one application and the linking or embedding of the object in a second application. 4. OPC: "OLE for Process Control"; a software standard utilizing a client/server model that makes interoperability possible between automation/control applications and field systems/devices. 5. PC: Personal Computer. 6. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. B. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute/The International Society of Automation (ANSI/ISA): a. 101.01-2015, Human Machine Interfaces for Process Automation Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Software Configuration Standards and Conventions document. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Graphic screen displays; provide in actual colors utilized. b. Native file format of the HMI Configuration including tag database and graphic screens. c. Sample reports. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS 40 68 63 - 2 B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certifications: a. Qualifications of programmer(s). 2. Results of factory testing procedures. 3. Proposed training agendas and schedule. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 78 23 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 2. Record Documentation: a. Software Configuration Standards and Conventions - final version. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Programmer(s) shall have had experience in HMI software configuration and installation for at least two projects of similar size and complexity in the past five years. a. At least one of the two projects must have used the HMI software being utilized for this project. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Software Functional Requirements: 1. General functional requirements for system configuration are indicated on the Drawings and described in the Specifications. 2. The information presented herein and indicated on the Drawings illustrates the general functional intent of the system and may not be sufficient to fully configure the system. 3. The Contractor is responsible for determining what additional information may be required to complete the configuration tasks, and for obtaining this information from the Owner. B. Available Process Values: 1. All process alarm, equipment status, and process variable values shall be available at any HMI. 2. If communications to a particular I/O point has failed for any reason, then wherever that data is displayed, the software shall post a visual indication that the point is not valid. C. Text Presentation: 1. In general, use mixed or title case lettering rather than uppercase. a. If a paragraph is required, do not capitalize each word. Single words or short phrases may be capitalized. 2. Avoid abbreviations and acronyms unless part of normal operator language. 3. Do not underline for emphasis; reserve underlined text for hyperlinks. 4. Display text in horizontal orientation unless unavoidable or for clarity. D. Command Entry: 1. Utilize multiple input actions for commands that result in direct action to the process; do not allow a single inadvertent input action to result in a direct action to the process. 2. Where a command entry requires multiple selections by the operator, selections shall be followed by confirmation of the entire list of actions before the command is executed (e.g. selecting new recipe and confirming additive sources and product destinations.) 3. If the selection lists of options are long; construct groupings to allow for easier navigation, scanning and identification of desired selection. 4. Either provide a method for canceling a command change during the change process, or have means for recovering quickly to the prior configuration, or both. 5. Provide feedback for all entries that are outside of an expected range. If an input is critical, acceptable limits on entry shall be enforced. E. Buttons: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS 40 68 63 - 3 1. Buttons that interact directly with the process shall be visually distinct from buttons that provide navigation linkages or launch applications. 2. Any buttons that are currently unavailable shall remain visible. A text color and button background change shall indicate their temporary unavailability. 3. Provide feedback confirmation for button execution. F. Data Entry and Presentation: 1. Provide the capability for manual entry of surrogate data and other variables, which must then be available for display and use in reports. a. Operator-entered commands from any of the operator workstations must be logged to the specific user account by the computer servers. b. In cases where error avoidance techniques are employed to enforce limits on data entry, utilize methods to clarify reason for rejection. 2. Suppress leading zeroes on whole numbers, but use leading zeroes for numbers between -1 and 1. 3. Make engineering units available for operator reference. 4. Utilize no more or fewer display digits than is commensurate with the accuracy of the displayed value. G. Provide comprehensive on-line help for all development functions. H. System Failure: 1. Failure of any PLC, remote I/O hardware, or network communication link must be individually alarmed at HMIs. 2. Unless otherwise specified, each alarm must be specific to a single point of failure. I. Software licensing is furnished by the City. Development shall be performed on the City systems. J. All process related functions, calculations, timers, and numeric manipulations shall be accomplished in the PLC hardware and not in the HMI. 1. The HMI shall function as a monitoring system, not as a process controller. 2. The HMI shall transfer data to the PLC system and the PLC system shall perform all control algorithms. 1.6 SECURITY A. Fully integrate security into the SCADA system to allow only users with appropriate security levels access to individual parts of the system. 1. Follow City standards. B. Include a minimum of four user categories that will determine appropriate access levels: 1. Guest 2. Operator. 3. Supervisor. 4. Administrator. Access to HMI configuration and system settings. C. Each user shall have their own unique user ID and password combination and be assigned to either operator or supervisor user categories. 1. Guest category shall only have view-only mode with no control or set point adjustment permissions. 2. Users shall be configured to authenticate against domain controller. D. Remove all default user names and passwords. Any required configuration or service accounts shall be coordinated with owner. Service accounts and configurations accounts to be submitted to owner during close-out as required by 40 61 13. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS 40 68 63 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOFTWARE VERSION A. Ignition Vision v.8.1.44 1. Symbol Factory Module 7.1.44 2. Alarm Notification Module 6.1.44 3. Vision Module 11.1.44 4. OPC-UA Module 9.1.44 5. Java Version Azul Systems, Inc 17.0.12 6. JVM Memory Max (MB) 1,024.0. 2.2 SPECIFIC SOFTWARE FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS A. Main Windows: Width 1790, Height 1050 B. Root Container Color: 128, 128, 128 C. Specific functional requirements for various software control blocks within the computer system are as specified in this subsection. D. Descriptions are general and are not intended to fully indicate the complete functionality of the system. 1. Monitoring of process values: a. Process values derived from analog process variable signals must be historically archived. 1) Present analog values within context; i.e. provide indication of where each displayed value fits within normal operating range, and how it compares to process and alarm set points. a) Consider the use of sparklines for critical analog values to provide more context and situational awareness. (1) Final determination of where sparklines are to be used, and how each analog value is to be displayed shall be made at the HMI Screen Configuration Review Meeting(s) with the Owner. 2) Store all historical data with time and date of occurrence. 3) Make values available for use in reports. 4) Assign high and low alarms to process values as defined below and otherwise deemed appropriate. b. Provide capability for computer server(s) to retrieve real-time values from the PLC system at adjustable time periods. c. Alarm limits: 1) Set per direction from the Owner. 2) An operator having proper security authorization must be able to enable, disable, and adjust the set point of any individual alarm. E. Provide the four levels of graphic screen displays per ANSI/ISA-101.01 and as described below: 1. Level 1 – Overview Display: a. One display to provide continuous overview or summary of key parameters, alarms, calculated process conditions and operator’s entire span of control. b. Separate overview display for all operating modes, for example start-up and shutdown. c. Display all top priority alarms including the indication of acknowledgement status. 1) Locate to convey functional relationship (i.e. locate adjacent to associated equipment or device). d. Display actual values, abnormal status and severity of deviation for key process parameters that depict health of high-level process areas. e. Display embedded trends on important parameters. f. Orient the operator to the existence, severity, location and direction of change of abnormal process conditions. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS 40 68 63 - 5 g. In general, do not use for performing control functions (e.g. controller set point changes) 2. Level 2 – High Level Displays (system and subsystem overviews): a. Serves as the operator’s primary operating display during normal operations for routine changes and monitoring. b. Include process unit overviews or primary displays for every major system. c. Provide easy navigation to the more detailed level 3 and 4 displays. d. Enable operator to perform tasks using a limited number of displays and minimal navigation. e. Display all top and middle priority alarms for the specific system or subsystem. 1) Provide notification of the existence of low priority alarms within the relevant process so that the Operator knows to navigate to a Level 3 screen, if so desired, for more information. f. Provide enough information and controllers within the main control interface to control the system under most conditions. g. Contain the primary controllers for the specific process area. h. Display task-specific information for start-up and/or shutdown. 3. Level 3 – System/Subsystem Detail Displays: a. Typically contain more detail than associated level 2 displays. b. Used by the operator to perform non-routine operations such as lineup changes, equipment switching, or complex routing tasks. c. Provide sufficient information to facilitate process diagnostics. d. Task based: enable the operator to perform tasks using a limited number of displays and minimal navigation. e. Contain control loops and indicators for process equipment. f. Display alarms of all priorities. g. Display status of various interlocks for depicted equipment. h. Utilize pop-up control screens. 4. Level 4 – Diagnostic Displays: a. Make available all system information. b. Not intended for process or system control, although functionality to perform control may exist in these displays (such as point details). c. May utilize faceplates or popups to display system information. 1) Provide timeout period after which popup closes without any user interaction. a) Provide the operator with capability to override any configured timeout period. 2) Design popups so as not to cover or obscure important parts of HMI display. 3) All presentation and interaction methods to be consistent with other HMI displays. d. Provide operating procedures for individual pieces of equipment. e. Provide help information for equipment control and diagnostics. f. Contain detailed safety shut downs. g. Contain interlock and permissive information. F. HMI operator interface functionality shall include: 1. Indication of process variables. 2. Configuration of control loop parameters (e.g., set points, gains, etc.). 3. Adjustment of controller output. 4. Display of real time and historical process trends. 5. Selector switch and pushbutton station controls. 6. System and process status indicators. 7. Graphic representation of plant operations with interactive status and measurement symbols. 8. Annunciation. G. Graphics: 1. Color use: a. Stopped/Off Color: 128, 128, 128. b. Running/Open Color: 0, 217, 0. c. Do not utilize color alone as the sole discriminator of important status conditions. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS 40 68 63 - 6 d. Do not utilize colors designated for alarms for other purposes. e. Utilize bright colors to draw attention to abnormal situations; do not use bright colors to designate normal conditions (e.g. equipment run status or valve position status). f. Unless directed otherwise, utilize gray background and muted colors to minimize screen glare and reflection. 2. Dragging the mouse over designated process areas of screen shall allow the operator to select predetermined processes or equipment and drill down to site-specific detail screens. a. Provide a graphical response, such as the use borders or shading, to help the Operator easily identify clickable screen content. 3. Critical “overview” information such as tank levels, flows and pressures shall be indicated through data fields or animation effects such as level fills or color change. 4. All monitored and or controlled process equipment shall utilize color highlighting or shading to indicate status changes. 5. Tank and vessel levels shall be indicated with a tabular data field, sparklines, and by graphic “fill” simulating a rising or falling level within the tank or vessel. 6. Provide the ability to “drill down” to detail screens or graphics. a. Clicking on a device or process area shall generate a detail graphic or pop-up window to access specific data or control functions. 1) Window Max height and width less than 1050 x 1790. 2) Root Container Color 213, 213, 213. b. All operator adjustments (e.g., set point adjustment, mode selection) shall be accomplished via a pop-up display, and shall not be allowed on the process screen. 7. Unless otherwise directed, utilize software manufacturer’s standard symbol library. H. Navigation: 1. Minimize operator keystroke/equivalent actions. a. Single keystroke access from graphic to group display or other custom graphic displays. 2. Utilize consistent and distinct visual display symbols for navigation targets. 3. Utilize navigation bar on every screen. a. Navigation bar to include navigation functions, active alarm notification, security functions, current date/time display, “PRINT SCREEN” pushbutton, and other functions as required and as agreed upon at the Screen Configuration Review Meetings. 4. Maximum access times/clicks listed below: METRIC DISPLAY TYPE MAXIMUM ACCESS TIMES/CLICKS Access to alarm displays Alarm summary 1 second Alarm lists (e.g. suppressed alarms) 5 seconds Navigation Critical displays 1-2 clicks Non-critical displays 3 clicks Alarm summary 1 click System diagnostics 1-2 clicks I. Trend Displays: 1. Provide real-time display of trend charts for selected values. a. Values to be selected for trend displays shall be identified during review meetings with the Owner. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS 40 68 63 - 7 b. A sample trend display is showing below: 2. Capable of displaying multiple points per display. 3. Operator shall be able to select/adjust any desired sample time interval. 4. In addition to providing configuration for trend displays of selected values, provide capability for easy access to real time and historical trend information for any variable TAG defined within the SCADA application; i.e. provide ad hoc trend screen functionality. a. As a minimum, provide the following: 1) Provide capability for the user to define trend scenarios. 2) Provide a button to open a dialog window to select multiple variable TAGS and save them as a trend scenario for future use. 3) Provide a pull-down menu to allow the user to open saved trend scenarios. 4) Provide a button to allow the user to select real-time or historical trends. 5) Provide a button to save displayed trend info to a file for export to external software applications (such as Microsoft Excel). 6) Provide a Print Trend button to allow user to print current trend. 5. Utilize Historical Data Server(s) to collect and manage data. J. Bar Charts: 1. Utilize moving pointers for bar charts where used to show relative positions and/or values. K. PLC Hardware/HMI Status Screen: 1. Provide a status screen to depict status conditions and diagnostic information for all major networked equipment. 2. Depict communication status for all networked communicating devices, such as PLC processors, Ethernet switches, PCs, and radios. 3. Include redundant processor and server status; i.e. which processor/server is active and which is standby. 4. Include UPS Status for each UPS provided 5. Include status of enclosure door for each control system enclosure. L. Alarm Monitoring: 1. Provide standard alarm screen functionality to ensure flexibility and quick access to live alarms, alarm history and alarm grouping parameters. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS 40 68 63 - 8 a. As a minimum, include the following features and functionality: 1) An Alarm Screen header bar to head all alarm pages and reside below the Navigation Bar. 2) Buttons to dynamically switch between Alarm Summary and Alarm History. 3) A menu to allow user to select and open historical alarm archives. a) Utilize a time-date stamp file structure. 4) Pull-down menu bar to select operator configured alarm groups. 5) Capability to sort alarms by priority and to define priority for all system alarms. 6) Capability to filter or group alarms. 2. Analog alarms: a. The SCADA software shall monitor analog and discrete variables and calculated conditions, and determine if the variable is in an alarm condition. b. Generally use “Multistate Indicator” component over equipment, fault value visible when fault exists, not visible when no fault exists. c. For each Analog Tag, an alarm for each of the following conditions shall be assignable: 1) Low-low. 2) Low. 3) High. 4) High-high. 5) Deviation low. 6) Deviation high. 7) Rate of change. d. Provide adjustable dead bands and delay timers for all analog alarms. 3. Present alarms in order of: a. Priority. b. Time of occurrence. c. Non-acknowledged presented ahead of acknowledged. 4. Utilize single keystroke or pushbutton to: a. Acknowledge alarms. 5. Alarm list presented to operator shall include: a. Time of occurrence. b. Time of acknowledgement. c. Description. d. Acknowledgement status. 6. Alarm list printed by either of the following: a. On command. b. Periodically. 7. Audible alarming capability for user selected alarms. M. Report Generation: 1. Base bid on the generation of the following reports: a. Minimum of 4 formatted reports. 1) Report form and content shall be determined at the Report Configuration Review Meetings. 2) Each report shall contain daily, weekly, and monthly average, and/or total calculated values. 3) Each report shall contain between 5 and 15 measured parameters. b. List of all entries initiated by operator including the following: 1) Console key changes. 2) Beginning and final values of set point and output changes. 3) Mode changes (i.e., auto to manual). 4) Time change was made. 5) Include user account associated with each change. c. Event list: 1) Description of selected events. 2) Time of event. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS 40 68 63 - 9 2. Custom report capabilities: a. User configurable. b. Contain selected information from any log, event, or alarm list. c. Capable of producing custom log report for periodic and on-demand printing of a list of process or calculated variables. d. Reports shall not require software programming by the user to setup. 3. Control of programs: a. Protect access to configuration via password protection. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Include performance test of HMI software in factory with the overall PLC System test. 1. Reference Specification Section 40 61 21 for requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all programming and configuration required for all HMIs furnished under this Contract: 3.2 CONFIGURATION STANDARDS AND CONVENTIONS A. Prepare and submit a “Software Configuration Standards and Conventions” document. 1. Submit for review and approval prior to commencing with software configuration. 2. Prior to submitting the initial draft document, the Contractor must meet with the Owner to review the Owner’s standards and conventions. 3. Contractor is responsible for scheduling and facilitating the standards and conventions review meeting with the Owner. a. Contractor is responsible for generating the meeting agenda and issuing meeting minutes. b. Meeting will be held at the jobsite. 4. Follow the principles contained in ANSI/ISA-101.01 unless directed otherwise by the Owner or Owner’s Representative. 5. Describe and define such items as: a. Proposed graphic display process colors/representations. b. Color standards for “ON,” “OFF,” “RUNNING”, “OPEN”, “CLOSED”, and “ALARM” conditions. c. Font type and size. d. Alarm handling conventions. 1) Include defining alarm priorities and how they are to be represented graphically (e.g. color and symbol). e. Methods for navigation between displays. f. Address usage/naming/tagging conventions. g. Security setup. h. Content of Level 1, Level 2, Level 3 and Level 4 graphics. 6. Historical setup including data logging by I/O type (including alarms, events and process data), data retention, and data purge. 7. In addition to submitting the initial document for review, submit an updated version of the document as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. a. Revise this document to include any additional standards that are established throughout the configuration process. 3.3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION REVIEW MEETINGS A. Conduct a minimum of one configuration conferences with the Owner to review and discuss system configuration programming and related topics. 1. The purpose of the conference will be to discuss, in detail, how each I/O point will be handled and the types, quantities, hierarchies, and functioning of display screens. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS 40 68 63 - 10 2. Review of the Owner’s existing systems, standards, conventions, file and tag naming requirements, font type and size requirements, and reporting requirements must be part of each conference. 3. Review the navigation bar to be utilized. 4. Conferences will be held in at the jobsite. 5. Each screen will be reviewed at each conference. a. If required, to review all screens, each conference will occur on multiple days. 6. Submit 3 color copies of printed screens via shop drawing submittal process 10 calendar days before each conference. 7. Bring equipment to project screens on wall or provide multiple monitors for viewing by attendees. B. Proposed graphic screens and report formats must be reviewed with the Owner throughout the configuration process. 3.4 REPORT CONFIGURATION REVIEW MEETINGS A. Conduct a configuration conference with the Owner to review and discuss reports and report formats, and data security. The agenda shall be, at a minimum: 1. Review of the Owner’s existing systems, standards, conventions, and reporting requirements must be part of each conference. 2. Review report security, storage and backup requirements. 3. The conference(s) will be held at the Plant. 4. Each report will be reviewed at each conference. a. If required, to review all reports, each conference will occur on multiple days. 5. Provide 10 copies of printed sample reports via shop drawing submittal process 10 calendar days before each conference. B. Proposed report formats must be reviewed with the Owner throughout the configuration process. 3.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other contractors and vendors to seamlessly integrate all HMI monitoring and control functions. 1. To the greatest extent possible, integrate graphics presentation for all systems into screens utilizing one common HMI software. B. Examples of systems that utilize separate application software packages and thus require coordination include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Generator Controls. 2. Digital Metering Package. 3. Distributed UPS System. 4. Pre-purchased control systems. 5. Vendor-furnished packaged systems. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide monitoring and control functions at the HMI(s) as specified within these Contract Documents for all vendor-furnished control systems. 1. Provide all required coordination with the suppliers of the vendor-furnished control systems to enable seamless integration of the Plant Process Control System with the vendor- furnished controls. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate system in accordance with Specification Section 01 75 00. B. On-Site Training: 1. Provide employee of the System Integrator to provide 3 hours] of hands-on operation and maintenance training at the Project site after the system has successfully undergone all field testing and acceptance procedures. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE AND REPORTS 40 68 63 - 11 a. As a minimum, training shall cover: 1) Hardware overview. 2) Software overview. 3) Maintenance. 4) Troubleshooting. 5) Operation, e.g., changing set points, passwords, etc. b. Provide video recording so the Owner’s staff can go back and review. c. Provide printed materials for each trainee in attendance. END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PV SUPPORT STRUCTURES 48 14 10 - 1 SECTION 48 14 10 PV SUPPORT STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Design, fabrication, and installation of photovoltaic (PV) module support structures including PV Solar Fixed Tilt Racks (PV Racks) with driven pile mounting foundation. 2. The PV system support structure design is based on the Terrasmart system. Alternate equivalent support structure systems are acceptable per the submittal process and the Owner’s approval. Alternate support structure systems may require system re-design and require Engineer’s approval. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 35 73 – Delegated Design Procedures. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. 325, Manual of Steel Construction. b. 360, Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings (referred to herein as AISC Specification). 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. c. A500, Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. d. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. e. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. f. A992, Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes. g. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. h. F3125, Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions. 3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1 Structural Welding Code Steel. 4. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): a. 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 5. Building Code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards in accordance with the local Building official requirements, Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): a. 2703, Standard for Mounting Systems, Mounting Devices, Clamping/Retention Devices, and Ground Lugs for Use with Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels. b. 3703, Standard for Solar Trackers. B. Qualifications: Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PV SUPPORT STRUCTURES 48 14 10 - 2 1. PV Rack Manufacturer: a. Responsible for design, engineering, fabrication, and supply of work specified herein. b. Have been in 5-year continuous operation as a PV Rack manufacturer of projects with similar size and scope. 1) Provide references of a minimum of three previous projects within the past 5 years with similar applications and that have comparable MW output. c. Engineer for the PV Rack structural design: Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer product data, including specifications and installation instructions for each component of the PV rack or the PV tracker. 2. Include laboratory test reports and other data, where applicable. B. Structural Calculations: Signed and sealed by engineer currently licensed to practice in State where project is located and specializing in PV rack design and engineering. Structural calculations shall include: 1. Structural analysis of structural system under applicable wind, seismic and snow loads. This analysis shall consider the complete load path down to the foundation. 2. Wind Tunnel test report(s) that is applicable to the project. Wind Tunnel testing shall show the dynamic wind effects in addition to the static wind effects. Engineer shall verify whether dynamic loads will occur and if the structure is stable during low as well as high wind events. 3. Connection design including, bolt, weld and ancillary member sizing, and PV module attachment to the rack proper. 4. Driven pile design and Geotechnical Report that the design is referencing. 5. Corrosion engineering report that the driven pile design is based on. C. Arrangement Drawings: 1. Dimensioned and detailed drawings signed and sealed by licensed engineer registered to practice in the State that the project is located in: a. Complete PV Rack structure, including plan view, elevations, details, and sections. b. Precise interface geometry determination at the top of pile connection. c. Reaction loads (for foundation design). d. Connection details of the structural steel on the support structure proper. 2. Full and comprehensive installation procedure guide for field installation. D. PV Rack: 1. Tilt angle of modules. 2. 3-second gust at 10m elevation design wind speeds. Include all wind speeds and corresponding tilt angles that the rack is designed to accommodate. E. Connection details of module clamps showing how the clamps attach the modules to the support structure below. F. Certifications: 1. Certificates of compliance with standards specified for all major components and fasteners incorporated into work. 2. Copies of current welding certificates for each welder assigned to perform welding indicating compliance with testing specified by AWS. 3. Welder qualification data and prequalified procedures. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle and store steel members and all equipment that are to attach to the rack (i.e., interconnecting cables, wires, and PV modules) above ground on supports. 1. Keep free of dirt and other foreign material and protect against corrosion. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PV SUPPORT STRUCTURES 48 14 10 - 3 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warrant all workmanship against defects for a period of 10 years, from date of substantial completion. All such manufacturer’s warranties shall be assignable to the buyer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. PV Racks: 1. Terrasmart, Preferred. 2. Or Approved Equal. B. Submit request for other manufacturers for approval. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be new, free of defect. B. All structural steel that makes up the PV Racks (i.e., the beams, girts, struts, x-bracing, gusset plates, and any component that is part of the gravity or the lateral force resisting system) shall be in accordance with an ASTM specification as listed in Part 1.2.2. Foreign steel specifications shall not be used unless the steel is dual certified to an approved ASTM specification. C. All PV Rack hardware and accessories shall have proper corrosion resistant treatment, hot dip galvanizing or anodizing to withstand the project service lifetime and take into consideration the local climate conditions and installed conditions of the Project site. 1. Above grade structural steel in the PV Rack shall be either hot dipped galvanized or shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTN A635 specification with a minimum G140 coating. Coating thickness shall take into account local atmospheric corrosion risks and shall last the life of the facility without any surface corrosion from occurring. 2. Steel piles shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and have a minimum of 3.3 mils of galvanizing. Galvanizing thickness may be increased up to the maximum shown in ASTM A123 to account for site specific soil corrosion potential. If piles require more galvanizing to accommodate higher corrosion rates. 3. Site touch-ups of the corrosion protection shall be done consistent with Good Utility Practices, ASTM A780 (for galvanized materials), and manufacturer’s recommendation. 4. Factory end cut surfaces that come from the manufacturer in healed state shall not be touched up onsite, unless deemed necessary by racking vendor or Independent Engineer structural review. 5. All field drilled holes, site modifications, field welds, shipping damage, etc., shall be touched up onsite. 2.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. PV Rack Structural Design: 1. All structural steel that makes up the PV Racks (i.e., the beams, girts, struts, x-bracing, gusset plates, and any component that is part of the gravity or the lateral force resisting system) shall be checked against all applicable reactions generated by loads described in the Building Code and within solar industry standard practice. This includes, but is not limited to: dead, live, wind, seismic, and snow. 2. All loads and load combinations shall be as described in the Building Code. a. Design life of structures shall equal the facility design life. b. Risk Category: I. 3. The racking design shall incorporate wind tunnel test data that is specific to the racking system and as specified in ASCE 7 in accordance with the below provisions. a. Wind pressures and shape factors shall be applied to PV Rack and pile foundation design as specified in the Building Code. b. Wind load shall apply to all system components and exposed equipment, including the racking system with all PV modules installed. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PV SUPPORT STRUCTURES 48 14 10 - 4 c. Allowances shall not be made for the effect of shielding by any other structures, upstream racks, or fencing unless wind tunnel studies have been performed and have these structures and components taken into account. d. The racking design shall take into account both static and dynamic wind pressures. e. For PV racks, the fundamental natural frequency of the racking system shall be at least 5 Hz or greater. If a wind tunnel analysis is not developed for this racking system, the a minimum gust effect factor of 1.0 shall be used in the static wind design and dynamic wind effects due to vortex shedding shall be determined using rational methods. f. A wind tunnel analysis shall be performed on all PV Racks with a natural frequency of 5 Hz or less. The wind tunnel analysis shall account for the flexibility of the structural system (i.e., do not assume the structure is rigid). Structural analysis shall then be performed showing that the rack can support these dynamically amplified loads that result from the wind tunnel analysis. g. All wind speeds shall be checked for dynamic wind effects on the structural system which includes wind speeds starting at 10 mph up to the design extreme wind speed. 4. Snow loads shall take snow drifting into account across the modules by incorporating the tilt angle into the snow design, as well as the effects of snow drifting from the ground at the lower edge of the modules. B. Structural Design Calculations: 1. Refer to Article 1.3 for Submittal requirement for design calculations and drawings. C. Electrical Design: 1. All PV Racks shall be UL-Listed and NRTL approved. 2. All PV Racks shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with UL 2703 and UL 3703. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: All structural steel framing shall be inspected by the Contractor or by a qualified testing agency (TA) hired by the Contractor. TA shall have a minimum of 5 years performing similar work. 1. All such field testing and inspections shall be performed by TA or Contractor. 2. Field testing shall include verification of bolt tension per AISC and pile strengths per Pile Production Tests. 3. All field welds shall be inspected per AWS D1.1. 3.2 ERECTION A. Comply with manufacturer instructions, approved shop drawings and applicable Building Code requirements. B. Properly install all connections as per the PV Rack manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Contractor to provide all materials and equipment required for the erection and installation of the PV Rack and all PV modules and interconnecting wiring. D. Contractor to perform pull tests and provide a detailed design report to the Owner and the Engineer. E. Contractor shall provide provisions during erection and installation of PV Racks for sudden wind events so that the PV Rack structures and modules are not damaged. 1. Contractor shall coordinate with the manufacturer on how to secure unfinished PV Racks if a wind event is about to occur and before the structure is completely built. This includes: a. How to properly secure modules to the structure when only some of the modules have been installed. b. How to properly store modules before they are adequately attached to the rack or during a wind event. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction PV SUPPORT STRUCTURES 48 14 10 - 5 END OF SECTION Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 HDR Project No. 10438546 City of Bozeman September, 2026 Bozeman WRF Solar Power Generation Project Issued for Construction APPENDIX - DIVISION DIVIDER 20 07 - 1 APPENDIX 2008 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION REPORT Proposed Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana Project 07-2295 Submitted by 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, Montana 59108-0910 Prepared for Morrison-Maierle, Inc. P. O. Box 6147 Helena, Montana 59604-6147 January 28, 2008 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Ms. Nancy Granger Cormier, PE Morrison-Maierle, Inc. P. O. Box 6147 Helena, Montana 59604-6147 Via E-Mail: ncormier@m-m.net Dear Ms. Cormier: Re: Geotechnical Evaluation, Proposed Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion, Bozeman, Montana We have completed the geotechnical evaluation in accordance with our Standard Agreement with your firm dated May 21, 2007. The purpose of the geotechnical evaluation was to provide geotechnical engineering recommendations to assist your firm and HDR in designing foundations and slabs, and in preparation of plans and specifications for the wastewater treatment plant expansion. Summary of Results Twelve soil borings were completed in the proposed wastewater treatment plant expansion area. The borings indicated the general soil profile was 1 to 2 feet of organic clay topsoil underlain by lean clay alluvium to depths ranging from 2 1/2 to 4 feet. Beneath the lean clay, the borings generally encountered coarse-grained alluvial deposits consisting of poorly graded gravel with sand, silt, and/or clay to depths ranging from 27 to 30 feet. Borings ST-4P, ST-6, ST-7, ST-10P, and ST-12P encountered a finer-grained layer of clayey soils in the gravel alluvium typically ranging from the 11- to 14-foot depths. Tertiary sediments (old alluvial deposits) were encountered in nine of the 12 borings at depths ranging from 27 to 29 feet. These Tertiary sediments consisted of clayey sand, sandy lean clay, and clayey gravel. Several of the borings also encountered existing fill associated with previous developments and/or construction activities on the site. Boring ST-4P encountered clayey gravel fill to a depth of 1 1/2 feet underlain by buried organic clay topsoil to 2 1/2 feet. Boring ST-12P encountered existing fill consisting of organic clay mixed with gravels to a depth of 7 1/2 feet. Summary of Analysis and Recommendations Deeper Structures. Deeper structures are those that are bearing at a depth of 5 feet or more below existing grades. Based on the borings, we anticipate the subgrade beneath the majority of these structures will consist of dense to very dense alluvial gravels. It is our opinion these gravels are suitable for direct Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 2 support of the proposed structures. As previously indicated, however, six of the borings encountered a layer of clayey soils from the 11- to 14-foot depth. It is our opinion these clay soils, where encountered, will be unsuitable for foundation and pad support, and should be subexcavated from beneath the deeper structures, then replaced with compacted sandy gravels. We recommend providing a bid item in the contract documents for subexcavation/replacement of lean clay alluvium from beneath these proposed structures. For the deeper structures, it is our opinion that mat foundations or spread footings bearing directly on the native gravels or compacted gravel fill placed over the native gravels can be designed for a net allowable bearing pressure up to 4,000 pounds per square foot (psf). Fairly detailed recommendations for static and earthquake lateral earth pressures are included in the attached report for these structures. Shallow Structures. Shallow structures are primarily those buildings and structures that have foundations bearing at a depth of 5 feet or less. It is our opinion these structures can be supported on shallow-spread footings with earth-supported floor slabs. In the attached report, we have provided recommendations for two types of shallow structures: (1) relatively heavy structures, and (2) relatively light structures. The primary difference between our recommendations for these two types of shallow structures is for the heavier structures, we recommend subexcavation/replacement of the on-site lean clays. For the lighter shallower structures, it is our opinion the lean clay alluvium can be left in place. For both types, however, we recommend the organic clay topsoil and existing fill be stripped/removed. Additional Geotechnical Evaluation After completion of the 12 soil borings on the site, the configuration of the wastewater treatment plant expansion was changed. In particular, none of these borings were performed in the vicinity of the digester building, anaerobic digesters, sludge dewatering, UV disinfection, and administration building. When considering that the depth to alluvial gravels is critical, we recommend additional geotechnical evaluation be performed in these areas. The additional geotechnical evaluation will likely include soil borings to a depth of 15 feet and laboratory classification, consolidation, and corrosion testing. Additional geotechnical analysis and recommendations would likely be required, although it is dependent on the actual site conditions. General Please refer to the attached report for more detailed results of our fieldwork, engineering analyses, and recommendations. Pavement sections for automobile and truck traffic areas are included in Section C of this report. Also, refer to Section D of this report for our recommendations regarding construction subgrade observations and concerns related to the exposed lean clay subgrade becoming wet during construction, resulting in construction delays and change orders. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Table of Contents Description Page A. Introduction.............................................................................................................................................1 A.1. Project............................................................................................................................................1 A.2. Purpose of this Evaluation.............................................................................................................1 A.3. Scope .............................................................................................................................................1 A.4. Documents Provided......................................................................................................................2 A.5. Locations and Elevations...............................................................................................................2 B. Results.....................................................................................................................................................2 B.1. Logs ...............................................................................................................................................2 B.2. Site Conditions...............................................................................................................................3 B.3. Soils ...............................................................................................................................................3 B.4. Other Boring Information..............................................................................................................4 B.5. Groundwater Observations............................................................................................................4 B.6. Laboratory Tests............................................................................................................................5 B.7. Additional Geotechnical Evaluation..............................................................................................6 C. Analyses and Recommendations.............................................................................................................6 C.1. Proposed Construction...................................................................................................................6 C.2. Deeper Structures...........................................................................................................................8 C.3. Shallow Relatively Heavy Structures ..........................................................................................12 C.4. Shallow Relatively Light Structures............................................................................................15 C.5. Seismic Considerations................................................................................................................17 C.6. Exterior Slabs...............................................................................................................................17 C.7. Site Grading and Drainage...........................................................................................................18 C.8. Utilities.........................................................................................................................................18 C.9. Pavement......................................................................................................................................19 C.10. Concrete.....................................................................................................................................20 D. Construction..........................................................................................................................................20 D.1. Excavation and Dewatering.........................................................................................................20 D.2. Observations................................................................................................................................21 D.3. Moisture Conditioning.................................................................................................................21 D.4. Subgrade Disturbance..................................................................................................................21 D.5. Testing.........................................................................................................................................22 D.6. Cold Weather Construction.........................................................................................................22 E. Procedures.............................................................................................................................................22 E.1. Drilling and Sampling..................................................................................................................22 E.2. Soil Classification........................................................................................................................23 E.3. Groundwater Observations...........................................................................................................23 F. General Recommendations....................................................................................................................23 F.1. Basis of Recommendations..........................................................................................................23 F.2. Review of Design.........................................................................................................................24 F.3. Groundwater Fluctuations............................................................................................................24 F.4. Use of Report ...............................................................................................................................24 F.5. Level of Care................................................................................................................................24 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Table of Contents Continued Professional Certification Appendix Site Location Sketch Boring Location Sketch Descriptive Terminology Log of Boring Sheets ST-1 through ST-12P General Guidelines for Shoring and Underpinning Lateral Earth Pressure Sketches (2) Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 A. Introduction A.1. Project The City of Bozeman, Montana, is planning a wastewater treatment plant expansion. The project is located on the north side of Bozeman, just south of the East Gallatin River as shown on the attached Site Location Sketch. A.2. Purpose of this Evaluation The purpose of the geotechnical evaluation was to assist Morrison-Maierle, Inc. (MMI), and HDR in designing foundations and slabs, and in preparing plans and specifications for the wastewater treatment plant expansion. A.3. Scope The desired scope of services was outlined in an October 23, 2006, request-for-proposal e-mail from Mr. Kurt Keith of MMI. A preliminary budget was estimated at that time. On May 17, 2007, we submitted a revised proposal to Ms. Nancy Cormier of MMI. The geotechnical report was then prepared in accordance with our Standard Agreement with MMI dated May 21, 2007. Our scope of services was limited to: • Coordinating the locating of underground utilities near the boring locations. • Conducting 12 penetration test borings to a depth of 30 feet in the proposed wastewater treatment plant expansion area, and completing six of these borings as piezometers to permit others to measure groundwater fluctuations on the site. • Returning the samples to our laboratory for visual classification and logging by a geotechnical engineer. • Conducting 40 moisture content tests, four classification tests (Atterberg limits and grain size distribution), and two corrosion tests. • Analyzing the results and formulating recommendations for earthwork, spread footing foundations, mat foundations, and slabs. A Preliminary Geotechnical Report dated August 2, 2007, was submitted. • Discussing the project with MMI personnel. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 2 • Submitting a geotechnical evaluation report containing logs of the borings, our analysis of the field and laboratory tests, and recommendations for earthwork, spread footing foundations, mat foundations, and slabs. A.4. Documents Provided The following documents were provided for our use: • A Plan View Drawing of the Bozeman wastewater treatment plant expansion area, including process area designations, prepared by MMI and HDR, dated July 2007. • Plant Layout Plan prepared by Thomas, Dean & Hoskins, Inc., dated October 1980. • NTL Engineering and GeoScience report dated March 1, 2001, for a new primary clarifier. • Boring Locations drawing, provided by MMI and HDR, dated July 2007. A.5. Locations and Elevations Boring locations were selected by MMI. The locations are shown on the Boring Locations drawing in the Appendix, which was provided to us by MMI. Penetration test borings are designated by the prefix "ST," and borings with piezometers are designated by the suffix "P." Ground surface elevations at the borings were provided by MMI. We have assumed these elevations are referenced to the project datum. B. Results B.1. Logs Log of Boring sheets indicating the depths and identifications of the various soil strata, the penetration resistances, laboratory test data, and water level information are attached. It should be noted the depths shown as boundaries between the strata are only approximate. The actual changes may be transitions and the depths of the changes vary between borings. Geologic origins presented for each stratum on the Log of Boring sheets are based on the soil types, blows per foot, and available common knowledge of the depositional history of the site. Because of the complex glacial and post-glacial depositional environments, geologic origins are frequently difficult to ascertain. A detailed evaluation of the geologic history of the site was not performed. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 3 B.2. Site Conditions The site appears to be located within the geologic flood plain of the East Gallatin River. As indicated on the Boring Locations drawing, the expansion area where our borings were performed is located west of the existing treatment facility. The ground surface in this area is sloping downward to the north at a slope ranging from about 1 to 3 percent. Ground surface elevation variation between the borings was 5.4 feet. An existing shop building is located near the middle of the site. It is also likely that several underground utilities are present in the expansion area. The site was covered with native grasses and gravel-surfaced roads at the time of our fieldwork. The "Preliminary Geologic Map of the Bozeman 30' by 60' Quadrangle" compiled and mapped by Vuke, et al, describes the site geology as alluvial deposits of the East Gallatin River, and coarse-grained upper Tertiary sediments. B.3. Soils The borings indicated the general soil profile was 1 to 2 feet of organic clay topsoil or existing fill underlain by lean clay alluvium to depths ranging from 2 1/2 to 4 feet. Beneath the lean clay, the borings generally encountered coarse-grained alluvial deposits consisting of poorly graded gravel with sand, silt, and/or clay to depths ranging from 27 to 30 feet. Borings ST-4P, ST-6, ST-7, ST-10P, and ST-12P encountered a finer-grained layer of clayey soils in the gravel alluvium typically ranging from the 11- to 14-foot depths. Tertiary sediments (old alluvial deposits) were encountered in nine of the 12 borings at depths ranging from 27 to 29 feet. These Tertiary sediments consisted of clayey sand, sandy lean clay, and clayey gravel. B.3.a. Existing Fill. Several of the borings encountered existing fill associated with previous developments and/or construction activities on the site. Boring ST-4P encountered clayey gravel fill to a depth of 1 1/2 feet underlain by buried organic clay topsoil to 2 1/2 feet. Boring ST-12P encountered existing fill consisting of organic clay mixed with gravels to a depth of 7 1/2 feet. B.3.b. Lean Clay Alluvium. Lean clay alluvium was encountered in all borings to depths ranging from 2 1/2 to 4 feet. Penetration resistances in the surficial lean clay alluvium generally ranged from 7 to 16 blows per foot (BPF). These values indicated the lean clay alluvium was medium to stiff in consistency. B.3.c. Coarse-Grained Gravel Alluvium. Coarse-grained alluvial deposits consisting of poorly graded gravel with silt, silt, and/or clay was encountered to depths ranging from 27 to 30 feet. Penetration resistances in the coarse-grained gravel alluvium ranged from 16 BPF to 50 blows for only 2 inches of penetration, but primarily ranged from about 34 to 62 BPF. These values indicated the alluvial gravels were medium dense to very dense, but were primarily dense to very dense. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 4 B.3.d. Clayey Layer. A fine-grained layer of clayey soils was encountered from depths ranging from 11 to 14 feet in Borings ST-4P, ST-6, ST-7, ST-10P, and ST-12P. Penetration resistances in the clayey layer typically ranged from 3 blows for 6 inches of penetration to 16 BPF, indicating this clayey layer was medium to stiff. Once the overburden is removed or if it is disturbed during construction, these clay layers can become much softer. B.3.e. Tertiary Sediments. Tertiary sediments consisting of clayey sand, sandy lean clay, and clayey gravel were encountered at depths ranging from 27 to 29 feet. Penetration resistances in the sediments typically ranged from 39 to 98 BPF, indicating the deeper sands and gravels were dense to very dense and the clays were hard. B.4. Other Boring Information We were provided with portions of drawings prepared by Thomas, Dean & Hoskins dated October 1980, apparently for a previous wastewater treatment plant expansion. Sheet 3 contained the boring logs for Drill Holes DH #1 through DH #15 excluding DH #5. A note on this drawing appears to indicate some of this work was performed in February 1969. These borings were performed throughout the existing wastewater treatment plant and encountered a similar profile. In brief, the borings encountered a 1- to 2- foot thick topsoil layer underlain by fine-grained silty clay alluvium to depths ranging from about 2 to 6 feet. Gravel alluvium was then encountered to the borings' termination depths, which appear to range from about 15 to 20 feet. The gravel is described as containing some cobbles and lenses of sand. Groundwater was encountered in most of these borings at depths ranging from about 3 to 6 feet. We were also provided with a copy of the NTL Engineering & GeoScience report dated March 1, 2001, for the new primary clarifier. This clarifier is located on the Process Area Designation drawing as Item 201. One boring was performed, labeled DH-1. The boring encountered topsoil underlain by lean clay alluvium to a depth of 2 1/2 feet where gravel alluvium was encountered to the boring's termination depth of 26 1/2 feet. Penetration resistances in the gravel alluvium generally ranged from 38 to 82 BPF, indicating the gravels were dense to very dense. Groundwater was encountered at a depth of 19.8 feet. B.5. Groundwater Observations Groundwater was observed in all 12 borings at the depths and corresponding elevations indicated in Table 1 below. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 5 Table 1. Summary of Groundwater Depths While Drilling Boring Depth to Groundwater (feet) Corresponding Elevation ST-1P 12.9 4596.3 ST-2 13.2 4594.1 ST-3 13.5 4592.2 ST-4P 13.6 4591.8 ST-5 11.4 4593.8 ST-6 15.0 4592.4 ST-7 13.8 4595.7 ST-8 13.8 4596.8 ST-9P 13.8 4596.1 ST-10P 10.7 4594.8 ST-11P 13.1 4594.4 ST-12P 13.6 4596.0 As can be seen in the table, piezometers were installed in six of the borings indicated by the "P" suffix. It is our understanding that MMI has periodically measured groundwater levels in the piezometers. It is interesting that the groundwater in the 1969 borings was much shallower (only 3 to 6 feet) than the current and 2001 borings (13 to 20 feet). B.6. Laboratory Tests The results of the laboratory tests are presented on the Log of Boring sheets found in the Appendix. B.6.a. Pocket Penetrometer Tests. The clay samples were tested with a pocket penetrometer to estimate their unconfined compressive strengths. A pocket penetrometer consists of a 1/4-inch diameter rod that is pushed 1/4 inch into the clay soil by a spring. Compression of the spring has been correlated to the unconfined compressive strength of clay soils by the manufacturer. The results of the pocket penetrometer test are presented on the Log of Boring sheets in the Appendix. B.6.b. Classification Tests. Two samples of lean clays were selected for Atterberg limits tests. The sample from Boring ST-8 from 1 1/2 to 3 feet had a liquid limit of 32, plastic limit of 23, and plasticity index of 9. The sample from Boring ST-10P from 14 to 15 1/2 feet had a liquid limit of 45, plastic limit of 18, and plasticity index of 27. Based on these results, both samples classify as lean clay, American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) symbol CL. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 6 B.6.c. Corrosion Tests. The results of the corrosion tests are summarized in Table 2 below. Table 2. Summary of Corrosion Tests Boring Depth (feet) Soil pH Marble pH Resistivity (ohm-cm) Sulfate Content ST-1P 1½ - 8 GP-GM 7.4 7.4 5,000 ND* ST-1P 9 – 20½ GP-GC 6.7 7.3 4,000 ND ST-8 11½ - 30½ GP-GC 7.1 7.2 3,100 ND ST-10P 4 – 10½ GP-GM 7.3 7.3 4,700 ND *ND = Not detected at the 0.01% reporting limit, test conducted by Energy Laboratories. Based on these results, the gravel alluvium is not corrosive to ductile iron pipe, steel, or concrete. It should be assumed, however, that the lean clay alluvium near the surface will be corrosive to ductile iron pipe and steel. B.7. Additional Geotechnical Evaluation After completion of the 12 soil borings on the site, the configuration of the wastewater treatment plant expansion was changed. In particular, none of these borings were performed in the vicinity of the digester building, anaerobic digesters, sludge dewatering, UV disinfection, and administration building. When considering that the depth to alluvial gravels is critical, we recommend additional geotechnical evaluation be performed in these areas. The additional geotechnical evaluation will likely include soil borings to a depth of 15 feet and laboratory classification, consolidation, and corrosion testing. Additional geotechnical analysis and recommendations would likely be required, although it is dependent on the actual site conditions. C. Analyses and Recommendations C.1. Proposed Construction The Bozeman wastewater treatment plant is located on the north side of Bozeman just south of the East Gallatin River as shown on the attached Site Location Sketch. The proposed expansion includes up to 33 modified existing structures and/or new structures, which will be constructed in three phases. The attached Process Area Designations drawing provides a summary of the proposed phased improvements. Table 3 below is a brief summary of the proposed Phase I improvements, which will require new construction. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 7 The new construction will primarily consist of cast-in-place concrete structures typically supported on mat foundations and spread footings. The new buildings indicated below will likely be supported on shallow-spread footings with earth-supported floor slabs at or slightly above existing grades in each area. At this time, it is our understanding the deeper structures are being designed to counteract buoyancy, and a subsurface dewatering system beneath the structures is not being installed. The anticipated loads indicated in Table 3 were provided by MMI and HDR. Table 3. Brief Summary of New Construction Phase I Improvements Item Existing Grade Anticipated Foundation Elevation Excavation Depth Foundation Type Anticipated Loads 101 Pretreatment Headworks 4612 4608 4' Continuous Spread Footing 1,500 lb/ft 102 Pretreatment Grit Removal 4612 4599 13'* Mat Foundation 500 psf 103 Pretreatment Influent Splitting 4612 4605 7' Mat Foundation 500 psf 203 Thickener-Fermenter Pump Station 4609 4583 26'* Continuous Spread Footing 5,000 lb/ft 204 Primary Effluent Pump Station 4610 4593 17' Mat Foundation 3,500 psf 303/304 BNMR Bioreactors 4609 4592 17' Mat Foundation 4,000 psf (toe pressure) 305 Secondary Effluent Split Box 4608 4600 8' Mat Foundation 1,000 psf 601 RAS-WAS Pump Station No. 2 4605 4596 9'* Mat Foundation 1,000 psf 602 Secondary Clarifiers 4605 4590 15' Continuous Spread Footing 3,000 lb/ft 603 Secondary Scum Pump Station 4605 4595 10' 900 UV Disinfection 4605 4601 4' Continuous Spread Footing 1,000 lb/ft 1100 Digester Building No. 2 4604 4600 4' - 12’ Continuous and Isolated Spread Footing 4,000 lb/ft and 4,000 psf 1101 Anaerobic Digester 4604 4591 13' Continuous Spread Footing 2,000 lb/ft 1200 Sludge Dewatering 4604 4600 4' Continuous Spread Footing 1,500 lb/ft 1201 Dewatered Sludge Storage 4604 4603 1' Continuous and Isolated Spread Footing 12,000 lb/ft and 175,000 lbs 1300 Admin/Lab Building 4604 4600 4' Continuous and Isolated Spread Footing 4,500 lb/ft and 80,000 lbs *These structures are in relatively close proximity to existing structures; excavation shoring and/or underpinning of existing foundations may be required. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 8 C.2. Deeper Structures C.2.a. General. As indicated in Table 3, the wastewater treatment plant expansion includes many new structures, some of which are bearing as shallow as 4 feet while others as deep as 26 feet. Deeper structures as described in this report are those structures that are bearing at a depth of 5 feet or deeper. C.2.b. Dewatering. Several of the structures will extend below groundwater. We recommend groundwater be lowered prior to excavation. The groundwater should be lowered to a minimum depth of 2 feet below the anticipated excavation or subexcavation bottom. Due to the depths of the excavations, we anticipate a series of dewatering wells will be required to lower the groundwater. The actual number and location of wells and specific methods will need to be determined by the contractor based on their past experience and available equipment. It is our opinion that dewatering by installing sumps and pumps in the bottoms of excavations will not be feasible. It is also our understanding that a test dewatering well may have been installed on the project for a site- specific pumping test. If installed and tested, hydraulic conductivity properties of the subsurface soils, primarily the alluvial gravels, may be available. This information will assist contractors in designing their dewatering system(s) for the project. We wish to also point out that a fairly significant dewatering system has been installed beneath the existing wastewater treatment plant. If this system is running, groundwater levels could be lower near the existing plant. Also, piezometers were installed at six borings to permit monitoring of groundwater levels on the site. C.2.b. Subgrade. Based on the borings, it appears the subgrade beneath the majority of the new structures will consist of dense to very dense alluvial gravels. It is our opinion these gravels are suitable for direct support of the proposed structures, although consideration should be given to placing a leveling course directly beneath the concrete for grading purposes. As previously indicated, however, six of the borings encountered a layer of clayey soils from the 11- to 14-foot depth. These clays are very close to the static groundwater level, and will likely be saturated. As the overburden is removed (excavation is performed) and the clays are subjected to construction activities, we anticipate these clays will loosen and become excessively soft. It is therefore our opinion the lean clay layer, when encountered in the bottom of the excavation, will not be suitable for structure support. C.2.c. Subexcavation of Lean Clay. To provide a uniform subgrade, we recommend subexcavating the lean clay alluvium from beneath structure mat foundations and pads (slabs) when present within 2 feet of bottom-of-foundation/pad elevation. When encountered, we recommend subexcavating the lean clay Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 9 from beneath the mat foundation/pad down to denser sands and gravels. The oversize of subexcavations should extend 2 feet (horizontal) beyond the perimeter edges of the foundation. Subexcavation of clays beneath structures will need to be determined during construction. Beneath the heavier-loaded structures bearing at the 11- to 17-foot depths, we recommend shallow test holes be excavated 2 feet below the bottom of the excavation, preferably outside the structure, to check for the presence of clays and the need for subexcavation. These structures are listed below. • 204 Primary Effluent Pump Station • 303/304 BNMR Bioreactors • 602 Secondary Clarifiers • 1100 Digester Building No. 2 It is difficult to predict whether or not clay subexcavation will be needed beneath these structures, but we recommend providing a bid line/quantity in the contract documents. We suggest assuming 500 cubic yards of subexcavation/replacement will be needed. This quantity is basically the plan area of the Primary Effluent Pump Station (204) and a 3-foot subexcavation. It is our opinion that on-site gravels can then be reused as compacted gravel beneath these structures. Cobbles that are greater than 6 inches in size should be removed, if present. Another alternative is to import 3-inch minus sandy gravel as structural backfill beneath the structure foundations/pads. We recommend the backfill placed beneath these structures be compacted to a minimum of 100 percent of its maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM Method of Test D 698 (standard Proctor). C.2.d. Bearing Capacity. It is our opinion that mat foundations and spread footings bearing directly on the native gravels or compacted gravel fill placed over the native gravels can be designed for a net allowable bearing pressure up to 4,000 pounds per square foot (psf). (Net allowable bearing pressure is defined as that bearing pressure in excess of the final minimum overburden pressure.) This bearing pressure includes a factor of safety of at least 3.0 against bearing capacity failure. C.2.e. Subgrade Modulus. We recommend using a modulus of subgrade reaction of 200 pounds per cubic inch (pci) for the mat foundations bearing on native gravels or compacted gravels placed over native gravels. This value is the unit pressure required in pounds per square inch to cause 1 inch of deflection of a 1-foot square plate. C.2.f. Anticipated Settlement and Heave. We anticipate mat foundations and spread footings designed and placed as recommended above will generally experience less than 3/4 inch of total settlement and less than 1/2 inch of differential settlement. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 10 C.2.g. Backfill and Buoyancy. On-site alluvial gravels can be used as backfill on the exterior sides of the structure foundation walls. Due to the depth of these structures, we recommend the backfill be compacted to a minimum of 98 percent of its standard Proctor maximum dry density. We anticipate the mat foundations for these structures will likely extend horizontally beyond the perimeter walls to help offset buoyancy forces. A wedge of backfill above the mat edges can be used to help resist buoyant uplift. This wedge extends out at an angle of 20 degrees from vertical from the mat edge. Assuming on- site gravels are used as backfill, it is our opinion a compacted unit weight of 140 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) can be used for gravels above the groundwater table, and a submerged unit weight of 78 pcf can be used below the groundwater table. MMI is currently measuring groundwater levels in the piezometers installed in our borings. These measurements will help identify the depth of groundwater for design, however, we suggest assuming 8 feet at this time. (If the plant is located in the flood plain of the East Gallatin River, it may be necessary to assume groundwater could rise to the surface.) C.2.h. Lateral Earth Pressures. C.2.h.1. Assumptions. We assumed the following parameters for our static and earthquake conditions. • Moist unit weight of backfill = 140.0 pcf • Submerged unit weight of backfill = 77.6 pcf • Internal friction angle = 38° • Depth to groundwater = 8 feet The values indicated in Tables 4 and 5 below are ultimate values and have not been factored. Appropriate factors of safety should be included when designing unbalanced walls to resist lateral earth forces. The equivalent fluid pressures indicated above for the submerged compacted gravels include 62.4 psf/ft for groundwater pressure. C.2.h.2. Static Lateral Earth Pressures. We recommend using the following equivalent fluid pressures for design, depending on the depth of the structure. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 11 Table 4. Lateral Earth Pressures for Buried Walls: Static Conditions1 Depth of Wall At-Rest Pressure (psf/ft of depth) Passive Pressure (psf/ft of depth) Coefficient of Friction Less than 8' 73 500 0.54 Less than 15' 73 300 0.54 Less than 20' 79 300 0.54 Less than 26' 82 300 0.54 1These values are representative of vertical walls and backfill surfaces that are flat, i.e., not sloping away or into the wall. These values should be used as a uniform pressure over the full height of the wall and incorporate the varying pressure due to both submerged and unsubmerged conditions for purposes of simplification. A more detailed, and less conservative, graph of the anticipated At-Rest pressures are shown on the attached graphs. C.2.h.3. Earthquake Lateral Earth Pressures. Table 5 below contains our recommendations for estimating lateral earth pressures against unbalanced buried walls during earthquake conditions. The pressures were calculated using the Mononobe-Okabe Method within the software program "Shoring Suite" by Civil Tech Software The earthquake-induced lateral earth pressure changes depending on structure depth, therefore, three different structure depths have been analyzed: structures 0 to 15 feet deep, 15 to 20 feet deep, and 20 to 26 feet deep. Due to the shape of the earthquake-induced lateral earth pressure, the concept of equivalent fluid pressures no longer apply. The information provided in Table 5 define the shape of the pressure diagram used to calculate total lateral earth force. The lateral earth pressure diagrams for each of the depths analyzed is also included in the Appendix. The earthquake pressures are designated as "Active/Eq" in the attached graphs. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 12 Table 5. Active Lateral Earth Pressures for Buried Walls: Earthquake Conditions1 15-foot Deep Structure 20-foot Deep Structure 26-foot Deep Structure Depth (feet) Pressure (psf) Depth (feet) Pressure (psf) Depth (feet) Pressure (psf) 0 176 0 219 0 266 8 375 8 432 8 475 15 884 20 1,295 26 1,787 1These values are representative of vertical walls and backfill surfaces that are flat, i.e., not sloping away or into the wall. Pressures between the above depths transitions in a straight line between points. C.2.i. Shoring and/or Underpinning. Shoring and/or underpinning of deeper structures will be necessary when they are constructed in relatively close proximity to the existing structures. Based on our available information, it appears shoring and/or underpinning may be necessary for structures 102 – pretreatment removal, 203 – thickener-fermenter pump station, and 601 – RAS-WAS pump station 2. Other structures may also need to be shored and/or underpinned depending on how close they are to existing structures. The attached detail provides general guidelines for shoring and underpinning depending on the proximity. We wish to emphasize that these requirements are based on the assumption the groundwater table has been lowered several feet below the bottom of the excavation during construction. If groundwater has not been properly lowered and is seeping from the sidewalls of the excavations, then these details are not representative of the site conditions, i.e., they are too conservative. Excessive seepage from excavation sideslopes commonly result in failure of the slope and should be prevented. C.3. Shallow Relatively Heavy Structures C.3.a. General. Shallow relatively heavy structures have the following characteristics. • Foundation members bear at a depth of 5 feet or less below existing grades. • Wall loads are greater than 3 kips per foot. • Column loads are greater than 50 kips. • Distributed floor loads exceed 500 psf. • Floors are subjected to industrial/warehouse loadings, such as the Dewatered Sludge Storage Facility. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 13 It is our opinion these structures can be supported on shallow-spread footing foundations with earth- supported concrete floor slabs matching or slightly above existing grades. However, due to the relatively heavy nature of these structures, we recommend foundations and critical slabs bear directly on the alluvial gravels or compacted sandy gravel backfill placed over alluvial gravels, i.e., the lean clay alluvium should be subexcavated and replaced. A separate concern for these shallow structures, however, is the presence of existing fill. One rarely knows what is buried in or beneath an existing fill, and compressible and decomposable materials may be present. It is also unlikely the existing fill was properly compacted. It is therefore our opinion the existing fill is unsuitable to be left in place beneath the proposed foundations and floor slabs of these shallow structures. Our recommendations regarding building pad preparation are discussed in more detail below. C.3.b. Structure Pad Preparation. We recommend the organic clay topsoil be removed from beneath the building and structure pads. The borings indicated the average thickness of organic clay was 1 1/2 feet. Actual depth of removal beneath each site should be determined by observations during stripping. We further recommend all existing fill and native alluvial clays be removed from beneath building and structure foundations and slabs. We recommend it be removed from beneath proposed footings and slabs and an oversize zone extending 1/2 foot (horizontal) beyond the footings and slabs for every foot of subexcavation below the footings and slabs, down to natural gravel alluvium. On-site alluvial gravels (GC, GP-GM, GP-GC), imported crushed gravel road base or 3-inch minus sandy gravel should be used as backfill and fill. We recommend backfill and fill beneath the building and shallow structure pads be placed in lifts, at a moisture content at or slightly above optimum moisture content, and compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of its standard Proctor maximum dry density. C.3.c. Foundations. C.3.c.1. Depth. We recommend spread footings bear a minimum of 4 feet below exterior grades for frost protection for heated buildings. For unheated structures, we recommend spread footings bear a minimum of 5 feet below final earth grades for frost protection. C.3.c.2. Footing Subgrade. We recommend shallow spread footings bear on undisturbed native gravels or compacted gravel backfill placed over undisturbed native gravels as described in Section C.3.b. C.3.c.3. Bearing Capacity. It is our opinion shallow-spread footings bearing on alluvial gravels or compacted gravel backfill placed over alluvial gravels may be designed for a net allowable bearing pressure up to 3,000 psf. (Net allowable bearing pressure is defined as that bearing Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 14 pressure in excess of the final minimum overburden pressure.) This bearing pressure includes a factor of safety of at least 3.0 against bearing capacity failure. C.3.c.4. Anticipated Settlement and Heave. We anticipate total and differential settlement and heave of these foundations will generally be less than 1/2 inch. Buildings of this type can generally tolerate movements of this magnitude. C.3.c.5. Foundation Wall Backfill. We recommend the backfill placed on the interior and exterior sides of shallow foundations be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of its standard Proctor maximum dry density. Backfill should meet the requirements described in Section C.3.b. C.3.d. Earth-Supported Floor Slabs. C.3.d.1. Subgrade. As described in Section C.3.b, we recommend all organic clay topsoil, lean clay alluvium, and existing fill be removed from beneath proposed floor slabs, then be replaced with compacted sandy gravel consisting of either on-site alluvial gravels, imported base course, or imported 3-inch minus sandy gravel. C.3.d.2. Fill and Backfill. Some fill may be required beneath these proposed floors to raise grades. On-site alluvial gravels can be used as fill, although 3-inch minus sandy gravel or crushed base course are preferred materials. In particular, we recommend providing a minimum of a 6-inch thick leveling course consisting of 3/4-inch minus crushed base course directly beneath these proposed floor slabs. A thicker leveling course will result in a higher subgrade modulus for design as described later in this section of the report. C.3.d.3. Vapor Retarder. If floor coverings or coatings less permeable than the concrete slab will be used, or if moisture is a concern, we recommend a vapor retarder be placed directly beneath the slab. (Some coverings, coatings or situations may require a vapor barrier, i.e., a membrane with a permeance less than 0.3 perms.) Some contractors and designers prefer to place a sand or gravel cushion course between the slab and vapor retarder in an effort to reduce curling. However, this practice increases the risk of trapping water between the slab and the vapor retarder, which can delay placement of some floor coverings. If the cushion course does become wet prior to concrete placement, we recommend the excess moisture be removed prior to slab placement. C.3.d.4. Subgrade Modulus. If a minimum of 6 inches of compacted 3/4-inch minus crushed base course is provided beneath the floor, it is our opinion a modulus of subgrade reaction, k, of 225 pounds per square inch per inch of deflection (pci) may be used to design the floor. If a Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 15 minimum of 12 inches of base course is provided, it is our opinion a modulus of 300 pci may be used to design the floor. C.4. Shallow Relatively Light Structures C.4.a. General. Shallow relatively light structures have the following characteristics. • Foundation members bear at a depth of 5 feet or less below existing grades. • Wall loads are 3 kips per foot or less. • Column loads are 50 kips or less. • Distributed floor loads are 500 psf or less. • The floors of these buildings are not subjected to industrial/warehouse loading conditions. It is our opinion these structures can be supported on shallow-spread footing foundations with earth- supported floor slabs matching or slightly above existing grades. Due to the relatively light nature of these structures, it is our opinion the lean clay alluvium can be left in place beneath proposed foundations and floor slabs. A separate concern for these shallow structures, however, is the presence of existing fill. One rarely knows what is buried in or beneath an existing fill, and compressible and decomposable materials may be present. It is also unlikely the existing fill was properly compacted when placed. It is therefore our opinion the existing fill is unsuitable to be left in place beneath proposed foundations and floor slabs of these shallow structures. Our recommendations regarding building pad preparation are discussed in more detail below. C.4.b. Structure Pad Preparation. We recommend the organic clay topsoil be removed from beneath the building and structure pads. The borings indicated the average thickness of organic clay was 1 1/2 feet. Actual depth of removal beneath each site should be determined by observations during stripping. Where existing fill is present beneath proposed foundations and floor slabs, we recommend it be removed on an oversize zone extending 1/2 foot (horizontal) beyond the footings and slabs for every foot of subexcavation below the footings and slabs, down to natural soils. After the topsoil and existing fill have been removed, we recommend the exposed clay subgrade be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, moistened to a moisture content near optimum, and compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of its standard Proctor density. The excavated material may be reused as backfill if topsoil, oversize cobbles and boulders, foreign materials, and other unsuitable materials are removed. A better material to use as backfill for these light Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 16 structures is the on-site alluvial gravels, imported 3-inch minus sandy gravel or crushed base course. We recommend backfill and fill beneath the building and shallow structure pads be placed in lifts, at a moisture content at or slightly above optimum moisture content, and compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of its standard Proctor maximum dry density. C.4.c. Foundations. C.4.c.1. Depth. We recommend spread footings bear a minimum of 4 feet below exterior grades for frost protection for heated buildings. For unheated buildings, we recommend spread footings bear a minimum of 5 feet below earth grades for frost protection. C.4.c.2. Footing Subgrade. We recommend shallow spread footings bear on undisturbed natural soils or compacted backfill placed over undisturbed natural soils as described in Section C.4.b. For these structures, it is our opinion the proposed footings can bear directly on the lean clay alluvium. C.4.c.3. Bearing Pressure. It is our opinion shallow-spread footings for relatively lightly- loaded structures can be designed for a net allowable bearing pressure up to 1,500 psf. This bear pressure includes a factor of safety of at least 3.0 against bearing capacity failure. C.4.c.4. Anticipated Settlement and Heave. We anticipate total and differential settlement and heave of these foundations will generally be less than 3/4 inch. Buildings of this type can generally tolerate movements of this magnitude. C.4.c.5. Foundation Wall Backfill. We recommend backfill placed on the interior and exterior sides of the foundation walls be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of its standard Proctor maximum dry density. On-site soils can be used as well as imported gravels. C.4.d. Earth-Supported Floor Slabs. C.4.d.1. Subgrade. After removal of the organic clay topsoil, we anticipate the floor subgrade will be lean clay alluvium. As previously indicated, all existing fill should be subexcavated and replaced with compacted backfill. C.4.d.2. Fill and Backfill. Some fill will likely be required to raise grades beneath the proposed floor slabs. It is our opinion that on-site soils can be used as fill. Imported 3-inch minus sandy gravel or crushed gravel road base are generally the best materials to use as fills. A leveling course of crushed base course is recommended beneath the proposed floors. We recommend fill and backfill materials be moistened to a moisture content near or slightly above optimum Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 17 moisture content, then compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of its standard Proctor maximum dry density. C.4.d.3. Vapor Retarder. If floor coverings or coatings less permeable than the concrete slab will be used, or if moisture is a concern, we recommend a vapor retarder be placed directly beneath the slab. (Some coverings, coatings or situations may require a vapor barrier, i.e., a membrane with a permeance less than 0.3 perms.) Some contractors and designers prefer to place a sand or gravel cushion course between the slab and vapor retarder in an effort to reduce curling. However, this practice increases the risk of trapping water between the slab and vapor retarder, which can delay placement of some floor coverings. If the cushion course does become wet prior to concrete placement, we recommend the excess moisture be removed prior to slab placement. C.5. Seismic Considerations Based on the results of our soil borings, we recommend using a "Stiff soil profile, Site Class D," as defined by the 2003 International Building Code (IBC) for design. We should point out, however, that the soil conditions are very close to a "Very Dense soil and Soft rock, Site Class C," condition. If design is significantly impacted for Site Class C versus Site Class D conditions, we should be contacted. More detailed geologic review and deeper borings could be performed to better evaluate which site class can be used. We recommend the site to have a maximum 1.0 second spectral response acceleration, S1, of 0.232 and a maximum 0.2 second spectral response acceleration, SS, of 0.757. Based on our liquefaction analysis, it is our opinion the risk of liquefaction of the medium dense to very dense sands and gravels below foundations and structures is generally low under the anticipated seismic forces. Our liquefaction analysis used a peak ground acceleration of 0.16 percent of gravity, which has a 10 percent chance of being exceeded during a 50-year period. We estimate the factor of safety against liquefaction to be between 2.7 and 2.9. C.6. Exterior Slabs C.6.a. Subgrade. Non-critical exterior slabs may be supported on undisturbed natural soils and existing fill after the vegetation, topsoil, and root zone have been removed. Critical exterior slabs, such as those at entrances, will likely require some additional subgrade preparation as described below. As previously indicated, the existing fill encountered on the site could result in excessive settlement of exterior slabs. To reduce this risk, we recommend subexcavating the existing fill beneath critical exterior slabs down to natural soils, then replacing it with nonfrost-susceptible compacted sand or sandy gravel as described below. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 18 C.6.b. Backfill and Fill. Backfill and fill beneath proposed exterior slabs and their oversize zones should be placed in lifts and at a moisture content near or slightly above optimum moisture content. We recommend all fill and backfill beneath exterior slabs be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of its standard Proctor maximum dry density. C.6.c. Frost Protection. Lean clay, clayey gravel, poorly graded gravel with clay, and poorly graded gravel with silt are considered moderately to highly frost-susceptible soils. If these soils become wet and freeze, several inches of frost heave may occur. Heaving of slabs during the winter can be a nuisance or hazard where doors open outward and at other critical grade areas. One way to reduce this heave is to remove the frost-susceptible on-site soils down a depth of 4 feet and replace them with clean (nonfrost-susceptible) sand or sandy gravel. Sand or sandy gravel with less than 5 percent of their particles by weight passing a 200 sieve are generally considered nonfrost-susceptible. Another method of reducing frost heave is to place a minimum of 2 inches of extruded polystyrene foam insulation beneath the slabs and extending about 4 feet beyond the slabs. Insulation will reduce frost penetration into the underlying subgrade and thereby reduce heave. A leveling course of sand is generally required to seat the insulation panels. Eight to twelve inches of crushed road base material should be placed over the panels to protect them during construction. Consideration can also be given to supporting the slabs on frost-depth footings. A void space of at least 4 inches should be provided between the bottoms of the slabs and the frost-susceptible subgrade to allow them to heave without affecting the slabs. The stem walls should be tied to the footings with sufficient reinforcing to prevent frost from heaving the walls off of the footings. C.7. Site Grading and Drainage We recommend the site be graded to provide positive run-off away from the proposed structures. We recommend landscaped areas have a slope of at least 5 percent for the first 10 feet away from the structures, then 2 percent to carry run-off away. To maintain this slope, it is essential that backfill against the foundation walls be adequately compacted. If it is not adequately compacted, exterior foundation wall backfill will likely consolidate and water may pond and soak into the soil, causing settlement. In addition, we recommend gutters and downspouts with long splash blocks or extensions where possible. C.8. Utilities C.8.a. Materials. As previously indicated in Section B of this report, corrosion tests were performed on samples of the alluvial gravels. All of the samples were found to be non-corrosive to ductile iron pipe. It is our opinion, however, that the on-site alluvial clays would generally be considered corrosive to ductile Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 19 iron pipe. Therefore, it is our opinion, ductile iron pipe can be used for utilities provided they are bearing and bedded in on-site alluvial gravels or imported sandy gravels. Lean clay alluvium should not be used as backfill directly around ductile iron pipe utilities. Another option is to use non-corrosive materials for utilities. We recommend using crushed gravel road base with a maximum particle size of 3/4 inch as bedding material. Soils from the trench excavations may be used as backfill above the bedding. C.8.b. Backfilling and Compaction. We recommend bedding material be thoroughly compacted around the pipes. We recommend trench backfill above the bedding be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent in landscaped areas and 95 percent beneath proposed footings, slabs, and pavements. Backfilling around and above utilities should meet the requirements of Montana Public Works Standard Specifications. C.9. Pavement C.9.a. Subgrade Preparation. After stripping the topsoil and root zone, we recommend the upper 6 inches of the resulting subgrade be scarified, moistened to a moisture content near optimum, and compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of its standard Proctor maximum dry density. Where fill is required, we recommend it be similarly moistened and compacted. If there are areas that cannot be compacted, we recommend the unstable materials be subexcavated to a depth of 2 feet and be replaced by materials that can be compacted. C.9.b. Sections. Table 6 below contains our pavement thickness recommendations for automobile, truck traffic and driveway areas. As can be seen, we have provided alternative sections for crushed base course and subbase. Table 6. Alternative Pavement Sections Thickness Alternative Automobile Areas Truck Areas Crushed Base Course Section Asphalt Surface ¾" or 1½" Crushed Base 3" 8" 3" 14" Subbase Section Asphalt Surface ¾" or 1½" Leveling Course 3" Sandy Gravel Subbase 3" 3" 8" 3" 3" 15" Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 20 C.9.c. Materials and Compaction. We recommend specifying crushed gravel base and sandy gravel subbase courses meeting the requirements of Montana Public Works Standard Specification, Fifth Edition, March 2003, Sections 02235 and 02234. We recommend the gravel base and subbase be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of its standard Proctor maximum dry density. We recommend the asphaltic concrete meet the requirements of Section 02503. We recommend the asphaltic concrete pavement be compacted to an average density of 93 percent or greater of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D 2041 (Rice’s) and no individual sample shall be less than 92 percent. C.10. Concrete We recommend using cement meeting the requirements of ASTM C 150 Type II to provide moderate resistance to sulfate attack. We recommend specifying 5 to 7 percent entrained air for exposed concrete to provide resistance to freeze-thaw deterioration. We recommend using a water-cement ratio of 0.50 or less for exposed concrete and a water-cement ratio of 0.45 or less for concrete exposed to deicers. D. Construction D.1. Excavation and Dewatering It is our opinion the soils encountered by the borings can be excavated with a backhoe, front-end loader or scraper. The borings indicate the native lean clay soils to a depth not exceeding 4 feet in the sidewalls of excavations will be Type A soils under Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) guidelines. All alluvial gravels and clays below 4 feet and all existing fill should be considered Type C soils. All earthwork and construction should be performed in accordance with OSHA guidelines. Several of the structures will extend below groundwater. We recommend groundwater be lowered prior to excavation. The groundwater should be lowered to a minimum depth of 2 feet below the anticipated excavation or subexcavation bottom. Due to the depths of the excavations, we anticipate a series of dewatering wells will be required to lower the groundwater. The actual number and location of wells and specific methods will need to be determined by the contractor based on their past experience and available equipment. It is our opinion that dewatering by installing sumps and pumps in the bottoms of excavations will not be feasible. As previously indicated in Section C.2, shoring and/or underpinning may be required for several of the deeper structures adjacent to existing structures. Our general guidelines for shoring and underpinning requirements are indicated on the figures included in the Appendix of this report. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 21 D.2. Observations We recommend footing, slab, tank pad, and pavement subgrades be observed by a geotechnical engineer or an engineering technician working under the direction of a geotechnical engineer to see if the subgrade soils are similar to those encountered by the borings. The removal of existing fill from beneath proposed shallow structure footings and slabs should also be observed. During excavations for footings and mats, we recommend tests be conducted on the subgrades to evaluate the bearing capacity, as recommended in this report, is present. Typical instruments used for these tests include hand augers, penetrometers, and sample tubes. For the deeper structures, these subgrade observations are particularly important to check for the presence of the deeper layer of lean clay alluvium. Subgrade observations are particularly important for the Primary Effluent Pump Station (204), BNMR Bioreactors (303/304), Secondary Clarifiers (602), and Digester Building No. 2 (1100). It may be necessary to excavate some shallow test holes, preferably outside the structure footprint, to check for the presence of lean clay alluvium beneath these structures. D.3. Moisture Conditioning Site soils that will be excavated above a depth of 6 feet and reused as backfills and fills appeared to be below optimum moisture content. We anticipate it will be necessary to add moisture to these soils to achieve a moisture content near or slightly above optimum. Below 6 feet, site soils appear to be wet and waterbearing. It will likely be necessary to spread these soils out and allow them to dry in order to achieve a moisture content near or slightly above optimum. It should also be anticipated that imported fill and backfill materials will be below optimum moisture content and additional moisture will be necessary to achieve a moisture content near or slightly above optimum. D.4. Subgrade Disturbance The borings indicated the surficial subgrade will be lean clay after the organic clay topsoil has been stripped. These fine-grained soils are considered to be moisture sensitive and are easily disturbed when wet. We therefore recommend good drainage of surface water be provided during construction to help avoid ponding areas and to drain surface water away from the exposed clay subgrades and any open excavations. Ponding water will result in saturation of the lean clays, creating soft spots. Construction traffic driving across these soft spots can create large ruts and excessively disturb the areas. It is then very difficult to recompact these areas to specification, and they can result in construction delays and change orders. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 22 D.5. Testing We recommend density tests of fills and backfills placed beneath footings, slabs, and pavements. Density tests should also be performed on foundation wall backfill. We also recommend density testing of the compacted pavement subgrade and gravel base course. We recommend slump, temperature, air content, and strength tests on Portland cement concrete. Samples of proposed backfill and fill materials should be submitted to our testing laboratory at least three days prior to placement on the site for evaluation and determination of their optimum moisture contents and maximum dry densities. We recommend density testing of the asphaltic concrete pavement (cores and nuclear density gauge). The maximum density of the asphaltic concrete mix should be determined by ASTM D 2041 (Rice). We also recommend Marshall tests of the asphalt mix to evaluate strength and air voids. D.6. Cold Weather Construction If site grading and construction is anticipated during cold weather, we recommend good winter construction practices be observed. All snow and ice should be removed from cut and fill areas prior to additional grading. No fill should be placed on soils that have frozen or contain frozen material. No frozen soils should be used as fill. Concrete delivered to the site should meet the temperature requirements of ASTM C 94. Concrete should not be placed on frozen soils or soils that contain frozen material. Concrete should be protected from freezing until the necessary strength is attained. Frost should not be permitted to penetrate below footings bearing on frost-susceptible soil since such freezing could heave and crack the footings and/or foundation walls. E. Procedures E.1. Drilling and Sampling The penetration test borings were performed on May 29 through June 5, 2007, with a truck-mounted core and auger drill. Sampling for the borings was conducted in accordance with ASTM D 1586, "Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils." Using this method, we advanced the borehole with hollow-stem auger to the desired test depth. Then a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches drove a standard, 2-inch OD, split-barrel sampler a total penetration of 1 1/2 feet below the tip of the hollow-stem auger. The blows for the last foot of penetration were recorded and are an index of soil strength characteristics. Several attempts were made to obtain 3-inch diameter thin-walled tube samples of the lean clay alluvium. However, all of the tube samples were damaged while attempting to obtain the samples. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Morrison-Maierle, Inc. January 28, 2008 Project 07-2295 Page 23 Prior to withdrawing the hollow-stem auger from Borings ST-1P, ST-4P, and ST-9P through ST-12P, 2- inch diameter PVC pipe with a well-screen section at the bottom was placed in the borings. These piezometers will permit MMI to perform long-term monitoring of groundwater levels on the site. Several of the borings encountered very dense alluvial gravels. When the sampler could not be driven 6 inches with 50 blows of the hammer, the distance the sampler was advanced with 50 blows was recorded. When this situation occurred during the first 6 inches of the drive, it was noted as occurring within the "set." E.2. Soil Classification The drill crew chief visually and manually classified the soils encountered in the borings in accordance with ASTM D 2488, "Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedures)." A summary of the ASTM classification system is attached. All samples were then returned to our laboratory for review of the field classifications by a geotechnical engineer. Representative samples will remain in our office for a period of 60 days to be available for your examination. E.3. Groundwater Observations About 10 minutes after taking the final sample in the bottom of a boring, the driller probed through the hollow-stem auger to check for the presence of groundwater. Immediately after withdrawal of the auger, the driller again probed the depth to water or cave-in. The boring was then backfilled. F. General Recommendations F.1. Basis of Recommendations The analyses and recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the data obtained from the soil borings performed at the locations indicated on the attached sketch. Often, variations occur between these borings, the nature and extent of which do not become evident until additional exploration or construction is conducted. A reevaluation of the recommendations in this report should be made after performing on-site observations during construction to note the characteristics of any variations. The variations may result in additional foundation costs, and it is suggested a contingency be provided for this purpose. It is recommended we be retained to perform the observation and testing program for the site preparation phase of this project. This will allow correlation of the soil conditions encountered during construction to the soil borings, and will provide continuity of professional responsibility. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Appendix Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Drawn by: Date Project: 07-2295 Scale: See inset FIGURE SITE LOCATION SKETCH Geotechnical Evaluation Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana Sheet of SITE North Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Descriptive Terminology Standard D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) Soil Classification Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests A Group Symbol Group Name B CU ≥ 4 and 1 ≤ CC ≤ 3 E GW Well graded gravel F Clean Gravels Less than 5% fines C CU < 4 and/or 1 > CC > 3 E GP Poorly graded gravel F Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel F, G, H Gravels More than 50% of coarse fraction retained on No. 4 sieve Gravels with Fines More than 12% fines C Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravel F, G, H CU ≥ 6 and 1 ≤ CC ≤ 3 E SW Well graded sand I Clean Sands Less than 5% fines D CU < 6 and/or 1 > CC > 3 E SP Poorly graded sand I Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand G, H, I Coarse- Grained Soils More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve Sands 50% or more of coarse fraction passes No. 4 sieve Sands with Fines More than 12% fines D Fines classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand G, H, I PI > 7 and plots on or above "A" line J CL Lean clay K, L, M Inorganic PI < 4 or plots below "A" line J ML Silt K, L, M Silts and Clays Liquid Limit less than 50 Organic Liquid limit – oven dried < 0.75 Liquid limit – not dried OL Organic clay K, L, M, N Organic silt K, L, M, O PI plots on or above "A" line CH Fat clay K, L, M Inorganic PI plots below "A" line MH Elastic siltK, L, M Fine- Grained Soils 50% or more passes the No. 200 sieve Silts and Clays Liquid limit 50 or more Organic Liquid limit – oven dried < 0.75 Liquid limit – not dried OH Organic clayK, L, M, P Organic siltK, L, M, Q Highly Organic Soils Primarily organic matter, dark in color, and organic odor PT Peat A B C D E F G Based on the material passing the 3" (75 mm) sieve. If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add "with cobbles or boulders, or both" to group name. Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols GW-GM well-graded gravel with silt GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay GP-GM poorly graded gravel with silt GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay Sands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols. SW-SC well-graded sand with clay SP-SM poorly graded sand with silt SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay CU = D50 / D10 CC = (D30)2 / (D10 x D50) If soil contains ≥ 15% sand, add "with sand" to group name. If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM or SC-SM. H I J K L M N O P Q If fines are organic, add "with organic fines" to group name. If soil contains ≥ 15% gravel, add "with gravel" to group name. If Atterberg limits plot in hatched area, soil is a CL-ML, silty clay. If soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add "with sand" or "with gravel", whichever is predominant. If soil contains ≥ 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add "sandy" to group name. If soil contains ≥ 30% plus No. 200 predominantly gravel, add "gravelly" to group name. PI ≥ 4 and plots on or above "A" line. PI < 4 or plots below "A" line. PI plots on or above "A" line. PI plots below "A" line. Particle Size Identification Boulders...................................over 12" Cobbles...................................3" to 12" Gravel coarse...................................3/4" to 3" fine..................................No. 4 to 3/4" Sand coarse......................... No. 4 to No. 10 medium.................... No. 10 to No. 40 fine......................... No. 40 to No. 200 Silt.........................No. 200 to .005 mm Clay ........................less than .005 mm Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils very loose ............................0 to 4 BPF loose...................................5 to 10 BPF medium dense..................11 to 30 BPF dense................................31 to 50 BPF very dense.........................over 50 BPF Consistency of Cohesive Soils very soft...............................0 to 1 BPF soft.......................................2 to 3 BPF rather soft.............................4 to 5 BPF medium................................6 to 8 BPF rather stiff..........................9 to 12 BPF stiff...................................13 to 16 BPF very stiff ..........................17 to 30 BPF hard...................................over 30 BPF Moisture Content (MC) Description rather dry MC less than 5%, absence of moisture, dusty moist MC below optimum, but no visible water wet MC over optimum, visible free water, typically below water table saturated Clay soils were MC over optimum Drilling Notes Standard penetration test borings were advanced by 3¼" or 4¼" ID hollow-stem augers, unless noted otherwise. Standard penetration test borings are designated by the prefix "ST" (split tube). Hand auger borings were advanced manually with a 2 to 3" diameter auger to the depths indicated. Hand auger borings are indicated by the prefix "HA." Sampling. All samples were taken with the standard 2" OD split-tube sampler, except where noted. TW indicates thin-walled tube sample. CS indicates California tube sample. BPF. Numbers indicate blows per foot recorded in standard penetration test, also known as "N" value. The sampler was set 6" into undisturbed soil below the hollow-stem auger. Driving resistances were then counted for second and third 6" increments and added to get BPF. Where they differed significantly, they were separated by backslash (/). In very dense/hard strata, the depth driven in 50 blows is indicated. WH. WH indicates the sampler penetrated soil under weight of hammer and rods alone; driving not required. Note. All tests were run in general accordance with applicable ASTM standards. Laboratory Tests DD Dry density, pcf OC Organic content, % WD Wet density, pcf P200 % passing 200 sieve LL Liquid limit PL Plastic limit PI Plasticity index MC Natural moisture content, % qu Unconfined compressive strength, psf qp Pocket penetrometer strength, tsf Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 OL CL GPGM GP GC SC 1.5 2.5 8.5 29.0 30.5 MC = 22.0% MC = 22.2% MC = 2.3% MC = 3.6% MC = 5.2% MC = 5.8% MC = 11.1% *qp=pocket penetrometer estimate of unconfinedcompressive strength, tons per square foot. MC = 7.8% An open triangle in the water level (WL) column indicates thedepth at which groundwater was first observed while drilling. MC = 10.8% Ground surface elevations at the borings provided byMorrison-Maierle, Inc. MC = 18.9% **in the ground. 30'deep piezometerinstalled in boring. 6 2/5 33 80 41 52 35 75 44 82 ORGANIC CLAY with SAND, low plasticity, trace roots and Gravel, dark brown to black, wet, medium. (Topsoil) LEAN CLAY with SAND, low to medium plasticity, trace roots, dark brown, wet, rather soft. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, light brown, moist, dense to very dense. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, slightly plastic to low plasticity, brown to dark brown, moist to waterbearing at 12.9', dense to very dense. (Alluvium) CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL, low to medium plasticity, tan, waterbearing, very dense. (Tertiary Sediments) END OF BORING Water down 12.9' with 14' of hollow-stem auger** 4607.7 4606.7 4600.7 4580.2 4578.7 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-1P page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon SCALE:5/29/07 1" = 4' qp*Elev. See attached sketch. 0.0 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 4609.2 ST-1P QP* NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 *Water down 13.2' with 14' of hollow-stemauger in the ground. 3/3 7 50-5" 50-6" 50 50 19 34 50-5", set 42/50-3" 1 1¼ ORGANIC CLAY with SAND, low plasticity, black, moist, medium. (Topsoil) LEAN CLAY, medium plasticity, trace roots, dark brown, moist, medium. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, trace Cobbles, brown, moist to waterbearing at 13.2', very dense. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, slightly plastic to low plasticity, trace Cobbles, dark brown, waterbearing, dense to very dense. (Alluvium) -trace lenses of saturated lean clay below 24'. CLAYEY GRAVEL with SAND, low to medium plasticity, light brown, waterbearing, very dense. (Tertiary Sediments) END OF BORING* 4606.3 4604.3 4593.8 4577.8 4577.0 OL CL GP GM GPGC GC 1.0 3.0 13.5 29.5 30.3 SCALE:5/30/07 1" = 4' 0.0 Elev. See attached sketch. PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-2 page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: qp 4607.3 ST-2 QP NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 MC = 4.2% MC = 3.8% MC = 7.0% MC = 5.8% MC = 10.9% MC = 8.3% MC = 17.8% 10 4/6 30/50-3" 59 36 28/50-5" 12/6 65 50-4", set 50-4", set MC = 16.7% MC = 18.8%1 ORGANIC CLAY with SAND, low to medium plasticity, black, moist, rather stiff. (Topsoil) LEAN CLAY, medium plasticity, trace Gravel (volcanic particles), brown, moist. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, trace Cobbles, grayish brown, moist, dense to very dense. (Alluvium) -trace Clay below 9'. POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, slightly plastic, trace Cobbles, dark brown, waterbearing at 13.5', medium dense to very dense. (Alluvium) CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL, fine- to coarse-grained, low plasticity, trace Cobbles, tan, waterbearing, very dense. (Tertiary Sediments) END OF BORING Water down 13.5' with 14' of hollow-stem auger in the ground. 4603.7 4603.2 4592.2 4577.7 4576.4 OL CL GP GM GP GC SC 2.0 2.5 13.5 28.0 29.3 SCALE:5/30/07 1" = 4' 0.0 Elev. See attached sketch. PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-3 page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: qp 4605.7 ST-3 QP NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 ½ 3¼ FILL: Clayey Gravel with Sand, low plasticity, dark brown, moist, medium dense. ORGANIC CLAY with SAND, low plasticity, dark brown, moist, rather stiff. (Topsoil) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, trace Cobbles, grayish brown, rather dry to moist, very dense. (Alluvium) SANDY LEAN CLAY, low plasticity, trace Gravel, brown, wet, rather stiff. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, slightly plastic to low plasticity, trace Cobbles, dark brown, waterbearing at 13.6', medium dense to very dense. (Alluvium) SANDY LEAN CLAY, low to medium plasticity, light brown, moist, very stiff. (Tertiary Sediments) END OF BORING* *Water down 13.6' with 14' of hollow-stem auger in the ground.30'deep piezometer installed in boring. 28 6/20 86 84 48 11 24 50-5", set 42 34/17 4603.9 4602.9 4594.4 4592.4 4575.4 4574.9 OL GP GM CL GPGC CL 1.5 2.5 11.0 13.0 30.0 30.5 SCALE:6/4/07 1" = 4' 0.0 Elev. See attached sketch. PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-4P page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: qp 4605.4 ST-4P QP NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Elev. See attached sketch. PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-5 page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon *in the ground. 2/5 10/11 44/50-4" 83 41 37 16 28 50-6" 69 ORGANIC CLAY with SAND, low plasticity, trace roots, dark brown, moist, rather soft. (Topsoil) LEAN CLAY with SAND, low plasticity, trace salts and pinholes, light olive brown, rather dry, rather stiff to very stiff. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, trace Cobbles, gray, rather dry to waterbearing at 11.4', rather dense to dense. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, slightly plastic, dark brown, waterbearing, medium dense to very dense. (Alluvium) -trace Cobbles below 24'. CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL, fine- to coarse-grained, low plasticity, tan and pink, waterbearing, very dense. (Tertiary Sediments) END OF BORING Water down 11.4' with 14' of hollow-stem auger* 4604.2 4602.7 4591.7 4576.7 4574.7 OL CL GP GM GP GC SC 1.0 2.5 13.5 28.5 30.5 SCALE:5/31/07 1" = 4' 0.0 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: qp 4605.2 ST-5 QP NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 *in the ground. 1/6 16 86 54 56 9/6 25 44 70 56 ½ ORGANIC CLAY with SAND, low plasticity, trace roots, dark brown, moist, soft. (Topsoil) LEAN CLAY with SAND, low plasticity, trace salts and pinholes, light brown, rather dry, rather stiff to stiff. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, trace Cobbles, gray, rather dry, very dense. (Alluvium) SILTY CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL, slightly plastic, grayish brown, moist, medium dense. (Alluvium) SANDY LEAN CLAY, low plasticity, dark brown, wet, medium. (Alluvium) CLAYEY GRAVEL with SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, low plasticity, dark brown, waterbearing at 15', medium dense. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, slightly plastic to low plasticity, dark brown, waterbearing, dense to very dense. (Alluvium) CLAYEY GRAVEL with SAND, low to medium plasticity, fine- to coarse-grained, tan, waterbearing, very dense. (Tertiary Sediments) END OF BORING Water down 15' with 14' of hollow-stem auger* 4606.4 4604.4 4596.9 4594.9 4593.4 4589.9 4580.4 4576.9 OL CL GP GM SCSM CL GC GP GC GC 1.0 3.0 10.5 12.5 14.0 17.5 27.0 30.5 SCALE:5/31/07 1" = 4' 0.0 Elev. See attached sketch. PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-6 page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: qp 4607.4 ST-6 QP NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 *in the ground. 7 1/12 93 69 46 7/3 18/7 50-3", set 15 90 ¼ ¼ ORGANIC CLAY with SAND, low to medium plasticity, some roots, dark brown and black, moist, medium to soft. (Topsoil) SANDY LEAN CLAY, low plasticity, trace roots, brown, wet, soft. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, trace Cobbles, gray to dark gray, rather dry to moist, rather dense to dense. (Alluvium) -trace Clay below 9'. LEAN CLAY, medium plasticity, olive brown, wet to waterbearing at 13.8', medium. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, slightly plastic to low plasticity, dark brown, waterbearing, medium dense to very dense. (Alluvium) SILTY CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL, fine- to coarse-grained, slightly plastic, brown, waterbearing, medium dense. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, slightly plastic to low plasticity, dark brown, waterbearing, dense. (Alluvium) CLAYEY GRAVEL with SAND, low plasticity, tan, waterbearing, very dense. (Tertiary Sediments) END OF BORING Water down 13.8' with 14' of hollow-stem auger* 4607.5 4607.0 4597.5 4595.5 4587.0 4583.5 4580.0 4579.0 OL CL GP GM CL GP GC SC SM GP GC GC 2.0 2.5 12.0 14.0 22.5 26.0 29.5 30.5 SCALE:6/4/07 1" = 4' 0.0 Elev. See attached sketch. PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-7 page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: qp 4609.5 ST-7 QP NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 MC = 19.2% MC = 12.6% LL=32, PL=23, PI=9 MC = 2.2% MC = 5.9% MC = 2.6% MC = 6.1% MC = 9.7% MC = 7.2% MC = 10.7% *in the ground. 3/6 10 57 56 78 77 62 90 32 64 4+ ORGANIC CLAY with SAND, low plasticity, black, moist, medium. (Topsoil) LEAN CLAY with SAND, low to medium plasticity, dark brown, moist, rather stiff. (Alluvium) SANDY LEAN CLAY, low plasticity, trace salts and pinholes, dark olive brown, rather dry, rather stiff. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, trace Cobbles, light gray to dark gray, rather dry to moist, very dense. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, slightly plastic to low plasticity, dark brown, moist to waterbearing at 13.8', very dense to dense. (Alluvium) END OF BORING Water down 13.8' with 14' of hollow-stem auger* 4609.6 4608.6 4607.6 4599.6 4580.1 OL CL CL GP GM GP GC 1.0 2.0 3.0 11.0 30.5 SCALE:6/5/07 1" = 4' 0.0 Elev. See attached sketch. PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-8 page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: qp 4610.6 ST-8 QP NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 2/5 13 56 50-5" 50 48 65 50-2", set 17 50-5", set 4+ ORGANIC CLAY with SAND, low to medium plasticity, some roots, black, moist, rather soft. (Topsoil) LEAN CLAY with SAND, low to medium plasticity, dark brown, moist, rather stiff. (Alluvium) SANDY LEAN CLAY, low plasticity, trace roots and pinholes, light olive brown, rather dry, rather stiff. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, trace Cobbles, light gray to dark gray, rather dry to moist, very dense to dense. (Alluvium) -waterbearing at 13.8'. POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, slightly plastic, dark brown, waterbearing, medium dense. (Alluvium) END OF BORING Water down 13.8' with 14' of hollow-stem auger in the ground. 30' deep piezometer installed in boring. 4608.9 4608.4 4606.4 4582.4 4580.5 OL CL CL GPGM GPGC 1.0 1.5 3.5 27.5 29.4 SCALE:6/5/07 1" = 4' 0.0 Elev. See attached sketch. PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-9P page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: qp 4609.9 ST-9P QP NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 MC = 20.4% MC = 10.7% MC = 5.8% MC = 3.7% MC = 3.1% MC = 10.9% MC = 18.6% LL=45, PL=18, PI=27 MC = 10.1% MC = 12.7% MC = 13.4% *in the ground. 30'deep piezometerinstalled in boring. 7 10/20 50-5" 50-6" 54 44 20 23 52 39 0 ORGANIC CLAY with SAND, medium plasticity, trace roots, dark brown and black, moist, medium. (Topsoil) LEAN CLAY with SAND, low plasticity, trace roots, salts, and pinholes, light olive brown, rather dry, very stiff. (Alluvium) SANDY LEAN CLAY with GRAVEL, low plasticity, trace roots, dark olive brown, rather dry, very stiff. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, trace Cobbles, gray to dark brown, rather dry to waterbearing at 10.7', very dense to dense. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, slightly plastic, dark brown, waterbearing, dense. (Alluvium) LEAN CLAY with GRAVEL, low plasticity, brown, waterbearing, very stiff. (Alluvium) SILTY CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL, fine- to coarse-grained, slightly plastic, brown, waterbearing, medium dense. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, slightly plastic to low plasticity, dark gray, waterbearing, very dense. (Alluvium) CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL, fine- to coarse-grained, low plasticity, tan and pink, waterbearing, dense. (Tertiary Sediments) END OF BORING Water down 10.7' with 12' of hollow-stem auger* 4604.0 4603.0 4602.0 4594.5 4592.0 4588.5 4583.0 4578.0 4575.0 OL CL CL GP GM GP GC CL SC SM GP GC SC 1.5 2.5 3.5 11.0 13.5 17.0 22.5 27.5 30.5 SCALE:5/31/07 1" = 4' 0.0 Elev. See attached sketch. PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-10P page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: qp 4605.5 ST-10P QP NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 A second boring was performed 10' west of staked location due to auger refusal at 10'. *in the ground. 30'deep piezometerinstalled in boring. 2/8 15 62 50-6" 50-1", set 35 67 30 34 39 ORGANIC CLAY with SAND, low to medium plasticity, trace roots and Gravel, dark brown, moist, rather soft. (Topsoil) LEAN CLAY with SAND, low plasticity, trace roots and pinholes, light olive brown, rather dry, stiff. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, trace Cobbles, light gray to gray, rather dry to rather moist, very dense. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, low plasticity, dark brown, waterbearing, dense to very dense. (Alluvium) CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL, low plasticity, fine- to coarse-grained, tan and brown, waterbearing, dense. (Tertiary Sediments) END OF BORING Water down 13.1' with 14' of hollow-stem auger* 4606.5 4603.5 4596.5 4578.5 4577.0 OL CL GPGM GP GC SC 1.0 4.0 11.0 29.0 30.5 SCALE:6/1/07 1" = 4' 0.0 Elev. See attached sketch. PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-11P page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: qp 4607.5 ST-11P QP NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 2/7 8/10 13 5/10 3/2 30 66 50-6" 4+ 1 ½ FILL: Organic Clay with Sand, low plasticity, trace Gravel, moist, rather soft to stiff. FILL: Organic Clay mixed with Lean Clay, low plasticity, trace Gravel, dark brown and olive brown, rather moist, medium dense to loose. CLAYEY SAND with GRAVEL, low plasticity, olive brown, moist, medium dense. (Alluvium) SANDY LEAN CLAY with GRAVEL, low plasticity, olive brown, wet, medium. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED SAND, fine- to coarse-grained, brown, moist, very loose. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with SILT and SAND, slightly plastic, trace Cobbles, wet to waterbearing at 13.6', very dense. (Alluvium) POORLY GRADED GRAVEL with CLAY and SAND, slightly plastic, trace Cobbles, waterbearing, very dense. (Alluvium) -some Boulders below 19'. END OF BORING - Auger Refusal Water down 13.6' with 14' of hollow-stem auger in the ground. 30' deep piezometer installed in boring. 4607.6 4602.1 4600.6 4599.6 4597.6 4595.6 4586.1 SC CL SP GP GM GP GC 2.0 7.5 9.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 23.5 SCALE:6/5/07 1" = 4' 0.0 Elev. See attached sketch. PROJECT:07-2295 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Wastewater Treatment Plant Expansion Bozeman, Montana BPF LOCATION: ST-12P page 1 of 1 L O G O F B O R I N G Description of Materials 07-2295 WL METHOD: 3 1/4" HSA, AutomaticDRILLED BY: J. Falcon 2611 Gabel Road P. O. Box 80190 Billings, MT 59108-0190 Phone: 406.652.3930Fax: 406.652.3944 RemarksSymbol BORING: Depth DATE: qp 4609.6 ST-12P QP NEW LOGO 2295.GPJ LAGNNN06.GDT 1/28/08Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 CommentaryStatic lateral earth pressures are indicated in these figures for the At-Rest condition.Earthquake conditions are indicated in Project: Waste Water Treatment Plant Expansionin these figures as the Active/Eq condition. Bozeman, MontanaWe used the Mononobe-Okabe approach which 07-2295is based on the active case plus a horizontal Date: December 21, 2007 ground acceleration. Page: 1 of 2Lateral Earth Pressures: Structures 8' to 15' Deep0510150 500 1000 1500Pressure (psf)Depth (ft)At-RestActive/EqLateral Earth Pressures: Structures 15' to 20' Deep051015200 500 1000 1500 2000Pressure (psf)Depth (ft)At-RestActive/EqDocusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 CommentaryStatic lateral earth pressures are indicated in these figures for the At-Rest condition.Earthquake conditions are indicated in Project: Waste Water Treatment Plant Expansionin these figures as the Active/Eq condition. Bozeman, MontanaWe used the Mononobe-Okabe approach which 07-2295is based on the active case plus a horizontal Date: December 21, 2007 ground acceleration. Page: 2 of 2Lateral Earth Pressures: Structures 20' to 26' Deep05101520250 500 1000 1500 2000 2500Pressure (psf)Depth (ft)At-RestActive/EqLateral Earth Pressures: All Structures05101520250 500 1000 1500 2000 2500Pressure (psf)Depth (ft)At-RestActive/EqDocusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 This page intentionally left blank. Docusign Envelope ID: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Certificate Of Completion Envelope Id: 6954FDFB-8F86-862E-8330-909B743BA3C1 Status: Completed Subject: Complete with Docusign: Bozeman WRF Solar Project Manual.pdf Source Envelope: Document Pages: 600 Signatures: 5 Envelope Originator: Certificate Pages: 4 Initials: 0 Mike Maas AutoNav: Enabled EnvelopeId Stamping: Enabled Time Zone: (UTC-07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada) Stamps: 1 PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771 mike.maas@bozemanmt.gov IP Address: 155.190.3.7 Record Tracking Status: Original 9/4/2026 1:55:32 PM Holder: Mike Maas mike.maas@bozemanmt.gov Location: DocuSign Security Appliance Status: Connected Pool: StateLocal Signer Events Signature Timestamp Mike Maas mike.maas@bozemanmt.gov City Clerk City of Bozeman Security Level: Email, Account Authentication (None) Signature Adoption: Pre-selected Style Using IP Address: 155.190.3.7 Sent: 9/4/2026 1:59:35 PM Viewed: 9/4/2026 1:59:51 PM Signed: 9/4/2026 2:00:13 PM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Not Offered via Docusign Orion Thornton orion@onsiteenergyinc.com Owner/Partner Security Level: Email, Account Authentication (None)Signature Adoption: Pre-selected Style Using IP Address: 2600:6c67:9df0:aac0:74d6:6b5a:5827:c9c4 Sent: 9/4/2026 2:00:20 PM Viewed: 9/8/2026 2:06:56 PM Signed: 9/8/2026 2:51:24 PM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Accepted: 9/8/2026 2:06:56 PM ID: 473ecf48-ef27-4f83-bdaf-dff2205bc8a6 Greg Sullivan greg.sullivan@bozemanmt.gov City of Bozeman Security Level: Email, Account Authentication (None)Signature Adoption: Pre-selected Style Using IP Address: 155.190.3.6 Sent: 9/8/2026 2:51:30 PM Viewed: 9/14/2026 1:30:29 PM Signed: 9/14/2026 1:30:38 PM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Accepted: 9/14/2026 1:30:29 PM ID: 8cf59b6e-46e9-4184-90e2-50ebff1ee2f4 Signer Events Signature Timestamp Jon Henderson jon.henderson@bozemanmt.gov Assistant City Manager City of Bozeman Security Level: Email, Account Authentication (None) Signature Adoption: Pre-selected Style Using IP Address: 155.190.9.6 Sent: 9/14/2026 1:30:44 PM Resent: 9/23/2026 1:05:52 PM Viewed: 9/23/2026 1:50:00 PM Signed: 9/23/2026 1:50:11 PM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Accepted: 2/4/2026 10:57:30 AM ID: f4b2a38b-ffb2-486e-af4f-e3c76ba69b5e In Person Signer Events Signature Timestamp Editor Delivery Events Status Timestamp Agent Delivery Events Status Timestamp Intermediary Delivery Events Status Timestamp Certified Delivery Events Status Timestamp Carbon Copy Events Status Timestamp Brian Heaston brian.heaston@bozemanmt.gov Engineer III Security Level: Email, Account Authentication (None) Sent: 9/4/2026 1:59:33 PM Viewed: 9/8/2026 1:04:55 PM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Not Offered via Docusign Michelle Chapel michelle.chapel@bozemanmt.gov Records Coordinator City Bozeman Security Level: Email, Account Authentication (None) Sent: 9/4/2026 1:59:34 PM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Not Offered via Docusign Witness Events Signature Timestamp Notary Events Signature Timestamp Envelope Summary Events Status Timestamps Envelope Sent Hashed/Encrypted 9/4/2026 1:59:33 PM Envelope Updated Security Checked 9/23/2026 1:05:51 PM Envelope Updated Security Checked 9/23/2026 1:05:51 PM Envelope Updated Security Checked 9/23/2026 1:05:51 PM Certified Delivered Security Checked 9/23/2026 1:50:00 PM Signing Complete Security Checked 9/23/2026 1:50:11 PM Completed Security Checked 9/23/2026 1:50:11 PM Payment Events Status Timestamps Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure ELECTRONIC RECORD AND SIGNATURE DISCLOSURE From time to time, City of Bozeman (we, us or Company) may be required by law to provide to you certain written notices or disclosures. Described below are the terms and conditions for providing to you such notices and disclosures electronically through the DocuSign system. Please read the information below carefully and thoroughly, and if you can access this information electronically to your satisfaction and agree to this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure (ERSD), please confirm your agreement by selecting the check-box next to ‘I agree to use electronic records and signatures’ before clicking ‘CONTINUE’ within the DocuSign system. Getting paper copies At any time, you may request from us a paper copy of any record provided or made available electronically to you by us. You will have the ability to download and print documents we send to you through the DocuSign system during and immediately after the signing session and, if you elect to create a DocuSign account, you may access the documents for a limited period of time (usually 30 days) after such documents are first sent to you. After such time, if you wish for us to send you paper copies of any such documents from our office to you, you will be charged a $0.00 per-page fee. You may request delivery of such paper copies from us by following the procedure described below. Withdrawing your consent If you decide to receive notices and disclosures from us electronically, you may at any time change your mind and tell us that thereafter you want to receive required notices and disclosures only in paper format. How you must inform us of your decision to receive future notices and disclosure in paper format and withdraw your consent to receive notices and disclosures electronically is described below. Consequences of changing your mind If you elect to receive required notices and disclosures only in paper format, it will slow the speed at which we can complete certain steps in transactions with you and delivering services to you because we will need first to send the required notices or disclosures to you in paper format, and then wait until we receive back from you your acknowledgment of your receipt of such paper notices or disclosures. Further, you will no longer be able to use the DocuSign system to receive required notices and consents electronically from us or to sign electronically documents from us. All notices and disclosures will be sent to you electronically Unless you tell us otherwise in accordance with the procedures described herein, we will provide electronically to you through the DocuSign system all required notices, disclosures, authorizations, acknowledgements, and other documents that are required to be provided or made available to you during the course of our relationship with you. To reduce the chance of you inadvertently not receiving any notice or disclosure, we prefer to provide all of the required notices and disclosures to you by the same method and to the same address that you have given us. Thus, you can receive all the disclosures and notices electronically or in paper format through the paper mail delivery system. If you do not agree with this process, please let us know as described below. Please also see the paragraph immediately above that describes the consequences of your electing not to receive delivery of the notices and disclosures electronically from us. How to contact City of Bozeman: You may contact us to let us know of your changes as to how we may contact you electronically, to request paper copies of certain information from us, and to withdraw your prior consent to receive notices and disclosures electronically as follows: To contact us by email send messages to: information@bozeman.net To advise City of Bozeman of your new email address To let us know of a change in your email address where we should send notices and disclosures electronically to you, you must send an email message to us at information@bozeman.net and in the body of such request you must state: your Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure created on: 1/16/2026 3:06:06 PM Parties agreed to: Orion Thornton, Greg Sullivan, Jon Henderson previous email address, your new email address. We do not require any other information from you to change your email address. If you created a DocuSign account, you may update it with your new email address through your account preferences. To request paper copies from City of Bozeman To request delivery from us of paper copies of the notices and disclosures previously provided by us to you electronically, you must send us an email to information@bozeman.net and in the body of such request you must state your email address, full name, mailing address, and telephone number. We will bill you for any fees at that time, if any. To withdraw your consent with City of Bozeman To inform us that you no longer wish to receive future notices and disclosures in electronic format you may: i. decline to sign a document from within your signing session, and on the subsequent page, select the check-box indicating you wish to withdraw your consent, or you may; ii. send us an email to information@bozeman.net and in the body of such request you must state your email, full name, mailing address, and telephone number. We do not need any other information from you to withdraw consent.. The consequences of your withdrawing consent for online documents will be that transactions may take a longer time to process.. Required hardware and software The minimum system requirements for using the DocuSign system may change over time. The current system requirements are found here: https://support.docusign.com/guides/signer-guide-signing-system-requirements. Acknowledging your access and consent to receive and sign documents electronically To confirm to us that you can access this information electronically, which will be similar to other electronic notices and disclosures that we will provide to you, please confirm that you have read this ERSD, and (i) that you are able to print on paper or electronically save this ERSD for your future reference and access; or (ii) that you are able to email this ERSD to an email address where you will be able to print on paper or save it for your future reference and access. Further, if you consent to receiving notices and disclosures exclusively in electronic format as described herein, then select the check- box next to ‘I agree to use electronic records and signatures’ before clicking ‘CONTINUE’ within the DocuSign system. By selecting the check-box next to ‘I agree to use electronic records and signatures’, you confirm that: You can access and read this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure; and You can print on paper this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure, or save or send this Electronic Record and Disclosure to a location where you can print it, for future reference and access; and Until or unless you notify City of Bozeman as described above, you consent to receive exclusively through electronic means all notices, disclosures, authorizations, acknowledgements, and other documents that are required to be provided or made available to you by City of Bozeman during the course of your relationship with City of Bozeman.